MEPTech

PART – I TECHNICAL BID

Indian Institute Of Technology, Bombay (Maharashtra)

TENDER DOCUMENT

For

Construction of Guest House No. 3 inside the campus of IIT Bombay, Powai, Mumbai – 400 076

Volume – 2 : Technical Specifications

C – MEP WORKS

Tender Number:

________________________2013

203-204 | Prabhadevi Industrial Estate |

Veer Savarkar Marg | Prabhadevi |

Mumbai 400 025 | India

INDIAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY BOMBAY CONSTRUCTION OF GUEST HOUSE NO. 3 INSIDE I.I.T. CAMPUS

TENDER DOCUMENT – VOLUME 2 OF 3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SIGNATURE & SEAL OF TENDERER

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

VOLUME – 2

CONTENTS

SR. NO. PARTICULARS PAGE NO.

1. GENERAL NOTE 1

2. LIST OF BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS CODES

a. Electrical 3

b. Plumbing Health Works 5

c. Fire Fighting & Fire Protection 13

3. SECTION B: ELECTRICAL WORK 15

4. SECTION C: ELEVATOR 91

5. SECTION D: DUMBWAITER 109

6. SECTION E: PLUMBING & FIRE FIGHTING WORK 118

7. SECTION F: IBMS WORK (BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM, FIRE ALARM SYSTEM, PUBLIC ADRESS SYSTEM & CCTV)

230

8. SECTION G: HVAC WORK 363

9. APPENDIX “A” - LIST OF APPROVED MAKE OF MATERIALS

a. Electrical 534

b. Public health 539

c. Fire Fighting 543

d. HVAC work 545

e. IBMS work 556

10. APPENDIX “B” - THEORETICAL STANDARD REQUIREMENT OF CEMENT

FOR PUBLIC HEALTH WORKS 565

11. SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA 580


TENDER DOCUMENT – VOLUME 2 OF 3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

1 SIGNATURE & SEAL OF TENDERER

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL

i. The detailed specifications given hereinafter are for the items of works described in the schedule of

quantities attached herein & shall be guidance for proper execution of work to the required standards.

ii. It may also be noted that the specification are of generalized nature & these shall be read in conjunction

with the description of item in schedule of quantities & drawings. The work also includes all minor

details of construction which are obviously & fairly intended & which may not have been referred to in

these documents but are essential for the entire completion in accordance with standard Engineering

practice.

iii. Unless specifically otherwise mentioned, all the applicable codes & standards published by the Indian

standard Institution & all other standard which may be published by them before the date of receipt of

tenders, shall govern in all respects of dosing workmanship quality & propitious of materials & methods

of testing, method of measurements etc. Wherever any reference to any Indian Standard specifications

occurs in the documents relating to this contract, the same shall be inclusive of all amendments issued

to or revisions thereof, if any, up to the date of receipt of tenders.

iv. In case there is no I.S.I specification for the particular work, such work shall be carried out in

accordance with the instructions in all respects, & requirements of the Engineers-in-Charge. Wherever

any reference to any Indian standard specification occurs in the documents relating to this contract, the

same shall be inclusive of all amendment issued there to or revisions thereof, if any, up to the date of

receipt of tenders.

v. The work shall be carried out in a manner complying in all respects with the requirements of relevant

bye-laws of the Municipal Committee/Municipal Corporation/Development Authority/Improvement Trust

under the jurisdiction of which the work is to be executed or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and,

unless otherwise mentioned, nothing extra shall be paid on this account.

vi. Samples of various materials, fitting etc. proposed to be incorporated in the work shall be submitted by

the contractor for approval of the Engineers-in-Charge before order for bulk supply is placed.

vii. The contractor shall take instructions from the Engineer-in-Charge regarding collection and stacking of

materials in any place. No excavated earth or building materials shall be stacked on areas where other

buildings, roads, services, compound walls etc. are to be constructed.

viii. The contractor shall maintain in perfect condition all works executed till the completion of the entire work

allotted to him. Where phased delivery is contemplated, this provision shall apply to each Phase.

ix. The contractor shall give a performance test of the entire installation(s) as per standard specifications

before the work is finally accepted & nothing extra whatsoever shall be payable to the contractor for the

test.

x. The contractor shall clear the site thoroughly of all scaffolding materials & rubbish etc. left out of his

work & dress the site around the building to the satisfactions & his decision in writing shall be final &

binding on all concerned.




xi. Post construction inspection and testing: After completion of the work and during maintenance

period liability of the contractor, the work shall also be subjected to 'Post construction inspection and

testing'. In case the materials or articles incorporated in the work are found to be inferior, though the

sample collected for the same might have been passed at the time of execution, it shall be the

responsibility of the contractor to replace the same at his own cost, failing which the Department may

rectify the same at the risk and cost of the contractor or Department may accept the work as sub-

standard, and cost be adjusted from the outstanding security deposit, as per the terms and conditions of

the contract for the work.

xii. The Dean (I.P.S.), shall be the sole deciding authority as to the meaning, interpretations and

implications for various provisions of the specifications and his decision in writing shall be final and

binding on all concerned.

xiii. In case any different or discrepancy between the specification & the description in the schedule of

quantities, the schedule of quantities shall take precedence. In case of any difference or discrepancy

between specification & drawing, the specification shall take precedence.




II – LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS::

Following are the various pertinent Indian Standards, relevant to buildings work :

(All Latest Versions of I.S. codes shall be referred)

I . S. CODE NO. S U B J E C T

SECTION “B” – ELECTRICAL WORKS

IS : 374 Ceiling fans and regulators (3rd revision)

IS : 694 PVC insulated Electric cable for working voltage upto and including 1100 volts.

IS : 732 Code of practice for electrical wiring and installation

IS : 1255 Code of Practice for installation and maintenance of Power Cables upto and including 33 KV rating (Second Revision)

IS : 1258 Bayonet lamp holders(Third revision)

IS : 1293 Three pin plugs and sockets outlets rated voltage upto and including 250 volts and rated current upto and including 160 amps.

IS : 1554 ( Part - I )

PVC insulated ( Heavy Duty) electric cables for working voltages upto and including 1100 volts.

IS : 1646 Electrical installation fire safety of buildings (general) Code of practice.

IS : 1885 Glossary of items for electrical cables and conductors

IS : 1913 General and safety requirements for fluorescent lamps luminaries Tubular.

IS : 2026 - Part (I to IV )

Power Transformers/ Dry Type Transformers

IS : 2071 Methods of high voltage testing

IS : 2309 Protection of building and allied structures against lightning

IS : 2551- Danger notice plate.

IS : 3043 Code of practice for earthing.

IS : 3427 AC Metal enclosed switch gear and control gear for rated voltages above 1 KV and upto and including 52 KV.

IS : 3480 Flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring.

IS : 3837 Accessories for rigid steel conduit for electrical wiring.

IS : 4146 Application guide for voltage transformers

IS : 4615 Switch socket outlets.

IS : 5133 (Part -I) Boxes for the enclosure of electrical accessories.

IS : 5216 (Part-I) Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical work.

IS : 5424 Rubber mats for electrical purposes.

IS : 5578 & 11353 Marking and arrangement of bus bars





IS : 7098 - (Part - II) Cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables. For working voltages from 3.3 KV upto and including 33 KV

IS : 8130 Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords

IS : 8623 - (Part -I) Factory built assemblies of switchgear and control gear for voltages upto and including 1000 V AC and 1200 V D C.

IS : 8623 - (Part -II) Bus Bar trunking system

IS : 8828 Miniature Circuit Breakers

IS : 9537 Rigid Steel Conduits for electrical wiring (Second Revisions)

IS : 10810 Methods of test for cables.

IS : 12640 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers

IS : 13947 (Part-II) Air Circuit Breakers

IS : 13947 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers

IS : 13947 Degree of protection provided by enclosures for LV switchgear and control gear.

IS : 13947 General requirement for switchgear and control gear for voltage not exceeding 1000 Volts.

IS : 15652 Insulating materials for electrical purposes.

IS : 1651 & 1652 Stationary cells and batteries lead acid type.




I . S. CODE NO. Reaffirmation Subject

SECTION “C” – PUBLIC HEALTH WORKS

27 -1992 Reaffirmed 2002 Specifications for Pig Lead

269-1989 Reaffirmed 2004 Specifications for 33 grade Ordinary Portland Cement

407-1981 Reaffirmed 2001 Brass tubes for General purposes

456-2000 - Code of practice for Plain & Reinforced concrete.

458-2003 - Specifications for Concrete Pipes.

554-1999 - Dimensions for pipe thread where pressure tight joints are

required.

636-1988 Reaffirmed 2003 Fire fighting hose ,rubber lined or fabric reinforced rubber

lined woven –jacketed

638-1979 Reaffirmed 2003 Sheet rubber jointing & rubber insertion jointing

651-1992 Reaffirmed 2003 Specifications for Salt glazed stoneware pipes & fittings.

771 (Pt. I &VII) Glazed Fire Clay Sanitary Appliances.

771-1979 (Pt. I) Reaffirmed 2003 General requirements

771-1985 (Pt. II) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements of kitchen & laboratory sinks

771-1979 (Pt. III/ Sec

1) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements of urinals ( section 1-Slab urinals)

771-1985 (Pt. III/

Sec2) Reaffirmed 2000 Specific requirements of urinals ( section 2-Stall urinals)

771-1979 (Pt. IV) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements of postmortem slabs.

771-1979 (Pt. V) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements of shower trays

771-1979 (Pt. VI) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements of bed pan sinks

771-1981 (Pt. VII) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements of slop sinks

774-1984 Reaffirmed 2000 Flushing cistern for water closet and urinals.

775-1970 Reaffirmed 2000 Cast iron brackets and supports for wash basin and sink.

778-1984 Reaffirmed 2000 Specifications for copper alloy gate & Globe check valves for

water works

779-1994 Reaffirmed 2004 Water meters (domestic type)

781-1984 Reaffirmed 2001 Specifications for cast copper alloy screw down bib taps &

stop cocks for water services

782-1978 Reaffirmed 2003 Specification for Caulking lead.

783-1985 Reaffirmed 2001 Code of practice for laying concrete pipes.

784-2001 Reaffirmed 2002 Pre-stressed concrete pipes.

884-1985 Reaffirmed 2000 Fire aid hose reel for fire fighting (for fixed installation)

901 -1988 Reaffirmed 2003 Specification for couplings, double males & double female,

instantaneous pattern for Fire Fighting

902 -1992 - Specification for suction hose couplings for Fire Fighting

purposes.





903 -1993 Reaffirmed 2003 Couplings for fire hose delivery, branch pipe, nozzles

specification

904 -1983 Reaffirmed 2000 Specification for 2 way and 3 way suction collecting heads for

Fire Fighting purposes.

905 -1980 Reaffirmed 2002 Specification for delivery breechings, dividing and collecting

instantaneous pattern for Fire Fighting

906 -1988 Reaffirmed 2000 Specification for revolving branch pipe for Fire Fighting

907 -1984 Reaffirmed 2000 Specification for suction strainer, cyclindrical type for Fire

Fighting purposes.

908-1975 Reaffirmed 2000 Fire Hydrants, Stand post type

909-1992 Reaffirmed 2002 Specifications for underground fire hydrants, sluice valve type

940 -1989 - Portable Fire Extinguisher, water Type (Gas Cartridge) -

Specification

941-1985 Reaffirmed 2000 Specification for Blower and Exhauster for Fire Fighting.

1172-1993 Reaffirmed 2002 Code of basic requirements for water supply, drainage and

sanitation

1200-1979 (Pt. 16) Reaffirmed 2002 Method of measurements for Laying of water and sewer lines

including appurtenant items.

1200-1981 (Pt. 19) Reaffirmed 2002 Method of measurements for Water supply, plumbing and

drains.

1230 Specifications for CI Rain Water pipes

1239-2004 (Pt I) Specifications for Mild steel tubes

1239-1992 ( Pt. II) Reaffirmed 2002 Specifications for Mild steel Tubular & other wrought steel

pipe fittings

1300-1994 Reaffirmed 2000 Phenolic moulding material specification

1536-2001 - Specifications for Centrifugally cast iron (spun) pressure pipes

for water, gas and sewage

1537-1976 Reaffirmed 2000 Specifications for Vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water,

gas and sewage

1538-1993 Reaffirmed 1999 Cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage

1700-1973 Reaffirmed 2003 Drinking fountains

1701-1960 Reaffirmed 2003 Combination valve , mixing valves

1703-2000 Ball valve (horizontal plunger type) including floats for water

supply.

1711-1984 Reaffirmed 2000 Self closing taps.

1726-1991 Reaffirmed 2003 Cast iron manhole covers and Frames.

1729-2002 - Cast /ductile iron drainage pipes & fittings for over ground NP

pipeline S/S series.

1742-1983 Reaffirmed 2002 Code of practice for building drainage





1795-1982 Reaffirmed 2000 Pillar taps for water supply purposes

1879 Malleable Cast Iron Pipe Fittings

1978-1982 Reaffirmed 2002 Specification for line pipe (M S Seamless )

1979-1985 Reaffirmed 2002 Specification for high test line pipe

2065-1983 Reaffirmed 2001 Code of practice for water supply in buildings.

2097 -1983 Reaffirmed 2000 Specification for foam making branch pipe.

2104-1981 Reaffirmed 2003 Water meter boxes (domestic type)

2171 – 1999 - Specification for portable fire extinguisher, dry powder

(Cartridge Type)

2190-1992 Reaffirmed 2002 Code of practice for selection ,installation & maintenance of

portable first-aid fire extinguishers

2267-1995 Reaffirmed 2000 Polystyrene moulding and extension materials – specification

2326-1987 Reaffirmed 2003 Automatic flushing cistern for urinals

2373 Specification for Water Meter (Bulk type)

2379-1990 Reaffirmed 2000 Colour code for identification of pipe lines.

2401-1973 Reaffirmed 2003 Code of practice for selection, installation & maintenance of

domestic water meters

2470 (Pt. I to II) - Code of practice for installation of septic tanks

2470-1985 (Pt. I) Reaffirmed 2001 Design criteria & construction

2470-1985 (Pt. II) Reaffirmed 2001 Secondary Treatment & disposal of septic tank effluent

2527-1984 Reaffirmed 2000 Code of practice for fixing rain water gutters and down pipes

for roof drainage.

2546 -1974 Reaffirmed 2000 Specification for galvanized Mild Steel Fire bucket.

2548-1996(Pt. I) Reaffirmed 2002 Plastic water closet seats and covers.

2548-1996(Pt. II) Reaffirmed 2002 Plastic water closet seats and covers.

2556 (Pt. 1 to XV) - Specification for Vitreous (Vitreous China) sanitary

appliances.

2556-1994 (Pt.1) Reaffirmed 2004 General requirements

2556-1994 (Pt.2) Reaffirmed 1999 Specific requirements of wash down water-closets

2556-2004 (Pt.3) - Specific requirements of squatting pans

2556-2004 (Pt. 4) - Specific requirements of wash basins

2556-1994 (Pt.5) Reaffirmed 2004 Specific requirements of laboratory sinks

2556-1995(Pt.6) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements of urinals & partition plate

2556-1995 (Pt.7) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements of accessories for sanitary appliances

2556-1995 (Pt.8) Reaffirmed 1998 Specific requirements of pedestal close coupled & wash down

and siphonic water closets

2556-2004 (Pt.9) - Specific requirements of pedestal type bidets

2692-1989 Reaffirmed 2003 Specification for Ferrules for water services.





2800-1991 (Pt. I) Construction of tube well

2800-1979 (Pt. II) Testing of tube well

2871-1983 Reaffirmed 2000 Specification for Branch pipe, universal, for fire fighting

purposes

2878 -2004 - Fire Extinguisher, Carbon Dioxide Type (Portable and Trolley

Mounted) – Specification.

2951 (Pt. I to II) - Recommendation for estimate of flow of liquids in closed

conduits.

2951-1965 (Pt. I) Reaffirmed 2003 Head loss in straight pipes due to frictional resistance

2951-1965 (Pt. II) Reaffirmed 2003 Head loss in valves & fittings.

3006-1979 Reaffirmed 2003 Specification for Chemically resistant glazed S.W. pipes and

Fitting

3076-1985 Reaffirmed 2003 Low density polyethylene pipes for potable water supply

3114-1994 Reaffirmed 2004 Code of practice for laying of Cast Iron pipes.

3311-1979 Reaffirmed 2003 Waste plug & its accessories for sinks & wash basins.

3328-1993 Reaffirmed 2003 Quality tolerances for water for swimming pools

3389-1994 Reaffirmed 2000 Urea formaldehyde moulding materials

3486-1966 Reaffirmed 2000 Specification for Cast iron spigot and socket drain pipes

3489-1985 Reaffirmed 2000 Specifications for enameled steel bath tubs

3589-2001 - Specifications for steel pipes for water & sewage (168.3 to

2540 mm outside dia.)

3597-1998 - Method of test for concrete pipes.

3844-1989 Reaffirmed 2000 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of internal

fire hydrants Hose Reels in premises.

3950-1979 Reaffirmed 2003 Specification for Surface boxes for sluice valve.

3989-1984 Reaffirmed 2000 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste

and ventilating pipes, fittings & accessories.

4038-1986 Reaffirmed 2000 Foot valves for water works purposes.

4111 (Pt. I to V) Code of practice for ancillary structures in sewage system.

4111-1986 (Pt. I) Reaffirmed 2001 Manholes

4111-1985 (Pt. II) Reaffirmed 2001 Flushing tanks

4111-1985 (Pt. III) Reaffirmed 2001 Inverted syphon

4111-1968 (Pt. IV) Reaffirmed 2001 Pumping stations & pumping mains (rising mains)

4111-1993 (Pt. V) Reaffirmed 2004 Tidal out-falls

4120-1967 Reaffirmed 2000 Tubs and baths.

4127-1983 Reaffirmed 2001 Code of practice of laying of glazed stone ware pipes.





4308 -2003 - Dry Chemical Powder for Fighting B & C class Fires–

Specification.

4350-1967 Reaffirmed 2001 Specification for concrete porous pipes for under drainage.

4733-1972 Reaffirmed 1992 Methods of sampling &test for sewageeffluents

4736-1986 Reaffirmed 2001 Specificationfor hot–dipzinc coatingonmild steel tubes.

4854 (Pt. I to III) Glossary terms for valves and their parts

4854-1969 (Pt. I) Reaffirmed 1999 Screw down stop, check & gate valves & their parts

4854-1968 (Pt. II) Reaffirmed 1999 Plug valves & cocks & their parts

4854-1974 (Pt. III) Reaffirmed 1999 Butterfly valves

4927-1992 Reaffirmed 2002 Unlined flax canvass hose for fire fighting

4947 -1985 Reaffirmed 2000 Specification for gas cartridge for use in Fire extinguishers.

4984-1995 Reaffirmed 2002 Specifications for HDPE pipes for water supply

4985-2000 - Specifications for unplasticised PVC pipes for potable water

supplies

5290-1993 Reaffirmed 2003 Specifications for Landing valves.

5312 (Pt. I ) Swing check type reflux (non return ) valves

5312-1984 (Pt. I) Reaffirmed 2000 Reflux (non return ) valves – single door pattern

5329-1983 Reaffirmed 2001 Code of Practice for sanitary pipe work above ground for

building

5330-1984 Reaffirmed 2000 Criteria for design for anchor blocks for penstocks with

expansions joints.

5382-1985 Reaffirmed 2003 Specifications for rubber sealing rings for water, gas & sewer

mains

5455-1969 Reaffirmed 2003 Cast iron steps for manholes

5600-2002 - Specifications for Sewage and drainage pumps

5611-1987 Reaffirmed 2002 Code of Practice for waste stabilization ponds (Facultative

type)

5714-1981 Reaffirmed 2002 Specifications for Hydrant stand-pipe for fire fighting

5822-1994 Reaffirmed 2004 Code of Practice for laying of welded steel pipes for water

supply

5961-1970 Reaffirmed 2003 Specifications for Cast Iron grating for drainage purposes

6234 -2003 - Portable fire Extinguisher water Type (Stored Pressure) –

Specification.

6279-1971 Reaffirmed 2001 Equipment for grit removal

6280-1971 Reaffirmed 2001 Sewage screens

6295-1986 Reaffirmed 2001 COP for water supply & drainage in high altitude & / or sub-

zero region

6392-1971 Reaffirmed 1998 Steel pipe flanges





6411-1985 Reaffirmed 2000 Specifications for gel coated glass fiber reinforced polyester

resin bath tubs

6418-1971 Reaffirmed 2000 Cast Iron & malleable flanges for general engg. Purpose

6494-1988 Reaffirmed 2000 COP for water proofing of under ground water tanks &

swimming pools

6587-1987 Reaffirmed 2003 Specifications for Spun hemp yarn

7181-1986 Reaffirmed 2000 Horizontally Cast Iron Double Flanged pipe for water, gas &

sewage.

7231-1994 Reaffirmed 2004 Specifications for Plastic Flushing Cisterns for w.c. & urinals

7558-1974 Reaffirmed 2001 Code of Practice for domestic hot water installations

7634 (Pt. I to III) Code of Practice for Plastic pipe work for potable water

supplies

7634-1975 (Pt. I) Reaffirmed 2002 Choice of materials & general recommendations

7634-1975 (Pt. II) Reaffirmed 2002 Laying & jointing polyethylene (PE) pipes

7634-2003 (Pt. III) - Laying & jointing unplasticised PVC pipes

7740-1985 Reaffirmed 2001 Code of Practice for road gullies

7834 (Pt. I to VIII) Injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement

joints for water supplies

7834 -1987(Pt.I) Reaffirmed 2003 General requirements

7834-1987 (Pt.II) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements for 45 0 elbows

7834-1987 (Pt. III) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements for 90 0 elbows

7834-1987 (Pt. IV) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements for 90 0 tees

7834-1987(Pt.V) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements for 45 0 tees

7834-1987 (Pt. VI) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements for sockets

7834-1987(Pt. VII) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements for unions

7834-1987 (Pt. VIII) Reaffirmed 2003 Specific requirements for caps

8008 (Pt. I to VII) Injection moulded HDPE fittings for potable water supplies

8008-2003 (Pt. I) - General requirements for fittings

8008-1976 (Pt. II) Reaffirmed 1997 Specific requirements for 90 0 bends

8008-2003 (Pt. III) - Specific requirements for 90 0 tees

8008-2003 (Pt. IV) - Specific requirements for reducers

8008-2003 (Pt. V) - Specific requirements for ferrule reducers

8008-2003 (Pt. VI) - Specific requirements for pipe ends

8008-2003 (Pt. VII) - Specific requirements for sandwich flanges

8090-1976 Reaffirmed 2000 Coupling, branch pipe, nozzle used in hose reel tubing for fire

fighting

8329-2000 - Centrifugally cast (spun) ductile iron pressure pipes & fittings

for water, gas & sewage





8413 (Pt. I) Requirements for biological treatment equipment

8413-1977 (Pt. I) Reaffirmed 2001 Trickling Filter

8718-1978 Reaffirmed 2000 Specifications for vitreous enameled steel kitchen sinks

8727-1978 Reaffirmed 2000 Specifications for vitreous enameled steel wash basin

8835-1978 Reaffirmed 1999 Guideline for planning and design of surface drains.

8931-1993 Reaffirmed 2003 Specifications for copper alloys Fancy single taps,

combination tap assembly & stop valves for water services

9140-1996 Reaffirmed 2002 Method of sampling of vitreous & fire clay sanitary appliances

9293-1991 Reaffirmed 1996 Specifications for flax canvas

9338-1984 Reaffirmed 2000 Specifications for Cast Iron screw down stop valves and stop

& check valves for water works purposes

9668-1990 Reaffirmed 2000 Code of practice for provision & maintenance of water

supplies for Fire Fighting

9739-1981 Reaffirmed 2003 Specifications for Pressure reducing valves for Domestic

water supply system.

9758-1981 Reaffirmed 2003 Flush valves and Fittings for water closets and urinals

9762-1994 Reaffirmed 2004 Specifications for polyethylene floats for float valves

9763-2000 - Specifications for Plastic Bib taps, pillar taps, angle valves

and stop valves for hot & cold water service.

9972 -2002 - Specification for Automatic sprinkler Heads for Fire Protection

Service.

10221-1982 Reaffirmed 1997 Code of practice for coating and wrapping of underground

M.S. steel pipeline,

10500-1991 Reaffirmed 2003 Specification of Drinking water

11108 -1984 Reaffirmed 2000 Specification for portable fire Extinguisher Halon 1211 Type.

11189-1985 Method of tube well development

11606 -1986 Reaffirmed 2000 Method for sampling of cast iron pipes and fittings.

11632 -1986 Rehabilitation of Tube well

12183-1987 (Pt. I) Reaffirmed 2004 Code of practice for Plumbing in multistoried buildings (for

water supply)

12231 -1987 Reaffirmed 2003 UPVC pipes for section & delivery lines of agricultural pumps–

Specification.

12235 -1986 Reaffirmed 1998 Method of test for UPVC pipe for potable water supply

12288 -1987 Reaffirmed 2002 Code of practice for use and laying of Ductile Iron pipes.

12469 -1988 Reaffirmed 2002 Specifications for pumps

12592-2002 - Precast concrete frame & cover ( SFRC frame & cover )

12701-1996 Reaffirmed 2002 Specifications for rotational moulded polyethylene water

storage tanks





12709 -1994 Reaffirmed 2004 Glassfiber reinforce plastic(GRP) pipes, joints & fittings for

use for potable water supply – Specification.

12818 -1992 Reaffirmed 2002 Spn. for UPVC ribbed screen casing & plain casing pipes for

bore / tube well

12820 -1989 Reaffirmed 1999

Dimensional Requirements of Rubber Gaskets for Mechanical

Joints & push in joints for use with Cast Iron Pipes & fittings

for carrying water, Gas & sewarge.

13095 -1991 Reaffirmed 2003 Butterfly valves for general purposes

13114 -1991 Reaffirmed 2003 Spn. for forged brass gate, globe & check valves for water

works purposes

13382-2004 - Cast Iron specials for mechanical & push-on flexible joints for

pressure pipelines for water, gas & sewage

13592-1992 Reaffirmed 2002 Specifications for PVC soil, waste & rain water (SWR)

including ventilation pipes

13593 -1992 Reaffirmed 2002 UPVC pipes fittings for use with section and delivery lines for

Agricultural pumps – Specification.

13916 – 1994 Reaffirmed 2004 Code of practice for installation of GRP piping system.

13983-1994 Reaffirmed 2004 Specifications for stainless steel kitchen sinks & drain boards

for domestic purpose

14333-1996 Reaffirmed 2001 Specification for HDPE pipes for sewerage system.

14402-1996 Reaffirmed 2001 GRP pipes, joints & fittings – Specification.

14735-1999 Reaffirmed 2004 UPVC injection moulded fittings for UPVC – SWR pipes –

Specifications.

14845-2000 Reaffirmed 2004 Resilient seated cast iron air relief valves for water works

purposes – Spn

14846-2000 - Specifications for sluice valve for water works purposes (50 to

1200 mm size )

15265 – 2003 -

Specifications for flexible PVC pipes or polymer reinforcement

thermo plastic hoses for suction and delivery lines for

Agricultural pumps.

15328 – 2003 - UPVC non pressure pipes for use in underground drainage

and sewerage system – Specifications.




SECTION “D – FIRE FIGHTING & FIRE PROTECTION


NBC Part – IV National Building Code of India; Part IV Fire & Life Safety

TAC Tariff Advisory Committee fire protection manual Part-I.

TAC Rules of Tariff Advisory Committee for automatic sprinkler system.

NFPA : 13 Installation of Sprinkler System

NFPA : 14 Installation of Standpipe & Hose System

NFPA : 20 Installation of Stationary pump for Fire Protection

IS : 636 Non-percolating flexible fire fighting delivery hose.

IS : 884 Specification for first aid hose reel for fire fighting.

IS : 901 Specification for couplings, double male and double female, instantaneous pattern for fire fighting.

IS : 902 Suction hose couplings for fire fighting purposes.

IS : 903 Specification for fire hose delivery couplings, branch pipe, nozzles and nozzle spanner.

IS : 904 Specification for 2-way and 3-way suction collecting heads for fire fighting purposes.

IS : 907 Specification for suction strainers, cylindrical type for fire fighting purposes.

IS : 908 Specification for fire hydrant, stand post type.

IS : 909 Specification for underground fire hydrant, sluice valve type.

IS : 910 Specification for portable chemical foam fire extinusiher.

IS : 933 Specification for portable chemical foam fire extinguisher.

IS : 1648 Code of practice for fire safety of building (general) : Fire fighting equipment and its maintenance.

IS : 2171 Specification for portable fire extinguishers dry powder (catridge type)

IS : 2190 Selection, installation and maintenance of first aid fire extinguishers – Code of practice.

IS : 2871 Specification for branch pipe, universal, for fire fighting purposes.

IS : 2878 Specification for fire extinguishers, carbon dioxide type (portable and trolley mounted).

IS : 3844 Code of practice for installation and maintenance of internal fire hydrants and hose reel on premises.

IS : 5290 Specification for landing valves.

IS 5714 Specification for coupling, branch pipe, nozzle, used in hose reel tubing for fire fighting.

IS : 8423 Specification for controlled percolation type hose for fire fighting.

IS : 10658 Specification for higher capacity dry powder fire extinguisher (trolley mounted).





IS : 11460 Code of practice for fire safety of libraries and archives buildings.

IS : 1309 External hydrant systems – Provision and maintenance – Code of practice.

IS : 5514 (Parts 1 to 7)

Reciprocating internal combustion engines : Performance.

IS : 15105 : 2002 Design & Installation of Fixed Automatic Sprinkler Fire Extinguishing System – Code of Practice.




SECTION „B‟- ELECTRICAL WORK

1. INTERNAL WIRING

1.1 System of Wiring

The system of wiring shall consist of PVC insulated copper stranded conductor flexible FRLS wires in

metallic / non metallic (Rigid heavy Duty ISI -marked fire retarded FRST PVC Conduits of minimum

2mm Wall thickness and Sizes starting from 20 mm diameter) conduits and shall be concealed or

surface mounted above false ceiling as called for.

1.2 General

Prior to laying and fixing of conduits, the contractor shall mark the conduit route, carefully examine the

working drawings prepared by him and approved by the Consultant indicating the layout, satisfy himself

about the non interference in the route, sufficiency of number and sizes of conduits, location of

junction boxes, sizes and location of switch boxes and other relevant details. Any discrepancy found

shall be brought to the notice of the Owner‟s site representative. Any modifications suggested by the

contractor should get written approval before the actual laying of conduits is commenced.

In laying of conduits it is important that not more than two right angle bends are provided for each circuit

without a pull box. No junction box shall be provided in the entire length of conduit run for drawing of

wires. Only switch outlets, lighting fixture outlets, equipment power outlets and socket outlets shall be

considered for drawing of wires.

1.3 Metal Conduits & Accessories 1.3.1 Conduits

Conduits and Accessories shall conform to latest edition of Indian Standards IS-9537 part 1 & 2.

16/14 (16 gauge upto 32mm diameter & 14 gauge above 32 mm diameter) gauge screwed GI or MS

painted conduits as specified on schedule of quantities shall be used. Joints between conduits and

accessories shall be securely made by standard accessories, as per IS-2667, IS-3837 and IS-5133 to

ensure earth continuity. All conduit accessories shall be threaded type only.

Only approved make of conduits and accessories shall be used.

Conduits shall be delivered to the site of construction in original bundles and each length of conduit

shall bear the label of the manufacturer.

Note. : Whatever materials required to be billed by the Contractor should come on site with proper

Challan Numbers and quantity mentiond in each such Challan.




1.3.2 Joints

All jointing shall be subject to the approval of the Owner‟s site representative. The threads and

sockets shall be free from grease and oil. End termination of conduit on GI boxes shall be by means

of hexagon check nuts & spring washer on both sides of the conduit. The joints in conduits shall be free

of burrs to avoid damage to insulation of conductors while pulling them through the conduits.

Rubberised bushes shall be used in the conduit entry and exit from DBs, switch boxes etc ,so that wires

are protected from damage to insulation of the incoming and outgoing wires

1.3.3 Recessed or Exposed Conduits

All conduits shall be as per Schedule of Quantities.

1.3.4 Flexible Conduits

Flexible conduits shall be made of heavy gauge MS strip galvanized after making the spiral. Both edges

of the strip to have interlocking to avoid opening up. Flexible conduit shall be heat resistant, lead coated

steel, water leak, fire and rust proof. The flexible conduit shall be heat resistant on continous

temperature upto 150 deg. C and intermittent temperature upto 200 deg. C. The flexible conduit shall be

corrosion resistant as per IS-3480 & BS-731.

1.4 PVC Conduit and Accessories PVC Conduit

Conduits and accessories shall conform to latest edition of IS-9537 part 3 and shall be heavy duty with

minimum wall thickness of 2.0 mm rigid tubes which are unscrewed without coupling and with plain

ends. All conduits used shall be ISI-marked and shall not be less than 20 mm diameter.

PVC conduit shall be used for all concealed / embedded installation.

PVC Conduit Accessories

Accessories used for conduit shall be of an approved brand and type complying to relevant IS code.

All accessories used shall be of standard white or black colour, identical to conduit used.

Plain conduits shall be jointed by slip type of couplers with manufacturer‟s standard sealing cement.

All conduit entries to outlet boxes, trunking and switchgear are to be made with adaptors female thread

and screwed male bushes.




PVC-switch and socket boxes with round knockouts are to be used. The colours of these boxes and the

conduits shall be the same.

Standard PVC circular junction boxes are to be used with conduits for intersection, Tee-junction, angle-

junction and terminal. For the drawing-in of cables, standard circular through boxes shall be used.

Samples of accessories shall be submitted for approval prior to installation.

All jointing of PVC conduits shall be by means of adhesive jointing. Adequate expansion joints shall be

allowed to take up the expansion of PVC conduits.

1.5 Bends in Conduit

Where necessary, bends or diversions may be achieved by means of bends and / or circular cast iron

boxes with inspection cover and with adequate and suitable inlet and outlet screwed joints. In case of

recessed system each junction box shall be provided with a cover properly secured and flush with

the finished wall surface. No bends shall have radius less than 7.5 cms or three times the outside

diameter of the conduits. For metallic conduits, bends of defined radius shall be made by compactly

filling fine sand inside the conduit length, to avoid non-uniform shape, once the bend is done. Proper

jigs shall be used to ensure that the Enameling /Galvanising of the Conduit is not damaged.

1.6 Fixing of Conduits

All conduits, shall be installed so as to avoid exposure to steam, hot water or any other process pipes.

After the conduits, junction boxes, outlet boxes and switch boxes are installed in position, their

outlets shall be properly plugged or covered so that water, mortar, rodents and insects , insects or any

other foreign matter does not enter into the conduit system. Surface conduits shall be fixed by means of

heavy gauge GI saddles secured on 5mm thick GI spacers at intervals not more than 1000 mm, and

on either side of couplers or bends or similar fitting saddles shall be fixed at a distance of 300 mm from

centre of each fitting. For conduit fixing suitable PVC/Nylon fasteners shall be used.

Recessed conduiting shall be done by making chase in the masonry by chase cutter, the conduit shall

be fixed in the chase by means of GI hooks not more than 600 mm apart. After fixing of conduit the

chase shall be filled with cement mortar after fixing of chicken mesh and brought to the original finish

level of the surface to the entire satisfaction of Owner.

1.7 Switch outlets and Junction Boxes

All outlet boxes for switches, sockets and other receptacles shall be rust proof and shall be of 1.6 mm

thick mild steel sheets with HOT dipped galvanizing (or as specified in SOQ), having smooth external

and internal surfaces to true finish. All outlet boxes for receiving plug sockets and switches shall be

fabricated to approved sizes. All boxes shall have adequate number of knock out holes of required




diameter and earthing terminal screws. Outlet boxes shall generally be of 50mm depth subject to

maximum depth of 65 mm.

1.8 Inspection Boxes

50 mm dia inspection boxes and pull boxes shall have smooth external and internal finish to

facilitate removal and replacement of wires, where required.

1.9 Fish Wire

To facilitate subsequent drawing of wires in the conduit, GI fish wires of 2.0 mm (14 SWG) shall be

provided alongwith the laying of recessed conduit.

1.10 Conductors

All PVC insulated copper conductor flexible FRLS, as specified in SOQ, wires shall conform in all

respects to Standards as listed under sub-head Indian Standards and shall be IS approved and ISI

marked.

1.11 Bunching of Wires

Wires carrying current shall be so bunched that the outgoing and return wires are drawn into the

same conduit. Wires originating from two different phases shall not run in the same conduit. All wires

shall have ferrules for identification. Lighting and power circuits shall be separate. Each Power/ Light

Circuit„s Neutral shall be individual per Circuit and shall not be looped from any other Circuit.

1.12 Drawing Conductors

The drawing and jointing of PVC insulated copper conductor wires shall be executed with due regard

to the following precautions. While drawing wires through conduits, care shall be taken to avoid

scratches and kinks which may cause breakage of conductors. There shall be no sharp bends. Wire

reel stands to be used for pulling of wires to avoid kinks. Care shall be exercised while drawing the

wires from reels, by taking appropriate measures to ensure that wires are not spread on ground,

causing dust and dirt accumulation on the new wires.

Maximum permissible number of 1100 volt grade PVC insulated wires that may be drawn into metallic

Conduits are given below:

Size of wires Nominal Cross

Maximum number of wires within conduit size(mm)

section Area (Sq. mm.) 20 25 32 40 50

1.5 5 10 14 -- -- 2.5 5 8 12 -- --




4 3 7 10 -- -- 6 2 5 8 -- --

10 -- 3 5 6 -- 16 -- 2 3 6 6 25 -- -- 2 4 6 35 -- -- -- 3 5

Maximum permissible number of 1100 volt grade PVC insulated wires that may be drawn into rigid non

metallic or PVC Conduits are given below:




1.5 7 12 16 -- -- 2.5 5 10 14 -- -- 4 4 8 12 -- -- 6 3 6 8 -- --

10 -- 4 5 6 -- 16 -- 3 3 6 6 25 -- -- 2 4 6 35 -- -- -- 3 5

Insulation shall be removed by insulation stripper only. Few Strands of wires shall not be cut/reduced

for convenience in connecting into terminals. The terminals shall have sufficient cross sectional area

to take all strands and it‟s connecting brass screws shall have flats ends. All looped joints shall be

connected through terminal block/connectors. The pressure applied to tighten terminal screws

shall be just adequate, neither too much nor too less. All light points shall be terminated through a

connector.

Condutors having nominal cross sectional areas exceeding 10 sq.mm shall always be provided with

cable sockets. At all bolted terminals brass flat washer of large area and approved steel spring washer

shall be used. Brass nuts and bolts with brass washers shall be used for all connections.

Only licensed wiremen (Before doing the work or before appointing him on site contractor has to submit

his wiring licence to Owner) and cable jointers shall be employed to do jointing work. Before entrusting

cable jointing work to any technician, or before appointing Cable Jointers or Wiremen on Site,

Contractor has to submit such Technicians‟ / Wireman‟s / Cable Jointer‟s licence to Owner.

All wires and cables shall be embossed with the manufacturer‟s label with ISI mark and shall be

brought to site in original packing. For all internal wiring. PVC insulated wires of 1100 volts grade

(FRLS) shall be used.

The sub-circuit wiring for point shall be carried out in loop system and no joints shall be allowed in the

length of the conductors. No wire shall be drawn into any conduit until all defective work of conduit

installation of any nature that may cause injury to wire is completed. Care shall be taken while pulling




out the wires so that no damage occurs to conduits/wire itself, the conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned

of moisture, dust , dirt or any other obstruction. The minimum size of PVC insulated copper conductor

wires for all sub-circuit wiring for light points shall be minimum 2.5 sq.mm copper. Separate neutral to

be pulled for each circuit.

1.13 Joints

All joints shall be made at main switches, distribution boards. socket outlets, lighting outlets and

switches boxes only. No joints shall be made in conduits and in junction boxes. Conductors shall be

continuous from outlet to inlet.

1.14 Mains and Sub-Mains

Mains and sub-mains cable or wires where called for shall be of the rated capacity and approved

make. Every main and sub main wires shall be drawn into an independent adequate size of

conduit. Earthing shall be in conformity with relevant IS codes and calculations shall be submitted for

verification. An independent earth wire of the proper rating shall be provided for every single phase

sub-main. For every 3 -phase sub-main, 2 Nos. earth wires of proper rating shall be provided alongwith

the sub-main. The earth wires shall be drawn along with circuit wires through conduit. Where mains

and sub-mains cables are connected to switchgear, sufficient extra lengths of cable shall be

provided to facilitate easy connections and maintenance. Where ever necessary, powder-coated 1.6

mm thick sheet steel covering (also called trunking) shall be provided to cover the group of conduits

and cables entering and exiting the Wall mounted/Floor mounted SubDBs, DBs, and FDBs ,so that

the Installation looks neat .The colour of such sheet steel covering (trunking) shall be matching with the

colour of the SDBs, DBs and FDBs

1.15 Load Balancing

Balancing of circuits in three phase installation shall be as planned by the Consultants in the tender

drawings and shall be checked by the contractor before the commencement of wiring and shall be

strictly adhered to.

1.16 Colour Code of Conductors

Colour code shall be maintained as indicated by the Consultant for the entire wiring installations.

Red, yellow, blue shall be for three phases, black for neutral and green with yellow band shall be for

earthing.

2 (A) SWITCHES, RECEPTACLES (MODULAR), LIGHTING FIXTURES & LIGHTING CONTROL

EQUIPMENT

2.1. Switches




All switches shall be enclosed type flush mounted suitable for 240 volts AC. All switches shall be

fixed inside the switch boxes on adjustable flat M S strips/plates with tapped holes and brass machine

screws, leaving ample space at the back and sides for accommodating wires. Switch controlling the

light point shall be connected to the phase wire of the circuit and load on each switch shall be restricted

to maximum 800 watts & maximum 1500 watts per circuit. All wiring accessories shall be BIS approved.

Perfect alignment shall be maintained while fixing of the back boxes.

2.2 Socket Outlet

Socket outlets shall be of the three pin. The switch controlling the socket outlet shall be on the phase

wire of the circuit and not more than two socket outlets of 16 amps shall be connected on one circuit.

An earth wire shall be provided alongwith the circuit wires and shall be connected to earthing screw

inside the box.. All sockets shall be shuttered type.

a. Every socket outlet shall be controlled by an individual switch unless mentioned otherwise.

b. The switch controlling the socket outlet shall be on the `Live‟ side of the line.

c. 6 amps and 16 amps socket outlet shall normally be fixed at any convenient height above the

floor level as desired by the Architect. The switch for 6 and 16 amps, socket outlet shall be kept

alongwith the socket outlet. However, in special case, if desired by the Architect the 6 amp.

socket outlet can be placed at the normal switch level.

In a room containing a fixed bath or shower, there shall be no socket outlet and there shall be

no provision for connecting a portable appliance. Any stationary appliance connected

permanently in the bath room shall be controlled by an isolator switch or circuit breaker having

outlets at such location where water / moisture does not effect. Generally, switches and outlets

shall be planned at a minimum distance of 1.5 Metre away from any water supply outlet, so that

splashed water may not affect the live installation.

d. Where socket outlets are placed at lower level, they shall be enclosed in a suitable metallic box

with the system of wiring adopted or shutter type sockets shall be provided as specified.

e. In an earthed system of supply, a socket outlet and plug shall be of three pin type, the third

terminal shall be connected to earth.

f. Conductors connecting electrical appliance with socket outlet shall be flexible twin cord with an

earthing cord which shall be secured by connecting between the earth terminal of plug and the

metallic body of the electrical appliance.

g. Where use of shutter type of interlocking type of socket is required for any special installation,




the items should be separately and specifically listed in the Schedule of Quantities of that

particular work.

2.3 Lighting Fixtures & Accessories The light fixtures and fittings shall be assembled and installed in position complete and ready for

service, in accordance with details, drawings, manufacturer's instructions and to the satisfaction of the

Project Manager.

2.3.1 Scope :

Scope of work under this section shall include inspection at suppliers/manufacturer‟s premises at site,

receiving at site, safe storage, transportation from point of storage to point of erection, erection and

commissioning of light fittings, fixtures and accessories including all necessary supports, brackets,

down rods and painting etc as required.

2.3.2 Standards : The lighting and their associated accessories such as lamps, reflectors, housings, ballasts etc., shall

comply with the latest applicable standards, more specifically the following:

General and safety requirements for Luminaires : Part-1 Tubular flourescent lamps - IS – 1913 (Part-1) Industrial lighting fittings with metal reflectors - IS - 1777 Decorative lighting outfits - IS - 5077 Bayonet lamp holders - IS - 1258 Bi-pin lamp holders for tubular fluorescent lamps - IS - 3323

Electronic Ballasts for fluorescent lamps – General & Safety requirement - IS – 13021 (Part-1)

Electronic Ballasts for fluorescent lamps –

Performance requirement - IS – 13021 (Part-2) Ballast for HP MV lamps - IS - 6616 Tubular Fluorescent lamps - IS - 2418 (Part-1 to 4) Luminaries – General requirement - IS – 10322 (Part-1)




Luminaries – Constructional requirement - IS – 10322 (Part-2) Luminaries – Screw and Screwless termination - IS – 10322 (Part-3) Luminaries – Methods of Tests - IS – 10322 (Part-4)

Particular requirement – General purpose Luminaries - IS – 10322 (Part-5/Sec-1)

Particular requirement – Recessed Luminaries - IS – 10322 (Part-5/Sec-2) Particular requirement – Luminaries for Road and Street lighting - IS – 10322 (Part-5/Sec-3) Particular requirement – Portable General purpose

Luminaries - IS – 10322 (Part-5/Sec-4) Particular requirement – Flood Lighting - IS – 10322 (Part-5/Sec-5) High pressure mercury vapour lamps - IS – 9900 (Part-1) Tungsten filament general electric lamps - IS - 418 2.3.3 Light Fittings-General Requirements :

a). Fittings shall be designed for continuous trouble free operation under atmospheric conditions

without reduction in lamp life or without deterioration of materials and internal wiring. Degree of

protection of enclosure shall be IP-65 for outdoor fittings except bulkhead fitting. Bulkhead fitting

shall be provided with IP-54 protection.

b) Fittings shall be so designed as to facilitate easy maintenance including cleaning, replacement

of lamps/ ballasts.

c). All fittings shall be supplied complete with lamps. All mercury vapour and sodium vapour lamp

fittings shall be complete with accessories like ballasts, power factor improvement capacitors,

starters, etc. Out door type fittings shall be provided with weather proof junction boxes (IP-55)

and IP-54 Control gear boxes. All fluorescent and CFL fittings shall be provided with electronic

ballast as per schedule of quantities.

d) Each fitting shall have a terminal block suitable for loop-out connection by 1100 V PVC

insulated copper conductor wires upto 4 sq.mm. the internal wiring should be completed by the

manufacturer by means of standard copper wire and terminated on the terminal block.

e) All hardwares used in the fitting shall be suitably plated or anodized and passivated.




f) Earthing : Each lighting fitting shall be provided with an earthing terminal. All metal or metal

enclosed parts of the housing shall be bonded and connected to the earthing terminal so as to

ensure satisfactory earthing continuity throughout the fixture.

g) Painting/Finish : All surfaces of the fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased and the

fittings shall be free from scale, rust, sharp-edges, and burns.

h) The housing shall be powder coated/stove-enamelled or anodised as required. The surface

shall be scratch resistant and shall show no sign of cracking or flaking when bent through 90

deg. over 12 mm dia mandrel.

i) Metal used in BODY of lighting fixtures shall be not less than 22 SWG or heavier if so required

to comply with specification of standards. Sheet steel reflectors shall have a thickness of not

less than 20 SWG. The metal parts of the fixtures shall be completely free from burns and tool

marks. Solder shall not be used as mechanical fastening device on any part of the fixture.

j) All Light Fitting in Dining Area, Kitchen Area shall be Suspendended type as per the drawings &

site requirement.

2.3.4. Light Fittings – Special Requirements Box Channel Type Industrial Fittings

Box type slim line channel must be in screwless construction manufactured from M.S. CRCA sheet steel

powder coated with MS CRCA cover, powder coated white. Light reflection surface in Box/Channel type

fittings shall be in a POLYESTER PRECOATED STEEL having a reflection factor of not less than 80%.

SCREWLESS DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION Light fixtures shall be preferred due to their ease of

maintenance, especially for box/channel for box/channel type fixtures.

Moisture Proof Industrial Fittings

Surface mounted totally enclosed moisture proof fixtures must be in polycarbonate body and diffuser

with transparent prismatic interior and smooth exterior and frosted end. Fixture must be completely

sealed with polyerethane double gasket to achieve IP 65 protection. Fixture is complete with CRCA

steel white powder coated / enameled finish reflector.

18 W / 36 W Fluorescent and 36 W CFL Low Glare Light Fittings Recessed mounted, modular fluorescent lighting fixture made of CRCA Sheet steel powder coated

(white) housing, electro chemically brightened and anodised reflector, three dimensional cross louvers

with concave contours, fresnel top at louver saddle to increase efficiency. The luminance of <200 cd/M2

at 63 degree viewing angle in all directions so as to confirm Cat-2 classification of CIBSELG3




Highbay Industrial Fittings Industrial Highbay luminaries shall be provided with pressure die cast housing along with all

accessories, orthocyclically woundopien construction ballast, capacitor & semi parallel ignitor connected

to terminal block and mounted on the gear plate. The gear shall have side entry for ease in

maintenance. The spun aluminium reflector is suitable for narrows well as wide beam distribution as

specified in schedule of quantities. The luminaire will be suitable for metal halide lamp HPI BU + 250 W

which has 25500 lumens or similar 400W lamp and 2.5 minutes restrike time (when operate with son

gear).

2.3.5 Accessories for Light Fittings - Reflectors

The reflectors shall be made of CRCA sheet steel/aluminium /Silvered glass/Chromium plated sheet

copper as specified. The thickness of reflectors shall be as per relevant standards. Reflectors made of

steel shall have stove enameled/ vitreous enameled/epoxy coating finish. Aluminium used for reflectors

shall be anodized/epoxy stove enameled /mirror polished. The finish for the reflector shall be as

specified. The reflectors shall be free from scratches / blisters and shall have a smooth and glossy

surface having optimum light reflecting coefficient. Reflectors shall be readily removable from the

housing for cleaning and maintenance without use of tools.

2.3.6 Lamps 2.3.6.1 TLD Lamp shall be environment friendly low pressure mercury discharge lamp with mercury content less

than or equal to 5 mg. The lamp shall have minimum lumen maintenance of 85 and CRI of 85. The

lamp must comply to ROSH (Restriction of Hazardous substances) and covered by WEEE. Lamp

should be fully re-cyclable. The lamp should be low on maintenance with life of 40 K hours in case of

electromagnetic ballast and 65 K hours in case of HF ballast upto 10% failure. The discharge glass

shall be lead free.

TLD Lamps shall be minimum tri-phosphor type and have bi-pin bases. Colour spectrum of light shall be

equivalent to “PHILIPS color 84 or color 86 color 82 or “OSRAM color 21 or color 11 or color 41 (as

required at site)” .

The fluorescent Tubes (TLD) should have cool daylight colour designation. But Architects reserve the

right to prescribe either Cool Daylight or Bright White or Incandescent Colour Designations for TLD. NO

extra payment will be made over the quoted rate of bidder for this. The 36 W fluorescent tubes will have

Nominal Luminous Flux of not less than 3350 lumens whether so mentioned in the Schedule of

Quantities or not.

T 5 – High Efficiency ECO-Friendly Lamps




T-5 lamp shall be environment friendly low pressure mercury discharge lamp with mercury content less

than or equal to 3 mg. lamp should have lowest CO2 emission compared to any other comparable light

source (40% less than a TL-D standard lamp, 26% less than TL-D / 80). T-5 lamp shall be 100% lead

free. T-5 lamp shall be designed for operation with electronic gear and well suited for dimming.

Maximum lumen output to be reached at approx 35oC in free burning position. T-5 lamp can be ignited

from -15oC to + 50oC. Lamp should be fully recyclable and must comply to ROSH (Restriction of

Hazardous substances) and shall be covered by WEEE. T-5 shall have 16 mm in diameter service life

of TL-5 lamp should be 10% more than TL-D lamps. T-5 lamp shall have lumen efficacy of up to 104

Lumens / W and shall have excellent colour rendering to En 12464 (Ra 80 to 89).

2.3.6.2 Compact fluorescent lamp shall have same luminous flux and power consumption as fluorescent tubes

but less than half the length and more compact than U-shaped and circulator lamps. CFL shall be

suitable for use with conventional control gear & standers and for HF electronic control gear. CFL lamp

shall be non integral type of OSRAM / GE / PHILIPS/ Havells Sylvania only.

2.3.7 High Frequency Electronic Ballast

High frequency electronic ballast shall be used with fluorescent / Compact Fluorescent Lamps wherever

specified in the schedule of quantities. High frequency electronic ballast shall comply to the following:

IEC 927, IEC 928 for ≤10% total harmonic distortion.

EMI / RFI – Confirming to FCC / VDE Class A/B.

Line Transient as per IEEE C62.41.

Ballast Crest Factor C1.7%.

No Stroboscopic Effect

Constant Wattage / Light output between 240 V ± 10%.

Circuit protection for surge current and inrush current.

Short circuits, open lamp protection

PF > 0.99 for fluorescent / T5 lamp and 0.95 for CFL.

Deactivated lamp protection

Suitable for use with single and twin lamps

RFI < 30 MHz EN 55015

Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) ≤10%

Immunity to interference EN 61547

Safety EN 60928 / IEC 928 / IS 13021 (Part I)

Performance EN 60929 / IEC 929 / IS 13021 (Part II)

Vibrations & Bump tests IEC 68-2-6 FC

IEC 9001

Quality Standard ISO 9001

Environmental Standard ISO 14001




DC Operation EN 60924

Emergency Lighting Operation VDE 0108

Total System consumption (lamps + ballast) for 1 x 36 W TLD, shall not exceed 36 W

1 x 28 W T-5, shall not exceed 28 W



1 x 18 W CFL, shall not exceed 18 W

1 x 36 W CFL, shall not exceed 36 W

2.4 Lighting Control Equipment 2.4.1 General

The lighting control system shall be centralized or decentralized based on a project requirement every

device should be microprocessor based, addressable entity.

PIR Occupancy Sensor The PIR Occupancy Sensor shall detect passive infrared energy for control of any number of

independent electrical loads. The light level shall be adjustable from the front of the unit and shall be

used to disable the Occupancy Sensor. Timer settings shall be adjustable from 1 second to 18 hours, in

one-second increments. A weatherproof version shall be available for outdoor or industrial use.

In the event of power cycling, a non-volatile memory (NVM) shall be incorporated to retain all address

and switching information.

The Supply Voltage to each PIR Sensor shall be 36VDC @ 18mA. No additional 240V supply shall be

required for the unit to operate.

The unit shall have suitable operating temperatures between 0-50 Degree C.

The unit shall be suitable for wall or ceiling mounting, up to mounting heights of 2.4m.

The Indoor unit shall have a field of view of 90 degrees. The outdoor unit shall have a field of view of

110 degrees.

The Indoor unit shall have an effective detection area of 6m x 6m. The outdoor unit shall have an

effective detection area of 18m radius x 110 degrees.




The Indoor unit shall have 12 overlapping detection zones. The outdoor unit shall have 18 long range,

16 intermediate range, 10 short range and 4 ultra short-range detection zones.

Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensor The unit shall be an active device utilizing Doppler wave technology as its means of detection. The unit

shall include two air transducers to provide volumetric occupancy detection.

The unit shall be suitable for occupancy detection of larger areas, typically 12m x 12m and 2.7m

mounting height. The unit shall include its own independent 240V power supply and shall require a

socket outlet adjacent to installation point (typically in the lighting wiring loom). To enable the unit to

communicate with the control system network, an Auxiliary Switch Input Unit shall be utilized. Each

auxiliary unit will allow control of up to four detectors.

The unit will have easily accessible sensitivity adjustment that can be used to accommodate various

room sizes.

The unit will have an indicator LED for walk-testing the unit.

The unit shall be ceiling mounted and a 360-degree field of view.

The unit shall utilize an ultrasonic frequency of 32.7 kHz.


Combined Technology Ultrasonic/PIR Occupancy Sensor The unit shall consist of two air transducers and four PIR detectors with a special lens to provide both

volumetric and line of sight detection.

The unit shall be suitable for occupancy detection of larger areas, typically 15m x 15m and 2.7m

mounting height. The unit shall include its own independent 240V power supply and shall require a

socket outlet adjacent to installation point (typically in the lighting wiring loom). To enable the unit to

communicate with the control system network, an Auxiliary Switch Input Unit shall be utilized. Each

auxiliary unit will allow control of up to four detectors.

The unit shall be ceiling mounted and a 360-degree field of view.

The unit will have easily accessible sensitivity adjustment that can be used to accommodate various

room sizes.




The unit will employ programmable walk-testing LED indicators: Red LED for Passive Infrared and

Green LED for Ultrasonic modes.



Ultrasonic Occupancy Sensor for Corridors and Hallways The unit shall be suitable for occupancy detection of Corridors and Hallways, typically up to 4.6m x 30m

and 2.7m mounting height. The unit shall include its own independent 240V power supply and shall

require a socket outlet adjacent to installation point (typically in the lighting wiring loom). To enable the

unit to communicate with the control system network, an Auxiliary Switch Input Unit shall be utilized.

Each auxiliary unit will allow control of up to four detectors.

The unit shall be ceiling mounted and a 360 degree field of view.

The unit will have an indicator LED for walk-testing the unit.



2.5 Lighting Control Equipment Product Specifications ( Option-II )

2.5.1 Lighting control modules for On/Off switching shall be:

DIN rail mounted consisting of two (2), four (4) or eight (8) or (12) individually programmable integral

relays (contactors). The relay shall guarantee a life of >100000 switch operations as per IEC 60947.

Relay modules requiring external 220V supply in addition to bus connection shall not be acceptable.

The output states of each of these relays shall be displayed on the front via true mechanical indication.

LED status indicators shall not be acceptable. Each of these relays shall be latch-on type with manual

operation (override) possible even without power to the system & without having to remove the cover of

the control module.

In the event of power failure or bus wiring failure or control module failure, each of the relays shall attain

a pre-programmed fail-safe position („On‟, „off‟ or „as it is Last status‟) at the time of commissioning.

The actuators shall be with integrated current detection feature. This functionality shall allow for the

monitoring of the load current, and operating hours for load management .It shall be possible to set

threshold values of the current in order to detect any lamp failures for facilities management.




The control modules shall be capable of being programmed with different applications to suit site

requirements for e.g. staircase lighting function that switches „Off‟ the relays after a preprogrammed

time from the time it has switched „On‟. The application for which a relay has been programmed shall

apply irrespective of the signal from which it is controlled.

Each of the relays shall be capable of being programmed with its own „On‟ and „Off‟ delays that shall be

applicable irrespective of the signal from which the relays are controlled.

The control modules shall receive its operating power supply from the same bus cable without any other

power supply. It should not operate on any 220/240 V AC supply to avoid possible fire hazards. Relay

modules with additional power supply to feed other devices in the network shall not be acceptable.

There shall be DIN rail mounted Dimmer modules to allow for dimming of the related lighting loads. The

Dimmer modules shall be shall be selected in accordance with the type of light fittings to allow dimming

of all type of light.

2.5.2 Wall mounted motion sensor: Sensor angle – 180°, mounting height ~ 1.1 m.

Range: frontally up to 12 m, laterally up to 8 m (upon tangential approach).

.

Mounting height :( 1.1-2.5 m), providing a larger detection zone (max. 10 x 15 m).

Ceiling mounted Presence detector:

The sensor shall be able to control up to 29 different EIB group addresses

Sensor angle 360°.

Detection range at 2.50 m mounting height:

6 m in dia. at a height of 1 m

Adjustable brightness 5 to 1000 Lx

Product standard EN 60669-2-1

2.5.3 Wall/Ceiling mounted motion sensor:

Surveillance zone: 220° horizontal

Maximum range: approximately 16 m (at installation height of

2.5 m

and horizontal alignment)




Surveillance density: 92 sectors / 368 switching segments n

Dusk brightness sensor: 0.5 – 1000 lux

Delay time: 10 sec – 32 min

Slewing range

- horizontal: +- 30°

- vertical: 90° upward; 40° downward

Operating temperature range -25 °C to 55 °C

3. MEDIUM VOLTAGE 1.1 KV GRADE XLPE / PVC CABLES

3.1 General

The MV cables shall be supplied, inspected, laid, tested and commissioned in accordance with

drawings, Specifications, relevant Standard Specifications and cable manufacturer's instruction.

3.2 Material

The MV cables shall be cross linked polyethylene (XLPE)\ PVC core insulated, extruded PVC inner

sheathed and extruded HR PVC / FRLS PVC outer sheath of 1100 volts grade as asked for in the

schedule of quantities. Cables shall be of copper and or aluminium conductor as mentioned BOQ.

3.3 Technical Requirements: 3.3.1 All XLPE Aluminium/Copper Power cables shall be 1100 Volts grade, multi core constructed as

per IS : 7098 Part-I of 1988 as follows :

a) Stranded Aluminium /Copper conductor as specified in BOQ.

b) Cores laid up

c) The inner sheath should be bonded over with thermo-plastic material for protection against

mechanical and electrical damage.

d) Armoring should be provided over the inner sheath to guard against mechanical damage.

Armouring should be Galvanised steel wires or galvanised steel strips. (In single core cables

used in A.C. system armouring should be non-magnetic hard aluminium Wires/Strips.

Round steel wires should be used where diameter over the inner sheath does not exceed 13

mm; above 13 mm flat steel armour should be used. Round wire of different sizes should

be provided against specific request.)




e) The outer sheath should be specially formulated heat resistant black PVC compound

conforming to the requirement of type ST2 of IS : 5831-1984 extruded to form the outer

sheath.

3.3.2 Conductor shall be of electrolytic Aluminium/Copper conforming to IS : 8130 and are compact

circular or compact shaped.

3.3.3 Insulation shall be of XLPE type as per latest IS general purpose insulation for maximum rated

conductor temperature 70 degree centigrade.

3.3.4 In Inner sheath laid up cores shall be bonded over with thermoplastic material for protection

against mechanical and electrical damage. Inner sheath shall be extruded type only.

3.3.5 Insulation, inner sheath and outer sheath shall be applied by extrusion process only.

3.3.6 Armouring shall be of galvanised steel wire/flat.

3.3.7 Repaired cables shall not be used.

3.3.8 Current ratings of the cables shall be as per IS : 3961.

3.3.9. The XLPE insulated cables shall conform to latest revision of IS and shall be read along with this

specifications. The Conductor shall be stranded Aluminium/Copper circular/ sector shaped and

compacted. In multi core cables the core shall be identified by red, yellow, blue and black coloring

of insulation.

3.3.10 The cables shall be suitable for laying in racks, ducts, trenches, conduits and underground buried

installation with uncontrolled back fill and chances of flooding by water.

3.3.11 Progressive automatic in line sequential marking of the length of cables in meters at every one

meter shall be provided on the outer sheath of all cables.

3.3.12 Cables shall be supplied in non returnable wooden drums as per IS : 10418.

Both ends of the cables shall be properly sealed with PVC/Rubber caps so as to eliminate ingress

of water during transportation, storage and erection.

3.3.13 The product should be coded as per IS :- 7098 Part-I as follows :-

Aluminium Conductor A

XLPE Insulation 2X




Steel round wire armour W

Steel strip armour F

Steel Double round wire armour WW

Steel Double strip armour FF

Non-magnetic (Al.) round wire armour Wa

Non-magnetic (Al.) strip armour Fa

PVC outer sheath Y

3.4 Inspection

All cables shall be inspected by the contractor upon receipt at site and checked for any damage during

transit.

3.5 Joints in Cables

The Contractor shall take care to see that all the cables received at site are apportioned to various

locations in such a manner as to ensure maximum utilization and avoid cable jointing. This

apportioning shall be got approved by the Owner‟s site representative before the cables are cut to

lengths. Where joints are unavoidable heat shrinkable type joints shall be made. The location of such

joints shall be got approved from the Owner‟s site representative and shall be identified through a

marker.

3.6 Jointing Boxes for Cables

Cable joint boxes shall be installed with heat shrinkable sleeve and of appropriate size, suitable for

XLPE armoured cables of particular voltage rating.

3.7 Jointing of Cables

All cable joints shall be made in suitable, approved cable joint boxes and the filling in of compound

shall be done in accordance with manufactures' instructions and in an approved manner. All straight

through joints shall be done in epoxy mould boxes with epoxy resin.

All cables shall be joined colour to colour and tested for continuity and insulation resistance before

jointing commence. The seals of cables must not be removed until preparations for jointing are

completed. Joints shall be finished on the same day as commenced and sufficient protection from

the weather shall be arranged. The conductors shall be efficiently insulated with high voltage

insulating tape and by using of spreaders of approved size and pattern. The joints shall be completely

topped up with epoxy compound so as to ensure that the box is properly filled.

3.8 Cable End Terminations




Cable end termination shall be done in cable terminal box using crimping sockets and proper size of

glands of double compression type

3.9 Bonding of Cables

Where a cable enters any piece of apparatus, it shall be connected to the casing by means of an

approved type of armour clamp and gland. The clamps must grip the armouring firmly to the gland or

casing, so that no undue stress is passed on to the cable conductors.

3.10 Cable Installation

Cables shall be laid by skilled and experienced workmen using adequate rollers to minimize

stretching of the cable. The cable drums shall be placed on jacks before unwinding the cable. Great

care shall be exercised in laying cables to avoid forming kinks.

3.10.1 Laying of Cables on Cable Trays

The relative position of the cables, laid on the cable tray shall be preserved and the cables shall not

cross each other. At all changes in direction in horizontal and vertical planes, the cable shall be bent

smooth with a radius as recommended by the manufacturer‟s. All cables shall be laid with minimum one

diameter gap and shall be clamped at every metre to the cable tray. Cables shall be tagged for

identification with aluminum tag and clamped properly at every 20M. Tags shall be provided at both

ends and all changes in directions both sides of wall and floor crossings. All cable shall be identified by

embossing on the tag the size of the cable, place of origin and termination.

All cables passing through holes in floor or walls shall be sealed with fire retardant Sealant and shall

be painted with fire retardant paint upto one meter on all joints, terminations and both sides of the

wall crossings by “VIPER CABLE RETARD”.

3.10.2 Laying of Cables in Ground

The width of trench for laying single cable shall be minimum 350 mm. Where more than one cable is

to be laid in horizontal formation, the width of the trench shall be workout by providing 200 mm gap

between the cables, except where otherwise specified. There shall be clearance of 150 mm between

the end cable and the side wall of the trench. The minimum depth of the cable trench shall not be less

than 750 mm for single layer of cables. When the cables are laid in more than one tier the depth of the

trench shall be increased by 300 mm for each additional tier.

Excavation of trenches : The trenches shall be excavated in reasonably straight lines. Wherever

there is a change in direction, suitable curvature shall be provided. Where gradients and changes in

depth are unavoidable, these shall be gradual. The excavated soil shall be stacked firmly by the side

of the trench such that it may not fall back into the trench. The bottom of the trench shall be levelled




and shall be made free from stone, brick bats etc. The trench shall then be provided with a layer of

clean, dry sand cushion of not less than 100 mm in depth. Prior to laying of cables, the cores shall be

tested for continuity and insulation resistance. The cable drum shall be properly mounted on jacks,

at a suitable location, making sure that the spindle, jack etc. are strong enough to carry the weight of

the drum and the spindle is horizontal. Cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench steadily and

uniformly without jerks and strains. The entire drum length shall be laid in one stretch. However,

where this is not possible the remainder of the cable shall be removed by `Flaking‟ i.e. by making

one long loop in the reverse direction. After the cable has been uncoiled and laid into the trench

over the rollers, the cable shall be lifted off the rollers beginning from one end by helpers standing

about 10 meters apart and laid in a reasonably straight line. Cable laid in trenches in a single tier

formation shall have a cover of clean, dry sand of not less than 150 mm. above the base cushion of

sand before the protective cover is laid. In the case of vertical multi-tier formation after the first

cable has been laid, a sand cushion of 300 mm shall be provided over the initial bed before the

second tier is laid. Finally the cables shall be protected by second class bricks before back filling the

trench. The buried depth of uppermost layer of cable shall not be less than 750mm.

Back Filling : The trenches shall be back filled with excavated earth free from stones or other sharp

edged debris and shall be rammed and watered, if necessary, in successive layers not exceeding

300 mm. Unless otherwise specified, a crown of earth not less than 50 mm in the centre and tapering

towards the sides of the trench shall be left to allow for subsidence.

3.11 Cables inside Building

Cables inside buildings shall be laid on the cable trays. All cables passing through walls shall run

through GI Pipes sleeves of adequate diameter 50 mm apart maintaining the relative position over the

entire length.

3.12 Route Marker

Route marker shall be provided along straight runs of the cables not exceeding 30 meters also for

change in the direction of the cable route and underground joints.

Route marker shall be of cast iron painted with aluminum paint. The size of marker shall be 100 mm dia

with “Cable” and voltage grade inscribed on it.

3.13 Cable Trays

Ladder and perforated type Cable Trays shall be of Hot dip Galvanized bolted type and factory

fabricated out of CRCA sheet with standard accessories like tee, bends, couplers etc. for different loads

and number and size of cables as given below :

Cable trays shall be galvanized as per Specification given under 3.14.




a. 1500 mm wide

Runners 25 x 100 x 25 x 3 mm

Rungs 2# 20 x 40 x 20 x 3 mm 250 mm C/C

Suspenders 2 Nos. 40 x 40 x 5 mm GI angle 1500 mm C/C with base support of 40x 40 x 5mm

GI angle.

b. 1200 mm wide


Rungs 2# 20 x 40 x 20 x 3 mm 250 mm C/C


GI angle.

c. 1000 mm wide


Rungs 2# 20 x 40 x 20 x 3 mm 250 mm C/C


GI angle.

d. 750 mm wide

Runners 20 x 75 x 20 x 2.5 mm

Rungs 20 x 30 x 20 x 2.5 mm 250 mm C/C


GI angle.

e. 600 mm wide


Rungs 20 x 30 x 20 x 2.5 mm 250 mm C/C


GI angle.

f. 450 mm wide


Rungs 20 x 30 x 20 x 2.5 mm 250 mm C/C


GI angle.

g. Supply and fixing of perforated type cable trays of the following sizes of pre-galvanized iron.

i. 600 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick

i. 450 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick




i. 300 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick

ii. 150 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick

Note : Suitable length of 10 mm dia GI rod suspenders at 1800 mm interval shall be included in the item

for perforated type cable tray.

3.14 Specification for Hot Dip Galvanizing Process (for Mild Steel Used For Earthing, Cable Trays Or Junction Boxes For Electrical Installation.)

General Requirements I. Quality of Zinc

Zinc to be used shall conform to minimum Zn 98 grade as per requirement of IS:209-1992.

II. Coating Requirement

Minimum weight of zinc coating for mild steel flats with thickness upto 6 mm in accordance with

IS:6745-1972 shall be 400 g/sqm.

The weight of coating expressed in grams per square metre shall be calculated by dividing the

total weight of Zinc by total area (both sides) of the coated surface.

The Zinc coating shall be uniform, smooth and free from imperfections as flux, ash and dross

inclusions, bare patches black spots, pimples, lumpiness, runs, rust stains bulky white deposits,

blisters.

Mild steel flats / wires shall undergo a process of degreasing pickling in acid, cold rinsing and

then galvanizing.

3.15 Fire retardant Cable Paint & Fire Barrier

The fire retardant paint / barrier shall be listed by independent test agencies such as UL, FM or OPL

and be tested to, and pass the criteria of ASTM E 814 ( UL1479) standard test method for fire test

through- penetration fire stops and ASTM E 1996 ( UL 2079) standard test method for fire resistive joint

system/

3.15.1 Fire retardant cable Paint




The Fire resistant cable coating / painting shall be intumescent / ablative, water based compound, The

coating shall expand up to 10 times, supplied in a manufacturer seal container indicating manufacturing

and expiry dates. The coating material shall be non-toxic, asbestos free, & halogen free and shall have

good mechanical strength. The colour of paint shall be white and density of coating shall be 1.3kg/ltr ,

coating shall have a snap time of 30 minutes, the expansion shall begin at 230 deg.C and it shall have a

oxygen index of 41%.

Coating shall be applied by ordinary paint brush after cleaning the cables of dust and oil deposition. A

minimum textured finish of 3 mm wet film thickness shall be achieved by applying the material in 2-3

layers leaving intervals of 2 to 8 hours depending upon the moisture and thickness, moisture and

temperature hours between each coat.

3.15.2 Fire Barrier sheet for floor and wall sealing

The framing & fixing part of fire barrier sheet shall be very simple & directly fixed around walls & floors

by help of anchored bolts & washer. For 2 hour fire rating the fire barrier sheet shall be minimum 7.62

mm thick and shall be cut as per the profile of penetration and opening. The small gap left around the

penetration shall be closed with fire rated soft & mouldable putty. Fire barrier must be design on the

intumescent technology to seal larger penetration through the fire rated walls & floors.Fire barrier must

be a composite construction with the quality incorporated with organic/ inorganic fire resistive

elastomeric sheet with specific gravity of 1.6 gm/ cubic centimeter.

3.16 Testing of Cables

Cables shall be tested at works for all routine tests as per IS including the following tests before being

dispatched to site by the project team.

a) Insulation Resistance Test.

b) Continuity resistance test.

c) Earth test.(in armoured cables)

d) Hi Pot Test.

Test shall also be conducted at site for insulation between phases and between phase and earth for

each length of cable, before and after jointing. On completion of cable laying work, the following tests

shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner‟s site representative.

a) Insulation Resistance Test( Sectional and overall)

b) Continuity resistance test.

c) Earth test.

All tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant Standard Code of Practice and Electricity




Rules. The Contractor shall provide necessary instruments, equipment and labour for conducting

the above tests and shall bear all expenses in connection with such tests. All tests shall be carried

out in the presence of the Owner‟s site representative, results will be noted and signed by all present

and record be maintained.

4(A) DISTRIBUTION PANELS/BOARDS

Main Distribution Panels, Sub-Distribution Panels and Final Distribution shall be covered under this

section. Panels/Boards shall be suitable for operation on 3 Phase/single phase, 415/240 volts, 50

cycles, 4 wire system with neutral grounded at transformer. All Distribution panels shall be CPRI tested

design and manufactured by a approved manufacturer. CPRI certificate shall be made available.

Distribution panels shall comply with the latest Relevant Indian Standards and Electricity Rules and

Regulations and shall be as per IS-13947-1993.

4.1 Construction Features

Distribution panels shall be 2 mm thick sheet steel cabinet for indoor installation, dead front, floor

mounting/wall mounting type and shall be form 3b construction. The Distribution panels shall be totally

enclosed, completely dust and vermin proof and shall be with hinged doors and folded covers,

Neoprene gasket, padlocking arrangement and bolted back. All removable/ hinged doors and covers

shall be grounded by flexible standard connectors. Distribution panel shall be suitable for the climatic

conditions as specified in Special Conditions. Steel sheets used in the construction of Distribution

panels shall be 2 mm thick and shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a rigid support for

all components. Joints of any kind in sheet metal shall be seam welded, all welding, slag shall be

rounded off and welding pits wiped smooth with plumber metal. The general construction shall confirm

to IS-8623-1977 (Part-1) for factory built assembled switchgear & control gear for voltage upto and

including 1100 V AC.

All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and square with the frame, and holes in the panel

correctly positioned. Fixing screws shall enter into holes tapped into an adequate thickness of metal

or provided with wing nuts. Self threading screws shall not be used in the construction of Distribution

panels. A base channel of 75 mm x 40 mm x 5 mm thick shall be provided at the bottom for floor

mounted panels. Minimum operating clearance of 275 mm shall be provided between the floor of

Distribution panels and the lowest operating height.

Distribution panels shall be of adequate size with a provision of spare switchgear as indicated on the

Single Line Diagram. Feeders shall be arranged in multi-tier. Knockout holes of appropriate size and

number shall be provided in the Distribution panels in conformity with the location of cable/conduit

connections. Removable sheet steel plates shall be provided at the top to make holes for additional

cable entry at site if required.




Every cabinet shall be provided with Trifoliate or engraved metal name plates. All panels shall be

provided with circuit diagram engraved on PVC sheet. All live accessible connections shall be

shrouded and shall be finger touch proof and minimum clearance between phase and earth shall be 20

mm and phase to phase shall be 25 mm.

4.2 Bus Bar Connections

Bus bar and interconnections shall be of high conductivity electrolytic grade tinned copper as

indicated in the bill of quantities complying with requirement of IS : 5082 – 1981 and of rectangular

cross section suitable for carrying the rated full load current and short circuit current and shall be

extendable on either side. Bus bars and interconnections shall be insulated with heat shrinkable

sleeve of 1.1 KV grade and shall be colour coded. Bus bars shall be supported on glass fiber

reinforced thermosetting plastic insulated supports at regular intervals to withstand the force arising

from in case of short circuit in the system. All bus bars shall be provided in a separate chamber and

all connections shall be done by bolting. Additional cross sectional area to be added to the bus bar

to compensate for the holes. All connections between bus bars and breakers shall be through solid

Tinned copper strips of proper size to carry full rated current and insulated with insulating sleeves.

Maximum current density for the busbars shall be 0.8 A/sq.mm for aluminium and 1.4 A/sq.mm for

copper busbars.

Maximum allowable temperature for the Bus bar to be restricted to 85 deg C

4.2.1 Temperature - Rise Limit

Unless otherwise specified, in the case of external surface of enclosures of bus bar compartment which

shall be accessible but do not need to be touched during normal operation, maximium temperature rise

limits of 25° C above ambient temperature shall be permissible for metal surface and of 15° C above

ambient temperature for insulating surfaces.

All main distribution panels and sub distribution panels shall be provided with MCCB of appropriate

capacity as per Single Line Diagram. All final Distribution boards shall be provided with Miniature

Circuit Breakers. Final Single Phase Distribution boards shall be connected to the incoming supply

through double pole MCB units & earth leakage circuit breakers. All wiring for final distribution boards

shall be concealed behind 5 mm thick bakelite sheet or M S sheet cover. All Distribution boards shall

be completely factory wired, ready for connection. All the terminals shall be of proper current rating

and sized to suit individual feeder requirements. Each circuit shall be clearly numbered from left to

right to correspond with wiring diagram. All the switches and circuits shall be distinctly marked with a

small description of the service installed.

Continuous earth bus sized for prospective fault current shall be provided with arrangement for

connecting to station earth at two points. Hinged doors/ frames shall be connected to earth through

adequately sized flexible braids.




4.3 Cable Compartments

Cable compartment of adequate size shall be provided in the Distribution panels for easy clamping

of all incoming and outgoing cables entering from the top/bottom. Adequate supports shall be

provided in cable compartment to support cables.

4.4 Air Circuit Breakers (ACB)

4.4.1 The ACB shall conform to the requirements of IEC 60947-2 / IS 13947-2 and shall be type tested &

certified for compliance to standards from–CPRI, ERDA/ any accredited international lab. The circuit

breaker shall be suitable for 415 V + 10%, 50 Hz supply system. Air Circuit Breakers shall be with

moulded housing flush front, draw out type and shall be provided with a trip free manual operating

mechanism or as indicated in drawings and bill of quantities with mechanical "ON" "OFF" “TRIP”

indications.

The ACB shall be 3/ 4 pole with modular construction, draw out, manually or electrically operated

version as specified. The circuit breakers shall be for continuous rating and service short Circuit

Breaking capacity (Ics) shall be as specified on the single line diagram and should be equal to the

Ultimate breaking capacity(Icu) and short circuit withstand values(Icw) for 1 sec.

Circuit breakers shall be designed to „close' and `trip' without opening the circuit breaker compartment

door. The operating handle and the mechanical trip push button shall be at the front of the breakers

panel. Inspection of main contacts should be possible without using any tools. The ACB shall be

provided with a door interlock. i.e. door should not be open when circuit breaker is closed and breaker

should not be closed when door is open.

All current carrying parts shall be silver plated and suitable arcing contacts with proper arc chutes

shall be provided to protect the main contacts. The ACB shall have double insulation (Class-II) with

moving and fixed contacts totally enclosed for enhanced safety and in accessibility to live parts. All

electrical closing breaker shall be with electrical motor wound stored energy spring closing mechanism

with mechanical indicator to provide ON/OFF status of the ACB.

The auxiliary contacts blocks shall be so located as to be accessible from the front. The auxiliary

contacts in the trip circuits shall close before the main contacts have closed. All other contacts shall

close simultaneously with the main contacts. The auxiliary contacts in the trip circuits shall open

after the main contacts open. Minimum 4 NO and 4 NC auxiliary contacts shall be provided on each

breaker.

Rated insulation voltage shall be 1000 volts AC.




4.4.2 Cradle

The cradle shall be so designed and constructed as to permit smooth withdrawal and insertion of the

breaker into it. The movements shall be free from jerks, easy to operate and shall be on steel

balls/rollers and not on flat surfaces.

There shall be 4 distinct and separate position of the circuit breaker on the cradle.

Racking Interlock in Connected/Test/Disconnected Position.

Service Position : Main Isolating contacts and control contacts of the breaker

are engaged.

Test Position : Main Isolating contacts are isolated but control contacts

are still engaged.

Isolated Position : Both main isolating and control contacts are isolated.

There shall be provision for locking the breaker in any or all of the first three positions.

The following safety features shall be incorporated :

a. Withdrawal or engagement of Circuit breaker shall not be possible unless it is in open condition.

b. Operation of Circuit breaker shall not be possible unless it is fully in service, test or drawn out

position.

c. All modules shall be provided with safety shutters operated automatically by movement of the

carriage to cover exposed live parts when the module is withdrawn.

d. All Switchgear module front covers shall have provision for locking.

e. Switchgear operating handles shall be provided with arrangement for locking in „OFF‟ position.

4.4.3 Protections

The breaker should be equipped with micro-controller based , communicable type release with RS 485

port for communication to offer accurate and versatile protection with complete flexibility and shall offer

complete over current protection to the electrical system in the following four zones :

Long time protection.

Short time protection with intentional delay.




Instantaneous protection.

Ground fault protection.

The protection release shall generally have following features and settings however for exact requirement of

protection releases, reference shall be made to SOQ:

a. True RMS Sensing

The release shall sample the current at the rate of 16 times per cycle to monitor the actual load

current waveform flowing in the system and shall monitor the true RMS value of the load

current. It shall take into account the effect of harmonics also.

b. Thermal Memory

When the breaker shall reclose after tripping on overload, then the thermal stresses caused by

the overload if not dissipated completely, shall get stored in the memory of the release and this

thermal memory shall ensure reduced tripping time in case of subsequent overloads. Realistic

Hot/Cold curves shall take into account the integrated heating effects to offer closer protection

to the system.

c. Defined time-current characteristics :

A variety of pick-up and time delay settings shall be available to define the current thresholds

and the delays to be set independently for different protection zones thereby achieving a close-

to-ideal protection curve.

d. Trip Indication

Individual fault indication for each type of fault should be provided by LEDs for faster fault

diagnosis.

e. Self powered

The release shall draw its power from the main breaker CTs and shall require no external power

supply for its operation.

f. Zone Selective Interlocking

The release shall be suitable for communication between breakers to enable zone selective

interlocking. This feature shall be provided for both short circuit and ground fault protection

zones to offer intelligent discrimination between breakers. This feature enables faster clearance

of fault conditions, thereby reducing the thermal and dynamic stresses produced during fault

conditions and thus minimises the damage to the system.To implement ZSI manufacturer

should supply all related equipment like power supply, wiring etc.

On-Line change of settings should be possible. It should be possible to carry out testing of

release without tripping the breaker.




g. The release shall meet the EMI / EMC requirements.

h. The setting range of release shall be generally as follows :

SETTING RANGE OF RELEASE

Type of Protection

PICK-UP CURRENT

TIME DELAY

Long Time 0.4 to 1.0 times In (Ir)

Steps : 0.4, 0.5, 0.55, 0.60,

0.65, 0.70, 0.75, 0.80, 0.85,

0.90, 0.95, 1.00.

Operating Limit : 1.05 to 1.2

times Ir

0.5 to 30 sec at 6 Ir

Steps 0.5,1, 2,4, 6,

8,12,18,24 and 30 secs

Tolerance : Corresponding to

±10% of current.

Short Time 2 to 10 times Ir

Steps : 2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 & 10

Tolerance : ±10%

20 ms to 600 ms

Steps

20,60,100,160,200,260,300

400,500 and 600 ms

Tolerance : ±10% or 20ms

whichever is higher

Instantaneous 2 to 12 times In

Steps : 2,3,4,6,8,10,12

Tolerance : ±10%

Ground Fault 0.2 to 0.6 time In

Steps : 0.2,0.3,0.4,0.5,0.6

Tolerance : ±10%

100 ms to 400 ms

Steps : 100,200,300,400ms

Tolerance : +10% or 20 ms

whichever is higher.

All incomer ACBs shall have following additional protections other than mentioned above.

Under and over voltage

Under and over frequency




Restricted Earth Fault protection

Trip Circuit supervision with PS class CT‟s.

Undercurrent, ( for DG set only)

Reverse power ( for DG set only)

Phase sequence reversal ( for DG set only)

Load shedding and reconnection thru programmable contacts.

Release should display the Contact wear indication.

The release should provide local indication of actual %age loading at any instant. The release should

be able to communicate on MODBUS RTU protocol using inbuilt RS485 port and shall be integral part of

supply with trip unit.Parameters of the Protection Release should be changeable from Release as well

as thru communication network. Release should have graphical LCD for display of power parameters.

The release of incoming breakers should provide comprehensive metering with the following

parameters

Phase currents (running, avg & max) – All parameters in single window.

Release should be able to capture short circuit current on which ACB has tripped. The last ten trips

and alarms shall be stored in memory with the date & time stamping along with type of fault and

alarm. The sensing CT Should be Rogowsky type with measurement precision of 1%.

Release should be self powered .

Release should have facility to select different type of IDMTL protection(DT,SIT,VIT,EIT,HVF) for

better co-ordination with HT Breaker/Fuse.

Phase voltages (running, avg & max)

Energy & power parameters (active, reactive and apparent)

PF

Frequency

Maximum Demand ( KVA & KW)

Total Harmonics distortion

All O/G ACBs shall have following functions.




Protection

The ACB control unit shall offer the following protection functions as standard:

Long-time (LT) protection with an adjustable current setting and time delay;

Short-time (ST) protection with an adjustable pick-up and time delay;

instantaneous (INST) protection with an adjustable pick-up and an OFF

Position.

Current and time delay setting shall be indicated in amperes and seconds respectively

On a digital display.

Earth-fault protection with an adjustable pick-up and time delay shall be provided if indicated on the

appended single-line diagram.

Measurements

An ammeter with a digital display shall indicate the true rms values of the currents for each

phase.Release shall acknowledge the current & time delay settings done by user on the LCD

display.

A LED bargraph shall simultaneously display the load level on the three phases.

A maximeter shall store in memory and display the maximum current value observed since the last

reset. The data shall continue to be stored and displayed even after opening of the circuit breaker.

4.4.4 Safety Features

I. The safety shutter shall prevent inadvertent contact with isolating contacts when breaker is

withdrawn from the Cradle.

II. It shall not be possible to interchange two circuit breakers of two different thermal ratings. For

Draw-out breakers, an arrangement shall be provided to prevent rating mismatch between

breaker and cradle.

III. There shall be provision of positive earth connection between fixed and moving portion of the

ACB either thru connector plug or sliding solid earth mechanism. Earthing bolts shall be

provided on the cradle or body of fixed ACB.

IV. The incoming panel accommodating ACB shall be provided with indicating lamps for ON-OFF

positions, digital voltmeter and ammeter of size not less than 96 mm x 96 mm, selector

switches, MCB for protection circuit and measuring instrument circuits.

V. It shall be possible to bolt the draw out frame not only in connected position but also in TEST

and DISCONNECTED position to prevent dislocation due to vibration and shocks.




VI. Draw out breakers should not close unless in distinct Service/Test/Isolated positions.

VII. The insulation material used shall conform to Glow wire test as per IEC60695.

VIII. The ACB shall provide in built electrical and mechanical anti-pumping.

IX. All EDO ACB`s Shall have Ready to Close Contact to ensure that the ACB gets a command

only when it is ready to close for applications of Remote Control, AMF, Synchronization and

Auto Source Change Over Systems.

4.5 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

The MCCB should be current limiting type with trip time of less than 10 msec under short circuit

conditions. The MCCB should be either 3 or 4 poles as specified in BOQ. MCCB shall comply with the

requirements of the relevant standards IS13947 – Part 2/IEC 60947-2 and should have test certificates

for Breaking capacities from independent test authorities CPRI / ERDA or any accredited international

lab.

MCCB shall comprise of Quick Make -break switching mechanism, arc extinguishing device and the

tripping unit shall be contained in a compact, high strength, heat resistant, flame retardant, insulating

moulded case with high withstand capability against thermal and mechanical stresses

The breaking capacity of MCCB shall be as specified in the schedule of quantities. The rated service

breaking capacity (Ics) should be equal to rated ultimate breaking capacities (Icu). MCCBs for motor

application should be selected in line with Type-2 Co-ordination as per IEC-60947-2, 1989/IS 13947-2.

The breaker as supplied with ROM should meet IP54 degree of protection.

4.5.1 Current Limiting & Coordination

The MCCB shall employ maintenance free minimum let-through energies and capable of

achieving discrimination up to the full short circuit capacity of the downstream MCCB. The

manufacturer shall provide both the discrimination tables and let-through energy curves for all.

Protection Functions

MCCBs with Thermal-magnetic shall have adjustable thermal for overload and fixed magnetic

for short-circuit protection.

Microprocessor MCCBs shall be equipped with microprocessor based trip units having

complete LSIG protections.




Microprocessor and thermal-magnetic trip units shall be adjustable and it shall be possible to fit

lead seals to prevent unauthorised access to the settings

Microprocessor trip units shall comply with appendix F of IEC 60947-2 standard (measurement

of rms current values, electromagnetic compatibility, etc.)

Protection settings shall apply to all poles of circuit breaker.

All Microprocessor components shall withstand temperatures up to 125 °C

4.5.2 Testing

a) Original test certificate of the MCCB as per IEC 60947-1 &2 or IS13947 shall be furnished.

b) Pre-commissioning tests on the switch board panel incorporating the MCCB shall be done as per

standard specifications.

4.5.3 Interlocking

Moulded, case circuit breakers shall be provided with the following interlocking devices for interlocking

the door of a switch board.

a) Handle interlock to prevent unnecessary manipulations of the breaker.

b) Door interlock to prevent the door being opened when the breaker is in ON position.

c) Defeat-interlocking device to open the door even if the breaker is in ON position.

The MCCB shall be current limiting type and comprise of quick make – Break switching

mechanism. MCCBs shall be capable of defined variable overload adjustment. All MCCBs

rated 200 Amps and above shall have adjustable over load & short circuit pick-up both in

Thermal magnetic and Microprocessor Trip Units.

All MCCB with microprocessor based release unit shall have LSI protection. Also wherever

specified in BOQ ground fault protection shall be integral part of the microprocessor based

release and neutral CT shall be provided incase of Triple pole breaker. Adjustable Overload,

Short circuit and earth fault protection with time delay shall be provided.

The trip command shall override all other commands.

4.6 Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB)

Motor circuit breakers shall conform to the general recommendations of standard IEC 947 -1,2 and 4

(VDE 660, 0113 NF EN 60 947-1-2-4, BS 4752) and to standards UL 508 and CSA C22-2 N°14.




The devices shall be in utilization category A, conforming to IEC 947-2 and AC3 conforming

to IEC 947-4.MPCB shall have a rated operational and insulation voltage of 690V AC (50 Hz) and

MPCB shall be suitable for isolation conforming to satandrd IEC 60947-2 and shall have a rated impulse

withstand voltage (Uimp) of 6 kV. The motor circuit breakers shall be designed to be mounted vertically

or horizontally without derating. Power supply shall be from the top or from the bottom.In order to

ensure maximum safety, the contacts shall be isolated from other functions such as the operating

mechanism, casing, releases, auxiliaries, etc, by high performance thermoplastic chambers.The

operating mechanism of the motor circuit breakers must have snap action opening and closing with free

tripping of the control devices. All the poles shall close, open, and trip simultaneously.The motor circuit

breakers shall accept a padlocking device in the “isolated” position.

The motor circuit breakers shall be equipped with a “PUSH TO TRIP” device on the front enabling the

correct operation of the mechanism and poles opening to be checked.The auxiliary contacts shall be

front or side mounting, and both arrangements shall be possible.The front-mounting attachments shall

not change the breaker surface area. Depending on its mounting direction the single pole contact block

could be NO or NC.All the electrical auxiliaries and accessories shall be equipped with terminal blocks

and shall be plug-in type.The motor circuit breakers shall have a combination with the downstream

contactor enabling the provision of a perfectly co-ordinated motor-starter. This combination shall enable

type 1 or type 2 co-ordination of the protective devices conforming to IEC 60947-4-1.Type 2 co-

ordination shall be guaranteed by tables tested and certified by an official laboratory: LOVAG (or other

official laboratory).The motor circuit breakers, depending on the type, could be equipped with a door-

mounted operator which shall allow the device setting.The motor circuit breakers shall be equipped with

releases comprising a thermal element assuring overload protection and a magnetic element for short-

circuit protection.In order to ensure safety and avoid unwanted tripping, the magnetic trip threshold

(fixed) shall be factory set to an average value of 12 Ir.

All the elements of the motor circuit breakers shall be designated to enable operation at an ambient

temperature of 60°C without derating.The thermal trips shall be adjustable on the the front by a rotary

selector.The adjustment of the protection shall be simultaneous for all poles.Phase unbalance and

phase loss detection shall be available.Temperature compensation (-20°C to +60°C)

4.7 Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB)

Miniature Circuit Breaker shall comply with IS-8828-1996/IEC898-1995. Miniature circuit breakers shall

be quick make and break type for 240/415 VAC 50 Hz application with magnetic thermal release for

over current and short circuit protection. The breaking capacity shall not be less than 10 KA at 415 VAC.

MCBs shall be DIN mounted. The MCB shall be Current Limiting type (Class-3). MCBs shall be

classified (B,C,D ref IS standard) as per their Tripping Characteristic curves defined by the

manufacturer. The MCB shall have the minimum power loss (Watts) per pole defined as per the IS/IEC

and the manufacturer shall publish the values.MCB shall ensure complete electrical isolation &

downstream circuit or equipment when the MCB is switched OFF.




The housing shall be heat resistant and having a high impact strength. The terminals shall be protected

against finger contact to IP20 Degree of protection. All DP, TP, TPN and 4 Pole miniature circuit

breakers shall have a common trip bar independent to the

external operating handle.

Coordination Study in LV Network

LV Switchgear Manufacturer shall submit coordinated & Discriminated solution for LV Network

protection devices i.e. ACB, MCCB, MPCB & MCB for all Incoming and outgoing devices for all Panels/

DB`s as per BOQ with the help of published discrimination tables. Total discrimination shall be provided

up to the short circuit breaking capacity of most down stream circuit Breakers .

4.8 Residual Current Circuit Breaker Current Operated Type (RCCB)

I. System of Operation

Residual Current Circuit Breaker shall confirm to IEC 61008.RCCB shall work on the principle of core

balance transformer. The incoming shall pass through the torroidal core transformer. As long as the

currents in the phase and neutral shall be the same, no electro motive force shall be generated in

the secondary winding of the transformer. In the event of a leakage to earth, an unbalance shall be

created which shall cause a current to be generated in the secondary winding, this current shall

be fed to a highly sensitive miniature relay, which shall trip the circuit if the earth leakage current

exceeds a predetermined critical value. RCCB shall be current operated independent of the line

voltage, current sensitivity shall be of 30 mA at 240/415 volts AC and shall have a minimum of 20,000

electrical operations.

II. Mechanical Operation

The moving contacts of the phases shall be mounted on a common bridge, actuated by a rugged

toggle mechanism. Hence, the closing /opening of all the three phases shall occur simultaneously.

This also shall ensure simultaneous opening of all the contacts under tripping conditions.

III. Neutral Advance Feature

The neutral moving contact shall be so mounted on the common bridge that, at the time of closing, the

neutral shall make contact First before the phases; and at the time of opening, the neutral shall

breaks last after allowing the phases to open first. This is an important safety feature which is also

required by regulations.

IV. Testing Provision




A test device shall be incorporated to check the integrity of the earth leakage detection system and

the tripping mechanism. When the unit is connected to service, pressing the test knob shall trip the

ELCB / RCCB and the operating handle shall move to the "OFF" position.

4.9 Earthing

Earthing shall be provided as per IS: 3043-1987.

4.10 Painting

All sheet steel work shall undergo a process of degreasing, pickling in acid, cold rinsing,

phosphating, passivaiting (seven tank processing) and then painted with electrostatic paint (Powder

coating). The shade of colour of panel inside/outside shall be as per BOQ confirming to IS Code No.5.

4.11 Labels

Engraved PVC labels shall be provided on all incoming and outgoing feeder. Circuit diagram showing

the arrangements of the circuit inside the distribution panels shall be pasted on inside of the panel

door and covered with transparent plastic sheet.

4.12 Meters

i. All voltmeters and indicating lamps shall be through MCB‟s.

ii. Meters and indicating instruments shall be flush type.

iii. All CT‟s connection for meters shall be through Test Terminal Block (TTB).

iv. CT ratio and burdens shall be as specified on the Single line diagram.

4.13 Current Transformers

Current transformers shall be provided for Distribution panels carrying current in excess of 60 amps.

All phase shall be provided with current transformers of suitable VA burden with 5 amps

secondaries for operation of associated metering.

The CTs shall confirm to relevant Indian Standards. The design and construction shall be dry type,

epoxy resin cast/ Flame Retardent resin filled Nylon type robust to withstand thermal and dynamic

stresses during short circuits. Metering CTs, shall have inbuilt busbar mounting arrangement.

Secondary terminals of CTs shall be brought out suitable to a terminal block which shall be easily

accessible for testing and terminal connections. The secondary terminal should be covered with

insulation cap/cover so that there should not be any possibility of touching the live terminal. The

protection CTs shall be of accuracy class 5P10 and measurement CTs shall be of accuracy class I.




4.14 Potential Free Contacts

Potential free contacts shall be provided for connection to Building Automation System in panels

indicated in Schedule of Quantities.

4.15 Indicating Panel

All meters and indicating instruments shall be in accordance with relevant Indian Standards. Meters

shall be flush mounted type. Indicating lamps shall be of low burden, and shall be backed up with 2

amps MCB/MPCB as per relevant fault level and toggle switch.

4(B) FINAL DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (FDB‟s)

Final Distribution Boards (FDBs) shall be suitable for operation on 3 Phase/single phase,

415/240 volts, 50 cycles, neutral grounded at transformer. The DB shall be minimum di-electric strength

of 2.5 KV / Sec. All Distribution Boards shall manufactured by a manufacturer listed in Appendix-I.

FDB‟s shall comply with the latest Relevant Indian Standards and Electricity Rules and Regulations

and shall be as per IS-13947-1993.

4.1 Construction Features

FDB‟s shall be made out of 1.6 mm thick ( for residential project FDB shall be of minimum 1.2 mm thick

) high quality CRCA sheet steel and shall be pre-treated and powder coated sheet steel used in the

construction of FDB shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a rigid support for all

component. FDB shall be suitable for indoor / outdoor installation, wall mounting free standing type, in

double door construction. The Final Distribution Boards shall be totally enclosed, completely dust and

vermin proof and shall be with hinged doors, Neoprene gasket, padlocking arrangement. All

removable/ hinged doors and covers shall be grounded by 4.0 sqm tinned stranded copper connectors.

Final Distribution Boards shall be suitable for the climatic conditions. Joints of any kind in sheet metal

shall be seam welded, all welding, slag shall be rounded off and welding pits wiped smooth with

plumber metal. The general construction shall confirm to IS-8623-1977 (Part-1) for factory built

assembled switchgear & control gear for voltage upto and including 1100 V AC.

All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and square with the frame, and holes in the panel

correctly positioned. Fixing screws shall enter into holes tapped into an adequate thickness of metal

or provided with wing nuts. Self threading screws shall not be used in the construction of FDBs.

Knockout holes of appropriate size and number shall be provided in the FDB‟s in conformity with the

location of cable/conduit connections. Detachable sheet steel gland plates shall be provided at the




top / bottom to make holes for additional cable entry at site if required.

Final Distribution Boards shall comprises of the following:

4.1.1.1 A panel for mounting where appropriate incoming supply circuit breaker & other auxiliaries for Control &

distribution as required.

4.1.1.2 Installation accessories shall be part of the DB for fixing conductor and rails for mounting MCB‟s and

RCCB‟s etc.. neutral bus bars & earthing bus bars required in the circuit.All busbars in the FDB shall be

insulated type.

4.1.1.3 Service cable /enterconnection shall be part of the Distribution Boards.

4.1.1.4 The board shall be installed at a height such that the operating is within reach of the normal human

height i.e. 1.2 to 1.8 meters from finish floor level.

4.1.1.5 Degree of protection shall be IP-42 for indoor application, IP-65 for kitchen & laundry and IP-65 for

outdoor application.

4.1.1.6 All three phase distribution boards shall have 4 rows and single phase distribution boards shall have

single rows for housing of MCB‟s and RCCB‟s unless noted otherwise.

4.1.1.7 Phase segregation to be maintained in all three phase distribution boards.

4.1.1.8 Earthing shall be provided in each FDB‟s.

4.1.2 Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB)

For specifications refer Section 4A, clause 4.7

4.1.3 Residual Current Circuit Breaker Current Operated Type (RCCB)

For specifications refer Section 4A, clause 4.8

4.1.4 Earthing

Earthing shall be provided as per IS:3043-1987.

4.1.5 Painting

All sheet steel work shall undergo a process of degreasing, pickling in acid, cold rinsing,

phosphating, passivaiting (seven tank processing) and then painted with electrostatic paint (Powder




coating). The shade of colour of panel inside/outside shall be of Siemens gray paint shade no. RAL-

7032 of IS Code No.5.

4.1.6 Labels

Engraved PVC labels shall be provided on all incoming and outgoing feeder. Circuit diagram showing

the arrangements of the circuit inside the distribution panels shall be pasted on inside of the panel door

and covered with transparent plastic sheet.

4.1.7 Testing

Testing of panels shall be as per following codes:

I. IS: 8623 (Part -I) 1977 for factory built assemblies of switch gear for voltages upto and including

1000 VAC.

II. IS: 13947 : 1993 Degree of protection

4.1.8 Wiring

In wiring a distribution panel it shall be insured that total load of various distribution panel and/or

consuming devices is divided evenly between the phases and number of ways as per Consultants

drawing.

5. RISING MAINS

5.1 Sandwiched Construction

5.1.1 Scope:

The specification covers design, manufacturing, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of

Sandwich type busbar trunking for use as feeder busbars for interconnection between separate

electrical equipment / load centers, and for use as plug in busbar risers.

5.1.2 System details:

The busduct shall be suitable for operation in a 600/1000V system, with frequency of 50 Hz having

100% neutral and internal earth. The bus duct shall be designed for an ambient of 40 deg C (35 deg C

average over a period of 24 hours) as per IS 8623.

5.1.3 Standards:




The busbar shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with the following international

standards for busbar trunking:

BS 5486 Part 2 : Particular requirements of busbar trunking systems

IEC 60439 –2 : Particular requirements of busbar trunking systems

IEC 60529 : Degree of protection

The bus duct shall conform to IEE/NEMA/BUI/JIS for seismic protection certification.

5.1.4 Testing:

The busbars shall be type tested at a reputed international test laboratory (ASTA or CPRI) for short

circuit withstand. The test shall be for a minimum duration of 1 second. Tests shall be performed over a

range of current ratings, covering the different frame sizes of the manufacturer.

Degree of ingress protection (IP rating) shall also be tested at any reputed independent laboratory. This

test shall be for IP54 for indoor application and IP65 for outdoor application for sandwiched busbars.

5.1.5 Manufacturer:

The manufacturer must have an established track record in design and manufacture of sandwich and

cast resin busbar trunking, and must have supplied busbar systems for at least 5-10 years.

The manufacturer must have ISO 9001 certification for design, manufacture and testing of busbar

systems.

5.1.6 Design & Construction requirements – Sandwich busbars

General: The busbars shall be of sandwich construction, non-ventilated design. It shall be possible to

mount the busbar system in any orientation, without affecting the current rating.

The bus duct shall consist of three phases and neutral bus bar permanently positioned dust and vermin

proof and the degree of enclosure protection shall be IP 54 for indoor installation and shall be IP-65 for

outdoor installation as per schedule of quantities.

Busbars: The busbars shall of high conductivity Copper, or Aluminum, as specified in the tender.

Unless otherwise specified, in the external surface of enclosures of bus bar compartment which shall be

accessible but do not need to be touched during normal operation, maximium temperature rise limits of

40° C above ambient temperature shall be permissible for metal surface and of 50° C above ambient

temperature for insulating surfaces as per IS 8623(Part-1) 1993




Where an earth conductor is required, it shall be a separate, integral earth conductor, of the same high

conductivity material as per clause 7.4.3.1.7 of IS 8623 or IEC 60439. In addition to this, enclosure

shall have fixing arrangement to install 2 nos. of external earth strip along the run of the bus duct.

It shall be possible to provide a 200% Neutral where specified.

Insulation:

The busbars shall be insulated throughout their length by epoxy coating / Mylar. The insulation material

used shall be of minimum Class F (155 deg. C). The insulation must comply to UL 94 V-O.It shall be

Halogen Free.

Housing:

The housing shall be made of electro-galvanized sheet steel, with an epoxy powder coated paint finish.

The housing shall be profiled, to provide higher strength and efficient heat dissipation. The width of the

housing shall preferably be the same for all ratings of busbars, in order to provide interchangeability of

tap off boxes.

Joints:

The joints between sections shall be made so as to provide flexibility during installation and expansion /

contraction of busbar during operation. The joints shall be of the single bolt type

The joint construction must have the following features.

Heat expansion of at least 3mm per joint.

The joint insulation must be of one piece molded design and not have any cut edges which can

absorb moisture.

The joint construction must allow a +/- 14mm adjustment at the time of installation, for ease of

adjusting to site measurement variations.

The joint bolt must be insulated with a bolt insulator. The bolt insulator must be of molded one

piece.

The joint system must be designed in a way that the installer cannot insert the busduct length too

far and damage the bolt insulator.




The busbar ends shall not have holes or slots at the joints – the electrical continuity shall be

through pressure plates, achieving a high area of joint cross section and expansion capability.

It shall be possible to install and remove the joints without disturbing the busbar run.

5.1.7 Tap off units:

Where specified, tap off locations shall be provided for insertion of plug in tap off units. The tap off

locations shall be covered by hinged plates.

Tap off units safety features:

When the door cover is open, it should not be possible to turn the MCCB on. This should be by means

of mechanical safety locking system and not by the rotary handle of the MCCB.

The door shall be provided with a lock and keys.

When the lever is in „on‟ position, even with the key unlocked, the operator should not be able to remove

the box or open the tap off location cover.

During insertion, the earth conductor shall make contact first before the phase conductors. This should

follow the sequence of first in last out concept.

The tap off unit handle shall be flexible in the sense that the „on/off‟ handle can be attached to the left or

right side of the box or in front, depending on the site situation.

When the box is open the live conductors shall be safe guarded by a transparent insulator plate which

allows for visible inspection but does not allow touching of the live conductors.

In the event of a MCCB requiring maintenance or changing, the mechanical interlocking must allow easy

access by removing only the front plate and not interrupting the adjacent linkages.

For IP65 bus-trunking, the tap off unit arrangement also must achieve IP65 and for inddor installation

IP-52, without requiring any additional sealing at site. The complete arrangement with the tap off unit

shall be tested for IP rating by an independent test authority.

The tap off boxes will be suitable for accommodating MCCBs or other accessories, as required. The tap

off units should allow the flexibility of accommodating different, reputed MCCB makes, to be mutually

agreed depending on the tender requirements.

o Accessories: A full range of accessories like bends, end flanges, end feed units, and support brackets

etc. shall be available

Installation




Bus ducts running along the wall shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 1.5 m. In case of

branching, there shall be support on all branches at a distance of 300 mm from the point of branching,

Support shall not be less than 40 x 40 x 6 mm MS angle secured in an approved manner. Supports may

also be provided in the form of brackets fixed to walls where the duct runs along the wall. In case of

ceiling suspended bus ducts, supports made out of 40x40x6 mm MS angle iron shall be provided. The

horizontal distance between two such supports shall not be more than 1200 mm. The ducts supports

shall be suspended from suitable approved suspension devices provided in the ceiling. Fire barrier shall

be provided at each floor/wall crossing as per relevant IS code

Test at Site

The following tests shall be carried out at site and test results to be recorded :

a. Insulation resistance shall be tested with 1000 V megger and shall be not less than 100 mega

ohms..

b. Earth continuity test

5.1.8 Data sheet:

TECHNICAL DATA FOR RISING MAINS :-

TENDERER MUST FILL IN THE FOLLOWING TECHNICAL DATA

a. Busduct material & thickness :

b. Busbar material and size :

c: Class of insulation :

d; Material of insulation :

e. Maximum bus bar temperature at full load under steady state condition :

f. Resistance in ohm per meter, R20 :

g. Reactance in ohms per meter, X20 :

h. Degree of protection for busduct including all joints :

i. Degree of protection for tap off boxes :




6. EARTHING

6.1 Earthing

The system shall be TNS with four wire supply system (R,Y,B,N and 2 Nos. E) brought from the main L

T Panel. All the non-current carrying metal parts of electrical installation and all metal conduits

trunking, cable sheaths, switchgear, distribution panels, light fittings and all other parts made of

metal shall be bonded together and connected by means of specified earthing conductors to an

efficient earthing system. All metal work such as pipe lines, ducts, cable trays, stair case railing etc

shall be bonded to earth.

All earthing shall be in conformity with IS:3043 1987, and the basic system of earthing shall be TNS.

6.2 Earthing Conductors

Earthing conductors shall be of copper / GI as mentioned in schedule of quantities and shall be

protected against mechanical injury and corrosion.

6.3 Sizing of Earthing Conductors

The cross sectional area of earthing conductor shall not be smaller than half of the largest current

carrying conductor subject to an upper limit of 80 Sq.mm. If the area of the largest current carrying

conductor or bus bar exceeds 160 sq.mm then two or more earthing conductors shall be used in

parallel, to provide at least half the cross sectional area of the current carrying conductor or bus bars.

All fixtures, outlet boxes, junction boxes and power circuits upto 15 amps shall be earthed with PVC

insulated copper wire.

6.4 Connection of Earthing Conductors

Main earthing conductors shall be taken from the earth connections at the main L T panel to an earth

electrode with which the connection is to be made. All joints in tapes shall be with four rivets and

shall be brazed in case of copper and by welding bolting in case of GI, wires shall be connected with

crimping lugs, all bolts shall have spring washers. Sub- mains earthing conductors shall run from the

main distribution panel to the sub distribution panel. Final distribution panel earthing conductors

shall run from sub-distribution panel.

Circuit earthing conductor shall run from the exposed metal of equipment and shall be connected to

any point on the main earthing conductor, or its distribution panel. Metal conduits, cable sheathing

and armouring shall be earthed at the ends adjacent to distribution panel at which they originate, or

otherwise at the commencement of the run by an earthing conductor in effective electrical contact

with cable sheathing. Where equipment is connected by flexible cord, all exposed metal parts of the

equipment shall be earthed by means of an earthing conductor enclosed with the current carrying




conductors within the flexible cord. Switches, accessories, lighting fitting etc. which are rigidly secured

in effective electrical contact with a run of metallic conduit shall not be considered as a part of the

earthing conductor for earthing purposes, even though the run of metallic conduit is earthed. The

installation shall be complete in all respects for efficient and trouble free service. All work shall be

carried out in a first class quality and neat workmanship. Grounding conductors shall be handled

carefully to avoid kinking and cutting of the conductors during their installation. All exposed ground

conductors run shall be taken in a neat manner horizontal, vertical and parallel to the building walls or

columns and shall not be laid haphazardly. All connections to the grounding grid shall be made with

earthing strip welded to grid and bolted at equipment ends.

6.5 Prohibited Connections

Neutral conductor, sprinkler pipes, or pipes conveying gas, water or inflammable liquid, structural

steel work, metallic enclosures, metallic conduits and lightning protection system conductors shall

not be used as a means of earthing an installation or even as a link in an earthing system. The

electrical resistance measured between earth connection at the main L T panel and any other point on

the completed installation shall be low enough to permit the passage of current necessary to operate

or circuit breakers, and shall not exceed 1 ohm. All switches carrying medium voltage shall be

connected with earth by two separate and distinct connections. The earthing conductors inside the

building wherever exposed shall be properly protected from mechanical injury by running the same in G

I pipe of adequate size. The overlapping in strips at joints where required shall be minimum 75 mm.

The joints shall be riveted and brazed in case of copper and by welding / bolting in case of GI in an

approved manner. Sweated lugs of adequate capacity and size shall be used for termination of all

conductor wires above 6 sq.mm size. Lugs shall be bolted to the equipment body to be earthed after the

metal body is cleaned of paint and other oily substances and properly tinned. Equipotential

bonding of all metallic structures shall be done.

6.6. Earthing

The following must always be ensured in earthing system.

- All earths must be interconnected at the earth pits. This includes generator neutrals, transformer

neutrals, transformer body, lightning protection system earths, UPS earths etc.

- Extraneous conductive parts such as gas pipes, other service pipes and ducting risers and pipes of

fire protection equipment and exposed metalic parts of the building structure.

6.7 The Contractor shall get the soil resistivity test done at his own cost of the area where earthing pits are

to be located before starting the installation.




6.8 Resistance to Earth

The resistance of earthing system shall not exceed 1 ohm.

6.9 Specification for Hot Dip Galvanizing Process

General Requirements

I. Quality of Zinc

Zinc to be used shall conform to minimum Zn 98 grade as per requirement of IS:209-1992.

II. Coating Requirement

Minimum weight of zinc coating for mild steel flats with thickness upto 6 mm in accordance with

IS:6745-1972 shall be 400 g/sqm.

The weight of coating expressed in grams per square metre shall be calculated by dividing the

total weight of Zinc by total area (both sides) of the coated surface.

The Zinc coating shall be uniform, smooth and free from imperfections as flux, ash and dross

inclusions, bare patches black spots, pimples, lumpiness, runs, rust stains bulky white deposits,

blisters.

Mild steel flats / wires shall undergo a process of degreasing pickling in acid, cold rinsing and

then galvanizing. Jointing of earthing tape shall be by welding. All joints and cut ends shall be

properly painted with aluminium paint.

(Note : Please specify only one type as per project requirement)

6.10 Earthing Electrode

Conventional Plate electrode

Copper Earth Electrode

Earthing electrode shall be 600 x 600 x 3.15 mm thick tined copper plate electrode, with 2 Nos 50 x 6

mm copper strips from earth plate electrode to inspection chamber, 50 mm dia medium class GI pipe,

CI funnel with 20 gauge GI wire mesh, masonry chamber 1000 x 500 mm with concrete base as per

IS3043 with C I heavy duty / chequered plate manhole cover with frame painted with bitumastic paint

and packing with mixture of charcoal and common salt around plate electrode including digging of pit

upto permanent moisture level and as per soil condition but not less than 3 meters and back filling as




required.

GI Earth Electrode

Earthing electrode shall be 600 x 600 x 6.3 mm thick GI plate electrode, with 2 nos. 50 X 6 mm GI

strips from earth plate electrode to inspection chamber, 50 mm dia medium class GI pipe, CI funnel with

20 gauge GI wire mesh, masonry chamber 1000 X 500 mm with concrete base as per IS3043 with CI

manhole cover with frame painted with bitumastic paint and packing with mixture of charcoal and

common salt around plate electrode including digging of pit upto permanent moisture level but not less

than 3 meters and back filling as required.

7. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM ( EARLY STREAMER EMISSION TYPE BASED ON FRENCH

STANDARD NFC 17-102 )

7.1 Scope of Work

The work to be done under this section comprises the supply & installation necessary for the complete

installation of the lightning protection system.

The design of the components shall be traceable to field research, laboratory testing, fundamental

analysis, and statistical levels of the lightning event.

The design of the components shall be traceable to long term practical field studies laboratory testing,

fundamental scientific principles and statistical levels of the lightning event as documented in

international standard.

The lightning protection system shall complies in accordance with NFC 17-102 standard and shall be

installed strictly to the manufacturer‟s instructions.

The advanced lightning protection system shall include components as follows:

ESE Air terminal

Mechanical supports

Down-conductors

Performance Recording Equipment

A low impedance Grounding system.

7.2 Standards

Complete installation shall be engineering and constructed in accordance with the latest revision of the

following :




NFC-17-102

IEC 61204

The details of the lightning protection system shall also confirm to the requirements of all relevant local

codes, as applicable, together with the additional requirements referred to in this specification and

drawings, whichever is more stringent and acceptable to the engineer.

7.3 Air Terminal

The air termination shall be of the type that responds dynamically to the appearance of a lightning down

leader by creating free electrons between outer surfaces and an earthed central finial rod.

The Air terminal shall work under Early Streamer Emission (ESE) Technology and the attractive

radius of the air termination shall be traceable to known and acceptable lightning research and

statistics.

The Lightning conductor shall deliver a unique gain time in efficiency, anticipating the natural formation

of an upward leader. The Air terminal generates a leader that propagates rapidly to capture the Lighting

stroke and conduct it towards the ground.

Arcing is not to be continuous and shall only occur during the progress of the lightning leader.

The air termination shall not cause high frequency radio interference except during the millisecond

intervals associated with the progress of the lightning leader and during the main return strike of

lightning events in the region.

The materials of the air termination shall be non-corroding in normal atmosphere.

The air termination shall not be dependent upon batteries or external power supplies for any part of its

operation.

The Height of the air terminal support mast shall be minimum 2mts and the height will be increased as

per the coverage design.

The support shall be securely installed and guy wires shall be used where necessary to enable the air

termination and mast system to withstand maximum locally recorded wind velocities.




7.4 Down Conductor

In order to reduce probability of damage it is often necessary to have several parallel current paths. As

recommended by IEC 62305 & IS 2309 equal spacing of down conductors , 25 x 3 mm Copper \ AL \

GI external strip, is preferred around the building perimeter or 1C x copper conductor special cable

offered by LA supplier (recommended when laid in shaft within building). Two down conductors shall be

used in case of the structure height is above 28mts and both shall be connected with maintenance-free

Grounding system down conductor shall be connected directly to the air termination.

The down conductor shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer‟s instructions and shall not

be subject to sharper bends.

The down conductor must be kept in constant physical contact with the structure via conductive

mounting clamps.

Each down conductor shall be directly connected at the dedicated earthing pit and the dedicated earth

pit shall be connected to the other earth pits in the earthing grid.

7.5 Lightning Flash Counter

Each protection system shall be supplied with Lightning strike counter. The counter shall have a register

that activates one count for every discharge where the peak current exceeds 400A at the 8/20us

standard.

The lightning flash counter shall be robust and easy to install. The counter shall operate from the energy

of the lightning discharge and shall not work on external or battery power to operate.

The lightning flash counter shall be installed to the manufacturer‟s instructions in a readily accessible

manner (always 2mts above the Ground) so that reading can be taken at regular intervals. It shall be

positioned such that its operating temperature is within the range -20'C to + 60'C.

7.6 Grounding System

The Lightning arrestor grounding system reading shall not exceed 10 ohms static impedance except

with prior approval by the specifying engineer or manufacturer of the lightning protection system.

Grounding will be done by copper bonded steel core ground rods especially designed for electrical

grounding.

Bonding of the grounding system to metallic parts of the building, the structural reinforcing steel of the




building to arriving services is recommended.

Electrically conductive, non soluble TEREC Powder shall be used to achieve low ground resistance.

Provided the materials are mixed and installed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's

instructions.

7.5 Lightning and Surge Voltage Protection

7.5.1 Scope

This specification describes the electrical and mechanical requirements for a high energy Transient

Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS).The specified TVSS/SPD system shall be connected in parallel to

the facility‟s electrical main incoming (main LT panel) as well as final distribution boards, shall provide

effective high energy surge current diversion, and shall be suitable for application in ANSI/IEEE C62.41

Category A, B and C environments or IEC 61643-1 Class I, II and III

7.5.2 Codes & Standards

The specified system shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with the

following codes and standards:

IEC 61643-1: Surge Protective Devices connected to low voltage power distribution systems.

Underwriters Laboratories: (UL 1449, 2nd edition) Standard for Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.

International Standards Organization (ISO) Company certified ISO9001 for manufacturing, design and

service and the applicable portions of the American National Standards Institute and Institute of

Electrical and Electronic Engineers standards (ANSI/IEEE 1100 ,C62.11, C62.41, C62.45)

7.5.3 Electrical Requirements

A. Nominal system operating voltage

The single phase TVSS system shall be suitable for installations operating between 220VAC

and 240VAC.

The three phase TVSS system shall be suitable for installations operating between 380VAC to

415VAC, Star (Y) Configuration: 3 Phase 4 Wire Plus Ground or Delta Configuration: 3 phase 4

wire including Ground.

B. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV):

The maximum continuous operating voltage of the complete TVSS, as well as all components in

the suppression path shall be greater than 125% of the nominal system operating voltage to

ensure the ability of the system to withstand temporary RMS over voltages (swell conditions).




C. Operation Frequency:

The operating frequency range of the system shall be 50 or 60 Hz.

D. Protection Modes:

Note: L = Line, G = Ground, N = Neutral

The SPD shall provide protection in all modes (L-N or L-L, L-G and N-G where applicable)

E. Surge Current Capacity:

Location Class Surge Current

Main Service

Entrance

Class C 200/400 KA

Main Distribution

Feeders

Class B 100/160 KA

Sub distribution

Panels

Class A 50 KA

F. Short-circuit Withstand Capability:

The TVSS shall be able to carry the power short circuit current until it is interrupted by external

over-current disconnect or by the backup over current protection. The minimum Short Circuit

Withstand of the TVSS shall be according to the table below:

Class Minimum Short Circuit

Withstand Capability

Class C 200KA

Class B 35 to 65KA

Class A 14KA

G. Over current Protection (fusing)

All components, including suppression, filtering, and monitoring components, shall be

individually fused at the component level with the fuses rated so as not to impede maximum

specified surge current capacity. The fuse shall be capable of opening in less than one

millisecond and clear both high and low impedance faults.

H. Clamping Voltage:

The TVSS shall able to clamp the voltage:




System Voltage Max Let Through Voltage

120, 120/208 or 120/240 400 volts

208, 240, 277, 230/400

or 277/480

800 volts

346, or 346/600 1200 volts

480 1500 volts

600 2000 volts

I. Response Time:

The typical response time of all suppression components shall be <0.5 ns.

J. Noise Attenuation

The filter shall provide insertion loss with a maximum of 40dB to 50dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz

with data obtained utilizing the 50 ohm Insertion Loss Methodology from MIL-STD-220A.

7.5.4 Environmental Requirements

A. Operating Temperature: -40 to +85 C (-40 to +187 F)

B. Relative humidity: 0% to 95%

C. Audible Noise: The unit shall not generate any appreciable noise. 40 DB for

RFI and EMI noise attenuation

D. Operating Altitude: 0 to 14,000 feet above sea level.

E. Magnetic Fields: The unit shall not generate any appreciable magnetic fields,

and shall suitable for use directly inside computer rooms.

F. Connection type- Parallel

G. Protection lvl in kV – based on level of protection

H. Status indication – LED type dry contacts




8. EXTERNAL / STREET LIGHTING POLES

8.1. M.S. Tubular Poles

8.1.1 7 Meter High Pole with Ladder Bars

7 meter high (5.75 meters above and 1.25 meters below ground shall be M.S.step tubular pole in 3

steps (bottom part shall be 4 meters high, 114.3 mm outer dia and 3.65 mm walll thickness, middle part

shall be 1.5 meter high, 88.9 mm outer dia and 3.25 mm wall thickness, top part shall be 1.5 meters

high, 76.1 mm outer dia and 3.25 mm wall thickness) with 300 mm x 300 mm x 6 mm thick base

plate. Foundation for the pole shall be of cement concrete in 1:2:4 ratios. (1 part cement, 2 parts,

coarse sand and 4 parts stone aggregate) IP-55 weather proof junction box shall also be provided to

accommodate 1 No. 3 phase and neutral terminal block and 1 No. 6 amps SP MCB including 2.5 sq.mm

PVC insulated copper conductor wire from the terminals block to the fixture and 2 Nos. 32 mm dia GI

sleeves of suitable length shall be provided to the junction box.

8.1.2 4.5 Meter High Pole

4.5 meter high (3.6 meter above and 0.9 meter below ground) shall be 75 mm dia, 3.25 mm wall

thickness MS tubular straight pole with a cast aluminium adaptor for post top mounting. Pole shall be

provided with 300 mm x 300 mm x 6 mm thick MS base plate. Foundation for the pole shall be of

cement concrete in 1:2:4 rates (1 part cement, 2 parts coarse sand and 4 parts stone aggregate) IP-55

weather proof junction box shall also be provided to accommodate 1 No. 3 phase and neutral terminal

block and 1 No. 6 amps SP MCB including 2.5 sq.mm PVC insulated copper conductor wires from the

terminal block to the fixture and 2 Nos. 32 mm dia GI sleeves of suitable length shall be provided to the

junction box.

8.2 Cast Aluminium Poles

Design & Construction

Ornamental cast aluminum pole shall be made out of cast aluminum as per requirements of IS:202

(1993). Casting of all pole Sections shall be accurately done from permanent moulds and cores of the

design submitted to Achieve uniformity in all design aspects in internal and external shape of the unit.

All sections shall be free from defects like blow holes, porosity, hard spots, cracks, Hot tears, cold

shuts, distortion, sand and slag inclusion and other harmful defects. All the casted sections used in the

pole shall be free from welding of any kind used to repair it. The casted sections shall be machined

from all the locations used to insert the pieces into one another using either threading or socket method.

Accuracy of all machined parts shall be maintained through out a lot for random replacements of




sections if and when required. All the threaded joints shall be mechanically tightened and sealed using

industrial tools to make the entire unit vandal resistant.

Aesthetic appearance

All the grooves and carvings of the pole unit shall be free from any kind of distortion for a pleasing

aesthetic appearance.

Material

Cast aluminum material used for casting pole unit shall be Grade FG-220 type, as described in IS:202

and shall have minimum tensile strength of the order of 200 N/mmsq.

Pre-treatment

Each and every casted piece shall be subject to Sand blasting at a pressure of 10-15 kgf to remove all

its external dirt and sand remains etc..

Painting and Finishing

Entire unit shall be given an extensive three stage treatment with PU based two packZn-Ph primer and

paint prescribed for CI surfaces to make it absolutely rust and corrosion proof, as well as giving it a

pleasing appearance. PU based paint shall be MRF make or equivalent.

Thickness of the coating

A minimum of 80 microns of coating thickness shall be achieved on the final piece.

Mounting arrangement

Pole unit shall be grouted using 4 nos. anchor bolts of size M-16x450 mm confirming to 6.8 Gr. as per

IS 2062. Pole unit shall be grouted on a foundation made out of 1:3:6 concrete cement after excavating

the earth with proper cable sleeves etc.. laid in the foundation itself.

Dimensions of the unit

Total height = 3000 mm

Dia of base plate = 380 mm




Pitch Circle Dia = 335 mm

Description of top bracket / arms

Single double decorative arm shall be provided on the pole (as asked for in B.O.Q.), secured with the

help of two nos. bolts outreach not less than 400 mm.

Service window

A service window of the size 150 mm x 100 mm shall be provided in the base of the pole to allow

access to electrical connections and terminations. It shall be covered with MS plate and proper

rubber gaskets shall be provided to prevent any ingress of water etc..

Electrical connections

Four way connectors shall be provided along with Slide lock and 1 no. 6 amps Sp MCB including 2.5

sqmm PVC insulated copper conducter wires from the terminal block to the fixture and 2 nos. 32 mm dia

GI sleeves of suitable length shall be provided upto the service window. An earth boss is provided on

the control plate along with connectors and interrupters.

8.3 Galvanized Octagonal Poles

Design

The Octagonal poles shall be designed to withstand the maximum wind speed of 169 KM / Hr. as per IS

875. The top loading i.e. area and the weight of fixtures are to be considered to calculate maximum

deflection of the pole and the same shall meet the requirement of BS : 5649 Part VI 1982.

Pole Shaft

The pole shaft shall have octagonal cross section and shall be continuously tapered with single

longitudinal welding. There shall not be any circumferential welding. The welding of pole shaft shall be

done by submerged Arc Welding (SAW) process.

All octagonal pole shafts shall be provided with the rigid flange plate of suitable thickness with provision

for fixing 4 foundation bolts. This base plate shall be fillet welded to the pole shaft at two locations i.e.

from inside and outside. The welding shall be done as per qualified MMAW process approved by Third

Party Inspection agency.

Door opening

The octagonal poles shall have door of approximate 500 mm length at the elevation of 500 mm from the




Base plate. The door shall be vandal resistance and shall be weather proof to ensure safety of inside

connections. The door shall be flush with the exterior surface and shall have suitable locking

arrangement. There shall also be suitable arrangement for the purpose of earthing.

The pole shall be adequately strengthened at the location of the door to compensate for the loss in

section.

Material

Octagonal Poles HT Steel Conforming to grade S355JO

Base Plate Fe 410 conforming to IS 226 / IS 2062

Foundation Bolts EN.8 grade

Welding

The welding shall be carried out confirming to approved procedures duly qualified by third party

inspection agency. The welders shall also be qualified for welding the octagonal shafts.

Pole sections

The Octagonal Poles shall be in single section (upto 11 mtr). There shall not be any circumferential

weld joint.

Galvanization

The poles shall be hot dip galvanized as per IS 2629 / IS 2633 / IS 4759 standards with average coating

thickness of 70 micron. The galvanizing shall be done in single dipping.

Xing type

The Octagonal Poles shall be bolted on a pre-cast foundation with a set of four foundation bolts for

greater rigidity.

Top Mountings

The galvanized mounting bracket shall be supplied along with the Octagonal Poles for Installation of the

luminaries.

Manufacturing




The pole manufacturing & galvanizing unit shall be ISO 9001 : 2000 & ISO 14001 certified to ensure

consistent quality & environmental protection.

Service window

A service window of the size 150 mm x 100 mm shall be provided in the base of the pole to allow

access to electrical connections and terminations. It shall be covered with MS plate and proper

rubber gaskets shall be provided to prevent any ingress of water etc..

Electrical connections

Four way connectors shall be provided along with Slide lock and 1 no. 6 amps Sp MCB including 2.5

sqmm PVC insulated copper conductor wires from the terminal block to the fixture and 2 nos. 32 mm dia

GI sleeves of suitable length shall be provided upto the service window. An earth boss is provided on

the control plate along with connectors and interrupters.

Galvanized Octagonal Poles Dimensions

HEIGHT

TOP

DIA

(A/F)

BOTTOM

DIA (A/F)

SHEET

THICK

NESS

BASE PLATE

DIMENSIONS

(LxBxT)

FOUNDATION BOLT

BOLT SIZE

(NO. x DIA)

PITCH

CIRCLE

DIA

(PCD)

BOLT

LENGTH

(MM)

PROJECTED

BOLT

LENGTH

(mtr) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)

3 70 130 3 200 x 200 x 12 4 x 16 Dia 200 450 80

4 70 130 3 200 x 200 x 12 4 x 16 Dia 200 450 80

5 70 130 3 200 x 200 x 12 4 x 16 Dia 200 600 80

6 70 130 3 220 x 220 x 12 4 x 20 Dia 205 600 100

7 70 130 3 220 x 220 x 12 4 x 20 Dia 205 700 100

8 70 135 3 225 x 225 x 16 4 x 20 Dia 210 750 100

9 70 155 3 260 x 260 x 16 4 x 24 Dia 250 750 125

10 70 175 3 275 x 275 x 16 4 x 24 Dia 270 750 125

11 90 210 3 300 x 300 x 20 4 x 24 Dia 300 750 125

12 90 240 3 320 x 320 x 20 4 x 24 Dia 325 850 125

9. CABLING FOR DATA SYSTEM

9.1 Scope

This document defines the cabling system and subsystem components to include cable, termination

hardware, supporting hardware, and miscellany required to supply, and to install a complete cabling




infrastructure supporting data and video. The intent of this section is to provide pertinent information to

allow the vendor to bid the labor, supervision, tooling, materials, and miscellaneous mounting hardware

and consumables to install a complete system. However, it is the responsibility of the vendor to propose

any, and, all items required for a complete system whether or not it is identified in the specification,

drawings and bill of materials attached to this specification.

9.2 Applicable Documents

The cabling system described in this specification is derived in part from the recommendations made in

industry standard documents. The list of documents below (or the latest revisions) has bearing on the

desired cabling infrastructure are incorporated into this specification by reference:

1) This Technical Specification and Associated Drawings

2) ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard – March 2001

4) ANSI/EIA/TIA-569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and

Spaces - February, 1998

5) ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of

Commercial Buildings - February, 1993

6) ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for

Telecommunications - August, 1994

9.3 Cabling System and Component Specifications

9.3.1 UTP Cabling System

9.3.1.1 Unshielded twisted pair cabling system, TIA / EIA 568-B.1 addendum Category 6 Cabling

system

Networks Supported 10 / 100 Ethernet, 155 Mbps ATM, 1000 Mbps IEEE 802.3ab Ethernet,

and proposed Cat 6 Gigabit Ethernet

Warranty 25-year systems warranty; Warranty to cover Bandwidth of the

specified and installed cabling system, and the installation costs

Performance

characteristics to be

provided along with bid

Attenuation, Pair-to-pair and PS NEXT, ELFEXT and PSELFEXT,

Return Loss, ACR and PS ACR for 4-connector channel

9.3.1.2 Unshielded Twisted Pair, Category 6, TIA / EIA 568-B.2

Material:

Conductors 23 AWG solid bare copper or better

Insulation Polyethylene

Jacket Flame Retardant PVC

Pair Separator Cross-member fluted Spline.




Approvals UL Listed

ETL verified to TIA / EIA Cat 6

Operating temperature -20 Deg. C to +60 Deg. C

Frequency tested up to Minimum 600 MHz

Packing Box of 305 meters

Delay Skew 45ns MAX.

Impedance 100 Ohms + / - 15 ohms, 1 to 600 MHz.

Performance

characteristics to be

provided along with bid

Attenuation, Pair-to-pair and PS NEXT, ELFEXT and

PSELFEXT, Return Loss, ACR and PS ACR

9.3.2 UTP Jacks

Type PCB based, Unshielded Twisted Pair, Category 6, TIA / EIA

568-B.2

Durability

Modular Jack 750 mating cycles

Wire terminal 200 termination cycles

Accessories Strain relief and bend-limiting boot for cable

Integrated hinged dust cover

Materials

Housing Polyphenylene oxide, 94V-0 rated

Wiring blocks Polycarbonate, 94V-0 rated

Jack contacts Phosphorous bronze, plated with 1.27micro-meter thick gold

Approvals UL listed

Performance

Characteristics to be

provided with bid

Attenuation, NEXT, PS NEXT, FEXT and Return Loss

9.3.3 UTP Jack Panels

Type 24-port, PCB based, Unshielded Twisted Pair, Category 6,

TIA / EIA 568-B.2

Ports 24

Port arrangement Modules of 6-ports each, arranged 1port x 6.

Category Category 6

Circuit Identification

Scheme

Icons on each of 24-ports

Port Identification 9mm or 12mm Labels on each of 24-ports (to be included in




supply)

Height 1 U (1.75 inches)

Durability

Modular Jack 750 mating cycles

Wire terminal (110

block)

200 termination cycles

Accessories Strain relief and bend limiting boot for cable

Materials

Housing Polyphenylene oxide, 94V-0 rated

Wiring blocks Polycarbonate, 94V-0 rated

Jack contacts Phosphhorous bronze, plated with 1.27micro-meter thick gold

Panel Black, powder coated steel

Approvals UL listed

Termination Pattern TIA / EIA 568 A and B;

Performance

Characteristics to be

provided along with

bid

Attenuation, NEXT, PS NEXT, FEXT and Return Loss

9.3.4 Faceplates

Type 1-port, White surface box

Material ABS / UL 94 V-0

No. of ports One

9.3.5 Workstation / Equipment Cords

Type Unshielded Twisted Pair, Category 6, TIA / EIA 568-B.2

Conductor 24 AWG 7 / 32, stranded copper

Length 7-feet

Plug Protection Matching colored snag-less, elastomer polyolefin boot

Warranty 25-year component warranty

Category Category 5

Plug

Housing Clear polycarbonate

Terminals Phosphor Bronze, 50 micron gold plating over selected area and

gold flash over remainder, over 100 micron nickel underplate

Load bar PBT polyester

Jacket PVC

Insulation Flame Retardant Polyethylene




9.3.6 Fiber optic Cable

Cable Type 6-core, Multimode, 10G Ethernet OM3, Armored, loose-tube,

Gel Filled

Fiber type 50 / 125, Laser Grade, 250 micron primary coated buffers

No. of cores 6

Cable Construction BELLCORE GR 20 / IEC 794-1

Attenuation

@850nm 3.5 dB / KM

@1300nm 1.5 dB / KM

Bandwidth

@850nm 1500 MHz-KM

@1300nm 500 MHz-KM

Network Support

10 / 100 Ethernet 2000m

155 Mbps ATM 2000m

1000 Base SX 900m

1000 Base Lx 550m without Mode Conditioning launch patch cord.

Tensile rating 1200N

Maximum Crush

resistance

3000N

Operating

Temperature

-40 Degree C to +60 Degree C

Armor Corrugated Steel tape Armor

Note: For Composite fiber optic cables, the above specifications for SM and MM fibers apply.

9.3.7 Fiber Optic Connectors

Connector Type SC-Style, Simplex

Operating

temperature

-40 Degree C to +85 Degree C

Durability & color

MM connectors 500 cycles, Beige

SM connectors 220 cycles, Blue

Ferrules Pre-radiused Ceramic Ferrules

Attenuation Not more than 0.75 dB per mated pair

9.3.8 Fiber Optic Patch panels




Fiber optic patch

panel

19-inch, Rack mounted Fiber optic patch panel

Height 3 U, 5.25 inches

# of fibers 48,96,192

# of OSP Cables for

termination

Minimum 2

Grounding 2 Nos. of earthing lugs, pre-loaded

Cable Management

rings

Front and rear cable management rings, pre-loaded

# of 6-port / 12-port

adapter plates

8 / 8 Max.

Fiber optic patch

panel

19-inch, Rack mounted Fiber optic patch panel

Height 1 U, 1.75 inches

# of fibers 18,36,72

# of OSP Cables for

termination

Minimum 2

Grounding 2 Nos. of earthing lugs, pre-loaded

Cable Management

rings

Front and rear cable management rings, pre-loaded

# of 6-port / 12-port

adapter plates

3 / 3 Max.

9.3.9 Fiber Optic Adapter plates

Fiber Optic adapter

plate

6-port, SC-Style, MM

Attenuation Max of 0.75 dB per mated pair

9.3.10 Fiber Optic Patch Cord.

Fiber Optic Patch

Cords

50/ 125 Ethernet Patch Cord

Bandwidth

@850nm 500 MHz-KM

@1300nm 500 MHz-KM

Insertion Loss Less than 0.5 dB

9.4 Warranty

Owner seeks warranty for the installed cable plant from the OEM equipment supplier. Bidder shall

ensure that the OEM norms for supply, installation, testing and documentation as specified by the OEM

supplier shall be adhered to, provided those are in line with TIA / EIA standards and Owner requirement




specifications. The warranty shall be provided by the OEM vendor to Owner and shall be administered

in India. The duration of the warranty shall be for a minimum of 25 years and shall cover the system

performance, application assurance and the costs of the supply of components and installation.

1. SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM

1.1 SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC MODULE

Solar Photovoltaic Modules shall conform to UL/ CE / IEC-61215 Edition 2 Standards specifications

necessary certification from the reputed laboratory shall be provided by bidder.

The peak power rating of the Solar PV array under Standard TemperatureConditions (STC)

shall be equal to the peak power rating of the individual plant. Stabilized output of solar PV array for the

plant should not be less than 6 KWp under standard test condition with available terrace area. Modules

of SPV power plant shall be of 24 Volt,175-230 Wp high efficiency multi crystalline silicon solar cells.

The rated maximum power rating of PV modules should have positive tolerance in

range of 0to+3%. And negative temperature coefficient of power for PV modules should be

less than or equal to 0.45% per deg. C.

A suitable number of Solar PV modules shall be connected in series string. A suitable number of series strings shall be connected in parallel to formulate a series - parallel array. The PV strings and array shall be designed to match the inverter input\ Power conditioning unit specifications.

The peak power point voltage and the peak power plant current of any supplied module and / or any

module string (Series connected module) shall be not more than 3% from the respective arithmetic

mean for all modules and / or for all modules string as the case may be.

Bidder shall submit the detailed energy generation calculations with sloped angles of installation of SPV.

Bidder shall give guarantee for Overall energy generation on annual basis for 20 years.

Electrical Features

Solar Photovoltaic module array shall consist of high efficiency Solar Modules utilizing

Crystalline Silicon Solar Photovoltaic cells.Multi crystalline high power cells are used in the Solar

Photovoltaic module. Solar module shall be laminated using lamination technology using established

polymer (EVA) and Tedlar / Polyester laminate.

Each Solar module should consist of 60 Photovoltaic cells or as per manufacture standard.




Solar Photovoltaic module efficiency shall be greater than 19.3 %. Module shall be made of high

transmissivity glass front surface giving high encapsulation gain.

All materials used must have a proven history of reliable and stable operation in external outdoor

applications. Solar modules are designed to operate and perform in relative humidity up to 100% with

temperatures between -10 Deg C and +85 Deg C and with stand gust up to 200km/h from back side of

the panel. The geological data for Mumbai, Maharashtra to be referred for design to get optimum

generation of Solar PV System.

Sample modules and production processes employed in the manufacture of the offered module are in

accordance with the requirements of IEC 61215 / IEC61730.

The module frame must be made of torsion & corrosion resistant materials, which is electrolytically

compatible with the structural material used for mounting the module.

Module Junction box (weather resistant) shall be designed for long life out door operation in harsh

environment ( IP-67 ). Degradation of solar panel @ 1% per year is permitted.

The solar modules shall have suitable encapsulation and sealing arrangements to protect the silicon

cells from the environment. The arrangement and the material of encapsulation is compatible with the

thermal expansion properties of the Silicon cells and the module framing arrangement/material. The

encapsulation arrangement ensures complete moisture proofing during life of the solar modules.

Each module must have low iron tempered glass front for strength and superior light transmission. It

also must have back sheet for environment protection against moisture and high voltage electrical

insulation. The fill factor of modules is not less than 0.70 (Typical).

DC negative conductor shall be bonded to the ground via Ground Fault Detector Interrupter

(GFDI). The grounding point shall be as close as possible to the PV Array.

Note: I-V curve of each PV module with Sl. Nos. should be submitted along with Modules meeting the

IEC Specification.

Mechanical Features

Solar Photovoltaic Module shall be made of toughened, low iron content, high transmissivity front glass.

Anodized Aluminum Frame shall be provide around the module. The module frame shall be

made ofcorrosion resistant material

electrically compatible with the structural material used for mounting themodules. The module shall be

encapsulated with Ethyl Vinyl Acetate (EVA). Silicon edge sealant shall be provided around laminate.

The back surface shall be Tedlar /Polyester trilaminate. ABS plastic terminal box shall be provided for




the module output termination with gasket to prevent water moisture. The module shall be Resistant to

water, abrasion, hail impact, humidity & other environment factor for the worst situation at site. Bypass

diode arrangement shall be provided. Weatherproof DC rated Multi contact connector and lead cable

coming out as a part of the module to make connection easier and secure not allowing for any loose

connection.

1.2 MODULE MOUNTING STRUCTURE & PLACEMENT

PV array shall be installed utilizing maximum terrace space to minimize effects of shadows due to adjac

entPV panel rows.Adequate spacing shall be provided between two panel frames and rows of panels to

facilitate personnel protection,ease of installation, replacement, cleaning of panels and electrical mainte

nance. PV array shall be oriented in the south direction at a tilt angle of 19 deg. or as per site conditions

to be decided by vendor in order to maximize annual energy yield of the plant.

The Structure shall support SPV modules at a given orientation, absorb and transfer the mechanical

loads to the roof properly. There shall be no requirement of welding or complex machinery at site. The

array structure shall be so designed that it will occupy minimum space without sacrificing the output

from SPV panels & shall withstand heavy winds. The supplier / manufacturer shall specify installation

details of the PV modules and the support structures with appropriate diagrams and drawings.

The PV array structure design shall be appropriate with a factor of safety of min. 1.5. Each PV panel

structure shall incorporate one bird repellant spike at

a level higher than the panel upper edge. The location of the spike should be selected for minimum sha

dow effect.

PV modules shall be secured to support structure using screw fasteners and/or metal clamps.

Screw fasteners shall use existing mounting holes provided by module manufacturer. No

additional holes shall be drilled on module frames. Module fasteners/clamps shall be adequately

treated to resist corrosion. The structure shall be designed to withstand operating

environmental conditions for a period of minimum 25 years.

Module mounting structure shall be made up of aluminum anodized for a minimum thickness of 15

microns or hot dipped galvanized for a minimum thickness of 100 microns) section of steel. Super

structure shall be designed & fabricated according to site condition.

Support structure for array module shall be design and foundation or fixation mounting arrangements

should withstand minimum horizontal wind speed of 200kms / hr (Designed value shall be greater than

200kms /hr). All hardware shall be of Stainless steel - SS 304.

The min. clearance between lower edge of PV panel and terrace ground level shall be 1m. (to allow

ventilation for cooling, also ease of cleaning and maintenance of panels as well as cleaning of terrace).

The height of each PV panel structure shall not exceed 3m above the terrace floor level.




The entire structure including array shall be earthed to an independent pit with redundant path the

structure shall be design to allow easy replacement of any module. The drawings along with detailed

design shall be submitted to engineer-in-charge for approval before starting of the execution work. The

work shall be carried out as per design approved by engineer-in-charge.

1.3 JUNCTION BOXES

The junction boxes shall be dust free, vermin and waterproof and made of FRP / Thermo Plastic with

IP67 protection. The terminals shall be connected to copper bus bar arrangement of proper sizes. The

junction boxes shall have suitable cable entry points fitted with strain‐relief cable glands of appropriate

sizes for both incoming and outgoing cables. Suitable markings shall be provided on the bus bar for

easy identification and cable ferrules shall be fitted at the cable termination points for identification.

Array junction box shall have suitable reverse blocking diodes of minimum DC blocking voltage of 800 V

with suitable arrangement for its connecting. The array box shall also have suitable surge protection.

All DC and AC cables shall be terminated using suitable crimped cable lugs/sockets and

screw type terminal strips. No soldered cable termination shall be accepted. Only terminal

cable joints shall be accepted. No cable joint to join two cable ends shall be accepted.

String/Array combiner boxes shall be secured onto walls or

metal structures erected separately on the terrace.Conduits/concealed cable trays shall be provided for

all DC cabling on the terrace. Conduits/concealed cable trays shall be

adequately secured onto the terrace.

The junction boxes shall have suitable arrangement for the following:

Combine groups of modules into independent charging sub-arrays that shall be wired to the

controller.

Provide arrangement for disconnection for each of the groups.

Provide a test point for each sub-group for quick fault location.

To provide group array isolation.

The rating of the JB‟s shall be suitable with adequate safety factor to inter connect the Solar PV

array.

1.4 POWER CONDITIONING UNIT (PCU)

Power Conditioning Unit (PCU) is critical equipment in grid connected SPV Power Plant. Solar array

shall produces DC energy output at 270 - 600V DC and supplied to the DC bus for inverting to AC

voltage. Maximum Peak Power Tracking (MPPT) (The efficiency of PCU shall not be less than 95% &

shall be designed to meet the Solar PV Array capacity control) will extract maximum energy from solar

array and provides 415VAC +/-5% 50HZ, sine wave output to synchronize with local utility grid. PCU




should have 150 % Over load capacity for 60sec. Output wave shape shall be sine wave with < 3% total

harmonic distortion (THD). Additionally, it will provide protection features such as, over current, short

circuit, over temperature as a minimum. PCU shall be of very high quality having high efficiency and

shall be capable of running load in isolated mode. The PCU shall be completely compatible with the

SPV array voltage and grid supply voltage. The PCU shall be designed for continuous, reliable power

supply as per specifications. The PCU shall have internal protection arrangement against any sustained

fault. The dimension, weight, foundation details etc. of the PCU shall be clearly indicated in the detailed

technical specification. It has user friendly LCD display for programming and view on line parameters.

Such as DC power input. DC input Voltage, DC current, AC power output, AC voltage (All 3 phases and

line)and AC current (All the phases and line) and power factor. The PCU shall have arrangement for

adjusting DC input current and should trip against sustainable fault downstream and shall not start till

fault is rectified. The inverter shall have internal protection against any sustained

faults and/or lightening in DC and mains AC grid circuits. The mandatory islanding

protection provided by inverter shall isolate the inverter from the LT line in the event LT

mains supply is not available. The 3 phase grid connected PCU shall be sourced from internationally

reputed firms which shall in corporate latest technological advances to provide highly reliable and

efficient energy conversion from DC to AC. The PCU incorporates a new system design which uses

multiple power stacks which work in tandem. PCU shall be communication capable through the RS485

port.

The PCU shall be three phase static solid state type power conditioning unit. Both AC & DC lines shall

be protected by suitable rating fuses and contactors to allow safe start up and shut down the system.

Fuses used in the DC circuit shall be DC rated. The PCU shall have provision for input and output

isolation. Each solid state electronic devices shall be protected to ensure long life of the inverter as well

as smoth functioning of the inverter. PCU enclosure shall be fabricated from 14 guage CRCA sheet

steel and painted with RAL-7032 point shade with powder coating. Cooling arrangement shall be

provided within the PCU cabinet for operation in a non‐AC environment. No external arrangement for

PCU cooling shall be accepted. All exposed connection / parts PCU shall be provided with protection

covers.

1.5 DC AND AC DISTRIBUTION BOARDS\ISOLATORS

The DC and AC distribution boxes shall be wall mounted inside control room/open space. DC

distribution box shall incorporate DC disconnect switch, lightening surge protectors, any other

protection equipment, screw type terminal

strips and strain‐relief cable glands. AC distribution box shall incorporate AC circuit breaker, surge

voltage protectors, any other protection equipment, plant energy meter,

screw type terminal strips and strain‐relief cable glands. DC and AC cabling between inverter and

distribution boxes shall be secured with conduits/ cable trays.




1.5 CABLES AND ACCESSORIES

a. All the cables shall be supplied conforming to Latest BIS & shall be of 3.3 kV grade as per

interconnections, array to junction boxes, junction boxes to main junction box and main junction

box to PCU etc shall be so selected to keep the voltage drop and losses to the minimum. The

DC and AC cable size shall be selected to maintain losses

within specified limits over the entire lengths of the cables

b. Bidders are required to mention each size of cables used and should consider their

resistance/impedance in the design optimization. Such calculation should be submitted along

with the bid.

c. The contractor shall supply all installation accessories, which are required to install and

successfully commission the power plant.

1.6 EARTHING AND PROTECTION

PV array, DC equipment, Inverter, AC equipment and distribution wiring shall be earthed as

required. The entire array structure of the PV yard both AC & DC system shall be grounded properly

using adequate number of independent earthing kits. All metal casing / shielding of the plant shall be

thoroughly grounded to ensure safety of the power plant. Earthing shall be in line with IE rules. Detailed

specifications have been provided in the Earthing section.

1.8 BILL OF MATERIALS

1.8.1 Complete Bill of Materials inclusive of Solar PV Modules, array Junction box, main junction box,

cables, PCU, Module mounting structures, etc shall be provided along with the offer. The

numbers of each component proposed for supply shall be clearly specified.

a. Solar Array Capacity-

b. Module mounting clamps/structure-

c. Power Conditioning Unit-

d. Data Logging system-

e. Junction Boxes-

f. Cable & Earthing material-

g. Distribution Panels

1.8.2 The items not listed in BOM but required for successful installation / commissioning of SPV Power plant

shall also be considered to be part of the supply scope without any extra cost to the purchaser.

1.9 SPARE PARTS




Bidder shall mention recommended spares and also furnish details for shares parts at least 3-5 years of

their nearest service center.

1.10 TYPE TEST

Type testing certification should be produced at the time of delivery or earlier. Type test certification

should be dated not earlier than 1 year.

1.11 INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING

1.11.1 Detailed project execution program shall be submitted along with the offer. The bidder will be

responsible for arranging all tools & plants for installation and commissioning the complete system.

1.11.2 The bidder will also submit the erection, testing & commissioning procedure for approval to the engineer

in charge. These procedures will form integral part of the acceptance report for successful erection and

commissioning the system. These reports will be prepared and signed by the bidder or his

representative & the officials of the engineer in charge concerned with project.

1.12 SUPPORT/ TRAINING

The contractor must agree to provide complete support as per site requirement (single point of contact

regarding for entire solutions). Contractor shall provide the on site 3 day basic operation & maintenance

training to owner‟s staff in 2 schedules.

Contractor shall provide the operations and maintenance staff for first month in two shifts at site. The

O&M staff provided for first month at site should be able to take care the fault finding and repair system

to maintain the desired level of uptime of solar solutions at site.

10. TESTING

10.1 General

At the completion of the work, the contractor shall carry out the pre-commissioning as well as

commissioning checks as given below on the entire installation and records be maintained for reference

of any statutory authority, Client or their representatives.

Pre - Commissioning Checks

Note - Pre- Commissioning checks are to be carried out by Electrical contractor in presence of Project

Management Team.




Sr.

No.

Component Points to be checked

1 Wires Correct identification of each wire by continuity check and

providing correct ferrules as per approved drawings.

Correct colour coding and correct connection by proper

copper lugs.

Wires are dressed and bunched properly.

Connections are properly tightened.

Not more than two wires are connected on any one side of

terminal.

IR values of the circuit are measured and recorded.

2 Switch boxes &

Receptacles

Wires are connected properly as per wiring diagram.


copper lugs is done.




terminal.

Earthing connection is made properly.

Functional check is OK


3 Panels External cables are glanded properly.

Wires are connected properly as per wiring diagram.






terminal.

Two Earthing connections are made properly.

Functional check is OK


Check proper mechanical operations of circuit breaking

devices including alignment of trolley for drawout type

device.

Check contact alignment. And proper sequence of closing

and opening of main and arcing contacts.




Check electrical relays, meters & controls for correct

wiring.

Check polarity and connections of all instrument

transformers.

4 Light fittings Correct colour coding and correct connection by proper




terminal.



5 Lighting Poles Concrete foundation is firmly set and cured.





terminal.


6 Cables Cable identification tags are provided at both ends.

Cable entry in all equipment is through proper sized

glands.

Cable termination is made by proper crimping type lugs.


Not more than two conductors are connected on any one

side of terminal.


7 Earthing The resistance value of each earth electrode are

measured and recorded.

Total resistance of earthing system should be as per the

design value and in any case, shall not be more than 1

Ohm as per IS-3043.

Continuity test for earth continuity conductors with ELV

tester.

8 Transformer Check HV and LV cable terminations, earth connections,

fittings and accessories, oil levels and oil leaks at various




joints.

Check breather, thermometers and buchholz relay for

proper functioning and operation.

Check junction boxes / marshalling box for correct wiring.

Check oil test as per IS-1886. Oil shall withstand at least

40 kV with a gap of 4mm.

Insulation resistance shall be carried out on new

transformer without drying out the transformer if it has not

been idle or stored for a long period. Otherwise, this test

shall be carried out during drying out of transformers. This

test shall be carried out between primary & secondary to

earth as well as between primary and secondary. Winding

which is not under test shall be earthed during the test. A

megger rated 1000volts or higher shall be used for this

test.

Check operation of automatic tap changer and it‟s control

panel for correct functioning.

Check operation of forced cooling system, wherever

provided, with it‟s control panel for it‟s correct functioning.

Check external connections of the transformer in

accordance with the diagram of connection and phase

sequence.

Check for CT / PT connections provided on transformer.

Check electrical continuity of secondary circuit with ELV

tester.

Adjust spacing of arcing horns / rod gaps.

Any other test specifically called for by the manufacturer

or the contract.

9 DG set Check equipment for free movement of rotor, end play,

lubrication and any other mechanical defects.

Check commutators, slip ring, brushes, brush holders etc.

for satisfactory conditions.

Check insulation test of alternator between windings and

ground. Use 500V megger for LV and 1000V megger for

HT alternator.

Check if starting batteries are fully charged and properly

connected.

Commissioning Checks




Note –Commissioning checks are to be made in following sequence starting from Transformer / DG to

main panel to last light fitting. All results of testing and observations are to be preserved for record and

reference by any statutory authority.

Sr.

No.

Component Points to be checked

1. Transformer A. Ratio test

With 415V applied on high voltage side, measure the

voltages between all phases on low voltage side for all tap

positions.

B. Buchholz Relay

Test for angle, air injection etc.

Check that there is no air in protector.

C. Alarm circuit checks for,

Buchholz relay

Oil and winding temperature thermometer

Cooling gear failure

D. Fans and pumps (for ONAF transformer)

Ensure that oil valves are open

Check the rotation of pumps, automatic starting, overload

device etc.

E. Tap changing test to check mechanism, indications etc.

F. Check that neutral earthing switch wherever provided is in

closed position.

G. Ensure that all protective relays in HT and LT panels are

set properly.

H. All rectification points are attended and correctly rectified

j. First switch on the transformer on NO load and keep for 15-

20 minutes.

K. Slowly one by one switch on the loads

2. DG set A. Voltage and frequency test

Ensure that voltage and frequency is developed at no

load as per required specification.

B. AMF Panel

Check that Dg start signal is given when main power fails.

Check that DG stop signal is given when main power is

restored.

Check that ACB close signal is given when DG develops

full voltage and frequency.




C. Check proper functioning of,

Lub. Oil temperature gauge

Water temperature gauge

Hour meter with RPM indicator

Battery charging ammeter

D. Ensure that neutral earthing switch, wherever provided

is in closed position.

E. ensure that all protective relays in AMF and LT panels are

set properly.

F, All rectification points are attended and correctly

rectified

G. First switch on the DG set on NO load and keep for 15-20

minutes

H. Slowly one by one switch on the loads

3. Main LT panel All rectification points are attended and correctly rectified.

Incoming line voltage is correct as per panel incoming

meter or checked by tong tester.

Energize only control circuits and carry out closing and

tripping operations ( where AC supply is derived from

main supply and used for operation, the switch gear bus

may be energized).

Check operation of electrical interlocks.

Check tripping of breaker by manual operation of relay.

Check operation of mechanical closing and tripping

devices.

If incoming line voltage is correct, switch on out going

feeder one by one and note that each one is kept ON for

5 – 10 minutes without any problem.

4 Switch boxes &

Receptacles

All rectification points are attended and correctly rectified.

Check the voltage with test lamp.

Switch on the circuit.

5 Lighting Panels All rectification points are attended and correctly rectified.

Incoming line voltage is correct as per panel incoming

meter or checked by tong tester.

If incoming line voltage is correct, switch on out going

feeder one by one and note that each one is kept ON for

5 – 10 minutes without any problem.




6 Light fittings All rectification points are attended and correctly rectified.


7 Lighting Poles All rectification points are attended and correctly rectified.

Check the voltage with test lamp.


8 Earthing Check if all earth electrodes in earth pits for it‟s correct

installation and connection to earth grid.

Check if all protective conductors from the earth

electrodes to grid and from grid up to all electrical

equipment are made correctly.

Remove the protective conductor / grid connection with

earth electrode and measure earth electrode resistance

by using earth megger.

Repeat above procedure for all electrodes.

Ensure that total earth resistance of the installation is less

than 1 mega- ohms.




SECTION C : ELEVATOR

1. PASSENGER & STRETCHER ELEVATORS

Elevators shall include all elements conforming to specifications or as amended herein. Elevators covered by this specification shall be provided, installed, tested, commissioned, certified and approved as per statutory requirements by Lift Inspectorate.

Notes:

a. All the lifts shall be operated as fire rescue lift. Provision for Fireman drive to be made to bring

the car to the main floor immediately after the fire switch is operated. Thereafter the car is for

operation by the rescue person. All landing calls are ignored. Lift answers one car call at a time.

The rescue person controls opening and closing of doors at a floor. Returns to normal when fire

switch is opened. Fire fighter switch Drive to be provided for all the lifts. Each fire lift shall be

equipped with suitable communicating equipment‟s & connected to security room on the ground

floor. Fire lift shall be provided with ceiling hatch for use in case of emergency, so that when

the car gets stuck up, it shall be easily openable for escape of personnel‟s.

b. Elevator shall be provided with emergency lighting & alarm bell in each cab through car mounted dry cell rechargeable battery with minimum 5 years life expectancy & solid state battery charger , necessary changeover relays. In addition car lighting to be connected on emergency lighting system of the building. Location of light fixture to be coordinated with architects \ Interior Designer. Light output shall be minimum 50-75 LUX at floor level.

c. Provision of additional weight for interior finishes shall be kept for passenger elevator as specified in the Datasheet. In case interior finishing materials in cab exceeds this provision, then the elevator contractor shall clearly identify the loss of carrying capacity, if any.

2. MACHINE EQUIPMENT

2.1 HOIST GEAR

Hoisting machines shall be gearless type for speed more than 1 m / sec as specified in the technical datasheets in the Annexure I .

Gearless hoisting machine shall be AC induction or P.M.S.M. ACV3F gearless traction type motor with brake, drive sheave, and deflector sheave assembled & compactly mounted on a continuous bed-plate and set on steel beams. Sound isolating pads shall be installed beneath the machine bed-plate to reduce vibration or air borne noise.

The motor shall be reversible type particularly designed for elevator service with high starting torque

and low starting current. Sound reducing material shall be installed under machine. Motor shall be

capable of minimum 180 starts per hour.

Hoist machine mounted direct drive shall be provided with digital, closed-loop velocity encoder. Hoist

machine drip pans shall be provided to collect lubricant seepage if required.




Requirements for permanent lifting hooks hoisting beams and access hatches shall be indicated on

the drawings by the elevator system, supplier / installer.

For Machine Room less Type elevators AC induction or P.M.S.M. ACV3F gearless traction type motor

(motor shall be energy efficient type) with brake assembly, drive sheave, and deflector sheave mounted

in proper alignment on a common, isolated machine support frame shall be provided at the top of the

elevator or mounted on the back of the guide rail at the top landing. The machine shall be located in the

Machine Room. Suitable beams shall be furnished for mounting deflector pulleys, if required by the

elevator contractor. The break-release mechanism shall be operable from the last landing without

entering into the elevator.

The motor shall be reversible type particularly designed for elevator service with high starting torque and

low starting current. Starting current shall not be more than 2.5 times the normal current. All drives shall

be rated for not less than 150 starts per hour. The processor shall control the drive motor speed through

pre-calculated acceleration and deceleration references for achieving smooth rides. The controller

should achieve maximum inter floor speeds.

Sound reducing material shall be installed under machine. Hoist machine mounted direct drive shall be

provided with digital, closed-loop velocity encoder.

2.2. EMERGENCY CRANKING

The hoisting machines shall be provided with a set of special tools including a hand crank to allow release of hoist brake and provide for manual movement of the car in case of emergency. These tools shall be hung up on a tool board fitted to a wall in the elevator machine room, with instructions for their use clearly written on the board both in English and the local language. The elevator system supplier shall qualify his bid with respect to manual cranking. An automatic switch shall be provided to interrupt power to the elevator mains. Upon withdrawal of crank and manual resetting of power monitor switch, power shall be restored.

2.3 SPEED GOVERNOR

The car safety shall be operated by a mechanical centrifugal type car & counterweight drivan speed governor located in the machine room at the top of the hoistway. The governor shall actuate a switch when excessive descending speed occurs, disconnecting power to the hoist motor and applying the brake prior to deployment of the safeties.

2.4 Power Conversion and Regulation Units for direct-current power for the operation of hoist machine brake, door operator, dispatch processor, signal fixtures, etc.,\ solid-state, alternating current, variable voltage \ variable frequency (ACV3F), I.G.B.T converter/inverter drives \ controllers. Units shall be design to limit current, suppress noise, and prevent transient voltage feedback into building power supply, Suppress solid-state converter noises, radio frequency interference, and eliminate regenerative transients induced into the mainline feeders or the building standby power generator.

Units shall be internal heat sink cooling fans as required,

2.5 Direct drive, solid-state, digital type encoder shall be provider to update car position at each floor and automatically restore the same after power loss.

Note - All Elevator equipment including their supports and fastenings to building, shall be from the building structure minimize objectionable noise and vibration transmission to car, building structure, or adjacent




occupied areas of building.:

Noise level relating to Elevator equipment operation in machine room shall not exceed 70 dBA.@ 1 mtr

3. ELEVATOR MATERIALS

Elevator materials shall be non-flammable except travelling cable which shall be flame resistant. All other electrical cables shall also be flame resistant and housed in metal conduit or other metal enclosures

3.1 Guide Rails

Steel guide rails shall be installed to guide the car and counterweight, erected plumb and securely fastened to the building structure, fitted to ensure smooth joints. The guide rail shall be minimum 16 mm, tongued and grooved type. All insert plates & their positions & fixing to be provided by Elevator Contractor.

3.2 Buffers Hydraulic type buffers shall be provided in the pit in compliance with ANSI/ASME/CENEN-81 or local

code if more stringent. Clearance from underside of car resting on a fully compressed buffer shall be not less than 1.20m. Buffer shall be designed for design speed + 15%. The oil buffers shall be self resetting type and shall be provided with means for determining the oil level.

Switch shall be provided on buffer to limit car speed. Ladder(s) and platform(s) shall be provided for buffer access.

3.3 Car

A car-frame fabricated from formed or structural steel members shall be provided with adequate bracing to support the platform and car enclosures. The car safety shall be integral with car-frame or shall be mounted on the bottom members of the car-frame, and shall be of the flexible guide clamp type designed to stop and hold a fully loaded car which exceeds descending speed. Safety shall conform to ANSI/ASME/CENEN-81 or local codes if more stringent.

The car platform shall be of stainless steel plate. The entire platform shall rest on rubber pads, so that it will be designed to form an isolating cushion between the car and car frame. Platform deflection shall be limited to maximum 3 mm under maximum normal operating conditions.

Recess in platform of 20 - 25 mm shall be provided in floor for receiving granite \ marble flooring in the passenger elevator as specified in the Datasheet

For servicing the car, mechanical hatch to be provided as per design of lift manufacturer.

Car Cladding and Finishes

a. Passenger Elevator

Flooring shall be of Anti skid flooring slip resistant material having a slip resistance value of 45–70

(optimally 50–65), as measured with 4S torsugar rubber on a pendulum test.




Interior of elevators shall be with stainless steel hairline finish Grade 304 as indicated in Elevator

Datasheets rear side of car shall be of stainless steel hairline finish Grade 304 with half mirror above the

hand rail on the rear side, stainless steel hairline finish Grade 304 handrail shall be provided on three

sides and provision for carrying additional load towards interior finishes etc. Inner surface of Car door

shall be stainless steel hairline finish Grade 304 and Stainless Steel sheet sandwiched over MS sheet

all as per General Specification. False Ceiling shall be of stainless steel hairline finish Grade 304. In

skirting level louver shall be provided as per drawing/detail all around and also in ceiling.

Rubber encased coil spring tension adjusted roller guides shall be provided for passenger elevators with speed of 1.0 mps or greater, mounted on top and bottom of the car frame, and on top and bottom of the counterweight frame to engage their respective guide rails. Low speed elevators can have sliding guides on car and counterweights. Car manufacturer shall make all provisions for installation of lighting fixtures specified by interior designer\Architects, including integration of emergency lighting fixtures. Additional flooring load of marble / granite to be consider for car design.

3.4 Car Top Station

A car top operating station shall comprise of key operated switch and constant pressure up/down buttons which shall be provided on each elevator. Car shall respond to up/down command at inspection speed. The elevator contractor shall provide light fixture of 36 watt enclosed fluorescent or enclosed 2 x 18 Watt compact fluorescent switched for car top station.

3.5 Counterweight

A structural steel frame with cast iron or steel plate filler weights shall be furnished to provide proper counterbalance for smooth operation.

3.6 Counterweight Guard

A metal counterweight guard shall be furnished and installed at the bottom of the elevator, and shall wrap around counterweight rails for a height of no less than 1.80 m in order to protect accidental contact.

3.7 Sheaves

Sheaves shall be machined grooves, balanced and shall maintain cable /sheave ratio well within requirements. Lubrication points shall be extended to a location that is easily accessible. No deflector sheaves to protrude into elevator.

3.8 Elevator & Governer Ropes Elevator ropes shall be traction steel type of size, construction and number to insure proper operation of

the elevator and give satisfactory and safety assurance. Governor ropes shall be of steel or to suit manufacturer‟s specifications.

All ropes shall consist of at least eight strands wound about a hemp core center. All ropes shall conform




to ANSI/ASME/EN-81 or more governing codes or regulations. The minimum factor of safety for ropes shall be 10.

3.9 Compensating Rope

Compensating ropes shall be furnished and installed for all elevators with speed of 1.0m/sec & above, and travel in excess of 25 m, to compensate for the shifting weight of the hoist ropes. A device shall be provided to tie the car and counterweight together to limit the jump of the car or counterweight. Compensating chain where provided shall be enclosed in a plastic flame resistant jacket to minimize noise.

3.10 Elevator Operating Devices

Redundant series wired terminal stopping devices\switch shall be provided to slow down and stop the car automatically at the terminal landings. Device\switch when actuated shall compulsorily cut off the high speed & switch of the circuitry to run the lift in leveling speed before reaching terminal landing. Resetting a tripped device shall be done manually only.

3.11 Pit Switch

An emergency stop switch shall be located in the pit which when operatrd shall stop the car regardless of position of the elevator.

3.12 Travelling Cables

Travelling cable shall be secured to the cars underside. Cable shall be clear of all obstructions while car is in motion. Rubbing or chafing of cables against hoist-way or equipment within hoist-way to be strictly avoided.

Lighting & power cable shall be with Fire retardant outer sheath.

Shielded wires and cables shall be provided for provision of music, car access control, phone, IP TV, etc in travelling cables. Twisted type, 4 pair 14/0076 music cables and 4 pair 0.5 dia. Cat 6 cable for communication system shall be used. Travelling cables shall be flexible and suspended to relieve strain on individual conductors. A minimum of 10% spare conductors shall be provided in travelling cable.

3.13 Wiring

All wiring and electrical interconnections shall comply with governing codes. Wiring shall 1100 volt grade LSZH type and shall run in metal conduit, tubing or approved electrical raceways.

4. ELEVATOR ENTRANCES & CAR DOOR

All landing elevator entrance door shall have center opening horizontal sliding type doors unless




otherwise specified suitable for a clear opening as indicated in Technical Data sheet for each type of elevator and shall include flush doors of hollow metal construction, extruded aluminium sill with anti slip grooving and hanger supports and hanger cover shall be provided. Exposed surfaces of doors and frames shall be finished as directed by the Interior Designer. For Stretcher\Bed elevators entrance door shall be of two panel Collapsible two speed type. Door Sheave type two point suspension ball bearing door hangers and tracks shall be furnished for each elevator opening. Sheaves shall not be less than 58 mm diameter and adjustable ball bearing rollers shall take the up thrust of the doors.

Elevator Entrances to have minimum two hour fire protection

Car doors shall, unless specifically stated, be center parting, automatic power operated, variable frequency door operator or PWM DC door operator and electronic door detector. Infrared light beams shall be provided to act as a safety curtain across the door entrance to monitor the door closing. Only the door at the landing where the car is stopping shall be opened. Car doors shall be hung plumb and even, to within 1 mm. with minimum number of 4 gibbs per leaf. Floor gibbs shall be well fitted so as to prevent popping noise as a car passes structural members, or car in motion in a shared shaft, etc. Elevator doors shall be hung plumb and show a maximum of 6 mm joint at sides, top and bottom and 2 mm at centre joint. Narrow door frame or jamb panel shall be supplied by ELEVATOR Contractor. A soft chime shall ring prior to doors closing and opening. In normal condition, Car cannot move when the car or hoist-way door is open. During emergencies, car and hoist-way doors shall be capable of being opened from outside.

Frames: 14 gauge hollow metal at all floors.

Door Panels: 16 gauge steel, sandwich construction without binder angles. Leading edges of center-opening doors shall be provided with rubber astragals. Each car & elevator door leaf shall be fitted with minimum of two (2) gibbs per panel, one at leading and one at trailing edge with gibbs in the sill groove entire length of door travel. Sight Guards: 14 gauge, same material and finish as elevator entrance door panels. Construct without sharp edges. Sills: Extruded aluminum Sill Supports: Structural or formed steel shall be designed to support door sill based upon car loading classification. Struts and Headers: Vertical support shall be provided of entrances and related material with door open bumpers on entrances equipped with vertical struts. Upon the car reaching landing in response to a hall or car call, a soft chime in the car shall sound. Door opening shall commence when the car is 25 mm from the leveling. Door open period shall be adjustable to within a range of + 1 second. Door-open-period on all floors except lobby floor shall be shortened to the extent that door closure will commence 2 seconds (field adjustable) following the sensor beam interruption by the last boarding or disembarking passenger. This period shall be adjustable to 1.5 seconds ± 1.0 seconds. Normal door-open-period at lobby floor shall be monitored by the car‟s CPU. Door closure shall override “door-open-period” where car loading has reached by pass limit, or when




another car approaches the lobby floor.

An approved positive interlock shall be provided for each elevator entrance which shall prevent operation of the elevator unless all doors for that elevator are secured and shall maintain the doors in their closed position while the elevator is away from the landing. Emergency access to the hoist-way as required by governing codes shall be provided.

4.1. Car and Hoist-Way Door Operator

For each elevator door, an electric VVVF door operator or PWM DC door operator shall be furnished to simultaneously open the car and hoist-way doors when the car is at a landing. The doors shall be closed simultaneously by motor power. Emergency key provision shall be made to open doors at all landing from outside of the hoist-way.

Retiring cam arrangement shall be provided.

In the event of interruption of electric power or failure of the door operator, it shall not be possible to open the car door manually from within the car.

An electric contact for the car door shall be provided which shall prevent elevator movement away from the landing unless the door is in the closed position. Each hoist-way door shall be equipped with a positive electromechanical interlock and auxiliary door closing device so that the elevator can be operated only after the interlock circuit is established.

The doors shall open automatically while the car is leveling at the respective landing. The doors shall automatically close after a predetermined time interval has elapsed, but the momentary pressure of the “door open” button provided in the car shall reverse the motion and reopen the doors and reset the time interval unless overridden by the electronic door monitor.

Door operation shall be consistent, smooth and quiet at all floors, regardless of door weight or varying air pressure.

4.2. Door Control Device Photoelectric door monitors shall be installed on each elevator with full screen 2D infrared matrix or

multiple beams extending vertically along leading edge of each door panel to full height of door above finished floor.

This device shall prevent doors from closing and reverse doors at normal opening speed if beams are obstructed while doors are closing, except during nudging operation. In event of device failure, provide for automatic shutdown of car at floor level with doors open. After beams of door control device are obstructed for a predetermined time interval (minimum 20.0 - 25.0 seconds), warning signal shall sound and doors shall attempt to close with a maximum of 1 kgm kinetic energy. Activation of the door open button shall override nudging operation and reopen doors. When beams are interrupted during initial door opening door shall be remain open for minimum of 3.0 seconds. When beams are interrupted after the initial 3.0 second hold open time, hold time will reduce




to 1.0 -1.5 seconds and which is adjustable.

5. VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY FLUCTUATIONS

All electrical equipments supplied by the elevator contractor shall withstand an incoming supply voltage fluctuation of +/-10% frequency variation of +/- 5%.

Built in Auto voltage stabiliser shall be provided to avoid the problems/hazards due to voltage

fluctuations, with lift power panel.

6. OVER-LOAD FEATURE

Elevators shall be fitted with the load weighing feature to illuminate “Over-Load” and defeat

the car‟s operating circuits when car load reaches 110% or more of rated load. Car platform may require stiffening to minimize margin of error resulting from excessive deflection. Overload feature and / or circuit defeat for elevators shall conform to governing code.

7. AUTOMATIC SELF-LEVELING

The elevator shall be provided with automatic self-leveling feature that shall bring the elevator car level to within ±3 mm of the landing floor regardless of load or direction of travel. Leveling device shall be with two way automatic. The automatic self-leveling feature shall compensate for over travel and rope stretch.

8. CAR SPEED

Car speed shall be based on the travel distance and number of floors. Refer Technical Data sheet

Appendix-III in SSC-12 of Special Conditions of Contract.

9. ACCELERATION / DECELERATION

Acceleration / Deceleration shall be linear and smooth. Stops shall be without cable oscillations.

Acceleration & Declaration shall be site adjustable.

10. NOISE LEVELS (PASSENGER/STRECHER ELEVATOR)

Noise from moving equipment including door operation, car motion, fan, etc. shall not intrude into adjoining spaces by more than 20 dB and adjoining occupied areas by not more than 10 dB (All octave bands).

Noise level inside the car shall not exceed 50 dB without car cabin fan running.

Noise level inside the car shall not exceed 55 dB. in case of door opening / closing. The noise level




shall be measured at „Zero Activity‟.

11. LATERAL QUAKING & VERTICAL VIBRATIONS

Lateral quaking and vertical vibrations should not exceed 20 gal and 85 dB respectively. Contractor to

demonstrate these parameters at site with performance analyzer.

12. CAR POSITION INDICATOR (PASSENGER/SERVICE CARS)

LED dot matrix type car position indicator shall be installed above each operating panel. The position of

the car in the hoist-way shall be shown by illuminating the corresponding landing at which the car is stopped or passing.

13. LIGHTING

Elevator shall be provided with emergency lighting & alarm bell in each cab through car mounted dry cell rechargeable battery with minimum 5 years life expectancy & solid state battery charger , necessary changeover relays. This shall be additionally fed by centralized emergency lighting UPS of the building. Location of light fixture to be coordinated with architects \ Interior Designer. Light output shall be minimum 50 LUX at floor level.

14. HALL BUTTONS (ALL CARS)

For elevators hall buttons shall be provided at each terminal landing. A single micro movement push

button shall be provided at top most and the lowest floor landing in each group of elevators, two micro movement buttons on a single plate shall be provided at each intermediate floor in each group. When a hall call is registered by momentary pressure on a landing button, that button shall become illuminated and remain illuminated until the call is answered.

15. CALL BUTTON

Selection for call button for passenger car shall be as per Architect selection.

16. FIXTURE FINISHES

The metal faceplates of the signal and operating fixtures in the cars and at the landings, along with the metal accessories in the cars, shall be hair line stainless steel or as selected by the Architect. Push button fixtures at the landings shall be of design approved by the Architect. All fixtures form and finishes, etc. shall be subject to the Architect‟s and interior designer‟s approval.

17. AUTOMATIC ELEVATOR RETRIEVAL SYSTEM (FIRE PHASE- I)

All the lifts to be operated exclusively as fire rescue lift. Provision for Fireman drive to be made to bring

the car to the main floor immediately after the fire switch is operated. Thereafter the car is for operation

by the rescue person. All landing calls are ignored. Lift answers one car call at a time. The rescue

person controls opening and closing of doors at a floor. Returns to normal when fire switch is opened.

Fire fighter switch Drive to be provided for all the lifts.

All the fire lift shall be provided with ceiling hatch for use in case of emergency, so that when the car




gets stuck up, it shall be easily openable for people to escape. All elevators shall be equipped with automatic elevator retrieval system which shall, upon signal from the central fire alarm system or manually operated key switch, cause all elevators to be dispatched automatically to the ground floor. Elevators shall, open their doors and remain at the ground floor. All floor and car buttons shall be rendered ineffective until the system is manually reset. A smoke detector shall be placed in close proximity to each elevator bank on the ground floor. If this device senses smoke, system shall land elevators at a preselected, alternate, landing floor. A key operated switch shall be provided at the ground floor to activate and reset the retrieval system manually. System shall be on line with NBC 2005 recommendations.

a. Emergency operation shall return the elevators to a designated floor, most commonly, the Lobby, by means of a signal from the automatic fire alarm system.

b. On initiation from the fire alarm system, control panel, all elevators travelling away from the lobby floors shall stop and reverse without opening their doors indicating fire mode-operation to passengers, ignoring all car and hall calls and express to the lobby or assigned floor.

c. Cars travelling toward ground shall express to ground ignoring all car and hall calls. Cars parked on intermediate floors shall close their doors and express to ground. Cars parked at lobby shall open their doors ignoring car and hall calls. All hall and car buttons shall extinguish and shall accept no further hall or car registration.

d. All elevators shall, in addition and where allowed by code, be provided with a key operated switch for use by in-house fire brigade.

e. The elevator contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with the fire detection & alarm system supplier / installer for his system interfacing responsibilities.

Fireman Emergency

Actuation of fire mode shall put all car functions as described here under fireman control by means of a key switch.

a. Hall button giving car call indication shall cause the doors to close.

b. Applying constant pressure to the door open button shall cause door to begin to open. Releasing the button before door is fully open shall cause the door to close.

c. Hall buttons shall be rendered inoperative.

d. Car position indicator shall indicate floor when car is within door operating range, and if in motion it shall indicate nearest floor by flashing. When a car is within operating zone, the position indicator shall light uninterrupted.

e. All electrical door safety locks shall remain effective.

f. Car position, direction of travel and floor conditions shall be displayed on the car position monitor in the lobby, and at elevator system monitor in engineering room.




g. Returning the car to the designated landing floor, deactivating the lobby switch shall render the car to original pre fire mode condition.

h. Resetting the Fire Alarm contacts in the car monitoring panel shall restore the system to normal condition.

18. INSPECTION OPERATION - ALL ELEVATORS

A switch shall be provided in the car to permit operation of the elevator from top of the car for inspection purposes, with car and hall buttons inoperative. Car shall travel at inspection speed not exceeding 0.5 m/sec. Motion of car shall require constant pressure to directional button.

19. INDEPENDENT SERVICE (ALL CARS)

A key operated switch shall be provided in the car operating station which, when actuated, shall disconnect the elevator from the hall buttons and permit operation from the car buttons only.

20. CAR OPERATING PANEL

The car operating panel shall contain a bank of micro movement illuminated buttons marked to correspond to the landings serviced. Faceplate shall be constructed of stainless steel, hairline finish Grade 304 or TOUCH SCREEN wherever specified.

It shall include floor buttons, alarm button, door open button, door close button and emergency push-to-call button connected to an alarm bell situated on ground floor. Plates shall be configured as per local building code accessibility standards including Braille. Operating controls shall be within 900 mm to 1200mm above the car floor.

The emergency alarm button shall be connected to the 12 volt rechargeable battery circuit. A locked compartment integral with operating panel shall contain:

a. Auto/manual/inspection key operated switch.

b. Up/down button.

c. Fan switches

d. Synthesized voice announcements

On sounding of general fire alarm, the elevator shall if in motion, express to the ground floor. If stopped,

the elevator shall open its doors and remain there until reset. Emergency talk-back system shall be

provided, installed in integral cabinet and connected to the EPABX by the low tension contractor.

For integration with PA system, additional cabling to be provided from lift car to the elevator control

panel. Hands free 3 way intercom facility inside the car with niche and wiring to be provided.

All Passenger Elevators of 13 passenger capacity and above shall be provided with 2 Nos. Car operating panels and freight elevator with 2 No. Car Operating Panel.

Elevator vendor shall provide COP design to architect for review and coordination with elevator cab finishes.

Earthing system shall be designed in accordance with IS: 3043 for earthing system. Dedicated copper




earthing pits shall be provided for Elevators equipment and to be connected to earthing grid provided by electrical contractors.

21. ELEVATOR CONTROL PANEL (ECP).

ECP shall be vertical, totally enclosed cubicle constructed of sheet steel with hinged doors of Grade 304 with hairline finish on the front and screwed panels or hinged doors on the back, giving easy access to all components inside the controller. The cubicle enclosure shall be minimum of IP 22. Panel ventilating fans shall be provided to maintain components temperature within limits. It will have a microprocessor with solid state switching devices sequenced and interlocked. It will have monitoring points for Elevator position & Emergency Stop. ECP should be located such that it can be easily accessed from the last landing and shall be key locked and vandal proof.

It will provide protection but not restricted to the following:

i) No-voltage or sustained under voltage ii) Overcurrent in any component iii) Phase reversal of the power supply iv) Overload v) Single phasing

ECP shall be arranged to cut-off the power supply, apply the brake and bring the car to rest at the nearest landing in the event any of the above failures occur. Same should happen, in the event of a signal from the Fire Alarm Control Panel.

22. AUTOMATIC LOAD BYPASS

Transducers in the car platform shall monitor passenger load which shall override “pre-programmed door open period” and dispatch the loaded car from the low terminal. The load weighing device shall also function in the same manner on all intermediate and top floors and in addition shall express to the next car call and ignore all hall calls. Hall calls which are bypassed shall not be canceled. The automatic load bypass device shall be field adjusted for 50% -80% of rated load.

22.2. Operation –Simplex

a. Operation shall be automatic by means of the car and landing buttons. Stops registered by the momentary actuation of the car or landing buttons shall be made in order in which the landings are reached in each direction of travel after the buttons have been actuated. All stops shall be subject to the respective car or landing button being actuated sufficiently in advance of the arrival of the car at that landing to enable the stop to be made. The direction of travel for an idle car shall be established by the first car or hall button actuated.

b. “UP” landing calls shall be answered while the car is travelling in the up direction and “DOWN” landing calls shall be answered while the car is travelling down. The car shall reverse after the uppermost or lowermost car or landing call has been answered, and proceeds to answer calls and landing calls registered in the opposite direction




c. If a car without registered car calls arrives at a floor where both up and down hall calls have registered, it shall initially respond to the hall call in the direction that the car was travelling. If no car call or hall call is registered for further travel in that direction, the car shall close its doors and immediately reopen them in response to the hall call in the opposite direction. Direction lanterns shall indicate the changed direction and initiate gong when the doors reopen.

22.3 Collective Selective Group Control

a. The elevator system shall have UP and DOWN buttons at each landing to select the desired direction of travel. The microprocessor-based controller to memorize all car and landing calls, and the system shall answer all registered calls sequentially & preferably in the current direction of movement.

b. Each of the landing call shall be automatically allocated to the best placed (nearest car travelling in the same direction).Control to be designed such that cars are effectively spaced to give even service.

c. Optimized response to hall calls shall be achieved by computing a relative system response (RSR) time for each registered hall call. The computation of each car‟s RSR time to a call shall be based on, but not limited to, such relevant factors as distance, service to previously assigned car and hall calls, car load, direction, door and car motion status, and coincidence of car and hall calls. The car with the least RSR shall have such a call assigned to it.

d. RSR computations for each hall call shall be repeated several times a second and the hall call

assignment might be changed if a more suitable car is found available.

e. All cars to be parked at ground floor when there are no unanswered calls.

f. A car arriving at a floor to park shall not open its doors. Cars shall open their doors only when stopping in response to a car or hall call.

g. If for any reason the doors are prevented from closing and the car is unable to respond to a call,

it shall lose its assignment and the call shall be transferred to the other car.

h. When a car is filled to a predetermined load setting, it shall no longer stop for hall calls. Any registered hall call shall remain registered for the next elevator to respond.

i. When the independent service switch in the car operation station is actuated, that elevator shall be disconnected from the hall button riser/s ( means from Group operation ) and operate independently from car buttons only.

j. Provide Attendant control switch with Auto/Manual facility in Service Elevator




23. EXPANDED LOBBY ZONE ARRANGEMENT FOR HEAVY DOWN PERIOD

The group supervisory control system shall be arranged to include a number of consecutive floors above the main floor as part of the lowest zone. Upon completion of travel within the expanded lobby zone, the car assigned to that zone shall return to a pre-designated floor.

23.1 Car to Lobby Operation

Provide a key operated switch for each elevator at the main floor which, when actuated, shall cause the corresponding elevator to make a trip to the lobby as soon as the car is available for response to the special call.

23.2 Next Car Up

“Next Car Up” shall be indicated by flashing of lantern for the car so designated at the lobby. Other cars shall remain parked with doors closed until each car, in turn, is assigned as “Next Car Up”.

23.3 Express Feature

Express feature shall be extended to hall call of 30 seconds or longer due to bypassed floors.

23.4 Express Priority Service

a. A key switch and signal light shall be provided at each selected landing for the purpose of providing an express priority service to each such landing. The control system shall compute the relative response times (RST) of all available designated elevators to service the call, based on the position and direction of the elevator relative to the priority floor, and also based on its door status, and select the car which has the shortest predictable response time (SPRT).Each car may be assigned to only one priority call at a time, and all cars which are designated to provide express priority service which are in service, and which have not already been selected and assigned to a call, may be selected simultaneously. The cars which are to provide express priority service shall be designated by contract.

b. Should the selected car fail to respond to its assigned priority call within an allowable time interval (due to unpredictable circumstances, such as the failure of its doors to close), selection shall automatically be passed on to another car, based on the aforementioned computations.

c. Each selected car shall cancel all registered car calls and bypass all hall call on its way to its assigned priority landing. When the car arrives at the priority landing, it shall remain with doors open for a predetermined period of time. If not placed in service the doors shall close and the car shall automatically return to normal operation.

d. The signal lights shall be illuminated while a car is responding to a priority call, and shall be extinguished when the car has opened its doors at its assigned priority landing.

24. DESPATCH SYSTEM

The dispatch system shall be micro processor based. The system‟s main computer shall communicate with each car‟s computer. Microprocessor shall be intelligent in that it learns traffic patterns and applies




best solution to each traffic condition, as determined by shortest predictable response. The CPU shall monitor demand on the system and shall execute the most economical assignment of cars.

25. CENTRAL MONITORING PANEL

Each elevator lobby at ground floor or BMS Room as directed by the client shall have central monitoring panel with LCD screen to position of all elevator cars working in a group.

26. AUTOMATIC RESCUE DEVICE

Automatic rescue device (ARD) shall be provided to bring the lift to the nearest floor either in case of power failure or incase of elevator controller failure. In both this cases ARD shall start up automatically and drives the elevator at low speed to nearest floor and opens the doors automatically. Thereafter the control shall get transferred to mains power supply. The dive energy shall be available from rechargeable maintenance free batteries housed inside the ARD panel itself.

27. EARTHING

All conducting parts of the elevators / panels etc., power & lighting in the shaft shall be earthed properly as per codes to ensure safe operation

28. BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The Elevator Panel should have the following Provisions 1) It shall be able to accept signal from central monitoring panel & display movement of all elevator

cars. 2) It shall be able to accept signal from the Fire Alarm Panel in case of fire and automatically ground

the elevator on receipt of this signal. 3) Potential free contact to indicate elevator trip status. 4) Potential free contact to indicate elevator alarm status. 5) Potential free contact to indicate Emergency Activation Switch status. FAS contractor shall provide necessary cabling up to Elevator Panel and termination shall be done by Elevator Contractor. Software Interface The Elevator microprocessor panel should be compatible with BMS and should be able to communicate with the BMS in any of the following standard protocol like MODBUS, LONWORKS, BACNET etc. In case of multiple elevators having individual microprocessor panels it should be possible to network all microprocessors panels and be connected to a master controller. BAS communication cable can be integrated directly to the master controller or in case master controller is not available it should be possible to integrate each Microprocessor controller to the BAS system. It should be possible to monitor the following data points through software integration.

1) Elevator car position. 2) Fire Emergency signal monitoring.




3) Elevator Attendant Mode. 4) Elevator Alarm Mode.

In case of fire it should be possible to control the elevator through software interface. All necessary hardware including interface card and accessories necessary for integration with the BAS system has to be provided by BAS contractor.

29. BATTERY LIMIT.

By Elevator Contractors By other

1) Design, Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Elevators with all accessories, as per specifications and as approved by consultant.

2) Receipt and Storage of all the above equipment/materials at Site.

3) To provide adequate safety and security measures to prevent any damage, theft or pilferage of material during storage, erection period and until the installation is handed over. (Storage/Erection).

4)

Furnish all the information required by the PURCHASER to enable him to design the structure / Elevator shaft. The VENDOR‟s supervisor shall supervise the installation of inserts in the elevator shaft, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the civil work in this regard.

Clear hoist way and pit as required by the vendor, including any civil work within the hoist way required for the machinery.

5) To provide scaffolding, structural beams, safety guards as necessary in the elevator hoist way, during the erection period and to remove the same thereafter. Rental charges for scaffolding shall be in VENDOR‟s scope.

Whitewashing of hoist way

6) Installation of Guide rails, supporting brackets as required to suite site conditions.

Waterproofing of hoist way

7) Minor civil work like making chases, holes, drilling in concrete, sill angles etc.

Ladder in the Pit.




By Elevator Contractors By other

8) All electrical and control wiring from the main switch onwards.

Electric wiring & earthing up to the main switch inside the elevator machine room, as required by the elevator contractor.

9) Supply & Installation of hall buttons & other signal fittings.

Lighting and power wiring in the hoist way, including 6/16 A sockets at various levels in the hoist way, as required by the elevator vendor(Not for construction purpose)

10) Supply & Installation of Automatic Rescue Device.

11) 12)

Laying of cables including travelling cables, telephone wires, music cabling, earthing etc. through elevator shaft Provide potential free contacts as suitable for interfacing with Integrated Building Management System

Interfacing with Integrated Building Management System

13) Earthing arrangement for equipment being provided under this contract

Earthing connection to purchaser‟s earth grid/ earth pit outside the main building, as required.

14) Furnish electric power requirement of the necessary characteristics to provide illumination and for operation of tools and hoists, if required, during the erection of elevator as well as current for starting, testing and adjusting the elevator.

Provide power as required, for the erection and testing/ commissioning of the elevators

15) Furnish all working and shop drawings Approval of drawings (by Owner/ Services Consultant)

16) Supply of maintenance tool kit




17) Payment of all fees and arranging for

Inspection of the installation by statutory

authorities without any additional cost

whatsoever to the client.

18) Service charges for securing the permission and license to operate from the concerned authorities, in favour of the client.

19) Obtaining necessary license to operate the Elevators from concerned authorities. without any additional cost whatsoever to the client

20) Flooring of granite/marble inside the car by Interior Decorator\Architects.

21) Architraves by Interior Decorator\Architects.

30. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Tenderer shall enclose with their offer the following additional information:

a. List of installation of 1.5 mps & above installation completed by the tenderer during the last 5 years.

b. Details of “In-House” facilities for testing and inspection of elevator materials.

c. Details of service facilities in the respective project location.

d. Confirm that elevator may be operated on DG sets and provide power characteristic to design the generator capacity.

Tenderers shall submit details / samples / photographs / catalogues for following. These shall be relevant to the project and the contractor shall indicate which of these are being offered in the bid.

a. Hall Lantern

b. Car Operating Panel.

c. Hall Buttons

d. Group Indication panel.

e. Stainless steel finishes.




SECTION „D‟- DUMBWAITERDETAIL REQUIREMENTS

1.1. CONTROL REQUIREMENTS

The Dumbwaiter shall be of the single-speed AC electric drum or traction driven type and shall be

manufactured to comply with the basic requirements listed in the schedule of requirements and designed to

meet the detailed requirements specified in the subsequent clauses of this part.

The equipment offered shall be suitable for continuous operation, with electricity supply being, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50Hz AC with nominal voltage of 415/230V varying between 95% and 105% of the nominal voltage.

1.1. SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS

Item Description Design Requirements

1 Type of service Dumbwaiter

2 Shaft size 1500 Wide x 1200 deep

3 Size of cabin Preferrably 1000 wide x 1000 deep x 1200 high. OR (suitable to shaft size)

4 Load 250kg

5 Number of stops 2

6 Type of doors for landing Vertical Bi parting with safety devices

7 Clear opening of doors 1000 x 1200

8 Position of entrances 750mm above floor level

9 Type of landing door frames Stainless steel

10 Position of machine room At top inside of shaft

11 Type of drive Drum/Traction

12 Contract speed 0.3m/s

13 Power control system Single-speed, AC resistance

14 Operation Single automatic pushbutton

15 Type of car and landing buttons SS, Illuminated push buttons with seven segment display




Item Description Design Requirements

16 Pit depth 750mm

17 Type of shaft Concrete

18 Safety Half curtain infra-red door safety in auto door.

NOTE: General arrangement drawing to be submitted along with the BID document.

1.1. EQUIPMENT IN MACHINE COMPARTMENT

1.1.1. Structure

The structure shall be free standing and manufactured from cold rolled and galvanised profiles, pre-

mounted in 2m sections.

The structure once assembled shall be enclosed in brickwork (by the Contractor) through which openings

will be provided for sills, door frames etc.

1.1.2. Machine

The machine shall consist of a flange-mounted motor driving a continuous groove drum through a

gearbox, and a solenoid brake. The machine and control equipment shall be mounted on a platform

installed in the top of the shaft. Access to the machine compartment shall be provided by means of a

hinged access panel at the front of the shaft at a suitable height above the top landing served.

1.1.3. Motor

The motor shall be a single-speed, 3-phase, squirrel cage induction motor with a high torque and low slip

characteristic to reduce the variation in speed with load to a minimum.

The motor shall be started direct-on-line and shall be retarded and stopped by cutting-off the power supply and applying the solenoid brake.

1.1.4. Gear Box

The gearbox shall consist of a cast iron housing accommodating the worm wheel and worm shaft, which

shall be partly immersed in a specially selected lubricating oil. Removable covers shall be provided in the




housing to facilitate easy inspection of the gears. The worm shaft shall be carried in sleeve bearings at the

driven end and double thrust ball bearings at the other end.

The worm wheels shall be cut from a centrifugal cast phosphor bronze rim and shall be shrunk on and

fixed to a cast iron spider by means of keying screws. The drum shall be mounted to the worm wheel

shaft, which shall run in sleeve bearings or roller bearings provided silent operation can be guaranteed.

Thrust bearings shall be removable without having to dismantle the complete machine.

The drum shall be provided with an accurately machined continuous rope groove, the profile of which is to be selected with due regard to the specified duty, to ensure sufficient and even traction and long rope and groove life. The drum shall have sufficient metal thickness to allow for future re-grooving and shall be easily removable.

1.1.5. Brake

The brake shall be of the drum of disc type mounted on the motor drive shaft between the motor and the

gear box and shall be operated by a DC solenoid acting on two self-aligning rake shoes lined with friction

material. The shoes shall be independently mounted and shall be spring applied and electrically released.

One half of each brake must be capable of holding the car in the event of failure of the other half.

The rake shall operate in the event of a power failure or the operation of any other safety device designed

to stop the hoist.

1.1.6. Hand turning Gear

The lift machine shall be provided with a hand winding wheel and manual brake release lever to facilitate

the safe turning of the machine by hand.

1.1.7. Mounting of Lift Machine in Machine Compartment

The lift Sub-contractor shall supply and install suitable structural steel beams with bearing plates for the

mounting of the lift machine in the machine compartment.

Anti-vibration mountings shall be provided to minimise the transmission of vibrations to the structure and to ensure the silent and smooth operation of all the equipment. Tenderers shall describe the methods to be used to achieve the desired result.

1.1.8. Controller

The control gear shall be assembled on a separate frame, mounted on the main machinery or machine

compartment walls.

Contact surfaces of contactors and relays shall be of the silver-to-silver type. Copper-to-copper contacts




will not be accepted. All wearing parts must be easily renewable, and flexible connections must be used for all moving contacts. Spring or moveable joints shall not be current carrying. The controllers must incorporate all switch-gear, relays and other equipment necessary for the operation and protection of the hoist, and must be so designed that the car will automatically be brought to a stop in the event of: -

a) Interruption of the main power supply, or the interruption of any one phase of the main supply, or if a

phase reversal of the main supply has occurred;

b) The operation of the top limit switch;

c) Operation of the slack rope sensing switches;

All terminals of the machinery and control gear shall be marked with distinctive letters or numbers, and corresponding markings shall appear on the contract drawings.

1.2. EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN THE HOIST-WAY

1.2.1. Guide Rails and Guide Shoes

The guides for the car and counterweight shall consist of suitable rolled steel channel or T-sections

designed to be fixed directly to the shaft walls or constructed top form a self-supporting structure for the

hoist. Metal splice plates shall be a suitable length and fixing brackets for guide rails shall be located in

such positions that when the car is at any landing the guide shoes on the car will be at a fixing bracket.

All brackets shall be secured by means of approved expandable concrete anchor bolts of adequate size and length. The hoist shall be fitted with spring-loaded sliding-type guide shoes provided with automatic oil feed lubricators. The shoes shall have ample bearing surfaces and shall be easily adjustable and removable for renewal.

1.2.2. Ropes

Ropes shall be of the best quality and of suitable number, size and manufacture to ensure proper

operation of the lift, and to give satisfactory wearing qualities. All ropes shall consist of at least six strands

wound round a hemp core centre,

1.2.3. Over-Travel Protection

Normal and final terminal stopping switches shall respectively be arranged to stop the car and prevent its

normal operation should it travel beyond the zone of the normal stopping device at the upper and lower

terminal floors or travel within the top and bottom clearances.

1.2.4. Stop Switch In Pit




A watertight stop switch shall be provided in the lift shaft in a position that can be reached from the lowest

floor served.

1.2.5. Accessibility for Maintenance

The equipment in the machine compartment shall be so arranged and positioned that all adjustments and

maintenance work can be carried out through an access panel situated above the landing door of the

uppermost floor served by the hoist.

1.3. HOIST CAR

1.3.1. Construction

The hoist car shall be manufactured of folded, galvanised steel sheets and shall be fitted with one

removable shelf.

Hoist car dimensions shall be as follows: Width : 1000mm Height : 1200mm Depth : 1000mm

1.4. LANDING EQUIPMENT

1.4.1. Landing Doors

The landing doors for the hoist shall be of the manually operated, vertical bi-parting type. The doors shall

be of brushed satin finished stainless steel construction, designed so that the clear door opening shall be

equal to the full height of the car and 100mm less than the width of the car to give unobstructed access

when open. The doors shall be of rigid and robust construction, suitable to withstand the impact of goods

being handled and the general abuse usually occurring in service areas.

The doors shall be supported on both sides by bearing tyred runners in smooth polished steel track and

guided at the bottom by non-metallic shoes sliding in smooth machined grooves. The doors shall

completely close off the door opening, lock positively and be equipped with the necessary safety devices

to prevent the lift from starting unless all the doors are fully closed.

1.4.2. Landing Sills and door Frames

Landing sills shall consist of a substantial angle or channel section stainless steel and shall be firmly fixed

to the building work surrounding the structure and at 700mm above floor level.




The doors and frames shall be manufactured from brushed satin finished stainless steel angle or channel sections and shall be built into the door openings.

1.4.3. Landing Operating Panel

A landing operating panel shall be provided adjacent to the landing doorframe on each level. The following facilities shall be provided in the panel:

a) Indication that the hoist is in use;

b) Indication that the hoist has arrived at a floor by means of a gong and illuminated call button;

c) Pushbutton to call the hoist;

d) Pushbutton for each floor served to send the hoist to a particular floor.

1.4.4. Operation of the Hoist

The operation of the hoist shall be fully automatic, i.e. it shall carry out one instruction at a time and when

in use shall ignore any other calls and will only become available to a second user upon completion of the

trip initiated by the first user.

1.5. MAINTENANCE

Supplier shall provide free comprehensive maintenance of the dumbwaiters for a period of twenty four months from the date of handing over the dumbwaiter. It shall include replacement of defective equipment/spares etc. & maintenance of battery in sound condition. Maintenance shall consist of regular examination, necessary adjustment, lubrication etc. of equipments, batteries etc by competent technicians & experienced supervisory staff. Also all necessary supplies and spares shall be supplied by you. Prompt attendance shall be provided day & night for all emergency & any trouble developed calls.

1.6. PERIOD OF FREE MAINTENCE

Period of free maintenance shall be 24 months from date of handing over of tested commissioned lift to the Employer and / or submitting of approval certificates of concerned approving authorities required under law of land. Period will start from date which ever is latter. It is duty & responsibility of the supplier to apply on behalf of the Employer and obtain required license if necessary from the concerned authorities. No charges on this account shall be reimbursable. Supplier shall have facility & shall undertake to maintain the lifts and allied equipment including battery on a yearly basis after expiry of free comprehensive period of maintenance stated above or any other period stated in Contract.

1.7. TRAINING

On successful completion of handing over commissioned lift 2 operators shall be trained for 1st hand emergency operations and day to day maintenance cleaning, checkup required to be carried out over &




above the routine maintenance carried out by dumbwaiter supplier. This training shall be of charge.




SCHEDULES OF TECHNICAL INFORMATION 2.1 GENERAL

Tenderers are required to complete the following Schedule of Technical Information and shall in addition,

under separate cover, give full particulars of the equipment and installations offered as well as detailed

descriptions of the various methods of control and operation.

2.2 TECHNICAL INFORMATION SCHEDULE

Item Description Details

1 Manufacturer‟s Name

2 Performance

a) Car speed in m/s

b) Average round trip time

c) Maximum carrying capacity of each lift car

3 Main Hoist Motor

a) Maker‟s name

b) Type

c) Rated output (kW)

d) Time rating (starts/hr)

e) Manufacturing standard

f) Maximum speed (RPM)

g) Rated voltage (Volts)

h) Full load current (Amps)

i) Starting current (Amps)

j) Type of bearings

k) Maximum line current with lift starting with full contract load (Amps)

4 Brake

a) Type




Item Description Details

b) Position on machine

c) Method of control

5 Gearing

a) Material of worm

b) Material of wormwheel

c) Type of thrust bearings

d) Ratio of gearing

6 Switch-gear and Control System

a) Make of main circuit breaker

b) Rupturing capacity of main circuit breaker (kA)

c) Type of control system

d) Control voltage

e) Make of contactors

f) Make of control relays

g) Contact material used for auxiliary and main contacts of controller switch-gear

7 Car and Doors

a) Net inside dimensions: width x depth x height (mm)

b) Thickness of material of landing doors

c) Finish of landing doors

d) Clear width and height of landing doors

e) Type of suspension used for landing doors

f) Thickness and type of car floor

g) Type of materials used for inside finishes of car

h) Stopping tolerance




SECTION „E‟- PLUMBING AND FIRE FIGHTING WORK

1.0. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

1.1. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS: The detailed specifications given hereinafter are for the items of works

described in the schedule of quantities attached herein, and shall be guidance for proper execution of work

to the required standards. It may also be noted that the specifications are of generalised nature and

these shall be read in conjunction with the description of item in schedule of quantities and

drawings. The work also includes all minor details of construction which are obviously and fairly intended

and which may not have been referred to in these documents but are essential for the entire completion in

accordance with standard Engineering practice.

Unless specifically otherwise mentioned, all the applicable codes and standards published by the Indian

Standard Institution and all other standards which may be published by them before the date of receipt of

tenders, shall govern in all respects of design, workmanship, quality and properties of materials and

methods of testing, method of measurements etc. Wherever any reference to any Indian Standard

Specification occurs in the documents relating to this contract, the same shall be inclusive of all

amendments issued theirto or revisions thereof, if any, upto the date of receipt of tenders. In case there is

no I.S.I. specification for the particular work, such work shall be carried out in accordance with the

instructions in all respects, and requirements of the Engineer-in-Charge. The work shall be carried out in a

manner complying in all respects with the requirements of relevant bye-laws of the Municipal

Committee/Municipal Corporation/Development Authority/Improvement Trust etc. under the jurisdiction of

which the work is to be executed or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and, unless otherwise

mentioned, nothing extra shall be paid on this account.

Samples of various materials, fittings etc. proposed to be incorporated in the work shall be submitted by the

contractor for approval of the Engineer-in-charge before order for bulk supply is placed.

The contractor shall take instructions from the Engineer-in-Charge regarding collection and stacking of

materials in any place. No excavated earth or building materials shall be stacked on areas where other

buildings, roads, services, compound walls etc. are to be constructed.

The contractor shall maintain in perfect condition all works executed till the completion of the entire work

allotted to him. Where phased delivery is contemplated, this provision shall apply to each phase.

The contractor shall give a performance test of the entire installation(s) as per standard specifications before

the work is finally accepted and nothing extra whatsoever shall be payable to the contractor for the test.

The contractor shall clear the site thoroughly of all debris, surplus excavated materials and rubbish etc. left

out of his work and dress the site around the building to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge before

the work is considered as complete.




The Chief Engineer, DCSE, DAE, shall be the sole deciding authority as to the meaning, interpretations and

implications for various provisions of the specifications and his decision in writing shall be final and binding

on all concerned.

In case any difference or discrepancy between the specifications and the description in the schedule of

quantities, the schedule of quantities shall take precedence. In case of any difference or discrepancy

between specifications and drawing, the specifications shall take precedence. In case any difference or

discrepancy between the specifications for Civil works and specification for Public Health Engg. works,

specifications for Civil works shall take precedence.

1.1.1. PRECAUTIONS While carrying out pipe line work in case the contractor encounter any interference with

other services such as cables, conduits etc, he shall take sufficient precautions in order to prevent any

damage to them. If any damage occurs, it shall be rectified to its original condition at his own cost to the

satisfaction of the officers concerned with such services.

The contractor shall ensure that all inserts, pipe lines embedded in structural members or sleeves are

placed in position in co-ordination with civil work.

All public health engineering services shall be handed over to Engineer-in-charge complete in all respects

on completion of the work. Incomplete work will not be taken over. Any loss or damage to these services

due to any reasons by anybody whatsoever before handing over will be at contractor‟s risk and cost. Any

damage to any structural/finishing work done during the testing or rectification shall be made good by the

contractor at his own cost and risk.

1.1.2. COST TO BE COVERED: The rates quoted by the tenderer under this contract shall cover the cost of all

the following elements.

1.1.3. MISCELLANEOUS WORK : The contractor carrying out the construction work shall take effective measures

to carefully open out all existing channels, culverts, bridges, pipelines, conduits, water courses, sewer,

drains, electrical cables, transmission lines and their supports and all works buried or otherwise where such

services have to be interfered with the purpose of the construction of the works. He shall provide and

arrange all necessary temporary supports and diversions if necessary across/under/even through along

sides of the trenches and all other parts of construction works for all such channels, culverts, bridges, pipe

lines, conduits.

1.1.4. CLEARANCE FOR ROADS AND FOOT PATHS : The contractor shall arrange to carry out all works with

least interference practicable with public footpath and vehicular traffic and with existing waste water or storm

water drainage arrangements and provide all necessary road barriers, fences, notices, lights, gangways,

access crossings, diversions for traffic, temporary drains, dewatering channels, chutes pumping or water

lifting arrangements and all other facilities for the proper execution of the works to the approval and

satisfaction in all respects of the Engineer-in-Charge. Any work carried out by the contractor in this




connection shall be deemed as temporary works incidental to the construction work.

1.1.5. LOCATION: The rates quoted by the tenderer under this contract shall be applicable for the work at all floor

and locations.

1.1.6. DEWATERING: The rates quoted by the tenderer under this contract shall include bailing or pumping out all

the water which may accumulate during the progress of the work either through seepage, springs, rain or

any other cause.

1.1.7. WATER SUPPLY MAIN: The cost includes for transport charges and testing charges prescribed by the

municipal Corporation. Water mains thus laid shall be tested to a pressure as specified in the schedule and

specifications. Contractor has to get the pipe line laid hydraulically tested by the Municipal Authorities.

Contractor has to bear the Municipal hydraulic testing charges.

1.1.8. FORMALITIES WITH STATUTORY BODIES: The work shall be carried out in a manner complying in all

respects with requirement of relevant bye-laws of the Municipal Committee/Municipal

Corporation/Development Authority/Improvement Trust under the jurisdiction of which the work is to be

executed or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and, unless otherwise mentioned, nothing extra shall be

paid on this account. The contractor has to satisfy all the requirement of fire brigade, drainage and hydraulic

engineering department of Municipal Corporation.

Note: In case a separate item is included in the schedule of quantities, contractor shall engage a

licensed P.H. engineer / licensed plumber and obtain all the above certificates from Municipal

Corporation. The Department shall authorise the contractor to deal with BMC on behalf of the

Department.




1.2. MINIMUM WEIGHT OF MOST COMMONLY USED SANITARY APPLIANCES & WATER FITTINGS:

The minimum unit weight of each fitting shall not be less than as given in the following table and tolerance

for weight shall be as per relevant IS code.

Description of items

Nominal

size/

thickness

IS code Minimum

Unit Weight

1

Brass non-fancy type Bib Tap Please

see Table under relevant item for

other sizes.

15mm 781-1984 400 Grams

2 C.P. brass fancy type Bib Tap 15mm 8931-1993 550 Grams

3a Brass non-fancy types Stop cock –

Internally threaded 15mm 781-1984 330 Grams

3b Brass non-fancy types Stop cock –

Externally threaded 15mm 781-1984 400 Grams

4 C.P. brass fancy types Stop cock 15mm 8931-1993 550 Grams

5 C.P. brass concealed typed Stop

cock 15mm 8931-1993 750 Grams

6 C.P. brass fancy Pillar Tap 15mm 1795-1982 650 Grams

7 C.P. brass waste coupling 32mm 3311-1979 200 Grams

8 C.P. brass waste coupling 40mm 3311-1979 250 Grams

9 a C.I. Nahani Trap 165mm inlet dia. 75mm(outlet) 1729-2002/ 3989-

1984 6.50 Kg.

9 b C.I. Floor Trap 100 mm inlet dia. 75mm(outlet) 1729-2002/ 3989-

1984 4.80 Kg.

9 c C.I. Nahani Trap with 20 mm water

seal 65mm(outlet) non ISI 4.50 Kg.

15 Cast Iron surface box for sluice valve (rectangular

shape) 3950-1979 33 kg.




The minimum unit weight of each fitting shall not be less than as given in the following table which are used

in General practice.

1 C.P. brass fancy Shower rose 15mm 125 Grams

2 C.P. brass bottle trap 32mm. 500 Grams

.3 C.P. brass bottle trap 40mm 550 Grams

4 C.P. brass Liquid soap dispenser 250 Grams

5 C.P. brass coat and hat hook 150 Grams

6 C.P. brass Towel rod bracket [pair] 100 Grams

7 C.P. brass Towel rod [600 mm long] 20mm 150 Grams

8 G.I. Clamps thickness for GI piping 2 MM

9 MS Clamps thickness for CI piping 3 MM

10 Rain water lead sheet flashing 38.00 kg/sqm

11 C.I. frame and cover for Gully Trap 7.50 kg.

12 S.S. grating for Nahani Trap 50 Grams

13 C.P. brass grating for Nahani Trap 190 Grams

14 C.P. Brass Dome shape grating 275 Grams

15 Cast Iron surface box for sluice valve

(circular shape)

14 kg.




1.3. MANDATORY TESTS / OPTIONAL TESTS :

1. The following mandatory tests shall be carried out when the qty. of materials to be incorporated in the work

exceeds the minimum qty. specified in col.5 of the table below irrespective of whether the materials are with

I.S. mark, or otherwise.

2. Optional tests specified or any other tests shall be carried out in case of specialized work/ important

structure at Department‟s discretion.

3. Testing charges including incidental charge and cost of sample for testing shall be borne by the contractors

for all mandatory tests.

4. Testing charges for optional tests shall be paid by the Dept. However, the incidental charges and cost of

sample for testing shall be borne by the contractor.

5. In case of non-I.S. materials, it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to establish the conformity of

material with relevant I.S. specification by carrying out necessary tests. Testing charges including incidental

charge and cost of sample for testing shall be borne by the contractors for such tests.

1.3.1. Mandatory tests for P.H.E. works

Material Test Field/lab

test

Test

Procedure

Minimum

quantity of

material /

work for

carrying out

the test 5

Frequency

of sampling Remarks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

G.I. pipes Physical

Dimensional Field/lab >20tubes

Nominal unit

wt. Field/lab

>20tubes

Tensile,

Elongation

Chemical

Lab

>1000/ 500 up

to 25 mm bore

>25 mm bore

respectively.

Mass of zinc

coating

Sulpher, Lab Lab

IS 4736 IS

228

Up to bore

25mm 1 tube /

Sampling &

criteria for




1000 or part

thereof

Phosphorus Lab IS 228

>25mm bore 1

tube/ 500 tube

conformity as

per 4711

C.I. pipes Dimensional Field/lab > 20 copies Sampling & Hardness

Water

Quality Unit weight Field/lab > 20 copies

Conformity

as & grade

“LA/A/B” Hammer test Field/lab ------- per IS shall be

1536/2001 optional

Class Hydrostatic

test Field/lab

IS1500

Hardness &

grade ------

C.I. pipe

Soil Dimensional Field/lab > 20 pipes Sampling & Hardness

quality Unit weight Field/lab � 20 pipes Conformity

as & grade

Hammer test

Hydrostatic

test Hardness

& grade

Field/lab

Field/lab --

----

--------

per IS 3981,

IS1729 IS

1500

shall be

optional

Pig lead Chemical

Analysis Lab IS 1817

Lot > 1000 kg,

if less

Each lot >

1000 kg.

Mfr. test

report to be

furnished

Stone

ware

Hydraulic

Test, Lab IS 651

3no for lot of

150

pipes

Absorption

Test, Test for

Acid

Resistance ,

Test for Alkali

Resistance,

5 no. for 151

to 1200 8 no.

for 1201 to

10000

Crushing

strength Test

Cement, As per Civil specification




Bricks

Pre Cast Dimension > 20 frame & Sampling as

per

Concrete

man Load test Lab IS 12592

covers/

gratings

IS

12592(partI)

hole

frame & (Part I)

covers/

Gratings

Material Test Field/lab

test

Test

Procedure

Minimum

quantity of

material /

work for

carrying out

the test 5

Frequency

of

sampling

Remarks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CI man

hole Dimension Lab IS 1726 >50 frame &

Sampling

as per

frame &

covers Load test

covers/

gratings IS 1726

Hume

pipe Dimension Lab/field IS 458 >50 pipes

As per IS

458

NP class Hydrostatic

test Lab IS 3597

Three-edge

bearing Lab Lab

IS 3597 IS

3597

Absorption

test

Sanitary Manufacture

r‟s

fittings Test

certificate To

be produced

IS

mark

materials.

CP brass Manufacture

r‟s




fittings

Bib

Test

certificate To

taps/ stop

cocks

be produced

IS

mark

materials.

1.3.2. Testing, tolerances, Acceptance and mode of payment

a) The materials should pass all tests and tolerance in dimensional, chemical, physical properties should

be within the limit as stipulated in relevant I.S. for acceptance. Such materials will be accepted as

standard.

b) Payments shall be restricted to standard unit mass, or as specified in the schedule, without making any

cost adjustment towards mass or any other properties provided the material pass all the tests and

tolerance are within the specified limit.

c) In case of non-standard materials, materials not covered under any I.S specification, such as aluminium

sections, the payment shall be made based on the actual unit weight as determined by testing at

random sampling.

Post construction Inspection and testing : After completion of work and during the maintenance liability

period of contract, the work shall be subjected to “Post construction and testing”. In case, if the materials

incorporated in the work are found to be inferior, though the sample collected from the materials might have

been passed at the time of execution, it shall be the responsibility of the contractor to replace the same

without any cost to the department failing which the department may rectify the same at the risk and cost of

the contractor or the department may accept the same as sub standard, and cost be adjusted from the

outstanding security deposit as per the terms and condition of the contract for the work.

2.0. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS :

2.1. EARTH WORK AND BACKFILL

2.1.1. SCOPE OF WORK :

The scope of work covered under this specifications pertains to excavation of foundations, trenches, pits

and over areas, in all sorts of soils, soft and hard rock, correct to dimensions given in the drawing including

shoring, protections of existing underground utilities if any, such as water lines, electric cables etc.,

dewatering and shoring if necessary, stacking the useful materials as directed within the lead specified,

refilling around the foundation and into the plinth with selected useful excavated earth and disposing off the

surplus earth/materials within specified lead and finishing the surface to proper levels, slopes and camber




etc. all complete.

2.1.2. SITE CLEARANCE :

Before the earth work is started the area coming under cutting and filling shall be cleared of all obstructions,

loose stones, shrubs, rank vegetation, grass, brush-wood, trees and saplings of girth upto 30 cm. measured

at a height of one metre above ground and rubbish removed upto a distance of 150 metres outside the

periphery of the area under clearance. The roots of trees shall be removed to a minimum depth of 60 cm.

below ground level, or a minimum of 30 cm. below formation level whichever is lower, and the hollows filled

up with earth, levelled and rammed. This work is deemed to be included in the earth work items and no

separate payment will be admissible for the work.

The trees of girth above 30 cm. measured at a height of one meter above ground, shall only be cut after

permission of the Engineer-in-charge is obtained in writing. The roots shall also be removed as described in

the preceding sub-para. Payment for cutting and removing roots of such trees shall be made separately.

Any material obtained from the site will be the property of the Department and the useful materials as

decided by the Engineerin-charge will be conveyed and properly stacked as directed within the lead

specified.

2.1.3. SETTING OUT AND MAKING PROFILES :

Masonry or concrete pillars will be erected at suitable points in the area to serve as bench marks for the

execution of the work. These bench marks shall be connected with G. T. S. or any other permanent bench

mark approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Necessary profiles with pegs, bamboos and strings or Burjis shall

be made to show the correct formation levels before the work is started. The contractor shall supply labour

and materials for setting out and making profiles and Burjis for the work at his own cost and the same shall

be maintained during the excavation work. The Department will show grid Co-ordinate or other reference

points. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to set out centre lines correctly with reference to the

drawings and install substantial reference marks. Checking of such alignment by the Department will not

absolve the contractor from his responsibility to execute the work strictly in accordance with the drawings.

2.1.4. EARTHWORK :

The contractor shall notify the Engineer-in-charge before starting excavation and before the ground is

disturbed, to enable him to take existing levels for the purpose of measurements. The ground levels shall be

taken at 5 to 15 metres intervals in uniformly sloping ground and at closer distance where local mounts, pits

or undulations are met with, as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The ground levels shall be recorded in

field books and plotted on plans, which shall be signed by the Contractor and the Engineer-in-charge, before

the earth work is actually started. The labour required for taking levels, shall be supplied by the Contractor

at his own cost. The Contractor shall perform excavation in all types of soils, murrum, soft and hard rock,

boulders etc. in foundation, over areas and in trenches to widths, lines, levels, grades and curves as shown




in the drawing or lesser widths, lines and levels as directed by the Engineer-in-charge and as per items in

the schedule of quantities.

2.1.4.1. The item in the schedule of quantities shall specify the excavation in trenches

For this purpose, the excavation in trenches for foundations and for pipes, cables etc. not exceeding

1.5 m. in width and for chambers, manhole, shafts, wells, cesspits and the like not exceeding 10

sqm. on plan and to any depth shall be described as Excavation in trenches for foundation, drains,

pipes and cables and returning the excavated material to fill the trenches after pipes, cables etc, are

laid and their joints tested and passed and disposal of surplus excavated material upto 50 m lead.

2.1.4.2. Excavation exceeding 1.5 m. in width as well as 10 sqm. on plan (excluding trenches for pipes,

cables etc.) and exceeding 30 cm in depth shall be described as Excavation over areas.

2.1.5. CLASSIFICATION OF EARTH WORK:

The earth work shall be classified under the following main categories and measured separately for each

category.

a. All types of soils, murrum, boulders. b. Soft rock. c. Hard rock.

2.1.5.1.

a) ALL TYPES OF SOILS, MURRUM, BOULD: This includes earth, murrum, top deposits of agricultural

soil, reclaimed soil, clay, sand or any combination thereof and soft and hard murrum, shingle etc. which

is loose enough to be removed with spades, shovel and pick axes. Boulders not more than 0.03 cum. in

volume found during the course of excavation shall also fall under this classification.

b) EXCAVATION IN SOFT ROCK : This shall include all materials which are rock or hard conglomerate,

all decomposed weathered rock, highly fissured rock, old masonry, boulders bigger than 0.03 cum. in

volume but not bigger than 0.5 cum. and other varieties of soft rock which can be removed only with

pick axes, crow bars, wedges and hammers with some difficulty. The mere fact that the contractor

resorts to blasting and/or wedging and chiselling for reasons of his own, shall not mean the rock is

classificable as hard rock.

c) EXCAVATION IN HARD ROCK : This includes all rock other than soft rock mentioned in para 2.1.5.1 b

viz. soft rock, occurring in masses, boulders having approximate volume more than 0.5 cum. plain or

reinforced cement concrete, which can best be removed by blasting or chiselling and wedging where

blasting cannot be permitted owing to any restriction at site.




i) EXCAVATION IN HARD ROCK BY BLASTING: Where blasting is permitted the excavation in rock shall be

done by means of blasting. No heavy blasting will be permitted and not only controlled / muffled blasting will

be permitted at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge. The Contractor shall be governed by the relevant

statutory laws, rules and regulations on explosives, pertaining to the acquisition, transport, storage, handling

and use of explosive which shall be rigidly followed and shall obtain himself all necessary materials and

equipment for blasting. Blasting shall be executed through a licensed blaster with prior permission from

police authorities. Prior to blasting sufficient notice shall be given to concerned parties to avoid danger to

people, materials and nearby structures. All the damages caused by careless blasting if any shall be made

good by the contractor at his own expenses.

ii) EXCAVATION IN HARD ROCK BY CHISELLING AND WEDGING: Where blasting is not permitted and if the Engineer-in-Charge so desires, the excavation shall be done by chiselling and wedging or any other agreed method.

NOTE: All the excavated hard rock obtained shall be stacked properly and neatly within the specified lead

by the contractor as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.1.6. EXCAVATION: The excavation under all classifications in areas in trenches or in pits shall be carried out

systematically. Cutting shall be done from top to bottom and no under-pining or undercutting will be allowed.

The bottom and sides of excavation shall be dressed to proper level, slopes, steps, camber etc. by removing

high spots, and ramming thoroughly as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

All the excavation shall be carried out strictly to the dimensions given in the drawing. The width shall

generally be of the width of mudmat concrete and depth as shown in drawing or as directed by the

Engineer-in-Charge, according to availability of the desired bearing capacity of soil below. Any excavation if

taken below the specified depths and levels, the contractor shall at his own cost fill up such overcut to the

specified level with cement concrete 1:4:8 in case of excavation in all types of soils and with cement

concrete 1:2:4 in case of excavation in soft and hard rock.

After the excavation is completed, the contractor shall notify the Engineer-in-Charge to that effect and no

further work shall be taken up until the Engineer-in-Charge has approved the depth and dimensions and

also the nature of foundation materials. Levels and measurements shall also be recorded prior to taking up

any further work.

2.1.6.1. SIZES OF TRENCH FOR EXCAVATION FOR PIPE LINE : Where the width of trench is not

specified the following shall apply.

a) Upto 1.0 metre deep shall be arrived at by adding 25 cm to the external diameter of pipe (not

socket/collar) cable, conduit etc where a pipe is laid on concrete bed/cushioning layer, the authorised

width shall be the external diameter of the pipe (not socket/collar) plus 25 cm or the width of concrete

bed/cushioning layer whichever is more.




b) For depths exceeding one metre, an allowance of 5 cm per metre of depth for each side of the trench

shall be added to the authorised width (that is external diameter of pipe plus 25 cm) for excavation. This

allowance shall apply to the entire depth of the trench. In firm soils upto a depth of 2 metres from the

bottom. For depths greater than 2 metres, the excavation profiles shall be widened by allowing steps of

50 cm on either side after every two metres from bottom.

c) Where more than one pipe, cable, conduit etc. are laid, the diameter shall be reckoned as the horizontal

distance from outside to outside of the outermost pipes, cable, conduit etc.

d) Where the soil is soft, loose or slushy, width of trench shall be suitably increased or side sloped or the

soil shored-up as directed by the Engineer-In-Charge. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to

take complete instructions in writing from the Engineer-In-charge regarding increase in the width of

trench, sloping or shoring to be done for excavation in soft, loose or slushy soils.

2.1.6.2. SIZES OF TRENCH FOR EXCAVATION FOR CHAMBERS, MANHOLES, SHAFTS, WELLS,

CESSPITS:

Authorised working space shall be special in each case. Where authorised working space is not so

specified the following shall apply :

600 mm measured from the external face of substructure/walls (including protective measures like water

proof plaster, tile cladding etc. if any) at lowest level, where extra working space is required.

2.1.7. SHORING :

Unless separately provided for in the schedule of quantities, the quoted rate for excavation shall include

excavation of slopes to prevent falling in soil by providing and/or fixing, maintaining and removing of shoring,

bracing etc. The contractor would be responsible for the design of shoring for proper retaining of sides of

trenches, pits etc. with due consideration to the traffic, superimposed loads etc. Shoring shall be of sufficient

strength to resist the pressure and ensure safety from slips and to prevent damage to work and property

and injury to persons. It shall be removed as directed after items for which it is required are completed.

Should the slips occur, the slipped material shall be removed and slope dressed to a modified stable slope.

Removal of the slipped earth will not be measured for payment.

2.1.8. DEWATERING :

Unless specifically provided for as a separate item in the schedule of quantities, rate shall also include

bailing or pumping out all water which may accumulate in the excavation during the progress of further

works such as mud mat concrete, R.C. footings, shuttering etc. either due to seepage, springs, rain or any




other cause and diverting surface flow by bunds or other means. Care shall be taken to ensure that the

water discharged sufficiently away from the foundations to keep it free from nuisance to other works in the

neighbourhood.

2.1.9. DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS :

a) ANTIQUITES: Any finds of archaeological interest such as relics of antiquity, coins, fossils or other articles

of value shall be delivered to the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be the property of the Government.

b) USEFUL MATERIALS : Any material obtained from the excavation which in the opinion of the Engineer-in-

Charge is useful, shall be stacked separately in regular stacks as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge and

shall be the property of the Government.

No material excavated from foundation trenches of whatever kind they may be are to be placed even

temporarily nearer than about 3 m. from the outer edge of excavation. Discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge

in such cases is final. All materials excavated will remain the property of the Department. Rate for

excavation includes sorting out of the useful materials and stacking them separately as directed within the

specific lead.

Materials suitable and useful for refilling or other use shall be stacked in convenient place but not in such a

way as to obstruct free movement of materials, workers and vehicles or encroach on the area required for

constructional purposes. It shall be used to the extent required to completely backfill the structure to original

ground level or other elevation shown on the plan or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. Materials not

useful in anyway shall be disposed off, leveled and compacted as directed by the Engineer-in-charge within

a specified lead. The site shall be left clean of all debris and leveled on completion.

2.1.10. REFILLING IN SIDES OF CHAMBERS, DRAINS ETC. :

The back filling shall be done after the concrete or masonry has fully set and shall be done in such a way as

not to cause under-thrust on any part of the structure. Where suitable excavated material is to be used for

back filling, it shall be brought from the place where it was temporarily deposited and shall be used in

refilling. The scope of work for back filling/filling in sides of chambers and other areas shall include filling for

all the excavation covered under the contract. Surplus earth available from the excavation, if required, shall

be used for refilling/filling for filling the trenches for pipes cables buildings also within the specified lead

mentioned in the item.

All timber shoring and form work left in the trenches, pits, floors etc. shall be removed after their necessity

ceases and trash of any sort shall be cleared out from the excavation. All the space between foundation

masonry or concrete and the sides of excavation shall be refilled to the original surface with approved

materials in layers not exceeding 200 mm. in thickness, watered and well consolidated by means of

rammers to atleast 90% of the consolidation obtainable at optimum moisture content (Proctor density).

Flooding with water for consolidation will not be allowed. Areas inaccessible to mechanical equipment such




as areas adjacent to walls and columns etc. shall be tamped by hand rammer or by hand held power

rammers to the required density. The backfill shall be uniform in character and free from large lumps,

stones, shingle or boulder not larger than 80 mm. in any direction, salt, clods, organic or other foreign

materials which might rot. The refilling in plinth and under floors shall be done in similar way in layers not

exceeding 200 mm. thick and shall be well consolidated by means of mechanical or hand operated rammers

as specified to achieve the required density.

Test to establish proper consolidation as required will be carried out by the Department at rates specified.

Two tests per 50 sqm. will be taken to ascertain the proper consolidation. The cost of tests carried out will

be recovered from the contractors bill.

2.1.11. REFILLING IN TRENCHES FOR PIPES, CABLES ETC.

Filling in trenches shall be commenced soon after the joints of pipes, cables, conduits etc. have been tested

and passed. The space alround the pipes, cables, conduits etc. shall be cleared of all debris, brick bats etc.

Where the trenches are excavated in hard/soft soil, the filling shall be done with earth on the sides and top

of pipes in layers not exceeding 20 cm in depth. Each layer shall be watered, rammed and consolidated. All

clods and lumps of earth exceeding 8 cm in any direction shall be watered, rammed and consolidated. All

clods and lumps of earth exceeding 8 cm in any direction shall be broken or removed before the excavated

earth is used for filling. In case of excavation of trenches in ordinary/hard rock, the filling upto a depth of 30

cm above the crown of pipe, cable, conduits etc. shall be done with fine material like earth, murrum or

pulverised/decomposed rock according to the availability at site. The remaining filling shall be done with

boulders of size not exceeding 15 cm mixed with fine material like decomposed rock, murrum or earth as

available to fill up the voids, watered, rammed and consolidated in layers not exceeding 30 cm. Excavated

material containing deleterious material, salt peter earth etc. shall not be used for filling. Ramming shall be

done with iron rammers where feasible and with blunt ends of crow bars where rammers cannot be used,

Special care shall be taken to ensure that no damage is caused to the pipes, cables, conduits etc. laid in the

trenches.

2.1.12. LEAD & LIFT

LEAD : The lead for disposal/deposition of excavated materials shall be as specified in the respective item

of work. For the purpose of measurements of lead, the area to be excavated or filled or area on which

excavated material is to be deposited/ disposed off shall be divided in suitable blocks and for each of the

block, the distance between centre lines shall be taken as the lead which shall be measured by the shortest

straight line route on the plan and not the actual route adopted.

LIFT : Lift shall be measured from ground level. Excavation up to 1.5 m depth below ground level and

depositing excavated material on the ground shall be included in the item of earthwork for various kinds of

soil. Extra lift shall be measured in unit of 1.5 m or part thereof. Obvious lift shall only be measured; that is

lifts inherent in the lead due to ground slope shall not be measured except for lead upto 250 m. All




excavation shall be measured in successive stages of 1.5 m stating the commencing level. This shall not

apply to cases where no lift is involved as in hill side cutting.

2.1.13. MODE OF MEASUREMENTS:

2.1.13.1. All excavation in areas having depth more than 30 cm. pits, trenches etc. shall be measured net.

The dimensions for the purpose of payment shall be reckoned on the horizontal area of the

excavation at the base for foundations of the walls, columns, footings, rafts or other foundations,

multiplied by the mean depth from the surface of ground determined by levels. Excavation for side

slopes will not be paid for. Excavation in areas having depths less than 30 cms. shall be measured

as surface excavation on square metre basis, mentioning the average depth of excavation.

Reasonable working space beyond concrete dimension required for waterproofing and shuttering

where considered necessary in the opinion of Engineer-in Charge will be allowed in execution and

considered for payment for underground water tank, sump, septic tank etc.

2.1.13.2. Wherever direct measurements of rock excavation are not possible, volume of rock be calculated on

the basis of length, breadth and depth of stacks made at site. The net volume shall be worked out

by reducing it by 50%, taking the voids into consideration as 50%. Similarly to arrive at net quantity

to be paid in the case of soil, reduction @ 20% of corresponding stack/truck measurements shall be

made.

2.1.13.3. The rate for excavation shall include carting and disposing and levelling the excavated materials

within the specified lead. The rate shall also be inclusive of cost of all tools, plants, explosives,

shoring, dewatering at various stages, labour, materials etc. to complete all the operations specified.

2.1.13.4. The backfilling and consolidation in sides of foundation and in plinth with excavated material will not

be paid for separately. The rate quoted for excavation shall be deemed to have been included the

cost of stacking of excavated materials, conveying within the specified lead, picking of selected

stacked materials, conveying it to the place of final backfill, compaction to the required proctor

density etc.

2.1.13.5. Payment for filling and consolidation inside the trenches, sides of foundations, plinth etc. with selected materials brought by the contractor other than the excavated material, shall be paid for separately as per the rates in schedule of quantities which includes cost of such materials/excavation, royalty, its conveyance within the specified lead, watering, consolidating, dressing etc. Actual quantity of consolidated filling shall be measured and paid in cubic metres upto two places of decimal.

2.1.13.6. The rate quoted in cum. For items of excavation id deemed to include the necessary additional

quantity of excavation involved beyond the plan dimensions of the work which may be necessary to




be carried out for carrying out the work in an engineering manner, decided upon by the contractor.

Therefore no extra payment will be made for any excavation done other than the required quantity

as per the plan dimension indicated in the drawings.

2.1.13.7. Measurement for excavation over areas shall be determined by levels or by “Dead men” or both at

the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge. If however the Engineer-in-Charge decides on

measurement by levels, levels of site shall be jointly taken and recorded by the Engineer-in-Charge

or his representatives and the contractor, before commencement of the work and after completion

of the work and the quantity of work shall be computed based on these levels. The volume of earth

work shall be computed based on “Simpson‟s formula” or any other approved method at the

discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge.

2.1.14. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for unit cubic meter of earth work.

2.2. PLAIN CEMENT CONCRETE :

2.2.1. GENERAL: The specification covers the requirement of ordinary Cement Concrete of the specified

proportion to be used for various concrete items.

2.2.2. MATERIAL : The material requirement for particular item shall be as per IS 456

2.2.3. CEMENT: Cement shall be OPC/PPC cement conforming to IS 269 & IS 1489 respectively. Cement shall be

stored in dry godowns or sheds use of PPC slag cement as approved by the Engineer In-charge, out of

construction with damp ground on a 0.6M height platform. Cement shall not be stored in the open. All

cement shall be kept well stacked and no cement other than intended to use in the work, shall be used. The

cement shall be stored as received and shall be consumed in the order in which consignments are received

and shall not be stored for long periods. No clogged cement caused by dampness shall be used. Blended

cement for finishing work shall be used with the prior approval of the Engineer In-charge.

2.2.4. FINE AGGREGATE: The sand shall be clean, well graded, hard, strong, durable and gritty particles of size

0.15 mm to 5 mm fee from mica, dust, clay, kankar, soft or flaky particles and other deleterious materials. If

the fine aggregate contain more than 4 percent of clay, dust or silt it shall be washed. Sea sand should not

be used. The fineness modulus may range between 2.6 to 3.6.

2.2.5. COARSE AGGREGATE: All stone aggregate to be used for cement concrete shall be from approved

sources. The aggregate shall be clean hard, strong and durable. It shall not contain soft, flaky thin or

elongated pieces, alkali organic matter or other notorious matter. The specific gravity of the aggregate shall

be between 2.5 to 2.7.

2.2.6. STORAGE, SCREENING AND WASHING: It shall be stored at the work site in such a manner as to




prevent contamination. All aggregate shall be stored to convenient height on hard and dry platform. The

contractor shall install screens, one for coarse aggregate and one for sand and shall thoroughly wash all

aggregate if directed by Engineer-in-charge.

2.2.7. WATER: The water shall be confirming to IS 3025. The water shall be clean and free from deleterious

matters such as acids, oils, alkalies, sugar and vegetable matter. Every attempt shall be made to use water

that is fit for drinking and whenever possible, water shall be used direct from the supply mains. PH value of

water shall not be less than 6.

2.2.8. PROPORTIONING OF MIX : In ordinary concrete although proportion of cement to fine and course

aggregate is specified by volume, the quantity of cement shall be determined by weight assuming one bag

of cement weighing 50 kg. net to be equivalent to 35 Ltrs. fine and course aggregate shall be measured by

dry volume in suitable measuring boxes. The allowance shall be made for bulking in the fine aggregate due

to moisture if any at the time of mixing. Water cement ratio will be such as will give concrete just sufficient

workable to place and compact with out difficulty.

2.2.9. MIXING: In all the cases concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer at the site of work, mixer and other

accessories should be in first class condition and well maintained through out the construction. Mixing shall

be continued till the homogeneous mixture is obtained but in no case mixing shall be done for less than 1.5.

minutes.

When hand mixing is permitted by Engineer-in-charge in any special condition, it shall be done on a smooth,

hard and water tight, platform large enough to allow sufficient turning over of the ingredients of concrete

after adding the water. The material shall be mixed in dry state and turned over until they are thoroughly and

fully mixed homogeneously. In hand mixing, the quantity of cement shall be increased by 10 percent with

out any extra cost. Retampering or remixing of partially hardened concrete shall not be permitted.

2.2.10. PLACING : The concrete shall be transported in such a manner that there shall be no tendency for the

segregation of the different ingredients and it shall not be dropped into position from the height greater than

1.00 meter and shall be placed within 30 minutes after mixing. It shall not be interfered when once it has

become to set. When new concrete is to be placed on the already set concrete, the surface of the old

concrete shall be thoroughly roughened & wetted before the new concrete is laid. Cement sand slurry (1:2)

being laid over the surface of the old concrete which is roughened, washed and wetted. The stripped

surface of concrete shall be smooth & sharp. Any honey combing, air holes,board marks etc, shall be

finished smooth.

2.2.11. COMPACTION: The concrete shall be thoroughly compacted during depositing to get dense concrete. The

concrete shall not be disturbed once it is set. For important works, the use of mechanical vibrator is

essential. The vibrator shall not be less than 4000 to 5000 impulse per minute and shall be worked at an

interval about 600 mm. Over vibration shall be avoided.




2.2.12. DEWATERING : The item rate shall include bailing or pumping out all water if accumulated during the

progress of the work either from seepage, springs, rain or any other cause

2.2.13. FORM WORK: The forms shall generally comply with IS 456 & IS 14687. The shuttering shall be of wood or

metal. Before placing the concrete the inside of the forms which comes into contact with concrete shall be

coated with mineral oil. The forms shall be erected in position firmly so that it should not be dislocated

during concreting. The forms shall be removed without damaging the concrete structure after development

of sufficient strength and taking consent of the EngineerIn-Charge.

2.2.14. DEFECTIVE CONCRETE: The defective concrete surface shall be made good as per the direction of

EngineerIn-Charge at the contractor's own cost and charges.

2.2.15. WATERING AND CURING: All the concrete work shall be kept wet continuously for a period of a least 14

days to prevent excessive evaporation. In hot and dry weather matting or gunny bags may be hung on out

side of the concrete surface to keep moist.

2.2.16. THE RATE INCLUDES FOR :

1. Installation and removal of scaffolding and shuttering.

2. Cost includes transporting, placing, compacting, curing and finishing cement concrete,

3. Necessary sampling and tests for materials and concrete.

4. Dewatering the pit or trench if found necessary till completion of work.

5. All labour, materials, use of equipment, tools and plants.

2.2.17. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for unit cubic meter of concrete or as specified in

schedule of work. The concrete shall be measure for its length, breadth and depth. Deduction for pipe shall

be made as per the actual outer dimension of the pipe.

2.2.18. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for unit cubic meter of concrete or as specified in the

schedule of work.

2.3. BRICK MASONARY :

2.3.1. GENERAL: This specification covers requirement of the Brick Work in specified proportion of cement

mortar.

2.3.2. BRICK : Brick shall generally confirmed to IS 1077. All the bricks to be used in the work shall be well bunt

clay brick of class 35, red colour, homogeneous in texture, free from flaws, cracks and crevices. They shall

have a frog of 10 mm. depth on one side of their flat faces. No brick after twenty four hours immersion in

water shall absorb more than 25% of its own weight and strength should not be less than 3.5 MPa (35

kg/Sq.cm). The test report of the bricks shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-charge at the contractor‟s own

cost, if required Brick shall be uniformly burnt throughout but not over burnt, shall give the clear metallic




ringing sound when struck.

2.3.3. BRICK WORK: All bricks shall be thoroughly soaked in water before use till the bubbles ceases to come up.

No half or quarter brick shall be used except as closures. The course shall be horizontal and the wall shall

be raised to plumb. Joints in brick wall shall not exceed to 10mm thick. Brick work shall be uniformly raised

around to heights as per drawings. All joints shall thoroughly flushed with mortar at every courses. Care

shall be taken to see that the bricks are properly bedded and joint completely filled to full depth. No bat or

cut bricks shall be used in the work unless absolutely required to give proper shape. Brick work shall be built

in cement and sand mortar as specified in the schedule or as per drawing. The joints shall be raked for a

depth of 10 mm to receive cement plaster.

2.3.4. DEWATERING: The item rate shall include bailing or pumping out all water which may accumulate during

the progress of the work either from seepage, springs, rain or any other cause.

2.3.5. WATERING AND CURING : All the brick work shall be kept damp continuously for a period of 14 days to

prevent excessive evaporation In hot and dry weather matting or gunny bags may hung on the out side of

brick work & kept moist.

2.3.6. THE RATE INCLUDES FOR

1. Erecting, dismantling and removing the scaffolding. and curing brick work for at least 14 days.

2. Dewatering the pit or trench if found necessary till completion of work.

3. Labour

2.3.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for unit cubic meter of brick work or as specified in

the schedule of work. The brick wall shall be measured for it‟s length, breadth and depth.

2.3.8. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for unit cubic meter or as specified in the schedule of

work.

2.4. CEMENT PLASTER:

2.4.1. GENERAL: This specification covers the requirement of the Cement plaster in the specified proportions.

2.4.2. CEMENT MORTAR : Cement and sand shall be mixed to the proportions as described in the schedule.

Cement and sand shall be first mixed dry on the dry platform after which sufficient clean water shall be

added to bring the whole mix into a plastic condition. No mortar which has started to set shall be used nor

such mortar remixed with new one. It shall be removed from the work site at once.

2.4.3. PLASTERING : In all plaster work, mortar shall be firmly applied and well pressed into the joints on the

surface and drubbed and leveled with a flat wooden rule to give required thickness. Long straight edge shall




be freely used to ensure a perfectly plane and even surface. All corner must be finished to their true angle or

rounded as directed. Cement plaster should be done in square or strips and shall be done from top to

downward.

2.4.4. FLOATING COAT: The floating coat over the plaster shall be so done whenever specified in the item with

neat cement to finish the surface so that cracks, crevices etc. are not developed in the plaster.

2.4.5. DEWATERING: The item rate shall include bailing or pumping out all water if accumulated during the

progress of the work either from seepage, springs, rain or any other cause.

2.4.6. WATERING AND CURING : All the plaster work shall be kept damp continuously for a period of 14 days to

prevent excessive evaporation. In hot and dry weather matting or gunny bag may be hung on the the out

side of the plaster in the beginning and kept moist.


1. Erecting, dismantling and removing the scaffolding.

2. Preparation of the surface to receive the plaster of specified thickness and number of coats, curing etc.

3. Labour, materials, tools and plants used to complete the work.

2.4.8. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for unit square meter of cement plaster. The

plaster shall be measured for it length, breadth / depth.

2.4.9. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit square meter of plaster.

2.5. CUTTING OF ASPHALT ROAD AND PAVED YARD :

2.5.1. GENERAL: This specification covers the scope of cutting and breaking the asphalt, concrete roads, paths

etc. and making good to its original condition.

2.5.2. MATERIAL: Wherever cutting is done across public paths, roads etc. the orders of materials excavated

shall be preserved in well manner and reinstatement shall be done in the same order and road brought to

the original condition. The contractor shall made up for any deficiency in/material at his own cost.

2.5.3. WORKMANSHIP: The cutting of road and paved yard shall be done as directed by the E-I-C, Ramming the

sub-grade for piping work. The soling stones, spreading the metals to required thickness and making water

bound with stone dust/ murrum as per requirement shall be reinstated to the original condition at his own

cost.


1. Cutting asphalt road, water bound macadam and soling and stacking usable material at site.




2. Ramming sub-grade for laying pipe line and making asphalt road in original condition after completion of

work.


2.5.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for unit square meter. The cutting portion shall be

measured for its length and breadth.

2.5.6. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for unit square meter.

2.6. REMOVAL OF FOOT PATH TILES :

2.6.1. GENERAL : This specification covers the scope of removing stone tiles from foot paths and refixing the tiles

as good to its original condition.

2.6.2. MATERIAL: Wherever cutting is done across pubic foot paths and roads, the orders of materials removed

from foot paths shall be preserved in well manner and reinstatement shall be done in the same order and

foot path brought to the original condition. The contractor shall make up for any deficiency in material at his

own cost.

2.6.3. WORKMANSHIP: The foot path tiles shall be removed in required area required or as directed by the E-I-C.

Ramming the sub-grade for laying and fixing the tiles after completion of work to the original condition with

1:3 cement mortar.


1. Removing the stone tiles from foot paths and stacking at site.

2. Ramming sub-grade for refixing the tiles including cement, sand, tiles etc.


2.6.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The contract rate shall be for unit square meter and it shall be measured for it

length and breadth.

2.6.6. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for unit square meter.

2.7. REMOVAL OF KERB STONE :

2.7.1. GENERAL: This specification covers the scope of removing road side kerb stone and refixing the kerb

stone as good to its original condition.

2.7.2. MATERIAL: Wherever cutting is done across public paths and roads, the order of materials shall be

preserved in well manner and reinstatement shall be done in the same order and it shall be brought to the




original condition. The contractor shall make up for any deficiency in material at his own cost.

2.7.3. WORKMANSHIP: The road side kerb stone shall be removed to the required length or as directed by the E-

I C. Ramming the sub-grade for fixing the kerb stone after completion of work in the original condition with

1:3 cement mortar.


1. Removing the kerb stone and stacking at site.

2. Ramming sub-grade for refixing the kerb stone including cement, sand, kerb stone etc.


2.7.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for unit running meter and it shall be measured for

its length.

2.8. STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK :

2.8.1. GENERAL: This specification covers the requirement of providing, fabrication and erection of Structural

steel work including painting.

2.8.2. MATERIAL: All the Structural steel shall conform to IS 226 and IS 800. They shall be free from defects and

shall have uniform section with smooth finish.

2.8.3. FABRICATION AND ERECTION: Cutting, holding, assembly, riveting, bolting, welding, machining, painting,

marking and erection shall be carried out in accordance with approved plans and as directed by Engineer-

in-charge and shall comply with IS 800.

2.8.4. DAMAGED MEMBER: Any material found, damaged or defective shall not be used and contractor has to

replace the same at his own cost and charges.

2.8.5. PAINTING: Painting shall be conforming to IS 800. One priming coat of Zinc chromate shall be applied

immediately after fabrication and two coats of oil paint of approved shade be applied after completion of

erection.

2.8.6. INSPECTION AND TESTING: These shall be carried out in conformity with IS 800.


1. Supplying, fabrication, erecting in position at site the structural steel sections.

2. All labour, materials and use of tools and equipment and painting.

2.8.8. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for unit weight.




2.8.9. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for unit weight.

3.0. SANITARY INSTALLATIONS

3.1. INDIAN WATER CLOSET

3.1.1. GENERAL: The item pertains for providing white or colour glazed vitreous chinaware Indian water closet of

size and colour as specified in the schedule including fixing.

3.1.2. MATERIAL: Squatting Pan (Orissa Pattern) is of white or colour glazed vitreous China conforming IS 2556 Part III. Pan shall have flushing rim and are inlet of self draining type. It shall have weep hole at the following inlet to the Pan. The flushing inlet shall be in front unless otherwise specified. The inside of the bottom of the pan shall have sufficient slope from the front to the outlet and surface shall be uniform and smooth to enable easy and quick disposal while flushing. The exterior surface of the outlet below the flange shall be an unglazed surface which shall have groove at right angle to the axis of the outlet. In all the cases pan shall have be provided with 100 mm Glazed Vitreous China `P` or `S` trap with 50 mm water seal and 40 mm size vent

3.1.3. FIXING: The water closet pan shall be placed in position as shown in the drawing. The IWC shall be supported on brick masonry in CM 1:4 or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The pan shall be fixed slightly lower than the floor level. If the pan or trap is damaged during handling of fixing, it shall be replaced by the contractor at his own cost. The pan, trap and C.I. pipe shall be jointed in 1:1 Cement Mortar with hemp yarn caulked. The gap between W.C. and floor shall be finished with white/matching cement as directed.

3.1.4. PROTECTION AND FINAL CLEANING: The IWC shall be covered with husk and sand till all the civil and electrical works are completed and shall be removed and cleaned on completion of civil and electrical works prior to testing and handing over. However the contractor should ensure that the out let is plugged with gunny bags or similar materials to avoid the pipe getting blocked.


1. Water Closet pan with SCI trap `P` or `S` type and jointing in 1:1 cement mortar with hemp yarn

caulked.

2. Cutting wall / slab / beam etc. and making all the damage goods to original condition after completion of

work.

3. Testing the entire system and rectification of defects, if any.

4. All necessary labour, material and use of tools.

3.1.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for each unit of W.C. Pan fixed.

3.1.7. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for each unit of W.C. pan fixed.




3.2. EUROPEAN/ ANGLO INDIA WATER CLOSET :

3.2.1. GENERAL: The item pertains for providing white or colour glazed vitreous chinaware European or Anglo

Indian water closet with seat and cover of size and colour as specified in the schedule including fixing.

3.2.2. MATERIAL: European type water closet shall be wash down pattern unless otherwise specified. Water

closet shall be vitreous china conforming to IS 2556 (Part-I & II). The closet shall be of one piece

construction and shall have minimum two hole of 6.5 mm diameter for fixing closet to floor. Closet shall have

an integral flushing rims of self draining type. Each water closet shall have an integral trap with either `S` or

`P` outlet with and trap shall be uniform and smooth in order to enable an efficient flush. Plastic seat and

cover shall be of black colour or as specified, they shall have conformity to IS2548 Part I&II.

3.2.3. FIXING: The water closet pan shall be placed in position as shown in the drawing. If the pan trap is

damaged during handling or fixing, it shall be replaced by the contractor at his own cost. The pan, soil pipe shall be jointed in 1:1 Cement Mortar with hemp yarn caulked. The gap between W.C. and floor shall be finished with white/matching cement and sand as directed. Seat and cover shall be fixed to the Pan by two corrosion resistance hinge with 65 mm shank and threaded to within 25 mm from of flange. Seat shall be fixed in level by providing the washers of rubber with non ferrous or stainless steel washer to bolt.


1. European type water closet with an integral `P` or `S` trap, plastic seat cover, etc. jointing in 1:1 cement

mortar with hemp yarn caulked.

2. Cutting hole in wall / slab / beam etc. wherever required. and making all damages good to original

condition after completion of work

3. Testing the entire system and rectification of defect if any.


3.2.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for each unit of W.C. fixed.

3.2.6. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for each unit of W.C. fixed.

3.3. WASH BASIN

3.3.1. GENERAL The item pertains for providing colour or white glazed vitreous chinaware wash basin with or

without pedestal of size and colour as specified in the schedule including fixing.




3.3.2. MATERIAL: Wash basins shall be of vitreous china conforming to IS : 2556(Part-IV) of flat back or angle

back as specified shall be of one piece construction including combined over flow, basin shall be provided

with single or double tap holes of size 28 mm square or 30 mm rounded. Each basin shall have circular

waste hole or 5 sq.cm slot type over flow. Pedestals for wash basin shall be exactly same glazing that of

basin. Pedestal shall be capable of supporting the basin and completely recessed at the back to

accommodate supply and waste pipes and fittings. The basin shall be supported on pan of C.I cantilever

brackets conforming to IS 775. Use of MS angle or Tee Section as bracket is not permitted.

3.3.3. FIXING The wash basin shall be fixed in position as indicated in the drawing. Basin shall be supported on a

pair of C.I brackets which is embedded in cement concrete (1:2:4) block 100 x 75 x 150 mm.

Oval shape or round shape wash basins are required to be fixed in RCC platform with stone tapping either

fully sunk in stone top or flush with stone topping.

The wall plaster on seat shall be cut to rest over the top edge of the basin so as not to leave any gap for

water seepage through between wall plaster & skirting of basin. The gap between basin and wall shall be

finished with white matching cement.

3.3.4. THE RATE INCLUDES FOR:

1. Wash Basin with pair of C.I bracket as required.

2. Cutting hole in wall / slab / beam etc. wherever required. and making all damages good to original

condition after completion of work.

3. All necessary material, labour and use of tools.

3.3.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for each unit of wash basing fixed.

3.3.6. MODE OF PAYMENT: The measurement shall be for each unit of wash basin fixed.

3.4. URINAL

3.4.1. GENERAL: The item pertains for providing colour or white glazed vitreous chinaware urinal in single or

range (1,2 & 3) and size as specified in the schedule with necessary fittings and appliances including fixing.

3.4.2. MATERIAL :

3.4.2.1. BOWL TYPE (WITH FLUSHING RIM) : Urinal basin shall be flat back or corner wall type lipped in

front. The vitreous china conforming to IS 2556 (Part VI). Urinal shall have and integral flushing rim

and inlet or supply horn for connecting flush pipe. Flushing rim and inlet shall be of the self draining

type. At bottom of basin and outlet horn for connecting outlet shall be provided. The inside surface

of the urinal shall be uniform and smooth throughout to ensure efficient flushing.




3.4.2.2. BOWL TYPE FLAT BACK WITHOUT FLUSHING RIM : They shall be of vitreous china conforming

to IS:2556 (Part-VI) constructed in one piece with providing slot or alternative fixing arrangement at

flat back and where the integral flushing rim is not provided, they shall be provided with ridges in

side the bowl to divert towards the front line of the urinal.

3.4.2.3. STALL URINALS: The stall urinal and its screen shall be glazed fire clay conforming IS :771 (Part-

III, Sec-2). The inside surface of stall and screen shall be regular and smooth throughout to ensure

efficient flushing.

3.4.2.4. CP BRASS FLUSH PIPE: The flushing arrangement to urinals for single or in range shall be of CP

brass with CP brass spreader of 15 mm dia conforming to IS : 407. The capacity of flush pipe for

urinal in a range shall be as follows :

Capacity of flush tank Size of C.P. brass Flush pipe

Main Distribution

One 5 litres 15mm 15 mm

Two 10 litres 20 mm 15 mm

Three 10 litres 25 mm 15 mm

3.4.3. FIXING :

3.4.3.1. BOAL TYPE FLAT BACK URINAL WITHOUT FLUSHING RIM (Single or Range): Urinal shall be

fixed in position by using rawl plug, wooden plug, C.P screws etc. It shall be fixed at height of 65 cm from the standing level to the top of the lip of urinal or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Each urinal shall be connected with 32 mm size waste pipe which shall discharge into channel or a floor trap.

3.4.3.2. STALL URINALS : The lip of the stall urinal shall be flush with the finished floor level. The stall urinal shall be laid over a fine sand cushion on average 25 mm thickness. The gap between wall surface, finished floor level and urinals shall not be more than 3mm and filled with water proofing plastic compound

3.4.3.3. CP BRASS FLUSHING ARRANGEMENT : The flushing arrangement to urinal in single or range shall be of CP brass from 25 mm dia to 15 mm dia and CP brass spreader of 15 mm size to each urinal including the cost of CP brass elbows, tees, coupling, crosses, clamps, clips, union CP brass check nut and screws etc. CP brass


1. Glazed Urinals (single or in range) and CP brass pipe flushing arrangement including the cost of jointing

material.




2. Cutting hole wherever required and making all damage good to original condition after completion of

work.

3. Testing the entire system and rectification of defects if any.

4. All necessary materials, labour and use of tools.

3.4.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for each unit of urinal set (single or range) fixed.

3.4.6. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for each unit of urinal set (single or range) fixed.

3.5. URINAL SQUATTING PLATE :

3.5.1. Material : The squatting plates shall be of white vitreous china conforming to IS : 2556 (Part-I), IS : 2556

(Part-VI) with internal flushing rim with front or side inlet. Each squatting plat shall have integral longitudinal

flush pipe. There shall be of 100 mm dia white glaze vitreous china channel with slope and outlet piece in

front.

3.5.2. FIXING: The plate shall be fixed in position. The top edge of squatting plate shall be flush with the finished

floor level adjacent to it. It shall be embedded on a layer of 25 mm thick cement mortar 1:6 laid over a bed of

cement concrete 1:3:6. Gap between wall, floor etc. shall be finished with white/matching cement.


1. Urinals( single or in range) squatting plate.

2. Cutting hole wherever required and making all damage good to original condition after completion of

work.

3. Testing the entire system and rectification of defects if any.


3.5.4. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of squatting plate (single or range)

fixed.

3.5.5. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for each unit of urinal squatting plate (single or range)

fixed.

3.6. MARBLE PARTITION

3.6.1. GENERAL : The item pertains for providing marble partition of size and colour as specified in the schedule

including fixing

3.6.2. MATERIAL : The partition shall be of 20 mm thick marble slab of size as specified in the schedule. it shall




be polished on both sides with exposed to proper shape the exposed edges of Marble shall be made

smooth corners rounded. Cracked or damaged marble slab shall not be used in the work and shall be

replaced if any by the contractor at his own cost and charges +/-3mm tolerance shall be permissible for

thickness of slab.

3.6.3. FIXING : Partition shall be fixed vertically in position as indicated in the drawing at proper height. 100 mm

wide chases shall be cut in the wall and the partition shall embedded at least 50 mm in the wall using 1:2:4

cement concrete. After fixing the partition slab, the chases cut in the wall shall be made good to original

condition.

3.6.4. THE RATE INCLUDES FOR

1. Marble partition slab including cost of cement concrete, cement mortar etc.


3.6.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of marble partition fixed.

3.6.6. MODE OF PAYMENT The contract rate shall be for each unit of marble partition fixed.

3.7. DIVISION PLATE / PARTITION PLATE :

3.7.1. GENERAL : The item pertains for providing white or colour glazed vitreous chinaware division plate of size

and colour as specified in the schedule including fixing.

3.7.2. MATERIAL : Division plate shall be white or colour glazed of size as specified in the schedule, and shall

conform to IS .2556 PART VI.

3.7.3. FIXING : Division plate shall be fixed vertically in position at proper height with expandable anchor

fasteners, CP brass screws, wooden plugs etc.


1. Glazed division plate including the cost of CP brass screws, wooden plugs, expandable anchor

fasteners etc.


3.7.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of division plate fixed.

3.7.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of division plate fixed.




3.8. HALF ROUND CHANNEL :

3.8.1. GENERAL : The item pertains for providing colour or white glazed vitreous chinaware half round channel of

size and colour as specified in the schedule including laying and fixing.

3.8.2. MATERIAL: The half round channel shall be of white or colour glazed vitreous chinaware of size as

mentioned in the schedule with or without dead end and shall conform to IS 2556 part VII.

3.8.3. FIXING : The channel shall be laid to the correct alignment to required slope. It shall be fixed on 80 mm

thick bed of 1:2:4 cement concrete. The channel shall be used in standard length. Pieces are not allow

except where it is necessary to make up exact length. The joint and gap shall be finished with white /

matching colour cement.


1. Cement concrete, cutting the channel and wastage etc.

2. Supplying & fixing vitreous china half round channel

3. All necessary labour, material and used of tools.

3.8.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for unit running meter length of half round channel

of specified diameter fixed.

3.8.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit running meter of half round channel fixed.

3.9. GLAZED FLOOR TRAP WITH DOME SHAPED GRATING:

3.9.1. GENERAL : The item pertains for providing white glazed vitreous chinaware floor trap with dome shaped

C.P. Brass grating of size as specified in the schedule including fixing.

3.9.2. MATERIAL : The trap shape be of white vitreous chinaware of 100 mm dia. or as specified in the schedule with hinged type dome shaped grating of chromium plated brass or stainless steel as specified.

3.9.3. FIXING : The trap shall be laid to the correct alignment and to required slope. The trap shall be fixed on 80 mm thick bed or 1:2:4 cement concrete. The caulking shall be done using 1:1 cement concrete. The caulking shall be done using 1:1 cement mortar and hemp yarn.


1. Floor trap, dome shaped grating, concrete, cement mortar etc.

2. Caulking with 1:1 cement mortar with hemp yarn.


3.9.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of floor trap fixed.




3.9.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of floor trap fixed.

3.10. TOILET PAPER ROLL HOLDER :

3.10.1. GENERAL : The item includes providing white or colour glazed vitreous chinaware toilet roll holder of size

as mentioned in the schedule including fixing.

3.10.2. MATERIAL : The toilet paper roll holder shall be of CP brass or vitreous china on specified and of size and

design as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Toilet paper roll holder shall conform as per IS standard and

should have ISI mark.

3.10.3. FIXING : Toilet paper roll holder shall be fixed in position by means of C.P brass covers and rawl plug

embedded in the wall. Vitreous china toilet paper roll holder shall fixed into the wall with 1:2 cement mortar.

The pocket shall be cut in wall for toilet paper roll holder if not left finishing the gap with white/matching

cement.


1. Toilet paper roll holder, cement, sand, curing etc.

2. Cutting the pocket if they are not left.


3.10.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of toilet paper roll holder fixed.

3.10.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of toilet paper roll holder fixed.

3.11. PVC WATER INLET CONNECTION :

3.11.1. GENERAL : The item pertains to providing colour or white PVC water inlet connection for cistern and wash

basins.

3.11.2. MATERIAL : PVC water inlet connection shall conform to IS specifications and shall be of standard pattern

with nylon insulation of minimum 450 mm long with CP brass check nut at both the end and shall be able to

withstand the testing pressure of 1 MPa (10 kg/sq.cm.)

3.11.3. FIXING : The PVC water inlet connection shall be fixed in position as indicated in the drawing or as directed

by the Engineer-in-charge for flushing cistern and wash basins.





1. Supplying and fixing of PVC water inlet connection.


3.11.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of water inlet connection fixed.

3.11.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of PVC water inlet connection fixed.

3.12. GLAZED FIRE-CLAY/ VITREOUS CHINA SINK:

3.12.1. GENERAL : Item includes providing white or colour glazed -fire clay sink for kitchen or vitreous china sink

for lab as specified in the schedule of quantities including fixing.

3.12.2. MATERIAL : Laboratory sink shall be of vitreous china confirming to IS 2556 (PART-V) and kitchen sink

shall be of glazed fire-clay conforming to IS 771 (Part-II) and shall have combined over flow of the weir type

and invert shall be 30 mm below the top edge. These shall be of one piece construction and floor of sink

shall gently slope towards the outlet. The outlet of sink should be suitable for waste fitting having flanges 88

mm diameter and waste hole of 65 mm diameter. the waster hole shall be either rebated or beveled having

the depth of 10 mm. C.I brackets for supporting sink shall confirm to IS:

3.12.3. FIXING : The sink shall be supported on C.I cantilever brackets, embedded in cement concrete 1:2:4 block

of size 100 x 75 x 150 mm. Bracket shall be fixed in the position before dado work is done. The height of

front edge of sink from floor level shall be 80 cm or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The gap between

floor/wall and sink shall finish with white cement.


1. Sink & C.I brackets (Pair) cement, sand etc.


3.12.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of sink fixed.

3.12.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of sink fixed.

3.13. STAINLESS STEEL SINK :

3.13.1. GENERAL : Item includes providing the stainless steel sink with or without drain board of size as specified

in the schedule including fixing.

3.13.2. MATERIAL The sink shall be manufactured from stainless steel of Salem or equivalent steel conforming to

IS: 13983. Stainless steel sink shall be of one piece construction moulded out of 19 SWG (1mm) stainless

steel sheet of grade AISI 304 (18/8) with stainless steel choke – stop strainer (waste coupling) checknuts

conforming to IS 13983.




3.13.3. FIXING : The sink shall be fixed in position as indicated in the drawing. The sink shall be placed over the

brackets or on the platform. Gap between sink and platform / wall shall be finished with white / matching

cement.


1. S.S. sink with waste coupling cement sand etc.


3.13.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of s.s. sink fixed.

3.13.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit s.s. sink fixed.

3.14. SINK DRAIN BOARD :

3.14.1. GENERAL : The item includes providing white or colour glazed / fire clay drain board of size mentioned in

the schedule fixing.

3.14.2. MATERIAL : The drain board shall be manufactured from stainless steel of Salem or equivalent steel

conforming to IS: 13983. Stainless steel sink shall be of one piece construction and its thickness not less

than 1 mm.

3.14.3. FIXING : The drain board shall be fixed in the position as indicated in the drawing. It shall be place over the

brackets or on the platform. Gap between board and platform / wall shall be finished with white /matching

cement.


1. Drain board, cement, sand etc.


3.14.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of drain board fixed.

3.14.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of drain board fixed.

3.15. SOAP DISH:




3.15.1. GENERAL : The item includes providing white or colour glazed chinaware type soap dish of size as

mentioned in the schedule including fixing.

3.15.2. MATERIAL :. Soap Dish shall be of CP brass or vitreous China on specified and of size, design an

approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Soap Dish shall conform to relevant IS standard and should have ISI

certification mark.

3.15.3. FIXING : Soap Dish shall be fixed in position by means of C.P brass covers and rawl plug embedded in the

wall. Vitreous china Soap Dish shall fixed into the wall with 1:2 cement mortar. The pocket shall be cut in

wall, if not left, finishing the gap with white/matching cement.


1. Soap dish, cement, sand, curing etc.

2. Cutting the pocket if they are not left.

3. All necessary labour, material and the use of tools.

3.15.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of soap dish fixed.

3.15.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : Contract rate shall be for each unit of soap dish fixed.

3.16. GLASS MIRROR :

3.16.1. GENERAL : The item providing beveled or plain edges mirror with or without frame of size as mentioned in

the schedule including fixing.

3.16.2. MATERIAL : The mirror shall be of superior sheet glass with edges rounded off or beveled, size 600 x 450

mm unless specified in the schedule. It shall be free from flaws, specks or bubbles and thickness plated and

should not be less than 5.0 mm. The back of mirror shall be uniformly silver plated and should be free from

silvering defects. Silvering shall now have a protective uniform covering of red lid paint, where beveled edge

mirror are not available. Fancy looking mirrors with PVC beading/border or aluminum beading on stainless

steel beading/border based on manufacturer‟s specification, provided nothing extra shall be paid on this

account. The backing of mirror shall be provided with 6mm thick marine plywood or environmentally friendly

material other than asbestos cement sheet.

3.16.3. FIXING : Mirror shall be fixed in position with 6mm thick marine ply wood backing. It shall be fixed by means

of 4 nos. of CP brass screws & caps over rubber washers and rawl plug or as per the manufacturer‟s

specification unless specified otherwise the longer side shall be fixed horizontally.


1. Glass mirror with plywood backing CP screws and CP caps etc.

2. All necessary labour material and the use of tools.




3.16.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for unit square meter or each unit to glass mirror

of size as specified in the schedule.

3.16.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit square meter or each unit of glass mirror of size

as specified in the schedule.

3.17. GLASS SHELF :

3.17.1. GENERAL : The item includes providing glass shelf of size as mentioned in the schedule including fixing.

3.17.2. MATERIAL : Glass shelf shall consist of an assembly of glass shelf frame of size 600 x 125 mm or as

specified in the schedule. It shall be with a pair of CP Brass brackets fixed to the wall with CP screws and

CP brass rails alround with guard bar of 6 mm diameter fixed to the glass shelf frame with five numbers CP

brass brackets. . The glass shall not be less than 5 mm thick. PVC stainless steel shelf or as per

manufacturer`s specification and size as specified in the schedule of work shall be provided.

3.17.3. FIXING : The complete accessories shall be fixed to proper line and level as indicated in drawing with 40

mm long CP brass screws, wooden rawl plug, drilling hole and making good the wall to original condition

after fixing the glass shelf.


1. Glass shelf with glass, CP bracket, guard bars, CP screws etc.

2. All necessary labour material and the use of tools.

3.17.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of glass shelf fixed.

3.17.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit glass shelf fixed.

3.18. LIQUID SOAP DISPENSER :

3.18.1. GENERAL: The item includes prdg. CP liquid soap dispenser of shape as mentioned in the schedule

including fixing.

3.18.2. MATERIAL : Liquid Soap Dispenser shall be of C.P brass of heavy quality and from list of approved make.

3.18.3. FIXING : The liquid soap dispenser shall be fixed to proper height and level as indicated in drawing with 40

mm long CP brass screws, wooden rawl plug, drilling hole etc. and making good the wall to original

condition after fixing.





1. Liquid soap dispenser with CP brackets CP screws etc.


3.19. TOWEL ROD/TOWEL RING :

3.19.1. GENERAL: The item includes providing Towel rod / towel ring of size as mentioned in the schedule

including fixing.

3.19.2. MATERIAL : Towel rail shall be of C.P brass with two CP brass bracket coated with chromium plating of

thickness not less than grade No.2 of IS 4827. The size of rail shall be 600 mm x 20 mm dia unless

otherwise specified in the schedule. Towel ring of CP brass with one CP brass bracket with thickness not

less than Grade No.2 of IS 4827. The diameter of the ring shall be 175 mm unless otherwise specified in the

schedule. The diameter of ring rod shall not be less than 8 mm.

3.19.3. FIXING : The towel rod/ ring shall be fixed to proper line and level as indicated in drawing with CP brass

screws, wooden raw plug, drilling hole etc. and making good the wall to original condition after fixing the

towel rod.


1. 1 Towel rod rail/ring CP brackets & screws etc.

2. All necessary labour, material and the use tools.

3.19.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of towel rod fixed.

3.19.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of towel rod fixed.

3.20. SHOWER ROSE :

3.20.1. GENERAL : The item pertains to provide chromium plated brass shower rose of specified diameter with

accessories including fixing.

3.20.2. MATERIAL : The shower rose shall be CP brass of approved and heavy quality. It‟s accessories shall

conform to IS 1239 Part II.

3.20.3. FIXING :Shower rose shall be fixed to be water supply pipe line with necessary G.I fittings etc. as required

by the Engineer-in-charge. Jointing shall be done with the zinc, spun yarn etc. A few turns of fine hemp yarn

dipped in linseed oil shall be taken over the threaded ends to obtain complete water tightness. Leaky joint

shall be remade to make it leak proof at his risk & cost.





1. Shower rose, bend, socket, union/nuts, nipple etc.


3.20.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of shower rose fixed.

3.20.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of shower rose fixed.

3.21. BIB TAP, STOP COCK & ANGLE STOP COCKS:

3.21.1. GENERAL : The item pertains to provide chromium plated brass bib tap and stop cock and angle stop

cocks, free flanges (if joined to concealed pipe) including fixing

3.21.2. MATERIAL : Bib cock (Bib tap) is drawn off tap with a horizontal inlet and free out let and a stop cock is a

valve with a suitable means of connections for insertion in a pipe line for controlling or stopping the flow.

These shall be of size 15 mm size or as specified and shall be of screw down type. The closing device shall

work by means of disc. carrying a renewable non-metallic washer with shuts against the water pressure on

a seating right angles to the axis of the threaded spindle which operates it. The handle shall be crutch,

butterfly or fancy design type securely fixed to the spindle. The tap shall open anti clock wise direction.

Brass bib taps and stop cocks and angle stop cocks shall conform to IS 781, they shall be polished bright.

The minimum finished weight of different sizes of bib tap weight of 15 mm size bib tap and stop cock shall

be as per table given below. They shall be sound and free from taps, blow hole and fitting. Internal &

External surface shall be clean, smooth and free from sand and neatly dressed. Taps shall be nickel

chromium plated and thickness of coating shall not be less than service grade No.2 of IS 4827 and plating

shall be capable of taking high polish which shall not be easily tarnished.

MINIMUM FINISHED MASS OF BIB TAPS AND STOP VALVES AS PER IS 781:1984 (Reaffirmed 2001)

Minimum Finished Mass

bib taps Stop Valves

Internally threaded Externally

threaded Mixed end

1 2 3 4 5

Mm kg kg kg Kg

8 0.250 0.220 0.250 0.235

10 0.330 0.330 0.350 0.325

15 0.400 0.330 0.400 0.365

20 0.750 0.675 0.750 0.710




25 1.250 1.180 1.300 1.250

32 - 1.680 1.800 1.750

40 - 2.090 2.250 2.170

50 - 3.700 3.850 3.750

Every tap complete with its component shall with stand an internally applied hydraulic pressure of 2 MPa (20

kg/sq.cm) maintained for a period of 2 minutes during the period it shall neither leak nor sweat. Leaky joint

shall be remade to make it leak proof without any extra cost from contractor.

3.21.3. FIXING : Bib tap stop cock shall be fixed to the pipe line with C.P. brass or G.I. specials, if required or as

ordered by Engineer-in-charge. Jointing shall be done with white zinc, spun yarn etc. A few turns of fine

hemp yarn dipped in linseed oil shall be taken over the threaded ends to obtain complete water tightness.


1. Bib tap and stop cock, special etc.


3.21.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of bib tap and stop cock fixed.

3.21.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of bib tap or stop cock angle stop cock fixed.

3.22. COMBINATION TAP ASSEMBLY (WALL / PILLAR MOUNTED) :

3.22.1. GENERAL : The item pertains to provide chromium plated brass combination tap assembly, wall mounted

hot & cold mixing for bath ,pillar mounted hot & cold mixing for sink ,basin, tub etc. including free flanges

and fixing.

3.22.2. MATERIAL : The combination tap assembly shall be 15 mm nominal size or as specified in the schedule. It

shall be of C.P. brass approved and heavy quality, and shall conform to I.S. 8931.

Combination tap assembly shall be chromium plated-brass and shall conform to IS 8931.The nominal size

of combination tap assembly shall be 15 mm nominal size or as specified. Casting of combination tap

assembly shall be sound and free from laps, blow hole and pitting. External and internal surface shall be

clean, smooth and free from sand and be neatly dressed. All the parts fitted to pillar tap shall be axial,

parallel and cylindrical with surfaces smoothly finished. Thickness of C.P coating shall not be less than

service grade no.2 of IS 4827 and plating should be capable of taking high polish which shall not easily

tarnish or scale.

3.22.3. TESTING : Combination tap assembly shall withstand and internally applied hydraulic pressure of 1.6Mpa

(16 kg/ sq.cm) for period of 1 minutes during which, it shall neither leak nor sweat. Leaky joint shall be




remade to make it leak proof.

3.22.4. FIXING : Combination tap assembly shall be fixed to the pipe line as indicated in the drawing with necessary special as required or as ordered by Engineer-in-charge. Jointing shall be done with white zinc, spun yarn etc. A few turns of fine hemp yarn dipped in linseed oil shall be taken over the threaded ends to obtain complete water tightness.


1. Combination tap assembly (wall mounted / pillar mounted as specified in the schedule of work) including

free flanges and fixing.


3.22.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of combination tap assembly fixed.

3.22.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of combination tap assembly fixed.

3.23. PILLAR TAP : (Non fancy & Fancy Type)

3.23.1. GENERAL : The item pertains to provide chromium plated brass pillar tap including fixing.

3.23.2. MATERIAL : The pillar tap shall be 15 mm nominal size or as specified in the schedule. Fancy type pillar

tap shall be of C.P. brass approved quality and shall conform to I.S. 8931. Non fancy pillar tap shall be

chromium plated-brass and shall conform to IS 1795. The nominal size of Pillar tap shall be 15 mm or as

specified.

Casting of Pillar tap shall be sound and free from laps, blow hole and pitting. External and internal surface

shall be clean, smooth and free from sand and be neatly dressed. All the parts fitted to pillar tap shall be

axial, parallel and cylindrical with surfaces smoothly finished. The minimum of finish weight of Pillar tap shall

not be less than 650 grams (body weight 250 gms, washer plate loose valve 150 gms and back nut 40 gms.

Thickness of C.P coating shall not be less than service grade no.2 of IS 4827 and plating should be capable

of taking high polish which shall not easily tarnish or scale.

3.23.3. TESTING: Pillar tap shall withstand and internally applied hydraulic pressure of 2 MPa (20 kg/sq.cm) for

period of 2 minutes during which period, it shall neither leak nor sweat. Leaky joint shall be remade to make

it leak proof without any extra cost from the contractor.

3.23.4. FIXING: Pillar tap shall be fixed to the pipe line as indicated in the drawing with necessary special as

required or as ordered by Engineer-in-charge. Jointing shall be done with white zinc, spun yarn etc. A few

turns of fine hemp yarn dipped in linseed oil shall be taken over the threaded ends to obtain complete water

tightness.





1 Pillar tap including fixing.

2 All necessary labour, material and the use of tools.

3.23.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of pillar tap fixed.

3.23.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of pillar tap fixed.

3.24. FLUSH VALVE :

3.24.1. GENERAL : The items pertains to provide chromium plated brass flush valve or brass concealed type flush

valve with necessary accessories including fixing. (Free flanges if joined to concealed pipes)

3.24.2. MATERIAL : The Flush valve shall be nominal diameter as specified in the schedule of quantities. It shall be

of C.P. brass approved and heavy quality, and shall conform to I.S. 9758. The fresh valve shall have

working pressure of 0.15 to 0.5 MPa. The valve shall be tested to a Hydraulic pressure of 2 MPa for 2

minutes.

3.24.3. FIXING : Flush value shall be fixed to the pipe line as indicated in the drawing with necessary special as

required or as ordered by Engineer-in-charge. Jointing shall be done with white zinc, sun yarn etc. A few

turns of fine hemp yearn dipped in linseed oil shall be taken over the threaded ends to obtain complete

water tightness. Leaky joint shall be remade to make it leak proof.


1. Flush valve, connecting pipe, socket, union, nipple, wall flanges if connected to concealed pipe.


3.24.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of flush valve fixed.

3.24.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of flush valve fixed.

3.25. BATH TUB (Enamelled steel sheet):

3.25.1. GENERAL : Item includes providing sheet steel bath tub of size and without side panel as specified in the

schedule of quantities including fixing or placing.

3.25.2. MATERIAL : The bath tub shall conform to IS 3489. The bath tub shall be constructed of the fewest




practicable number of sections which shall be such as to ensure a suitable finished surface for the reception

of the enamel coating. Any welded surface shall be adequately cleaned off inside and outside the bath tub.

The necessary surface shall be free from undulations, drawing line and other defects deleterious to the

provision of a satisfactory enamel coating.

The interiors of the bath tub shall be adequately and evenly coated with vitreous enamel. The enamelling

shall conform to IS : 772. Thickness of the enamel shall not be less than 0.2 mm and not more than 0.5 mm,

External surface of the bath tub shall be given one ground or primer enamel coating. Gloss, colour & opacity

shall be uniform and visually satisfactory. The finish shall be free from crazing, dimples, rundown sagging

tilters not more than two in number on the interior surface, pinholes not more than two in number for

coloured bath tubs and not more than four for white enamelled bath tubs, specks shall be less than one mm

in size and max. five in number and there shall be no grouping of pinholes and specks. Warpage of edges

set against wall or floor and edges of roll rims shall not exceed 5 mm/m.., warpage of all other edges shall

not exceed 7.5 mm/m.

In forming the roll the outer edges shall be flanged or rolled back underneath sufficiently to prevent

exposure of sharp edges. The vertical height of the flanged or rolled edges shall be not more than 30 mm.

At the tap end of the roll, there shall be a level area within a radious of at least 25mm from the centre of

each tap hole.

3.25.3. FIXING : The bath tubs shall be as flat bottomed as practicable. The fall (slope) long the bottom head end to

outlet shall be adequate for complete emptying. The waste hole shall be so formed as to be suitable for

receiving 40 mm waste fitting. The bath tubs shall be provided at the tap end, with effective means of

attaching an earth continuity conductor. With each bath tab, two spacing washers of suitable thickness to

take up the difference between the thickness of the metal of the bath tub and the depth of the seating on

pillar taps shall be supplied. In addition, two fibre or lead washers for each tap shall be supplied for fitting

above and below the tap roll to prevent the enamel from erasing when the taps are tightened in position.

3.25.4. THE RATES INCLUDES FOR :

1. Enamelled sheet steel bath tub.

2. Placing/fixing the tub on C.I./MS supports.

3. Fixing the side panel if specified in schedule of quantities.


3.25.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT :-The measurement shall be for each unit of bath tub fixed or placed.

3.25.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of bath tub fixed or placed.




3.26. BATH TUB : (Gel coated G.R.P. resin)

3.26.1. GENERAL : Item includes providing gel coated glass fibre reinforced polyester resin bath tub of size and

with or without panel as specified in the schedule of quantities including fixing or placing.

3.26.2. MATERIAL : The bath tub shall conform to IS 6411. The fibre glass used in the manufacture of bath tubs

shall be non alkaline conforming to È‟ type or À‟ type Grade. The proportion of the glass fibre shall not be

less than 25% of the glass fibre reinforced polyester layer including gel coated layer. Unsaturated polyester

resin used in the manufacture of bath tubs shall be resistant to not water and weathering. When filler and

colouring materials are used, their quality and proportion should be compatible to the polyester and the

materials shall not have any harmful effect on the quality and performance of bath tubs. The bath tub shall

posses a uniform gel-coat on the working surface. The resin used in the gel-coat shall be isopthalic grade of

polyester or epoxy resin or any equally suitable chemical resistant grade of resin. The get-coat shall not be

less than 0.25 mm thickness nor more than 1.00 mm thickness.

In forming the roll, the outer edges shall be flanged or rolled back underneath sufficiently to prevent

exposure of sharp edges. The vertical height of the flanged or rolled edges shall be not more than 30 mm.

At the tap end of the roll, there shall be a level area within a radious of at least 25mm from the centre of

each tap hole.

3.26.3. FIXING : The bath tub shall be one piece unit with an opening for waste outlet with floor sloping towards the

outlet. An overflow shall normally be provided on the side near the waste outlet. An apron (side panel) may

be provided, integrally or separately with the bath tub as specified in schedule of quantities. The waste

opening shall be suitable for the proper installation of waste fittings which are ordinarily used for the

purpose. The bath tub shall be provided with a supporting structure integral to the unit in between the space

between the bottom of the bath tub and the floor of the building on which the bath tub rests unless otherwise

specified. The materials of the supporting structure shall be at least equal to the material of the bath tub in

resistance to deterioration with age and shall meet the requirement of fungus and vermin.

3.26.4. THE RATES INCLUDES FOR:

1. Gel-coated G.R.P.R. bath tub.

2. Placing/fixing the tub on supports.

3. Fixing the side panel if specified in schedule of quantities.


3.26.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of bath tub fixed or placed.

3.26.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : -The contract rate shall be for each unit of bath tub fixed or placed.

3.27. WASTE COUPLING :

3.27.1. GENERAL : The item pertains to provide chromium plated brass waste coupling including fixing.




3.27.2. MATERIAL : Waste Coupling shall confirm to IS 3311.Waste fittings shall be of CP with thickness of CP

coating not less than service Grade No.2 of IS 4827 which is capable of receiving polish and will not easily

scale off. The fitting shall conform in all respect to IS 2963 and shall sound, free from laps below, holes and

fittings and other manufacturing defects. External and internal surface shall be clean and smooth. They shall

be neatly dressed. The waste fitting for wash basin shall be of nominal size of 32 mm and for sink shall be

nominal size 50 mm.

3.27.3. FIXING : Waste coupling shall be fixed to wash basin, sink or urinal as ordered with necessary specials.

Jointing shall be done with white zinc, yarn etc. A few turns of fine hemp yarn dipped in the linseed oil shall

be taken over the threaded ends to obtain complete water tightness. Leaky joint shall be remade to make it

leak proof.


1. Waster coupling with necessary specials.


3.27.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of waste coupling fixed.

3.27.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of waste coupling fixed.

3.28. BOTTLE TRAP :

3.28.1. GENERAL : The item pertains to provide chromium plated brass bottle trap including fixing.

3.28.2. MATERIAL : Bottle trap shall be of C.P with thickness of CP coating not less than service grade No. 2 of IS

4827 which is capable of receiving polish and will not easily scale off. The fitting shall conform in all respect

of IS 2963 and shall be sound, free from laps below, holes and fittings and other manufacturing defects.

External and internal surface shall be clean and smooth. They shall be neatly dressed and be truly

machined so that nut smoothly moves on the body. The Bottle trap for wash basin shall be of nominal size

of 32 mm and for sink shall be nominal size 50 mm.

3.28.3. FIXING : Bottle trap shall be fixed to wash basin, sink or urinal as indicated in the drawing with necessary

specials or as ordered by the Engineer-in-charge. Jointing shall be done with white zinc, spun yarn etc. A

few turns of fine hemp yarn dipped in linseed oil shall be taken over the threaded ends to obtain complete

water tightness. Leaky joint shall remade to make it leak proof.


1. Bottle trap with necessary specials.





3.28.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of bottle trap fixed.

3.28.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of bottle trap fixed.

3.29. COAT AND HAT HOOK :

3.29.1. GENERAL : The item pertains to provide chromium plated brass coat and hat hook including fixing

3.29.2. MATERIAL : Coat & Hook shall be of three way type of approved and heavy quality. Coat & Hat Hook shall

be CP brass and three way hook type or minimum six way patti type of 125 mm x 30 mm x 6mm size. CP

coating shall not be less than service grade No.2 of IS 4827.

3.29.3. FIXING : The Coat and hat hook shall be fixed to proper line & level as indicated in drawing with CP brass

screws.


1. Coat and hat hook with CP screws etc.


3.29.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of coat and hat book fixed.

3.29.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of coat and hook fixed.

3.30. FLUSHING CISTERN :

3.30.1. GENERAL : The item pertains to provide white or colour glazed chinaware / PVC / Cast Iron flushing cistern

with all inside syphonic fitting including fixing.

3.30.2. MATERIAL : The flushing cistern shall be automatic or manually of rates high level or low level as specified

for water closets and urinals.

Cisterns shall be of cast iron, vitreous china, enamelled pressed steel conforming to IS 774 for Flushing

Type and IS 2326 for Automatic flushing cistern and Plastic (IS 7231). Cistern shall be mosquito proof. All

working parts shall be designed to operate smoothly and efficiently. the cistern shall have removable covers

which shall fit closely on it and be screwed against top displacement where operating mechanism is

attached to the cover. This may be made in two section, but the section supporting the mechanism shall be

securely fitted or screwed to the body. The outlet fitting of the cistern shall be securely connected to the




cistern. The nominal internal diameter of the cistern outlet shall not be less than 32 mm and 38 mm for high

level and low level respectively. Length of outlet cistern shall be 37 +/-2 mm. Ball valve shall be screwed

type 15 mm in diameter and shall confirm of IS 1703. The flat shall be made of polyethylene as specified in

IS 9762. A high level cistern is intended to operate with minimum height of 125 cm and a low level cistern

with maximum height of 30 cm between the top of the pan and under side of the cistern. A G.I chain strong

enough to sustain a sudden applied pull of 10 kg or a dead load of 50 kg without any apparent or permanent

deformation of the chain rings shall be attached to the ring or hook of the level manually operated high level

C.I cistern. In case of low level cistern handle shall be of CP brass. In case of Plastic cistern, operation of

cistern shall be through Push Button at the top for dual system and beyond plastic handle.

The discharge rate of the cistern as per IS 774 shall be 10 +/-.5 litres 6 second and 5 +/-.5 litres in 3 second

for cistern capacity 10 ltrs. and 5 ltrs. respectively. Flush pipe shall be of class `B` G.I pipe of 32 +/-mm

diameter for high level. Polyethylene flush pipe shall be low density confirming to IS 3076 or high density

confirming to IS 4984 or UPVC pipe confirming to IS 4965 of 40 mm outer diameter. Over flow pipe shall be

of G.I. / PVC with mosquito proof jalli of 15 mm dia.

3.30.3. FIXING: The chinaware flushing cistern shall be placed over a pair of C.I. brackets. C.P. brass flush pipe

shall be fixed to cistern and W.C. pan using check nut, spun yarn, cement mortar etc.

The cast iron flushing cistern shall be placed over a pair of C.I. or G.I. or PVC flush pipe of specified

diameter shall be fixed to cistern and W.C. pan by using check nut, white zinc, spun yarn, cement mortar

etc.

The PVC flushing cistern shall be placed or fixed as recommended by the manufacturer, PVC flush pipe of

specified diameter shall be fixed to cistern and W.C. pan by using check nut, white zinc, spun yarn, cement

mortar etc.


1. Supply and fixing flush tank, flush pipe and over flow pipe.

2. Painting all the metallic parts with two coats of flat oil paint over a coat of primer.

3. Cutting hole in wall / slab / beam etc. wherever required and making good the same to original condition

after fixing.

4. Cost of jointing materials such as zinc, spun yarn, cement mortar 1:1 etc.

5. Testing the entire system and rectification of defects, if any.


3.30.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of flushing cistern fixed as a whole.

3.30.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit flushing cistern fixed as a whole.




3.31. BRACKET :

3.31.1. GENERAL : The item pertains to provide a pair of bracket for wash basin, sink, flushing cistern etc.

including fixing.

3.31.2. GENERAL : The item pertains to provide a pair of bracket for wash basin, sink, cistern etc, including fixing.

3.31.3. FIXING : Brackets shall be embedded into or fixed to the wall with plugs, screws, nails etc. Hole shall be

made in the wall, if they are not left for fixing the brackets and shall be made good after fixing. The gap shall

be filled with 1:2 cement mortar and finishing shall be done with white / matching colour cement.


1. Supplying and fixing the brackets.

2. Painting brackets with two coats of flat oil paint over a coat of primer.

3. Cutting hole in wall beam etc. wherever required and making good the same to original condition after

fixing.


3.31.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each pair of bracket fixed included in the items

of sink, wash basin, cistern etc. as specified in schedule of quantities.

3.31.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each pair of bracket fixed.

4.0. WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

4.1. G.I. PIPING WORK (Exposed ) :

4.1.1. GENERAL : The item includes provision of G.I. pipes with G.I. fitting of specified nom. bore and class as

mentioned in the schedule including laying, fixing. The G.I. pipes and fittings shall run on the surface of the

walls or ceilings unless otherwise specified.

4.1.2. MATERIAL : The pipes and fittings shall be of M.S. galvanised as specified in the schedule. They shall

conform to IS 1239 (P-I). All the pipes and fitting shall have ISI certification mark. The specified nominal

bore of the pipe shall refer to inside approximate bore according to the thickness corresponding to outside

fixed diameter. The pipe and fittings shall be smooth, sound, free from any imperfections and neatly




dressed. The pipe and fitting shall be able to withstand a hydrostatic test pressure of 5 MPa (50 Kg/cm2)

maintained for at least 3 seconds at manufacturing works (lab test). The table showing the dimensions and

different bores of pipes are given below.

WEIGHT OF GALVANISED & BLACK (BOTH) M.S. TUBES FOR ORDINARY USES IN WATER

CONFORMING TO IS: 1239 (PART-1) 2004

Bore Clas

s Outside Diameter

Wall

thicknes

s

Nominal Weight (Kg/M)

Maximum. Minimum

Mm mm in mm Plain

Ended

Screwed &

Socketed

15 L 21.4 21.0 2.0 0.947 0.956

M 21.8 21.0 2.6 1.21 1.22

H 21.8 21.0 3.2 1.44 1.45

20 L 26.9 26.4 2.3 1.38 1.39

M 27.3 26.5 2.6 1.56 1.57

H 27.3 26.5 3.2 1.87 1.88

25 L 33.8 33.2 2.6 1.98 2.00

M 34.2 33.3 3.2 2.41 2.43

H 34.2 33.3 4.0 2.93 2.95

32 L 42.5 41.9 2.6 2.23 3.27

M 42.9 42.0 3.2 3.10 3.13

H 42.9 42.0 4.0 3.79 3.82

40 L 48.4 47.8 2.9 3.23 3.27

M 48.8 47.9 3.2 3.56 3.60

H 48.8 47.9 4.0 4.37 4.41

50 L 60.2 59.6 2.9 4.08 4.15

M 60.8 59.7 3.6 5.03 5.10

H 60.8 59.7 4.5 6.19 6.26

65 L 76.0 75.2 3.2 5.71 5.83

M 76.6 75.3 3.6 6.42 6.54




H 76.6 75.3 4.5 7.93 8.05

80 L 88.7 87.9 3.2 6.72 6.89

M 89.5 88.0 4.0 8.36 8.53

H 89.5 88.0 4.8 9.90 10.10

100 L 113.9 113.0 3.6 9.75 10.00

M 115.0 113.1 4.5 12.20 12.50

H 115.0 113.1 5.4 14.50 14.80

125 M 140.8 138.5 4.8 15.90 16.40

H 140.8 138.5 5.4 17.90 18.40

Mark Class Colour Code

TOLERANCES

THICKNESS WEIGHT

For Single Tube For 10 tones load

(+) ( -) (+) ( -) (+) ( -)

L “Light “ class Yellow Band Not limited 8.0% 10.0% 8.0% 7.5

% 5.0%

M “Medium‟”

class Blue Band Not limited

10.0

% 10.0% 10.0%

7.5

% 7.5%

H “Heavy” class Red Band Not limited 10.0

% 10.0% 10.0%

7.5

% 7.5%

Random length of tube:unless otherwise specified 4.0

to 7.0 m includes one socket for screwed & socketed

tubes

COATING:Zinc coating as per IS 4736 ( latest

revision)

4.1.3. LAYING : The plumbing contractor shall set the layout of the plumbing approved by the Engineer-in-charge

as may be required by the bye-laws. Pipes shall be laid in plumb and in straight and parallel lines. When

unavoidable, pipes may be buried for short distances provided additional protection is given against damage

and where so required joints are not buried. Where directed by the Engineer –in-charge, A M.S. tube sleeve

shall be fixed at a place the pipe is passing through a wall or floor for reception of the pipe and to allow

freedom for expansion ,contraction and other movements. In case the pipe is embedded in walls or floors

the pipes shall be painted with anticorrosive bitumastic paints of approved quality. The pipe shall not come

in contact with mortar or lime concrete as the pipe is affected by lime. Under the floors the pipe shall be laid

in layer of sand filling as done under concrete floors.

4.1.4. FIXING : The entire pipe line shall be fixed in position as shown in the drawing or as directed by the




Engineer-incharge. All pipes shall be fixed truly vertical and horizontal unless unavoidable. The pipe line

shall be supported with “U” type G.I. clamps not less than 2 mm thick and G.I. nails not less than 40 mm

long, wooden gutties etc keeping the pipe about 15 mm clear of the wall .

Spacing between clamps for fixing internal piping shall be as per IS 2065 – 1983 as given below :

For Horizontal Runs For Vertical Runs

15mm 2.0 M 2.5 M

20 mm to 32 mm 2.5 M 3.0 M

40 mm to 50 mm 3.0 M 3.5 M

65 mm to 80 mm 3.5 M 5.0 M

No joints shall be located inside the wall. If the pipe is required to be cut and the end threaded, the hums of

the cut end shall be filed smooth and any obstruction in bore shall be entirely eliminated, downtake line shall

be provided with union of every floor for easy maintenance. This shall be made of line threaded pipe ends

and coupler with checknut to avoid leakage. Die cast union shall not be permitted in the shaft.

4.1.5. JOINTING : While fixing the pipe line the joints shall be made by applying a few turns of hemp yarn dipped

in linseed oil shall be taken over the threaded end of the pipe and socket screwed home using the pipe

wrench, pipe connected shall touch each other and the socket covering each end about equally. The branch

connection shall not protrude in the bore of parent pipe.

4.1.6. PAINTING : G.I. pipes and fittings running exposed shall be painted with two coats of oil paint of approved

make and shade over a coat of approved primer.

4.1.7. TESTING : The pipes and fittings after they are laid and jointed shall be tested to hydraulic pressure of 1

MPa (10 Kg/sq.cm). The pipes shall be slowly and carefully charged with water allowing all air to escape

and avoiding all shock or water hammer. The draw off taps and stop cocks shall then be closed and

specified hydraulic pressure shall be applied gradually, Pressure gauge must be accurate and preferably

should have been recalibrated before the test. The test pump having been stopped, the test pressure should

be maintained without loss for at least 2 (two) hours. The pipes and fittings shall be tested in sections as the

work of paying proceeds, having the joints exposed for inspection during the testing. Pipes or fittings which

are found leaking shall be replaced and joints found leaking shall be redone, without extra payment.


1 Supplying GI pipes and GI fittings such as sockets, elbows, bends, tees, enlargers, reducers,

checknuts, plugs, unions etc. of specified diameter & class including hemp yarn, linseed oil, clamps,

screws, wooden gutties etc.

2 Laying, jointing and fixing the pipe with fittings including threading, cutting pipes, wastage etc.

3 All necessary materials, labour and use of tools




4.1.9. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for unit running metre length of pipe line of

specified nom. bore laid or fixed and shall be taken along center line of the pipe line.

4.1.10. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rates shall be for unit running metre length of pipe line of specified

nom. bore laid or fixed. No extra payment shall be made for fitting and fixtures.

4.2. G.I. PIPING WORK (Concealed) :

4.2.1. GENERAL : The item includes provision of G.I. pipes with concealed type fittings of specified nom. bore and

class mentioned in the schedule including laying, fixing, wrapping with hessian cloth, painting and testing.

4.2.2. MATERIAL : Please refer clause 4.1.02

4.2.3. CHASES : Chases of size 75 mm x 75 mm shall be cut in the wall, floor, slab wherever required or as

directed by chases cutting machine. After testing the pipe line the chases shall be filled with cement mortar

1:3 and surface made good to its original condition.

4.2.4. LAYING : : The plumbing contractor shall set the layout of the plumbing approved by the Engineer-in-

charge as may be required by the bye-laws. Pipes shall be laid in plumb and in straight and parallel lines.

No lime plaster or composition containing lime shall be allowed to come in direct contract with the pipe,

which are to be concealed as the pipe is affected by lime.

4.2.5. FIXING : The entire pipe line shall be fixed in position as shown in the drawing or as directed by the

Engineer-incharge. All pipes and fittings, which are to be concealed, shall be properly embedded in the wall,

flooring etc. after being treated. No moulding or plaster design or any ornamental plaster work shall be done

over the walls or flooring or ceiling where concealed pipes have been laid.

If the pipe is required to be cut and the end threaded, the burns of the cut end shall be filed smooth and any

obstruction in bore shall be entirely eliminated.

4.2.6. JOINTING : Please refer Clause No. 4.1.05

4.2.7. PAINTING : All the concealed piping work shall be thoroughly painted with two coats of anti-corrosive black

bitumastic paint of approved quality shade over a coat of approved primer before concealing and filling the

mortar.

4.2.8. INSULATION : The hot water pipe line concealed on the wall, floor etc. after painting shall be insulated with

2.5 mm thick 95% asbestos magnesia compound of approved make all round the pipe and fittings.

4.2.9. WRAPPING : After painting the cold water pipe line, it shall be wrapped with two layers of hessian cloth of

approved quality.




4.2.10. TESTING : Please refer clause No.4.1.07


1 Supplying GI pipes and concealed type G.I. fittings such as sockets, elbows, bends, tees, enlargers,

reducers, checknuts, plugs, unions etc. of specified diameter and class including hemp yarn, linseed oil

etc.

2 Laying, jointing and fixing the pipe with fittings including threading, cutting pipes, wastage, etc.

3 Wrapping the cold water pipe line with hessian cloth including painting and testing.

4 Wrapping the hot water pipe line with asbestos cloth

5 Cutting 75 mm x 75 mm size chases in the wall, floor, slab, etc. and making good the same using 1:3

cement mortar after the pipeline is laid.

6 All necessary materials, labour and use of tools.


specified nom. bore laid or fixed and shall be measured along the center line of the pipe line.

4.2.13. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit running metre length of pipe line of specified nom.

bore laid or fixed. No extra payment shall be made for fittings and fixtures.

4.3. UNDER GROUND G.I. PIPING WORK :

4.3.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying G.I. pipes and fittings of specified nom. bore and class as

mentioned in the schedule including laying, jointing and painting.

4.3.2. MATERIAL : Please refer clause 4.1.02

4.3.3. TRENCHES : The galvanised iron pipes and fittings are to be laid in trenches. The widths and depths of the

trenches for different diameter of the pipes shall be as given below :

Min. Width of trench

(mm)

Min. Depth of trench

(mm)

15 to 50 300 600

65 to 100 450 750

When excavation is done in rock, it shall be cut deep enough to permit the pipes to be laid on a cushion of

sand of min. 7.5 cm.

At joints the trench width shall be widened where necessary. The work of excavation and refilling shall be




done true to line and gradient in accordance with general specifications for earth work in trenches as per

clause 2.0.

4.3.4. LAYING : Where a pipe is to be laid under ground, the particular length of pipe should be protected by first

painting before laying and then wrapping around the pipe a layer of jute or hessian cloth in the form of

bandage, so that this cloth in the form of bandage, stick to the composition which has been freshly applied.

The pipe shall be laid into the trench and screwed with sockets, elbows, tees, bends etc. as necessary. The

pipe line laid near electric train lines, power transmission lines, electric railway, power houses etc. should be

provided with insulating joints at frequent intervals to guard against electrolysis.

Pipes shall be so laid as not to expose to sun or be subjected to any injury or risk to the pipe. As far as

possible pipes shall be laid in straight and parallel lines. They shall be used in standard length pipe pieces

being used only where necessary to make up the exact length.

4.3.5. JOINTING : Please refer clause No. 4.1.05

4.3.6. DEWATERING : The contract rate shall include bailing or pumping out all the water if accumulated during

the progress of the work either from rain, seepage, springs or any other cause.

4.3.7. TESTING : Same as clause 4.1.07

4.3.8. PAINTING : G.I. pipes and fittings shall be painted with two coat of anticorrosive paint before pipe line is laid

and wrapping the pipe and fitting with jute or hessian cloth in the form of bandage.


1. Supplying G.I. pipes and fittings such as sockets, elbows, bends, tees, enlarges, plugs, reducers,

checknuts, unions etc. of specified diameter including hemp yarn, linseed oil etc.

2. Laying, jointing and fixing the pipe with fittings including threading, cutting pipes, wastage etc.

3. Covering with hessian cloth, painting and testing the pipe line.

4. Dewatering the trench or pit till completion of work.



specified nom. bore laid or fixed and shall be measured along the center line of the pipe line.

4.3.11. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit running metre length of pipe line of specified nom.

bore laid or fixed. No extra payment shall be made for fittings and fixtures.

4.4. HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPING WORK FOR WATER SUPPLY :




4.4.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of HDPE pipes with fittings of specified diameter including laying,

fixing, cutting, jointing.

4.4.2. MATERIAL : The pipes and fittings shall conform to series IV of IS 4984. HDPE pipes and fittings shall be

free from cracks, flaws and defects and shall be able to withstand a pressure as mentioned in the schedule.

4.4.3. EXAMINING : Before laying the pipe line, if shall be first examined for damages and cracks, No cracked or

damaged pipe and fittings shall be used in the work and they shall be removed from the site by the

contractor at his own cost and charge.

4.4.4. LAYING : The pipes shall be carefully laid straight to the correct alignment in gradients as indicated in the

drawing. All the pipe shall be used in standard length as far as possible. Cut length may be used only where

it is necessary to make up exact length.

The entire length of pipe shall be evenly supported on bed of the trench through out. Care shall be taken to

prevent any sand, earth or other materials from entering into the pipes during laying. At the end of day's

work the open end shall be suitably plugged.

4.4.5. FIXING : The pipe line shall be fixed in position as shown in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer-in-

charge. The pipe shall be fixed with G.I. clamps not less than 2 mm thick or with suitable diameter HDPE clamps. The clamps shall be fixed into the wall with M.S. nails not less than 40 mm long./ Wooden gutties etc. chromium plated screws with wooden gutties fixing the pipe line on internal wall surface. MAKING JOINT: The joining of pipes and fittings generally shall be done by Butt weld with heat mirror jointing. The pipe shall be cut to desired length, Care shall be taken that profile of cut surfaces is not changed and the fibrous material shall be removed with scraper or knife. The butt weld jointing shall be made with electrical heated plated at the required temperature around 205, + or -5 degree Centigrade. While jointing, care shall be taken that formation of the rim at end of pipe after heating by hot plate should be made uniform and complete on both the ends. Holding and pressing of pipe is done manually or mechanically to give the leak proof joint.

4.4.6. DETACHABLE JOINT : Detachable joints shall be made where pipes of different materials have to be jointed or as specified in the schedule. The flanges are first pushed over the pipe ends and a rim is made by heating the pipe end in a suitable device to 70-180 Centigrade and welding pre-heated rim of the Pipe.

4.4.7. DEWATERING : In case of underground pipes, the contract rate shall include bailing or pumping out all the water till completion of work if accumulated during the progress of work either from seepage, springs, rain or any other cause.

4.4.8. TESTING : Solvent welded pipe shall not be pressure tested until at least 24 hours after the last solvent cemented joint has been done. All control valves shall be positioned open for the duration of the test and open end closed with water tight fittings. The testing pressure on completion of the work shall not be less than 1.5 time the working pressure of the pipes.

Pressure shall be applied either by hand pump or power driven pump. Pressure guages shall be correctly




positioned and closely observed to ensure that at no time are the test pressure exceeded. The systems

shall be slowly and carefully filled with water to avoid surge pressure or water hammer. Air vents shall be

open at all high points so that air may be expelled from the system during filling.

When the system has been fully charged with water and air displaced from the line air vent shall be closed

and the line initially inspected for seepage at joints and firmness of supports under load. Pressure is

reached. Without any additional requirement of make-up-water the test pressure should not fall more than

0.02 MPa (0.2 kg./sq.cm)at the end of one hour test duration.


1. Supplying of HDPE pipes and fittings of specified diameter.

2. Laying and cutting the pipe wherever necessary and wastage.

3. Making the solution joint or mirror joint, painting if mentioned in schedule of quantities.

4. Fixing the pipe line with G.I. clamps not less that 20 mm x 1 mm thick and G.I./M.S. nails length not less

than 40 mm or HDPE clamps, screws, rawl plug etc.

5. In case of underground pipes, dewatering the pit or trench till completion of work.

6. All necessary labour, materials and use of tools.

4.4.10. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for unit running meter length of pipe line laid or

fixed. The measurement shall be taken along the centre line of pipe. No measurement shall be recorded

separately for fitting, making joint, painting if mentioned in schedule of quantities and testing.

4.4.11. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for unit running meter length of pipe line laid.

4.5. PVC PIPING WORK FOR WATER SUPPLY :

4.5.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of PVC pipes with fittings of specified diameter including laying,

fixing, cutting, joining, painting etc. for vent, over flow, waste water pipe line etc.

4.5.2. MATERIAL : The pipes and fittings shall conform to series IV of IS 4985-1978, PVC pipes and fittings shall

be free from cracks, flaws and defects and shall be able to withstand a pressure as mentioned in the

schedule of quantities.

4.5.3. EXAMINING : Before laying the pipe line, it shall be first examined for damages and cracks, No cracked or



4.5.4. CLEANING : All the pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned with brush and washed if necessary to

remove any accumulated stone, soil or dirt inside and out side surfaces.




4.5.5. TRENCHES : The trench bottom shall be carefully examined for the presence of hard objects such as

flints, rock projection or tree roots etc. Pipe shall be embedded in sand or soft soil, free from rock & gravel,

back fill 150mm above the pipe shall also be of fine sand or soft soil. Pipe shall not be painted. The width of

trench shall not be less than out side diameter of pipe plus 300 mm in case of gravel soils. Pipe shall be

laid at-least 900 mm below the ground level (measured from the surface of the ground to the top of pipe).


drawing. All the pipe shall be used in standard length as far as possible. Cut length may be used only

where it is necessary to make up exact length.

The entire length of pipe shall be evenly supported on bed of the trench through out. Care shall be taken to prevent any sand, earth or other materials from entering into the pipes during laying. At the end of day's work the open end shall be suitably plugged.


charge. The pipe shall be fixed with G.I. clamps not less than 2 mm thick or with suitable PVC clamps, The

clamps shall be fixed into the wall with G.I. nails not less than 40 mm long and wooden gutties.

Spacing between clamps for fixing internal piping shall be as given below :

For Horizontal Runs For Vertical Runs

20 mm 700 mm 1050 mm

25 mm 750 mm 1125 mm

32 mm 825 mm 1240 mm

40 mm 975 mm 1460 mm

50 mm 975 mm 1460 mm

4.5.8. MAKING JOINT : The jointing of pipes and fittings generally shall be done with approved make cement

solvent including making surface rough. The pipe shall be cut to desired length. Care shall be taken that that

profile or cut surfaces shall not be changed and the fibrous material shall be removed with scraper or knife.

4.5.9. DETACHABLE JOINT : Detachable joints shall be made where pipes of different materials have to be

jointed or as specified in the schedule. The flanges are first pushed over the pipe ends and jointing shall be

made by cement solvent.

4.5.10. PAINTING : If mentioned in schedule of work, the exposed pipe line shall be painted with two coats of

approved oil paint of matching colour over a coat of primer. Underground pipe line shall not be painted.

4.5.11. DEWATERING : In case of underground pipes, the contract rate shall include bailing or pumping out all the

water till completion or work if accumulated during the progress of work either from seepage, springs, rain or

any other cause.

4.5.12. TESTING : Please refer clause No.4.4.09





1. Supplying of PVC pipes and fittings of specified diameter.


3. Fixing the pipe line with G.I. clamps not less than 2 mm thick and G.I./M.S. nails length not less than

40mm or with PVC clamps, screws, wooden gutties etc.

4. Making the solution joint, painting the pipe line if mentioned in schedule of quantities.

5. In case of underground piping, dewatering till completion of work.


4.5.14. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for unit running meter length of pipe line laid of

fixed. The measurement shall be taken along the center line of pipe. No measurement shall be recorded

separately for fittings, making joint, painting if mentioned in schedule of work and testing.

4.5.15. MODE OF PAYMENT: Unit length of pipe line laid or fixed.

4.6. GUN METAL/ BRASS COPPER ALLOY FULL WAY VALVE :

4.6.1. GENERAL : The item includes provision of full way (gate or globe) valve of specified diameter as mentioned

in the schedule including fixing. Full way valve is a valve suitable for controlling or stopping the flow in water

supply lines.

4.6.2. MATERIAL :

Full way valve shall be of either Brass fitted with a cast iron hand wheel or Gun metal fitted with a C.I. hand wheel or copper alloy as the case may be and shall be of Gate valve type opening full way and of the size as specified conforming to IS 778. The weight of the full way gate valve shall be as per the table given below with a tolerance of 5 percent.

Flanged arch (Kg) Screwed arch (Kg)

15 1.021 0.567

20 1.503 0.680

25 2.495 1.077

32 3.232 1.559

40 4.082 2.268

50 6.691 3.232

65 10.149 6.804

80 13.381 8.845




4.6.3. FIXING : The valves shall be fixed in position in the pipeline as shown in the drawing or as directed with

necessary socket or union, nuts etc. The screwed, flanged joint shall be made with few turns of fine hemp

yarn dipped in linseed oil taken over the threaded ends to obtain complete water tightness.

4.6.4. TESTING : The joints shall be tested to a hydraulic pressure of 1 MPa (10 kg/cm2

) along with the testing of

pipe line.


1. Valve, G.I. fittings, hemp yarn, linseed oil, zinc, fixing and testing.


4.6.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit valve of specified diameter fixed.

4.6.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of valve of specified diameter fixed. No extra

payment shall be made for G.I. fittings used in fixing of the valve.

4.7. WATER METER :

4.7.1. GENERAL : The item includes provision of Water meter with or without end flanges or non-return valve of

specified diameter as mentioned in the schedule with strainer, sockets, flange, union, nuts etc. including

fixing and testing.

4.7.2. MATERIAL : Water Meter shall conform to IS 779 (Domestic type) or IS 2373 (Bulk type) as specified in

Schedule of Quantities and should have ISI certification mark. Non return valve and strainer shall be of the

same diameter as that of water meter. Strainer, sockets, flange, union, union nuts, rubber packing etc. shall

be as per the description of item.

4.7.3. FIXING : Water meter shall be fixed in position on the inlet pipe line and the joints shall be made either

screwed or flanged with necessary sockets, flanges and union nuts as required or as directed by the

Engineer-in-charge.

4.7.4. SCREWED JOINT : A few turns of fine hemp yarn dipped in linseed oil shall be taken over the threaded

ends to obtain complete water tight joint.

4.7.5. FLANGED JOINT : The flange joint shall be made for flange type water meter and the joint shall be as per

the specification of flanged joint.

4.7.6. TESTING : The joints shall be tested to a hydraulic pressure of 1 MPa (10 kg/cm2

) along with testing of pipe

line for a minimum duration of two hours.





1. Water meter, hemp yarn, linseed oil, zinc, fixing and testing.

2. Supplying of strainer non-return valve, sockets, union nut etc.

3. Making screwed or flanged joints.


4.7.8. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of water meter of specified diameter

fixed.

4.7.9. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit Water Meter of specified diameter fixed. No

extra payment shall be made towards making flanged and other joints and G.I. fittings used in fixing of the

water meter.

4.8. PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE :

4.8.1. GENERAL : The item includes provision of pressure reducing valve of specified diameter as mentioned in

the schedule including fixing.

4.8.2. MATERIAL: Pressure reducing valve is a device with suitable means of connection for insertion in a vertical

pipe line for controlling the water pressure. Valve shall be of brass and shall be vertical flow type,

conforming to IS 9739-1981.

4.8.3. FIXING : The valve shall be fixed in position on the pipe line as shown in the drawing or as directed. The

screwed or flanged joint shall be made to obtain complete water tight joint.

4.8.4. TESTING : The joints shall be tested to a hydraulic pressure of 1MPa (10 kg/cm2

)along with testing of pipe

line for a minimum duration of 2 hrs.


1. Supplying Valve including fixing and testing.


4.8.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of valve of specified diameter fixed.

4.8.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of valve of specified diameter fixed.

4.9. CAST IRON WATER QUALITY PIPING WORK :

4.9.1. GENERAL : The item includes the provision of supplying water quality cast iron pipe of specified diameter

including cutting, laying, fixing, and painting the pipe line.




4.9.2. MATERIAL : The pipes shall be centrifugally cast (spun) Iron Pressure pipe conforming to IS 1536 and shall

be of class “LA”, „A‟ or “B”. These shall be of socket and spigot or double flanged. All the pipes shall be

cylindrical reasonably true with inner and outer surfaces and nearly concentric as practicable. The outer

surface shall be smooth, sound, free from pin holes, cracks and other imperfections. The pipes shall be

treated with solution of Dr. Angus Smith‟s solution. The coated surface shall give glossy finish. The table

showing the dimensions & weight of different diameter of pipes is given below:

CENTRIFUGALLY CAST (SPUN) IRON „WATER QUALITY‟ PIPES Tolerences : a) Length ± 25 mm (b)

weight 5% (c) Thickness ± (1+0.05e)mm Value of è` for

a. LA class pipe e = 10/12 (7 + 0.02 DN)

(i) A class pipe e = 11/12 (7 + .02 DN)

(ii) B class pipe e = (7 + 0.02 DN)




CENTRIFUGALLY CAST (SPUN) IRON „WATER QUALITY‟ PIPES WEIGHT FOR SOCKET & SPIGOT PIPES (IS 1536-2001)

Dia Class Barrel Socket Mass Total weight for one working length „ L‟ in meter

DN Lead

joint

Push-on joint

Thick

ness

Mass

for 1 Mt 3.66 4 4.5 5 5.5 6

M

m

DE

mm DE mm e mm kg Kg. Kg Kg. Kg. Kg. Kg. Kg.

80 LA 98 95 7.2 14.7 5.5 59.0 64.0 79.0

A 98 95 7.9 16.0 5.5 64.0 70.0 78.0 86.0

B 98 95 8.6 17.3 5.5 69.0 74.0 83.0 92.0

10

0 LA 118 115 7.5 18.6 7.1 75.0 82.0 91.0 100.0 109.0 119.0

A 118 115 8.3 20.5 7.1 82.0 89.0 99.0 109.0 120.0 130.0

B 118 115 9.0 22.0 7.1 88.0 95.0 106.0 117.0 128.0 139.0

12

5 LA 144 141 7.9 24.2 9.2 98.0 106.0 118.0 130.0 142.0 154.0

A 144 141 8.7 26.4 9.2 106.0 115.0 128.0 141.0 155.0 168.0

B 144 141 9.5 28.7 9.2 114.0 124.0 138.0 153.0 167.0 181.0

15

0 LA 170 167 8.3 30.1 11.5 122.0 132.0 147.0 162.0 177.0 192.0

A 170 167 9.2 33.2 11.5 133.0 144.0 161.0 178.0 194.0 211.0

B 170 167 10.0 35.9 11.5 143.0 155.0 173.0 191.0 209.0 227.0

20

0 LA 222 219 9.2 44.0 16.5 178.0 193.0 215.0 237.0 259.0 281.0

A 222 219 10.1 48.1 16.5 193.0 209.0 233.0 257.0 281.0 305.0

B 222 219 11.0 52.1 16.8 207.0 225.0 251.0 278.0 304.0 329.0

25

0 LA 274 271 10.0 59.3 22.9 240.0 260.0 290.0 319.0 349.0 379.0

A 274 271 11.0 65.0 22.9 261.0 283.0 315.0 348.0 380.0 413.0

B 274 271 12.0 70.6 22.9 281.0 305.0 341.0 376.0 411.0 447.0




30

0 LA 326 323 10.8 76.5 29.8 310.0 336.0 374.0 412.0 450.0 489.0

A 326 323 11.9 84.0 29.8 337.0 366.0 408.0 450.0 492.0 534.0

B 326 323 13.0 91.4 29.8 364.0 395.0 441.0 487.0 533.0 578.0

35

0 LA 378 375 11.7 96.3 37.5 390.0 423.0 471.0 519.0 567.0 615.0

A 378 375 12.8 105.0 37.5 422.0 458.0 510.0 563.0 615.0 668.0

B 378 375 14.0 114.5 37.5 457.0 495.0 553.0 610.0 667.0 725.0

40

0 LA 429 426 12.5 116.9 46.3 474.0 514.0 572.0 631.0 690.0 748.0

A 429 426 13.8 128.7 46.3 517.0 561.0 625.0 690.0 754.0 819.0

B 429 426 15.0 139.5 46.3 557.0 604.0 674.0 744.0 814.0 883.0

45

0 LA 480 477 13.3 141.0 56.0 572.0 620.0 690.0 761.0 832.0 902.0

A 480 477 14.7 156.0 56.0 627.0 680.0 758.0 836.0 914.0 992.0

B 480 477 16.0 169.0 56.0 675.0 732.0 816.0 901.0 986.0 1070.0

50

0 LA 532 529 14.2 165.2 66.0 671.0 727.0 809.0 892.0 974.0 1057.0

A 532 529 15.6 181.0 66.0 728.0 790.0 880.0 971.0 1061.

0 1152.0

B 532 529 17.0 196.7 66.0 786.0 853.0 951.0 1049.

0

1148.

0 1246.0

60

0 LA 635 632 15.8 219.8 89.3 894.0 968.0

1162.

0

1188.

0

1298.

0 1408.0

A 635 632 17.4 241.4 89.3 973.0 1055.0 1141.

0

1272.

0

1404.

0 1544.0

B 635 632 19.0 262.9 89.3 1052.0 1141.0 1272.

0

1404.

0

1535.

0 1667.0

4.9.3. UNLOADING : The pipe shall be unloaded where they are required. Where mechanical handling facility are

not available, pipes weighing upto 60 kg shall be handled by two persons by hand passing and heavier

pipes shall be unloaded from the lorry or wagon by holding them in loops, formed with ropes and sliding

over plank set not steeper than 45 degrees. Two ropes always shall be used and only one pipe shall be

unloaded at a time. Under no circumstances shall pipes be thrown down from the carriers or be dragged or




rolled along hard surfaces. The pipes shall be checked for any visible damage while unloading and shall be

sorted out for reclamation.

4.9.4. STORING : The pipes shall be lined upon on one side of the alignment of the trench, socket facing upgrade

when line runs uphill and up stream when line runs on level ground. Each stack shall contain pipes of same

class and size. Storage shall be done on firm, level and clean ground. Wedges shall be provided at the

bottom layer to keep the stack stable.

4.9.5. CLEANING : The pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned with brush and washed if necessary to remove any

accumulated stone, soil or dirt inside and inside of socket and outside of the spigot shall also be cleaned in

similar way.

4.9.6. EXAMINATION : Before pipe is laid it shall be first examined for damage and cracks. No cracked or

damaged pipe shall be used. The pipe shall be tested with a hammer to prove its soundness.

4.9.7. DAMAGED MATERIAL : If any material found damaged or cracked, the same shall not be used in the work.

The contractor has to replace the same at his own cost and charges.

4.9.8. TRENCHES : The depth of the trenches shall not be less than 1000 mm measured from the top of the pipe

to the surface of the ground under roads and not less than 750 mm elsewhere. The width of the trench shall

be the nominal diameter of the pipeline plus 400mm, but it shall not less than 550 mm in case of all kind of

soil, excluding rock and not less than 1000 mm in case of rock.

Trench shall be so deep that the pipes may be laid to the required alignment and at required depth. The width of trench at bottom between face of sheeting shall be such as to provide not less than 200 mm clearance on either side of the pipe. Trenches shall be of such extra width, when required as will permit the convenient placing of timber supports strutting and planking handling of specials etc. The bed of trench, in soft or made up earth, shall be well watered and rammed before laying the pipes and depression, if any, shall be properly filled with earth and consolidated in 20 cm layers. If the trench bottom is extremely hard or rocky or loose stoney soil, the trench shall be excavated 150mm below the trench grade. Rocks, stones or other hard substances from the bottom of the trench shall be removed & trench brought back to the required grade by filling with selected fine earth or sand or fine murrum & compact so as to provide a smooth bedding for pipe. After the excavation of the trench is completed, hollows shall be cut at the required position to receive the socket of the pipe. The barrels of the pipes shall rest through their entire length on the solid ground that sufficient space left for jointing the under side of the pipe joints. These socket holes shall be refilled with sand after jointing the pipe. The trench shall be kept free from water shoring and timbering shall be provided wherever required. Excavation below water table shall be done after dewatering the trenches.




The road crossing shall be excavated half at a time and where the pipe line/drain crosses on existing road

after the pipe have been laid in the first half and the trench refilled. Care shall be taken not to disturb the

electrical & communication cable net with during the course of excavation.

4.9.9. LOWERING : The pipe shall then be placed in trenches by means of proper sheer legs, chains and other

tacts and shall be properly driven home. In no case pipe shall be rolled or dropped into the trench. One end

of rope may be tied to a wooden or steel Pag or driven into ground and other end hold by men which when

slowly released till lower the pipe into trench.

4.9.10. LAYING : The pipes shall be carefully laid straight to correct alignment in raising or falling gradients. The

socket end of the pipe shall face uphill. All the pipe shall be used in standard length as far as possible. Cut

length may be used only where it is necessary to make up exact length. While jointing the spigot it should be

neatly placed into the socket for full length and properly supported. The pipe shall be carefully packed

underneath so that they shall bear loads arising from traffic evenly through out their whole length. The entire

length of pipe shall be supported on bed of the trench evenly through out. Care shall be taken to prevent

any sand, earth or other materials from entering into the pipes during laying. At the end of the day‟s work the

open end shall be suitably plugged.

No pipe shall be laid until the trench has been excavated to its required depth for a distance of about 5 M in front of the pipe to be laid. No pipe shall be covered until it has been passed by the Engineer-in-charge. In unstable soils, such as soft soil and dry lumpy soil it shall be checked whether the soil can support the pipe and if required, suitable special foundation shall be provided. Where the soils are drastically affected by extremes of saturation and dryness, those soils are subjected to extraordinary shrinkage which from wide and deep cracks in the earth surface may result in damage to underground pipe because of tight gripping bond between pipe and clay, subjecting to it excessive stresses as the clay shrinks. In such case an envelop of minimum 100 mm of tamped sand shall be made around the pipe line to avoid any bonding. In places where rock is encountered, cushion of fine earth or sand shall be provided for a depth of 150mm by excavating extra depth of the trench where the gradient of the bad slopes is more than 30 depths, it may necessary do and or fine pipe against sliding downwards.

4.9.11. FIXING: The contractor shall first get the layout for pipe line approved by the Engineer-in-charge as may be

required by the bye-laws. The pipe line shall be so fixed / laid as not to expose to the heat or subject to any

injury or risk to the pipe. The socket end of the pipe shall be facing up. All the pipes shall be used in

standard length as far as possible. Cut length may be used only where it is necessary to make up exact

length.

4.9.12. THRUST BLOCK : .Thrust blocks are required to transfer the resulting hydraulic thrust from the fittings of

pipe on to a larger load bearing soil section. Thrust blocks shall be installed wherever there is a change in

the direction/size of the pipe line or the pressure line diagram, or the pipe line ends at a dead end. If




necessary, thrust blocks may be constructed at valves also. Thrust block shall be constructed taking into

account the pipe size, water pressure, type of filling, gravity component when laid on slopes and the type of

soil. In case of pipe line laid in soft soil, joints/couplings are to be anchored on each side by providing side

thrust blocks without restricting the coupling.

Pipes on slopes need be anchored only when there is a possibility of the backfill around the pipe sloping down the hill and carrying the pipe with it. Generally for slopes upto 30 degrees, good, well drained soil carefully damped in layers.of 100mm under and over the pipe, right up to the top of trench will not require anchoring.

For steeper slopes, one out of every three pipes shall be held by straps fastened to vertical supports anchored in concrete.

4.9.13. BACK FILLING: Back filling shall follow the pipe installation as closely as possible to protect pipe from

falling boulders, eliminating possibility of lifting of the pipe due to flooding of open trench and shifting pipe

out of line by caved in soil.

The soil under the pipe and coupling shall be solidly tamped. The initial back fill material shall be free of large stones and dry lumps. In bags and Monshers gravel or crushed stone may be used for this purpose. The initial back fill shall be placed evenly in a layer of 100 mm thick and consolidated up to a cushion of at least 300 mm cover over the pipe. Joints shall be taken care to resist the movement of the pipe due to pressure while testing.

4.9.14. TESTING :

After a new pipe has been laid, jointed and back filled (or any valved section thereof), it shall be subjected to the following two tests:

a) Pressure test at a pressure of at least double the maximum working pressure-pipe and joints shall be

absolutely water tight under the test.

b) Leakage test (to be conducted after the satisfactory completion of the pressure test) at a pressure to be

specified by the authority for a duration of two hours.

Hydrostatic Tests:

Portions of the line shall be tested by subjecting to pressure test as the laying progresses before the entire line is completed. In this way any error of workmanship will be found immediately and can be corrected at a minimum cost. Usually the length of the section to be tested shall not exceed 500 m. Where any section of a main is provided with concrete thrust blocks or anchorages, test shall not be made until atleast two days have elapsed. Prior to testing, enough back fill as described in 4.9.12 shall be placed over the pipe line to resist upward thrust. All thrust blocks forming part of the finished line shall have been sufficiently cured and no temporary bracing shall be used.




The open end of the section shall be sealed temporarily with an end cap having an outlet which can serve as an air relief vent or for filling the line, as may be required. The blind face of the end cap shall be properly braced during testing by screw jacks and wooden planks or steel plate. The section of the line to be tested shall be filled with water manually or by a low pressure pump. Air shall

be vented from all high spots in the pipe line before making the pressure strength test because entrapped

air gets compressed and causes difficulty in raising the required pressure for the pressure strength test.

The test pressure shall be gradually raised at the rate of approximately one kg/ sqcm/ mm. The duration of the test period if not specified shall be sufficient to make a careful check on the pipe line section. Procedure for pressure test:

Each valved section of the pipe shall be slowly filled with water and all air shall be expelled from the pipe

through hydrants and blow offs. If these are not available at high places, necessary tapping may be made at

points of highest elevation before the test is made and plugs inserted after the tests have been completed.

If the trench has been partially back-filled the specified pressure based on the elevation of the lowest point

of the line or section under test and corrected to the elevation of the test gauge, shall be applied by means

of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer-in-Charge. The duration of the test

shall not be less than 5 minutes.

Examination under Pressure: All exposed pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants and joints should be carefully

examined during the open-trench test. When the joints are made with lead, all such joints showing visible

leaks shall be recaulked until tight. When the joints are made with cement and show seepage or slight

leakage, such joints shall be cut out and replaced as directed by the authority. Any cracked or defective

pipes, fittings, valves or hydrants discovered in consequence of this pressure test shall be removed and

replaced by sound material and the test shall be repeated until satisfactory to the Engineer-in-Charge.

If the trench has been back-filled to the top, the section shall be first subjected to water pressure normal to

the area and the exposed parts shall be carefully examined. If any defects are found, they shall be repaired

and the pressure test repeated until no defects are found. The duration of the final pressure tests shall be at

least one hour.

Procedure for Leakage Test:

Leakage is defined as the quantity of water to be supplied into the newly laid pipe, or any valved section

thereof, necessary to maintain the specified leakage test pressure after the pipe has been filled with water

and the air expelled.

No pipe installation shall be accepted until the leakage is less than the number of cm3/h determined by the




formula :

ql= ND√ P

3.3 Where ql = the allowable leakage in cm3/h.

N = number of joints in the length of the pipe line.

D = diameter in mm, and

P = the average test pressure during the leakage testing kg/cm2.

Variation from Permissible Leakage : Should any test of pipe laid in position discloses leakage greater

than that specified in above para., the defective joints shall be repaired until the leakage is within the

specified allowance.




1. Supplying spigot and socket or monolithic double flanged C.I. Pipe of specified class & diameter.

2. Laying the pipe and cutting the pipe wherever necessary and wastage.

3. Dewatering the Trench or pit if found necessary till completion of work.

4. Fixing the pipe line using M.S. clamps not less than 3 mm thick with wooden gutties etc. if required.

5. Testing the pipe line.


4.9.17. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for unit running metre length of pipe line laid or

fixed. .Measurement shall be taken along the centre line of the pipe deducting outer to outer length of

specials.

4.9.18. MODE OF PAYMENT : Contract rate shall be for unit running meter length of pipe line laid or fixed.

4.10. SPECIALS FOR C.I. WATER SUPPLY PIPE LINE :

4.10.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying cast iron water quality or M.S. specials of specified diameter for

C.I. water supply pipe including laying, fixing and painting the specials.

4.10.2. MATERIALS : The specials for cast iron water quality pipe shall be conforming to IS 1538 & 13382 with




socket and spigot or monolithic double flanged. All the fittings shall be cylindrical, reasonably true with inner

and outer surfaces and nearly concentric as practicable. The outer surface shall be smooth, sound, free

from pin holes, cracks and other imperfections.

M.S. specials shall be made out of M.S. plate of thickness of 6 mm for pipes upto 100mm and 8 mm thick

for pipes above 100 mm to 300. 10 mm thick for pipe above 300 mm.

4.10.2. A.:M.S. specials shall be treated with Anticorrosive coating of Bituminous based coro coat.

4.10.3. CLEANING : The specials and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned with brush and washed if necessary to

remove any accumulated stone, soil or dirt inside the socket and outside of the spigot.

4.10.4. EXAMINING : Before special is laid, it shall be first examined for damage and cracks. No cracked or

damaged pipe shall be used. The pipe shall be tested with a hammer to prove its soundness.

4.10.5. DAMAGED MATERIAL : If any material found damaged or cracked, the same shall not be used in the work.

The contractor has to replace the same at his own cost and charges.

4.10.6. LOWERING : The specials shall then be placed in trenches by means of proper sheer legs, chains and

other tacts and shall be properly driven home.

4.10.7. FIXING : The specials shall be fixed by means of lead or flanged joint on C.I. Pipe line wherever required

and as shown in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

4.10.8. TESTING : Joints shall be tested to a hydraulic pressure of 10 kg/cm2 alongwith testing of pipe line and

shall be maintained for minimum two hours. All leakages, defects etc. shall be rectified.


the progress of the work either from rain, seepage, springs or any other cause till the completion of work.


1. Supplying spigot and socket or monolithic double flanged C.I. or M.S. specials.

2. Fixing the specials wherever necessary.

3. Dewatering the trench or pit if found necessary till completion of work.


4.10.11. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be on the basis of IS 1538 for standard weight of

specials and/or on the basis of actual unit weight for fixed specials.




4.10.12. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be on the basis of unit weight.

4.11. LEAD JOINT :

4.11.1. GENERAL : The item includes making lead joints for C.I.water quality pipes and fittings/specials including

testing etc.

4.11.2. MATERIAL : Lead shall be conforming to IS 782 and of good quality manufactured by Hindustan zinc or

equivalent. Fine hemp yarn shall be the best available in the market.

4.11.3. PREPARATION : Outside of the spigot and inside of the socket shall be thoroughly cleaned with brush. The

spigot shall be carefully centred in the socket by one or more laps of spun hemp yarn twisted into ropes of

uniform thickness thoroughly soaked in hot coal-tar or bitumen and cooled before use.

4.11.4. POURING : Pouring of lead shall be done by means of ropes covered with clay or by using special leading

rings. The lead shall be melted rendering it thoroughly fluid and each joint shall be filled in one pouring.

4.11.5. CAULKING : The caulking shall be carried out with molten lead. Hemp yarn shall be driven into the bottom

of the socket and leave the space required. The molten lead shall then be run in sufficient quantity so that

after being caulked solid, the lead may project 3 mm beyond the face of the socket against the outside of

the spigot, but must be flushed with the outside edge of the socket.

The lead taken from the pot shall be run hot into the joint and the joint filled in one running. The joint shall be

caulked well, by a suitable caulking tool and 2 kg hammer and the joint left neat and smooth. In case C.I.

fittings are also conforming to the same specification that of pipes, the consumption of lead will be worked

out on the basis of actual consumption for each joints.

The following table shows consumption of the weight of lead & yarn per joint as per IS 3114: 1994

NOTE :

i) The quantities of lead given are on average basis and a variation of 10 percent is permissible .

ii) Before pipe are jointed on large scale, three a four sample joints shall be made and the average

consumption of lead per joint shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

4.11.6. TESTING : The pipe line after being laid and jointed shall be tested under the supervision of the Engineer-

in-Charge. The testing shall be carried out by the contractor at his own cost and charges. Any joint found

leaking shall be redone and all leaking pipes removed and replaced without extra cost.

The length of pipes to be tested shall be first filled with water from a higher section of pipe and the test

pressure is applied. The test pressure shall be 10 kg per square centimeters and shall be maintained for two




hours continuously.

4.11.7. DEWATERING : The contract rate shall include bailing out all the water if accumulated during the progress

of the work either from rain, seepage, springs or any other cause till the completion of work.


1. Pig lead and treated yarn, fuel, wood, etc.

2. Winding the rope on spigot and centering the pipe, caulking, casting molten lead etc.

3. Testing and making good the defective joints.


5. All labour, material and use of tools.

4.11.9. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of lead joint made.

4.11.10. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of lead joint made.

4.12. G M GATE VALVE CHAMBER :

4.12.1. GENERAL : The item includes construction of brick masonry valve chamber of size as specified in this

schedule including providing M.S./G.I. frame and cover over R.C.C pre-cast cover with or without surface

box.

4.12.2. MATERIAL : Brick work, plastering, concreting etc. shall be as per general specification under section II.

Precast RCC cover slab, surface box, C.I/M.S frame and cover etc. shall be size and weight as specified in

the schedule.

4.12.3. CONSTRUCTION :

a) Foundation concrete of mix 1:4:8 shall be of 150 mm thick with 150 mm offset alround or as specified in

the schedule.

b) Brick masonry in cement mortar 1:4 as specified.

c) Plastering inside and outside surfaces of walls in two courses using cement mortar 1:3 of thickness as

specified mixed with water proofing compound of specified Quality including inner surfaces finished

smooth with neat cement punning.

4.12.4. RCC PRECAST/CAST IRON COVERS

4.12.4.1. RCC PRECAST COVER ( for chambers of size upto 600 x 600 mm) : Chamber cover shall

be casted as shown in the drawing having minimum 75 mm thick in cement concrete 1:2:4 or as

specified in the schedule by using nominal reinforcement 100 kg/ Cum of concrete including




shuttering, finishing, curing, placing in position etc.

4.12.4.2. CAST IRON/ M.S COVER : Cast iron/M.S cover of specified size and weight shall be supplied

and placed over the chamber as directed. The cover shall be painted with 3 coats of black

bitumastic paint.

4.12.5. DEWATERING : The water accumulated in the pit due to rain, seepage, springs or any other cause during

the progress of work shall be pumped/bailed out till the completion of work.


1. Bed concrete, Brick masonry, cement plaster, RCC pre-cast cover slab with or without surface box cast

/MS cover etc.

2. Dewatering the trench or pit if necessary.


4.12.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of valve chamber of specified

internal size and depth constructed.

4.12.8. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of valve chamber of specified internal size

and depth constructed.

4.13. C.I. SLUICE VALVE CHAMBER :



box.



the schedule.



the schedule.









4.13.4.1. RCC PRECAST COVER ( for chambers of size above 1000 x 1000 mm)

Chamber cover shall be coated in minimum three equal parts or more as directed with lifting hooks as shown in the drawing. RCC slab shall be casted alongwith galvanised M.S. angle iron frame with stiffness and anchors made out of the sizes as specified in the schedule. The exposed portion of the angle frame shall be painted with the coats of silver paint over a a coat of primer. RCC pre-cast slab shall be of 100 mm thick (unless otherwise specified) in cement concrete 1:2:4 of size as specified in the drawing schedule by using nominal reinforcement 100 kg/ Cum of concrete including shuttering, curing etc. and shall be placed in position as directed. cast iron road surface of prescribed weight shall be fixed to the cover slab during casting the slab for key rod operation.

Road surface box shall be of size 100x125x150 mm conforming to IS 3950 having hinged and weighting not less than 14 kg. The surface box shall be fixed on top of the RCC cover slab during the casting of slab for key rod operation. The surface box shall be painted with 3 coats of black bitumastic paint.

4.13.4.2. CAST IRON/ M.S COVER: Cast iron/M.S cover of specified size and weight shall be supplied


bitumastic paint.

4.13.5. DEWATERING: The water accumulated in the pit due to rain, seepage, springs or any other cause during

the progress of work shall be pumped/bailed out till the completion of work.


1. Bed concrete, Brick masonry, cement plaster, RCC pre-cast cover slab with or without surface box cast

/MS cover etc.



4.13.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for each unit of valve chamber of specified internal

size and depth constructed.

4.13.8. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for each unit of valve chamber of specified internal size


4.14. FLANGES & FLANGED JOINT : (Screwed or welded Flanges)

4.14.1. GENERAL: The item includes supplying flanges and providing flanged joint for G.I./ M.S./ C.I pipes, fittings

and specials including testing.

4.14.2. MATERIAL: The CI flanges shall be confirming to IS 3516 or IS 1536. The heavy quality G.I./ M.S. flanges

shall be conforming to I.S.6392 having thickness not less than 20 mm for pipes having diameter beyond 80




mm and 12 mm for pipes having diameter below 80 mm including drilling holes in new flanges, jointing with

the pipe by means of welding or screwed joint. Rubber insertion shall be of three ply not less than 3 mm

thick of approved make or fiber board impregnated with chemically neutral mineral oil having smooth & hard

surface weighing not less than 112 gm/mm thickness. Bolts, nuts and washers used shall be of good quality.

4.14.3. MAKING JOINT : Flanged joints shall be made by jointing the facing of the flange with the packing of rubber

insertion and boiling up evenly on all sides. A thin layer of lead wool shall be provided for making the joints

water tight where facing of the pipe is not true. The packing shall be of rubber insertion of three ply and of

approved make and thickness. The packing should be of full diameter of the flange with proper pipe hole

and bolt hole; cut even at both the inner and outer edges.


the progress of the work either from rain, seepage, springs or any other cause till the completion of work.

4.14.5. TESTING : The joints shall be tested along with pipe line after the pipe line is laid and jointed. The testing

shall be as per the clause of testing of the pipe line


1. Cost of flanges, making bolt holes in flanges, supplying rubber insertion, making flanged joint.




4.14.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of flange joint of specified size made

with supplying one or two new flanges as specified in the schedule of quantities.

4.14.8. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for each unit of flange joint made.

4.15. FLEXIBLE PUSH-ON JOINT ( TYTON/ RING JOINT )

4.15.1. GENERAL: The item includes push-on joint with rubber ring for C.I. pipes, fittings and including testing.

4.15.2. MATERIAL : Rubber ring shall be moulded or tubular natural or synthetic rubber gasket conforming IS

12820.

4.15.3. JOINTING : The groove and the socket shall be thoroughly cleaned before inserting the rubber gasket while

inserting the gasket it shall be made sure that it faces the proper direction and that it is correctly seated in

the groove. After cleaning dirt or foreign materials from the plain end, non petroleum lubricant shall be

applied in accordance with the pipe manufacturer‟s recommendations. The plain end of the pipe is pushed

into the socket of the pipe and while pushing, the pipe shall be kept straight. If any deflections are to be




made in the alignment, it may be made after the joint is assembled. The permissible deflection shall not be

exceeded as per IS 3114 for socket and spigot rubber joint is 5 ° for 80 to 300 mm nom. bore, 4° for 350 to

400 mm nom bore and 3° for 450 to 750 mm nom bore pipe. A timber header shall be used between the

pipe and crowbar or jack to avoid damage to the pipe while the plain end of the pipe is pushed into the

socket either with a crowbar or jack or lever puller.

4.15.4. TESTING : The joints shall be tested along with pipe line after the pipe line is laid and jointed. The testing

shall be as per the clause of testing of the pipe line.

4.15.5. DEWATERING : The contract rate shall include bailing out all the water if accumulated during the progress

of the work either from rain, seepage, springs or any other cause till the completion of work.


1. Rubber ring, lubricant etc.




4.15.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of rubber ring joint made.

4.15.8. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be each unit of rubber ring joint made.

4.16. C. I. SLUICE VALVE :

4.16.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of C.I. Sluice Valve of specified diameter as mentioned in the

schedule including fixing.

4.16.2. MATERIAL : The Sluice valve shall be of Class or pressure rating as specified in the schedule of quantities

and conforming to I.S. 14846. The valve shall be of cast iron and / or spheroidal iron having non-rising

spindle with hand wheel & spindle of stainless steel.

4.16.3. FIXING : The C.I. sluice valve shall be fixed in position as indicated in the drawing or as directed. They shall

be fitted with the tail pieces on both sides by means of flange joints.


the progress of the work either form rain, seepage, springs or any other cause till completion of the work.

4.16.5. TESTING : The Sluice Valve and the joints shall be tested as per the clause of testing of the pipe line The

testing shall be done along with the pipe line testing.





1. Supplying and fixing of C.I. Sluice Valve of specified diameter.



4.16.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of Sluice Valve fixed. Tail piece,

making flange joint and lead joint shall be measured under the relevant items.

4.16.8. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of Sluice Valve fixed.

4.17. C.I. NON RETURN VALVE :

4.17.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of C.I. Non-Return Valve of specified size in the schedule of

quantities including fixing.

4.17.2. MATERIAL : Non-return valve shall be conforming to IS 9338 or IS 5312 as specified in schedule of

quantities. The body, domes, covers, stuffing box, thrust plates, hand wheel, wedges, gland and cap shall

be of cast iron not less than of grade FG200 and all in side working parts should be of any non ferrous or

ferrous materials such as gun metal. Valve of single door pattern swing type shall have test pressure of

PN1.6(50 to 125 mm size), PN1.0 (150 to 300mm size),PN0.6 (350 to 600 mm size)as per IS 5312 (part.1).

Valve of multi door pattern swing type shall have test pressure of PN0.6(400 to 1200 mm size), PN1.0 (400

to 1200mm size)as per IS 5312 (part 2).Valve shall be tested for the body and seat and the defective valve

shall be replaced by the contractor at his own cost.

4.17.3. FIXING : The C.I. Non-Return valve shall be fixed in position as indicated in the drawing or as directed.

They shall be fitted with the tail pieces on both sides by means of flange joints.



4.17.5. TESTING : The C.I. Non-Return valve shall be fixed in position shall be tested hydraulically to a minimum

pressure as per testing clause of piping work. The testing shall be done along with the testing of pipe line.


1. Supplying and fixing of C.I. Non-Return Valve of specified dia.



4.17.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of Non-Return Valve fixed. Tail

piece, making flange joint and lead joint shall be measured under the relevant items.

4.17.8. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of Non-Return Valve fixed.




4.18. FOOT-VALVE :

4.18.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of C.I. body. Foot-Valve of specified diameter as mentioned in the

schedule including fixing.

4.18.2. MATERIAL : Foot-Valve shall be conforming to IS 4038 and with C.I. body not less than of grade FG200

and strainer with internal gun metal working parts. The valve shall be screwed end (25 to 150 mm

size),flanged end (50 to 450 mm size), single disc type (up to 150 mm size), two disc type (exceeding 150

mm size), lift type (up to 100 mm size) The valve shall be tested for housing 0.6 MPa (6 kg/cm2 )and for

seat 0.2 MPa (2 kg/cm2) for 2 minutes as per IS 4038. The ball type foot valve with nytrile rubber ball and

with bronze seat may be used as specified in the schedule of quantities. The defective Foot-Valve shall be

replaced by the contractor at his own cost.

4.18.3. FIXING : Foot-valve shall be fixed in position as shown in the drawing or as directed. They shall be fitted by

means of flange joints.

4.18.4. TESTING : The C.I. Foot-Valve and the joints shall be tested hydraulically to a minimum pressure as per

testing clause of piping work .The testing shall be done along with the testing of pipe line.


1. Supplying and fixing of C.I. Foot-Valve of specified diameter.


4.18.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of Foot-Valve fixed. Tail piece,

making flange joint and lead joint shall be measured under the relevant items.

4.18.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of Foot-Valve fixed.

4.19. AIR VALVE :

4.19.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of single, double action or kinetic air Valve of specified diameter

as mentioned in the schedule including fixing.

4.19.2. MATERIAL : The Air Valve shall be of heavy quality conforming to IS 14845 with IS certification mark and

isolation valve.. The body, domes, covers, stuffing box, thrust plates, wedges, gland and cap shall be of cast

iron not less than of grade 20 and inside working parts should be of any non-ferrous or ferrous materials.

4.19.3. FIXING : The Air Valve shall be fixed in position as indicated in the drawing or as directed. They shall be




fitted by means of flange joints or screwed joint to the pipe line.

4.19.4. TESTING : The Air Valve and the joints shall be tested hydraulically to a minimum pressure as per testing

clause of piping work. The testing shall be done along with the testing of pipe line.


1. Supplying and fixing Air Valve of specified diameter and type.

2. Supplying G.I. pipe and fittings if required.


4.19.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of Air Valve fixed C.I. and G.I.

specials, making lead or flange joint etc. shall be measured under the relevant items.

4.19.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of air valve fixed.

4.20. BUTTER FLY VALVE :

4.20.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying and fixing of butterfly valve of specified diameter as mentioned in

the schedule.

4.20.2. MATERIAL : The butterfly valve shall be flanged type or as specified conforming to IS 13095 & BS -5155.

The valve shall be bubble tight, resilient sealed suitable for flow in either direction with accompanying

flanges and steel handle.

4.20.3. FIXING : The butterfly valve shall be fixed to the pipe line in position as indicated in the drawing and as

directed by the Engineer-In-Charge.

4.20.4. TESTING : The valve and the joints shall be tested to a minimum hydraulically pressure of 10kg/sqcm for a

duration of two hours or as per testing clause of piping work. The testing shall be done along with the testing

of pipe line. The leaky joints shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.


1. Supplying and fixing Butterfly Valve of specified diameter.

2. Supplying G.I. pipe and fittings if required.


4.20.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for each unit of butterfly Valve fixed. C.I. and G.I.

specials, making lead or flange joint etc. shall be measured under the relevant items.

4.20.7. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for each unit of butterfly valve fixed.




4.21. STAND POST TYPE FIRE HYDRANT :

4.21.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of C.I. Stand Post type Fire hydrant, C.I. sluice valve etc. including

fixing.

4.21.2. MATERIAL : Stand post column shall be fitted with 65 mm size instantaneous male coupling and 80 mm

size C.I. duck-foot bend, C.I. sluice valve etc.. Stand post hydrant shall conform to the relevant IS code. 80

mm socketed or flanged tail piece shall be as per site requirements. Sluice valve shall conform to the

relevant IS code with necessary flanged/lead joints.

4.21.3. FIXING : Hydrant and C.I. sluice valve shall be fixed in position as indicated in the drawing or as directed.

They shall be fitted by means of flange joints on the pipe line.

4.21.4. TESTING : The Hydrant and the joints shall be tested under the testing clause of pipe line. The testing shall

be done along with the testing of pipe line.




1. Supplying and fixing 80 mm dia. stand post column fitted with 65 mm size instantaneous male coupling,

C.I. duck-foot bend, C.I. sluice valve, making lead/flanged joints etc.



4.21.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of stand post hydrant fixed. Tail

piece, making additional flange joint, lead joint for extension piece etc. shall be measured under the relevant

items.

4.21.8. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of stand post hydrant with C.I. Sluice valve

fixed.

4.22. FERRULE CONNECTION :

4.22.1. GENERAL : The item includes making ferrule connection with existing C.I. or G.I. water supply line including

fittings and fixtures.

4.22.2. MATERIAL : The ferrule shall be of gun metal or hard brass of diameter as specified in the schedule. It shall

be fitted with screwed plug or valve capable of completely shutting off water supply. Coupling shall be

casted in one piece with cast iron bell mouth cover.

4.22.3. FIXING : The ferrule shall be fixed to the water supply pipe line of specified diameter without protruding

inside including making hole in the water main and covering with cast iron bell mouth cover. The ferrule shall




be fitted water tight.


the progress of the work either from rain, seepage, springs or any other cause till completion of the work.

4.22.5. TESTING : Ferrule shall be tested under the testing clause of pipe line. The testing shall be done along with

the testing of pipe line.


1. Ferrule, coupling and cast iron bell mouth cover.

2. Boring hole in the water main and fixing ferrule.


4. All necessary labour, materials use of tools.

4.22.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of ferrule connection.

4.22.8. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of ferrule connection.

4.23. MAKING CONNECTION WITH WATER MAIN:

4.23.1. GENERAL : The item includes connection with the existing C.I. or G.I. water supply line including fittings &

fixtures.

4.23.2. MATERIAL : C.I. or G.I. specials shall be conforming to relevant IS code and flange joint or lead joint shall

be as per specifications described herein before.

4.23.3. MAKING CONNECTION : The connection shall be made with existing C.I. or G.I. water pipe line of

specified diameter. The existing water supply pipe line shall be cut or disjointed carefully where the

connection is to be made. The connection shall be made with providing C.I. or G.I. specials as per site

requirement including making flanged joint or lead joint.


the progress of the work either from rain, seepage, springs or any other cause till completion of the work.

4.23.5. TESTING : The connection shall be be tested under the testing clause of pipe line. The testing shall be

done along with the testing of pipe line.


1. Cutting, disjointing the C.I. or G.I. water supply line.

2. Supplying of C.I. or G.I. specials




3. Making flanged joint, lead or screwed joint including providing new flange.

4. Dewatering the trench or pit till completion of the work.


4.23.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for one job making connection with existing water

supply line complete in all respect. Including required fittings, fixtures, specials, making flanged joint or lead

joint etc. which shall not be measured separately.

4.23.8. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for one job making connection with existing water supply

line complete in all respect. No payment shall be made for any required fittings, fixtures, and specials and

making flanged joint or lead joint used in the connection.

4.24. MAKING CONNECTIONS WITH MUNICIPAL WATER MAIN :

4.24.1. GENERAL : The item includes connection with existing C.I. or G.I. water supply line including fittings and

fixtures.

4.24.2. MATERIAL : C.I. of G.I. specials shall be conforming to relevant IS code and flange joint or lead joint shall

be as per specifications described herein before.

4.24.3. MUNICIPAL CHARGES : If the connection shall be made with the water supply line of Municipal

Corporation, the contractor shall obtain necessary permission from the concerned municipal authorities. He

shall pay all the necessary charges towards the connection being permitted by the Municipality.

4.24.4. MAKING CONNECTION : The connection shall be made with existing C.I. or G.I. water pipe line of

specified diameter. The existing water supply pipe line shall be cut or disjointed carefully where the

connection is to made. The connection shall be made with providing CI or GI. specials as per site

requirement including making flanged joint or lead joint.



4.24.6. TESTING : The connection shall be be tested under the testing clause of pipe line. The testing shall be

done along with the testing of pipe line.


1. Cutting, disjointing the C.I. or G.I. water supply line.

2. Supplying C.I. or G.I. specials.

3. Making flanged joint, lead joint or screwed joint including providing new flange.






4.24.8. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for one job of making connection with existing

water supply line complete in all respect, including required fittings, fixtures, specials, making flanged joint or

lead joint etc. Which shall not be measured separately.

4.24.9. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for one job of making connection with existing water

supply line.

5.0. DRAINAGE SYSTEM

5.1. CAST IRON SOIL QUALITY PIPING WORK :

5.1.1. GENERAL The item includes supplying of soil quality CAST IRON pipe of specified diameter with fittings

and fixtures including laying, fixing, cutting, jointing and painting the pipe line.

5.1.2. MATERIAL Cast Iron soil quality pipes and fittings shall have ISI certification mark. Sand -Cast, Cast Iron

Soil quality or rain water pipes and fittings shall confirm to IS 1729 and centrifugally cast (Spun Cast) cast

iron soil quality pipe shall confirm to IS 3989. All the pipes and fittings shall be cylindrical reasonably true

with inner and outer surfaces and nearly concentric as practicable. The outer surface of the pipe and fitting

shall be finished well, sound, free from pin hole, cracks and other imperfections. The pipes & fittings shall be

treated with solution of Dr. Angus Smith‟s solution.

The dimensions, weight of Sand-Cast Iron/ Ductile Iron pipes and fittings shall be as per following table of IS 1729 – 2002 or its latest revision. Tolerance : Mass (-) 5% , thickness (-) –2mm, pipe length (+/-) 20 mm, fitting length (+/-) 10 mm




The Dimensions, weight of Spun cast pipes and fittings shall be as per following table of IS 3989 -1984 or its latest revision.

Tolerances : ((a) Thickness (-)15% (b) Weight (-) 10% (c) Length (+ / -) 20 mm) shall as per IS 3989

5.1.3. EXAMINING : Before laying the pipe line, it shall be first examined for damages and cracks. No cracked or

damaged pipe and fittings shall be used in the work and they shall remove from the site by the contractor at

his own cost & charge.

5.1.4. CLEANING : All pipes and fittings shall thoroughly cleaned with brush and washed if necessary to remove

any accumulated stone, soil or dirt inside and out side of piping material.

5.1.5. FIXING : The pipe shall be fixed as shown in the drawing. If the holes are not left in parapet, wall, beam,

slab, floor, etc., they shall be cut and cavity surrounding the pipe made good properly after fixing the pipe.

The pipe shall be fixed with nails and M.S. clamps having thickness not less than 3 mm , 20 mm wide or as

specified in the schedule with socket facing up.

Spacing between clamps for fixing internal piping shall be as per IS 2065 – 1983 as given below :

Horizontal Runs Vertical Runs

50mm 2 M 2 M

80 & 100mm 2.5 M 2.5 M

The pipe and fitting shall be kept 50 mm away from the wall face to facilitate cleaning and painting etc. For rain water pipe the inlet end shall be carefully fixed to admit water from roof and shoe shall be fixed at outlet. Cowl shall be fixed at top end of the vent pipe.

5.1.6. MAKING LEAD JOINT : The spigot shall be carefully centered in the socket by one or more laps of spun

hemp yarn twisted into ropes of uniform thickness thoroughly soaked in hot coal-tar or bitumen and cooled

before use. The joints shall be made with molten lead and hemp yarn. The lead shall be melted rendering it

Nominal dia Thickness of wall 1 50 mm 5mm

2 75mm 5mm 3 100mm 5mm 4 150mm 5mm

Nominal dia Thickness 1 50 mm 3.5mm 2 75mm 3.5mm 3 100mm 4mm

4 150mm 5mm




thoroughly fluid and each joint shall be filled in one pouring. The lead may project 3 mm beyond the face of

the socket against the outside of spigot, but must be flushed with the outside edge of the socket.

After the lead has been run into the joint, the lead shall be thoroughly caulked by a suitable caulking tool and 2 Kg hammer and the joint left neat and smooth. The consumption of lead will be worked out on the basis of actual observation at sit. The following table shows consumption of lead and yarn per joint.

5.1.7. TESTING : The pipe line which is laid on the ground or below the ground level, the joints shall be tested with

two meter head of water from a higher section of pipe line.

The pipe line fixed vertically on the wall shall be tested by the smoke test. The Greasy cotton waste shall be burnt in a smoke machine consisting of bellows and a burner. If any lead joint is found to be sweating or leaking, the contractor shall rectify the same till water tightness is attained to the full satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

5.1.8. DEWATERING : In case of underground piping, the contract rate shall include bailing or pumping out all the

water till completion of work if accumulated during the progress of work either from seepage, springs, rain or

any other cause,


1. Supplying of C.I. soil quality Pipes and fittings, cowl for vent and shoe for rain water pipe of specified

diameter with M.S. clamps and nails.

2. Laying, fixing, cutting and joining the pipe wherever necessary and wastage.

3. Making the lead joint including cost of fuel, wood, jointing with lead, spun yarn etc.

4. Fixing the pipe line with M.S. clamps not less than 3 mm thick, 20 mm wide and M.S. nails length not

less than 60 mm and painting the clamps and nails.

5. Supplying and fixing rubber gasket to every cleaning access of cast iron pieces.

6. Painting the pipe line with two coats of black anti corrosive bitumastic paint or painting with synthetic

enamel paint over appropriate primer, in case the pipe line exposed in elevation.

7. Testing the pipe line with smoke test or with two meter head of water.

8. Dewatering if necessary till completion of work.


5.1.10. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for unit running meter length of pipe line laid or


separately for fittings. Making lead joint, painting and testing.

5.1.11. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for unit running meter length of pipe line laid or fixed.

5.2. UPVC-SWR PIPING WORK :

5.2.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of UPVC soil, waste and rain water (SWR) and ventilation pipes

with fittings of specified diameter including laying, fixing, cutting, joining, painting if required etc.




5.2.2. MATERIAL : The pipes shall conforming to IS 13592, UPVC -SWR (Type „A‟ or „B‟ as specified) and fittings

conforming to IS 13591 shall be free from cracks, flaws and defects and shall be U. V. stabilized and able to

withstand a pressure as mentioned in the schedule of work. Rubber sealing rings conforming to IS 5382 with

lubricant for sliding socket joints as mentioned in the schedule of work.







drawing. All the pipe shall be used in standard length as far as possible. Cut length may be used only where

it is necessary to make up exact length.

The entire length of pipe shall be evenly supported on bed of the trench through out. Care shall be taken to prevent any sand, earth or other materials from entering into the pipes during laying. At the end of day's work the open end shall be suitably plugged.


charge. The pipe shall be fixed with G.I. clamps not less than 2.0 mm thick of with suitable UPVC

clamps/clips, The clamps/clips shall be fixed into the wall with G.I. nails not less than 40 mm long and

wooden gutties keeping the pipe about 15 mm clear of the wall.

5.2.7. MAKING JOINT : The jointing of pipes and fittings generally shall be done with approved make cement

solvent including making surface rough or rubber sealing rings with lubricant for sliding socket joints . The

pipe shall be cut to desired length. Care shall be taken that that profile or cut surfaces shall not be changed

and the fibrous material shall be removed with scraper or knife.




5.2.9. PAINTING : In case of underground piping, the pipe line shall be painted with two coats of approved oil

paint of matching colour over a coat of primer.

5.2.10. DEWATERING : In case of underground pipes ,the contract rate shall include bailing or pumping out all the


any other cause.




5.2.11. TESTING : Please see clause no.5.3.10


1. Supplying of UPVC-SWR pipes and fittings of specified diameter.


3. Fixing the pipe line with G.I. clamps not less than 2mm thick and G.I./M.S. nails length not less than

40mm or with UPVC clamps, screws, wooden gutties etc.

4. Making the solution joint and painting if mentioned in schedule of work the pipe line.

5. In case of underground pipes , dewatering if necessary till completion of work.




separately for fittings, making joint, painting if mentioned in schedule of work and testing.

5.2.14. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit running meter length of pipe line laid or

5.3. HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPING WORK FOR DRAINAGE:

5.3.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of HDPE pipes with fittings of specified diameter including laying,

fixing, cutting, jointing.

5.3.2. MATERIAL : The pipes and fittings shall conform to IS 14333. HDPE pipes and fittings shall be free from

cracks, flaws and defects and shall be able to withstand a pressure as mentioned in the schedule.

5.3.3. EXAMINING : Before laying the pipe line, if shall be first examined for damages and cracks, No cracked or



5.3.4. LAYING : Please refer clause 4.4.03

5.3.5. FIXING : Please refer clause 4.4.05

5.3.6. MAKING JOINT : Please refer clause 4.4.06

5.3.7. DETACHABLE JOINT : Please refer clause 4.4.07

5.3.8. ANTISYPHONAGE : The HDPE pipes shall be used for anti-syphonage including provision, cutting,

wastage, bending, dressing, jointing with cement solution, necessary plugs, brass fittings such a brass

thimbles, brass union, brass cleaning caps and other brass fittings as required.




5.3.9. DEWATERING : In case of under ground piping works, the contract rate shall include bailing or pumping out

all the water till completion of work if accumulated during the progress of work either from seepage, springs,

rain or any other cause.

5.3.10. TESTING : The joints shall be tested by either smoke test for vertical stacks or 2.5 m head of water at the

highest point of the section under test for horizontal drainage pipes. Smoke shall be pumped into the pipes

at the lowest end from a smoke machine which consists of a below and burner .The material usually burnt is

greasy cotton waste which gives out a clear pungent smoke which is easily detectable by sight as well as by

smell, if there is leak at any point of the drain. The water head test shall be carried out by suitably plugging

the lower end of the drain and the ends of the connection if any and filling the system with water. A knuckle

bend shall be temporarily jointed to it so as to provide required test head , or the top may be plugged with a

connection to a hose ending in a funnel which could be raised or lowered till the required head is obtained

and fixed suitable for observation. The leaky joints shall be remade and section re-tested at no extra cost.


1. Supplying of HDPE pipes and fittings of specified diameter.


3. Making the solution joint or mirror joint, painting if mentioned in schedule of work

4. Fixing the pipe line with G.I. clamps not less that 20 mm x 1 mm thick and G.I./M.S. nails length not less

than 40mm or HDPE clamps, screws, rawl plug etc.

5. In case of underground pipes , dewatering the pit or trench till completion of work.


5.3.12. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for unit running meter length of pipe line laid or

fixed.The measurement shall be taken along the centre line of pipe. No measurement shall be recorded

separately for fitting, making joint, painting if mentioned in schedule of work and testing.

5.3.13. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit running meter length of pipe line laid.

5.4. PVC PIPING WORK :

5.4.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of PVC pipes with fittings of specified diameter including laying,

fixing, cutting, joining, painting etc. for vent, over flow, waste water pipe line etc.

5.4.2. MATERIAL : The pipes and fittings shall conform to series IV of IS 4985, PVC pipes and fittings shall be

free from cracks, flaws and defects and shall be able to withstand a pressure as mentioned in the schedule.









5.4.5. LAYING Please refer clause 4.5.05

5.4.6. FIXING : Please refer clause 4.5.06

5.4.7. MAKING JOINT :. Please refer clause 4.5.07




5.4.9. PAINTING : If mentioned in schedule of work, the pipe line shall be painted with two coats of approved oil

paint of matching colour over a coat of primer.

5.4.10. DEWATERING : In case of underground pipes, the contract rate shall include bailing or pumping out all the


any other cause.

5.4.11. TESTING : Please refer para 5.3.10.


1. Supplying of PVC pipes and fittings of specified diameter.


3. Fixing the pipe line with G.I. clamps not less than 2mm thick and G.I./M.S. nails length not less than

40mm or with PVC clamps, screws, wooden gutties etc.

4. Making the solution joint and painting the pipe line if mentioned in schedule of work.

5. In case of underground piping, dewatering if necessary till completion of work.




separately for fittings, making joint, painting and testing.

5.4.14. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit running meter length of pipe line laid or fixed.

5.5. GULLY TRAP :




5.5.1. GENERAL : The item includes provision of S.W. Gully trap with C.I. frame including construction of Gully

Trap Chamber.

5.5.2. MATERIAL :The Gully Trap shall be of salt glazed stoneware with 150 mm nominal square inlet or as

specified in the schedule with 100mm diameter outlet. Brick work, plastering, concreting shall be as per

general specifications under section-II.


1. Internal dimension of the Gully trap chamber shall be as specified in the schedule.

2. Foundation of 1:4:8 concrete shall be 150 mm thick, and shall have 100mm offset.

3. Brick masonry shall be of 230 mm thick in cement mortar 1:6 and masonry shall be plastered with

15mm thick plaster in 1:3 cement mortars inside and outside surface with smooth finish.

5.5.4. C.I. FRAME AND COVER : C.I. frame and cover shall be fixed with the cement concrete 1:2:4 at the top of

Gully trap chamber, the weight of frame and cover shall not be less than 7.5 kg. and they shall be painted

with two coasts of black bitumastic paint.

5.5.5. DEWATERING : The contract rate shall include bailing or pumping out all the water till completion or work if

accumulated during the progress of work either from seepage, springs, rain or any other cause.


1. Supplying of stoneware gully trap with C.I. frame and cover.

2. Concreting, brick work, plastering, fixing frame and cover.

3. Dewatering if necessary till completion of work.


5.5.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for unit of Gully Trap chamber of specified internal

size and depth constructed including stoneware Gully Trap and C.I. frame and cover fixed.

5.5.8. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for unit of Gully Trap chamber constructed as a whole.

5.6. C.I. NAHANI / FLOOR TRAP :

5.6.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of cast iron nahani / floor trap with CP brass/stainless steel grating

of specified diameter with fittings and fixtures including fixing and jointing with the pipe line.

5.6.2. MATERIAL : 65 mm nominal outlet dia C I Nahani trap weighing not less than 4.5 kg with an effective water

seal of 20 mm or 75mm nom. outlet dia. floor trap (100mm inlet dia.)/ nahani trap (165mm inlet dia.)

conforming to IS 3989 or IS1729 shall be provided as specified in the schedule of quantities. Top grating




shall be of CP brass or stainless steel of heavy quality of size and shape to suit the trap.

5.6.3. FIXING : C.I. nahani/ floor trap with the bend and pipe piece shall be fixed in position over the bed of 1:2:4

cement concrete. The jointing trap and pipe shall be caulked with 1:1 cement mortar. The grating shall be

fixed over the nahani / floor trap flush with the floor level and the gap finished with matching cement.


1. C.I. nahani/ floor trap with CP brass or stainless steel grating as specified in the item.

2. Fixing the trap and getting with cement mortar or concrete.


5.6.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for unit of nahani trap fixed.

5.6.6. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for unit of nahani trap fixed.

5.7. RAIN WATER GRATING :

5.7.1. GENERAL: The item includes supplying of cast iron grating of specified diameter including fixing and

painting.

5.7.2. MATERIAL: The rain water grating shall be Cast Iron with closed grained without any casting defects. The

thickness should be uniform throughout, one shaped C.I. grating.

5.7.3. FIXING: C.I. rain water grating shall be fixed in position with 1:1 cement mortar.


1. The cast iron rain water grating cement, sand etc.

2. Fixing the grating.


5.7.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for each unit of grating fixed.

5.7.6. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contracts rate shall be for each unit of grating fixed.

5.8. LEAD SHEET FLASHING :

5.8.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying lead sheet flashing of specified size including laying, fixing,

cutting, jointing and laying.

5.8.2. MATERIAL : Lead sheet flashing shall not be less than 3 mm thick & weight should not be less than 38 Kg.




per sqm.

5.8.3. FIXING : The lead sheet shall be fixed all around the rain water pipe. The sheet shall project one diameter

of socket all-round beyond the outer face of the socket & shall project inside the socket at least half the

diameter of the rain water pipe socket. It shall be fixed by bending & breaking the sheet to shape, placing,

tucking below waterproofing courses etc.


1. The lead sheet flashing, cement concrete and cement mortal etc.

2. Fixing the lead sheet in position.


5.8.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of lead sheet flashing fixed.

5.8.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of lead sheet flashing fixed.

5.9. RAIN WATER G.I. SPOUT :

5.9.1. GENERAL : The item include supplying of G.I. rain water spouts of specified diameter with or without fitting

at outlet including fixing. Cutting and painting.

5.9.2. MATERIAL : The rain water spout shall be of heavy quality G.I. pipe of approximate 400 mm length or as

specified in the schedule of work. The „T‟ of same diameter shall be fixed at the out let of spout. G.I. Pipe

and fitting shall be as per specifications under section IV.

5.9.3. FIXING : G.I. rain water spout shall be fixed in the position as shown in the drawing including breaking,

cutting RCC pardi, brick wall, RCC floor etc. It shall be fixed with 1:1 cement mortar and 1:2:4 cement

concrete.

5.9.4. PAINTING : The exposed part of spout shall be painted with two coats of approved flat oil paint over a coat

of primer.


1. The G.I. rain water spout, cement concrete and cement mortar.

2. Fixing and painting the spout.


5.9.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of G.I. spout fixed.

5.9.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of G.I. spout fixed.




5.10. RAIN WATER C.I. SPOUT :

5.10.1. GENERAL : The item include supplying of C.I. spouts of specified diameter including fixing, cutting, and

painting,

5.10.2. MATERIAL : The spout shall be of heavy quality C.I. pipe of approximate 600 mm long or as specified in the

schedule of work. Pipe shall be as per specifications of C.I. piping work under Section-V.

5.10.3. FIXING : C.I. rain water spout shall be fixed in the position including breaking, cutting RCC/ brick structure

etc. It shall be fixed with 1:1 cement mortar and 1:2:4 cement concrete.

5.10.4. PAINTING : The exposed part of spout shall be painted with two coasts of anticorrosive black bitumastic

paint over a cost of primer.


1. The C.I. Spout, cement concrete and cement mortar.

2. Fixing and painting the spout.


5.10.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of C.I. spout fixed.

5.10.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contracts rate shall be for each unit of C.I. spout fixed.

5.11. GARBAGE CHUTE :

5.11.1. GENERAL : The item include supplying of A.C. garbage chute of specified diameter including fixing &

cutting.

5.11.2. MATERIAL : Garbage chute shall be of asbestos cement of dimension as mentioned in the schedule. The

refuse disposal system shall consist of A.C. pipes, A.C. refuse junction, A.C. adapter of suitable size and

M.S. or Aluminum hopper of 18 gauge suitably capped with vent covers and providing the AC junction at

terrace floor opening for periodical flushing / cleaning purpose. Inlet hopper which is to be located at each

floor shall be closed with rubber seal along the shutter and shall be of 18 gauge aluminum / M.S. sheet and

suitable for all diameter of shafts.

5.11.3. FIXING : A.C. refuse junction shall be fixed at convenient height and it should not exceed 75 cms. From

floor level or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

Square opening of refuse junctions shall be embedded in masonry or in cement concrete and M.S.

Aluminum hoppers shall be fitted with nuts and bolts to the square junction opening and the frame shall

flush with the wall.




The refuse disposal system shall be supported by M.S. flats not less than 20 mm x 3 mm thick encircling the

pipe or junction below the socket and fixed to the wall with two screws of suitable length on each end of

M.S. flats. The entire fixing of the garbage chute shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

5.11.4. JOINTING : Joints of sockets and spigot shall be caulked to about 25 mm in depth with bitumastic jointing

compound and remaining gap may be grouted with 1:2 cement mortar.


1. The A.C. garbage chute with all fittings

2. Fixing the garbage chute and joining with 1:1 cement mortar.


5.11.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENTS : The measurement shall be for per running meter length of garbage chute

fixed.

5.11.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for per running meter length of garbage chute fixed.

5.12. INSPECTION CHAMBER :

5.12.1. GENERAL : The item includes provision of brick masonry Inspection Chamber of internal size as specified

in the schedule.

5.12.2. MATERIAL : Concreting, Brick work, plastering etc, shall be as per specification as given in general

specification under section II.


1. Internal dimensions and initial depth shall be as specified in the schedule or as shown in the drawing.

2. Foundation of 1:2:4 concrete shall be 150 mm thick and shall have 150 mm offset.

3. The concrete 1:2:4 shall be laid to necessary shapes to form the channel for the pipe being received in

the channel. It shall be of appropriate diameter and shall be half round. The sides shall be kept sloping

towards the channel.

4. Brick masonry shall be 230 mm thick in cement mortar 1:2 or as specified in the schedule of work,

making brick tapering for longitudinal wall 450 mm from top of cover of the chamber.

5. Brick masonry shall be rendered with 20 mm thick plaster in cement mortar 1:1 or as specified in the

schedule of work inside and outside surfaces in two courses and inside surface finished smooth with

neat cement punning.







1. Concreting in foundation, forming the channels, constructing brick masonry and plastering over the brick

work, and finishing smooth in side surfaces.

2. Cutting existing stoneware/RCC Hume pipe line to facilitate construction the Inspection chamber.

3. Dewatering the pit if found necessary till completion of work.


5.12.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for an Inspection chamber of specified finished

internal size and initial depth measured vertically from top of the frame and cover to the invert of chamber.

Extra for additional depth or rebate for lesser depth shall be measured in R.M.

5.12.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit Inspection chamber of specified internal size and

initial depth., Extra/Rebate for additional/lesser depth respectively shall be paid in RM.

5.13. CIRCULAR MANHOLE :

5.13.1. GENERAL : The item includes provision of brick masonry Circular manhole of internal size as specified in

the schedule.

5.13.2. MATERIAL : Concreting, Brick work, plastering etc. shall be as per specification as given in general



1. Internal dimensions and initial depth shall be as specified in the schedule of work or as shown in the

drawing.

2. Foundation of 1:2:4 concrete shall be 300 mm thick and shall have 300 mm offset.

3. The concrete 1:2:4 shall be laid to necessary shapes to form the channel for the pipe being received in

the channel. It shall be of appropriate diameter and shall be half round. The sides shall be kept sloping

towards the channel.

4. Brick masonry shall be in cement mortar 1:2 or as specified in the schedule of work. One meter height

from top shall be conical in shape and shall be constructed in 230 mm thick brick masonry and

remaining height shall be 345mm thick in cylindrical shape.

5. Brick masonry shall be rendered with 20 mm thick plaster in cement mortar 1:1 or as specified in the

schedule of work inside and outside surfaces in two courses and inside surface finished smooth with

neat cement punning.







1. Concreting in foundation, forming the channels, constructing brick masonry and plastering over the brick

work and finishing smooth inside surfaces.

2. Cutting existing stoneware/RCC hume pipe line to facilitate construction of new manhole.



5.13.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for one circular manhole of specified finished

internal size and initial depth measured vertically from top of the frame and cover to the invert of manhole.

Extra over for additional depth or rebate for lesser depth shall be measured in R.M.

5.13.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit circular manhole of specified internal size and

initial depth, Extra/Rebate for additional/lesser depth respectively shall be paid in RM.

5.14. EXTRA DEPTH FOR INSPECTION CHAMBER AND MANHOLE :

5.14.1. GENERAL : The item includes provision for extra depth of Inspection Chamber and manholes of brick

masonry.

5.14.2. MATERIAL : Concreting, Brick work, plastering etc. shall be as per specification as given in general


5.14.3. CONSTRUCTION : Extra depth for inspection chamber and manhole shall be constructed under the clause

5.12.00 & 5.13.00 of the Section -5.




1. Constructing brick masonry and plastering over the brick work.



5.14.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for unit meter depth or part thereof for inspection

chamber / circular manhole constructed. Depth of manhole or chamber shall be measured from top of the

frame and cover to the invert level of manhole deducting the initial depth of at manhole/ chamber. Extra for

additional depth or rebate for lessor depth shall be measured in R.M.

5.14.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit meter depth of inspection chamber / circular




manhole constructed.

5.15. DROP CONNECTION :

5.15.1. GENERAL : The item includes provision of drop connection of salt glazed of nominal diameters as specified

in schedule of quantities including 1:2:4 cement concrete encased to pipe all round.

5.15.2. MATERIAL : Concreting, mortar for jointing the pipes, hemp yarn, salt glazed stoneware pipes and specials

like bends, tees, crosses (double tees), plugs caps etc. of specified diameter shall be of grade 'A' or 'AA'

conforming to IS 651. All the pipes and fitting shall be free from pin Helen, cracks and other imperfections

and should have be free from pin holes, cracks and other imperfections and should have the glossy finish in

salt glazing, necessary form work for encasing the pipe.

5.15.3. DAMAGED MATERIAL : Any material found damaged or cracked shall not be used in the work and

contractor has to replace the same from the site at his own cost and charges.

5.15.4. LAYING, FIXING, JOINTING, CLEANING, TESTING : Above shall be done as specified in clause 5.18.00

i.e. salt glazed stone ware piping work.

5.15.5. ENCASING THE PIPE LINE : After the joints and pipes have been proved to be water tight then pipe line

shall be embedded in cement concrete as specified in the schedule of quantities and as shown in drawings

including necessary form work.

5.15.6. DEWATERING : The contractor rate shall include bailing or pumping out all the water if accumulated during



1. Stone ware pipe with specials viz. bends, tees, crosses (double tees), plugs, caps etc. cement mortar

1:1 and spun yarn

2. Laying, jointing and testing the pipe line including cutting & wastage

3. Concreting and formwork for encasing

4. Dewatering if found necessary till completion of work.


5.15.8. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for one drop connections of specified nominal dia.

of pipe & depth of drop connection shall be measured vertically from the bed level of drop pipe cleaning

chamber (i.e. finished top of bed concrete) to the invert level of manhole or chamber. Extra/Rebate for

additional/lesser than the initial depth respectively shall be measured in RM.

5.15.9. MODE OF PAYMENT : The Contract rate shall be for one drop connection of specified nominal diameter &

depth as specified in the schedule & drawings.




5.16. EXTRA OVER DEPTH FOR DROP CONNECTION :

5.16.1. GENERAL : The item includes provision of extra depth for drop connection including providing and laying

salt glazed stone ware pipe & specials, 1:2:4 (or as specified in schedule) cement concrete for on casing the

pipe al round square in shape all as specified in drawings & schedule.

5.16.2. MATERIAL : Concreting, mortar for jointing the pipes, hemp yarn, salt glazed stoneware pipes and specials

of specified diameter shall be of grade 'A' or 'AA' class and conforming to IS 651-1971. All the pipes and

fittings shall be free from pin holes. Cracks & other imperfection and should have the glossy finish of salt

glazing, necessary form work encasing the pipes.

5.16.3. DAMAGE / MATERIALS : This clause shall be as per clause 5.21 salt glazed stone ware piping work.

5.16.4. LAYING, FIXING JOINTING, CLEANING AND FIXING : This clause shall be as per clause 5.21 i.e. salt

glazed stone ware piping work.

5.16.5. ENCASING THE PIPE LINE : This clause shall be as per clause 5.15.05 as i.e. Drop connection.

5.16.6. DEWATERING : This clause shall be as per clause 5.15.06 i.e. drop connection.


1. S.W. pipe with specials, cement mortar 1:1 and spun yarn.

2. Laying, jointing and testing the pipe line including cutting and wastage.

3. Concreting and form work for encasing


5.16.8. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The depth of drop connection shall be measured vertically from the bed level

of drop pipe cleaning chamber (i.e. finished top of bed concrete) to the invert level of manhole or chamber

and initial depth shall be deducted.

5.16.9. MODE OF PAYMENT : Contract rate shall be for unit meter depth or part thereof for drop connection

5.17. DROP PIPE CLEANING CHAMBER :



box.






the schedule.



the schedule.






5.17.4.1. RCC PRECAST COVER ( for chambers of size upto 600 x 600 mm) : Chamber cover shall

be casted as shown in the drawing having minimum 75 mm thick in cement concrete 1:2:4 or as

specified in the schedule by using nominal reinforcement @ 100 kg/ Cum. of concrete including

shuttering, finishing, curing, placing the cover in position as directed by Engineer-in-charge.

5.17.4.2. CAST IRON/ M.S COVER: Cast iron/ M.S cover of specified size and weight shall be supplied


bitumastic paint.

5.17.5. DEWATERING: The water accumulated in the pit due to rain, seepage, springs or any other cause during

the progress of work shall be pumped / bailed out till the completion of work.


1. Bed concrete, Brick masonry, cement plaster, RCC pre-cast cover / MS cover etc.



5.17.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for each unit of chamber of specified internal size


5.17.8. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for each unit of chamber of specified internal size and

depth constructed.

5.18. C.I. FRAME AND COVER FOR MANHOLES:

5.18.1. GENERAL: The item includes supply LD/MD/HD/EHD/C.I. frame and cover as specified in schedule

including fixing and painting.




5.18.2. MATERIAL: C.I. Frame and cover shall conform to IS 1720 and shall have IS certification mark with grade

LD/MD/HD/EHD and the weight of frame and cover shall not be less than as specified in the schedule.

5.18.3. FIXING: Frame shall be fixed in the cement concrete 1:2:4 for bearing course and capping on the brick

masonry wall of the chamber of manhole and finishing shall be done in 1:2 cement plaster finished smooth

with neat cement.

5.18.4. PAINTING: The frame and cover shall be painted with two coats of approved black bitumastic anticorrosive

paint over a coat of primer.


1. C.I. frame and cover, cement concrete, cement plaster, painting etc.


5.18.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for C.I. Frame & cover on actual unit weight basis.

5.18.7. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for C.I. Frame and cover on actual unit weight basis.

5.19. PRECAST CONCRETE FRAME AND COVER FOR MANHOLES :

5.19.1. GENERAL: The item includes supply LD/ MD/ HD/ EHD factory made precast steel fiber reinforced concrete

(SFRC) frame and cover as specified in schedule including fixing and placing.

5.19.2. MATERIAL: The precast frame and cover shall be of steel fiber reinforced concrete (SFRC) conforming to

IS 12592 and shall be of approved make. The frame and cover shall be of LD/ MD/ HD/ EHD grade, size

and thickness as mentioned in the description of the item. The defective Frame and cover shall be replaced

by the contractor at his own cost and charges.

5.19.3. FIXING: Frame shall be fixed in cement concrete 1:2:4 for bearing course & capping on the top of masonry

wall of chamber or manhole and finishing shall be done in 1:2 cement plaster finished smooth with neat

cement.


1. Precast S.F.R.C. Frame and cover, cement concrete, cement plaster etc.


5.19.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for unit set of Precast S.F.R.C. Frame and cover

fixed.

5.19.6. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for unit set of Precast S.F.R.C. Frame and cover fixed.




5.20. CAST IRON STEPS / RUNGS :

5.20.1. GENERAL: The item includes supplying of cast iron steps including fixing and painting.

5.20.2. MATERIAL: The steps shall be of cast iron and minimum 150 mm wide. The minimum weight of each step

shall not be less than 5 kg or as specified in the schedule.

5.20.3. FIXING: The steps shall be fixed in brick masonry wall with 1:2:4 cement concrete with 75 mm cement

concrete cover at all around the step. The first step shall be 450 mm below from top surface of structure and

next shall be fixed 300 mm centre to centre in two rows at 300 mm distance or as shown in the drawing.

5.20.4. PAINTING: The projected portion of the cast iron step shall be painted with two coats of approved black

bitumastic anti corrosive paint over a coat of primer.

5.20.5. DEWATERING: The contract rate shall include bailing or pumping out all the water if accumulated during



1. C.I. Steps cement concrete and painting etc.



5.20.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement for C.I. steps shall be on actual unit weight basis or unit

C.I. step fixed as specified in the schedule.

5.20.8. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate for C.I. steps shall be on actual unit weight basis or unit C.I. step

fixed.

5.21. SALT GLAZED STONE WARE PIPING WORK :

5.21.1. GENERAL: The item includes supplying, laying and fixing the salt glazed Stone ware pipes with necessary

fittings of specified diameter including laying, jointing etc.

5.21.2. MATERIAL: Salt glazed stoneware pipes and specials of specified diameter shall be of grade "A" or "AA"

conforming to IS 651. All the pipes and fitting shall be free from pin holes, cracks and other imperfections

and should have the glossy finish of salt glazing.

5.21.3. DAMAGED MATERIAL: Any material found damaged or cracked shall not be used in the work contractor

has to replace the same from the site at his own cost and charge.

5.21.4. TRENCHES: The trench shall be so dug that the pipe can be laid to the required alignment and at the




required depth. When the pipe line is under road way, a minimum cover of 900 mm is recommended for

adoption, but it may be modified to suit local conditions.

Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer-in-Charge, the width at bottom of trenches for different

diameters of pipe laid at different depth s shall be as given below:

a) For all diameters, upto an average depth of 1200 mm , width of trench in mm shall be equal to diameter

of pipe plus 300 mm.

b) For all diameters for depths above of 1200 mm , width of trench in mm shall be equal to the diameter of

pipe plus 400 mm.

c) Not withstanding (a) & (b) above, the total width of trench shall not be less than 750 mm for depths

exceeding 900 mm.

The width of trench in the upper reaches shall be increased as described in sub head under “Earth Work.”

5.21.5. LAYING AND FIXING : Pipes shall be laid carefully to the correct alignment, levels and gradient and care

shall be taken to prevent for entering the sand, earth or other foreign material into the pipes during laying.

The pipes between manhole shall be laid truly in straight line, without vertical or horizontal undulations.

All inverts shall be laid from sight rails fixed at the true levels, with proper boning rods, The pipes shall be laid sockets facing up the gradient, alignment at the lower end and with the socket resting in the concrete bed if specified. Each pipes shall be laid singly and no pipe shall be laid until the trench has been excavated up to the required depth for a distance of 5meter in front of the pipes to be laid.

5.21.6. JOINTING : Spun yarn soaked in cement wash shall be passed round the spigot and spigot inserted in the

socket, The spun yarn shall then be caulked with 1:1 cement mortar with a little water, pressed into the joint

with hand and finished at 45 degree The mortar shall be cured for seven days.

The following table shows the details of materials used for jointing the S.W. pipe.

5.21.7. CLEANING: Interior surface of the pipes and fittings shall be cleaned off from all dirt, cement mortar and

superfluous materials.

5.21.8. TESTING : The joints of S.W. Pipe line shall be tested for a minimum 2.50 metre water head over the crown

of the highest pipe between the two manholes. The lower end shall be plugged water tight. Water shall then

be filled in the inspection chamber or manhole at the upper end of the line with 2.50 metre depth of water

over the crown. If it is found the certain pipe joints are leaking, the water shall be drained off and joints shall

be re-caulked. The hydraulic test shall be carried out in accordance with IS 4127.


shall be embedded in cement concrete if specified to the extent of one half of external diameter of the pipes

as directed, the concrete being made to slope away towards the sides of the foundations bed. Refilling shall




be done with fine selected materials and shall be done in layers not exceeding 150mm thick, watered,

consolidated and rammed properly, as specified.




1. S.W. Pipes with specials, cement mortar 1:1 and spun yarn.




5.21.12. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for unit meter length of pipe line laid. The pipe

shall be measured along the center line over all fittings. The measurement does not include for encasement

of the pipe, which will be paid the relevant item.

5.21.13. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit meter S.W. pipe line laid.

5.22. SEWER TRAP :

5.22.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying, laying and fixing the Stone ware sewer trap of specified diameter

including fixing, jointing and embedding.

5.22.2. MATERIAL : Sewer trap shall be salt glazed of stoneware of specified diameter and shall be of grade "A" or

"AA" conforming to IS 651. Sewer trap should be free from pin holes, cracks and other imperfections and

should have the glossy finish of salt glazing.

5.22.3. DAMAGED MATERIAL : Any material found damaged or cracked shall not be used in the work and

contractor ahs to replace the same from the site at his own cost and charge.

5.22.4. FIXING : Sewer trap shall be laid carefully to the correct alignment, levels and gradient and care shall be

taken to prevent for entering the sand, earth or other free material into the trap during laying. The trap shall

be on bedded in CC 1:2:4 including necessary form work.

5.22.5. TESTING : The testing shall be done along the testing of server line with the same specification.







1. S.W. sewer trap, cement mortar 1:1 and spun yarn.

2. Laying, jointing on bedding in CC 1:2:4



5.22.8. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of sewer trap fixed..

5.22.9. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of sewer trap fixed.

5.23. CONNNECTION WITH DOMESTIC SEWER :

5.23.1. GENERAL: The item includes the provisions of connecting sewer line with existing sewer line chamber or

manhole including cutting, breaking of masonry, road surface and making good to the original condition of

the damages.

5.23.2. MATERIAL: Concreting, Brick work, plastering etc. shall be as per specification as given in general

specification of section II.

5.23.3. MAKING CONNECTION :

1. Breaking or cutting the road surface for server connection.

2. Restoring all the excavated items in proper manner as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

3. Cutting the brick masonry wall to required size of existing manhole or inspection chamber.

4. Connecting the sewer line to the chamber or manhole.

5. Making good to the original condition all the damages after completion of sewer connection.

6. Disposing off all the superfluous material as directed.




1. Cutting the road surface as required and making good.

2. Restoring all the excavated materials and disposal of superfluous materials.

3. Cutting the manhole masonry, making good masonry and other damages to the original condition

according to the bye-laws


5. All the necessary labour, materials and use of tools.

5.23.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for one job.




5.23.7. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for one job.

5.24. CONNECTION WITH MUNICIPAL SEWER LINE :

5.24.1. GENERAL : The item includes the provisions of connecting sewer line with existing municipal sewer line

chamber or manhole including cutting, breaking of masonry, road surface and making good to the original

condition of the damages.

5.24.2. MATERIAL : Concreting, brick work, plastering etc. shall be as per specification as given in general


5.24.3. MAKING CONNECTION :

1. Breaking or cutting the road surface for sewer connection.

2. Restoring all the excavated items in proper manner as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

3. Cutting the brick masonry wall to required size of municipal manhole or inspection chamber.

4. Connecting the sewer line to the chamber or manhole of Municipal sewer line.

5. Making good to the original condition all the damages after completion of sewer connection.

6. Disposing off all the superfluous materials as directed.




5.24.5. MUNICIPAL CHARGES : The contractor shall obtain the necessary permission for connecting the sewer

line to the municipal sewer from the concerned authorities. He shall pay all necessary charges towards the

connection given by the municipality.


1. Cutting the road surface as required and making good.

2. Restoring all the excavated materials and disposal of superfluous materials.

3. Cutting the manhole masonry, making good masonry and other damages to the original condition

according to the bye-laws.

4. All the municipal charges towards connection.



5.24.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for one job.




5.24.8. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for one job.

6.0. WATER TANK, SEPTIC TANK, UPFLOW FILTER & SOAK PIT

6.1. FRAME AND COVER :

6.1.1. GENERAL: The item includes supplying of M.S. or C.I. frame with cover of size as specified in the schedule

including fixing and painting. The frame and cover shall be of mosquito proof condition and approved by the

Municipality.

6.1.2. MATERIAL : The frame and cover shall be of mild steel or cast iron as specified in the schedule. The weight

of frame and cover shall not be less than 50 kilogram's. They should have locking arrangement.

6.1.3. FIXING : The frame shall be fixed in the roof slab of tank or built with hold fast to R.C.C. slab by chasing or

cutting slab and grouting with 1:2 cement mortar.

6.1.4. PAINTING : The frame and cover shall be painted with two coats of approved anti corrosive black

bitumastic paint over a coat of approved quality primer.


1. Supplying and fixing frame and cover with locking arrangement.

2. All necessary materials, labour, painting and use of tools.

6.1.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be on actual unit weight basis.

6.1.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit weight basis.

6.2. SPOOL PIECE :

6.2-A. MILD STEEL / CAST IRON :

6.2-A.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of M.S. Spool piece with end coupling or C.I. Spool piece with end

flanges of size as specified in the schedule including fixing and painting.

6.2-A.2. MATERIAL : Spool piece shall be in length 400 mm of G.I. pipe with end coupling or to 600 mm of C.I. spun

pipe with end flanges, as specified in the schedule, A mild steel plate of size 3D x 3D or 200 mm x 200 mm

whichever is more (where „D‟ is the outer diameter of pipe) and shall be welded on the pipe such a way that

it can be placed in the center of the RCC wall/ floor. The plate shall not be less than 4 mm thick.

6.2-A.3. FIXING: The Spool piece shall be fixed in position as shown in the drawing or as directed by the

Engineering in charge. The spool piece in RCC wall / floor of water tank / septic tank shall be fixed by

making hole in the shuttering and tying it with reinforcement with M.S. wire, all as directed by the Engineer-




in-charge.

6.2-A.4. PAINTING : Projected length of Spool piece shall be painted with two coats of oil paint or anticorrosive

black bitumastic paint as specified.

6.2-A.5. THE RATE INCLUDES FOR :

1. Supplying and fixing of spool piece.

2. All necessary materials, labour, painting and use of tools.

6.2-A.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be taken for each spool piece of specified diameter

fixed.

6.2-A.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each spool piece of specified diameter fixed.

6.2-B. STAINLESS STEEL :

6.2-B.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of stainless steel Spool piece with end flanges with required

number of bolt holes of size as specified in the schedule & drawings including fixing.

6.2-B.2. MATERIAL : Spool piece shall be of approximate 600 mm long or standard available length of stainless

steel pipe conforming to ASTM A312, TP304/TP304L with end flanges as specified in the schedule. A

stainless steel plate of size 3D x 3D or 200 mm x 200 mm, whichever is more (where „D‟ is the outer

diameter of pipe) and shall be welded on the pipe such a way that it can be placed in the center of the RCC

wall/ floor. The plate shall not be less than 4 mm thick. The stainless steel pipe shall be seamless and

scheduled / classified / graded as per actual system requirement and as per ANSI B36.19

6.2-B.3. FIXING : The spool piece shall be fixed in position as shown in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer-

incharge. The spool piece in RCC wall and floor of water tank shall be fixed by making hole in the shuttering

and tying it with reinforcement using M.S. wire, all as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

6.2-B.4. THE RATE INCLUDES FOR :

1. Supplying and fixing of spool piece.


6.2-B.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be on total weight / mass basis of pipe pieces,

flanges and puddle plate fixed as one unit.

6.2-B.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit weight of each spool piece fixed.

6.3. OVER FLOW COUPLING :




6.3.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of C.P. Brass over flow coupling with mosquito proof jalli of size as

specified in the schedule including fixing and painting.

6.3.2. MATERIAL : The overflow coupling shall be of heavy quality. Over flow coupling and Mosquito proof Jalli

shall be of C.P. brass.

6.3.3. FIXING : The over flow coupling & jalli shall be fixed in position as shown in the drawing with leak proof

joints.


1. 1.Supplying & fixing Overflow coupling with mosquito proof jalli.

2. 2.All necessary materials, labour, painting and use of tools.

6.3.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each Over flow coupling fixed with mosquito

proof jalli.

6.3.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each over flow coupling fixed.

6.4. BALL VALVE :

6.4.1. GENERAL : The item includes providing horizontal type ball valve with PVC or copper float of size as

mentioned in the schedule including fixing.

6.4.2. MATERIAL : Horizontal plunger type ball valve with PVC or copper float shall be conforming to IS 1703. The

lever shall be of brass and may be made in one piece and the diameter of the lever rod shall not be less

than the diameter of the thread for boss of ball. Float shall be watertight and non-absorbent and shall not

contaminate water. Adhesives for joining the part shall not be used. The minimum thickness for copper

sheet of copper float shall be 0.45 mm up to 115 mm diameter and

0.55 mm for ball over 115 mm diameter. Valve shall be tested in closed position to the hydraulic pressure of

2 MPa for a minimum period of 2 minutes without leakage and sweating.

6.4.3. MINIMUM MASS : The minimum mass of finished ball valve and float of different size and class shall be as

per Table No. 8 of IS 1703.

6.4.4. FIXING : Valve shall be fixed in position as indicated in the drawing with necessary socket, union nuts etc.

as per site requirements. A few turns of fine hemp yarn dipped in linseed oil shall be taken over the

threaded ends to obtain complete water tight joint. Leaking joint if any shall be rectified to make it leak proof.




6.4.5. TESTING : Testing shall be done along with the testing of pipe line, Separate testing if required shall be

done as per ISI norms.


1. Supply of specified diameter ball valve with copper or PVC float & brass lever arm, hemp yarn, linseed

oil, zinc etc.


6.4.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each ball valve fixed.

6.4.8. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each ball valve fixed.

6.5. RUNGS

6.5.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying of copolymer polypropylene, steel reinforced plastic foot rests/

Rungs of size as specified in the schedule including fixing and painting.

6.5.2. MATERIAL : The Steps shall be of 20 mm size, round or square of copolymer poly propylene, steel

reinforced plastic foot rests conforming to ASTMD-4101 or as specified in the schedule of work.

6.5.3. FIXING : The Rungs shall be fixed in position as shown in the drawing or as directed by the Engineer-in-

charge. It shall be fixed with cement concrete 1:2:4 in position in stone / brick masonry wall or direct cast to

concrete wall. The first step shall be fixed 450 mm below from the top surface of structure and other rungs

shall be fixed 300 mm center to center (staggered) as shown in the drawing.


1. Copolymer steel reinforced rungs, cement concrete etc.


6.5.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be on the basis of unit rung fixed.

6.5.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit rung fixed.

6.6. POLYETHYLENE WATER TANK :

6.6.1. GENERAL : The item includes providing polyethylene plastic water tank with cover of capacity as

mentioned in the schedule including fixing and making connections such as inlet, outlet, scour, overflow etc.




6.6.2. MATERIAL : The water tank shall be made out of best moulded Polyethylene plastic. It shall be vertical or

horizontal type as specified, watertight and non-absorbent and shall not contaminate water. Adhesives shall

not be used in joints. The cover shall be of polyethylene / M.S. / C.I. as approved.

6.6.3. FIXING : The plastic water tank with cover shall be installed and fixed as per the manufacturer's

specification. The connections such as inlet, outlets, over flow, scour etc. of specified diameter shall be

made as mentioned in the schedule including the cost of fittings, fixtures and pipe of approximate 400 mm

long.


1. Supply of polyethylene plastic tank, cover, G.I. pipe, fittings etc.

2. Installation of tank and making connections.


6.6.5. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each polyethylene water tank of specified

capacity installed or per litre capacity of water tank.

6.6.6. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each polyethylene water tank of specified capacity

installed. The support for the tank shall be paid under relevant item.

6.7. MEDIA FOR UP-FLOW FILTER :

6.7.1. GENERAL : The item pertains to the provision of Stone aggregate as filter media of specified size for upflow

filter as mentioned in the schedule including laying and filling.

6.7.2. MATERIAL : The media of stone aggregate shall be irregular or cubical in shape. They shall be free from

thin, elongated and flat pieces. They should have high specific surface area, high percentage void, space,

resistance to abrasion or disintegration during placement, insolubility in sewage or other waste water and

resistance to spelling and flaking.

6.7.3. LAYING : The filter media made up of stone aggregate ranging from 40 mm to 75 mm in sizes as shown in

the drawing and the same shall be placed in different layers starting from bigger sizes to smaller sizes from

bottom.

6.7.4. DEWATERING : The contract rate includes bailing or pumping out all the water if accumulated during the

progress of work either from rain, seepage, springs or any other cause till completion of the work.


1. Supplying and laying stone aggregate.

2. Dewatering, if necessary till completion of work.





6.7.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for unit cubic meter aggregate filled.

6.7.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit cubic meter aggregate filled.

6.8. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR WATER TANK AND SEPTIC TANK :

6.8.1. GENERAL : Construction of water tank, septic tank and up flow filter is required to be done very carefully

with good quality materials. Dense, well compacted concrete of required strength has to be achieved in

order to make water tight compartment. The slope in the bed of tank, invert levels of insert, and also the

levels of partition and baffle walls should be properly maintained for proper flow of liquid.

6.8.2. TESTING OF WATER TANK AND SEPTIC TANK : After construction of tank, it shall be tested for leak

proof ness. The tank shall be first filled with water up to the top of wall. The water level should not drop more

than 50 mm within 48 hours. If the drop of water level is found more than 50 mm the defective and leakage

point shall be rectified to the full satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

6.8.3. COMMISSIONING OF SEPTIC TANK : Before commissioning the septic tank, a little quantity of digested

sludge, horse or cow dung may be added as a seed sludge to start functioning of bacterial activity in

sewage.

6.8.4. BACK FILLING : The back filling shall be done as per specification after satisfactory testing of the tanks.

Back filling shall be done in layers all around the tank and above the roof slab of the tank up to the height /

depth as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

6.8.5. CLEANING OF WATER TANK: The cleaning of the tank shall be done by manually or by Hydro dynamic

mechanism with low or high pressure as directed. Potable water, approved disinfectant etc. shall be used for

cleaning of water tank before use.

6.8.6. DEWATERING: The contract rate shall include bailing or pumping out all the water if any accumulated

during the progress of work either from rain, seepage, springs or any other cause till completion of the work.

6.8.7. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The work shall be measured under relevant item in the schedule of quantities

and paid for. Quoted rates are deemed to include for dewatering, back filling testing and commissioning of

water tank, septic tank and up-flow filter.

6.8.8. MODE OF PAYMENT: No additional payments shall be made towards dewatering back filling &

commissioning.

6.9. HUME PIPE SEPTIC TANK :




6.9.1. GENERAL : The item pertains to providing Hume pipe septic tank of specified diameter with vent pipe and

cap including laying, fixing and making connections.

6.9.2. MATERIAL : The Hume pipe septic tank of specified diameter and capacity with vent pipe and cap. The

Humepipe septic tank shall be in good condition without any damage and cracks.

6.9.3. LAYING AND FIXING: Hume pipe septic tank shall be fixed in position and level as indicated in the drawing

as per the manufacturer‟s specifications. The pipe joints for connection shall be made in cement mortar 1:1

The vent pipe with cap shall be fixed to the septic tank. Septic tank shall be completely filled with water just

before putting into use.

6.9.4. DEWATERING : The contract rate includes bailing or pumping out all the water if accumulated during the



1. Hume pipe septic tank, vent pipe with cap, cement mortar etc.

2. Laying Hume pipe septic tank, fixing vent pipe, making inlet pipe connection and filling the tank with

water.

3. Dewatering the pit, if necessary till completion of work.


6.9.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for each unit of Hume pipe septic tank for

specified capacity provided.

6.9.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for each unit of Hume pipe septic tank for specified

capacity provided.

6.10. SOAK PIT :

6.10.1. GENERAL : The item pertains to providing Soak pit of specified size as mentioned in the schedule of

quantities including filling with brick bats and coarse sand filling around the honey comb brick wall.

6.10.2. MATERIAL : The brick bats shall be from properly burnt bricks and not from over burnt bricks, Coarse sand

filling. Brick work and plastering shall be as per general specifications under section II.

6.10.3. CONSTRUCTION : Brick masonry shall be in cement mortar and its size and type shall be as specified in

the schedule. The pit shall be filled with loosely packed brick bats. The coarse sand shall be filled around

the honey comb brick wall of specified thickness.




6.10.4. DEWATERING : The contract rate includes bailing or pumping out all the water. If accumulated during the



1. Providing all materials required for the construction of soak pit.

2. Dewatering the pit, if necessary till completion of work.


6.10.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : All the items shall be measured separately under the relevant items or as

specified in the schedule of work.

6.10.7. MODE OF PAYMENT : All the items shall be paid separately under the relevant item or as specified in the

schedule of work.

6.11. RCC SPUN PIPE FOR DRAIN WORK :

6.11.1. GENERAL : The item includes supplying. Laying and fixing the RCC spun pipe of specified diameter and

class including all necessary fittings, laying, jointing etc.

6.11.2. MATERIAL : NP3 / NP2 class pipe and collar shall comply with IS 458.

6.11.3. LAYING : The pipe shall be laid to lines, level and slope as indicated in the drawing. The pipe drain shall

rest on the bed throughout its length. To ensure this the space between under side of the pipe and the invert

of the cradle shall be carefully grouted with cement slurry consisting of one part of cement to three parts of

clean washed sand in a manner to avoid the voids during grouting. The contractor shall take precautions to

see that dirt, earth or other foreign matter is not allowed on the surface of the cradle or of the pipe resting

there on.

No pipe shall be laid / placed / jointed till the alignment of the pipe drain and its levels and gradient have

been carefully checked and found correct.

6.11.4. CONCRETE CRADLE : The cradle of concrete shall be allowed to set at least for three days before any

pipe is placed on it and the contractor shall take due care in setting the pipe on the cradle so that no

damage to the cradle shall occur. If any damage to the cradle occur, it shall be remade or rectified. In case

the damage to the cradle is beyond repair, contractor shall cut out the damaged section of the cradle and

replace the same at his own cost to the complete satisfaction of the E-in-Ch.

6.11.5. JOINTING : The joints of pipe shall be made by loose collars and the connecting space shall be as

minimum as possible. The collars shall be specially roughened inside to provide a better grip. The two

adjacent pipe ends will be so designed and manufactured that when butted together concentrically, a dowel

shall be left between the two ends. In this dowel, Cement mortar of 1:1 proportion or as specified in the




schedule shall be filled. The remaining space between the pipe ends and the collar shall then be caulked

with cement mortar 1:1 alround the external diameter of the pipes. Every joint shall be finished off smooth at

an angle of 45 degree with the longitudinal axis of the pipe of the collars.

6.11.6. CLEANING : The interior of the pipe drains shall be cleaned off from all dirt, cement mortar & superfluous

materials.

6.11.7. TESTING : The joints of R.C.C. spun pipe line shall be tested for 1.80 meter water head over the crown of

the highest pipe between the two manholes. The lower end shall be plugged water tight. Water shall than be

filled in the manhole at the upper end of the line with 1800 mm depth of water over the crown.

The test shall be for an hour or longer as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. If the water level does not fall

more than 12 mm in a length of 92 mtr. The test may be considered satisfactory. If it is found that certain

pipe joints are leaking, the water shall be drained off and joints shall be remade/recaulked.


shall be embedded in cement concrete if specified to the extent of one half of external diameter of the pipes

as directed, the concrete being made to slope away towards the sides of the foundation bed, Refilling shall

be done with fine selected materials in layers not exceeding 150mm thick, watered, consolidated and

rammed properly, as specified.


the progress of the work either from rain, seepage or any other cause till completion of the work.


1. RCC Spun pipe with collar, cement mortar 1:2 and spun yarn.




6.11.11. MODE OF MEASUREMENT : The measurement shall be for length in running meter of pipe line laid and

shall be measured along the center line.

6.11.12. MODE OF PAYMENT : The contract rate shall be for unit running meter of pipe line laid. Making the cradles

and encasing the pipe line shall be paid under the relevant item.

6.12. GREASE TRAP CHAMBER :

6.12.1. GENERAL: The item includes provision of brick masonry Grease Trap Chamber of internal size as specified

in schedule of work.

6.12.2. MATERIAL: Concreting, Brick work, plastering etc. shall be as per specifications given in general




specification under section-II.


1. Internal dimensions and depth shall be as specified in the schedule of work.

2. 150 mm thick foundation shall be in 1:4:8 cement concrete and shall have 150 mm offset from outer

surface of brick wall.

3. Brick masonry shall be in cement mortar 1:

4. Brick masonry shall be plastered with 20 mm thick cement mortar 1:3 inside and outside surfaces in two

courses, inside surface finished smooth with neat cement punning.




1. Concreting in foundation, constructing brick masonry and plastering over the brick work.

3. Dewatering the trench or pit if found necessary till completion of work.


6.12.6. MODE OF MEASUREMENT: The measurement shall be for each unit of grease trap chamber of specified

internal size and depth constructed.

6.12.7. MODE OF PAYMENT: The contract rate shall be for each unit of grease trap chamber of specified internal

size.




SECTION - F : IBMS WORK

AUTOMATION SYSTEM

1. SCOPE

Scope of this section comprises the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Building Management System including Building Performance Management.

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF PLANT OPERATION 1.1.1 Central Chilled Water System & Heat Pump System

The following functions shall be carried out by the Building Automation System.

a. Enable and disable each chiller unit through Chiller.

b. Monitor status and lockout conditions of each chilling unit and subsequently give an alarm. c. Monitor the status of each variable frequency inverter upon receiving signal from pump

controller installed in plant room. d. Switch ON/OFF each pump/ chilling unit/ cooling tower to maintain the chilled water load

demand.

e. Sequence each pump/chilling unit/cooling tower, to maintain equal run time.

f. Carry out chilled water temperature reset with respect to chilled water valve position at the AHU‟s.

g. Monitor status of each of the primary chilled water pumps & condenser water pump through a

water differential pressure switch and keep a log of run-time. h. Monitor current drawn thru software integration by each of the chiller compressor and

subsequently give an alarm for abnormal consumption.

i. Monitor the common chilled water supply and return temperatures and monitor the common chilled water return flow.

j. Monitor the chilled water supply temperature at outlet of each Chiller.

k. Monitor the chilled water supply/return temperature of each CHW circuit.




l. Monitor the common condenser water temperature on both supply and return headers m. Monitor the condenser water temperature at the outlet of each chilling machine. n. Monitor the condenser water return temperature at the outlet of each cooling tower and

accordingly vary the speed of CT fans through VFD. o. Monitor the common chilled water supply pressure through a water pressure transmitter.

p. Monitor the chilled water supply & return header pressure on each of the chilled water circuits.

q. Monitor the chilled water flow rate in the bypass circuit through a ultrasonic flow meter.

r. Monitor the Chilled water flow rate in return header in each of the ultrasonic chilled water

circuits.

s. Monitor the outside air temperature and relative humidity.

t. Monitor any item of plant being switched on a manual basis (i.e. an indication/alarm to come on the screen, if any equipment is running in manual mode.

u. Monitor Chiller Panel through Soft integration.

1.1.1.2. Ventilation & Exhaust System HVAC plant room, atrium, gray water plant room, plumbing plant room fans

a. Control Start/Stop of each fan.

b. Indicate any unit running in Manual mode and subsequently give an alarm.

c. Carry out monitoring tripping & subsequently give an alarm.

d. Monitor the running status of each blower fan through a differential pressure switch and keep a

log of the number of hours run 1.1.1.3. Public Toilet Exhaust Fans

a. Control Start/Stop of each fan.

b. Carry out monitoring tripping &subsequently give an alarm.

c. Indicate any unit running in Manual mode and subsequently give an alarm. d. Monitor the running status of each blower fan through a differential pressure switch and

keep a log of the number of hours run.




1.1.1.4. Air Handling Units

a. Program the start/stop of each air handling unit supply fan and carry out the duty cycling

(from AHU panel ). b. Monitor the running status of each blower fan through a differential pressure switch and keep

a log of the number of hours run. c. Monitor primary filter status of each AHU by a pressure differential switch & give an alarm

in case the filter gets choked. d. Monitor the supply air temperature and return air temperature & humidity & give an alarm for a

high/low supply air temperature and humidity. e. Control the chilled water modulating valve to maintain the room conditions.

f. Control the fresh air damper modulation, to maintain the room conditions. Also monitor the fresh

air supply monitoring through air velocity Sensor .

g. Control & monitor the CO2 level of Indoor Air on return side through duct CO2 sensor h. Indicate any unit running in Manual mode.

Heat Recovery Unit:

a. Program the start/stop of each wheel and carry out the duty cycling (from HRW panel).

b. Monitor the running status of each wheel through a HRW panel and keep a log of the number of hours run. Also trip status & manual mode indication will be monitored from potential free contact in HRW panel.

c. Monitor the fresh air & exhaust air VFD enable/disable command through HRW panel. VFD speed & VFD feedback from VFD will be taken through potential free contact from HRW panel.

d. Monitor the running status of each blower fan through a differential pressure switch and keep a log of the number of hours run.

e. Monitor primary filter status of each AHU by a pressure differential switch and Fine filter status of each AHU by a pressure differential transmitter & give an alarm in case the filter gets choked.




f. Pressure monitoring at fresh Air & exhaust air done by Air differential pressure switch & give pressure reading when it starts.

g. Monitor the VFD status at Fresh & Exhaust side will be done through third party integration.

1.1.3 Plumbing Equipment 1.1.3.1 Pumps Equipment

Flushing water pump Rain water pump Transfer pumps for irrigation Hydro pneumatic domestic pump Plumbing Pumps a. Run Status of each pump through a water differential pressure switch and maintain a Log of

run-hours.

b. On/off Status of each pump through the electrical panel.

1.1.3.2. Water Tanks Rain Water tank Fire water tank Flushing water tank Domestic water tank Make up water tank a. Monitor high/low level of tank with the help of level switch for fire tank & level transmitter for other

than fire tank.

b. Monitor hardness value of water being supplied to cooling towers. Also monitor TDS & pH value of water being supplied to Cooling Towers.

1.1.3.3. Sump Pumps

a. Monitor Electrical status of each of the above pumps

b. Monitor high level Alarm Condition for all sumps through level switch.

1.1.3.4 Fire Fighting System

Firefighting pumps (Electrical) Jockey pump




Diesel operated firefighting pump a. Monitor status of each of the above pumps through a water differential pressure switch.

b. Monitor header line pressure through a water pressure transmitter.

1.1.3.5 Hot Water System

a. Monitoring temperature at oulet of hot water mixing tank by immersion temperature sensor.

b. Monitoring temperature at oulet of hot water return line by immersion temperature sensor . c. Monitoring temperature at at inlet of hot water calorifier by immersion temperature sensor.

2. DATA POINT SUMMARY

IO Summary is attached as a separate ANNEXURE

The list and Quantity of data points is indicative only and should not be limited to the points indicated on the

I/O list or control schematics. The contractor should provide a full functional system which will monitor and

control the equipment‟s (as covered in the Equipment schedules and Specifications) to meet the intent of the

design and any data points (hardwired / software) required to do so shall be deemed included.




IIT, MUMBAI INPUT OUTPUT SUMMARY FOR VARIOUS CONTROLS AND MONITORING POINTS

DI = DIGITAL INPUT; AI = ANALOG INPUT; DO = DIGITAL OUTPUT; AO = ANALOG OUTPUT

QTY DATA POINT TYPE FUNCTION

S. NO.

DESCRIPTION DI AI DO

AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

A PLANT ROOM

WATER COOLED CHILLERS (3W+1S)

4

1 CHILLER ENABLE/DISABLE COMMAND

* THROUGH SOFT INTEGRATION

2 CHILLER RUN STATUS


3 CHILLER AUTO/MANUAL OPERATION STATUS


4 CHILLER TRIP OPERATION STATUS

THROUGH SOFT INTEGRATION

5 EXPANSION TANK - PRESSURE MONITORING

1 * WATER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

6 PRESSURE DROP ACROSS POT STRAINER

2 * WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

7 CHW SUPPLY & RETURN HEADRER TEMPERATURE MONITORING

2 * IMMERSION TEMP SENSOR

8 CHW SUPPLY & RETURN HEADRER PRESSURE MONITORING

2 * WATER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

9 FLOW MONITORING AT CHW RETURN HEADRER

1 * ULTRASONIC FLOW METER( DIA: 125MM, FLOW: 360 USGPM)

10 CONDENSER WATER SUPPLY & RETURN HEADRER TEMPERATURE MONITORING


WATER COOLED CHILLER

4

11 CHILLER COOLER VALVE OPEN/CLOSE CONTROL

4 * VALVE+ACTUATOR LIMIT SWITCH AT ACTUATOR

12 CHILLER COOLER VALVE-LIMIT SWITCH - OPEN/CLOSE

4 * LIMIT SWITCH AT ACTUATO





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

STATUS R

13 CHILLER COOLER SUPPLY & RETURN TEMP MONITORING


14 CHILLER CONDENSER VALVE OPEN/CLOSE CONTROL

4 * VALVE+ACTUATOR LIMIT SWITCH AT ACTUATOR

15 CHILLER CONDENSER VALVE-LIMIT SWITCH - OPEN/CLOSE STATUS

4 * LIMIT SWITCH AT ACTUATOR

PRIMARY CHW PUMP (3W + 1S)

4

16 PRIMARY PUMP VFD CONTROL

4 * FROM VFD

17 PRIMARY PUMP VFD FEEDBACK

4 * FROM VFD

18 PRIMARY CHW PUMPS RUN STATUS

4 * WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH

19 PRIMARY CHW PUMP TRIP STATUS

4 * THROUGH SOFT INTEGRATION

20 PRIMARY CHW PUMPS AUTO/

4 * THROUGH SOFT





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

MANUAL STATUS MONITORING

INTEGRATION

VFD INTREGRATION

4 THROUGH SOFT INTEGRATION

CONDENSOR WATER PUMP (2W + 1S)

3

21 CONDENSER WATER PUMP START/STOP COMMAND

3 * FROM PUMP STARTER PANEL

22 CONDENSER WATER PUMP RUN STATUS


23 CONDENSER WATER PUMP AUTO/MANUAL OPERATION STATUS

3 * VOLT FREE CONTACT TO BMS FROM PUMP STARTER PANEL

24 CONDENSOR PUMP TRIP STATUS

3 * AT PUMP PANEL

HEAT PUMP 2

25 HEAT PUMP ENABLE/DISABLE COMMAND


26 HEAT PUMP * THROUG





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

RUN STATUS H SOFT INTEGRATION

27 HEAT PUMP AUTO/MANUAL OPERATION STATUS


28 HEAT PUMP TRIP STATUS


29 HEAT PUMP EVAPORATOR SUPPLY & RETURN HEADER TEMP. MONITORING

2 IMMERSION TEMP SENSOR

30 FLOW MONITORING AT HEAT PUMP SUPPLY HEADER

1 * ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOW METER( DIA: 32MM, FLOW: 15 USGPM)

PHE 2

31 PHE SUPPLY & RETURN HEADER TEMP. MONITORING AT IN & OUT


PRIMARY HEAT PUMP (1W + 1S)

2

32 PRIMARY HEAT PUMP VFD CONTROL

2 * FROM VFD





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

33 PRIMARY HEAT PUMP VFD FEEDBACK

2 * FROM VFD

34 PRIMARY HEATPUMPS RUN STATUS


35 PRIMARY HEAT PUMP TRIP STATUS


36 PRIMARY HEAT PUMPS AUTO/ MANUAL STATUS MONITORING


37 HEAT PUMP TEMP. MONITORING AT SUPPLY & RETURN HEADER


38 VFD INTREGRATION

2 THROUGH SOFT INTEGRATION

SECONDARY PUMP FOR HEAT PUMP (1W + 1S)

2

39 SECONDARY HEAT PUMPS START /STOP COMMAND

2 FROM PUMP STARTER PANEL

40 SECONDARY HEATPUMPS

2 WATER DIFFERE





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

RUN STATUS NTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH

41 SECONDARY HEAT PUMP TRIP STATUS

2 POTENTIAL FREE CONTACT

42 SECONDARY HEAT PUMPS AUTO/ MANUAL STATUS MONITORING


HOT WATER TANK PUMP FOR HEAT PUMP (1W + 1S)

2

43 TERTIARY HEAT PUMPS START /STOP COMMAND


44 TERTIARY HEATPUMPS RUN STATUS

2 WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH

45 TERTIARY HEAT PUMP TRIP STATUS


46 TERTIARY HEAT PUMPS AUTO/ MANUAL STATUS MONITORING


HOT WATER MIXING TANK





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

47 SOLAR INLET TEMP. MONITORING AT HEADER


48 TEMP. MONITORING AT HOT WATER MIXING TANK -1 AT OUTLET

1 1 IMMERSION TEMP SENSOR

49 TEMP. MONITORING AT HOT WATER MIXING TANK -2 AT OUTLET

1 1 IMMERSION TEMP SENSOR

50 SOLAR VALVE STATUS & CONTROL

1 1 VALVE + ACTUATOR

RETURN CIRCULATION PUMP ( 1W+1S)

2

51 RETURN CIRCULATION PUMPS START /STOP COMMAND


52 RETURN CIRCULATION PUMPS RUN STATUS

2 WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH

53 RETURN CIRCULATION PUMP TRIP STATUS


54 RETURN CIRCULATION PUMPS AUTO/

2 POTENTIAL FREE CONTAC





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

MANUAL STATUS MONITORING

T

55 RETURN LINE SUPPLY HEADER TEMP. MONITORING


56 TEMP. MONITORING AT COLD WATER MACKUP HEADER


IO POINT FOR PLANT ROOM

54 38 18 6

B COOLING TOWER (2W+1S)

3

1 CT START/STOP COMMAND

3 3 * VOLT FREE CONATCT TO BMS FROM VFD PANEL

2 CT RUN STATUS 3 3 * POTENTIAL FREE CONTACT FROM PANEL

3 CT AUTO/MANUAL STATUS

3 3 * VOLT FREE CONATCT TO BMS FROM COOLING TOWER PANEL





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

BY HVAC CONTRACTOR

4 CT VALVE- OPEN/CLOSE COMMAND

3 3 * VALVE + ACTUATOR LIMIT SWITCH AT ACTUATOR

5 CT VALVE -LIMIT SWITCH - OPEN/CLOSE STATUS

3 3 * LIMIT SWITCH AT ACTUATOR

CT WITH VFD 3

6 CT LOW WATER ALARM INDICATOR

3 * LEVEL SWITCH

7 CT OVER FLOW ALARM INDICATOR

3 * LEVEL SWITCH

8 CT WATER - PH 1 * PH METER

9 CT WATER - TDS

1 * TDS METER

10 CT WATER HARDNESS

1 WATER HARDNESS ANALYZER

11 OUTSIDE AIR TEMP. & HUMIDITY MONITORING

1 * OUTSIDE AIR TEMP + RH SENSOR

12 COOLING 1 IMMERSI





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

TOWER SUPPLY HEADER TEMP SENSOR

ON TEMP SENSOR

IO POINT FOR COOLING TOWER

15 5 6 0

C RECIRCULATION TYPE AIR HANDLING UNIT WITH

6

1 AHU VFD ENABLE/DISABLE COMMAND

6 * COMMAND IN VFD FROM BMS

2 AHU VFD SPEED CONTROL

6 * AT VFD

3 AHU VFD FEED BACK

6 * AT VFD

4 AHU BLOWER RUN STATUS

6 * AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH

5 AHU AUTO/MANUAL STATUS

6 * FROM AUTO /MANUAL SWITCH

6 AHU TRIP STATUS

6 * FROM AHU PANEL

7 AHU PRIMARY FILTER STATUS

6 * AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSU





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

RE SWITCH

8 SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE

6 * DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

9 AHU RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE & RH

12 * DUCT TEMPERATURE & RH SENSOR

10 CHW VALVE MODULATION AND FEEDBACK

6 6 * * VALVE + ACTUATOR

11 FRESH AIR DAMPER MODULATION AND FEEDBACK

6 6 * * MODULATING DAMPER + ACTUATOR

12 FRESH AIR SUPPLY AIR FLOW MONITORING

6 * AIR VELOCITY SENSOR

13 INDOOR AIR CO2 MONITOR ON RETURN SIDE

6 * DUCT CO2 SENSOR

IO POINT FOR RECIRCULATION TYPE AIR HANDLING UNIT

24 48 6 18

D HEAT RECOVERY UNIT

2

WHEEL

1 WHEEL 2 * PFC





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

START/STOP COMMAND

FROM HRW PANEL

2 WHEEL RUN STATUS

2 * PFC FROM HRW PANEL

3 WHEEL TRIP STATUS

2 * PFC FROM FAN HRV PANEL

4 WHEEL AUTO/MANUAL STATUS

2 * FROM AUTO / MANUAL SWITCH

FRESH AIR FAN

5 FA VFD ENABLE/DISABLE COMMAND

2 * PFC FROM HRW PANEL

6 FA VFD SPEED CONTROL

2 * PFC FROM VFD PANEL

7 FAVFD SPEED FEEDBACK


8 FA BLOWER STATUS

2 AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH

9 FA AIR SUPPLY TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY

4 * DUCT TEMPERATURE &





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

RH SENSOR

10 FA FAN RUN STATUS

2 * PFC FROM FA STARTER PANEL

11 FA AUTO/ MANUAL STATUS

2 * FROM AUTO / MANUAL HRW PANEL

12 FA TRIP STATUS 2 * PFC FROM HRV PANEL

13 AIR PRESSURE MONITORING OF FA

2 * AIR PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

14 AHU PRE FILTER STATUS


15 AHU FINE FILTER STATUS


EXHAUST AIR FAN

16 EXH VFD DISABLE/ENABL

2 * PFC FROM





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

E COMMAND EXH STR PANEL

17 EXH VFD SPEED CONTROL


18 EXH VFD SPEED FEEDBACK


19 EXH BLOWER STATUS


20 EXH AIR RETURN TEMPERATURE & HUMIDITY

4 * DUCT TEMPERATURE & RH SENSOR

21 EXH FAN RUN STATUS

2 * PFC FROM FA STARTER PANEL

22 EXH AUTO/ MANUAL OPERATION STATUS

2 * FROM AUTO / MANUAL HRW PANEL

23 EXH TRIP STATUS

2 * PFC FROM HRV PANEL

24 AIR PRESSURE MONITORING OF EXH AIR

2 * AIR PRESSURE TRANSMI





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

TTER

25 FRESH & EXHAUST VFD

4 TWO WAY DIRECT INTEGRATION THROUGH MODBUS RTU / BACNET

IO FOR HEAT RECOVERY UNIT

26 16 6 4

E TREATED FRESH AIR

13

1 TFA START/STOP COMMAND

13 * AT FAN PANEL

2 TFA BLOWER RUN STATUS


3 TFA AUTO/ MANUAL STATUS


4 TFA TRIP STATUS

13 * AT FAN PANEL

5 TFA SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE

13 DUCT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

6 CHW VALVE MODULATION &

13 13 CHW CONTRO





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

FEEDBACK L VALVE + ACTUATOR

7 TFA PRIMARY FILTER STATUS

13 AIR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH

IO POINT FOR TFA

52 26 13 13

F TOILET EXHUAST FAN

8

1 FAN START/STOP COMMAND

8 * AT FAN MCC PANEL

2 FAN RUN STATUS


3 FAN AUTO/ MANUAL STATUS


4 FAN TRIP STATUS


IO POINT FOR TOILET EXHUAST FAN

24 0 8 0

G HVAC PLANT ROOM, ATRIUM,GRAY

5





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

WATER PLAMT ROOM , PLUMBING PLANT ROOM (FA+EX.)

1 FAN START/STOP COMMAND


2 FAN RUN STATUS


3 FAN AUTO/ MANUAL STATUS


4 FAN TRIP STATUS


IO POINT FOR SMOKE SPOIL FAN

15 0 5 0

H THIRD PARTY INTEGRATION

1 FIRE ALARM PANEL

1 LOT

TWO WAY DIRECT INTEGRATION RS 485 THROUGH MODBUS RTU / BACNET /LONWOR

2 VFD 15

3 CHILLER PANEL ( 4NOS.)

4

4 Heat Pump Chillers (2 Nos.)

2





S. NO.


AO

STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

MONITOR

FIELD DEVICE

KS OR ANY OPEN PROTOCOL

TOTAL IO POINTS 210 133 62 41




PLUMBING SYSTEM

S. NO.

DESCRIPTION QTY. DATA POINT TYPE FUNCTION FIELD DEVICE

DI AI DO AO STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

TREND

A OVERHEAD TANK

1 OVERHEAD FIRE WATER TANK HI/LOW LEVEL OF TANK MONITORING

1 1 LEVEL SWITCH

2 OVERHEAD DOMESTIC WATER TANK HI/LOW LEVEL OF TANK MONITORING

1 1 LEVEL TRANSMITTER

3 OVERHEAD FLUSHING WATER TANK HI/LOW LEVEL OF TANK MONITORING


4 OVERHEAD MAKE UP WATER TANK HI/LOW LEVEL OF TANK MONITORING


IO OF WATER TANKS & PUMPS

1 3 0 0

B UNDERGROUND TANK

1 RAIN WATER TANK LEVEL MONITORING


2 FIRE WATER TANK LEVEL

2 2 LEVEL SWITCH




S. NO.


DI AI DO AO STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

TREND

MONITORING

3 DOMESTIC WATER TANK LEVEL MONITORING


4 FLUSHING WATER TANK LEVEL MONITORING


IO OF UNDERGROUND TANK

2 5 0 0

C PUMPS

1 TRANSFER PUMP FOR IRRIGATION WATER RUN STATUS (1W+1S)

2 2 WATER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH

2 RAIN WATER FILTERATION PUMP RUN STATUS (1W+1S)


3 TRANSFER PUMP FOR FLUSHING WATER RUN STATUS (1W+1S)


4 TRANSFER PUMP FOR DOMESTIC WATER RUN STATUS (1W+1S)


5 HYDROPNEUMATIC DOMESTIC PUMP AT TERRACE LEVEL RUN STATUS (1W+1S)





S. NO.


DI AI DO AO STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

TREND

IO OF WATER TANKS & PUMPS

10 0 0 0

D FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

1 SPRINKLER PUMP RUN STATUS


2 SPRINKLER JOCKEY PUMP RUN STATUS

1 1 THROUGH PANEL

3 FIRE HYDRANT PUMP RUN STATUS


4 FIRE HYDRANT JOCKEY PUMP RUN STATUS


5 DIESEL FIRE PUMP RUN STATUS


6 FIRE HYDRANT & SPRINKLER LINE PRESSURE MONITORING

1 1 WATER PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

IO OF FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM

5 1 0 0

E THIRD PARTY INTEGRATION

1 STP 1 TWO WAY DIRECT INTEGRATION THROUGH MODBUS RTU / BACNET /LONWORKS OR ANY

2 WTP 1




S. NO.


DI AI DO AO STATUS

ALARM

CONTROL

TREND

OPEN PROTOCOL

IO OF PLUMBING SYSTEM

18 9 0 0




3. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The proposed system shall be a Direct Distributed Digital Control (DDC) system. It shall be a PC based system with web based operator interface and shall combine latest state of the art technology with simple operating techniques. The System will consist of flat open architecture that utilizes LON Talk / BACnet/ Modbus protocol between all controlled and controlling devices. The controllers shall have resident real time clock, peer to peer communication and min 16 / 32 bit processor. The features shall be distributed both physically and functionally over the field controllers. A web server with a network interface card shall gather data from this system and generate web pages accessible through a conventional web browser on each PC connected to the network. Also operators shall be able to perform all normal operator functions through the web browser interface.

System shall use the BACnet / LonWorks / Modbus protocol for communication to the operator workstation or web server and for communication between control modules. I/O points, schedules, set points, trends, and alarms specified in “Sequence of Operations” shall be BACnet objects.

Performance Standards. System shall conform to the following minimum standards over network connections. Systems shall be tested using manufacturer's recommended hardware and software for operator workstation (server and browser for web-based systems).

i. Graphic Display. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall display with current data within 10 sec.

ii. Graphic Refresh. A graphic with 20 dynamic points shall update with current data within 8 sec. and shall automatically refresh every 15 sec.

iii. Configuration and Tuning Screens. Screens used for configuring, calibrating, or tuning points, PID loops, and similar control logic shall automatically refresh within 6 sec.

iv. Object Command. Devices shall react to command of a binary object within 2 sec. Devices shall begin reacting to command of an analog object within 2 sec.

v. Alarm Response Time. An object that goes into alarm shall be annunciated at the workstation within 15 sec.

vi. Program Execution Frequency. Custom and standard applications shall be capable of running as often as once every 5 sec. Select execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.

vii. Performance. Programmable controllers shall be able to completely execute DDC PID control loops at a frequency adjustable down to once per sec. Select execution times consistent with the mechanical process under control.




viii. Multiple Alarm Annunciations. Each workstation on the network shall receive alarms within 5 sec of other workstations.

ix. Reporting Accuracy. System shall report values with minimum end-to-end accuracy, Control Stability and Accuracy. Control loops shall maintain measured variable at set point within tolerances.

x. Energy Management through optimization of all connected electrical and mechanical plants.

xi. Prevention of unauthorized or unwanted access.

xii. Suggestive preventive maintenance for all equipment as well as own error diagnosis.

xiii. Building Performance Management

xiv. Optimum support of personnel.

xv. Data Visualization Tool

All DDC controllers shall be connected via an industry standard communication Bus. Communication between controllers shall be such that, controllers can communicate between themselves without having to first communicated with the control station. The communication between the different buses shall be through the system integration units or routers rather than through the control stations. All the system integration units shall be placed on a Local Area Network (Industry standard open back bone like Ethernet / BACnet / Lonworks/ Modbus etc.). The speed of communication desired between DDC controllers shall be exceeding 9.6 kbps and on Local Area Network shall be 10 mbps. No proprietary LAN shall be allowed.

Communication Control products, communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers shall comprise a Ethernet / BACnet / Lonworks/ Modbus etc. internet work. Controller and operator interface communication shall conform to ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004, BACnet.

Install new wiring and network devices as required to provide a complete and workable control network. Each controller shall have a communication port for temporary connection to a laptop computer or other operator interface. Connection shall support memory downloads and other commissioning and troubleshooting operations.

Internetwork operator interface and value passing shall be transparent to internetwork architecture.

i. An operator interface connected to a controller shall allow the operator to interface with each internetwork controller as if directly connected. Controller information such as data, status, and control algorithms shall be viewable and editable from each internetwork controller.




ii. Inputs, outputs, and control variables used to integrate control strategies across multiple controllers shall be readable by each controller on the internetwork. Program and test all cross-controller links required to execute control strategies. An authorized operator shall be able to edit cross-controller links by typing a standard object address or by using a point-and-click interface.

Controllers with real-time clocks shall use the Ethernet / BACnet / Lonworks/ Modbus etc. Time Synchronization service. System shall automatically synchronize system clocks daily from an operator-designated controller via the internetwork. If applicable, system shall automatically adjust for daylight saving and standard time.

System shall be expandable to at least twice the required input and output objects with additional controllers, associated devices, and wiring.

System shall support Web services data exchange with any other system that complies with XML (extensible markup language) and SOAP (simple object access protocol) standards specified by the Web Services Interoperability Organization (WS-I) Basic Profile 1.0 or higher. Web services support shall as a minimum be provided at the workstation or web server level and shall enable data to be read from or written to the system.

i. System shall support Web services read data requests by retrieving requested trend data or

point values (I/O hardware points, analog value software points, or binary value software points) from any system controller or from the trend history database.

ii. System shall support Web services write data request to each analog and binary object that can be edited through the system operator interface by downloading a numeric value to the specified object.

iii. For read or write requests, the system shall require user name and password authentication and shall support SSL (Secure Socket Layer) or equivalent data encryption.

System shall support discovery through a Web services connection or shall provide a tool available through the Operator Interface that will reveal the path/identifier needed to allow a third party Web services device to read data from or write data to any object in the system which supports this service.

Each stand-alone intelligent outstation shall control a maximum of two Air Handling Units and shall be located adjacent to the air handling unit. These shall also control any other operations on the floor and shall be sized to suit the operation center‟s requirement. This shall help in reducing the site electrical installation. The number of controllers for central plant room equipment‟s shall be decided by the contractor with a maximum capacity limited to 48 points per controller. Overall, the system shall be provided with 15% spare capacity, with spare of at least 15% points on each controller. Also, in case of HVAC system, each controller shall control maximum one chiller and associated chilled water pump. There shall be one control station located in Chief Engineer Room. The computer shall be sized to cover the graphic display memory and planning information. The display shall be in the form of dynamic colour graphics and text format with menu driven pop-up windows and help facility.




The following software packages shall be loaded into the system as minimum standard :-

a. Complete system operational software

b. Site specific data manipulation software

c. Active graphics software

d. Energy management system software

e. Alarm indication software

f. Maintenance package (schedule to be developed with Estate Manager ).

g. Data Visualization Package

h. Internet Enabled Remote Monitoring Package.

All Web server or workstation and DDC controllers shall communicate using Ethernet / BACnet / Lonworks/ Modbus etc. protocol. Web server or workstation and control network backbone shall communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and Ethernet / BACnet / Lonworks/ Modbus etc./IP addressing as specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, Ethernet / BACnet / Lonworks/ Modbus etc.. Communication between controllers shall be such that, controllers can communicate between themselves without having to first communicate with the control station. Each Building Controller shall reside on or be connected to a Ethernet / BACnet / Lonworks/ Modbus etc. network using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol and Ethernet / BACnet / Lonworks/ Modbus etc./IP addressing. Ethernet / BACnet / Lonworks/ Modbus etc. routing shall be performed by BCs or other Ethernet / BACnet / Lonworks/ Modbus etc. device routers as necessary to connect BCs to networks of Advanced Application Controllers and Application Specific Controllers.

Each AAC shall reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol with BACnet/IP addressing, or it shall reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

Each ASC shall reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

Each SA shall reside on a BACnet network using the ARCNET or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

Each SS shall reside on a BACnet network using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) Data Link/Physical layer protocol with BACnet/IP addressing, or it shall reside on a BACnet network using ARCNET or MS/TP Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

In case of Hot redundant Central Operating Workstation on a peer Bacnet / IP with mirroring function, second operator workstation would have interoperable feature i.e. incase set points, logic, password are changed in the second Operator Work Station (OWS) the same would get updated automatically and instantaneously in the other OWS.




4. CENTRAL STATIONS HARDWARE

The Control stations shall comprise of Personal computers (PC) providing high level operator interface with the system . The terminals shall be capable of providing the operator with the facility for remote system interrogation, control, retrieval/storage of logged data, annunciation of alarms and reports, analysis of recorded data and the formatting of management reports.

The control station shall consist of the following hardware with all of them suitable for the power supply voltage of 230 V AC ± 10% , 50 HZ + 3%. a) Minimum Specifications for Workstations

FEATURES DESCRIPTION

Processor Intel Dual Core or latest configuration Processor 3.2 GHz with EM 64 Technology

Memory 4 GB (2 x 512 mb) dual channel DDR3 2MB memory, Up to 8 GB Max. memory expandable through four DIMM slots

Cache (External) 2 x 2 MB L2 Cache

ROM 512 MB Flash ROM, Can be upgraded from a diskette

Expansion Bus 1 no Parallel Port, 2nos PCI Express (x1), 4nos 32 bit PCI slots, 33 MHz PCI 2.2 slots, 1-graphics slot

Graphic Accelerator N-vidia Quadra FX 4400(DVI/VGA)with 512 MB Memory with dual monitor capable graphics card

Hard Disk 2 TB SATA hard disk 6G (7200 rpm)

Power Supply 375 W switchable/50 Hz with dual power supply provisions

Keyboard Cordless 104 keys window 98 keyboard, PS/2 Compatible

Operating System Supports Windows XP/ Windows 8 64, OS/2 Warp, Windows NT, DOS 6.22 Latest but compatible to Software

Software Windows Professional and Windows 2000, Microsoft Internet Explorer

Power Management EPA compliant

Desktop Manager Based on SNMP protocol

Antivirus Software PC-Cillin or latest equivalent pre-loaded

Diagnostic Software PAQ 95 or latest equivalent pre-loaded

Network Broad cam Gigabit Ethernet adapter Network Interface Card with wake on LAN support




Interfaces 1 parallel, 8 USB 2.0, 1 serial, 2 Ultra ATA/100,2 optional IEEE1394, 1 PS/2 Keyboard, 1 PS/2 Mouse, 1 video, 1 Microphone jack, 1 Line-in jack, 1 RJ-45, 1 Headphone jack & 1 line-out jack (analog/SPDIF digital

Audio Card Integrated AC 97/16 bit Stereo full-duplex and integrated speaker

Mouse Cordless Mouse

Monitor Monitors shall be with a minimum 19 inch color TFT flat panel display.

CD DVD Writer DVD/CD-RW Combo Drive with speakers

Printer Laser Jet 20 ppm, A3 paper size.

b) Key board : The central station shall be complete with detached 101-keys keyboard

which includes full upper/lower case ASCII key set, a numeric pad, dedicated cursor control pad, and a minimum of 10 programmable functional keys.

c) Colour Monitor : The colour TFT screen shall be with a minimum 19 inch diagonal

no glare screen and minimum Super VGA resolution of 1024 pixels horizontal, 768 lines vertical and minimum 16 base colors. The monitor shall be with tilt and swivel facilities.

d) Mouse (Optical): For keyboard less operation, in addition to the enhanced keyboard, a

mouse shall also be provided as an alternative user interface for day to day system operation. 2 Nos. mouse pads shall be provided for each mouse.

e) Printers: The contractor shall provide printers as specified in the schematic diagram for

printing alarms, operator transactions and reports.

The printer shall be configuring for alarm printing reports, trend log, summary, total

logging, recording alarms and providing system reports etc.

f) The available PCI slots on the PC shall be used only for communication cards and shall

not be utilized for mounting protocol converter cards. If protocol converter cards are used, they shall be external to PC and separately powered and backed-up by the UPS supply.

g) Ethernet Card, one 56.6 K Band external/internal modem for remote access to system

via telephone dial up shall also be provided. h) Due to the nature of rapid change in manufacturer specifications and BMS software

operating system requirements, contractor shall submit at the time of bid and the time of engineering submittal a detailed workstation hardware and software specification sheet clearly indicating deviation from the specification.




i) Provide an integral audio tone generator to activate on detection of an alarm. Audio tone shall be capable of being enabled or disabled on operator command.

j) Provide software and hardware as required to make the system internet accessible via

web browser. Include firewall software to prevent unauthorized access.

5. CENTRAL STATION SOFTWARE

5.1 USER PROGRAMMABLE SOFTWARE

The system shall have a flexible software package to allow an operator with minimal knowledge of software programming to construct programs for plant control and management information. The BAS contractor shall provide system software based on a server/thin-client architecture, designed around the open standards of web technology. All system software shall be field proven. The BAS server shall communicate using ASHRAE‟s BACnet/IP protocol, and in addition, offer concurrent support over the same data-link of the following protocols: LonWorks, MODBUS, and SNMP. Server shall be accessed using a web browser over intranet and remotely over the Internet. Tenders shall not quote for an untested and unproven software. The intent of the thin-client architecture is to provide the operator(s) complete access to the BAS system via a web browser. The BAS server software must support at least the following server platforms (Windows NT, Sun Solaris and Linux). The BAS server software shall be developed and tested by the manufacturer of the system standalone controllers and network controllers/routers. Third party manufactured and developed BAS software is not acceptable.

1) All programming shall be done in clear English language. 2) The system shall hold a complete set of instructions in the software which can be

viewed by the operator whilst in the operating mode.

3) The system shall provide run simulation of the programs to allow operator verification before the program is down loaded to the controllers.

4) It shall be possible to assign alarm functions to any programs created as required. 5) Full arithmetic operators shall be available for use in the programs as required eg: +,

-, /, *, (). 6) Programs shall permit the use of comparison statements such as : =, >, <, =< etc. 7) Programs shall permit logical operators to be used such as : NOT, AND, OR, AND

MASK.




8) Direct reference to any point shall be available to obtain its current value. Such references shall be using standard language such as, ON, OFF, MANUAL, SETPOINT, EXPIRED TIME, PRIORITY, ALARM.

9) It shall be possible to refer to time and calendar functions directly, so that DATE,

TIME, HOUR, MINUTE functions may be used.

10) It shall be possible to use such mnemonics as ABS (absolute value), SQRT (square root), INT (integer), MAX (maximum), AVG (average) etc.

11) It shall be possible to set timers so that a timed delay may be introduced before an

action is carried out. 12) In short it should have Trending, Scheduling, Dynamic Graphics, Tree Navigation,

Setpoint, Operator Configuration, Global Commands Execution & Parameters Properties as minimum features.

Following Software shall be provided besides the software for automation system : Memory Manager - QEMM Version 5.11 (or higher) Multitasking - Desk view version 2.31 (or higher) Mouse Driver - Microsoft bus mouse 6.2

Data Base Manager - Latest Version BAS Server Database

The BAS server software shall utilize a Java Data Base Connectivity (JDBC) compatible database such as: MS Access, MS SQL 8.0, Oracle 8i or IBM DB2. BAS systems written to Nonstandard and/or Proprietary databases are NOT acceptable.

Database Open Connectivity

The BAS server database shall be Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) compatible, allowing real time access of data via the following standard mechanisms:

Open protocol standard like CORBA or SOAP

OLE/OPC (for Microsoft Client‟s/Server platform only)

Import/Export of the database from or to XML (extensible Mark-up Language)

Windows - Latest Version

Maintenance Manager - Latest version with details to be submitted along with tender.

Lighting Management - For time schedule & occupancy interface.




Management station software shall also be provided all the functions to manage application

software packages within a Preemptive Multitasking environment.

Third Party Integrations: The software shall be open architecture & support based for industry standard integrations with third party mechanical & electrical sub-systems. The same shall be capable to support multiple protocols over a TCP/IP Network allowing many equipment items to be connected directly to the main backbone IT protocol The software using BACnet® shall be connected to an IP, ARCNET, MS/TP, or Point to Point (PTP) network segment. The system shall allows for seamless interconnection to equipment using BACnet, Modbus or LonWorks, as well as an extensive list of proprietary protocols. The required all hardware accessories including cabling ( communication/signal & power) from the integrator / convertor to each equipment for the above integration shall be included in the scope of IBMS vendor .

The software shall mainly cover the following third party integrations:

o Chiller Integration o VFD‟s/FAS/Hot Water System /Programmable logic controller o STP/WTP.

The above Utility systems shall be incorporated for options such as alarming, automatic demand

reduction and utility bills. It shall have control everything from mission critical cooling to

emergency back-up generators. Special function like unique schedule for a group of rooms shall

be provided. Feature like “holiday” schedule to save energy in different space of the building.

The request based feature like For example, if the one of the department is going to work on Saturday and needs air conditioning in the main conference room, the software shall have the feature of occupation schedule for in the real time calendar, and the system shall do the rest. When the rooms need cooling, they will send a request to the air handler telling it to start. If the air handler in turn needs cold water from a chiller, it will send a request to the chiller. With request-based applications, the equipment shall be controlled by the customer‟s schedule, rather than forcing the customer to adapt to the equipment‟s schedule.

The system shall have energy management applications, providing features like learning adaptive optimal start, trim and respond, and demand-based setpoint adjustment which automatically fine tune the system to run at peak efficiency. It shall have networking, trending, alarming, and reporting capabilities.

Communication Protocol(s)

The native protocol for the BAS server software shall be BACnet over Ethernet DataLink as defined by ASHRAE standard SPC135. The BAS Server shall support BACnet/IP Annex J to enable communication through common routers. Proprietary protocols over TCP/IP are NOT acceptable. In addition, the software shall be able to support concurrent operation of multiple standard and non-standard protocols such as:




SMNP

LonWorks over IP*

* IMPORTANT NOTE: LonMark or LonWorks devices must be networked from LonTalk to an Ethernet Datalink and IP data structure, using a LonTalk to IP Router like an i1000 Echelon Router. Binding of all LON devices including Domain, Subnet, Node ID, and the SNVT‟s structure, in addition to configuration of all network variables for IP tunneling shall be the responsibility of the LON device supplier. ALL I/O points listed in the I/O Point Summary shall be configured through the i1000 LON/IP router(s). A copy of Echelon‟s proprietary LNS Services and LON Manager shall be supplied at no cost to usby the supplier of the LON devices.

The following user programs must be processed by the Control Station

i. Operating functions:

Via graphic management schematics with dynamic display of actual status information.

Manual control of parameters and status variables of the electrical and mechanical plant.

Manual switch of programs which are not part of progress routines.

ii. Monitoring functions:

automatic monitoring of connected plant and equipment

automatic monitoring of the system (idle or operation)

iii. Data Visualization functions:

Individual processing of operating data for Building Management.

comfort chart data for temperature / humidity using psychrometric charts

iv. In standardized form for :

trend reports(Historical)

consumer statistics

fault statistics

maintenance management

v. Display functions :

for the representation and display of operating data and management information in alphanumeric and graphic form.

vi. Management functions :

for optimization of energy consumption.

for rational use of personnel

vii. Access control functions :

different operating levels for all information and all data by way of code word or user key.




viii. Commissioning functions:

for system specific software of the field stations and the management system

downloading the system specific software to the DDC units.

testing of the software in connection with electrical and mechanical plant.

automatic and periodic storage of all system data.

ix. Test functions :

automatic and continuously running test functions for system tests (hardware and operating software) and management system configuration (communication)test tools for individual hardware and software components which can be activated manually.

Self test functions for individual system components which can be activated manually.

5.2 OPERATOR INTERFACE

All communications between the operator and the system shall be in clear language, without reference to special code or codes. Generation and editing of software shall be via clear English language menus. The purposed software shall be capable to forfeit the requirement of integrated maintenance management solution. Web based data management software & its application pays a critical part providing a single repository for all assets. This repository is necessary to go from preventive to predictive and proactive maintenance programs Lifetime maintenance and parts costs can be stored with the asset database, and repair or replace decisions become a financial analysis. The system should self-diagnostic e.g. enthalpy control, energy recovery lops. With the below specified feature / requirements this software shall be deemed to act in a way to provide the information in “predictive & preventive maintenance.” The Thin Client web browser GUI shall provide a comprehensive user interface. Using a collection of web pages, it shall be constructed to “feel” like a single application, and provide a complete and intuitive mouse/menu driven operator interface. It shall be possible to navigate through the system using a web browser to accomplish 2.2 B thru 2.2 J of this specification. The Web Browser GUI shall (as a minimum) provide a Navigation Pane for navigation, and a Action Pane for display of animated graphics, schedules, alarms/events, live graphic programs, active graphic setpoint controls, configuration menus for operator access, reports, and reporting actions for events.

5.3 PASSWORD ACCESS

1) None of the features of the Operators Panel shall be accessible without the user first being required to log on by entering a password.

2) Alpha numeric passwords of up to 15 characters shall be available and definable by

individual operators. 3) It shall be possible to grant or deny access to any terminal and/or functions for individual

user. The ability to use this feature itself shall also be definable.




4) It shall also be possible to grant or deny access to individual points or groups of points by function or type.

5) It shall also be possible to define a timeout value for individual user. Automatic log-off

of the operator shall occur if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected during this timeout period. It shall also be possible to allocate an infinite timeout.

6) A log of atleast previous 100 users shall be available at each control station. A record of the user‟s name, the time and date of log ON and log OFF shall be available from this file.

7) Password summary shall be available to the operators with the highest level of access.

The summary shall display all passwords and their associated parameters. 8) Password data base shall be stored in multiple locations in an encrypted form so that the

failure of any one device shall not make the system inoperative. 5.4 CONTROL STATION GRAPHICS CAPABILITIES

The work stations shall have Graphics as the basis of operation. Animated .gif‟s or .jpg, active setpoint graphic controls shall be used to enhance usability. Graphics tools used to create Web Browser graphics shall be non-proprietary The software shall have following advanced techniques for ease of operation : 1) Colour banding of screen displays shall be provided for display and differentiation

of normal and abnormal signals. This shall allow operator instant recognition and response to critical building operation.

2) To provide instantaneous confirmation to system operator of equipment status,

graphic screen animation shall be provided. This shall allow full color animated displays of equipment in site layouts, building floor plans, and other system configurations. All graphic displays shall be online programmable via keyboard or mouse selection of graphic library stored symbols and system profiles. Fully implemented graphic displays are to be provided for all systems so identified in the Input/ Output Summary section of this document.

3) Split screens capability shall be provided to allow operator to observe multiple

dynamic graphic screens at the same time to enable operator to manage several separate building operation tasks concurrently.

4) To enable operator to “find” his way in and out of the system, a stacked display of

windows shall be included to provide orderly reference. Operator option of enlarged full screen display at any penetration level shall also be included.




5) Alarm class differentiation shall define coloration, and storage requirements for different alarms.

6) Graphic driven point identification and selection shall be provided to allow operator to

select a point by “clicking on” the graphic symbol representing the point type. Consequently display will appear to enable the operator to select the desired command.

7) The system shall be capable of running programs in both the foreground mode and

background mode simultaneously. The system running only foreground “window” while keeping the other programs dormant in the background “window” shall not be acceptable as this slows down the availability of control and essential information to be made available to the operator in the system.

8) Capability of on-line graphics generation shall be a major requirement i.e. the

operator shall have the ability to create new graphics on-site from a menu of symbols.

9) Historical system trouble, fault, false alarms shall be stored on line in the hard disk for

trouble analysis.

10) It shall be possible to define upto 12 functional categories in the plant schematic each of which shall be removable from the screen individually. This shall allow the operator to delete temporarily any equipment and have a better overview of the other sections of the system.

11) Maintenance software such as inventory control, work orders shall also be on-line

with the historical data- file for proper maintenance of the system.

12) Data Base Manager shall manage all data on an integrated and non-redundant basis. It shall allow addition and deletions to the data base without any detriment to the existing data. Cross linkages shall be provided such that no data required by a software program can be deleted by the operator until that data has been deleted from its respective programs.

13) Dynamic data such as temperature and humidity values, fans and motor status, alarm

point condition, etc. shall be embedded in the graphics as the sensing location. Points in alarm condition shall be animated by colour changes and flashing/blinking icon, symbol, or value.

14) Command points shall be uniquely identified by colour and/or discrete symbol and

shall be directly addressable and commandfrom the graphic display. It shall not be necessary for an operator to type in command request or point names. Direct entry of command point address or positioning of the cursor to the point shall cause a display of associated command states for digitals, the set point value and valid range for analogs. Cursor positioning shall be via a “mouse”.




15) In order to allow the operators to view graphics in greater detail, zoom /pan display feature shall be provided to return zoomed/panned graphics to their original status. A “return to original” feature shall also be provided. The mouse shall be used to pan in all directions in real time, and to jump, from any section of the plant schematic directly to another section or to another level.

16) Sample Graphics to be approved during technical submittal. 17) Graphics shall be arranged such that the opening screen is a representation of the

building facade and shall contain depict the outside air temperature, Humidity and any other point specifically noted in the sequences of operation.

18) Clicking on a particular floor will display that floor plan with space temperatures

displaying actual space temperatures at the sensor location. If the space sensor is picked, the individual VAV box or associated control loop shall display. The floor plan shall also display the mechanical equipment rooms.

19) Clicking on a mechanical room will display the equipment in the room. If the room

contains only one fan for example, the graphic for that fan shall be displayed. If the room contains several fans, the different fans will display, and picking a particular fan will cause the system to display the flow diagram for that system, with all associated points displaying their data in real time.

20) Floor plans showing status of associated points within area including but not limited to:

smoke detectors, HVAC equipment, associated lighting contactors. Indicate locations of equipment within area such as DDCPs, FEPs, MERs, space temperature sensors, lighting control panels, etc.

21) Separate Air and Water Systems Riser Diagrams showing all systems in Block Diagram

Form. System status (on, off, alarm) shall be indicated. Risers shall include common sensing points such as outside air and supply and return temperatures in main piping systems.

5.5 USER INTERFACE

The operator panel on a terminal shall provide the primary interface for operator access to the BAS while also providing a vehicle for the annunciation of alarms and the reporting function. The operator shall have the option of switching between a text based and graphic based user interface at any time. In particular following standard functions shall be provided.

1) It shall be possible to carry out the following commands by use of dedicated function

keys on the keyboard and by the mouse :

a. ON - digital points b. OFF - digital points c. AUTO - analogue and digital points d. SET TO VALUE - analogue points




e. ALARM REVIEW f. POINT TYPE REVIEW g. POINT GROUP REVIEW h. HOURS RUN REVIEW / Run Time i. REVIEW CANCEL j. GRAPHICS ENABLE k. HELP l. ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE

2) It shall be possible to add new points, and reconfigure or modify existing points without

taking any part of the system off-line. It shall be possible to change designation of operator passwords, access levels, point segregation and auto sign off, designation of backup consoles and printers. It shall also be possible to add/change descriptors for points, segregation groups and access levels, and action messages for alarms and trouble condition, system/point enable/disable, input or output value, and assignment of alarm/warning limits. All additions and modifications shall be on-line programmable via operators keyboard and then down the line loaded to distributed processing units.

3) It shall be possible to address plant, zones, points etc., using clear language

descriptors. Each individual point may also be identified by a unique alpha-numeric mnemonic address entry. Simple key names may be assigned to points to allow direct display. These key names shall be fully operator assignable and depending on how frequently they have to be accessed, they may be as simple as one, two or three characters or as lengthy as 20 characters.

4) The operator shall be able to access any point on any graphic without going through

the penetration path. Graphics shall be menu-driven. Direct access to graphics shall be menu selectable wherein the operator may select optionally by entering the name of the graphic system desired or by selecting the desired graphic via cursor positioning .

5) It should be possible to identify some points which are frequently addressed as

“frequent access” points. This listing shall be selectable from a screen top menu bar drop down menu item with a user address, descriptor and value/status of each “frequent access” point displayed.

6) A wild card search utility should be provided which shall be operated by a partial data

entry. For example, by listing chiller 1, all chiller no. 1 points shall be listed.

7) The information displayed for individual points during a review shall be :

its unique mnemonic address

its current state or value (in Engineering units)

its type of point (analog/digital, input/ output)

any secondary or tertiary value

reason for state, if applicable




8) An Electronic message facility shall be provided on the operator station for any operator to enter a message to another operator of the same station or different station, by selecting the receiving operator‟s ID and entering the message. When the operator with a queued message, signs onto the operator station, a “mail message waiting” prompt shall be issued. Upon displaying a mail message, the display shall prompt the operator with three message options to execute, delete, print, and save. Messages shall also include the senders personal ID and a brief title or subject description.

9) Dynamic data shall be automatically updated on the central station . Manual update

shall also be provided via a screen update key. 10) It shall be possible to enter any of the subroutines such as the editor functions, or the

Data Manipulation function from the central station without closing down the terminal or the programs currently running.

11) The operator shall be provided with the facility to override the use of portable

operators terminal. 5.6 HELP FACILITY

Software shall be provided to facilitate programming and storage of the system operation manuals in the hard-disk. The operation manual shall be retrieved by On Line Help mode so as to enable the operator to self learn the system operation, command, or function as and when needed.

This `help‟ facility shall be made available to the operator by use of a dedicated key or a single key click on the mouse. A minimum help shall be available for every menu item and dialogue box. The facility shall contain both text and graphics to provide information about the selected function directly. The information provided shall be in simple clear language and shall be capable of being added to or modified by an authorized operator.

5.7 ALARMS

Multiple priority levels of alarm shall be made available. Priority levels shall be deemed Critical Alarms and Non- critical (general) Alarms. Normally, critical alarms shall take precedence over non-critical alarms, and high priority over low priority.

Each analog point shall have the following limits defined ; wherever required

High priority critical alarm limit




Low priority critical alarm warning limit Low priority warning limit Low general alarm limit

When an analog point goes outside the low priority critical alarm limit or Low priority warning limit, a user defined warning message shall be directed to the appropriate alarm printers at the control station. The Warning limits shall be used to monitor controllability, not comfort conditions. The alarm limits shall be used to monitor comfort conditions. When a setpoint is changed, the warning limits shall automatically change while the alarm limits shall not change.

When an analog point goes outside any of the limits defined, a user defined alarm message for that level shall be directed to the appropriate alarm printer and to respective operator workstation. Alarm message shall require operator acknowledgement.

When a digital point goes into alarm, a user defined alarm message shall be output to the appropriate alarm printer and to respective control station. Alarm messages shall require operator acknowledgement. When a point is overridden by operator command from an operator workstation or a local workstation, an alarm message shall be output to the appropriate alarm printer and to respective operator workstation. Alarm messages shall require operator acknowledgement.

When a point returns to normal, the event shall be recorded in control stations as „Return to Normal‟.

The Operator workstations shall be capable of displaying a list of all points in alarm for the building in a single summary. Systems which require the operator to make a separate summary for alarms, shall not be acceptable.

1) Annunciation: Alarms shall be annunciated at a terminal by an audible tone and icon.

Critical alarms shall be defined by a different colour than non-critical alarms.

2) Printing: Alarms shall automatically be printed on the defined alarm printer. The printout shall contain the address, state or nature of the alarm, alarm priority, and time and date of occurrence.

It shall be possible to route alarms to any printer on the system, in case the allotted printer fails. Critical alarms like Fire can be sending via sms to responsible person.

3) It shall be possible to produce a user definable full text message to accompany the

annunciation of any alarm. This shall provide further information about the alarm and any action required to be taken by the operator or indicate that action is automatically




programmed in the system. These messages shall be automatically printed on a designated printer. There shall be no practical limit to the length of messages created.

4) Acknowledgement: It shall be necessary for all alarms to be acknowledged by an

authorized operator. The facility shall exist for an additional message to be appended at the time of acknowledgement to provide further information as to any action taken.

Acknowledgement of alarms shall be automatically printed and will indicate the time,

date, and any message generated by the operator.

Alarm silencing shall be by the authorized operators by pressing the silence key.

5) Alarm Clear: When alarms are cleared, then a message shall be produced to indicate

the description of the alarm point, its current state, and the time and date.

6) Disk Records: With the exception of extended text messages, all the information produced above, alarm annunciation, acknowledgement, and clearing, shall be automatically recorded on the fixed disk for historical purposes.

7) Alarm Inhibits: It shall be possible to inhibit the transmission of alarms in the

following ways :

(i) Operational Inhibits - to allow time for stabilization of power after the normal power is restored.

(ii) Transient Inhibit - to make allowance for fluttering contacts or allow internal

responses. It shall be possible to select time periods for inhibits (i) and (ii) and may be applied when entering into alarm, out of alarm, or both.

8) Point lockout: It shall be possible for the operator to lockout the control for any point, to

force it to remain in its current state.

A summary showing locked out points shall be available. Systems which require the

operator to make a separate lockout summary shall not be acceptable.

9) Alarm Review: Points in alarm shall be displayed on the operators panel using the

alarm review function. 5.8 LOGGING

1) It shall be possible to log the status or value of system points at regular intervals or on change of state and store this on hard-disk at any of the central station.




2) It shall be possible to archive this information for future reference.

3) In the case of timed interval logs, it shall be possible to specify a time interval (in minutes) and the points which are required to be logged.

4) Storage of logged information shall be able to be carried out in any of three ways,

single-shot, roll- over, or split. These are defined as follows :-

4.1 Single-shot : In this type of file, logging shall be carried out only during a pre-defined period for which the start and finish time and date shall be configurable.

4.2 Roll-over : This file shall be wrap-around where oldest data shall continuously

be overwritten by new incoming data. It shall be possible to configure the number of records to be stored or the duration in hours, days or months before wrap around occurs.

4.3 Split : Data shall be continuously stored in a series of files automatically

created. The change-over or creation of subsequent files shall be created by splits at user-defined boundaries. The boundaries shall be able to be defined by duration (hours, days, months) and by time and day of the first split.

5) Logging files shall be terminal based not system based, to provide true multi-terminal

capability.

6) Data produced by the logging facility must be able to be used by standard spread-sheet package for the analysis of information and the preparation of management report.

In addition to the above, the data may be presented in a simplified customised

package. The package should have the following features as minimum :

Charting of logged data on disk in line graph, bar graph or pie format.

Presentation of logged data on disk in tabular format.

Charting of dynamic data (up to 8 points) in real time.

Presentation of dynamic data in tabular format in real time.

Selection of Auto/ manual scaling of X(time) axis and Y(variable) axis.

Tailoring of charts by selection of line width and background colours.

Optional grid overlays (full and dotted lines).

Selection of horizontal/ vertical arrangement of windows or a `cascade‟ presentation.

Multiple Windows.

Printing of completed presentations.




User configurable data selections.

Optional display of point titles.

Selection of primary or secondary values for display.

Presentation of both analog and digital values (ON/OFF etc.). 5.9 REPORT GENERATION:

Standard historical reports shall be provided, which shall be operator selectable to appear on the operator station, any selected printer or both. A “terminate report” command shall be available to allow the operator to stop any report in the process of being printed. Standard pre-formatted reports to be provided shall include:

1) Point summary reports may be requested at any penetration level. Point

summary reports shall include the current value/status and condition, point descriptors and all relevant information. Point summary reports shall be selectable for all points.

All reports shall be capable of being scheduled to run at a specific time and/or interval via an operator function supported by necessary data entry templates and interactive prompts.

2) As a minimum, the system shall provide the following summaries:

Point summary

Alarm summary Limits summary Lockout summary Off-line summary Override summary Utility summary Point status (alarm, locked out, off-line, override) Point name Point status/value (automatically updating) Engineering units.

The alarm summary shall list all points in alarm in the selected system. It shall be possible to print on a single summary, all points in alarm in the building. As a minimum, the alarm summary shall include :

Point name

Point status/value (when alarm occurred) Alarm message Date and time of alarm occurrence




The limits summary shall list all the alarm limits, and warning limits.

The lockout summary shall display points in the selected system which have either reporting or triggering locked out.

The off-line summary shall display points in the selected system which have lost communication with the system. The override summary shall display points in the selected system which have been overridden by operator command. The utility profile shall display the total consumption, measured peak for the current period and the previous period.

3) Trend historical reports shall allow the operator to randomly select logical group of points

to be recorded at selectable time intervals. It shall be possible to assign up to ten variables to each trend report. The format, headers, footers, and calculations shall be selectable by the operator. The trend report shall be stored to disk and shall be subsequently capable of being displayed, and/or printed by the operator.

4) Dynamic trends shall provide upto eight points and show real time activity of the

associated points. This information shall be printed and/or displayed in numeric, bar chart, curve plot, pie chart, etc., as selected by the operator. Graphic plots shall allow a unique color for each point. Sample interval of points selected for dynamic trend shall be user selectable. 3- Dimensional dynamic trending must be provided in the system.

5) Alarm and run time reports shall be automatically issued to assigned printers

immediately upon occurrence, and shall consist of the point with engineering unit, the time, and the date, and the alarm message.

5.10 DATA STORAGE:

A history file capability shall be provided to allow automatic storage of certain records plus allow the operator to selectively direct critical real time system data and activity to a mass storage device for later recall and analysis.

1) All alarm and return to normal activity shall automatically be routed to history files.

Alarms and return-to-normal shall include warning and alarm threshold violations with no-response, trouble, run time exceeded, demand alarms, and command failures. It shall be possible to request a report by specifying points of interest, the time window of interest, and the type of alarms of interest. Locking out or disabling of points shall also be historically stored and output in the all- type reports.

2) Operator shall be able to select, via the CRT terminal keyboard, those analog and

digital inputs and outputs to be stored and the interval at which samples are taken.




3) It shall be possible to access software packages such as MS-Office / MS-Excel or similar, so that the operator may format display or printouts in the form of :

a) Spread sheets. b) Bar charts. c) Curve plots.

4) History files shall be the source data for stored trend reports to be used for records

and system analysis. Operator shall be able to select specific points to be trended, the time period of the trend, the sample interval, and time at which the report is printed. Trend output format shall be as specified for trend logs (shaded, un-shaded etc)

5.11 UTILIIES :

The Central Station personal computer (P.C.) shall be provided with the following menu selected graphic system utilities or desktop application packages . The system provided must be capable of running standard software packages concurrently with the real time system. System should be capable of supporting third party software packages like spreadsheet, word processing etc. 1) The base system software shall include a CRT “windowing” feature to allow the

operator to monitor the real time system and use the third party software simultaneously.

2) All third party software packages identified shall have access to the system historical

data base. 5.12 TIME SCHEDULING

1) There shall be real time clock facility to help in time scheduling. The scheduling feature shall not be dependent on a central database or an operator workstation.

2) The following commands shall be able to be time scheduled to be issued at a later

day and time from the operator workstation or portable workstation:

Start and stop a point Adjust analog value Change setpoint

3) The following commands shall be able to be time scheduled to be issued at a later

day and time from the operator workstation:

Change alarm limits or warning




Lock/unlock point reporting or point control Demand limit target setting Load rolling target setting Reset tracking period for energy statistics Trend point enable/ disable for a point Totalization enable/ disable for a point Reset totalization value

4) The following summaries shall be able to time scheduled to be printed or stored in a disk

file at a later day and time from the operator workstation :

Standard point summary Alarm summary Off-line summary Override summary Disabled summary Lockout summary Utility summary Alarm limits summary

5) Commands shall be able to be issued repeatedly on specified days of the week at

specified times.

6) Schedules shall comply with the BACnet Standard. A system wide calendar shall be set up to define each day as:

Regular day

Special day Holiday

The system wide calendar shall be stored in multiple locations so that the failure of any one device does not cause the system to fail. The calendar shall automatically accommodate the leap year and the turn of the century.

The calendar shall allow the days to be scheduled one year in advance from the current system date.

7) Separate schedules shall be stored for : Regular days Special days Holidays

8) The system shall accept one-time schedules to accommodate overtime usage.

One-time schedules shall be automatically deleted from the system after execution.




The system shall allow one-time schedules to be programmed up to one year in

advance.

9) After recovery from a power failure, the system shall determine any time scheduled

commands which should have been issued during the period that the power was off. These commands shall automatically be issued.

5.13 POINT HISTORY

1) For every analog point in the system, a 24 hour record of the value sampled on regular interval shall be maintained. The operator shall choose whether samples older than 24 hours shall be discarded or archived. The most recent 24 hours of analog point history shall be able to be displayed at the Control Station.

2) For every digital point in the system, a point history of the last 10 change of states shall

be maintained. The operator shall choose whether point history previous to the last 10 change of states shall be discarded or archived.

The most recent 10 samples of digital point history shall be able to be displayed at the

Control Station.

3) Point history samples with time/date shall also be taken under the following

conditions :

Point in alarm/return to normal Point overridden/released by operator Point on-line/off-line Point reliable/unreliable

A report shall be available showing all points for which point history is being archived.

4) The system shall provide point history graphs for analog/digital points.

5.14 5.14 POINT TREND

1) The trend feature shall be able to record any of the following parameters for any point :

Point value

Point alarm status Controlling feature Operator override flag On-line/Off-line flag




2) The operator shall be able to select points and define any interval on which samples may be taken.

3) For long term storage of samples, trend data shall automatically be updated.

4) A report shall be available listing all points being trended. The report shall display : Trend status

Point name Parameter being trended Display units Sample interval Number of samples taken.

5) A trend for a point shall be able to be started either by operator command or

according to a time scheduled command. A trend for a point will end as a result of an operator command, time scheduled command or when the required number of samples have been collected.

6) Trend samples shall be displayed in either tabular or graphical format. A minimum

of eight trended points shall be able to be displayed concurrently on a graph or report.

7) The trend graph display shall automatically scale the value and time axis to display all samples. From the trend graph, the operator shall be able to select and read the instantaneous value of any previous sample.

8) The trend point graphing capability shall be a built-in feature of the system and shall

not require operator setup. Systems which require trend point data to be exported to third party software shall not be acceptable.

5.15 TOTALIZATION

1) For every digital point, the system shall be able to calculate:

Cumulative on-time Cumulative off-time

2) For every point, analog and digital, the system shall be able to calculate: Cumulative time in alarm Cumulative time overridden by operator Cumulative time off-line

3) Time totalization shall have a resolution of one minute or less.

4) Time totalization shall be displayed in hours.




5.16 DEMAND LIMITING / LOAD ROLLING

1) The BMS shall include a software program to perform electrical demand limiting (EDL). The EDL program shall monitor the rate of electrical power consumption and forecast the total demand during each demand interval using a sliding window approach.

2) The program shall automatically shed and restore loads to prevent the electrical demand

from exceeding and operator set level. 3) Kilowatt rating of each load stored in computer memory to ensure proper number of

loads being shed when excessive electrical demand is predicted. For scheduling purposes, each load assigned to one of three priority groups:

a) Priority Group 1 and 2 - Automatically shed as required. b) Priority Group 3 - Issue operator advisory to manually shed particular load by

operator action at console. 4) When load shed condition exists, program begins searching for loads in Groups 1 and

continues through Group 3 until necessary number of kilowatts have been shed. Loads within each group shall be shed on a round robin or fixed basis. Load restoration procedure is opposite of load shedding procedure.

5) Each load shall be programmed with maximum off time, minimum on time and minimum

off time. 6) The operator shall be able to define the following information:

• Load KW and priority • Maximum demand setpoint

7) The following information shall be available in report form:

• Load Data • Maximum Demand for a given period (day, week, month, etc.) • Current demand and loads shed

8) When maximum target is exceeded alarm shall sound, current demand in kW displayed

and printed out with time of occurrence on alarm printer. 9) Degraded Mode: Loss of all or part of data trunk cable shall not cause the shed loads to

restart and the electrical load to exceed set point. DDCPs shall be capable of cycling connected loads in a stand-alone mode as to eliminate or reduce potential increases in maximum demand level.

The system shall calculate the instantaneous demand based on the sliding average of the previous 30 minutes of the consumption.




The system shall calculate a predicted demand based on the sliding window average of the previous 20 minutes of consumption. The predicted demand shall be used for control calculations. The operator shall be able to “lock” a load so that it is ineligible for shedding by demand, limiting or load rolling.

The operator shall be able to use the scheduling feature to program time/days for a load to be locked and unlocked. The operator shall be able to use the scheduling feature to program time/days for target values for the demand limiting and load rolling features.

The demand limiting/ load rolling features shall allow a minimum of four priority groups to be defined.

Within a priority group, a rotational shedding algorithm shall be used.

The operator shall be able to define a target reduction of electrical consumption and the load rolling feature shall turn off equipment to meet this target.

The operator shall be able to define a demand target that is not to be exceeded and the demand limiting feature shall analyze trends and electrical demand and turn off equipment when a demand peak is anticipated.

The demand limiting and load rolling features shall be fully integrated with all other features so that the following safety parameters are maintained:

Minimum on time Minimum off time Maximum off time Maximum number of cycles per hour

At the end of the minimum off time, a comfort parameter, such as a temperature, shall be sampled. If the comfort parameter is in alarm, the point being controlled shall be turned on.

The following statistical data shall be maintained :

Date / time of start of current period Total consumption for current and previous period

Actual peak demand with time/ date for current and previous period. Instantaneous demand Interval demand Total shed loads

The operator shall be able to define the tracking period for the statistical date as:




Hourly (automatic reset) Daily (automatic reset) Weekly (automatic reset) Monthly (automatic reset) Manual reset

To provide the operator with an opportunity to manually shed loads that are not available to demand limiting or load rolling, the operator shall be notified when the demand limiting or load rolling run out of loads to shed.

To advise the operator when the performance is outside of expectations, the operator shall be notified when the demand peak target or load rolling target is exceeded.

5.17 SITE SPECIFIC DATA MANIPULATION SOFTWARE

A site specific data manipulation software shall be provided to allow the user to modify and tailor the BAS software to the changing requirements at the site. The modifications shall be carried out on-line.

The contractor at the time of submission of tender shall list out the modification capabilities of the system.

6. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLER

6.1 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLER (DDC) HARDWARE REQUIREMENT:

1) DDC controllers shall be capable of fully “stand- alone” operation i.e. in the event of loss of communication with other DDC‟s or Control Station, they shall be able to function on their own. The controller shall have be LON Works / BAC net / Modbus based products. The proprietary controllers will not be acceptable.

2) The controllers shall consist of single 16-bit / 32 bit microprocessors for reliable

throughput, based with EEPROM based operating system (O.S.). Controllers shall communicate at a minimum of 156 Kbps.

3) The memory available to the controller board as working space for storage of the

Operating system software and data files shall be decided on the basis of number of points being controlled by them.

4) The controllers shall be UL listed and conforming to CE (Euro norms). 5) Controllers requiring nickel-cadmium/lithium battery to support the full operation of the

RAM, shall have battery back-up upto 12 hours in the event of a localized mains failure. The battery shall not be required to supply power to actuators, valves, dampers etc.




In addition to the above battery reserve a further battery shall be provided to retain the RAM for a minimum of 2 days, after the expiration of the standard battery.

A low battery alarm shall be provided with each Controller and with an indication at the Control

Station.

In case the memory is stored on EEPROM, the battery backup will not be required.

6) The Controllers shall have proportional control, Proportional plus Integral (PI) Control, Proportional plus Integral plus Derivative (PID) Control, Two Position Control and Time Proportioning Control and algorithms etc., all in its memory and all available for use by the user, i.e. all the control modes shall be software selectable at any time and in any combination. The analog output of Proportional Control, PI Control, and PID Control shall continuously be updated and output by the program shall be provided. Between cycles the analog output shall retain its last value. Enhanced integral action in lieu of Derivative function shall not be acceptable.

7) The controllers shall have a resident real time for providing time of day, day of week,

date, month and year. These shall be capable of being synchronized with other clocks in the network.

Back-up power shall support the clock. Upon power restoration all clocks shall be

automatically synchronized.

8) The microprocessor based DDC‟s shall be provided with power supply, A/D and D/A converters, memory, and capacity to accommodate a maximum of 48 input/output (I/O) hardware points without an expansion module. DDC‟s with a lower capacity of points shall preferably be provided at the locations with relatively less input/output points. One DDC can be connected to maximum 2 Nos. AHU only. The controller have peer to peer communication and max 100 controller shall be connected per network loop.

9) If the controllers provided by the contractor have the configurable plug in function

cards, then the following minimum specifications shall have to be met :

i) In addition to the basic outstation, a minimum of two slots shall be provided for the insertion of plug-in function cards.

ii) The cards shall provide for analog or digital, input or output, hardwired

connections to the installed plant. iii) The quantity and combination of these cards shall be determined by the

requirements of the plant in that location with the concurrence of the Owner/ Consultant.

10) The DDC‟s shall have 15% spare capacity (digital/analog input/output) to

give flexibility for future expansion.




11) All DDC controllers shall be capable of handling voltage, mille-ampere, resistance or open and closed contacts inputs in any mix, if required.

Analog inputs/outputs of the following minimum types shall be supported :

i) 4-20 mA. ii) 0-1 volts. iii) 0-10 volts. iv) 0-5 volts, and v) 2-10 volts. vi) Resistance Signals (either PTC or NTC 1.8 KNTC)

(PT 100, PT 1000, PT 3000, Balco 500, NI 1000)

Digital input/output types to be supported shall be, but not limited to the following :

i) Normally-open contacts. ii) Normally-closed contacts.

Modulating outputs shall be true proportional outputs and not floating control type.

12) Controller‟s packaging shall be such that, complete installation and check out of

field wiring can be done prior to the installation of electronic boards.

13) All board terminations shall be made via plug-in connectors to facilitate trouble-shooting, repair and replacement. Soldering of connections shall not be permitted.

14) Controllers shall preferably be equipped with diagnostic LED indicators with atleast

indication for Power up Test OK, and Bus Error. All LED‟s shall be visible without opening the panel door.

15) It shall be possible for the controllers to accept regulated uninterrupted power

supply to maintain full operation of the controller functions (control, logging, monitoring and communications) in the event of a localized mains failure.

16) Controllers requiring fan cooling are not acceptable. 17) There shall be the facility for accessing controller data information locally , via a

portable plug-in keypad display which can be common to all controllers and normally removed to prevent unauthorized tampering. Alternatively each controller shall have a keypad and display integral with its casing for local interrogation and adjustment. In either case, access to the system thus provided shall be restricted by passwords in the same way as at the main operator terminal.

18) In case the Portable operator Terminals (POT) are required to program the

controllers, sockets shall be provided for same. Attachment of POT shall not interrupt or disable normal panel operation or bus connection in any way.




19) The controllers shall be housed in vandal proof boxes to protect them from tampering

by any unauthorized personnel. All DDC controllers used in plant room spaces and external application shall be housed IP66/IP54 rating enclosures.

20) It shall be possible to add new controllers to the system without taking any part of

the system off-line.

6.2 DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLERS CAPABILITIES :

1) The Controllers shall have a self-analysis feature and shall transmit any malfunction messages to the Control Station. For any failed chip the diagnostic tests, printout shall include identification of each and every chip on the board with the chip number/location and whether the chip “Passed” or “Failed” the diagnostic test. This is a desired requirement as it would facilitate trouble-shooting and ensure the shortest possible down time of any failed controller. Controllers without such safety feature shall be provided with custom software diagnostic resident in the EEPROM. The tenderer shall confirm in writing that all controllers are provided with this diagnostic requirement.

2) Operating system (O.S.) software for controllers shall be EPROM resident.

Controllers shall have resident in its memory and available to the programs, a relevant library of algorithms, intrinsic control operators, arithmetic, logic and relational operators for implementation of control sequences.

3) In the event of failure of communication between the controllers and/or Control

Station terminal, alarms, reports and logs shall be stored at the controllers and transmitted to the terminal on restoration of communication.

4) In the event of memory loss of a Controller, or the expiration of back-up power, on

start-up of the unit the necessary data-base shall be downloaded automatically and without operator instruction. Controllers requiring a manual intervention for the re-boot of software are not desired.

5) Where information is required to be transmitted between controllers for the sharing of

data such as outside air temperature, it shall be possible for global points to be allocated such that information may be transmitted either on change of incremental value or at specific time intervals.

6) Controllers must be able to perform the following energy management functions as a

minimum.

a) Time & Event programs b) Holiday Scheduling c) Maximum and Distributed power demand




d) Optimum start and stop program e) Night purge f) Load reset g) Zero energy band h) Duty cycle i) Enthalpy analysis and control j) Run Time Totalization k) Sequencing and Optimization l) Exception scheduling

Detailed description of software features and operating sequence of all available energy management software shall be submitted with the tender for evaluation by the Consultant.

7) The DDC Controllers shall have Adaptive Control capability whereby the control

software measures response time and adjusts control parameters accordingly to provide optimum control. The software shall allow self-tuning of the variable control loops (all or any of P, P+I, P+I+D) of the AHU‟s and chiller system so as to provide the most efficient and optimized controls at different load conditions. The energy management programs shall update their parameters based on past experience and current operating conditions.

8) Alarm Lockout shall be provided to prevent nuisance alarms. On the initial start up of

air handler and other mechanical equipment a “timed lockout” period shall be assigned to analog points to allow them to reach a stable condition before activating an alarm comparison logic.

Tenders shall indicate their proposed system alarm handling capability & features.

9) Run time shall be accumulated based on the status of a digital input point. It shall be possible to total either ON time or OFF time. Run time counts shall be resident in non-volatile memory.

10) It shall be possible to accommodate Holiday and other planned exceptions to the

normal time programs. Exception schedules shall be operator programmable up to one year in advance.

11) Distributed power demand program shall be based on a sliding window instantaneous

demand trend algorithm. The DDC interfaced to the demand meter shall calculate the demand, forecast the demand trend, compare it to the established demand limits, and initiate load shedding or re-establishment of loads as required. Shedding shall be on a sequential basis with least important loads shed first and restored last.

12) Each DDC shall be capable of accepting following open protocols as a part of internal

built-in feature: BacNet LoN Works




ModBus

13) The system to have an ultimate capacity of not less than 2000 points with no hardware changes except addition of DDCPs and communications networks.

14) Autodial modems for two-way remote communication to remote DDC and/or Operator

Work Station. 6.3 SYSTEM INTERGRATION UNITS (SIU)

SIU shall connected all field DDC‟s and provide supervisory and Complex Control Algorithm capability to the BMS system. The SIU shall also have Stand-alone Data Storage and Communication capability for high level integration and networking capabilities including and not limiting to Operator Work Station, Remote Work Station, Third Party Management System etc. The same facility shall be available at controller level in two tier system architecture. Network bridges & routers must be of a modular design to ensure reliability & system performance. The central system shall use the building Local Area Network (LAN) for communication. The communication between the central server and the controllers shall be BACnet/IP. Proprietary protocols are NOT acceptable.

1) Where information is required to be transmitted between controllers for the sharing of

data such as outside air temperature, it shall be possible for global points to be allocated in the SIU such that information may be transmitted either on change of incremental value or at specific time intervals.

2) SIU must be able to perform the following energy management functions as a minimum. a. Time & Event Program b. Holiday Scheduling c. Maximum and Distributed power demand d. Optimum start and stop program e. Night Purge f. Load reset g. Zero Energy band. h. Duty Cycle. i. Enthalpy analysis and control. j. Run Time Totalization. k. Sequencing and Optimization. l. Exception scheduling

Detailed description of software features and operating sequence of all available energy management software shall be submitted with the tender for evaluation by the Consultant.

3) Alarm Lockout shall be provided to prevent nuisance alarms. On the initial start up of air handler and other mechanical equipment a “timed lockout” period shall be assigned to analog points to allow them to reach a stable condition before activating alarm comparison logic.




4) It shall be possible to accommodate holiday and other planned exceptions to the normal time programs. Exception schedules shall be operator programmable upto one year in advance.

5) Distributed power demand program shall be based on sliding window instantaneous

demand trend algorithm. The DDC interfaced to the demand meter shall calculate the demand, forecast the demand trend, compare it to the established demand limits, and initiate load shedding or re-establishment of loads as required. Shedding shall be on a sequential basis with least important loads shed first and restored last.

7. PORTABLE OPERATORS TERMINAL (POT)

1) POT shall be provided to allow operator readout of system variables, override control

and adjustment of control parameters. The POT shall be portable and plug directly into individual controllers for power and data.

2) The minimum functionality of POT shall include :

Set points to a fixed value or state.

Display diagnostic results.

Display sequentially all point summary and sequentially alarm summary.

Display/change digital point state, analog point value.

Display/change time and date.

Display/change analog limits.

Display/change time schedule.

Display/change run time counts and run time limits.

Display/change time and/or event initiation.

Display/change programmable offset values.

Access DDC initialization routines and diagnostics.

Enable/disable points, initiators and programs.

Display/change minimum ON/OFF and maximum OFF times.

Trends / Historical data

3) The POT shall be complete with command keys, data entry keys, cursor control keys and a 24 character liquid crystal alphanumeric display. Access shall be via self-prompting menu selection with arrow key control of next menu/previous menu and step forward/backward within a given menu.

4) Connection of a POT to a controller shall not interrupt or interfere with normal network

operation in any way, prevent alarms from being transmitted, or interfere with Control Station commands and system modifications.




5) Connection of POT at any controller shall provide display access to all controllers on that bus. In case the controller has a fixed LCD display and entry keyboard, then the display access shall be available on each screen.

6) It should be possible to override the commands given through POT by the Operator

Control Station.

8. DATA COMMUNICATION

The communication between controllers shall be via a dedicated communication network as per BACNET / LON Works recommended standards. Controllers microprocessor failures shall not cause loss of communication of the remainder of any network. All networks shall support global application programs, without the presence of a host PC.

Each controller shall have equal rights for data transfer and shall report in its predetermined time slot. There shall be no separate device designated as the communication‟s master. Those systems using dependent controllers shall be pointed out by the contractor and a dual redundant transmission media with automatic switching and reporting in the event of line faults will have to be provided.

The communication network shall be such that: 1) Every DDC must be capable of communicating with all DDC‟s.

2) Network connected devices with no messages to transmit shall indicate “No

failure” message each cycle. Lack of this message after successive retries shall constitute a communication or device failure.

3) Each controller is to be provided with a communication watchdog to assure

that an individual controller does not permanently occupy the bus. If a controller is detected as occupying more time than usual, then it shall be automatically shut down and an alarm sent to the Control Station.

4) Error recovery and communication initialization routines are to be resident in each

network connected device. 5) For reliability, maintainability, and performance, communication network shall be

extendable to 4,000 feet without active links, hubs, or repeaters, Active devices required within buses under 4,000 feet long shall be fully transparent (without compromising any parameter) and totally redundant (including power supply) to provide the reliability specified.

6) The communication protocol shall incorporate CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) to

detect transmission errors. Parity bit error checking shall not be acceptable. Vendors to give details for their system error checking capability.




Single or multiple stand alone controller failures shall not cause loss of communication between active control panels connected on the communication network. Full communication shall be sustained as long as there are atleast two operational stand alone control panels active on the communication network.

All the System Integration Units shall be linked together on a Local Area Network.

The communication network shall include provision for automatically reconfiguring itself to allow all operational equipment to perform as efficiently as possible in the event of single or multiple failure. The communication network shall follow the recommendations of ISO 7498 or equivalent standard. The BAS supplier shall be required to provide details of standards to which their system conforms.

9. SOFTWARE FEATURES OF DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLERS

Following minimum software features are required to be provided by the BAS contractor as part of offered system:

9.1 HISTORICAL TRENDING Any system point either real or calculated shall be assignable to the historical trending program. All changes in point value shall be recorded for points assigned. The trend interval shall be user selectable. All trending formation shall be recorded in non-volatile memory.

9.2 PSYCHROMETRIC CALCULATIONS: 1. The system shall be equipped with a psychrometric calculation module, which will

calculate any point on the psychrometric chart when supplied with two other points of data.

2. The calculation shall operate in the dynamic mode, allowing system input points to be

used as calculation inputs and the result used in control loops where required by the sequence of operation.

3. The system shall be capable of calculating the enthalpy of a sampled airstream using

temperature and humidity inputs. The system shall then be capable of comparing the inputs and initiate an action (such as closing the outside air dampers) as a result of the decision.

9.3 DEMAND CONTROLLED VENTILATION:

1. The system shall be able to measure outside air CO2 and indoor CO2 (multiple

locations) and override outside air damper control on applicable systems to increase O/A




intake.

9.4 EMERGENCY SYSTEM SHUTDOWN Provide programming that will allow the building ventilation system (including the garage fans) to be shut off by simply “clicking” on an Emergency Systems Off” button on the system graphics. When this “button” is pressed, the button will turn red and all systems will stop. A second “button” labeled “Emergency Systems Off Reset” will, when “pushed” will cause all systems to restart. System restart shall take into consideration the time of day, and other preprogrammed parameters.

9.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATION INTEGRATION TO THIRD PARTY EQUIPMENT Provide hardware, software and wiring to provide serial communication interfaces with each of the systems listed below. Serial communication interface will be based on an industry standard open protocol such as Modbus, Bacnet, LON or OPC. Provide all hardware, software, cabling ( communication / Signal & Power) and programming required. Fire Alarm System Water Chemical Treatment Systems Sewage treatment plant VFDs Chiller Panel Hot water system Provide coordination of the mapping, control, and graphic display of all data point available through open protocols connections.

9.6 Electric metering and reporting of all HVAC related electrical loads. Provide and install electric

meters as specified for all HVAC related electric loads. B.M.S. to monitor and trend electric demand and consumption information for LEED requirements. All trended data will be stored on the BMS Data Warehouse / Archival system. BMS contractor shall develop and write all protocols necessary to satisfy the LEED requirement for Measure and Verification.

9.7 Air flow measuring on all building supply air and exhaust air systems. B.M.S. to monitor total building supply and exhaust air flows to maintain pressurization. A separate BMS program and summary graphic shall be provided to allow operators to individually control and reset supply or exhaust fans, or a group of fans for flow set points as determined by the owner. All trended data will be stored on the BMS Data Warehouse / Archival system.

9.12 Cooling Tower make up pumping system and rain water reclamation

9.13 Sewage Treatment Plant

9.14. Fire Alarm System monitoring for alarm reporting




BMS system shall through the serial communication interface with the Fire Alarm System monitor an alarm input point contact for each fan unit and a common fire alarm from each floor.

9.15 Water Treatment

9.16 Variable Speed Drives

10. FIELD DEVICES

10.1 ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC CONTROLS RELATED EQUIPMENT General Requirements

All controls shall be capable of operating in ambient conditions varying between 0-55 deg. C and 90% R.H. non-condensing.

All Control devices shall have a 20 mm conduit knockout. Alternatively, they shall be supplied with adaptors for 20 mm conduit.

Ancillary Items

When items of equipment are installed in the situations listed below, the BAS contractor shall include the following ancillary items :

(i) Weather Protection

All devices required to be weatherproofed are detailed in the Schedule of Quantities. IP

ratings for the equipment is mentioned in the respective section.

(ii) Pipework Immersion

Corrosion resisting pockets of a length suitable for the complete active length of the device, screwed ½” (13 mm) or ¾” (20 mm) NPT suitable for the temperature, pressure and medium.

(iii) Duct Mounting (Metal or Builders Work)

Mounting flanges, clamping bushes, couplings, locknuts, gaskets, brackets, sealing

glands and any special fittings necessitated by the device.

Additional features

(i) Concealed Adjustment: All two position switching devices shall have concealed adjustment unless detailed otherwise in the Schedule of Quantities.




(ii) Operating Voltage : All two position switching devices shall operate on 230 v a.c and all accessible live parts shall be shrouded. An earth terminal shall be provided.

10.2 TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Temperature sensors for space, pipes and ducts, shall be of the Resistance Temperature detector (RTD) type or thermistor. These shall be two wire type and shall conform to the following specifications :

1) Immersion sensors shall be high accuracy type with a high resistance versus

temperature change. The accuracy shall be atleast ± 0.33 degrees F and sensitivity of atleast 2 ohm/F.

2) Immersion sensors shall be provided with separate stainless steel thermo well. These

shall be manufactured from bar stock with hydrostatic pressure rating of atleast 10 kgf/cm2.

3) The connection to the pipe shall be screwed ¾ inch NPT (M). An aluminum sleeve shall be provided to ensure proper heat transfer from the well to the sensor. Terminations to be provided on the head. Flying leads shall not be acceptable.

4) The sensor housing shall plug into the base so that the same can be easily removed

without disturbing the wiring connections. 5) Duct temperature sensors shall be with rigid stem and of averaging type. These shall be

suitable for duct installation. 6) Outdoor air temperature sensor shall be provided with a sun shield. 7) The sensors shall not be mounted near any heat source such as windows, electrical

appliances etc.

The temperature sensors may be of any of the following types :

1) PT 100, PT 1000, PT 3000 2) NI 100, NI 1000 3) Balco 500. 4) Thermistor

10.3 HUMIDITY SENSOR

Space and duct humidity sensors shall be of capacitance type with an effective sensing range of 10% to 90% RH. Accuracy shall be + 3% or better. Duct mounted humidity sensors shall be provided with a sampling chamber. Wall mounted sensors shall be provided with a housing. The sensor housing shall plug into the base so that the same can be easily removed without disturbing the wiring connections. The sensors shall not be mounted near any heat source such as windows, electrical appliances etc.




10.4 FLOW METER

Water flow meters shall be Ultrasonic type. The housing shall have IP 55 protection. Vendors shall have to get their design/ selection approved by the Consultant, prior to the supply. The exact ranges to be set shall be determined by the contractor at the time of commissioning. It should be possible to „zero‟ the flow meter without any external instruments, with the overall accuracy of atleast ± 1% full scale.

10.5 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER FOR WATER

Pressure transmitters shall be piezo-electric type or diaphragm type. (Bourdon Tube type shall not be acceptable). Output shall be 4-20mA or 0-10V DC and the range as specified in the data sheet depending on the line pressure. Power supply shall be either 24 V AC, 24 V DC or 230 V AC. Connection shall be as per manufacturer‟s standards. The pressure detector shall be capable of withstanding a hydraulic test pressure of twice the working pressure. The set point shall fall within 40%-70% of the sensing range and detector shall have sensitivity such that change of 1.5% from the stabilized condition shall cause modulation of the corrective element. The sensor must be pressure compensated for a medium temperature of -10 o C to 60o C with ambient ranging between 0 o C to 55 o C.

10.6 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH FOR PIPE WORK

These shall be used to measure pressure differential across suction and discharge of pumps. The range shall be as specified in the data sheet. Switch shall be ON with increase in differential. Housing for these shall be weather proof with IP 55 protection. The pressure switch shall be capable of withstanding a hydraulic test pressure of 1.5 times the working pressure. The set point shall fall in 40-70% of the scale range and shall have differentials adjustable over 10%-30% of the scale range. The switches shall be provided with site adjustable scale and with 2 NO/NC contacts.

10.7 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH FOR AIR SYSTEMS

These shall be diaphragm operated. Switches shall be supplied with air connections permitting their use as static or differential pressure switches.

The switch shall be of differential pressure type complete with connecting tube and metal bends for connections to the duct. The housing shall be IP 54 rated. The pressure switches shall be available in minimum of 3 ranges suitable for applications like Air flow proving, dirty filter, etc. The set point shall be concealed type. The contact shall be SPDT type with 230 VAC, 1 A rating.

The switch shall be supplied suitable for wall mounting on ducts in any plane. It should be mounted in such a way that the condensation flow out of the sensing tips. Proper adaptor shall be provided for the cables.

The set point shall fall within 40%-70% of the scale range and l have differentials adjustable over




10%-30% of the scale range. The switches shall be provided with site adjustable scale and with 2 NO/NC contacts. 10.8 AIR FLOW SWITCHES

Air flow switches shall be selected for the correct air velocity, duct size and mounting attitude. If any special atmospheric conditions are detailed in the Schedule of Quantity the parts of the switches shall be suitably coated or made to withstand such conditions. These shall be suitable for mounting in any plane. Output shall be 2 NO/NC potential free. Site adjustable scale shall also be provided.

10.9 AIR PRESSURE SENSOR

The pressure sensor shall be differential type. The construction shall be spring loaded diaphragm type. The movement of the membrane in relation to the pressure should be converted by an inductive electromagnet coupling which would give an output suitable for the controller. The pressure sensor shall be in a housing having IP 54 ratings in accordance with IEC 529. Suitable mounting arrangement shall be available on the sensor. The sensor shall come complete with the PVC tubes & probes.

10.10 WATER FLOW SWITCH

These shall be paddle type and suitable for the type of liquid flowing in the line. Output shall be 2NO/2NC potential free.

10.11 TRANSDUCERS FOR ELECTRICAL SERVICES

Electrical transducers shall be integrated electronic type and rack mounted on the field. These shall work on 230 V supply with the output being standard type i.e. 4-20 mA, 0- 10 Volts etc.

Power factor, Voltage, Current, Frequency and Kilowatt transducers shall have standard output signal for measurement for the specified variable.

Kilowatt-Hour metering(if any) shall be poly-phase, three- element with current transformer (CT) operated type. The metering shall feature high accuracy with no more than +/- 1% error over the expected load range. The coils shall be totally encapsulated against high impulse levels.

10.12 LEVEL SWITCH The level switches shall have to meet the following requirement : Type : Float Type/Capacitance type/Conductivity type Mounting : To suit application. Connection : Flanged ANSI 150 lbs RF Carbon steel Float material : 316 SS




Stem Material : 316 SS Output : 2 NO, 2 NC potential free

Switch Enclosure : IP 55 10.13 CONTROL VALVES (AIR HANDLING UNITS)

Control valves for the Air Handling Unit‟s shall be globe type, two & three way suitable for Variable flow hydronic system.

The Manufacturer‟s standards shall be applicable for these valves. Valves a. Type : Two or Three way mixing b. Stem / Trim : SS-316 or better c. Plug and seat : SS-316 or better d. Plug characteristics : Equal Percentage e. Service : Chilled water f. Packing : Teflon

Actuator

a. Actuator : Electrical/Electronic/Magnetic. b. Actuator type : Proportionating(Modulating) c. Spring return function : No d. Travel limit switch : 2 Nos. for open and close. e. Hand wheel : Required f. Input signal : 0 – 10 V dc, 4 –20 mA g. Power Supply : 240 V ac h. Thrust : To be selected by the vendor i. End Connections : Screwed upto 2” Beyond that ANSI 150

Lb RF j. Noise Level : Not exceeding 70 DB k. Weather Proof : NEMAI

Note : i. Actuator should be directly coupled to the trim. Eccentric linkages not

acceptable. ii. Leakage not to exceed 0.1% of flow.

10.15 INDOOR AIR QUALITY SENSOR

a. CO2 Sensors ( Indoor Air Quality Sensor ) Duct mounted/Wall mounted

The sensor should measure and transmitCO2 level ranging from 0 to 2000 parts per million(ppm) from return air path. These shall work on 24 vac or 24 vdc supply with the output being standard type i.e. 4-20 mA, 0- 10 Volts etc.




Output signal : 4 mA to 20 mA or 0 to 10 vdc Operating Temperature Range : 23 to 113 deg F or -5 to 45 deg C Operating Humidity Range : 0 to 85% non condensing Air Flow Range : 0 to 7500ft / min Power Supply : 24 VAC or 24VDC b. CO Sensors The sensor shall mocro-processor control with 4- 20 mA analog output base on 0-200 ppm sensing range. The microprocessor controls heating of sensor and subsequent reading of CO level. The microprocessor compensates any drift over time. It shall self- diagnostic, self – restarting , and remote failur5e reporting. If power problem causes unit shall self test and restart. Power Supply : 24 VAC or 24VDC Output Range : 0-200 ppm Output Signal : 4 – 20 mA Response Time : Under 30 seconds Accuracy : ±5% Operating Temperature Range : -4 to 185 deg F or -20 to 85 deg C Operating Humidity Range : 5% to 95% non condensing

10.16 PH TRANSMITTER

The sensor should able to provide online PH value of aqueous solutions. The system shall provide 4-20mA output. It shall also have optional relay output. Power Supply : 18- 24 VDC Output signal : 4 mA to 20 mA Output Range : 0-12 PH Operating Temperature Range : 30 to 140 deg F or 0 to 60 deg C Operating Humidity Range : 99% non condensing Enclosure : NEMA 4X ( IP 65 )

10.17 WATER HARDNESS ANALYSERS The sensor shall continuously monitor hardness of water system. It shall simle and ready to use. The enclosure shall be IP 62 rating. It shall design for continuous and unattended use. Range : Upto 500ppm ( expressed as mg/l CaCo3) Accuracy : ±25% of set point value

Operating Temperature Range : 32 to 104 deg F or 5 to 40 deg C Operating Humidity : 5% to 95 % non condensing Flow Rate : 50 to 500 ml/min




Enclosure : IP 62 Inlet Pressure : 1 to 5 psig Repeatability : ± 4 of set point value 10.18 TDS ANALYSER

Meter shall monitor the TDS (Total Dissolved Solids) levels for drinking water, water filters, hydroponics, Aquariums, Food and Coffee, Pools and Spas and residential RO applications. Measurement range is 0-9990 ppm.

Automatic Temperature Compensation (ATC)

1000+ Hours of Continuous Use

TDS Range : 0-9990 ppm (parts per million)

Temp Range : 0-80 degrees Celsius

Resolution : 1 ppm, 1 degree Celsius

Accuracy : ± 2%

Battery life : 1000 hours

11. ELECTRONIC METERING

Electronic metering with BAS connectivity shall be provided on the main LT panel at incoming and outgoing feeders. These meters shall be free supply by the BAS contractor to the Electrical contractor whereby these shall be installed in the LT panel by the Electrical contractor. The electrical contractor shall also provide necessary CT, PT and 220 V power input for the meters. All further control wiring and networking of the meters shall be in scope of BAS contractor. The specifications for the electronic meters to be supplied by BAS contractor is as follows:

Type : Static Power Meter Class 1.0 accuracy. Instantaneous

Measurements : a. V (1-n), V (1-1) & 1 per ph & avg. V & I unbalance

b. PF per ph & total, frequency

c. Power & BI-directional energy (active, apparent,

reactive) d. Peak & Predictive Demand (I, W, VA, VAR totals)




e. V & I harmonics (Individual & Total) f. Time of use (internal calendar, multiple daily tariff,

energy & demand accumulators).

Features : a. Event Triggered b. Sequence of event c. Panel mountable d. Internal battery backup e. Transducerless connection via standard CT / PT Display : Local LCD display panel user formattable display with

scrollable screens. Software interface shall be ensured by BAS contractor for the electronic meters. Systems requiring transducers for duplicating the data shall not be accepted. All the instantaneous measurements shall be displayed on the control stations and the data shall be logged. It shall be possible to access minimum / maximum logging of any parameter with alarm annunciation for unusual measurements. The system shall also accept user defined “Set-Point” limit of any parameter.

12. ENCLOSURES FOR CONTROLLERS AND ELECTRICAL PANELS

All the controllers shall be housed in Lockable Vandal proof boxes which shall either be floor mounted or wall mounted. These shall be free standing, totally enclosed, dust and vermin proof and suitable for tropical climatic conditions.

The panel shall be metal enclosed 14 SWG CRCA sheet steel cubicle with gaskets between all adjacent units and beneath all covers to render the joints dust proof. All doors and covers shall be hinged and latched and shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a rigid support. Joints of any kind in sheet metal shall be seam welded with welding slag grounded off and welding pits wiped smooth with plumber metal.

All panels and covers shall be properly fitted and secured with the frame and holes in the panels correctly positioned. Fixing screws shall enter into holes tapped into an adequate thickness of metal or provided with nuts. Self threading screws shall not be used in the construction of control panels. Knockout holes of approved size and number shall be provided in the panels in conformity with the location of incoming and outgoing conduits/cables. lamps shall be provided to support the weight of the cables. The dimension of the boxes shall depend on the requirement with the colour decided in consultation with the Architect/Consultant. Note : All panel enclosures used in plant room spaces and external to building shall be suitable

for outdoor application (IP 55) protection)




13. CONDUITS AND WIRING

Prior to laying and fixing of conduits, the contractor shall carefully examine the drawings indicating the layout, satisfy himself about the sufficiency of number and sizes of conduits, sizes and location of conduits and other relevant details. Any discrepancy found in the drawings shall be brought to the notice of Architect/Engineers Any modifications suggested by the Contractor shall be got approved by the Architect /Engineers before the actual laying of conduits is commenced.

13.1 CONDUITS/TRUNKER

Conduits and accessories shall conform to relevant Indian Standards. Conduits of required dia shall be used as called for in the schedule of quantities. Joints between conduits and accessories shall be securely made, with help of adhesive. The conduits shall be delivered to the site of construction in original bundles and each length of conduit shall bear the label of the manufacturer.

13.2 CONNECTIONS

All jointing methods shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer. Separate conduits shall run for all power wiring. The threads and sockets shall be free from grease and oil. Connections between conduit and controller metal boxes shall be by means of brass hexagon smooth bore bush, fixed inside the box and connected through a coupler to the conduit. The joints in conduits shall be smooth to avoid damage to insulation of conductors while pulling them through the conduits.

13.3 BENDS IN CONDUIT

Where necessary, bends or diversions may be achieved by means of bends and/or circular inspection boxes with adequate and suitable inlet and outlet screwed joints. In case of recessed system each junction box shall be provided with a cover properly secured and flush with a finished wall surface. No bends shall have radius less than 2-1/2 times the outside diameter of the conduit.

13.4 FIXING CONDUITS The conduits, junction boxes, outlet boxes and controller boxes once installed in position, shall have their outlets properly plugged or covered so that water, mortar, insects or any other foreign matter does not enter into the conduit system. Surface conduits shall be fixed by means of spacer bar saddles at intervals not more than 500 mm. The saddles shall be 2 mm x 19 mm galvanized steel flat, properly treated, primer coated & painted, securely fixed to supports by means of nuts and bolts/rawl bolts and brass machines screws.




13.5 DRAWING OF CONDUCTORS

While drawing insulated wires/cable into the conduits, care shall be taken to avoid scratches and kinks which may cause breakage of conductors. No joint shall be allowed in case of breakage of any conductor. No joint shall be shaved off like length of the conductors. Insulation shall be shaved off like sharpening of a pencil and it shall not be removed by cutting it square to avoid depression/cutting of conducting material. Strands of wires shall not be cut to accommodate & connect to the terminals. Terminals shall have sufficient cross-sectional area to take all the strands. No wire shall be drawn into any conduit until all work of any nature that may cause injury to wire is completed. Before the wires are drawn into the conduit, the conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned of moisture, dust, dirt or any other obstruction. Where wires are connected to detectors, or panel, sufficient extra length of wires shall be provided to facilitate easy connections and maintenance. If numbers of cables are >4 than cable tray of appropriate size to be used. Only licensed supervisors/wiremen shall be employed for cabling and other connected work. Only approved make of cables shall be used. The cables shall be brought to the site in original packing.

13.6 MODE OF MEASUREMENT

Signal Cable: The cabling running between DDC controller to the field devices shall be termed as signal cabling. This cabling along with conduits shall be payable on per I/O point basis. Communication Cable: The cabling running between the system integration units to the DDC controllers shall be defined as communication cable. This cable along with conduits shall also be measured on per I/O point basis.

LAN Cable: The cable connecting various system integration units to the control station shall be termed as LAN cable. This cable alongwith conduits shall be measurable on unit length basis.

14. SIGNAL CABLING & COMMUNICATION CABLING The signal cable shall be of the following specifications : a. Wire : Annealed Tinned Copper b. Size : Minimum 1.5 sq. mm, 7 strands c. No. of conductors :Two (One pair)




d. Shielding : Overall beld foil Aluminum polyester shield. e. Jacket : Chrome PVC FRLS Rated f. Nominal DCR : 17.6 ohm/km for conductor 57.0 ohm/km for shield g. Nominal OD : 10.5 mm h. Nominal capacitance : 130 pF/m between conductors at 1 KHz 180 pF/m between one conductor and other Conductors connected to shield. i. Colour : Black and Red j. Armoured : yes k. Armoured Colour : Black/Blue 14.1 COMMUNICATION CABLE The communication cable shall be of the following specifications : a. Wire : Annealed Tinned Copper b. Size : Minimum 24 AWG stranded c. No. of conductors : Two pair (4 conductor) d. Shielding : Overall beld foil Aluminum polyester shield. e. Jacket : Chrome PVC FRLS Rated f. Nominal DCR : 78.7 ohm/km for conductor 55.8 ohm/km for shield g. Nominal OD : 5.64 mm h. Nominal capacitance : 131 pF/m between conductors at 1 KHz 243 pF/m between one conductor and other conductors connected to shield. i. Colour : Black and Red, Black and White) j. Armoured : yes k. Armoured Colour : Black/Blue




14.2 LOCAL AREA NETWORK CABLE

Depending on the type of LAN system being used by the contractor, standard, manufacturer‟s specification shall apply for CAT 5 / CAT 6 cable.

B TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

(Life Safety System)

1.1 General

This performance specification provides the minimum requirements for the Fire Alarm System (Life Safety System). The system shall include, but not limited to all equipment, materials, labor, documentation and services necessary to furnish and install a complete, operational system to include but not limited to the following functions:

Smoke and fire detection. Sprinkler suppression system monitoring Off-premise notification. Smoke control. Releasing Service One-way voice communication notification system. Two-way voice communication system.

1.2 Materials & Equipment

All equipment and components shall be the approved manufacturer‟s current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency like UL864/FM/EN54 for use as part of a protected premises protective signaling (fire alarm) system and smoke control system. The authorized representative of the manufacturer, to be designated as the contractor, shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation of the complete system. The contractor shall provide, from the acceptable manufacturer's current product lines, equipment and components, which comply, with the requirements of these specifications. Equipment or components, which do not provide the performance and features, required by these specifications are not acceptable, regardless of manufacturer. Strict conformance to this specification is required to ensure that the installed and programmed system will function as designed, and will accommodate the future requirements and operations of the building owner. All specified operational features must be met without exception. All equipment and components shall be the manufacturer's current model. The contractor shall be responsible for the satisfactory installation of the complete system. All control panel assemblies and connected field appliances shall be provided by the same system supplier, and shall be designed and tested to ensure that the system operates as specified. The system shall utilize electronically addressable, microprocessor-based detectors as described in this specification. The equipment to be supplied will be considered only if it meets all sections of the performance specification.




The supplier shall submit a point-by-point statement of compliance for all sections in this specification. The statement of compliance shall consist of a list of all paragraphs within these sections. Where the proposed system complies fully with the paragraph, as written, placing the word "comply" opposite the paragraph number shall indicate such. Where the proposed system does not comply with the paragraph as written, and the supplier feels the proposed system will accomplish the intent of the paragraph, a full description of the function as well as a full narrative description of how its proposal will meet its intent shall be provided. Any submission that does not include a point-by-point statement of compliance as described herein shall be disqualified. Where a full description is not provided, it shall be assumed that the proposed system does not comply. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, services and materials necessary to furnish and install a complete, functional fire alarm system (System). The System shall comply in respects with all pertinent codes, rules, regulations and laws of the Authority, and local jurisdiction. The System shall comply in all respects with the requirements of the specifications, manufacturer's recommendations and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listings.

It is further intended that upon completion of this work, the Owner/Consultant be provided with:

a. Complete information and drawings describing and depicting the entire system(s) as

installed, including all information necessary for maintaining, troubleshooting, and/or expanding the system(s) at a future date.

b. Complete documentation of system(s) testing.

c. Certification that the entire system(s) 1.3 CODES & LISTING:

The equipment and installation shall comply with the current and latest edition of the following codes and listing :

A) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA: NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems NFPA 16 Foam/Water Deluge and Spray Systems NFPA 17 Dry Chemical Extinguishing Systems NFPA 17A Wet Chemical Extinguishing Systems NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Extinguishing Systems NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code NFPA 76 Telecommunication Facilities NFPA 318 Clean Room Applications NFPA 101 Life Safety Code NFPA 90A Air conditioning & ventilation system Listed B) Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA: UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems




UL 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 9th Edition UL 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 464 Audible Signaling Appliances UL 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes UL 346 Water flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems UL 1971 Visual Notification Appliances UL 228 Door Holders UL 1481 Power Supply for fire protective signaling system. UL 1711 Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. UL 1635 Digital Alarm Communicator System Units Factory Mutual (FM) Approval ADDENDUMS thereafter in UL Code for Fire Detection(2007). UL 9th Schedule Certification International Standards Organization (ISO) ISO-9000 ISO-9001 European Union (EU) EMC Directive 89/336/ EEC Electromagnetic Compatibility Requirements

C) LOCAL CODES NATIONAL BUILDING CODES IS-2189

D) European Standards EN54 E) German Standards VDS

2.0 Panel Components & Functions

The control panel(s) shall be a multi-processor based networked system designed specifically for fire, one-way and two-way emergency audio communications, smoke control, extinguishing agent releasing system if necessitated, with integration modules for BMS or any third party control/annunciation. The control panel shall be UL/FM listed The control panel shall include all required hardware, software and site specific system programming to provide a complete and operational system. The control panel(s) shall be designed such that interactions between any applications can be configured, and modified . The control panel(s) operational priority shall assure that life safety takes precedence among the activities coordinated by the control panel.

The control panel shall include the following capacities:




Support up to minimum 125 devices

Support up to minimum 2500 analog/addressable points.

Support network connections up to minimum 64 or other control panels and annunciator.

Support multiple digital dialers and modems

Support multiple communication ports and protocols

Support up to a minimum of 1740 chronological events.

The network of control panels shall include the following features:

Ability to download all network applications and firmware from the configuration computer from the configuration computer from a single location on the system.

Provide electronic addressing of analog/addressable devices.

Provide an operator interface control/display that shall annunciate, command and control system functions.

Provide an internal audible signal with different programmable patters to distinguish between alarm, supervisory, trouble and monitor conditions.

Provide a discreet system control switch provided for reset, alarm silence, panel silence, drill switch, previous message switch, next message switch and details switch.

Provide system reports that provide detailed description of the status of system parameters for corrective action or for preventative maintenance programs. Reports shall be displayed by the operator interface or capable of being printed on a printer.

Provide an authorized operator with the ability to operate or modify system functions like system time, date, passwords, holiday dates, restart the system and clear control panel event history file.

Provide an authorized operator to perform test functions within the installed system.

The control panel shall contain a standby power supply that automatically supplies electrical energy to the system upon primary power supply failure. The system shall include a charging circuit to automatically maintain the electrical charge of the battery.

2.1 Operator's Interface

The system shall be designed and equipped to receive, monitor, and annunciate signals from devices and circuits installed throughout the building. Standard LED annunciator may be combined in common enclosures provided that the groups of LED's comprising each of the required annunciator are separated from one another (Detection, Supervisory, Status, and Security) and clearly labeled. A minimum 640-character LCD display shall be part of the main control panel for easy alarm reading and understanding. Receipt of alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals shall activate integral audible devices at the control panel(s) and at each remote annunciation device. The integral audible devices shall produce a sound output upon activation of not less than 85 dBA at 10 feet.

The annunciator shall contain the following system status indicators: LCD character Backlit Liquid Crystal Display




System Normal Indicator System Common Alarm Indicator System Common Trouble Indicator System Common Supervisory Indicator System Ground Fault Indicator System Common Security Indicator System Disabled Point(s) Indicator System Reset Switch with Indicator System Alarm Silence Switch with Indicator System Trouble Silence Switch with Indicator System Message Queue Scroll Switches. Digit Keypad to Enable/Disable System and Functions.

2.2. Audio

The system shall be capable of delivering multi-channel audio messages simultaneously over copper and/or fiber media. All audio messages and live pages shall originate at the one-way audio control unit. The one-way audio control unit shall store pre-recorded audio messages digitally. These messages shall be automatically directed to various areas in a facility under program control. The system shall support remote cabinets with zoned amplifiers to receive, amplify and send messages through speakers over supervised circuits. The one-way emergency audio control shall provide control switches to direct paging messages as follows: "All Call" to direct the page messages to all areas in the facility, overriding all other messages and tones. "Page to Evacuation Area" to direct the message to the evacuation area(s), overriding all other messages and tones. "Page to Alert Area" to direct page messages to the area(s) receiving the alert message and tones, overriding all other messages and tones.. "Page to Balance Building" to direct page messages to the areas) in the facility NOT receiving either the evacuation area or alert area messages. "Page by Phone" switch to select the firefighters telephone system as the source for paging. The system shall be capable of delivering multiple audio messages simultaneously over copper and / or fiber media. All audio messages and live pages shall originate at the one-way emergency audio control unit. The one-way emergency audio control unit shall store pre-recorded audio messages digitally. These messages shall automatically direct to various areas in a facility under program control. The system shall support remote panels with zoned amplifiers to receive, amplify and distribute messages through speakers over supervised circuits. The two-way voice communications control unit shall provide two-way communications between remotely located phones and the command center. The control unit shall provide the ability to individually select and display each two-way voice communication circuit support up to five (5) remote telephones in simultaneous two-way voice communications.




Audio Amplifiers (Multi-Channel) Provide as minimum one twenty (20) watt (Maximum capacity should be decided as per site requirement). audio amplifier per paging zone. The system software shall be capable of selecting the required audio source signal for amplification. To enhance system survivability, each audio amplifier shall automatically provide a local 3-3-3 1000 Hz temporal pattern output upon loss of the audio communications with the one-way audio control unit, during an alarm condition. Audio amplifiers shall be power limited and protected from short circuits conditions on the audio circuit wiring. Each amplifier output shall include a dedicated, selectable 25/70 Vrms output. Provide a standby audio amplifier that will automatically sense the failure of a primary amplifier, and replace the function of the failed amplifier.

2. 3 DACT Dialer The system shall provide off premise communications capability using a digital alarm communications transmitter (DACT) for sending system events to multiple central monitoring station (CMS) receivers. The system shall provide the CMS(s) with point identification of system events using Contact ID or SIA DCS protocols. In the event of a panel CPU failure during a fire alarm condition, the DACT degrade mode shall transmit a general fire alarm signal to the CMS.

2.4 Power Supply

System power supply(s) shall provide multiple powers limited 24 VDC output circuits as required by the panel. Upon failure of normal (AC) power, the affected portion(s) of the system shall automatically switch over to secondary power without losing any system functions. Each system power supply shall be individually supervised. Power supply trouble signals shall identify the specific supply and the nature of the trouble condition. All standby batteries shall be continuously monitored by the power supply. Low battery and disconnection of battery power supply conditions shall immediately annunciated as battery trouble and identify the specific power supply affected. All system power supplies shall be capable of recharging their associated batteries, from a fully discharged condition to a capacity sufficient to allow the system to perform consistent with the requirements of this section, in 48 hours maximum.

All AC power connections shall be to the building's designated emergency electrical power circuit and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 72 - The AC power circuit shall be installed in raceway. The power circuit disconnect means shall be clearly labeled FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONTROL and shall have a red marking. The location of the circuit disconnect shall be labeled permanently inside the each control panel the disconnect serves. Power supply for all input & output devices to be driven from main Fire Alarm Panel.

2.5 Reports

The system shall provide the operator with system reports that give detailed description of the status of system parameters for corrective action, or for preventative maintenance programs.




The system shall provide these reports via the main LCD, and shall be capable of being printed on any system printer. The system shall provide a report that gives a sensitivity listing of all detectors that have less than 75% environmental compensation remaining. The system shall provide a report that provides a sensitivity (% Obscuration per foot) listing of any particular detector. The system shall provide a report that gives a listing of the sensitivity of all of the detectors on any given panel in the system, or any given analog/addressable device loop within any given panel. The system shall provide a report that gives a chronological listing of up to the last 1740 system events. The system shall provide a listing of all of the firmware revision listings for all of the installed network components in the system.

2.6 Graphic & Smoke Control Annunciator -Fire fighters Smoke Control Station ( FSCS) The FSCS shall provide a graphic representation of the facility HVAC system and stairwell pressurization system. Fan override and control switches and fan/damper status LEDs shall be provided as indicated on the shop drawings. The following system controls and indicators shall be provided on the FSCS: Power ON, Trouble, and Signal Silenced LEDs; System Reset, Silence, Trouble Silence, and Drill push buttons. It shall be possible to annunciate text messages via LCD display mounted in the FSCS enclosure. The FSCS shall provide an integral remote microphone for one-way audio system paging. Specific zone module shall be used for intelligent messaging to critical areas like stair cases in event of an emergency.

2.7 Graphic Command Workstation

The command center shall function as the center point for all operational and administration functions required for the systems provided within the specification. The command center shall contain a console that will display and house any equipment necessary for system operation. Console space shall be provided for other equipment provided under other sections of the specifications. A single graphical workstation shall be provided that will enable primary control of the systems provided by this specification. An operator shall not have to operate multiple workstations to receive, view, process and record system events for each system provided. The graphical command workstation(s) shall display a different color text for each message type and color graphic diagrams/floor plans. Each detector has to be mapped in graphical workstation diagrams/floor plans. The graphical workstation diagrams/floor plans should have the each detector mapped. The graphical command workstation shall simultaneously display the following system event views; system event display, graphical diagram display, detailed event message/instructions, and user event log. The workstation shall be an latest personal computer which can support the all software & have enough memory to handle the data. The makes will be as per attached list. The workstation(s) shall be capable of annunciation and control of all fire




detection and smoke control points. The computer shall be minimum of an Pentium Grade Pentium Processor 2.4 Ghz or higher with a 533Mhz front side bus or higher, 512 MB RAM or higher, 320 GB Hard Drive, and 21” LCD monitor. Installation of the computer or monitor can be either desktop or floor mounting or rack/panel mounting. The software shall provide multitasking type environment that allows the user to run several applications simultaneously. The operating program shall run within a 32-bit operating system such as Windows® XP. These Windows applications shall run simultaneously with other programs. The mouse or Alt-Tab keys shall be used to quickly select and switch between multiple applications. The operator shall be able to work in Microsoft Word, Excel and other Windows based software packages, while concurrently annunciating on-line alarms and monitoring functions. Equipment included in the command center shall include: System annunciation and controls for. Fire detection. Fire suppression. Fire pump status Firefighters smoke control. Emergency one-way voice communications. Standby generator status indication and controls. Automatic transfer switch status indication and controls Radio communications Public intercom Public telephone Elevator monitor, status and controls

The graphic display screen shall organize and structure system events for easy user comprehension. The workstation display shall use four relational quadrants. When any event occurs: The "list of events area" shall display the address of the alarm or off-normal point with type and description and time of the event in a prioritized color-coded event list. Highlighting an event in the event list area shall automatically cause the display of a graphical map and other three areas (described below) to display information relating to the highlighted event. The "map area" shall display color graphical representation of the area location in which the alarm or off-normal device is located. It shall be possible for the operator to manually zoom down to any portion of a vector-based graphic without aliasing, artifacting, or pixilation of the image. Preset zoom levels shall not be considered equal. The "event action area" shall display a customized set of written operator instructions for every state (alarm, trouble, restore, etc.) of each point. An event log shall record all events and operator actions to history for future review. An operator's log shall record operator's comments for each event in system history with time and date. The "image area" shall display a stored image of the device relating to the event highlighted in the event list area. When processing fire alarm events the graphic workstation: Shall be capable of acknowledging, silencing, and resetting all fire alarm functions.




Shall be capable of manually activating, deactivating, enabling, and disabling individual fire alarm points. Shall be capable of generating status, maintenance and sensitivity reports for fire alarm components. Receipt of a fire alarm shall activate an audio WAV file over the workstation speakers alerting the operator

2.8 Field Mounted System Components

Intelligent Smoke Detectors: General The smoke detector shall have inbuilt microprocessor and shall be capable of taking an independent alarm decision. Minimum to 125 intelligent smoke detectors should connect to one loop. Each intelligent addressable smoke detector's sensitivity shall be capable of being programmed electronically from Control Panel without any extra tools as most sensitive, more sensitive, normal, less sensitive or least sensitive. In addition to the five sensitivity levels the detector shall provide a pre-alarm sensitivity setting, which shall be settable in 5% increments of the detector's alarm sensitivity value. The detector should continue to give TRUE alarms even if the loop controller on the main panel fails. An alternate alarm sensitivity level shall be provided for each detector, which can be set to any of the five (5) sensitivity settings manually or automatically using a time of day event. In addition to the five alternate sensitivity levels the detector shall provide an alternate pre-alarm sensitivity setting, which shall be settable in 5% increments of the detector's alternate alarm sensitivity value The detector shall be able to differentiate between a long drift above the pre-alarm threshold and fast rise above the threshold. The detector's sensing element reference point shall automatically adjust, compensating for background environmental conditions such as dust, temperature, and pressure. Periodically, the sensing element real-time analog value shall be compared against its reference value. The detector shall provide a maintenance alert signal that 75% to 99% compensation has been used. The detector shall provide a dirty fault signal that 100% or greater compensation has been used. The system shall allow for changing of detector types for service replacement purposes without the need to reprogram the system. The replacement detector type shall automatically continue to operate with the same programmed sensitivity levels and functions as the detector it replaced. System shall display an off-normal condition until the proper detector type has been installed or change in the application program profile has been made.




Multi-sensor Photo Thermal Detector : The multi-sensor or multi-tech smoke detector which will have both photoelectric as well as thermal detection elements shall have inbuilt microprocessor, and shall be capable of taking an independent alarm decision. The scattering of smoke particles shall activate the photo sensor. Each intelligent addressable smoke detector's sensitivity shall be capable of being programmed electronically from Control Panel without any extra tools as: most sensitive, more sensitive, normal, less sensitive or least sensitive. In addition to the five sensitivity levels the detector shall provide a pre-alarm sensitivity setting, which shall be settable in 5% increments of the detector's alarm sensitivity value. The detector should continue to give TRUE alarms even if the loop controller on the main panel fails.. Alarm condition shall be based upon the combined input from the photoelectric, and thermal detection elements. Each detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm that identifies and sets ambient "environmental thresholds approximately six times an hour.. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 75% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value.

4D/Laser Photo Detector.

The 4D/Laser/equivalent detector shall have the ability to have the sensitivity of 0.08 OBS/FTor better. The detector shall have inbuilt microprocessor and shall be capable of taking an independent alarm decision. It shall be possible to automatically change the sensitivity of individual analog/addressable detectors for the day and night periods. Each detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm that identifies and sets ambient environmental thresholds approximately six times an hour. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 75% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value. The laser photo detector shall not require other cleaning requirements than those listed in NFPA 72. Replacement, refurbishment or specialized cleaning of the detector head shall not be required. The laser photo detector shall include two bicolor LEDs that flash green in normal operation and turn on steady red in alarm. INTELLEGENT THERMAL DETECTOR: The heat detector shall have a thermal sensing element /circuit. The detector shall have inbuilt microprocessor, not microcontroller and shall be capable of taking an independent alarm decision. Detectors shall be rated at 15°F (9°C) per minute rate-of-rise and 135°F (57°C) fixed temperature The detector shall be capable of being addressed electronically from control panel without any extra tool.




ADRESSABLE BEAM DETECTOR: The addressable optical beam detector or projected beam smoke detector shall be used for detection in large volumes and double heights. The set shall consist of a transmitter, receiver and control electronics. The transmitter shall project a modulated infrared light beam to the receiver. If there is smoke in the beam path, the receivers signal shall be reduced by the value proportional to the density of the smoke. If the signal is reduced to a level between the obscuration threshold and 93% for 8-10 seconds, the fire alarm relay shall be activated. The alarm obscuration threshold shall be set at 25%, 35% or 50% obscuration depending on the application. The typical coverage shall be equal or more than 100 m x 15.25 m. SMOKE DETECTOR – PHOTOELECTRIC

The detectors shall be use the photo electric ( light scattering ) principal to measure smoke density. Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The detector shall have the ability to set the sensitivity and alarm verification of each of the individual detectors on the circuit. It shall be possible to automatically change the sensitivity of individual analog/addressable detectors for the day and night periods. Each smoke detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information. It shall be possible to program control panel activity to each level. Each smoke detector may be individually programmed to operate at any one of five (5) sensitivity settings. Each detector microprocessor shall contain an environmental compensation algorithm that identifies and sets ambient environmental thresholds approximately six times an hour. The microprocessor shall monitor the environmental compensation value and alert the system operator when the detector approaches 75% and 100% of the allowable environmental compensation value.

Detector Bases: The bases shall be easy to install and mount and shall be of standard type or isolator base type or sounder base type. The sounder base shall be used where local or group alarm signaling is required. The sounder base emits a audible alarm when there is fire. The base shall, contain no electronics and support all series detector types.

3.0 Manual Stations The fire alarm station shall be of polycarbonate construction and incorporate an internal toggle switch. A locked test feature shall be provided. The station shall be finished in red with silver "PULL IN CASE OF FIRE" lettering.

3.1 Sounders/Hooters with Strobe

Electronic sounders shall operate on 24 VDC nominal. Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools, at a sound level of at least 90 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device and shall be flush or surface mounted as shown on plans. They Shall




produce broad band directional sound to guide occupants to safe exists even in complete darkness. Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA, UL Standard 1971, be fully synchronized, and shall meet the following criteria: The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10 of one second. Equivalent alternate type will be also acceptable Strobes shall provide synchronized flash output, that shall be switch selectable for output values of 15cd, 30cd, 75cd & 110cd. Wattage and candela settings shall be visible with the cover installed. When the cover is installed, no mounting hardware shall be visible. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for all wiring.

3.2 Intelligent Modules

The personality of multifunction modules shall be programmable at site to suit conditions and may be changed at any time using a personality code downloaded from the Analog Loop Controller. The modules shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs mounted behind a finished cover plate. A green LED shall flash to confirm communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm status. The module shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes, which can be retrieved for troubleshooting assistance. Input and output circuit wiring shall be supervised for open and ground faults.

Control Relay Module: The Control Relay Module shall provide one form "C" dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 Vdc to control external appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay shall be rated for pilot duty and releasing systems. The position of the relay contact shall be confirmed by the system firmware.

Dual Input Module: The Dual Input Module shall provide two (2) supervised Class B input circuits each capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. The dual input module shall support the following circuit types:

Normally-Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.)

Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (Water flow Switches)

Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.)

Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches Dual Input Signal Module: The Dual Input (Dual Riser Select) Signal Module shall provide a means to selectively connect one of two (2) signaling circuit power risers to one (1) supervised output circuit. The dual input signal module shall support the following operation: Audible/Visible Signal Power Selector (Polarized 24 Vdc @ 2A, 25 Vrms @ 50w or 70 Vrms @




35w of Audio)

Isolator Module: Provide intelligent fault isolators modules. The Isolator Module shall be capable of isolating and removing a fault from a class A data circuit while allowing the remaining data loop to continue operating. Monitor Module: The Monitor Module shall be factory set to support one (1) supervised Class B Normally-Open Active Non-Latching Monitor circuit. Single Input Module: The Single Input Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B input circuit capable of a minimum of 4 personalities, each with a distinct operation. . The single input module shall support the following circuit types:

Normally-Open Alarm Latching (Manual Stations, Heat Detectors, etc.)

Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (Water flow Switches)

Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.)

Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches)

Single Input Signal Module : The Single Input (Single Riser Select) Signal Module shall provide one (1) supervised Class B output circuit capable of a minimum of 2 personalities, each with a distinct operation. When selected as a telephone power selector, the module shall be capable of generating its own "ring tone". The single input signal module shall support the following operations:

Audible/Visible Signal Power Selector (Polarized 24 Vdc @ 2A, 25Vrms @50w or 70 Vrms @ 35 Watts of Audio)

Telephone Power Selector with Ring Tone (Fire Fighter's Telephone)

Waterflow-Tamper Module: The Waterflow/Tamper Module shall be factory set to support two (2) supervised Class B input circuits. Channel A shall support a Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching Water flow Switch circuit. Channel B shall support a Normally-Open Active Latching Tamper Switch.

3.3 Telephone Handsets

The contractor shall Provide firefighter‟s telephone handsets for use with the firefighter's telephone jack stations. The telephone handsets shall be red in color and have a 5 ft (1.3m) coiled cord.




Telephone Jacks The contractor shall provide stainless steel firefighter's telephone jack stations at the locations shown on the drawings. The jack station shall be clearly identified with the words "FIRE FIGHTER'S TELEPHONE" for use with portable fire fighter telephone handsets.

3.4 Power Supply

Standby power supply shall be an electrical battery with capacity to operate the system under maximum supervisory load for 24 hours and capable of operating the system for fifteen (15) minutes of evacuation alarm on all devices, operating at maximum load. The system shall include a charging circuit to automatically maintain the electrical charge of the battery. The system shall automatically adjust the charging of the battery to compensate for temperature.

3.9 Sequence of Operations

General - Audio Upon alarm activation of any area smoke detector, heat detector, manual pull station, sprinkler water flow, the following functions shall automatically occur: The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel or command center. Display the alarm event on the graphical workstation. The LCD Display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the alarm condition including: zone, device type, device location and time/date. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer. Any remote or local annunciator LCD/LED's associated with the alarm zone shall be illuminated. The following audio messages and actions shall occur simultaneously: An evacuation message shall be sounded on fire floors (zones) immediately above and below (adjacent to) the fire floor (zone),on the floor in fire condition. It is the intent of this message to advise occupants hearing this message that they are near danger and should leave the building via the stairs (nearest exit) immediately. Activate visual strobes on the fire floors (zones) immediately above and below (adjacent to) the fire floor (zone) . The visual strobe shall continue to flash until the system has been reset. The visual strobe shall not stop operating when the "Alarm Silence" is pressed. An alert message shall be sounded on the remainder of building. It is the intent of this message to advise occupants to prepare for evacuation if necessary. An instructional message shall be sounded in the stairwells instructing occupants to move carefully and quickly down the stairs to exit the building and to exit to a safe floor if you encounter smoke in the stairwell. An instructional message shall be sounded in the elevator cabs. It is the intent of this message to advise elevator occupants that an emergency exists, the elevator has been directed to the ground floor, and that occupants should quickly exit the building. An instructional message shall be sounded in the lobby. It is the intent of this message to advise lobby occupants to leave the lobby and clear the area for arriving firefighters. An instructional message shall be sounded in the




concourses connected to the building's lobby. It is the intent of this message to prevent new entries into the lobby by advising occupants not to attempt to enter the lobby of the affected building.

Provide selective paging to each individual floor (zone). In addition to the message/channels detailed above, a dedicated page channel shall be capable of simultaneously providing live voice instructions without interrupting any of the messages listed above shall be provided. Transmit signal to the building automation system. Transmit signal to the central station with point identification. Activate automatic smoke control sequences. All automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated outputs activated. All stairwell/exit doors shall unlock throughout the building. All self-closing fire/smoke doors held open shall be released. Direct the closed circuit TV cameras to the alarm event and start video recording.

Supervisory Operation Upon supervisory activation of any sprinkler valve supervisory switch, fire pump off-normal, clean agent fire suppression system trouble, the following functions shall automatically occur: The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel or command center. Display the event on the graphical workstation and display a pictorial image. The LCD display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the supervisory condition including; zone, device type, device location and time/date. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer. Any remote or local annunciator LCD/LED's associated with the supervisory zone shall be illuminated. Transmit signal to the central station PC with point identification. Trouble Operation Upon activation of a trouble condition or signal from any device on the system, the following functions shall automatically occur: The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel or command center. Display the event on the graphical workstation and display a pictorial image. The LCD keypad display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the trouble condition including; zone, device type, device location and time/date. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer. Any remote or local annunciator LCD/LED's associated with the trouble zone shall be illuminated.




Transmit signal to the central station PC with point identification.

Monitor Activation Upon activation of any device connected to a monitor circuit, the following functions shall automatically occur: The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel or command center Display the event on the graphical workstation and display a pictorial image. The LCD display shall indicate all applicable information associated with the status condition including; zone, device type, device location and time/date. All system activity/events shall be documented on the system printer Any remote or local annunciator LCD/LED's associated with the status zone shall be illuminated.

4.0 Notification Appliance Circuits All notification appliance circuits shall have a minimum circuit output rating of: 2 amps @ 24 vdc; 50 watts @ 25V audio, and 35 watts @ 70V audio. The notification circuits shall be power limited. Non-power limited circuits are not acceptable

4.1.1 NETWORK Wiring

The system supplied under this specification shall utilize node-to-node, direct-wired multi-priority peer-to-peer network operations. The backbone shall be multi-core wiring or commercial CAT5/6 cable or Single mode, multimode fiber cable depending on application. A Minimum of 64 ten loop panels shall be capable of being networked together and each panel shall have capability of addressing 2500 points .The system shall utilize independently addressed, smoke detectors, heat detectors and input/output modules as described in this specification. The peer-to-peer network shall contain multiple nodes consisting of the command center, main controller, remote control panels, LCD/LED annunciation nodes, and workstations. Each node is an equal, active functional node of the network, which is capable of making all local decisions and generating network tasks to other nodes in the event of node failure or communications failure between a nodes. When a network is wired in a Class B configuration, a single break or short on the network wiring isolates the system into two groups of panels. Each group continues to function as a peer-to-peer network working with their combined databases. When wired using a Class A configuration, a single break or short on the network wiring causes the system to isolate the fault, and network communication continues uninterrupted, without any loss of function. Should multiple wiring faults occur, the network re-configures into many sub-networks and continues to respond to alarm events from every panel that can transmit and receive network messages The remote control panel/network nodes shall meet the same requirements as described in control panel section and shall contain Common control switches with minimum 640 character LCD




display, as required with Integral power supply(s) with secondary stand-by power. It shall also have signaling line circuits for communications with analog/addressable devices, as required, Audio amplification, as required, Notification appliance circuits, as required and Auxiliary function circuits and operations, as required. The network communication shall be based on a Local Area Network (LAN). The network shall use a deterministic token-passing method. Collision detection and recovery type protocols are not acceptable substitutes due to life safety requirements. In addition, there shall be no master, polling computer, central file computer, display controller or other central element (weak link) in the network which, on failure, may cause complete loss of network communications or cause major degradation of network capability. There shall be no cascading of CPUs or master-slave relationships at the network level to facilitate network communications. Failure of any node shall not cause failure or communication degradation of any other node or change the network communication protocol among surviving nodes located within distance limitations

4.1.2 NETWORK REMOTE MONOITORING:

The system shall provide off premise or remote communications capability for transmitting system events to multiple Central Monitoring Station using web servers or Netcom cards on main panel using the open TCP/IP protocol The system shall provide the remote location with point identification of system events.

4.2 Submittals

It is the responsibility of the contractor to meet the entire intent and functional performance detailed in these specifications. Approved submittals shall only allow the contractor to proceed with the installation and shall not be construed to mean that the contractor has satisfied the requirements of these specifications. The contractor shall submit three (3) complete sets of documentation within 30 calendar days after award of purchase order. Each submittal shall include a cover letter providing a list of each variation that the submittal may have from the requirements of the contract documents. In addition the Contractor shall provide specific notation on each shop drawing, sample, catalog cut, data sheet, installation manual, etc. submitted for review and approval, of each such variation. All drawings and diagrams shall include the contractor's title block, complete with drawing title, contractor's name, address, date including revisions, and preparer's and reviewer's initials

Product Data Data sheets with the printed logo or trademark of the manufacturer for all equipment. Indicated in the documentation will be the type, size, rating, style, and catalog number for all items proposed to meet the system performance detailed in this specification. The proposed equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Architect/Engineer.

System Calculations Complete calculations shall be provided which show the electrical load on the following system components:




Each system power supply, including stand alone booster supplies. Each standby power supply (batteries). Each notification appliance circuit. Each auxiliary control circuit that draws power from any system power supply.

4.3 Quality Assurance

The contractor shall have successfully installed similar system fire detection, evacuation voice and visual signaling control components on a previous project of comparable size and complexity. The owner reserves the right to reject any control components for which evidence of a successful prior installation performed by the contractor cannot be provided. The contractor shall have in-house engineering and project management capability consistent with the requirements of this project. Qualified and approved representatives of the system manufacturer shall perform the detailed engineering design of central and remote control equipment. Qualified and approved representatives of the system manufacturer shall produce all panel and equipment drawings and submittals, operating manuals. The contractor is responsible for retaining qualified and approved representative(s) of those system manufacturers specified for detailed system design and documentation, coordination of system installation requirements, and final system testing and commissioning in accordance with these specifications.

4.4 Pre-Installation Requirements

The provider shall submit a detailed project plan that will describe in detail how the provider will approach the project, from inception to finalization. The plan must include at a minimum the following information: Project Staging Project Management Equipment Schedules Installation Time Lines Other Trade Requirements Final Acceptance Testing Personnel Resumes Progress Report Sample All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with each manufacturer's recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc. before beginning system installation. Refer to the manufacturers riser/connection diagram and details for all specific system installation/termination/wiring data.

4.5 Start and Completion Dates

The starting and completion dates for this work will be established at the pre-bid meeting.




4.6 Training The System Supplier shall schedule and present a minimum of 8 hours of documented formalized instruction for the building owner, detailing the proper operation of the installed System.The instruction shall be presented in an organized and professional manner by a person trained in the operation and maintenance of the equipment and who is also thoroughly familiar with the Installation. The instruction shall cover the schedule of maintenance required by NFPA 72 and any additional maintenance recommended by the system manufacturer.

5.0 SYSTEM OPERATION – FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATIONS AND PRODUCTS 5.1 General: The system shall be integrated into a comprehensive system, to provide the functional

performance described as follows: 5.1.1 Fire Detection and Alarm System 5.1.1.1 The fire detection and alarm system shall monitor and display the activation of each device in the

system, such as heat detector, smoke detector, manual break-glass unit, sprinkler water flow switch, sprinkler valve tamper switch, hose reel water flow switch and hose reel valve tamper switch or any other input device which may be required.

5.1.1.2 The system shall initiate output functions such as automatic alarm annunciation via speakers,

fans shutdown, automatic notification to the Fire main control PC and activation of audible hooters/directional sounders/strobes.

5.1.1.3 The system shall be of the addressable intelligent type, completely supervised, such that a break

in any wire (loop) shall not prevent any device from operating. The system shall be of the type such that each device connected to the system shall be provided with unique address and separately identified at the Main control panel (MCP).

5.1.1.4 The wiring shall be monitored against faults such as opens, shorts, earth‟s or data transmission

failure. Detection addressable loops, capable of handling minimum of 250 addressable points shall return to the control panel.

5.1.2 Emergency Paging And Voice Alarm 5.1.2.1 The system shall permit communication in the form of paging from the main control panel and

telephone switchboard to any floor or group of floors simultaneously. The system shall be capable of manual operation or automatic operation initiated by the fire alarm system. Speakers shall be located as required to achieve acceptable audibility in all Communication addressable loops will be supervised and therefore return to the control panel.

5.1.3 Emergency Telephone 5.1.3.1 The emergency telephone system shall provide two way communications capability between the

main control panel and jacks for emergency telephone handsets. The emergency telephone




handsets shall be furnished as part of the overall system. 5.2 Scope 5.2.1 The Main control panel shall be located in the main control room now called the Fire Command

Centre (FCC) as located in the drawings. The appropriate authorities shall approve the exact location.

5.2.2 A active & networkable remote repeater panel shall also be installed at designated places and

shall repeat all alarm functions displayed at the main control panel. 5.2.2.1 Graphics software shall be loaded on the PC in the FCC and capable of displaying all

information graphically. It shall be capable of uploading drawings in the AutoCAD format and pop up alarms or silence them.

5.2.2 photoelectric type smoke detector shall be with integral microprocessor and shall be capable of

taking an independent alarm decision. In case of the failure of the main loop controller the detector shall be capable of operating in standalone mode or degrade mode and continue to take decisions

5.2.3 Heat detectors of the fixed temperature (57 deg.C) type or rate of rise of temperature type shall

be used in areas environmentally unsuited for smoke detectors such Kitchens, Valet Laundries, Emergency Generator rooms,

5.2.4 Each fan system shall be provided with a duct-mounted smoke detector, which utilizes full width

sensing probes and is suitable for the air velocities to which it is subjected. Duct mounted smoke detectors concealed from view shall be supplied with a remote indicator, located near the location of the hidden detector, appropriately labeled as to the detector‟s location.

5.2.5 Break-glass stations (manual fire alarm stations) shall be located on the occupied side of the

door to each exit stair and at intermediate locations as required (Maximum distance between pull stations shall not exceed 60 m). .

5.2.6 Sprinkler, Hose reel water flow switch and valve tamper switch shall be provided at each

sprinkler system valve location (the flow and tamper switches shall be generally furnished and mounted by the sprinkler system installer and wired by the fire detection alarm system installer).

5.2.7 Magnetic hold open devices shall be provided where required for the automatic release of

smoke / fire doors. 5.3 System Operation 5.3.1 The system shall be arranged for categories of alarm inputs and provide output functions

appropriate to each of the categories; 5.3.1.1 Supervisory Monitor input : The following inputs shall be considered supervisory monitoring

functions:




5.3.2.1 Sprinkler system shut off valve tamper switch. 5.3.2.2 Removal of a smoke detector from its base. 5.3.2.3 Fire / Sprinkler pump status (i.e. running, power available, malfunction). 5.3.2.4 Wiring faults. 5.3.3 Activation of a supervisory monitoring device shall provide the following indications: 5.3.3.1 The MCP and remote annunciators shall indicate shall indicate an audible and visual

“TROUBLE” condition. In addition, the “trouble alarm” shall be displayed on the graphic display unit for the type of alarm.

5.3.3.2 Printer shall print clear next message on the event log indication the device, which initiated a

trouble alarm. 5.3.3.3 An alarm signal shall be automatically sent to the local control room as well as REMOTE

control room if designed This may be accomplished by means of an web server /Netcom/ digital dialer.

5.3.3.4 In case of fire all lift call and door buttons and signals shall become inoperative, lifts serving that

floor shall be signaled to immediately return to the ground floor or as designated by the local Fire department and be held for the exclusive use of the Fire Brigade. Should such an alarm occur on the ground floor, the lifts shall be signaled to return to an alternate floor which is not in alarm.

5.3.3.5 Signals shall be sent directly to heating, ventilating and air conditioning fan motor controllers for

status monitoring circuits to confirm the operation of the fan systems. 5.3.3.6 The details of the fan control sequence shall be as follows: 5.3.3.7 All fans serving the areas affected by the alarm condition shall shutdown. 5.3.3.8 Smoke extraction fan system shall have to be started 5.3.3.9 Stair pressurization fans shall be started. 5.4.1.1 Signals shall be transmitted to the paging system to display zone in alarm. 5.4.1.2 The printer shall print a clear text message on the event log printer The printer shall print the

device information indicating clearly in plain language which device is in alarm, the time, and the date associated with the alarm. The printer shall print all follow-up information regarding this alarm, such as acknowledge, reset etc.

5.4.1.3 All access control doors shall be released in case of fire condition shall allow for more than one

floor at a time to be displayed.




5.4.1.4 The automatic voice evacuation alarm shall be initiated from the fire alarm system upon

activation of an alarm. The alarm shall consist of a “slow whoop” alarm tone for a maximum of fifteen (15) seconds followed by an automatic preselected voice evacuation message. At the end of each message the „slow whoop‟ shall continue for fifteen (15) seconds followed again by the automatic voice evacuation signal. This sequence of alarm shall sound until the signal silence switch is operated at the main fire alarm control panel or the fire alarm has been reset as described previously. The voice evacuation signal shall be distinct, authoritative without any inflection and shall be repeated in several languages as agreed with the fire brigade.

5.4.1.5 The alert tone shall consist of an introductory pulse tone for fifteen (15) seconds followed by an

alert message to advise that this floor is not in alarm but the floors that are in alarm shall be stated. The message shall also state that the occupants shall be prepared to evacuate the building when the evacuation alarm is given. The alert tone shall be distinctly different from that of the evacuation alarm.

5.4.1.6 Each stairwell shall receive a voice message without a fire alarm tone. The message shall state

that there is an emergency in the building anyone presently in the stairwell shall not re-enter any floors but should proceed immediately to the ground floor exit level. Zone circuits shall be designed for this activity

5.4.1.7 During the automatic transmission of the fire alarm and alert tones, it shall be possible at the

main fire alarm panel to permit selective voice paging. Upon activation of manual controls witches and the microphone push-to-talk switch, it shall be possible to transmit a message to the selected areas. The activation of any such switches and microphone switch shall initiate the “slow whoop‟ alarm tone for fifteen (15) seconds followed by an announcement or message. The message shall follow the „slow whoop and the person making the announcement be cued when to start the announcement by a red indicator located adjacent to the microphone. When the microphone button is released, the “slow whoop‟ shall sound for fifteen (15) seconds, after which the system shall return to the automatic voice evacuation or alert mode until reset as mentioned above.

5.4.1.8 It shall be possible to load a variety of prerecorded message plus combinations of floor fire

alarms prerecorded message, which shall all be selected by the system software. Amendments to the prerecorded message and any reprogramming of the operating system shall be accomplished by front panel operated push buttons, selector switches and a keypad.

5.4.1.9 It shall be possible to transmit an alarm tone to speakers in one zone while sending a voice

message to another zone while the rest of the building is receiving alert tone, all at the same time.

5.4.1.10 Each speaker zone (with dual circuits) shall be connected to its own amplifier. It shall therefore

be possible to have as many channels as there are speaker zone. A minimum of three (3) channels shall be supplied; an ALERT channel, an EVAC channel and a PAGE channel.

5.5.1.1 Zoning of speaker circuit shall be as indicated in the drawings.




5.5.1.2 The emergency evacuation and voice alarm system amplification equipment shall be sized to accommodate the total quantity of speakers for each channel (total of three) plus 25% spare reserve capacity in each channel.

5.5.1.3 The system shall be provided with redundant amplifiers arrange in such a manner that failure of

an amplifier shall not result in loss of acceptable audibility in any area of the building. 5.5.1.4 Emergency Telephone System: All remote emergency telephones will communicate with the

emergency telephone control panel at the main control room: 5.5.1.5. The insertion of any telephone handset into its jack will cause the appropriate phone location

indicator to flash and a distinctive audible pulsing sound to be heard in the fire command centre. The subsequent picking-up of the master phone and operation of that phone selector switch will silence the pulsing tone, cause the phone location.

5.5.1.6 The emergency telephone system will provide the capacity to handle simultaneous use of

multiple remote phones. All phone jacks will be annunciated and monitored against fault or tampering (i.e. supervised).

5.5.1.7 The removal of all remote telephone handsets from their jacks will cause the restoration of all

normal supervisory functions. If any remote phone is not removed, then the appropriate phone zone indicator will flash and the pulsing tone will resume in the fire command centre.

5.6 Coordination With Other Systems The fire detection and alarms system shall have interface with other building systems, which are

described under other sections of the report, as follows: Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Building Automation System (BAS) Sprinkler / Pumps system The life safety system is required to monitor fire hydrant / sprinkler pump status. The pump

controllers shall have the necessary volt free output signals available. 5.7 Cables 5.7.1.1 Cabling for Fire Alarm System shall be 2core multistrand ATC copper conductor PVC sheathed

FRLS 1.5 sq mm. 5.7.1.2 The cables used shall be exclusively for Fire Detection System. The multi-core cables shall not

be shared for other low voltage or high voltage circuits. 5.7.1.3 The cables connected to detectors shall be given S –loop on both the sides of the detectors




which shall be properly clamped to the ceiling. Loop shall also be left where cables connects sounders, panels, dampers etc. Appropriate glands shall be provided where the cables enters the junction box.

5.7.1.4 Cables shall be laid by skilled and experienced workmen. Care shall be taken while laying

cables to avoid kinks. At all the changes in direction (vertical and horizontal planes) the cables shall be bent smooth with a radius as recommended by the manufacturers.

5.7.1.5 No joints shall be allowed between two points. The sleeve at joints shall be shaved off like a

pencil and shall not be cut square to avoid cutting of conductors.

5.7.1.6 Cabling scope shall be supply and laying of cables of core sizes minimum size 2 core x 1.5 sq mm copper conductor FRLS Cables. Depends on the length of the loop, contractor has to select the core sizes. However the core sizes should not be less than 1.5 Sq.mm dia.

5.7.2..1 All cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective

signaling system. Loop wiring shall be of 1.5 sq mm 500 Volts.

5.7.2.2 All initiating, and supervisory circuit wiring shall be not less than 2.5mm2, 500 volts..

5.7.2.3 Fire Alarm System and PA speaker cables should not have the same colour code. Both should

have separate colours to identify easily. 5.7.2.4 All field wiring shall be completely supervised. No cables more than two nos. should be saddled

directly in to wall /ceiling. Contractor should use cable tray/trunking for wherever more than two cables are to be layed.

5.7.2.5 All speaker and telephone circuits shall be not less than 1.5mm2, 500 volts 2 no copper

conductor twin twisted Cable multi-stranded shielded Insulated Straight PVC sheathed FRLS 1 sq mm in 25 mm dia ISI mark HMS variety PVC conduit with 2 mm wall thickness, FR grade

5.7.2.6 Cabling shall be completely installed, field connections made and tested for stray voltage, short

circuits, and ground faults prior to connection to the intelligent modules. 5.7.2.7 All loop cabling shall be identified by ins and outs. Ins is defined as coming from the panel. 5.7.2.8 Red and Black must be used for 24 VDC panel power circuit. Audio visual indicating circuits

shall be colour coded. Colour code shall not be duplicated in the same panel. 5.7.2.9 No voltage supply from any other source than the primary power 230 VAC and the panel 24

VDC power supply shall be utilized. 5.7.2.10 Intelligent loop circuits shall be labeled at all junction locations by the panel number and loop

number.




5.7.2.11 Intelligent loop circuits shall be provided with adequate junction boxes be expandable and provide a means for connecting to the loop in the junction box.

5.7.2.12 Control and other panels shall be mounted with sufficient clearance for observation and testing.

Fire alarm junction boxes shall be clearly marked for distinct identification.. 5.7.2.13 All fire alarm junction boxes should be mounted in approved locations for ease of maintenance

from floor level. 5.7.2.14 All junction boxes shall be made up in a uniformly and orderly manner.

FAS Cables: ( FRLS rated)

2 x 1.5 sq mm annealed tinned copper(ATC) conductor PVC sheathed FRLS armoured Multi strand cables as per specifications given below;

i) Cable Type : Signal

: Armored FRLS

: Multistrand Conductors

: Twisted pair

ii) Conductor : Conductor dia - 0.2mm

: No. of Strands - 48

: ATC

: Resistance per Km. (Max. 25 Ohms)

iii) Individual Insulation : PVC Type as per IS - 5831

: Insulation Thickness nominal : 0.6mm

iv) Total Cores : No. of Pairs 1 (One) laid in sequence

: Colour code: Red

v) Overall Sheath : Thickness - 1.8mm

: Material - PVC type as per IS - 5831

: Outer dia - 10.5mm dia min

5.8 Fire Alarm Control Panels and GA

5.8.1 Each network FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANLEL now called FACP shall contain a

microprocessor-based central processing unit (CPU). The FACP shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent detectors,




addressable modules, local and remote operator terminals, printers, annunciators, emergency voice communication systems, public address system, building management system, and other system controlled devices. The Fire Alarm System shall include all required hardware and system programming to provide a complete and operational system, capable of providing the protected premises with the following functions.

5.8.1.1 Modular systems manufacture with a layered application concept, including an “operational

layer” and a “human interface layer”, to allow maximum flexibility at the system with a minimum physical size requirement.

5.8.1.2 All system operational software is to be stored in FLASH memory. 5.8.1.3 System response to any alarm condition must occur within 3 seconds, regardless of the size and

the complexity of the installed system. 5.8.2 Each FACP on the network shall perform the following functions: 5.8.2.1 Supervise and monitor all intelligent/addressable detectors and monitor modules connected to

the system for normal, trouble and alarm conditions. 5.8.2.2. Supervise all initiating signaling and notification circuits throughout the facility. Voice evacuation

speakers to be monitored by the public address system. 5.8.2.3. Detect the activation of any initiating device and the location of the alarm condition. Operate all

notification appliances and auxiliary devices as programmed. 5.8.2.4. Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble, supervisory or alarm, condition on operator's

terminal, panel display, and annunciators. 5.8.2.5. Visually display sprinkler valves and water flow switches. 5.8.2.6. Visually display status of emergency power. 5.8.2.7. Shall have controls for unlocking stairway doors. 5.8.2.8. Graphically display all zones. 5.8.2.9. Trouble alarm for public address system. 5.8.2.10. Trouble Alarm for Building Management System. 5.8.2.11. System status LEDs for Test status, CPU Fail status, Ground Fault status, Disable status 5.8.2.12. Common control switches for reset, Alarm silence, panel silence, drill silence. 5.8.2.13. Other operator control switches such as previous message switch. Next message switch, and

more details switch.




5.8.3.1 Each FACP node shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel which shall include individual, colour coded system status LEDs, and an alpha-numeric keypad for field programming and control of the node.

5.8.3.2. All programming or editing of the existing programming in the system shall be achieved without

special equipment or interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the fire alarm control panel. 5.8.3.3. Each FACP node shall be capable of providing the following features: 5.8.3.4 Block Acknowledge for Trouble Conditions 5.8.3.5 Rate Charger Control 5.8.3.6 Control-By-Time (Delay, Pulse, time of day, etc.) 5.8.3.7 Automatic Day/Night Sensitivity Adjust (high/low) 5.8.3.8 Environmental Drift Compensation (selectable ON or OFF) 5.8.3.9. Smoke Detector Pre-alarm Indication at Control Panel 5.8.3.10 NFPA 72 Smoke Detector Sensitivity Test 5.8.3.11 System Status Reports 5.8.3.12 Alarm Verification, by device, with tally 5.8.3.13 Multiple Printer Interface 5.8.3.14 Multiple CRT Display Interface 5.8.3.15 Non-Fire Alarm Module Reporting 5.8.3.16 Automatic NFPA 72 Detector Test 5.8.3.17 Programmable Trouble Reminder 5.8.3.18 Upload/Download System Database to PC Computer 5.8.3.19 One-Man Walk Test 5.8.3.20 Smoke Detector Maintenance Alert 5.8.3.21 Security Monitor Points 5.8.3.22 Alpha-numeric Pager Interface




5.8.3.23 On-line or Off-line programming 5.8.3.24 Interface with security system, Building Management System public address system. 5.8.3.25 Ground fault detection. 5.8.4 Fire Alarm Central Processing Unit 5.8.4.1 "The proposed Fire Alarm System shall be from a single UL listed manufacturer for complete

compatibility of the proposed large peer-to-peer networked system. Master-Slave network will not be acceptable. Each occupant shall have its own Fire Alarm Control Panel as a Node in the Network complete with its own Network Control Annunciator, Web Server, Graphics Control Station and BACnet Gateway for integration with the individual Occupants Building Management System.

5.8.4.2 The Fire Alarm System for the areas which Occupants share with other Occupants due to the

lack of Fire Compartmentalization in the common area shall be controlled by the Network Control By Event Equations, as this area is treated as a Life Safety Risk by all the Occupants. When the fire is sensed by any one Node in the Network for the Shared Area shall be annunciated at the Network Control Annunciator of all the other Occupants. All the Outputs associated with the Fire Alarm Event in the Shared Area shall be actuated / triggered automatically like activation of Pressurization Fans, Fire Dampers to close, Sounder / Strobes to be activated, Ventilation Fans to be run on double speed etc. in the Shared Area, as if the Fire Alarm Event has occurred in all the Nodes which share the Common Area. The Alarmed System for the Shared Area shall only be Controlled and Reset by a separate Network Control Annunciator dedicated for the Shared Area, after due investigation by the authorities concerned."

5.8.4.3 Peer-to-Peer Fire Alarm Network 5.8.4.3.1 Peer-to-Peer Fire Alarm Network is the interface with allows intelligent Fire Alarm Control

Panels to form a network. Each local control panel (network node) maintains its own area of protection, while monitoring and controlling other areas (other network nodes).

5.8.4.3.2 Local information shall be displayed at each network node. In areas such as a security office,

where the entire network must be monitored, network annunciators shall be required. 5.8.4.3.3 Features: Fiber optic (multi-mode), wire, or combination wire/fiber communications path. NFPA Style 4 or Style 7 Network operation. Based on proven technology.

True peer-to-peer communications. Each node stores its own program and communicates equally with all other nodes.




Token-passing non-collision Protocol. No “master” polling computer or other central weak link.

Inherently regenerative system. Each node acts as a repeater to reshape and regenerate data signals. Failure of any node does not affect any other node / communications among surviving nodes.

High-speed data communications (312, 500 BPS).

Simple plug-in module, the network shall be compatible to panels anywhere on the network.

Multiple Network Control Stations (NCS) may be placed anywhere on the network. Additional NCS‟s may be used to provide inherent “hot” backup.

Multiple Intelligent Network Annunciators (INA) may be placed anywhere on the network.

NCS and INA display all network activity. Unlike competitive systems, the point display capacity is NOT held to less than the maximum network capacity.

Single small-gauge twisted pair wire (no shield necessary) for data communications path.

Electrical isolation between nodes. Network clock synchronization. History Buffers on INA, NCS and Intelligent Fire Control Panels.

Powerful Cooperative-Control-by-Event allows point(s) on one node to activate point(s) on other nodes. Any input can turn on any output, network-wide.

NCS Network Control Station The NCS shall based on a UL 864 recognized computer. Special hardware and software are to

be added by manufacturer to make the NCS operate as a Command Center. 5.8.4.4 Network Graphics Control Station 5.8.4.4.1 The Network Control Station (NCS) is a high performance desktop computer with text and color

graphics display capability of all network events and points. The NCS runs under the user-friendly Windows® environment.

5.8.4.4.3 NCS Software Features:

Windows® 2000 operating system

As built location of all devices and detectors on the loop.




Mouse control with extensive use of Windows-type “point and click” operation.

Vectors to a screen displaying an alarm with or without operator intervention.

Cursor changes automatically to indicate on-screen action areas.

New and Acknowledged Event boxes display all off-normal status simultaneously with graphic screens.

Operator log-on with response tracking.

History Manager records operator, event, and response with time-and-date stamp to hard drive.

Multiple search filters make History Manager a power management tool.

An unlimited number of events can be stored in the history manager. A warning is generated every 100 events after 100,000 events are stored.

A complete library of device icons is included.

Custom device icons can be created in the field.

Add, edit, and delete devices and screens in the field.

Link devices or system events to voice (*.wav), text, or bitmap files.

All software backed up on CD-RW.

Read Status/Program/Edit window – network points (online).

Walk-test over the network

Up to five states can be visually represented for each input device: Normal, Trouble, Alarm, Pre-Alarm (detectors), Disabled.

Up to two states can be visually represented for each system Trouble: Normal, Trouble.

Off-Normal Event window (color coded).

Network-wide Disabled Device window.

Mini-History viewer, last 1,000 events (color coded).

Programmable access per feature, per node, per user matrix.

Logs in history any programming changes.

GSP (Graphic Setup Program) imports DWG-formatted (AutoCAD®) files to BMP.

Graphic Editing and Navigation aids (on-site modifiable).

SVGA 1024 x 768 color graphics.

Programmable Alarm and Trouble tones (variable frequency).

Control ON/OFF all networked panels

Archived history files.




5.8.4.5 Network Control Annunciator(Repeater Panel) 5.8.4.5.1 The Network Control Annunciator (NCA) shall be a 168 or higher- character backlit LCD display

with operator keypad for the network. As a remote node on a network, it provides both system control and display capabilities for all network nodes.

5.8.4.5.2 The NCA shall have optional display for the fire control panels. When mounted in the control

cabinet and connected to a stand-alone panel, it provides system control and display capabilities for a stand-alone panel. When connected to a networked panel as a primary display, it can provide network control and status/history display capabilities.

5.8.4.5.3 Hardware Features:

Full supervision of all inputs and network integrity.

Enhanced-format 168 or higher -character LCD display with backlighting.

Keyboard interface (EIA-232)

Ten LED status indicators:

Power, Fire Alarm, Pre-Alarm, Security Alert, Supervisory, Trouble, Signal Silence, CPU failure, Point Disabled, Other Event.

Alphanumeric keypad with tactile and audible feedback.

Four status relays: Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory, Security (Form-C).

Nonvolatile real-time clock can be synchronized with network by master node.

Optional Security Key switch enable to NCA.

Optional Security Tamper switch.

Individual Enable / Disable or Group Enable/Disable local and networked zones.

Control ON/OFF of local (the panel in the same cabinet and networked control points.

Read Status of local (the panel in the same cabinet) and networked points and zones.

Network event display and optional CRT with keyboard.

Network master fire phone, paging control, HVAC control.

Network-wide: Acknowledge, Silence, Reset.

Lamp Test (local to NCA).

History Buffer ( 1,000 System events).

Report status of networked panels and their respective field devices to a central station.

One master level and nine user level passwords. The Master can assign each User access levels (programming, alter status).




Interactive Summary Event Count display, event handling package.

Online programming and alter-status programs.

Intuitive user guidance program including interactive soft keys.

Enhanced Read Status / Alter Status displays.

New history filters for report displaying and printing: All Events, Only Alarms, Only Troubles, Only Supervisory, Only Security, Time Interval, Point Range.

Fully programmable node-mapping subsystem.

New Advanced / Basic Walk-test program.

Timer control for Auto Silence, AC Fail Delay. 5.8.5 Web Server The Web Server or equivalent Network card with TCPIP connectivity shall be a web-based

device that acts as an HTML server, allowing remote access to the network via the internet or an intranet. With the NWS interface, users can view fire alarm control panel (FACP) event history, event status, device properties and other information based on access permissions defined by the system administrator. Features: For the Web Server and Serial Configuration Tool:

Access network device statuses and properties remotely via the Internet or an Intranet.

Standard Ethernet over IP connection.

Supports up to 64 operator and 64 administrator accounts.

Online Authorization log keeps a record of the username, time and date of the last 50 users to access the system.

Built-in password security and user-access record.

Multiple users can access the web server at the same time.

Supports standard Microsoft® Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher.

Intuitive Explorer-style user interface. 5.8.6 BACnet/MODBUS/LONWORKS Gateway The BACnet/eqv Gateway shall provides an interface between fire panel network and a

network using the BACnet/IP/eqv communication protocol. BACnet protocol is an American National Standard (ANSI/ASHRAE 135-1995). With the Gateway interface, devices on fire alarm control panels are represented as BACnet objects to the BACnet client. The user subscribes to Event Notification objects per FACP, and the BACnet device receives events from




objects on the FACP as a result of this subscription. 5.8.7. Loop Controller (LC) Loop Control boards shall be provided to monitor and control each of the Signaling Line Circuit

(SLC) loops in the network node. The loop Control board shall contain its own microprocessor and shall be capable of operating in local mode in the case of a failure in the main CPU of the control panel. In local mode, the loop interface board shall detect alarms and activate output devices on its own SLC loop.

The LIB shall not require any jumper cuts or address switch settings to initialize SLC Loop

operations. The loop interface board shall provide power to, and communicate with, all of the intelligent

detectors and addressable modules connected to its SLC Loop over a single pair of wires. This SLC Loop shall be capable of operation as NFPA Style 7.

The loop interface board shall receive information from all intelligent detectors and shall process

this information to determine whether normal, alarm, or trouble conditions exist for that particular detector. The loop interface board software shall include software to automatically adjust and compensate for dust accumulation to maintain detector performance as it is affected by environmental factors. The analog information may also be used for automatic detector testing and for the automatic determination of detector maintenance requirements.

The LCB shall communicate with each intelligent addressable detector and addressable module

on its SLC loop and verify proper device function and status. 5.8.8. Enclosures Control panels shall be housed in FM/UL-listed or BS/IEC Standards cabinets suitable for

surface or semi-flush mounting. Cabinets shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and the manufacturer's standard finish. The back box and door shall be constructed of 1.5mm steel with provisions for electrical cable connections into the sides and bottom. The door shall provide a key lock and include a transparent opening for viewing all indicators. For convenience, the door shall have the ability to be hinged on either the right or left-hand side. The control unit shall be modular in structure for ease of installation, maintenance, and future expansion.

5.8.9 Field Programming The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the field without the need

for special tools or electronic equipment and shall not require field replacement of electronic integrated circuits.

All local FACP node programming shall be accomplished through the FACP keyboard or

through a portable laptop.




All field defined programs shall be stored in non-volatile memory. The programming function shall be enabled with a password that may be defined specifically for

the system when it is installed. Multi-levels of password protection shall be provided in addition to a key-lock cabinet. One level is used for status level changes such as zone disable or manual on/off commands. A second (higher-level) is used for actual change of program information.

5.8.10 Specific System Operations Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: Means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of any or

all intelligent detectors in the FACP node from each system keypad or from the keyboard of the video terminal. Sensitivity range shall be within allowed UL limits.

Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable detectors in the system may be independently selected and enabled for alarm verification. Each FACP shall keep a count of the number of times each detector has entered the verification cycle. These counters may be displayed and reset by the proper operator commands.

5.8.11 System Point Operations

All devices in the FACP node may be enabled or disabled through the local keypad or video terminal.

Any FACP node output point may be turned on or off from the local system keypad or the video

terminal. Point Read: The FACP node shall be able to display the following point status diagnostic

functions without the need for peripheral equipment. Each point shall be annunciated for the parameters listed:

Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: Each FACP node shall automatically interrogate each

intelligent system detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a period of time. If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is below or above normal

limits, then the system shall enter the trouble mode, and the particular intelligent detector shall be annunciated on the system display, network display and printed on the optional system printer. This feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform.

5. 10 Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of

conventional alarm initiating devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the fire alarm control panel SLC loops.

The monitor module shall mount in a 100 mm square, 100 mm deep electrical box.




The IDC zone shall be suitable for Style D operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.

For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package and

shall be no larger than 60 mm x 30 mm x 13 mm. 5.11 Batteries and External Charger 5.11.1 Battery

Batteries shall be 12 volt, Cd type or better and shall not be hazardous to humans or environment The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level checks

for refilling, spills and leakage shall not be required. Battery shall be heavy duty type of life span of minimum 5 years. 5.13 Uninterruptable Power System The Contractor shall furnish and install an Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) with the following

features: Voltage: Input – 240 Volts, single phase, two wire plus ground Output – 240 Volts, single phase, two wire plus ground. Output load capacity – to be designed by the contractor as per load. Surge protection Overload capacity – 200% for 60 seconds in normal operation. Monitoring and control Installation Installation shall be in accordance with the IFC, NEC, NFPA 72, local codes, as shown on the

drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer. All cables ,junction boxes, cable supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and

may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be




taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be

flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas.

Manual Pull Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi flush mounting as shown on

the plans, and shall be installed not less than 1 m nor more than 1.2 m above the finished floor. Typical Operation Actuation of any manual station, smoke detector, heat detector or water flow switch shall cause

the following operations to occur unless otherwise specified: Activate all programmed speaker circuits in a zone or throughout. Actuate strobe units until the panel is reset in a zone or throughout. Light the associated indicators corresponding to active speaker circuits. Release all magnetic door holders to doors to adjacent zones on the floor from which the alarm

was initiated. Where required, return all elevators to the primary or alternate floor of egress. A smoke detector in any elevator lobby shall, in addition to the above functions, return all

elevators to the primary or alternate floor of egress. Smoke detectors in the elevator machine room shall return all elevators in to the primary floor.

Heat detectors installed to shut down elevator power shall do so in accordance with ANSI A17.1 requirements and be coordinated with the electrical installation. Smoke detectors at the primary level elevator lobby shall return elevation to an alternate level.

Duct type smoke detectors shall, in addition to the above functions, shut down the ventilation

system or close associated control dampers as appropriate. Activation of any sprinkler system low pressure switch, on valve tamper switch, shall cause a

system supervisory alarm indication. Commissioning Commissioning shall include pre-testing, troubleshooting, acceptance testing, and punch list. The service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the

manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. The Contractor shall pre-test the system before the final acceptance testing and shall submit a pretest report to the Engineer:




Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.

Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP. Verify activation of all flow switches. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. Open signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. Open and short (wire only) network communications and verify that trouble signals are received

at network annunciators or reporting terminals. Ground initiating device circuits and verify response of trouble signals. Ground signaling line circuits and verify response of trouble signals. Ground notification appliance circuits and verify response of trouble signals. Check alert tone and prerecorded voice message to all alarm notification devices. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using smoke test. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced on the

system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points.

When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual should be

consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.

Check each zone smoke control sequence under “automatic,” “on” and “off” operation. Perform the following tests for the public address/fire alarm system: Simulate a fire condition using each of the following initiating devices in each zone: 1) manual pull

station - waterflow switch 2) area smoke detector - projected beam smoke 3) heat detector - detector 4) duct smoke detector

After alarm verification time has exceeded ensure that proper voice institution messages are

transmitted to the proper zone. Simulate live voice announcements in all zones using All Call, All Call Minus, Page to Evac., and

Page to Alert functions to ensure that proper voice instruction messages are transmitted to the proper zones. Stairways shall be on an independent zone separate from all other zones.




Test & Inspection

All intelligent analog addressable devices shall be tested for current address, sensitivity, and user defined message. All wiring shall be tested for continuity, shorts, and grounds before the system is activated. All test equipment, the installing contractor, shall make instruments, tools and labor required to conduct the tests available.

The system including all its sequence of operations shall be demonstrated to the Owner, his representative, and the local fire inspector. In the event the system does not operate properly, the test shall be terminated. Corrections shall be made and the testing procedure shall be repeated until it is acceptable to the Owner, his representatives and the fire inspector.

At the final test and inspection, a factory-trained representative of the system manufacturer shall demonstrate that the system functions properly in accordance with these specifications. The representative shall provide technical supervision, and participate during all of the testing for the system. A letter from the Contractor certifying that the system is installed entirely in accordance with the system manufacturer's recommendations and that the system is in proper working order.




C. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADRESS SYSTEM (P.A)

1. PUBLIC ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM:

The main objective of the Public Address System is to convey clear and audible instructions to all the people on all floors / buildings in case of occurrence of fire / other emergency to reach a place of safety in the open, outside the buildings. The sound output should not be so loud that people nearest to the speakers feel uncomfortable, nor so weak that people away cannot discern what is being broadcast. This is achieved by working the system at 60 to 75% power output and distributing speakers uniformly all over floor area.

a. PA System shall cater to fire evacuation speakers for broadcasting alarm signals and evacuation messages in the event of an emergency. The same speakers shall be used for soft music for the selected area.

b. The Public Address System shall operate on 24 VDC power and shall suitable for continuous duty, be of modular design and utilize component based on solid state technology.

2. CODES AND STANDARDS:

a. The design, manufacture and performance of equipment shall comply with all currently applicable statutes, regulations and safety codes. Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve Vendor of this responsibility. All the components should be designed and installed as per NFPA - 72.

b. The Public Address System shall be robust and the components such as speaker amplifier, tone generator, wiring circuits, uninterrupted power supplies, standby batteries along with DVD player shall be constantly electrically supervised for any single ground fault, short or open circuit.

3. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS:

The system will comprise of a microphone suitable for voice communication / Announcements through speakers on various floors/buildings. The system shall consist of the following for each building/block. Cabling shall be carried out from local consoles to main console at Central IBMS room

a. Control consoles with Microphones b. Amplifiers c. Speakers d. Connecting cables and Racks for mounting above.

a. P.A. System shall be capable of generating both emergency and evacuation messages to „ALL‟ or selected speaker zones located within the floor. It shall also able to play music „ALL‟ or selected speaker zone.

The system shall essentially consist of microprocessor based central control equipment with zone selectable announcement.




Normally background music shall be played, in selected zone only, using the central DVD/Cassette Player Source. When, a particular zone is selected for making an announcement, the background music to that particular zone only shall be cut-off and the announcement relayed. All other zones shall remain unaffected. Once the announcement is over, the music shall resume.

b. An emergency call shall include following:

i) A special slow-whoop signal, sweeping from 500Hz up to 1200 Hz.

ii) PA pre-recorded message shall be broadcasted on completion of the slow-whooping signal.

iii) It shall be possible to repeat both of the above procedures to be repeated during the emergency period.

iv) Provision for recording the message in the field shall be available.

4. SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS:

a. The system shall provide the Voice paging to individual, grouped or to all zones, from the fire controller‟s room via microphone from the fire alarm control panel.

b. Voice paging to individual or all zones, from the microphone shall over ride broadcast or recorded messages, in those selected zones. The paging zones are to select via a keypad located at the microphone location in the Security Room.

c. The system shall be capable of being easily extended to accommodate (25% spare capacity) additional handsets, speakers, etc. in future. For this purpose, adequate spare capacity shall be provided in equipment. The public address system shall incorporate following operational features:

i) A „siren tone‟ oscillator and a siren switch shall be provided for emergency purposes. This shall be such that it can be actuated from the handset station only fitted on the main fire alarm control panel. The siren tone shall broadcast over all the loudspeakers.

ii) A „Testing signal‟ tone oscillator and a test signal switch shall be provided for testing purposes. The test signal shall be broadcast over all the loudspeakers.

iii) The frequencies of the tones for „call attention‟, „emergency siren‟ and „testing‟ shall be very much different from each other, so that the same could be differentiated clearly.

iv) Vendor shall specifically confirm that communication shall be clear and audible even in noisy areas. If any adjustments in amplifier system etc. required in this connection at site during and after commissioning the same shall be done without any extra cost to the Purchaser.

c. In case there is no false ceiling then wooden box required for the installation of speaker shall be included in this cost and is in the scope of FAS_PAS contractor.




5. DUAL CHANNEL POWER AMPLIFIERS:

The dual channel power amplifiers shall have the following features:

i. Power output: 150 W per channel at 0.05 % harmonic distortion over frequency range 40 to 20,000 Hz + 1 dB.

ii. Frequency response 40 to 20,000 Hz + 1 dB at specified power over the entire speech and music range.

iii. Signal and noise level: 100 dB below rated output.

iv. Channel separation: 90 dB at 1 kHz.

v. Output: 100V / 70 V.

vi. Controls and indicators such as volume control, AC power switches etc.

vii. Hum and noise level below rated output. All volume controls minimum 68 db. One microphone volume and master volume control maximum - 60 db.

viii. Sensitivity - impedance - for microphone 1.5MV 4.7 K - ohms.

ix. Tone control-base +/- 10 db at 100Hz. treble +/-6 db at 10 KHz.

x. Speech filter - microphone channel - 12 db at 200 Hz.

xi. Auxiliary inputs - for tape recorder or ceramic pickup.

xii. Amplifiers should be in a module of suitable Watts R.M.S only. Maximum 75% capacity

should be used. Amplifiers should have standard concealed controls.

xiii. Mains AC power supply input, D.C output and standby automatically supplying power in case of mains failure, shall be provided.

xiv. The amplifiers rack shall be of mild steel with suitable anticorrosion protective coating. The rack shall have provision for fixing to floor/wall.

xv. The racks shall have appropriate amplifier mounting rails.

xvi. The racks shall have lockable steel doors having proper ventilation slots for heat dissipation.

xvii. Cable entry parts should be provided at the bottom.

xviii. Terminal blocks for connecting to control desk shall be provided.




6. POWER SUPPLY :

Power supply unit shall be well filtered, regulated, have constant voltage under load and shall have the following additional features:

i) Output: 24, 12 V dc.

ii) Input: 120 V, 60 Hz, nominal.

iii) Power consumption: as required.

iv) Replaceable fuse: as required.

v) Rectifier: silicon full wave bridge.

vi) Filter, choke and dual condensers.

vii) Hook-up (+) (-) terminals strip with terminal screws.

viii) Line cord: 2 m (6ft.), 3 (three) conductor with strain relief.

7. CONTROL DESK (CONSOLE)

The control desk fabricated of sheet metal and designed to be mounted on table top and shall be located at IBMS room of respective Engineering blocks (General services shall be connected to engineering block closer and shall have the following controls and features.

a. ON/OFF switch for the PA system with LED indication.

b. One gooseneck type moving coil / cardio / hyper cardio or equivalent microphone with ON/OFF switch.

c. Push switch buttons calling all the buildings with LED Indicator.

d. Push switch buttons, calling individually selected buildings with led indication.

e. Electronic chime to draw attention of the people to announcements.

f. Push switch button/buttons to actuate standby amplifier/amplifiers with LED indicators.

g. Push switch button for selecting monitor with LED indicator.

h. Pre-amplifier with output connection to output transformer and a standby pre-amplifier should also be provided.

i. Monitor loudspeaker.

j. Volume unit meters (V.U.Meter) with red LED to flash if the input signal exceeds.

k. Push switch button for dual tone oscillator for testing the system

l. Terminal blocks for connecting to amplifier rack.




8. SPEAKER AND CABLES:

The ceiling ring speaker shall be double cone Loudspeaker attached to a circular grille which is injection molded from high impact polystyrene. Each speaker (Ceiling / wall mounted) shall have a minimum two hour fire rated cover back side and the cables shall be directly terminated to the box with proper cable gland. The assembly shall be secured in to cut-out, using two integral spring loaded ceiling locking clamps. The Loudspeaker shall be supplied with transformer with winding taps that allow outputs of 3 W, 6 W or 12 W,15W, 40W

Bidders Data

Make

Power Handling Capacity : 6 W

Sound Pressure Level : 64 dB

Nominal Voltage : 100 V / 70 V (tap)

L.S. impédance : 4 Ohms.

Dimensions :

Colour :

Make

Power Handling Capacity : 12 W

Sound Pressure Level : 96 dB

Nominal Voltage : 100 V / 70 V (tap)

L.S. impédance : 4 Ohms.

Dimensions :

Colour

8.1 SAMPLES

The contractor shall submit the samples of all equipments for approval by architects / consultants before installation.

8.2 MUSIC

The music through the CD Players can be fed to the amplifiers (for selected areas). The music transmission is having the least priority. That is in the event of FIRE, and then the Alert tone overrides the music in the speaker. If any announcement is made, then the music will be stopped till the time of announcement and continues after pressing key.

To play music a separate switch MUSIC is given and by operating this switch, the music is transmitted to tall departments/zones.

The music system shall have two (2) channels for radio tuners (AM/FM) and one (1) channel




each for cassette recorder and CD player. 8.3 AM/FM Tuner:

The AM/FM tuner shall have micro computer controlled PIL synthesized circuit and or digital display to indicate the receiving frequency. It shall search for the station frequency automatically or manually and four each of AM and FM frequencies shall be preset. Muting function to over ride AM/FM output signal by a priority signal shall be activated with the switch on the PCB.

8.4 CD PLAYER – DVD/MP3/VCD It shall be CD/DVD player having the following features:

Repeat track / CD Shuffle Scan

Skip Dedicated multi-function remote controller with mimic keypad

Time display USB Connectivity for using Pen drives Program up to 30 selections from 3 CDs Comprehensive multi-function fluorescent display RACK Mounted.

8.5 MIXER FRAME

PROGRAM SELECTOR MODULE

The program selector module shall select a program out of four inputs (AM, FM, CD, DVD) by utilizing four selection buttons and one reset button.

Two outputs shall be provided. One shall be balanced output located on the edge connector, and shall be muted when the module receives a priority control. When the mute switch is activated, the muting level shall be adjusted by the semi-fixed volume control located on the P.C. board.

The mixer frame shall be an attractive desk-top cabinet which can be mounted on a standard rack mounting brackets. It shall have mounting space for 10 modules with access to the module sockets from the front. Since the frame includes card connectors and main fuses for accepting plug-in modules, there shall also be easily modified into a frame for multi-channel pre-amplifier.

Background music speakers shall be provided in the common areas of the engineering blocks, service block, canteen, customer care center, library, tower, and training & general services blocks.

Additionally, speakers (without volume control) will be provided in the office areas & utility buildings to facilitate emergency announcements in these areas in addition to the common areas.




8.6 Speaker cables: (FRLS)

i) Cable Type : Signal

: Armored FRLS

: Multistrand Conductors

: Twisted Core

ii) Conductor : Conductor dia - 0.2mm

: No. of Strands - 24

: ATC

: Resistance per Km. (Max. 25 Ohms)

iii) Individual Insulation : PVC Type as per IS - 5831

: Insulation Thickness nominal : 0.5mm

8.7 SPECIFICATION FOR WIRING

Prior to laying and fixing of conduits, the contractor shall carefully examine the drawings indicating the layout, satisfy himself about the sufficiency of number and sizes of conduits, sizes and location of conduits and other relevant details. Any discrepancy found in the drawings shall be brought to the notice of Consultant / Project Manager. Any modifications suggested by the Contractor shall be got approved by the Consultant / Project Manager before the actual laying of conduits is commenced.

All cables from various zones to be terminated on termination box & from there individual cables will connect to the amplifier system.

9. APPLICABLE STANDARDS

BS 5839 part 8: Code of Practice for the design, installation and servicing of voice alarm systems EN60849: International Standards Sound Systems for Emergency Purposes BS 6259: Reinforcement of Pro-Audio Sytems with Voice Evacuation. IEC60268 Part 5: speaker rated power in compliance BS6840 Part 5: Speaker tested in accordance with. Speakers EASE, CATT and ULYSSES models for acoustical studies.

10. INSTALLATION: Installation shall be as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer.

All cables, junction boxes, cables supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas




TESTING:

Sr. No. Description Visual Test

Readings Documentation

1 All cables are tested for continuity, insulation, resistance etc. √

2 System installation proper as per drawing √

3

Carry out visual checks on all speakers & Processors are free from any mechanical damage, cables, inter phase modules etc.to ensure they are properly installed. √

4 Check for proper termination of bootlace lugs & feruling √

5 Check Input A/C Supply Voltage √

6 Check location / spacing of loudspeakers as in drawing. √ √

7 Check Distribution of Zones as per Drawing. √ √

8 Check full load speaker sound quality & measure Sound pressure level (SPL) in dB. √ √

9 Check if local loudspeakers overrides by voice messages in case of emergency evacuation . √ √

10

If power fails, whether Voice evacuation system is working on battery supply if yes for what time √

11

Check if recorder messages are CLEAR, free from any noise distortion & easy to understand with Room acoustic speech transmission Index (RaSTI) value >0.5. √ √

12 Processor LED‟s and all keys are working properly √

13 Check for Microphone locations & the sensitivity by paging √ √

14 Play a soft music & check sound quality √

11. COMMISSIONING :

At final commissioning of each system, the Contractor shall confirm that:

All devices, control panels are tested and operate correctly .




The standby batteries are adequately sized. (Measurements of the quiescent and full loads shall be taken and compared to calculated values used at the design stage.) Calculations and measurements shall be submitted to the Engineer.

Commissioning shall be fully documented and the documentation submitted to the Engineer.

The Contractor shall demonstrate each zone and main panel to the satisfaction of the Engineer

by conducting a series of witnessed acceptance tests as directed by the Engineer. This shall take place after the above final commissioning and following receipt of the commissioning documentation by the Engineer. Both the installation and the commissioning activities shall be undertaken as a single continuous operation. Upon completion of the installation activity, the contractor shall Test, Start-up, Commission and Handover the system to the customer. The contractor shall make use of the following documents to record test results and details of commissioning tests:

Cable Test Sheets

Installation Check Report

System Layout Drawing(s)

System Schematic Diagram(s) The contractor shall be responsible for inspecting and testing the complete system. The contractor shall present an Acceptance Certificate for signature by the customer.

12. DOCUMENTATION :

The contractor, upon completion of the commissioning activity, shall hand over the system to the customer. At the time of hand over, the contractor shall provide the customer with the following documentation: 1. Copy of detailed report 2. Component and equipment list 3. Product description sheets 4. System design drawing(s) 6. System schematic diagram(s) 7. System operating manuals




13. HANDOVER :

Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide complete operation and maintenance instruction manuals to the owner. All aspects of system operation and maintenance shall be detailed, including wiring diagrams of all circuits, a written description of the system design, sequence of operation and drawing(s), illustrating control logic and equipment used in the system. Checklists and procedures for emergency situations, maintenance operations and procedures shall be included in the manual.

14. TRAINING

General The contractor shall provide the customer with details of the training required by personnel to operate and maintain the PA System. The Contractor and the customer shall jointly agree the number of staff to attend the training courses.

15. MAINTENANCE Routine maintenance should be carried out in accordance with relevant customers requirements. All performance checks undertaken should be recorded in the system log book.

As a minimum, the following performance checks must be undertaken on each maintenance visit. Carry out verification checks as detailed in the commissioning instructions.

Remove dust and dirt from the Control Panels/speakers using a soft brush or a lint cloth. A solvent which is harmless to the finishes of metal and plastic may be applied to more stubborn stains.

Examine the exterior of the enclosure for any signs of damage or loose cable glands and rectify any faults found.

Examine the printed circuit boards for signs of overheating, dry joints and/or damaged tracks.

Examine the battery terminals for secure connection and for any signs of corrosion. Replace or repair as required

D. CLOSE CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM (CCTV)

1.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENT

The CCTV System shall be real time system consisting of Day Night P/T/Z Cameras, indoor

varifocal cameras, recorders, matrix and monitors.




1.2 SYSTEM OBJECTIVE

a. To enable the important areas of the premises to be remotely monitored. b. To enable sensitive areas to be scanned from pre-selected position. c. To enable automatic recording by Digital Multiplex Recorder on hard disk and to play back

the recorded events on selected monitors & back-ups of the events on CD.

1.3 REAL TIME RECORDER

a. The system shall have the capability to handle 16 video inputs at real time, 400fps, IP enabled and 2 monitor outputs with a facility to have the control from the Security Control Centre.

b. It shall be capable to support PTZ controllers as required (Select camera view, multi-screen

view) c. It shall be possible to monitor the whole premises from the Security Control Room

d. Operator interface to the system shall be through keyboard / CCTV Control Panel in the

Security Control.

e. It shall be possible to program multiple system features including functions such as monitor sequence,

camera dwell, camera tour, by-pass and restore cameras and alarms.

The system shall have high speed operation, automatic reboot from power loss, automatic configuration down loading.

g. The system shall be capable of displaying the system status on high resolution monitor. h. The system programming shall be password protected and shall have different levels of

passwords for programming. k. All cameras and the integrated CCTV System equipment shall be designed for continuous

operation.

1.4 CCTV CAMERAS

a. The camera shall employ complete solid-state circuitry, ensuring high operational reliability. The cameras being considered for this project shall be both monochrome & coloured with one-third imager size.

b. The camera shall deliver well defined, clear, high resolution, B&W/ Colour picture without




lag or geometric distortion. c. The camera shall also possess the following features:

- Excellent sensitivity for usable picture suited to the ambient light level conditions and its variations. A high sensitive automatic light compensation circuit ensuring constant video signal independent of wide variations in light levels.

- High resolution - Low power consumption - Phase adjustable line lock facility or with internal crystal oscillator

d. The camera unit shall be complete with all electronic circuitry, devices, components,

standard mount for lenses, mounting assemblies etc. The mounting assemblies of the cameras shall be individually selected depending upon the special requirements as per actual site conditions. Focal length of lens for cameras to be atleast 4 mm.

e. Technical Specifications for varifocal Dome Colour Camera

Image Sensor : 1/4 -inch color interline – transfer CCD

Active Pixels : 752 (H) x 582 (V)

Scanning Frequency : (H) 15.625kHz. (V) 50Hz.

Minimum Illumination : 0.3 Lux

Synchronization : Internal

Video Output : VBS 1.0 Vp-p/75 Ohms, BNC Lens Focal Length : 3- 9.5 mm

Mechanical-iris : Automatic (Maximum, F5.6, F11)

S/N Ratio : 50 db

Focus : Automatic

White Balance : Automatic

Electronic Shutter : Automatic (1/60 ~ 1/100000)

Fixed (1/100) Pan Rotation : +/- 180 deg.

Pan Speed : 9 deg., 18 deg., 90 deg. / sec




Tilt Rotaion : 0 ~ 90 deg.

Tilt SpeedP : 9 deg., 18 deg., 90 deg. / sec

Power source : DC 12V / 24 V AC External

Power consumption : Max 20 VA

Operating Temperature : 0 ~ 40 deg. C 32 ~ 104 deg. F

Relative Humidity : 10 ~ 75% (there should be no condensation)

Storage Temperature : -5 ~ 55 deg. C 23 ~ 131 deg. F

Storage Humidity : 10 ~ 95%

1.5 DIGITAL MULTIPLEXER RECORDER

a. Digital Video Multiplex Recorder shall be capable of multiplexed recording of upto 16 video

inputs. b. It shall be capable to provide time, date, ID number and description for each camera input.

Titling displays shall be either black or white. c. The multiplexer shall offer selectable live multi-screen displays while recording into a 2.4 TB

hard disc @ 25 frames / second. The digital multiplex recording shall not be interrupted by live multi-screen viewing, even search or playback and arching to external devices. In time lapse mode (24hr.) the recording shall be 7.5 frames / second.

d. The Multiplex Recorder shall have auto camera detect feature so that when multiplex

recorder is powered up the no. of cameras connected to the system can be easily identified.

e. The Multiplex Recorder shall have automated scheduling facility which shall include

options like.

Alarms on / off Activity on / off Cameras to record Record rate for continuous alarm and activity recording.

f. The Multiplex Recorder shall have unique event search facility. The facility shall include

Quick review of each listed in a thumbnail screen. Filter events by event type, time, date and camera Play any event from list full screen




Copy selected events to external device.

g. Each video input shall be capable of being monitored for presence of video / video synchronization.

1.6 CCTV MONITORS

a. The monitors shall be suitable for the highest level of quality control. These shall provide reliable, high resolution video viewing in the most demanding security applications. Under scan shall be available, brightness, contrast, vertical hold, horizontal hold and power ON/OFF shall be to standards.

b. The minimal equipment specification for alarm monitor is as follows (Monochrome):

i) Size : 20" ii) Picture tube : 440 CWB4(Q) iii) Deflection : 90° iv) Input signal : 1.0+0.5 Vp-p v) Input impedance : 75 ohm switchable vi) Resolution : More than 700 lines vii) Video bandwidth : 10 MHz viii) Video Input/Output : 1.0+0.5 Vp-p ix) AFC time constant : Corrected for use with Helical Scan VTRs x) Viewing area : 20" Diagonal

xi) Scanning system : CCIR Standard xii) Input voltage : 220-230 V AC, 50 Hz, single phase xiii) Power Max. : 30 W xiv) Power Non-Linearity - Horizontal : 12% Max. - Vertical : 10% Max. xv) Humidity : 10%-90% non-condensing xvi) Operating temp : 0 to 40°C




xvii) Controls : Front: On-off, LED, H-hold bright, contrast-hold

Rear: Scan SW (under/over) DC Restoration (on-ff) xviii) Connectors Video : BNC

c. The minimal equipment specification for sequence monitor and dedicated monitor is as follows (Monochrome) : i) Size : 9" ii) Picture tube : 240 x B4(L) iii) Deflection : 90° iv) Input signal : 1.0+0.5 Vp-p v) Input impedance : 75 ohm switchable vi) Resolution : 750 lines at centre vii) Video bandwidth : 10 MHz viii) Video Input/Output : 1.0+0.5 Vp-p

ix) AFC time constant : Corrected for use with Helical Scan VTRs

x) Viewing area : 9" Diagonal xi) Scanning system : CCIR standard xii) Input voltage : 220-230 V AC ± 50 Hz, single phase

switchable xiii) Power : 35 W xiv) Power Non-Linearity

- Horizontal : 6% Max. - Vertical : 6% Max.

xv) Humidity : 10%-90% non-condensing xvi) Operating temp : 0 to 40°C xvii) Controls : Front: On-off, scanning size, bright, V-

hold, H-hold, contrast Rear: impedance H-L SW, DC Restoration SW, Video Tone SW




xviii) Connectors - Video : BNC

d. Technical Specifications for 21” Colour Monitor

System : NTSC / PAL

CRT : 21” diagonal, 0.7 mm stripe pitch

1.7 R flat type, 90 deg. deflection

Horizontal Resolution : More than 450 lines

Input Signal : Video signal : 0.714 Vp- (Composite1Vp-p)Sync. signal : 0.286 Vp-p

Subcarrier : 3.579545 MHz +/- 400 Hz (room temperature) Frequency : 4.433618 Mhz +/- 400 Hz (room temperature) Horizontal Frequency Stability : +/- 500 Hz

Vertical Frequency Stability : +/- 4 Hz High Voltage : 25 kV +/- 1.5 kV Convergence display : less than 0.1 mm (at the centre of area) Power Consumption : 75 Watts (maximum) Operating Humidity Condition : 0 to 90%

Operating Temperature

Range : 0 to 40 deg. C

Audio : 2 Watts

1.8 VIDEO CO-AXIAL CABLES a. Co-axial cable of the following minimum specification shall be used indoor in conduits, trunking and

cable trays. i) Type : RG 59/U ii) Impedance : 75 Ohms iii) Conductor (dia) : 20 AWG Solid Bare Copper




iv) Insulation : Cellular Polyethylene v) Nominal O.D. : 0.242" vi) Shielding : 95% Bare Copper Braid vii) Jacket : Black Frame Retardant PVC viii) Nominal Velocity of prop. : 78% ix) Nominal Attenuation : MHz db/100 ft 10 1.0 50 2.1

100 3.0 200 4.5 400 6.6 900 10.1 1000 10.9 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Keyboards with Joystick.

1. The Keyboards shall be located as specified by the owner and shall provide full control of the matrix switching, Pan Tilt Zoom (PTZ) control, control of Multiplexers, and other devices.

2. The Keyboards shall connect to the system using RS422 communication and may be connected either locally or remotely.

3. The Keyboards shall receive power from the VMS CPU or shall be powered from local power supplies depending on the configuration.

4. The Keys shall be positive action with a distinctive operator tactile feedback.

5. The Keyboard shall be equipped with multiple system-defined function Keys for the control of Multiplexers and DVRs. Configuration software shall be provided to modify these keys for specific models and manufacturers.

6. Keyboard shall be capable to control matrix and DVR simultaneously.

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions – The VMS shall be designed to meet the following environmental conditions:

1. Storage Temperature – shall be designed for a storage temperature of -




2. Operating Temperature –

3. Humidity - shall be designed for normal operation in a 0-80% non-condensing relative humidity environment.

4. Electromagnetic Interference – The system shall meet or exceed the requirements of FCC Part 15, Class B devices, FCC Part 68, and IEC EMC directive.

1.10 MONOCHROME CAMERA – „C/CS‟ MOUNT

The camera shall be of 1/3” format CCD type, compact of rugged design and shall employ solid state circuitry. The camera shall deliver clear, high resolution monochrome picture without geometric distortion.

The Camera shall comply with the enclosed specifications

1.11 LENSES

The lenses shall be Fixed/Motorized Zoom lens type. The lens should not be made from plastic. The zoom lenses shall be remote controlled and all the lenses shall be of auto iris type with internal spot filter.

1.12 WEATHER PROOF HOUSING

The Housing shall be made of extruded aluminum and weather proof to IP 66. It shall have demister, sun shield internal and external fan for cooling. The minimum internal dimensions of the housing shall be 400 x 110 x 95mm and shall be capable of housing the camera and zoom lens. Housings suitable for Indoor applications shall also be provided by the bidder.

1.13 PTZ UNIT

The PTZ camera shall be with 35 X optical zoom for outdoor applications and 18X optical zoom

for indoor applications. The digital zoom shall be 12 X in each case. The lux level sensitivity for

indoor cameras shall be 0.55 lux in case if indoor camera and 0.00015 lux in case of outdoor

camera. The camera shall be aesthetically pleasing, compact and amazingly powerful and shall

include high performance 1/3”/1/4” camera with fully functional Pan/Tilt / Zoom mechanism with

8X Zoom facility. The dome unit shall operate over 360 deg pan rotation and 90 deg tilt. It shall

be possible to execute the two movement at different speed which the operator can determine. It




shall be possible to program 64 preset positions which can be stored and recalled both manually

and automatically.




SECTION „G‟- HVAC WORKS

1. BASIS OF DESIGN:

1.1 Site Location : Powai, Mumbai

1.2 Geographic location : 18 Deg 54‟N

1.3 Altitude : 11 Mtrs above mean sea level

1.4 Outdoor Design Conditions :

Outdoor Design Conditions for Powai Mumbai are based on Weather data compiled and published jointly by ISHRAE and ASHRAE India Chapter (AIC) corresponding to 2.0% annual cumulative frequency of occurrence and are considered as follows:

Summer 33.5 deg C (92.3 deg F) DB 24.0 deg C (75.2 deg F) WB

Monsoon 27.2 deg C (80.96deg F) DB 31.1 deg C (87.9 deg F) WB

Winter 16.5 deg C (61.7deg F) DB 13.9 deg C (57 deg F) WB

Indoor Design Conditions:

SPACE Temp Relative

⁰ C Humidity %

Guest Rooms 24 +/-1 ⁰C < 60 %

As per MOM Dated 06 November.2012.

Time & Admin Office

24 +/-1 ⁰C < 60 %

Restaurant & Conference Room

24 +/-1 ⁰C < 60 %

Common Areas 25 +/-1 ⁰C < 60 %

1.5 Assumptions for HVAC Loads

Building Data:

Walls : U = 0.31 Btu / Hr Sqft OF

Roof (Exposed to sun) : U = 0.10 Btu / Hr Sqft OF

Glass Specifications : U = 0.30 Btu / Hr Sqft deg F Shading Coefficient: 0.25




These figures are furnished by GRIHA Consultants. 1.6. Exhaust and Ventilation Requirement

Toilet 10 ACPH

Mechanical Plant Room / Pump Room

Ventilation @ 20 ACPH and Exhaust @ 25 ACPH

Courtyard Exhaust Ventilation @ 80% of Fresh air supplied in lobby area.

1.7 Design Parameters 1.7.1 Water / Air Chilling Machine Performance rating of the water chilling machines shall be based on following design

parameters: Temp. of entering chilled water : 56 deg F (13.33o C)

Temperature of leaving chilled water : 44 deg F (6.67o C)

Condenser water flow rate : 4 Usgpm/TR

Temperature of entering condenser water : 90 deg F (32.22o C)

Fouling factor for cooler in FPS units. : 0.0005

Fouling factor for condenser in FPS units. : 0.001

Refrigerant Maximum power consumption at design conditions

: HFC 134 a / R410a 0.74 IkW/TR

Design parameter for selection of Air Handling Unit and its components shall be:

Maximum face velocity across prefilters and filters : 1.78 m/sec (350 fpm)

Maximum face velocity across cooling coils : 2.54 m/sec (500 fpm)

Maximum fan outlet velocity : 9.14 m/sec (1800 fpm)

Maximum fan speed

a. Fan above 450 mm dia : 1000 RPM

b. Fan up to and including 450 mm dia : 1450 RPM

Maximum fan motor speed : 1450 RPM

Piping shall be sized for the following design parameters:




Maximum velocity : 1.2 m/Sec (4 fps) for piping 50 mm & under

: 2 m/Sec (6.56 fps) for piping over 50 MM dia

Maximum friction : 15 k Pa per 30 M Run

(5 ft per 100 ft Run)

Design parameter for Duct design shall be:

Maximum flow velocity in ducts for air conditioning : 7.5 m / sec (1500 fpm)

Maximum flow velocity in ducts for ventilation in pump room, toilet exhaust & Kitchen exhaust.

: 7.5 m / sec – 12.5 m / Sec

(1500 – 2500 FPM)

Maximum friction : 0.65 Pa / M run

(0.08 inch WG/100 ft run)

Ventilation Fan:

Maximum fan outlet velocity for fan upto 450 mm dia : 9.14 m/sec (1800 fpm)

Maximum fan outlet velocity for fan above 450 mm dia 12 m/sec (2400 fpm)

Maximum fan speed for fans upto 450 mm dia : 1440 RPM

Maximum fan speed for fans above 450 mm dia : 11000 RPM

Filtration:

Recirculated air (mixed fresh & return air) at air handling units, fan coil units and ventilation units.

: Washable synthetic type air filters having 90% efficiency down to 10 microns (MERV 8) f i l ters

Treated fresh air. Units. : Washable synthetic type air filters having 90% efficiency down to 10 microns (MERV 8) f i l ters

Heat recovery. Units. : Washable synthetic type air filters having




90% efficiency down to 10 microns (MERV 8) filters + 99% efficiency down to 3 microns (MERV 13)

INDIAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY BOMBAY CONSTRUCTION OF GUEST HOUSE NO.3 INSIDE I.I.T. CAMPUS

TENDER DOCUMENT – VOLUME 2 OF 3 367 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION SIGNATURE & SEAL OF TENDERER

1.7.2 Estimated Air Conditioned Loads for Guest House

SR.NO SPACE SERVED AREA OCCU LIGHT EQUIP TONNAGE DEHUMIDIFIED CFM/SQFT FT²/TR FA CFM

(SQ.FT) (NO) (W/SQ.FT) (KW) (TR) CFM

1 GR-Double Height Dinning Area 4776 320 0.8 0 39.4 11178 2.3 121.2 3635.7

2 GR-Double Height Courty Yard 630 6.3 1.1 0 1.3 612 1.0 475.4 83.2

3 GR-Double Height Entrance/Reception Lobby 1466 30 1.1 0.3 4.5 1886 1.3 324.5 212.7

4 GR-Lift Lobby/waiting lounge 893 4.465 1.1 0 0.9 351 0.4 965.7 186.4

5 GR-Admin Office/Purchase Dept. 510 10 0.9 0.6 1.8 831 1.6 276.4 99.4

6 GR-Electrical rm 51 1 0.9 0.5 0.3 155 3.0 177.4 99.4

Total 8605 48.3 15244 4326.6



1 Service Flr-Admin Office. 1025.0 14.0 0.8 2.1 2.7 1196.3 1.2 377.8 161.0

Total 1025.0 2.7 1196.3 161.0





1ST FLOOR

1 1st-Mini Dine Area 581 17 1.1 0 2.8 939.4 1.6 208.2 301.7

2 1st-conference Rm 283 14 0.9 1 2.5 1266.9 4.5 112.3 113.1

3 1st-Breakout Passage 256 2.56 1.1 0 1.1 619.2 2.4 238.1 36.6

4 1st-Alumni Lounge 1162 22 0.9 0 2.9 1048.3 0.9 399.1 233.6

5 1st-Twin Bed Rm 5 228 2 0.9 0 0.4 229 1.0 586.9 30.8

6 1st-Twin Bed Rm 6 228 2 0.9 0 0.3 188 0.8 691.9 30.8

7 1st-Twin Bed Rm 7 228 2 0.9 0 0.3 188 0.8 691.9 30.8

8 1st-Twin Bed Rm 8 228 2 0.9 0 0.5 277 1.2 498.1 30.8

9 Buffet area 122 4 1.1 0 1.25 600 1.2 498.1 30.8

Total 5164 12.3 6638 1040.9

SR.NO SPACE SERVED DEHUMIDIFIED TONNAGE

1ST FLOOR CFM (TR)

1 TFA 1500 6.5





2ND FLOOR

1 2nd-Studio LIV/DIN/KIT 1 410 3 0.9 0 1.0 651 1.6 400.8 51.5

2 2nd-ST. Bed Room 1 126 2 0.9 0 0.6 354 2.8 222.0 22.8

3 2nd-ST. Bed Room 2 126 2 0.9 0 0.6 354 2.8 222.0 22.8



6 2nd-ST. Bed Room 3 126 2 0.9 0 0.6 354 2.8 222.0 22.8

7 2nd-ST. Bed Room 4 126 2 0.9 0 0.6 354 2.8 222.0 22.8


9 2nd-Twin Bed Rm 1 228 2 0.9 0 0.4 228 1.0 587.7 30.8

10 2nd-Twin Bed Rm 2 228 2 0.9 0 0.3 188 0.8 693.0 30.8

11 2nd-Twin Bed Rm 3 228 2 0.9 0 0.3 188 0.8 693.0 30.8

12 2nd-Twin Bed Rm 4 228 2 0.9 0 0.5 277 1.2 498.7 30.8

13 2nd-Twin Bed Rm 5 228 2 0.9 0 0.4 229 1.0 586.9 30.8

14 2nd-Twin Bed Rm 6 228 2 0.9 0 0.3 188 0.8 691.9 30.8

15 2nd-Twin Bed Rm 7 228 2 0.9 0 0.3 188 0.8 691.9 30.8

16 2nd-Twin Bed Rm 8 228 2 0.9 0 0.5 277 1.2 498.1 30.8

Total 5535 9 6771.7 724.1

SR.NO SPACE SERVED DEHUMIDIFIED TONNAGE

2ND FLOOR TFA CFM (TR)

1 TFA 1200 5





7TH FLOOR

1 7th-Studio LIV/DIN/KIT 1 410 3 0.9 0.0 1.02 662 1.6 401 51

2 7th-ST. Bed Room 1 126 2 0.9 0.0 0.57 354 2.8 222 23

3 7th-ST. Bed Room 2 126 2 0.9 0.0 0.57 354 2.8 222 23



6 7th-ST. Bed Room 3 126 2 0.9 0.0 0.57 354 2.8 222 23

7 7th-ST. Bed Room 4 126 2 0.9 0.0 0.57 354 2.8 222 23


9 7th-Twin Bed Rm 1 228 2 0.9 0.0 0.39 228 1.0 588 31

10 7th-Twin Bed Rm 2 228 2 0.9 0.0 0.33 188 0.8 693 31

11 7th-Twin Bed Rm 5 228 2 0.9 0.0 0.39 229 1.0 587 31

12 7th-Twin Bed Rm 6 228 2 0.9 0.0 0.33 188 0.8 692 31

Total 4623 7.23 5855 601

SR.NO SPACE SERVED DEHUMIDIFIED TONNAGE 7TH FLOOR TFA CFM (TR)

1 TFA 1100 5.0





13TH FLOOR

1 13th-Studio LIV/DIN/KIT 1 410 3 0.9 0.0 1.2 774 1.9 341.8 51.5

2 13th-ST. Bed Room 1 126 2 0.9 0.0 0.6 392 3.1 202.6 22.8

3 13th-ST. Bed Room 2 126 2 0.9 0.0 0.6 354 2.8 222.0 22.8



6 13th-ST. Bed Room 3 126 2 0.9 0.0 0.6 392 3.1 202.6 22.8

7 13th-ST. Bed Room 4 126 2 0.9 0.0 0.6 392 3.1 202.6 22.8


9 13th-Twin Bed Rm 1 228 2 0.9 0.0 0.5 297 1.3 468.9 30.8

10 13th-Twin Bed Rm 2 228 2 0.9 0.0 0.4 256 1.1 533.6 30.8

11 13th-Twin Bed Rm 3 228 2 0.9 0.0 0.4 256 1.1 533.6 30.8

12 13th-Twin Bed Rm 4 228 2 0.9 0.0 0.6 345 1.5 410.5 30.8

13 13thTwin Bed Rm 5 228 2 0.9 0.0 0.5 297 1.3 468.5 30.8

14 13th-Twin Bed Rm 6 228 2 0.9 0.0 0.4 256 1.1 533.0 30.8

15 13th-Twin Bed Rm 7 228 2 0.9 0.0 0.4 256 1.1 533.0 30.8

16 13th-Twin Bed Rm 8 228 2 0.9 0.0 0.6 346 1.5 410.1 30.8

Total 5535 10.5 8438.8 724.1

SR.NO SPACE SERVED DEHUMIDIFIED TONNAGE 13TH FLOOR TFA CFM (TR) 1 TFA 1700 7.5



TOTAL LOAD SUMMARY:

SR.NO FLOOR Area (Sqft)

Dhumidified CFM Tonnage TFA TR

1 GR Floor 8605 15244 48.3

2 Service Floor 1025 1196 2.7

3 1st Floor 5156 5156 12.3 6.5

4 2nd Floor to 12th Floor 55350 67717 90.0 50.0

5 7th Floor 4623 5855 7.2 5.0

6 13th Floor 5535 8439 10.5 7.5

TOTAl 80294 103607 171 69.0

Our heat load is based on the latest architectural layouts we have received from SSA MAXIMUM DEMAND = (240 TR – 6.0 TR Cooling load Available due to Heat Pump) =234.0 TR X 0.75 DF=176 TR MACHINE SELECTED = 4 NOS X 60 TR SCROLL WATER CHILLERS (3W + 1SB)



CHILLER LOAD PROFILE :

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

Data for January

Ch

ille

r L

oa

d (

To

ns)

Hour of Day

0001

0203

0405

0607

0809

1011

1213

1415

1617

1819

2021

2223

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

Data for February

Ch

ille

r L

oa

d (

To

ns)

Hour of Day

0001

0203

0405

0607

0809

1011

1213

1415

1617

1819

2021

2223



0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

Data for March

Ch

ille

r L

oa

d (

To

ns)

Hour of Day

0001

0203

0405

0607

0809

1011

1213

1415

1617

1819

2021

2223

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

220

Data for April

Ch

ille

r L

oa

d (

To

ns)

Hour of Day

0001

0203

0405

0607

0809

1011

1213

1415

1617

1819

2021

2223



0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

220

Data for May

Ch

ille

r L

oa

d (

To

ns)

Hour of Day

0001

0203

0405

0607

0809

1011

1213

1415

1617

1819

2021

2223



0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

220

240

Data for June

Ch

ille

r L

oa

d (

To

ns)

Hour of Day

0001

0203

0405

0607

0809

1011

1213

1415

1617

1819

2021

2223

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

220

240

Data for July

Ch

ille

r L

oa

d (

To

ns)

Hour of Day

0001

0203

0405

0607

0809

1011

1213

1415

1617

1819

2021

2223



0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

220

240

Data for August

Ch

ille

r L

oa

d (

To

ns)

Hour of Day

0001

0203

0405

0607

0809

1011

1213

1415

1617

1819

2021

2223

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

220

Data for September

Ch

ille

r L

oa

d (

To

ns)

Hour of Day

0001

0203

0405

0607

0809

1011

1213

1415

1617

1819

2021

2223



0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

220

Data for October

Ch

ille

r L

oa

d (

To

ns)

Hour of Day

0001

0203

0405

0607

0809

1011

1213

1415

1617

1819

2021

2223

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

Data for November

Ch

ille

r L

oa

d (

To

ns)

Hour of Day

0001

0203

0405

0607

0809

1011

1213

1415

1617

1819

2021

2223



0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

Data for December

Ch

ille

r L

oa

d (

To

ns)

Hour of Day

0001

0203

0405

0607

0809

1011

1213

1415

1617

1819

2021

2223




1.8. Major Equipment selection

1.9 System Description

1.9.1 Central Air Conditioning System

The system purposed shall be centralised system. The areas covered under the installations are Dining, Admin office, Guest Rooms, lobby area. Air conditioning shall be provided by a central variable flow chilled water recirculation system for maximum energy conservation.

The central air conditioning system shall consist of water chilling units, multiple primary chilled water pumps with variable frequency inverters, condensing water pumps, FRP induced draft cooling towers, air handling units,heat recovery units treated fresh air units and fan coil units, chilled and condensing water piping, air distribution system, insulation, electrical panels, wiring, control wiring and earthing.

The building Cooling loads and block loads shall be simulated on HAP software. As per preliminary estimated cooling load capacity of 233.0 TR.However Considering 75% diversity the total demand load becomes 175TR, therefore we propose 4 nos x 60 TR Scroll water chilling machines three working and one as standby.

Sr. Equipment Numbers Working Standby

1 60 TR Water cooled scroll chiller 4 3 1

2 360 USGPM Cooling Tower 3 2 1

3 Primary Chilled water Pumps with variable frequency inverters -120 Usgpm 4 3 1

4 Condenser water pumps - 360 USGPM 3 2 1

5 Heat pumps -6.0 TR 2 1 1

6 Secondary side Pumps for the Heat Pump - 21 Usgpm 2 1 1

7 Pumps for the Hot Water delivered to mixing tank- 21 Usgpm 2 1 1

8 Tertiary Pump 2 1 1

9 Plate type Heat Exchanger for hot water generation system. 2 1 1




System shall provide sufficient capacity to meet peak cooling loads but must be capable of operating efficiently at part-load conditions without excessive amounts of spare capacity.

Chilling units shall be housed in the air conditioning plant room at Lower Ground level. Chilled water from chilling units shall be pumped through various insulated chilled water pipes, each dedicated for a particular zone, installed in the ceiling spaces within plant room and adjoining areas.

Chilled water system shall be designed with balancing cum modulated type valves near AHUs for balancing of water flows. In addition, balancing valves shall be installed in major branch pipes for fine tuning at the time of final balancing of the chilled water system. All pipes within plant room shall be supported off the floor to avoid transmission of vibration to ceiling slab and occupied floors above. Also to take care of expansion / contraction in hydronic circuit, pressurized expansion tank along with air separator shall be provided in the plant room.

Cooling towers for air conditioning system shall be selected for minimum drift losses and minimum noise, and shall be installed on terrace away from the Public Areas, Guest Rooms. These shall be FRP construction induced draft type. Cooling tower motors shall be provided with Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) to conserve energy during periods of low ambient wet bulb temperature as cooling towers shall operate round the clock (365 days a year). Operating the motor through VFD shall save energy by operating the cooling tower fan at 30-100% speed, thus conserving motor BHP. The speed shall vary in response to ambient wet bulb temperature and cooling tower leaving water temperature.

All mechanical equipment such as chilling units, pumps, AHU‟s and larger ventilation fans shall be provided with energy efficient motors in order to attain energy savings, since all these equipment shall operate for extended periods of time.

Mechanical Plant rooms such as HVAC plant room, Pump room and Filtration plant room shall be provided with mechanical ventilation system.

Plant machinery in the plant room shall be placed on PCC/ RCC foundation and provided with anti – vibration supports. All foundations shall be protected from mechanical damage by providing epoxy coated angle nosing. Seismic restraints requirement shall also be considered.

Floor drain channels with CI/ Epoxy coated MS grating and dedicated drain pipes in slope shall be provided within plantroom space for effective disposal of waste water.

1.9.2 Chilled Water Generation & Distribution (Variable speed)




Central air conditioning shall be provided by a Central Variable flow chilled water system for maximum energy conservation. Chilled water distribution shall be designed to achieve maximum energy conservation. Various public spaces shall be grouped together according to their location & similarity in usage and working hours.

The chilled water will be supplied to the areas by the set of chilled water pumps (including a standby) with variable speed drive, to achieve variable water flow. Water flow in load circuit shall be varied and also through chiller. Each chiller shall be fed through primary chilled water with variable frequency inverter and condensing water pump. By monitoring the pressure differential between chilled water supply and return header, the speed of primary chilled water pump shall be automatically varied, thus conserving pump brake horse power. The main advantage of this system is that the circulation of chilled water through the entire premises is avoided, and chilled water is supplied according to demand in each zone, thus achieving energy conservation and flexibility in operation.

1.9.3 Public Areas

Constant volume, double skin air handling unit, consisting of centrifugal fan, cooling coil and filter section shall be provided for each Public Area.

All Public area AHUs shall be provided with 2 pipe system comprising of multiple rows deep cooling coils for maximum dehumidification, alongwith mixing boxes wherever applicable, to connect return air & fresh air ducts. All AHU‟s shall be provided with variable frequency inverter to operate at varying speed for maintaining constant indoor temperature conditions during varying occupancy levels. Ducted return air shall be provided wherever possible to eliminate intermixing with air from other conditioned areas, and from non air-conditioned areas. AHU‟s shall be located in the allocated AHU rooms.

All AHUs shall be provided with proportionate modulating two way valves in CHW. Depending upon the temperature setting, a sensor through BAS shall activate the valve proportionately to allow required flow of water through coil, depending upon the indoor demand for cooling.

Smoke / Fire dampers shall be provided in accordance with ASHRAE / NFPA within supply air ducts and return air ducts at AHU room wall crossings, at fire rated wall crossings, and at walls between adjoining fire zones. Smoke detectors shall be provided in return air duct to the AHU‟s and shall shut down the AHU‟s upon smoke detection.

Balancing / volume control dampers shall be provided at all branch connections for air flow adjustments.

Sound attenuators shall be provided in air handling and ventilation system where applicable, in order to maintain desired NC levels.

1.9.4 Guest Rooms & Guest Corridors




Each room shall be provided with an independent fan coil unit located above suspended ceiling space in the vestibule. Fan coil unit shall be accessible through a removable access panel in the vestibule ceiling. Conditioned air shall be supplied through an acoustically lined duct & return air shall be brought back through return air grille provided in the suspended ceiling.

Each fan coil unit shall be provided with two way motorized valves in chilled water line. Depending upon the temperature setting, the thermostat shall actuate the valve to allow passing or shutting off chilled water through individual coil. The thermostat shall also have 3 speed fan control switch capable of providing individual space with cooling application.

Thermostat shall also have 3 speed fan control switch. Tempered fresh air shall be provided @ 50 CFM for studio rooms and @ 25 CFM for Bed rooms. Treated fresh air (TFA) AHU shall be located on each floor, as defined in NBC and required by local Fire norms. TFA supply shall be ducted independently for guest rooms and for guest corridors. Exhaust @ 40 cfm per guest toilet shall be discharged into atmosphere through vertical exhaust metal duct installed in the masonary shafts, by exhaust fans located on the roof top.

1.9.5 Court yard Ventilation sysem.

Court yard is located at center of the building from ground to terrace. This court yard is close from thre side and open from one side . All treated fresh air provided in Guest corridor is likely to leak in this court yard which makes it necessary to ventilate it. Therefore centrifugal fans of adequate capacity shall be installed on terrace for court yard ventilation.

1.10 Electrical Power requirement

S. No.

DESCRIPTION ESTIMATED CONNECTED

POWER REQUIREMENT

(KW)

ESTIMATED WORKING

LOAD (KW)

i. 4 Nos. (3 nos. working + 1 no. Standby) 60 TR scroll water chilling machines.

178 133

ii. 4 Nos. (3 nos. working + 1 no. standby) 120 Usgpm each Primary chilled water pumps with variable frequency inverters

14 10.5

iii. 3 Nos. (2 nos. working + 1 no. standby) 360 Usgpm each Condensing water

31.5 21




pumps

iv.

v. vi

3Nos. 360 Usgpm each Cooling Towers (2 nos. working + 1 no. standby) Heat Pump-6.0 TR (1 nos. Working + 1 no. Standby) Secondary side Pumps for Heat pump (1 no. Working + 1 no. Standby)

22

16

1

15

8

0.5

vii.

Pumps for the Hot water delivered to mixing tank & Tertiary pump

2 1

viii. AHU,HRW,TFA & FCUs

40 34

ix. Ventilation System

10 8

Total 315 231

1.11 Brief Outline Specifications for Major Equipments 1.11.1 Scroll Water Chilling Machine: Water Chilling Machine shall be hermetically sealed energy

efficient compressor scroll water chilling machine, using non CFC refrigerants R134a./R410a Machines shall be specified for low energy consumption in the range of 0.74 KW / ton. Each machine shall be furnished within microprocessor control centre capable of monitoring all parameters of the machine.

1.11.2 Pumps: shall be vertical split casing/ end suction pumps, suitable for specified duty. Motors shall

be energy efficient, TEFC type. Primary chilled water & condenser water pumps shall be provided with mechanical seal, so as to prevent leakage of chilled water through glands.

1.11.3 Variable Frequency drives: Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) shall be used with primary chilled

water pumps to vary flow of chilled water to various terminal units in response to load demand, by varying the speed of chilled water pumps. VFD shall be pulse width modulation type, suitable for pump motor ratings.

1.11.4 Air Handling Units: Air handling units shall be double skin construction draw-through type

comprising of mixing box, filter section, coil section and fan section. The gap between double panels shall range between 25 – 50 mm depending upon the application. The gap shall be pressure injected with PUF insulation. Outer sheet of double panel shall be made of galvanised preplasticised sheet of 0.7 mm thickness and inner sheet of 22 G plain aluminum sheet. The fan shall be DIDW centrifugal blower. Coils shall have copper tube aluminum fin construction for chilled water and for reheat coils. Condensate drain pan shall be stainless steel construction,




generously sloped to have zero water retention. 1.11.5 Fan Coil Units: FCU‟s shall be horizontal, blow-through type, each complete with at least 3

row deep chilled water cooling coil of copper tube aluminium fin construction centrifugal blower, filter, primary & secondary condensate drain pan of stainless steel construction, etc.

1.11.6 Piping: All chilled water, Hot water and condensing water pipes shall be mild steel class `C‟

conforming to relevant BIS codes. All jointing in the pipe system shall be by welding. Various type of valves such as butterfly valves, balancing valves and non return valves shall be provided in water lines as per schematic drawings. Condensate drain piping shall be CPVC confirming to relevant BIS codes.

1.11.7 Air Distribution System: All ducts shall be factory fabricated from galvanised steel sheets of

various thicknesses ranging from 26 gauge to 18 gauge according to duct sizes and in accordance with SMACNA standards. Galvanized steel sheets shall be produced by hot dip process. Grilles/ diffusers shall be powder coated extruded aluminium construction and shall be provided as per the requirement of interior design.

1.11.8 Insulation: Insulation material for ducts & pipes shall be closed cell elastomeric nitrile rubber or

cross linked polyethylene foam. Nitrile rubber premoulded pipe sections shall be used for branch pipes of smaller diameter only. Pipes provided with thermal insulation shall be provided with protective coating against mechanical damages. All exposed thermal insulation shall be provided with Aluminium cladding including those inside the plant room.

1.11.9 Sound & Vibration isolator: Mechanical services shall generally be designed and installed with

provisions to contain noise and the transmission of vibration, generated by moving plant and equipment at source to achieve acceptable noise rating for NC levels for occupied areas.

1.11.10 All items of rotating and reciprocating plant and equipment shall be isolated from the foundation /

structure by the use of anti-vibration materials, mountings or spring loaded supports fixed to either concrete bases, inertia blocks or support steels as indicated.

1.11.11 Sound Attenuators shall be installed in ducts in accordance with requirements of drawings and as

included in Schedule of Quantities. Acoustic performance of the attenuators (net insertion loss) shall meet or exceed the specified values.

1.11.12 Heat pumps

Guest House will have considerable amount of hot water requirement. Hot water is required for kitchen, bath, etc. Traditionally, hot water is generated through electrical / gas / diesel based hot water generators. Hot water generators consumes great amount of energy and also add to pollution (especially diesel fired generators).

Heat pump working on condenser water as evaporation source will be used to produce hot water




at 550C.

2. WATER CHILLING MACHINE

2.2 SCROLL WATER CHILLING MACHINE

2.2.1 SCOPE The scope of this consists of but is not necessarily limited to the following:

a. Manufacture and supply of screw liquid chillers with associated motors, soft starter

and accessories. b. All associated items herein to be supplied delivered and installed.

c. In case of multiple compressors, distribution panel having one incoming and multiple outgoings (equal to number of compressors) along with cabling from panel to compressor motors. Incoming power cable will be of Aluminium. Necessary hardware to connect incoming Aluminium cable to chiller copper cabling shall be included.

d. Assembly of chiller components including connection of coolers, condensers, motors,

compressors, purge system for low pressure machine etc. into complete refrigeration machines.

e. Provide manufacturer‟s factory representative‟s services, including coordination, and

start-up and testing supervision.

f. Testing (factory and field), start-up supervision, training and providing necessary documentation and tools for operation.

g. Carry out performance test run at site.

2.2.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAM

a. Chillers shall be rated in accordance with Parameters indicated in Schedule of Quantities. Pressure vessels shall be designed, constructed, tested, stamped and complete with devices in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1989 Safety Code and ASME Code.

b. Chillers shall be the product of a manufacturer normally supplying this type of

equipment.

c. The chiller shall be designed/manufactured and tested in accordance with the applicable portions of the latest revisions of the following Standards and Codes.




AHRI 550 /

590 - 2003 - Performance rating of water chilling packages

using the vapor compression cycle.

AHRI 575 - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute. Standard Method of Measuring Machinery Sound Within Equipment Rooms (Base of all data presented or field testing of equipment with relation to sound requirements).

ASME CODE - American Society of Mechanical Engineers Code for Unfired Pressure Vessels - Section VIII (Design, construction, testing and certification of pressure vessels).

ANSI-B9.1 - American National Standards Institute. Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration (overall general safety requirements, relief device sizing, etc.)

ANSI-B31.5 - American National Standards Institute. Code for Refrigerant Piping.

ISO R281 - Rolling Bearings – Dynamic Load Ratings and Rating for Life.

2.2.3 CAPACITY

Actual refrigeration capacity of chilling machine shall be as shown on Drawings and indicated in Schedule of Quantities.

2.2.4 COMPRESSOR

Compressor shall have a open / semi-hermetic direct / gear drive with integrate lubrication system utilizing compressor pressure differential / oil pump. Refrigerant shall be HFC-134a. Compressor casing shall be constructed from a high strength iron casting, having reinforced double wall construction to provide a rigid structure and minimize the transmission of noise. Multiple pressure lubricated rolling element bearing shall be used to absorb axial thrust as well as radial load. Minimum 80 mesh reinforced SS strainer shall be provided at the suction of compressor for protection. Rotors shall be precision made from ductile iron. Oil separator shall be provided at discharge side of compressor. Oil separator can be an integral part of compressor of alternatively, it could be separate pressure vessel. Oil separator shall contain impingement plate, removable SS oil strainer and electrical oil heater. Drained oil from oil separator shall be piped back to the compressor.




Step-less capacity control to exactly match system load shall be provided. A microprocessor based controller shall modulate slide valve in response to chilled water outlet temp. controller shall be programmed for PID&T logic. Compressor shall be able to unloaded upto 10% of load with stable running.

Scroll Compressor(s):

Compressors shall be of the hermetically sealed design. Compressors shall be mounted on vibration isolators to minimize vibration and noise. Rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory to eliminate vibration. Lubrication system shall be centrifugal pump type equipped with an oil level bull's eye sight glass and an oil charging valve. Crankcase oil heater shall be provided if standard .

2.2.5 MICRO COMPUTER CONTROL CENTRE

Each unit shall be furnished with microcomputer control centre in a locked enclosure, factory

mounted, wired and tested. The control center shall include a 40-character alphanumeric

display showing all system parameters in English language with numeric data in English (FPS)

units.

Digital programming of essential setpoints through a colour coded, tactile-feel keypad shall

include: entering and leaving chilled water temperature and condensing water temperature;

percent loading: pull down demand limiting; seven-day time clock for starting and stopping

chiller (complete with local holiday schedule); and remote reset temperature range.

All safety and cycling shutdowns shall be annunciated through the alphanumeric display and

consist of day, time, cause of shutdown, and type of restart required. Safety shutdowns shall

include: high oil pressure; high compressor discharge temperature: low evaporator

pressure: motor controller fault: and sensor malfunction. Cycling shutdowns shall include: low

water temperature; low oil temperature: chiller/condenser water flow interruption; power fault;

internal time clock; and entire cycle.

System operating information shall include: return/leaving chilled water temperatures; return/leaving condenser water temperatures; evaporator /condenser refrigerant pressure; differential oil pressure; percent motor current; evaporator/condenser saturation temperatures; operating hours (Hours Run) and number of compressor starts.

Security access shall be provided to prevent unauthorized change of setpoints to allow local or remote control of the chiller, and to allow manual operation of the prerotation vanes and oil pump.

The chiller shall be provided with an RS-232 port to output all system operating data, shutdown/cycling messages and a record of the last four cycling or safety shutdowns to a




remote printer or Building Automation System (BAS). The control center shall be programmable to provide data logs to the BAS/printer at a set time interval.

Control center shall be able to interface with the Building Automation System

(BAS) to provide remote chiller start/stop reset of chilled water temperature reset of current limit; and status messages indicating chiller is ready to start, chiller is operating, chiller is shut down on a safety requiring reset, and chiller is shut down on a recycling safety. For Scroll chillers phase reversal protection shall be part of microcomputer centre/ Starter.

2.2.6 INTERFACE WITH BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM All necessary hardwares / softwares to integrate the chiller panel to BAS system shall

be provided free of cost by chiller manufacturer / supplier. Control panel should be with open protocol like Modbus RTU/ Bacnet/ Lon work for integrating with BAS.

For the integration of Microprocessor Panel of the chilling machine with the Building Automation System, an Interface Control Document shall be developed by BAS Contractor. It shall be responsibility of HVAC Contractor to provide following to BAS Contractor for preparing the interface. a. Hardware Protocol of Chiller Microprocessor panel. b. Software Protocol of Chiller Microprocessor panel. c. Communication structure relating to collection of message / event information. d. Description of the formatted packets / blocks of data which construct controller commands

/ responses. e. Written permission to BAS contractor to develop the interface without any financial

implication. 2.2.7 ELECTRIC MOTOR

Motor shall be energy efficient and suitable for 415±10% volts, 3 phase, 50 cycles AC supply. Hermetic/semi hermetic motors shall be suction gas cooled ,two pole, squirrel cage induction types. In case of open compressor type motors shall be screen protected drip proof squirrel cage induction type. Motor shall be designed and guaranteed for continuous operation. Insulation of motors shall be F class. Temperature rise of motor under rated service conditions shall not




exceed 80 Deg C (by resistance method of measurement) over an ambient of 40 Deg C. the motor shall be provided with a combination of ball and roller bearing.

Starting current at rated voltage and frequency shall not exceed 2 times of full load current

at rated voltage and frequency.

Terminal box of sturdy construction shall provide enough space for terminating, connecting and earthing of PVC - insulated aluminium conductor cable. All terminal boxes shall be located at the same side of the motor and have terminal and cable glands suitable for the specified cables.

The efficiency and power factor shall be not less than the following values, at rated voltage and frequency and at the specified loads. Load Efficiency Power Factor Full Load 96% 0.86 3/4 96% 0.8 1/2 96% 0.8 Starting current at rated voltage and frequency shall not exceed 2 times the full load current at the rated voltage and frequency. The total efficiency shall include losses of the auxiliaries such as independent excitation, motor-driven fans, lube-oil pumps etc. Over voltage surge protection shall be provided to protect motor.

2.2.8 STARTER

Shall be close transition star delta starter or soft starter to ensure starting current at rated voltage

& frequency does not exceed 2 times full load current.

All components of starter shall be housed in dust proof enclosure and suitable for 415 ± 10%

volts 50 cycles 3 phase AC power supply.

2.2.9 EVAPORATOR AND CONDENSER

a. Shells and Water Boxes : The evaporator and condenser shells will be of rolled carbon steel plate with fusion welded seams. Removable compact water boxes of cast iron or welded steel with stub-out water connections shall be provided to permit access for tube cleaning and replacement. Water boxes shall be designed for 150 psig working pressure and hydraulically tested at 225 psig. The tubes shall be finned from outside having spiral ridges from inside, roller expanded into the tube sheets providing a leakproof seal. The tube material will be copper, intermediate steel tube supports should be provided at intervals not exceeding 1200 mm.




b. Evaporator (Chiller) : Chiller shall be provided with eliminator to prevent liquid carry over to the compressor. The chiller shall be provided with liquid level sight glass and a relief device (of the bursting type) to prevent excess pressure in the heat exchanger. The chiller shall be horizontal, shell and tube type, provided with the following connections and accessories, as separately identified in the schedule of quantities :

i. Refrigerant inlet and outlet pressure gages.

ii. Water inlet and outlet connections.

iii. Drain and vent connections with stop valves.

iv. Pressure gauges on water inlet and outlet connections. v. Descaling valves.

Chiller shall be insulated with 25 mm thick nitrile rubber. The insulation shall be set with

compound recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be applied sealing

the joints. The insulation shall be applied in such a manner that water boxes and covers

shall be removable without damaging it.

c. Water cooled Condenser : The condenser shall be of same construction as for chiller above (without insulation). It shall be complete with the accessories as separately defined in the schedule of quantities . Shell side volume of the condenser shall be high enough to contain complete refrigerant charge in case of pump-down. In case of chiller with de-superheater, main condenser shall be sized for 100% heat rejection duty.

d. Air cooled condenser: Shall be constructed of copper tubes and die formed aluminium

fins giving self-spacing collars. Fins shall be mechanically bonded to the tubes. Coil shall be with anti-corrosive coating, suitable to operate in saline, coastal humid environment. Condenser fans shall be direct driven, heavy duty axial type. Blades shall be of aluminium. Fan motor shall be 6 pole with internal overload protection and shall be permanently lubricated. Belt driven fans are not acceptable.

2.2.10 ECONOMISER SUBCOOLER Each chiller shall be provided with shell and tube / PHE / flash chamber type economizer.

Condensed liquid in condenser shall be taped off and shall be expanded at intermediate pressure with expansion valve. Value of intermediate pressure (Pi) shall be as follows.

Pi = (Pc Pe)0.5 Where Pc = saturated condensing pressure (abs)




Pe = Saturated Evaporation Pressure (abs) The liquid expanded to intermediate pressure shall be used to absorb enthalpy from remaining

liquid refrigerant in order to provide subcooling. Vapor refrigerants due to above heat transfer shall again be admitted to compressor at intermediate pressure port.

2.2.11 INSTALLATION The chilling machine shall be installed over a cement concrete platform and shall be adequately

isolated as per manufacturers recommendations against transmission of vibrations to the building structure.

2.2.12 PAINTING Screw water chilling machine shall be finished with durable enamel paint. Shop coats of paint

that have become marred during shipment or erection, shall be cleaned off with mineral spirits, wire brushed and spot primed over the affected areas, then coated with enamel paint to match the finish over the adjoining shop-painted surfaces.

2.2.13 PERFORMANCE RATING : The unit shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level Capacity ratings, and power

consumption with operating points clearly indicated, shall be submitted and verified at the time of testing and commissioning of the installation. Capacity shall be ascertained by measurements of chilled water flow rate and temperature of chilled water in and out of the chilling unit.

Power consumption shall be computed from measurements of incoming voltage & input current to the chilling machine. Sound Pressure level for Air cooled chillers shall not exceed 75dBA at 1m distance from chiller.

2.2.14 WITNESS TEST Prior to shipment, chilling machines shall be subjected to inspection and witness of performance

tests by Consultant and Owner‟s representative to verify various performance parameters as confirmed by vendor earlier at the time of award of contract. Performance test shall be carried out as per procedure laid down by ARI / EUROVENT and as per Aecom specified parameter, at 100%, 75%, 50% & 25% loading. Temp. of leaving chilled water shall be kept constant during part load testing.

Fouling factor simulation for condenser and evaporator shall be done as per ARI-550/590-

2003.Incremental temperature difference ( to be calculated based on Normative appendix-C of ARI-550/590-2003) on account of designed fouling factors shall be added in condenser water entering temperature and shall be subtracted for leaving chilled water temperature. Chiller shall




produce design refrigeration capacity and guaranteed power consumption at these corrected set of entering condenser water and leaving chilled water temperature. Outside tube surface area (for condenser and flooded evaporators) and inside tube surface area (for DX-Evaporator) , being inputs for ARI mathematical model for fouling, shall be submitted along with the offer.

All expenses inclusive of business class airfare, boarding lodging etc. relating to the witness test

will be borne by the vendor / contractor.

3. PUMPS

3.1 SCOPE The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of water

pumps conforming to these Specifications and in accordance with requirements of Schedule of Quantities.

3.2 TYPE The type and size of all chilled water, condensing water, cold water and condensate drain

pumps for air conditioning applications shall be in accordance with requirement of Drawings and Schedule of Quantities.

3.3 CAPACITY Water flow rates and head of the pumps shall be in accordance with the requirements of Schedule

of Quantities. 3.4 SPLIT CASING / BACKPULLOUT PUMPS

a. Pump casing shall be close-grained cast iron of heavy section, horizontally split, making possible complete servicing of rotating parts without breaking piping or motor connections. Motor to pump connection shall be of the flexible coupling type. Suction passages shall be volute in form, promoting smooth entry to impeller and increased efficiency. Impeller shall be bronze or gun metal, double suction, enclosed type, hydraulically balanced and passages smooth-finished for minimum friction and maximum efficiency. Impeller rings shall be secured from relative movement by tongue and groove fittings. Shaft shall be steel, protected by gunmetal sleeves extending through stuffing boxes. Stuffing boxes shall be extra deep, water sealed with renewable bushes. Shaft shall be supported in ball /journal bearings, grease lubricated, contained in easily removable housing. Pumps shall be fitted with mechanical seals, an air valve, two grease lubricators, drain plug and water seal drain connections.




b. Motor shall be energy efficient (EFF-1), totally enclosed, fan-cooled, class-F insulation. Motor shall be specially designed for quiet operation and its speed shall not exceed 1440 rpm. The motor rating shall be such as to ensure non overloading of the motor throughout its capacity range. Motor shall be suitable for 415±10% volts, 3 phase, 50 cycles AC, power supply.

c. Base shall be of a size suitable for the pump, motor and shaft and shall be constructed

of cast iron or welded steel. Flexible coupling shall be protected by a guard mounted on the common inertia base.

d. Installation : The pump shall be installed on a concrete foundation with vibration isolators

as per Approved-for-Construction shop drawings/Schedule of Quantities. e. Back pull out end suction pumps shall be used upto 20 HP or 1800 Usgpm (Whichever is

lower). Double suction vertical split casing pumps shall be used for water flow of 1800 Usgpm and above.

3.5 LUBRICATION Upon installation of the complete system and before testing, the pump shall be lubricated in strict

accordance with the manufacturer‟s instructions. 3.6 PUMP ALIGNMENT

Split casing pumps, prior to testing, shall be aligned with a dial indicator within 0.05 mm. All pumps should be supplied with suction guide and shall be Long coupled.

3.7 PAINTING All pumps, motors and bases shall be supplied with approved finish. Shop coat of paint that

have become marred during shipment or erection shall be cleaned off with mineral spirits, wire brushed and spot primed over the affected areas, then coated with enamel paint to match the adjoining areas.

3.8 PERFORMANCE DATA Pump performance curves and power consumption with operating points clearly indicated shall

be submitted and verified at the time of testing and commissioning of the installation. 3.9 TESTING Pump performance shall be computed from the pump curves provided by manufacturer. All

pumps shall be tested at factory as per relevant BIS codes.




4. VARIABLE SPEED PUMPING SYSTEM

4.1 SCOPE The scope of this section comprise the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of variable

speed pumping package consisting of following :

a. Individual Components b. Pump Control Panel c. Adjustable Frequency Drive d. Different pressure transmitted (Min. 1 Nos. per zone) e. Logic Programming for sequence of Operation f. Power wiring and control wiring shall be carried out by installation contractor as shown on

the field connection drawings and wiring diagrams supplied with the pumping package.

4.2 REFERENCES

a. ANSI - American National Standards Institute b. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association c. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc. d. ETL - Electrical Testing Laboratories e. CSA - Canadian Standards Association f. NEC - National Electrical Code g. ISO - International Standards Organization h. IEC - International Electrochemical Commission

4.3 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall include the following and shall be specific to this project. General Submittals shall

not be accepted.

a. System summary sheet.




b. Sequence of operation c. Shop drawing indicating dimensions, required clearances and location and size of each

field connection. d. Power and control wiring diagrams. e. System profile analysis including variable speed pump curves and system curve. The

analysis shall also include pump, motor and Adjustable Frequency Drive (AFD) efficiencies, job specific load profile, staging points, horse power and kilowatt/hour consumption.

f. Pump data sheets.

4.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

a. The pumping package shall be assembled by the pump manufacturer. An assembler of pumping systems not actively engaged in the design and construction of centrifugal pumps shall not be considered a pump manufacturer. The manufacturer shall assume “Unit Responsibility” for the complete pumping package. Unit responsibility shall be defined as responsibility for interface and successful operation of all system components supplied by the pumping system manufacturer.

b. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 (twenty) years of experience in the design

and construction of variable speed pumping systems. c. The local supplier of Chilled Water Variable Speed Pumping System (VSPS) shall have

relevant expertise in all aspects of design, application engineering, installation, programming, interfacing, commissioning and after sales service. Supplier must have commissioned minimum 25 sets of chilled water VSPS in India.

d. All functions of the variable speed pump control system shall be tested at the factory prior

to shipment. This test shall be conducted with motors connected to AFD output and it shall test all inputs, outputs and program execution specific to this application.

e. The manufacturer shall be fully certified by the International Standards Organization per

ISO 9001. Proof of this certification shall be furnished at time of submittal. f. Manufacturer shall be listed by Underwrite‟s Laboratories as manufacturer of packaged

pumping systems. g. Tenderer shall comply with all sections of this specification relating to packaged pumping

systems. Any deviations from this specifications shall be clearly defined in writing at time of bid. If no exceptions are taken at time of bid, the supplier shall be bound by these




specifications. 4.5 MANUFACTURED UNITS

a. Furnish and install as shown on the plans a Variable Speed Pumping System as per approved manufacturers.

b. The control system shall include as, a minimum, the programmable logic pump controller,

adjustable frequency drive(s) and remote sensor / transmitters as indicated in the drawings and schedule of quantities on the plans. Additional items shall be included as specified or as required to properly execute the sequence of operation.

c. The variable speed pump logic controller, adjustable frequency drives, AFD bypass if

indicated in schedule of quantities, and remote sensor / transmitters shall be shipped as individual components to the job site.

d. Pump logic controller, adjustable frequency drives, sensor / transmitters and related

equipment shall be installed by the mechanical contractor as shown on the plans. e. Power wiring shall be installed by the mechanical contractor as shown on the field

connection drawings and wiring diagrams supplied with the pumping package. f. Low voltage wiring shall be installed by the mechanical controls contractor as shown on

the field connection drawings and wiring diagrams supplied with the pumping package.

4.6 PUMP LOGIC CONTROLLER

a. The pump logic controller assembly shall be listed by and bear the label of Underwriter‟s Laboratory INC. (UL). The controller shall meet Part 15 of FCC regulations pertaining to class A computing devices. The controller shall specifically designed for variable speed pumping applications.

b. The controller shall function to a proven program that safeguards against hydraulic

conditions including : i. Pump flow surges ii. Hunting iii. End of curve iv. System over pressure. v. NPSHR above NPSHA




vi. Motor overload c. The pump logic controller shall be capable of receiving up to two discrete analog inputs

from zone sensor / transmitter as indicated on the plans. It will then select the analogue signal that has deviated the greatest amount from its setpoint. This selected signal shall be used as the command feedback input for a hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting. Each input signal shall be capable of maintaining a different set point value. Controller shall be capable of controlling upto three pumps in parallel.

d. The pump logic controller shall have an additional analog input for a flow sensor. This

input shall serve as the criteria for the end of curve protection algorithm. e. The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional-integral-derivative control

function. The proportional, integral and derivative values shall be user adjustable over an infinite range.

f. The pump logic controller shall be self prompting. All messages shall be displayed in plain

English. The operator interface shall have the following features :

i. Multi-fault memory and recall last 10 faults and related operational data ii. Red fault light, Yellow warning light and Green power on light. iii. Soft-touch membrane keypad switches.

g. The display shall have four lines, with 20 characters on three lines and eight large characters on one line. Actual pump information shall be displayed indicating pump status.

h. Controller shall be capable performing the following pressure booster function:

i. Low suction pressure cut-out to protect the pumps against operating with insufficient suction pressure.

ii. High system pressure cut-out to protect the piping system against high pressure

conditions. iii. No flow shut down to turn the pumps off automatically when system demand is

low enough to be supplied by hydropneumatic tank. No flow shutdown shall require any external flow meters, flow switches, nor pressure switches to determine when a No Flow condition exists.

j. The following communication features shall be provided to BMS :

i. Remote system start / stop non-powered digital input. ii. Failure of any system component. Output closes to indicate alarm condition.




iii. One 4-20 mA output with selectable output of :

Frequency

Process Variable

Output Current

Output power. k. The following communication features shall be provided to the BUILDING

MANAGEMENT system via an RS-485/232/Ethernet port utilizing BACnet/Modbus protocol with required Hardware and Software.

i. Individual Analog Input ii. Individual Zone Set Points. iii. Individual Pump / AFD on/off status. iv. System percent speed. v. System Start / Stop command vi. System operation mode. vii. Individual KW signals. viii. System flow, when optional flow sensor is provided.

l. The pump logic controller shall be in a IP52 Enclosure.

4.7 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE

a. The adjustable frequency drives shall be Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) type, microprocessor controlled design.

b. The Adjustable Frequency Drive (AFD), including all factory installed option, be tested to

UL standard 508. The AFD shall also meet C-UL and be CE marked and built to ISO 9001 standards.

c. The AFD shall be housed in a IP52 enclosure. AFF with plastic enclosure shall not be

acceptable. d. The AFD shall employ and advanced sine wave approximation and voltage vector control

to allow operation at rated motor shaft output speed with no derating. This voltage vector control shall minimize harmonics to the motor to increase motor efficiency and lift. Power




factor shall be near unity regardless of speed or load. e. The AFD shall have balanced DC link reactors to minimize power line harmonics AFDs

without a DC link reactor shall provide a 3% impedance line reactor. f. Input and output power circuit switching can be done without interlocks or damage to the

AFD. g. The following customer modifiable adjustments shall be provided : i. Accel time. ii. Decel time. iii. Minimum Frequency. iv. Maximum Frequency. h. RS-485/232/Ethernet communication shall be available and provided as an option. i. An automatic energy optimization selection feature shall be provided. This feature shall

reduce voltage when lightly loaded and provide a 3% to 10% additional energy savings. j. The AFD shall be suitable for upto 3300 feet elevation above sea level without derating.

Maximum operating ambient temperature shall not less than 104 degrees F. AFD shall be suitable for operation in environments upto to 955 non-condensing humidity.

k. The AFD shall be capable of displaying the following information in plain English via an

alphanumeric display : i. Frequency. ii. Voltage iii. Current iv. Kilowatts per hour v. Fault Identification. vi. Percent Torque. vii. Percent Power viii. RPM

4.8 AUTOMATIC AFD BYPASS

a. Variable speed pumping system shall be equipped with an automatic bypass if indicated in Schedule of Quantities.

b. Bypass shall consist of a main power disconnect with ground fault protection, a pair of

interlocked contractors and a motor overload relay. All are to be mounted in a IP52 enclosure.




c. Automatic bypass shall operate as shown in schematic drawings described in the sequence of operation.

4.9 SENSOR / TRANSMITTERS

a. Provide field mounted differential pressure sensor transmitters as indicated in BOQ or on the plans. Unit shall transmit an isolated 4-20mA dc signal indicative of process variable to the pump logic controller via standard two wire 24 DC system. Unit shall have a corrosion resistant steel body with NPT process connection. It shall have a NEMA / IP65 electrical enclosure capable of withstanding 450 PSI static pressure. Accuracy shall be within 0.5% of full span. The installation contractor shall ensure that these differential pressure transmitter are enclosed within lockable weatherproof housing.

4.10 PAINTING All variable pumping system, pumps, motors and bases shall be supplied with approved finish.

Shop coat of paint that have become marred during shipment or erection shall be cleaned off with mineral spirits, wire brushed and spot primed over the affected areas, then coated with enamel paint to match the adjoining areas.

4.11 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

a. The system shall consist of a pump logic controller, multiple pump / VFD sets, with manual and automatic alternation and pump staging.

b. The pumping system shall start upon the closure of customer‟s contact when the pump

logic controller Mode of Operation selector switch is in the REMOTE position. c. When the pump logic controller selector switch is in the LOCAL position, and start

command is given via operator interface, the pumping system shall operate automatically. d. Sensor / transmitters shall be provided as indicated on the plans. e. Each sensor / transmitter shall send a 4-20 mA signal to the pump logic controller,

indicative of process variable condition. f. The pump logic controller shall compare each signal to the independent, engineer / user

determined set points. g. When all set points are satisfied by the process variable, the pump speed shall remain

Constant at the optimum energy consumption level. h. The pump logic controller shall continuously scan and compare each process variable to

its individual set point and control to the least satisfied zone.




i. If the set point can not be satisfied by the designated lead pump, the pump logic controller shall initiate a timed sequence of operation to stage a lag pump.

j. The lag pump shall accelerate resulting in the lead pump(s) decelerating until they

equalize in speed. k. Further change in process variable shall cause the pumps to change speed together. l. When the set point criteria can be safely satisfied with fewer pumps, the Technologic

pump logic controller shall initiate a timed destage sequence and continue variable speed operation.

m. As the worst case zone deviates from set point, the pump logic controller shall send the

appropriate analog signal to the VFD to speed up or slow down the pump / motor. n. In the event of a VFD fault, the pump logic controller automatically initiates a times

sequence of events to start the redundant pump / VFD set in the variable speed mode. The redundant variable speed system shall be started through the pump logic controller.

o. Upon VFD fault(s), the pump controller shall display an alarm condition through a plain

english message. p. VFD fault indication shall be continuously displayed on the operator interface of the pump

until the fault has been corrected and the controller has been manually reset. q. In the event of the failure of a zone sensor / transmitter, its process variable signal shall

be removed from the scan / compare program. Alternative zone sensor / transmitters, if available, shall remain in the scan / compare program for control.

r. Upon sensor failure a plain english warning message shall be displayed on the operator

interface of the pump logic controller. s. In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals, a user selectable

number of VFDs shall maintain a user adjustable speed, reset shall be automatic upon correction of the zone failure.

5. AIR HANDLING UNITS/TREATED FRESH AIR UNITS

5.1 SCOPE The scope of this section, comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of double

skin construction air handling units, conforming to these Specifications and in accordance with requirements of drawings and of the Schedule of Quantities.




5.2 TYPE The air handling units shall be double skin construction, draw-thru type comprising of various

sections, filter section, coil section and fan section, mixing box, (wherever the return air and fresh air are ducted) as shown on drawings and included in schedule of quantities.

5.3 CAPACITY The air handling capacities, maximum motor horse power and static pressure shall be as shown

on Drawings and in Schedule of Quantities. 5.4 CASING Double skinned panels shall be 25-50 thick made of galvanized steel, pressure injected

with foam insulation (density 40 kg/m3) with K factor not exceeding 0.02 Watt/Mc shall be fixed to 1.5 mm thick aluminium alloy twin box section structural framework with stainless steel screws. Outer sheet of panels shall be made of galvanised preplasticised sheet of 1 mm thick, and inner sheet of 1mm Gauge plain G.I.Sheet.

The entire framework shall be mounted on an aluminium alloy or galvanized steel (depending on

size) channel base as per manufacturer‟s recommendation. The panels shall be sealed to the framework by heavy duty gaskets held captive in the framed extrusion. All panels shall be detachable or hinged. Hinges shall be made of die cast aluminum / hard nylon with stainless steel pivots, handles shall be made of hard nylon and be operational from both inside and outside of the unit. Units supplied with various sections shall be suitable for on site assembly with continuous foam gasket. All fixing and gaskets shall be concealed.

Units shall have hinged, quick opening access door in the fan section and also in filter section

where filters are not accessible from outside. Access doors shall be double skin type. Condensate drain pan shall be fabricated from 18 gage stainless steel sheet with all corners

welded. It shall be isolated from bottom floor panel with19 mm elastomeric nitrile rubber.

5.5 MIXING BOX AHUs & TFAs requiring mixing boxes as specified in Schedule of Quantities shall be complete

with fresh and return air dampers. 5.6 THERMAL BREAK PROFILE TFA units & AHUs with mixing box having return air ducted shall be provided with thermal break

profile as indicated in schedule of quantities. Also these AHU‟s shall be provided with 46 mm thick panel.




5.7 DAMPER Dampers shall be opposed blade type. Blades shall be made of double skinned aerofoil

aluminium sections with integral gasket and assembled within a rigid extruded aluminium alloy frame. All linkages and supporting spindles shall be made of aluminium or nylon, turning in teflon bushes. Manual dampers shall be provided with a bakelite knob for locking the damper blades in position. Linkages shall be extended wherever specified for motorised operation. Damper frames shall be sectionalised to minimise blade warping. Air leakage through dampers when in the closed position shall not exceed 1.5% of the maximum design air volume flow rate at the maximum design air total pressure.

5.8 MOTOR AND DRIVE Fan motors shall be energy efficient (EFF-1) and shall be 415±10% volts, 50 cycles, three

phase, totally enclosed fan-cooled class F, with IP-55 protection. Motors shall be especially designed for quiet operation and motor speed shall not exceed 1440 rpm. Drive to fan shall be provided through Variable pitch pulley with belt-drive arrangement. Belts shall be of the oil-resistant type. Starter panels shall be provided as per specification in electrical part.

5.9 FAN Fans shall be centrifugal, forward curved / backward curved / aerofoil so as to give maximum

efficiency for given duty condition.Fans driven by variable frequency drive shall be backward inclined irrespective of static pressure value. Fans shall be selected for minimum efficiency of 75% Fan casing shall be made of galvanised steel sheet. Fan wheels shall be made of galvanised steel. Fan shaft shall be grounded C40 carbon steel and supported in self-aligning plummer block operating less than 75% of first critical speed, grease lubricated bearings. Fan wheels and pulleys shall be individually tested and precision balanced dynamically. Fan motor assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced to G6.3 grade as per relevant ISO/AMCA standard. Computerized fan selection print outs shall be submitted along with the offer.

Motors shall be mounted inside the AHU casing on slide rails for easy belt tensioning, and be

totally enclosed, fan cooled, to be class `F‟ insulation. Motors shall drive heavy duty V-belt, constant pitch, drive selected at 110% of motor horsepower.

Both fan and motors assemblies shall be mounted on a deep section aluminium alloy or

galvanised steel (depending on size) base frame. Combination spring and rubber anti vibration mounts shall be provided for isolating the unit

casing. Frame retardant, waterproof silicone rubber impregnated flexible connection shall be provided at the fan discharge.

5.10 COOLING COILS




Chilled water coils shall have 12.5 to 15 mm dia (O.D )tubes minimum 0.4 mm thick with sine wave aluminium fins firmly bonded to copper tubes assembled in zinc coated steel frame. Face and surface areas shall be such as to ensure rated capacity from each unit and such that the air velocity across the coil shall not exceed 150 meters per minute. The coil shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. The coil shall have copper header with chilled water supply & return connections protruding out of AHU casing by minimum 150 mm and fitted with dielectric coupling for connection with MS pipes. Each coil shall be factory-tested at 21 kg per sq. m air pressure under water. Tube shall be hydraulically / mechanically expanded for minimum thermal contact resistance with fins. Fin spacing shall be 4 - 5 fins per cm. Water pressure drop in coil shall not exceed 10 PSIG.

All AHU‟s shall be provided with minimum 6 Row Cooling Coil. All TFA units shall be provided

with minimum 8 row cooling coil. Additional DX coil shall be included wherever SOQ calls for the same. Fan shall be selected to take care of additional pressure drop imposed by DX coil.

In case AHU has multiple coil stacked one above another, intermediate train of SS 304 (18 gauge) shall be provided so that upper level of coil drains into this train. Copper / SS 304 piping shall be provided from this train upto main bottom tray. Computerized cooling coil selection output shall be submitted. Coil rating shall be as per ARI-410/2006.

5.11 FILTERS Each unit shall be provided with a factory assembled filter section containing washable synthetic

type air filters having anodised aluminium frame. The filter shall have minimum 90% efficiency down to 10 microns . The media shall be supported with HDPE mesh on one side and aluminium mesh on other side. Filter banks shall be easily accessible and designed for easy withdrawal and renewal of filter cells. Filter framework shall be fully sealed and constructed from aluminium alloy.For green buildings, AHUs if indicated in Bill of Quantity shall also be provided with MERV-13 filters.

5.12 ACCESSORIES Each air handling unit shall be provided with manual air vent at high point in the cooling coil and

drain plug in the bottom of the coil. In addition, the following accessories may be required at air handling units, their detailed specifications are given in individual sections, & quantities separately identified in schedule of Quantities.

a. Insulated butterfly valves, balancing valves, `Y‟ strainer, union & condensate drain

piping with „U‟ trap upto sump or floor drain in air handling unit room, as described in section “Piping”.

b. Thermometers in the thermometer wells & pressure gauge (with cocks) within gauge

ports in chilled water supply and return lines as per the section “Instruments”.




c. Water resistance marine light with power cabling.

5.13 ISOLATORS Vibration isolators shall be provided with all air handling units. Vibration isolators shall be

cushyfoot mounting type / rubber pads as indicated in BOQ. Minimum vibration isolation efficiency shall be 90%.

5.14 FRESH AIR INTAKES Extruded aluminium construction duly anodized (20 microns and above) fresh air louvers with

birdscreen and dampers shall be provided in the clear openings in masonry walls of the air handling unit rooms having atleast one external wall. Fresh air dampers shall be of the interlocking, opposed-blade louver type. Blades shall be made of extruded aluminium construction and shall be rattle-free. Dampers shall be similar to those specified in “Air Distribution”. Fresh air fans and fresh air intakes shall be as per the requirements of Schedule of Quantities.

5.15 PAINTING Shop coats of paint that have become marred during shipment or erection shall be cleaned off

with mineral spirits, wire brushed and spot primed over the affected areas, then coated with paint to match the finish over the adjoining shop painted surface.

5.16 PERFORMANCE DATA Air handling unit shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level of the equipment.

Fan performance rating and power consumption data, with operating points clearly indicated shall be submitted and verified at the time of testing and commissioning of the installation.

5.17 TESTING Cooling capacity of various air handling unit models be computed from the measurements of

air flow and dry and wet bulb temperatures of air entering and leaving the coil. Flow

measurements shall be by an anemometer and temperature measurements by accurately

calibrated mercury-in-glass thermometers. Computed results shall conform to the specified

capacities and quoted ratings. Power consumption shall be computed from measurements of

incoming voltage and input current.




6. AIR COOLED DUCTABLE / NONDUCTABLE SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

6.1 SCOPE The scope of this section comprise the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of Air Cooled

DUCTABLE and Split Units conforming to these specifications and in accordance with the requirements of Drawings and Schedule of Quantities.

6.2 TYPE The Split Units shall consist of hermetically sealed Scroll compressor, motor, air cooled

condenser, sump heaters, integral refrigerant piping and wiring, all mounted on a steel frame. Indoor unit to be installed for Split Unit within building, shall be housed in insulated cabinet

consisting of cooling coil, blower with motor, filter & insulated drain pan. The Air Cooled DUCTABLE Unit shall consist of hermetically sealed Scroll compressor, motor,

sump heaters, integral refrigerant piping and control panel duly wired to compressor and air cooled condenser all mounted on a steel frame. The Air cooled condenser with fan duly mounted on a common frame shall be installed on the wall openings with suitable angle iron / channel frame to be provided by contractor. The suitable starters, switches, power control cabling between Air Cooled DUCTABLE Unit and Air Cooled Condenser shall be included by the contractor.

6.3 CAPACITY The refrigeration capacity of DUCTABLE Unit and Room Air Conditioners, split unit shall be as

shown on Drawings and in Schedule of Quantities. 6.4 COMPRESSOR AND MOTOR Compressor shall be hermetic reciprocating / Scroll, serviceable type and shall have dual

pressure stat, and an operating oil charge. The motor shall be suction gas cooled and shall be sealed against dirt and moisture. The motor shall be suitable for 415±10% / volts or 230±10 % volts, 50 Hz, A.C. supply. Refrigerant used shall be HFC 134a / 410a.

6.5 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND CONTROLS Refrigerant piping and fittings interconnecting compressor condenser shall be all copper and

valves shall be brass / gunmetal construction.




6.6 CASING The indoor & outdoor units shall be sectionalised / cabinet construction. Indoor units shall be

consisting of fan section, coil section, filter section, and drain pan. Outdoor unit shall consist of condenser coil, fan & compressor. In case of package units, the compressor shall be mounted within the indoor units and in case of split unit, the compressor shall be mounted with the outdoor units. Each section shall be constructed of thick sheet steel all welded / bolted construction, adequately reinforced with structural members and provided with sufficient access panels for proper lubrication and maintenance. Base panel shall be constructed of fabricated steel structure provided with an under frame suitably braced. Each unit shall include one piece drain pan constructed of 20 gauge galvanised sheet steel plate. Drain pan shall extend under coil and fan sections with drain connections. Removable panels in fan and coil sections shall provide access to all internal parts. Panels shall be internally lined with 2.5 cm thick fibreglass as per section “Insulation” for the thermal insulation and acoustic lining.

6.7 FAN MOTOR AND DRIVE Fan motor shall be suitable for 415 ± 10% volts or 230±10% volts, 50 Hz, A.C.Supply, Single

phase, motors shall be provided with permanent capacitor. Motors shall be especially designed for quite operation and motor speed shall not exceed 1440 rpm.It shall be provided with starter panels as per specification.

6.8 FAN Fan wheels and housing shall be fabricated from heavy gauge steel. Fan wheels shall be of

double-width, double inlet forward-curve, multi-blade type enclosed in a housing and mounted on a common shaft. Fan housing shall be made of die-formed steel sheets with stream-lined inlets to ensure smooth air flow into the fans, fan shaft bearing shall be oil/grease lubricated. All rotating parts shall be dynamically balanced individually, and the complete assembly shall be statically and hydraulically balanced. Fan speed shall not exceed 1000 rpm and maximum fan outlet velocity shall be 550 meters per minute.

6.9 COOLING COIL Cooling coils shall be of fin and tube type having aluminium fins firmly bonded to copper tubes

assembled in zinc coated steel frame. Face and surface areas shall be such as to ensure rated capacity from each unit and air velocity across each coil shall not exceed 100 meters per minute. The coil shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. Each coil shall be factory-tested at 21 Kg. per sq.cm air pressure under water. Tube shall be mechanically / hydraulically expanded for minimum thermal contract resistance with fins. The number of fins per cm. shall be 4 to 5.

6.10 VIBRATION ISOLATORS The indoor and outdoor units shall be provided with ribbed rubber pad vibration isolators.




6.11 PAINTING Split units shall be factory finished with durable alkyd spray enamel. Shop coats of paint that have

become marred during shipment or erection shall be cleaned off with mineral spirits, then coated with enamel paint to match the finish over the adjoining shop-painted surface.

6.12 PERFORMANCE RATING The unit shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level. Capacity rating and power

consumption with operating points clearly indicated shall be submitted with the tenders and verified at the time of testing and commissioning of the installation.

7. FAN COIL UNITS

7.1 SCOPE The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of fan coil

units conforming to these Specifications and in accordance with the requirements of the

Drawings and Schedule of Quantities.

7.2 TYPE The fan coil units shall be vertical type for floor mounting, horizontal type for ceiling-suspension.

Floor-mounted vertical units shall have vertical top discharge; and horizontal units mounted

within ceiling space shall have horizontal discharge and shall be ductable. All units shall be

complete with chilled water coil, one or more centrifugal fans and motor, cleanable fabric

filters, insulated condensate drain pan.

7.3 CAPACITY The air moving and coil capacities shall be as shown on Drawings and indicated in Schedule

of Quantities.

7.4 CABINETS Cabinets for floor mounted exposed FCU shall be constructed of 18 gauge die-formed cold-

rolled galvanized sheet steel, bonderized and painted with approved shade of powder coating

finish. The cabinets shall be of sufficient size to enclose all piping and control valves, and

shall have access doors to piping and controls. Access panels shall have positive locking

fasteners for easy removal.




Horizontal furred-in type units mounted within ceiling space shall be provided with a GI

casing of 18 gauge, the coil and fan section with provision to mount filters within the fan section.

7.5 INTERIOR CHASSIS The interior chassis shall be constructed of not less than 16 gauge cold rolled galvanized sheet

steel bonderized and painted with approved shade of powder coating finish. All ceiling suspended vertical fan coil units shall be securely mounted from the building structure with top panel set dead level in both directions. In case of ceiling suspended horizontal units fan deck and cooling coil shall be easily removable from FCU without lowering down of the FCU or disturbing the other installation.

7.6 DRAIN PAN Primary drain pan shall be pre-pressed 22 gauge SS-304 and an additional inner bottom panel

of 22 gauge SS-304 shall be provided to prevent damage to, and floatation of the bottom

panel insulation. The pan shall be insulated with not less than 6 mm thick nitrile rubber (class O

as per BS 476) insulation shall be effective to prevent condensation. The pan shall be of sufficient

size to catch all drippage of condensation from any part of the unit. In all cases pan shall be large

enough to cover cooling coil supply and return water headers and bends, control valves and

ball valves with copper pipes. A secondary (auxiliary) condensate pan similar to primary drain

pan may be provided by the manufacturer of these units which are so identified in Schedule of

Quantities. All drain pans shall be with powder coating finish as per interior chassis defined above.

7.7 COOLING COIL

All cooling coils shall be standard three-row staggered seamless copper tube with aluminum

sine wave fins. The coil shall be fitted with dielectric coupling for connection with MS pipes by

HVAC contractor. Tubes shall be minimum 10 mm OD and wall thickness shall be minimum 0.41

mm. Fin spacing shall be 12 fins per inch. All bends and joints shall be enclosed within insulated

end sections of the base unit for protection against sweating. Tubes shall be mechanically

expanded for minimum thermal contact resistance with fins. Air vent shall be provided in

headers at a level higher than coils. The cooling coil shall be easily removable from back side of

FCU along with fan section without disturbing the Installations. All coils shall be factory tested at

21 KG per sq. cm (300 psig) air pressure while submerged in water.

7.8 FANS Fans shall be centrifugal forward curve DIDW, direct driven by a fractional horse power

shaded-pole motor.




7.9 MOTOR Motor shall be 230 ± 6% volts, 50 cycles single phase, energy efficient, six pole, shaded pole

type, speed not exceeding 1000 rpm at maximum airflow. Motors shall have three speed

windings and shall be factory wired to a terminal block mounted within the fan section. Motors

shall have extended shaft on both sides.

7.10 INSTALLATION Ceiling suspended horizontal units and units mounted within the ceiling space shall be hung

through rubber-in-shear vibration isolator suspenders.

7.11 ACCESSORIES All fan coil units shall be equipped with copper piping connections, dielectric union and

manual air vent at the cooling coil outlet header. In addition, the following accessories may be

required at fan coil units; their detailed Specifications are given in individual sections and

quantities separately identified in Schedule of Quantities.

a. Imported / Indigenous fan coil units as specified in Schedule of Quantities shall be factory

fitted with Ball valves at inlet and outlet. Ball valve with `Y‟ strainer shall be installed in the tapping of the chilled water pipe installed in riser/shaft or as shown on Drawings and in Schedule of Quantities.

b. ALTERNATELY Ball valve with „Y‟ strainer, and ball valve as shown on Drawings and in

Schedule of Quantities. c. Adjustable discharge air grille as shown on Drawings and in Schedule of Quantities.

7.12 PAINTING Shop coats of paints that have become marred during shipment or erection shall be cleaned off

with mineral spirits, wire brushed and spot primed over the affected areas, then coated with

enamel paint to match the finish over the adjoining shop painted surfaces.

7.13 PERFORMANCE DATA Fan coil units shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level having standard sound level

rating of NC 30 at low speed and NC 35 at medium/high speed. Fan performance rating and

power consumption data, with operating points clearly indicated, shall be submitted by the

Contractor and verified at the time of testing and commissioning of the installation.




7.14 TESTING Cooling capacity of various fan coil unit models shall be computed from the measurements of

air flow and dry and wet bulb temperatures of air entering and leaving the coil. Flow measurements shall be by anemometer and temperature measurements by accurately calibrated mercury-in-glass thermometers. Computed ratings shall conform to the specified capacities and quoted ratings. Power consumption shall be computed from measurements of incoming voltage and input current.

8. COOLING TOWERS

8.1 SCOPE The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of cooling

towers in accordance with requirements of Drawings and of the Schedule of Quantities.

8.2 TYPE

Cooling Towers shall be induced draft in accordance with requirement of Drawings and of the

Schedule of Quantities. Cooling towers shall be as per CTI or shall be tested at site as per CTI

norms (for green buildings only). In case of multiple fans in cooling tower, HVAC contractor to

provide a electrical panel for one incoming and multiple outgoings/ ( including VFD) equal to

number cooling tower fans. This panel shall be included in cooling tower rate.

Cooling tower remote start/stop operations from BMS operator station including sequential

controls of various drives and checking of permissive conditions to start/stop and integration with

BMS shall be included.

8.3 INDUCED DRAFT COOLING TOWER Cooling Towers shall be suitable for outdoor use. Tower shall be vertical, induced draft,

counter/cross flow type. FRP construction, in rectangular/ square /octagonal profile, complete

with fan, motor, diffusion deck spray section, eliminators, steel supports, and sound attenuation

equipment where called for in Schedule of Quantities.

a. Capacity The cooling tower capacities shall be as per the Drawings and Schedule of Quantities.

b. Side Casing




This shall be made out of FRP construction of minimum 5 mm thick and UV stabilized with

smooth surface on both sides for minimum resistance to air flow. It shall have sufficient structural

strength to adequately withstand high wind velocities and vibration. The casing may be installed in

the reinforced cement concrete basin if so identified in drawings, or in Schedule of Quantities. The

tower supporting structure shall be made out of hot dipped galvanized tubular frame. Air intake

shall be all along the sides so that tower can be installed quite independent of prevailing wind

direction. Anodized aluminium or PVC louvers integrated with fill UV stabilized PVC fill and backed

up by galvanized bird screen / FRP Louvers shall be provided at air intake. Sufficient clearance

between casing and adjoining structures shall be provided to enable servicing and periodic

cleaning.

c. Cold Water Basin

Cold water basin shall be a min. 600 mm deep sump and made out of 5 mm thick FRP

construction and UV stabilized on which cooling tower super structure shall be

supported. RCC suction tank with easily removable double brass strainers may be

provided with this basin, if separately identified in drawings or in Schedule of Quantities.

Basin fittings shall include the following :

i. Bottom outlet. ii. Screened suction assembly. iii. Drain connected to the side / underside of basin.

iv. Overflow connected to the side of basin. v. Built-in bleed off attached to inlet header discharging through polyethylene

tube into overflow pipe.

vi. Ball type automatic make up water valve.

vii. Quickfill connected to the side of basin.




viii. Equalizing connection and balancing valve for multiple CTs. d. Distribution System

Hot water distribution system shall comprise of header and branch arms system or

open pan gravity flow system.

e. Filling

Fillings shall be made of corrosion proof and rigid PVC film in honey comb design and

arranged in square / rectangular form. Fill sheets shall be suspended from H.D.G

steel structural tubing supported from the lower structure & shall be elevated above the

floor of the cold water basin to facilitate cleaning and easy replacement. They shall be

arranged in such a manner to ensure negligible resistance to air flow and to eliminate

back water spots and prevent fouling through scales that may form. In order to reduce

carry-over losses through entrainment of moisture drops in air stream, PVC drift

eliminator shall be installed.

f. Mechanical Equipment

The tower shall be provided with low speed fan running at less that 360 RPM through

gear reducer. Direct driven fan speed shall not exceed 700 RPM. Fan shall be of the

propeller type light-weight rotor fitted with multiple aerofoil blades. The entire fan

assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fan shall be driven by

415±10% volts, 3 phase, 50 cycles, AC supply, energy efficient motor totally-enclosed,

fan-cooled, weather-proof construction, designed and selected to operate in humid air

stream. Fan shall be protected by a fan guard and bird screen of galvanized steel

construction to prevent birds from nesting during idling period & shall be easily

accessible for inspection and maintenance. A service ladder (Aluminium construction)

shall also be provided for greater convenience. The mechanical equipment assembly

shall be adequately supported on a rugged steel base welded to tubular support

assuring vibration-free support. Fan guard and bird screen (of galvanized steel

construction) shall be provided to prevent birds from nesting during idling periods.

Gear-reducer shall be of spiral bevel type. G.S.S canopy shall be provided over the fan

motor for protection against rain water. Care shall be taken that fan air is not restricted.

Motor terminal box shall be made water tight.




8.4 PERFORMANCE DATA Complete performance ratings and power consumption at varying loads and outdoor wet bulb

temperatures, shall be submitted and verified at the time of testing and commissioning of the

installation.

8.5 TESTING Capacity of the cooling tower shall be computed from the measurements of water flow,

incoming/outgoing water temperatures and ambient air wet bulb temperature using

accurately calibrated mercury-in-glass thermometers. Computed ratings shall conform to the

specified capacities and quoted ratings. Power consumption for cooling towers shall be

computed from measurements of incoming voltage and input current.

9. PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGERS

Design Requirements :

9.1.1 Application : Hot water generating system ( Water – Water Heat exchanger )

9.1.2 Type : Counter current and parallel flow only.

9.1.3 Performance Requirements

Units shall be sized to meet design conditions as specified in the schedule with a maximum allowable pressure drop as per schedule in each circuit.In addition, units shall be sized with allowance for 15% extension for future addition of plates.

9.1.4 Design Pressure / Temperature : 10 bar/ 55 deg C or as per schedule 9.1.5 Test Pressure : 1.3 times the design pressure 9.1.6 The design shall prevent intermixing and leakage of fluid to outside of unit. 9.1.7 The units shall withstand the maximum test pressure on either primary or secondary side with the

opposite side at 0 bar or as per schedule. 9.1.8 Units to be factory tested in accordance with applicable code. 9.1.9 Provide metal nameplate with the following details




a. Manufacturer‟s name b. Type of Unit c. Serial No. d. Year of manufacture e. Fluid group f. Inlet / Outlet connections g. Volume h. Design Pressure i. Design temperature j. Test Pressure

9.2 Materials

9.2.1 Plates

a) One piece pressed type AISI 316 stainless steel plate, and tapered gasket groove. b) Each plate to have herringbone corrugations to optimize heat transfer with nominal pressure

losses. c) The channel depth between two plates should be in between 1.9mm to 2.5mm both values

inclusive. d) End plates shall be of AISI 316 material and 0.6mm thickness. e) Design of plates to strictly follow countercurrent and parallel flow principle. f) Design to allow for removal and replacement of single plate without removal of the plate on

either side. g) Design shall prevent fluid intermixing and provide leakage to the outside of the unit h) Plates should not lock to adjacent plates i) Each plate should strictly have a built in five point alignment system to accurately locate the

plates in the frame assembly to prevent lateral plate movement under pressure. j) Plates shall be reinforced at the upper and lower mounting slots to prevent bending hangers on

the plate. k) The plates shall shave no welded stiffeners etc and should be designed to allow pressurization

of each circuit to a full differential of 1.3 times the design pressure without buckling or deformation of heat transfer plates

l) Plates to be specifically manufactured in order to obtain design delta T. 9.2.2 Gasket

a) One-piece, molded Nitrile Butyl Rubber (NBR) gasket. b) Gaskets shall have relieving grooves to prevent intermixing of fluids and cause leak to outside

of unit. c) The gaskets shall be locked into the groove by Clip On / Clip AD / Tape On method. Glued

gaskets are not preferable. d) Gasket should be suitable for fluid & given process temperature




9.2.3 Frame

a) The frame assembly should be bolted construction and not welded frame assembly b) The frame shall be carbon steel construction sand blasted and two coats of blue paint.

Manufacturer painting specifications to be provided. c) The moveable cover shall have only stainless steel material roller for ease of movement

without additional rigging or handling equipment. d) Provide lifting lugs to allow lifting of entire units flooded weight. e) Bolts shall be provided with rolled threads to reduce galling and minimum high width

hexagonal nuts to adequately distribute the load. f) Critical bolts to strictly have ball bearing boxes. g) Provide plastic covers over threaded rod extension for protection of threads h) Connections to be studded port design with connection lining to be of constructed of same

plate material and electromeric liner. i) The plates shall only contact with stainless steel surfaces. j) The portion of the carrying bar in contact with plates shall be an integrated into the carrying

bar. k) Tilted Bolt openings in Pressure Carrying Plates, for safety & easy maintanability

9.3 Manufacturers 9.3.1 Subject to full compliance of the project specification provide heat exchangers from:

ALFA LAVAL

9.3.2 Manufacturer to confirm location in India of fully established service center with reconditioning and

regasketing facility. The manufacturer shall confirm 24 hours service availability to attend faults at project site by factory-trained engineer. Service setup to be verified by consultant / client.

References of service jobs carried out in India to be provided by the supplier.

Manufacturer to confirm that they have the pressing facility at least for certain range of plates.

9.3.3 The manufacturer to confirm availability locally in India of all essential spare parts for the plate heat exchanger proposed.

9.3.4 The supplier to confirm presence of manufacturer‟s factory trained and qualified service

engineer to assist in installation and carry out commissioning at site.

9.3.5 Note; Consultant / Client evaluation will not be limited to compliance and could include; Visits to running installations 5 years old, Capability study at manufacturers works Assessment of local Sales and Service setup




9.3.6 Note; Minimum 1 upto a maximum of 3 submittals can be called for by the client for evaluation

9.4 Spare parts 9.4.1 The vendor / supplier shall be responsible for supporting the spare parts requirement for all the

equipment covered by contract 10. FANS

10.1 SCOPE The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of

centrifugal, in-line and propeller type fans and roof mounted units conforming to these Specifications and in accordance with the requirement of Drawings and Schedule of Quantities.

10.2 TYPE

Centrifugal, in-line propeller fans and roof mounted units shall be of the type as indicated on Drawings and identified in Schedule of Quantities. All fans should be AMCA certified and necessary documentation is to be furnished for consultant‟s approval before dispatch of the fans / AHUs from the manufacturers factory.

10.3 CAPACITY The air-moving capacity of fans shall be as shown on Drawings and in Schedule of Quantities. 10.4 CENTRIFUGAL FAN Centrifugal fan shall be DWDI / SWSI Class I construction arrangement 3 (i.e. bearings on both

the sides) for DWDI fans complete with access door, squirrel-cage induction motor, V-belt drive, belt guard and vibration isolators, direction of discharge / rotation, and motor position shall be as per the Approved-for-Construction shop drawings.

a. Housing shall be constructed of 14 gage sheet steel welded construction. It shall be

rigidly reinforced and supported by structural angles. Split casing shall be provided on larger sizes of fans, however neoprene / asbestos packing should be provided throughout split joints to make it air-tight.

18 gauge galvanized wire mesh inlet guards of 5 cm sieves shall be provided on both

inlets. Housing shall be provided with standard cleanout door with handles and

neoprene gasket. Rotation arrow shall be clearly marked on the housing.




b. Fan Wheel shall be aerofoil non-over loading type. Fan wheel and housing shall be

statically and dynamically balanced. For fans upto 450 mm dia, fan outlet velocity shall

not exceed 550 meter/minute and maximum fan speed shall not exceed 1450 rpm. For

fans above 450 mm dia, the outlet velocity shall be within 700 meter/minute and

maximum fan speed shall not exceed 1000 RPM. High static pressure fan speed shall be

as per manufacturer.

c. Shaft shall be constructed of steel, turned, ground and polished.

d. Bearings : shall be of the sleeve / ball-bearing type mounted directly on the fan housing. Bearings shall be designed especially for quiet operation and shall be of the self-aligning, oil / grease pack pillow block type.

e. Motor : Fan motor shall be energy efficient and suitable for 415±10% volts, 50 cycles, 3

phase AC power supply, squirrel-cage, totally enclosed, fan-cooled motor, provided with class F insulation, and of approved make. Motor name plate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of 10%. Motor shall be designed especially for quiet operation and motor speed shall not exceed 1440 rpm. The fan and motor combination selected for the particular required performance shall be of the most efficient (smallest horse power), so that sound level is lowest.

HP POWER FACTOR EFFICIENCY

FL 3/4L 1/2L FL 3/4L 1/2L

0.50 0.71 0.62 0.50 73.00 73.00 68.00

0.75 0.74 0.64 0.50 78.00 78.00 70.00

1.00 0.76 0.67 0.55 82.50 82.50 77.00

1.50 0.77 0.70 0.57 83.80 83.80 80.00

2.00 0.77 0.70 0.57 85.00 85.00 81.00

3.00 0.82 0.74 0.60 86.40 86.40 84.00

5.00 0.82 0.78 0.63 88.30 88.30 86.00

7.50 0.85 0.80 0.71 89.50 88.50 88.00

10.00 0.86 0.83 0.76 90.30 90.30 89.00

12.50 0.84 0.82 0.73 90.50 90.50 88.00

15.00 0.85 0.83 0.76 91.50 91.50 89.50

20.00 0.85 0.83 0.76 92.20 92.20 91.00

25.00 0.85 0.82 0.76 92.40 92.40 91.00

30.00 0.85 0.80 0.72 92.80 92.80 92.00

40.00 0.86 0.85 0.80 93.20 93.20 91.00

50.00 0.87 0.85 0.77 93.60 93.60 91.60

60.00 0.88 0.86 0.78 93.90 93.90 91.90

75.00 0.87 0.85 0.78 94.20 94.20 92.80




f. Drive to fan shall be provided through belt with adjustable motor sheave and a standard belt guard. Belts shall be of the oil-resistant type.

g. Vibration Isolation : MS base shall be provided for both fan and motor, built as an

integral part, and shall be mounted on a concrete foundation through resistoflex vibration isolators. The concrete foundation shall be atleast 15 cm above the finished floor level, or as shown in approved-for-construction shop drawings.

10.5 AXIAL FLOW FAN Fan shall be complete with motor, motor mount, belt driven (or direct driven) and vibration

isolation type, suspension arrangement as per approved for construction shop drawings.

a. Casing : shall be constructed of heavy gage sheet steel. Fan casing, motor mount and

straightening vane shall be of welded steel construction. Motor mounting plate shall be

minimum 15 mm thick and machined to receive motor flange.

An inspection door with handle and neoprene gasket shall be provided. Casing shall have flanged connection on both ends for ducted applications. Support brackets for ceiling suspension shall be welded to the casing for connection to hanger bolts. Straightening vanes shall be aerodynamically designed for maximum efficiency by converting velocity pressure to static pressure potential and minimizing turbulence. Casing shall be bonderized, primed and finish coated with enamel paint.

b. Rotor : hub and blades shall be cast aluminium or cast steel construction. Blades shall

be die-formed aerofoil shaped for maximum efficiency and shall vary in twist and width from hub to tip to effect equal air distribution along the blade length. Fan blades mounting on the hub shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Extended grease leads for external lubrication shall be provided. The fan pitch control may be manually readjusted at site upon installation, for obtaining actual air flow values, as specified and quoted.




c. Motor: shall be energy efficient squirrel-cage, totally-enclosed, fan cooled, standard

frame, constant speed, continuous duty, single winding, suitable for 415±10% volts, 50 cycles, 3 phase AC power supply, provided with class `F‟ insulation. Motor shall be specially designed for quiet operation. The speed of the fans shall not exceed 1000 RPM for fans with impeller diameter above 450 mm, and 1440 RPM for fans with impeller diameter 450 mm and less. For lowest sound level, fan shall be selected for maximum efficiency or minimum horsepower. Motor conduit box shall be mounted on exterior of fan casing, and lead wires from the motor to the conduit box shall be protected from the air stream by enclosing in a flexible metal conduit.

HP POWER FACTOR EFFICIENCY

FL 3/4L 1/2L FL 3/4L 1/2L

0.50 0.71 0.62 0.50 73.00 73.00 68.00

0.75 0.74 0.64 0.50 78.00 78.00 70.00

1.00 0.76 0.67 0.55 82.50 82.50 77.00

1.50 0.77 0.70 0.57 83.80 83.80 80.00

2.00 0.77 0.70 0.57 85.00 85.00 81.00

3.00 0.82 0.74 0.60 86.40 86.40 84.00

5.00 0.82 0.78 0.63 88.30 88.30 86.00

7.50 0.85 0.80 0.71 89.50 88.50 88.00

10.00 0.86 0.83 0.76 90.30 90.30 89.00

12.50 0.84 0.82 0.73 90.50 90.50 88.00

15.00 0.85 0.83 0.76 91.50 91.50 89.50

20.00 0.85 0.83 0.76 92.20 92.20 91.00

25.00 0.85 0.82 0.76 92.40 92.40 91.00

30.00 0.85 0.80 0.72 92.80 92.80 92.00

40.00 0.86 0.85 0.80 93.20 93.20 91.00

50.00 0.87 0.85 0.77 93.60 93.60 91.60

60.00 0.88 0.86 0.78 93.90 93.90 91.90

75.00 0.87 0.85 0.78 94.20 94.20 92.80

d. Drive : to fan shall be provided through belt drive with adjustable motor sheave and

standard sheet steel belt guard with vented front for heat dissipation. Belts shall be of oil-resistant type.

e. Vibration Isolation : The assembly of fan and motor shall be suspended from the slab by

vibration isolation suspension of heavy duty spring isolators type. f. Accessories : The following accessories shall be provided with all fans : i. Outlet cone for static pressure regain. ii. Inlet cone.




Fan silencers may be provided where specifically called for in Schedule of Quantities. Fans shall be factory assembled and shipped with all accessories factory-mounted.

10.6 PROPELLER FAN Propeller fan shall be direct-driven, three or four blade type, mounted on a steel mounting plate

with orifice ring.

a. Mounting Plate shall be of steel construction, square with streamlined venturi inlet (reversed for supply applications) coated with baked enamel paint. Mounting plate shall be of standard size, constructed of 12 to 16 gauge sheet steel depending upon the fan size. Orifice ring shall be correctly formed by spinning or stamping to provide easy passage of air without turbulence and to direct the air stream.

b. Fan Blades shall be constructed of aluminium or steel. Fan hub shall be of heavy

welded steel construction with blades bolted to the hub. Fan blades and hub assembly

shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the manufacturer‟s works.

c. Shaft shall be of steel, accurately ground and shall be of ample size for the load transmitted and shall not pass through first critical speed thru the full range of specified fan speeds.

d. Motor shall be standard (easily replaceable) permanent split capacitor or shaded pole

for small sizes, totally enclosed with prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, designed for quiet operation with a maximum speed of 1000 rpm for fans 60 cm dia or larger and 1440 rpm for fans 45 cm dia and smaller. Motors for larger fans shall be suitable for 415±6% volts, 50 cycles 3 phase power supply, and for smaller fans shall be suitable for 220 ± 6% volts, 50 cycles single phase power supply. Motors shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical service as indicated on Drawings and in Schedule of Quantities.

e. Accessories : The following accessories shall be provided with propeller fans :

i. Wire guard on inlet side and birdscreen at the outlet. ii. Fixed or gravity louvers built into a steel frame at the outlet. iii. Regulator for controlling fan speed for single phase fan motor. iv. Single phase preventors for 3 phase fans. 10.7 ROOF MOUNTED FAN Roof mounted fan shall be propeller type or centrifugal fans, direct driven or belt driven as




shown on drawing and in Schedule of Quantities, complete with motor drive, and housing with weather-proof cowl. a. Housing: shall be constructed of 16 gage steel sheet. The housing shall have an

adjustable flange to facilitate installation and shall be especially adapted to receive fan, motor, and drive. The housing shall have a low silhouette. For belt driven units, motor shall be installed in ventilated water proof housing outside the air stream. The discharge cowl shall be hinged along one edge for easy access to motor and drive, for inspection and maintenance. The entire assembly shall be weatherproof and raised from the roof terrace sufficiently to prevent downflow of rain water accumulated on the terrace. 18 gage galvanized steel mesh birdscreen shall be provided on all discharge cowls around the outlet area.

b. Fans : shall be backwardly inclined centrifugal wheel or propeller type as required,

designed for maximum efficiency, minimum turbulence and quiet operation. Fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced.

c. Motor : shall be shaded pole, of split capacitor type with lubricated sleeve or ball

bearings, designed for quiet operation. Bearings shall be designed for vertical mounting. Motor name-plate horse-power shall be such that the motor shall not be overloaded in the entire range of rated speed. Motor and fan assembly shall be easily removable. Motor power supply characteristic and maximum speed shall be as specified for propeller fans and as indicated in the Schedule of Quantities.

d. Fan Bearings : shall be heavy duty, self aligning sleeve/ball bearings designed for

thrust load and sealed for grease retention.

e. Backdraft Damper : Where called for in the Schedule of Quantities, roof-mounted fan shall be equipped with a rattle-free backdraft damper to prevent air from re-entering the fan when fan is not in operation, thus sealing completely in closed position. Damper shall be chatterproof under all conditions.

f. Vibration Isolation : The motor and fan assembly shall be isolated from the base with

vibration isolators. 10.8 PERFORMANCE DATA All fans shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level. Capacity ratings, power

consumption, with operating points clearly indicated, shall be submitted and verified at the time of testing and commissioning of the installation.

10.9 TESTING Capacity of all fans shall be measured by an anemometer. Measured air flow capacities shall

conform to the specified capacities and quoted ratings. Power consumption shall be computed




from measurements of incoming voltage and input current. 11. PIPING

11.1 SCOPE The scope of this section comprises the supply and laying of pipes, pipe fittings and valves,

testing and balancing of all water and refrigerant piping required for the complete installation as shown on the Drawings. All piping inclusive of fittings and valves shall follow the applicable Indian Standards. All welders used for piping erection shall be well qualified (certificate should be submitted to Project Manager for approval) and shall have minimum 8 to 10 years experience.

11.2 PIPE SIZES Pipe sizes shall be as required for the individual fluid flows. Various pipe sizes have been

indicated on the Drawings, these are for Contractor‟s guidance only and shall not relieve contractor of responsibility for providing smooth noiseless balanced circulation of fluids.

11.3 CHILLED, HOT AND CONDENSING WATER PIPING

a. Following material shall be used for pipes and fittings.

Pipes Nominal size (mm) Material Specification

<150 IS 1239 Part-1

200 and above IS 3589 Gr. FE 410 (8mm thick)

Fittings Nominal size (mm) Material Specification

<40 Socket welded, ASTM A105 as per ANSI B16.11

50-150 Butt welded, ASTM A234 Gr. WPB as per ANSI B16.11

>200 Site fabricated from IS 3589 Gr. FE 410 (8mm)

Flanges Nominal size (mm) Material Specification

< 150 IS 2062 Gr.A as per ANSI B16.5 (#150 class)

>200 IS 2062 Gr.A, as per ANSI B16.5 (#150 class)




All jointing in the pipe system shall generally be by welding, unless otherwise mentioned, or directed at site. All welding shall be done by qualified welders and shall strictly conform to BIS Code of practice for manual metal arc, welding of Mild Steel.

Out of three weld one butt weld of each welder shall be fully radiographed for

testing purposes. Upon approval of welding joints the concerned welder shall be allowed to carry further welding of pipes. Rest of the welds shall have 100% visual inspection.

b. All welded joints (except pipe welded end-to-end) shall be made by use of one-piece welding flanges, caps, nozzles, elbows, branch outlets and tees of approved make. Cut samples shall be submitted for approval, if directed. All such fittings etc., shall be of a type which maintain full wall-thickness at all points, simple radius and fillets, and proper bevels or shoulders at ends. All job welding shall be done by the electric arc welding process in accordance with the following :

All joints shall have 45 degree bevel type, pipe mill-bevelled or machine-bevelled by the contractor.

All scale and oxide shall be removed with hammer, chisel or file and bevel left smooth and clean.

Pipe lengths shall line up straight with abutting pipe ends concentric.

Both conductors from the welding machine shall be extended to locations at which welding work is being done. The leads from welding machine to location of welding work shall be held together with tape or other approved means so as to prevent induced current in structural steel, in piping or in other metals within the building. The ground lead shall be connected to length of pipe through joints in pipe, structural steel of building or steel pipe supports.

c. All pipes and their steel supports shall be thoroughly cleaned and given one primary

coat of red oxide paint before being installed. For vibration isolators premoulded polyurethane pipe sections of 160 Kg/m3 density with adhesive shall be fixed between pipe and MS support. 10 mm thick MS „U‟ clamp with resistoflex shall be fixed on the pipe so that the pipe is kept in position. All welded piping shall be subject to the approval at site.

d. Fittings shall be malleable casting of pressure rating suitable for the piping system.

Fittings used on welded piping shall be of the weldable type. These shall form part of piping and are not separately identified in Schedule of Quantities.




e. Tee-off connections shall be through equal or reducing tees, otherwise ferrules welded to the main pipe shall be used. Drilling and tapping of the walls of the main pipe shall not be resorted to.

f. Ball and butterfly valves conforming to the following specifications shall be provided

as shown on Drawings : ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Size Construction Ends Type

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15 to 25mm Bronze Screwed Ball ASTM B62 32mm and over Body Cast iron, Wafer Butterfly

Type and requirements shall be as indicated in Schedule of Quantities. Valves shall have non-rising spindles unless specified otherwise and shall be suitable for PN 16 rating. Butterfly valve should be of wafer type long neck construction single stem design with centre lugs to ensure proper alignment of pipe flanges. Mount valve onto flanges only after flanges have been welded to pipes using a tool piece and cooled down to room temperature to prevent damage to resilient seat. The rubber liner should be fully supported by the valve flanges. Appropriate dimensions and thickness of Flanges and Bolts, as per the Flange Tables ANSI B16.5 (#150 class), should be used. The flanges should be properly aligned with each other so that bolts are exactly perpendicular to the flanges. Evenly tighten the flange bolts to secure the valves. Counter flanges with nut-bolts and gaskets shall be provided by valve manufacturer.

g. Butterfly valves shall perform the function of isolating valves and shall be suitable for

PN16 rating. Butterfly valves shall have Epoxy Coated cast iron body with Integrally moulded EPDM liner of replaceable type. The liner shall be integrally moulded on hard backup ring and shall be suitable for PN16 rating unless specified otherwise. All butterfly valves shall be provided with locking devices. Valves 250 mm and above dia shall be gear driven.

h. Automatic balancing valves shall automatically control flow rates with + 5% accuracy.

Valve control mechanism shall consist of a stainless steel cartridge with a ported cup and coil / helical spring to avoid corrosion. Four operating ranges shall be available with the minimum range requiring less than 14 kPa to actuate the mechanism. Manufacturer shall provide independent laboratory tests verifying assurance of performance.

i. Balancing cum control valves shall be sized based on flow rates and pressure drops

across cooling coil.

j. Manual balancing valves shall be provided at chiller, condenser outlets line as indicated in Schedule of Quantities. These valves shall have built-in pressure-drop measuring




facility to compute flow rate across the valve. The test cocks shall be long enough to protrude out of pipe insulation. To enable accurate and practical operation, measurement of flow and differential pressure shall be made with a computerised balancing instrument which shall enable the operator to read the flow directly without the use of diagrams or tables. In addition to measuring flowrate, differential pressure and temperature, computerised balancing instrument shall have a computer programme to provide the following functions: i. To balance the HVAC installation and calculate the necessary valve settings,

based on system measurements. ii. To store the results of balancing. iii. To log measured values from a valve (differential pressure, flowrate or

temperature). iv. To printout saved data in computerised measurement protocol (CMP) consisting

of : - Name and size of Balancing Valve (BV) - Presetting position of BV

- P at BV - Flow at BV - Design Flow

k. The supply of flanges shall form part of piping (not separately identified in Schedule of

Quantities) and shall also include supply of bolts, washers, nuts and suitable asbestos fibre / rubber insertion gaskets (minimum 3 mm thick). Flanges shall be as per ANSI B16.1 class 150#.

l. All ball valves and ball valves with Y strainer shall be bronze forged body construction

with chrome plated bronze ball and handle of stainless steel constructions. These are separately identified in Schedule of Quantities.

m. Non return valves shall be dual plate check valve provided as shown on the Drawings, and identified in Schedule of Quantities conforming to relevant Codes and in accordance with the following Specifications :

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Size Construction Ends ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40 to 300 mm Body: Grey Cast iron Flanged

(Epoxy Coated), CI IS 210 Gr. FG 260

Plates: CF-8 (SS-304),




Hinge/Stop Pin: SS-410 Spring(s): SS-316. Seal: EPDM 350 mm to 500 mm Body: Grey Cast iron Flanged

(Epoxy Coated), CI IS 210 Gr. FG 260

Plates: SS-409. Hinge/Stop Pin: SS-410 Spring(s): SS-316. Seal: EPDM

The spring and hinge/stop pin shall be SS304 and bearing PTFE material. Valves shall be PN 16 rating.

n. Strainers shall be „Y‟ type or Pot Strainer suitable for PN 16 rating as shown on drawings

and included in BOQ. „Y‟ Strainer shall be fabricated out of MS „C‟ class pipe two sizes higher than that of Strainer pipe size. Flanges as per ANSI B16.5 (#150 class)shall be provided at inlet and outlet connectors. The body shall be hot dip galvanized. Permanent magnet shall be provided in the body of the Strainer to arrest MS particles. Filter element shall be of non magnetic 20 gage SS sheet with 3 mm perforation. Cartridge having five different type of filters made out of SS 304 with different mesh sizes shall be provided. These will be replaced so as to get good quality of water in system during commissioning. Strainers shall be provided at inlet of each Air Handling Unit and Pump as shown in drawings and included in SOQ.

Pot Strainers body shall be fabricated out of MS plate IS 226. Thickness of sheet shall be

as per size of the strainer chamfered pipes with flanges shall be provided at inlet /outlet connections of the strainer. The tangential entry of water shall create a centrifugal action and due to velocity shall separate sediments and deposit on the inner surface of Filter Element and at bottom of the Strainer. Butterfly valves shall be provided at inlet / outlet connections as shown in drawing and included in BOQ. The strainer body shall have two separate chambers properly sealed to avoid mixing of filtered and unfiltered water. A powerful magnet shall be provided in the body to arrest MS particles. Filter element of Pot Strainer shall be of non magnetic 18 gage SS sheet properly reinforced to avoid damage of the element. A cone with sufficiently large drain pipe with butterfly valve shall be provided at the bottom chamber to flush-out foreign particles. This arrangement shall avoid frequent opening of Pot Strainer for cleaning of filter element. Gage connection shall be provided at inlet and outlet connection.

Pot strainers shall be provided with automatic backwash system if called for in SOQ. This

shall be with heavy duty reduction gear motor provided at top of upper lid. During backwash, motorised drain valve shall be opened along with vent cock. Power supply cabling with tray shall be included in cost of pot strainer. Entire operation shall be through BMS.




A set of MS flanges with tongue and groove arrangement and neoprene rubber gasket

shall be provided on the top cover and Pot Strainer flange with sufficient bolts and nuts to make the joint water light. Bearing loaded tope cover lifting and swinging arrangement shall be provided. The Pot strainer body shall be properly de-rusted and epoxy coated from inside and outside. Manufacturers Test Certificate shall be provided with each Pot Strainer..

Size of various Pot Strainer, Filter Element and Thickness of MS sheet shall be as under:

Pipe size Pot Dia Pot HT Element Dia

Element HT

MS Plate Thickness

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)

50 300 400 200 240 6 80 350 450 250 250 6

100 450 500 300 280 6 125 500 600 330 340 8 150 540 700 360 390 8 200 610 815 400 470 8 250 800 955 550 510 8 300 1000 1105 750 580 8 350 1190 1300 895 678 12 400 1350 1500 1020 785 12 450 1518 1700 1060 890 12 500 1690 1800 1100 900 12 600 2000 2200 1500 1160 12

Each Port strainer shall be provided with a Test Certificate. o. All chilled water piping &fittings, chilled water pumps, expansion tank and Air separator

shall be pressure tested, painted and then insulated as described under the section “Insulation”.

p. Grooved coupling : Grooved coupling shall have 3 main parts viz. Housing, Gasket and

bolting arrangement. Housing shall be made out of ASTM-A 536 Grade 65-45-12. The housing key shall engage into the grooves around the full pipe circumference, securing the pipe ends together with positive grip. Housing shall be designed to provide optimum combination of pressure, stress relief and end load conditions while maintaining reasonable weight. Gasket shall be of high sealing efficiency and shall be able to withstand upto (-) 0.35 Bar pressure. Bolt shall confirm to ASTM A183, while nut shall confirm to ASTM A194. Nut-bolt shall be electro-galvanized.

11.4 PRESSURE INDEPENDENT BALANCING CUM CONTROL VALVES




Each Air Handling Unit / Fan Coil Unit shall be provided with 2/3Way Pressure Independent Balancing Cum Control Valve with Integrated in a single Body with Globe Type in Construction as indicated in BOQ. Control - Valve should be equipped with electronic modulating actuator which can accept either 4(0)-20 mA / 2(0)-10 V DC signals. Operating voltage for actuator shall be 24V AC. ∆p controller should ensure 100% valve authority at all loads (part load Actuator shall be able to work against maximum closing pressure of 6 Bar at full load). With feedback signal to Control system. 230/24V transformer shall be included.

Balancing – Each Valve should have steeples adjustable maximum flow limitation as per the designed flow rate of coils. Balancing should be done only in Valve not in actuator so that at any given condition of failure balancing is not lost and easily accessible. All Valve actuator shall be microprocessor based with self calibrating feature. Valve should be of linear control characteristics with stepless characteristics.

VALVE SPECIFICATIONS

Description For 15 to 32 mm For 40 to 150 mm

Diff Pressure (P1-P3) 16 To 400 kPa 35 To 600 kPa

Media Temperature +1 ° to 110 °C, -10 ° to 120 °C,

Body Material Brass Grey iron/Ductile iron

Test Ports Needle measuring nipple Needle measuring nipple

Shut off Leakage Max. 0.05% of Kvs Max. 0.05% of Kvs

Stem Seals EPDM EPDM

Maximum Close Off Pr Minimum Should be 400 kPaD,

600 kPaD

Pressure rating PN16 or above PN16 or above

ACTUATOR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ALL SIZES

Supply Voltage : 24V AC (230/24 Transformer shall be included) Power Consumption : 10V AC Max. Frequency : 50 HZ Control Input : 2-10V DC, 4-20mA, 3-point Selection. Position Output : 2-10V DC 4-20mA Body Housing Insulation : Non Corrosive - IP 65 or above

Valve Body and Characteristics:-




1. Pressure Controller Device should maintain the Pressure, irrespective of fluctuations in the system with the help of a self adjusting diaphragm.

2. Control valve shall accurately control the flow, with help of Modulating Actuator 3. All Valve Sizes should have Testing Ports for verifying the flow with respect to the Differential

Pressure.

Valve Actuator and Housing:- 1. Control/Dip Switch Setting should be easy to access for doing the balancing at site. 2. The valve should be mounted with the actuator above the valve to prevent condensation

water leaking into the actuator.

Valve Flow Balancing : 1. Balancing & Control: Balancing should be accomplished by the Diaphragm and Control

should be taken care by electrical Actuator receiving signals from Room Thermostats or BMS. 2. Manual Override facility shall be provided to either open or close the valve. 3. Flow Setting Balancing (Commissioning) for the Valves should be simple and not require

measuring devices. 4. Proper operation of the valve should not be dependent on additional operations like de-airing

of the valve or flushing procedures 11.5 GROOVED PIPE JOINTING SYSTEM

A. References: 1. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)

a. ASTM A-53 – Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

b. ASTM A-183 – Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts c. ASTM A-234 – Standard Specification For Piping Fittings or Wrought

Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel. d. ASTM A-449 – Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs e. ASTM A-536 – Ductile Iron Castings f. ASTM F-1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed

Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications

2. American Society of Mechanical Engineers a. ASME B16.9 – Factory Made Wrought Butt Welded Fittings b. ASME B31.1 – Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refining Piping c. ASME B31.9 – Building Services Piping

3. American Water Works Association

a. AWWA C-606 – Grooved and Shouldered Joints

B. Quality Assurance




1. All grooved components (including couplings, fittings, valves and accessories) to be supplied by one manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components.

C. Grooved Mechanical Couplings for Joining Carbon Steel Pipe

1. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: Manufactured in two segments of cast ductile

iron, conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Gaskets shall be pressure-responsive synthetic rubber, grade to suit the intended service, conforming to ASTM D-2000. (Gaskets used for potable water applications shall be UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF-61 for potable water service.) Mechanical Coupling bolts shall be zinc plated (ASTM B-633) heat treated carbon steel track head conforming to ASTM A-449 and ASTM A-183, minimum tensile strength 110,000 psi (758450 kPa) as provided standard Victaulic.

a. Rigid Type: Coupling housings with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads shall

be used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1, B31.9, and NFPA 13.

b. Flexible Type: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required. Flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors at equipment connections. Three Couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the vibration source.

2. Flange Adapters: For use with grooved end pipe and fittings, for mating to ANSI

Class 150 flanges.

3. Grooved couplings shall meet the requirements of ASTM F-1476. 4. Gasket: Synthetic rubber, wide width, conforming to steel pipe outside diameter

and coupling housing, manufactured of elastomers as designated in ASTM D-2000.

D. Grooved End Fittings: Fittings shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, forged steel conforming to ASTM A-234, Grade WPB 0.375" wall (9,53 mm wall), or fabricated from Std. Wt. Carbon Steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-53, Type F, E or S, Grade B. Fittings provided with an alkyd enamel finish or hot dip galvanized to ASTM A-153. Zinc electroplated fittings and couplings conform to ASTM B633.

1. Grooved Hole-Cut Branch Outlets:

a. Bolted Branch Outlet: Branch reductions on 2"(DN50) through 8"(DN200)

header piping. Bolted branch outlets shall be manufactured from ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, with synthetic rubber gasket,




and heat treated carbon steel zinc plated bolts and nuts conforming to physical properties of ASTM A-183.

b. Strapless Outlet: 1/2"(DN15) or 3/4"(DN20) NPT outlet on 4" (DN100) and

larger header sizes rated for 300 PSI (2065 kPa).

c. Strapless Thermometer Outlet: To accommodate industrial glass bulb thermometers with standard 1-1/4"-18 NEF 2B extra fine thread and 6" (152mm) nominal bulb length on 4" (DN100) and larger header sizes rated for 300 PSI (2065 kPa).

11.6 COLD WATER AND DRAIN PIPING

a. All pipes to be used for cold water (makeup), drain, condensate drain and fittings shall be GI / C-PVC as indicated in BOQ.

b. All jointing in the pipe system shall be by screwed joints and/or by screwed

flanges using 3 mm 3 ply rubber insertion gaskets. Pipe threads and flanges shall be as per relevant BIS Codes.

c. All pipes supports shall be mild steel, thoroughly cleaned and given one primary

coat of red oxide paint before being installed.

d. Fittings shall be galvanized steel `medium class‟ malleable casting of pressure rating suitable for the piping system. Flanges shall be of approved make. Supply of flanges shall include bolts, nuts, gaskets as required. Sufficient number of flanges and unions shall be provided for future cleaning and servicing of piping. Tee-off connection shall be through equal or reducing tees. All equipment and valve connections, or connections to any other mating pipes shall be through flanges required for the mating connections. Fittings & flanges shall form part of piping and are not separately identified in Schedule of Quantities.

e. Gate valves, globe valves, check valves and strainers shall be similar to those

specified for chilled, condensing and hot water piping.

f. For proper drainage of AHU Condensate, „U‟ trap shall be provided in the drain piping. g. All condensate drain piping shall be insulated and painted as per the section

“Insulation” as indicated in Schedule of Quantities. 11.7 REFRIGERANT PIPING

a. All refrigerant pipes and fittings shall be hard drawn copper tubes and wrought copper / brass fittings suitable for connection with silver solder / phos-copper.




b. All joints in copper piping shall be sweat joints using low temperature brazing and / or

silver solder. Before jointing any copper pipe or fittings, its interiors shall be thoroughly cleaned by passing a clean cloth via wire or cable through its entire length. The piping shall be continuously kept clean of dirt etc. while constructing the joints. Subsequently, it shall be thoroughly blown out using carbon dioxide / nitrogen.

c. Refrigerant lines shall be sized to limit pressure drop between the evaporator and

condensing unit to less than 0.2 kg per sq.cm.

d. Sight glass with moisture indicator and removable type combination dryer cum filter with MS housing and brass wire mesh / punched brass sheet shall be installed in liquid line of the refrigeration system incorporating a three valve by pass. After ninety days of operation, liquid line drier cartridges shall be replaced.

e. Heat exchanger shall be MS heavy duty pipe in pipe type and without any joint in the

inner pipe. f. Horizontal suction line shall be pitched towards the compressor and no reducers shall be

provided for proper oil return. g. After the refrigerant piping installation has been completed, the refrigerant piping

system shall be pressure tested using Freon mixed with nitrogen / carbondioxide at a pressure of 20 kg per sq. cm (high side) and 10 kg per sq. cm (low side). Pressure shall be maintained in the system for a minimum of 12 hours. The system shall then be evacuated to a minimum vacuum of 70 cm of mercury and held for 24 hours. Vacuum shall be checked with a vacuum gage.

h. All refrigeration piping shall be installed strictly as per the instructions and

recommendations of air conditioning equipment manufacturer. 11.8 PIPING INSTALLATION

a. Design Drawings indicate schematically the size and location of pipes. The Contractor, on award of the work, shall prepare detailed shop drawings, showing the cross-section, longitudinal sections, details of fittings, locations of isolating and control valves, drain and air valves, and all pipe supports. He must keep in view the specific openings in the building through which pipes are designed to pass.

Pipe shall be cut only with hack saw blades and welding rods shall not be used for this

purpose. All the pipes shall be cleaned and applied with one coat of Zinc chromate primer.




b. Piping shall be properly supported on, or suspended from, stands, clamps, hangers as specified and as required. The Contractor shall adequately design all the brackets, saddles, anchors, clamps and hangers and be responsible for their structural sufficiency.

All pipes in HVAC plant room shall be supported with pipes and channels from floor only

with necessary PUF pipe supports and resistoflex sheet.

c. Pipe supports shall be of steel, adjustable for height and Zinc chromate primer coated and finish coated black. Where pipe and clamps are of dissimilar materials, a gasket shall be provided in between. Spacing of pipe supports shall not exceed the following :

__________________________________________________________ Pipe size Spacing between supports Rod Size ___________________________________________________________ Upto 12 mm 1.5 Meter 10 mm

15 to 25 mm 2.0 meter 10 mm

30 to 150 mm 2.0 meter 10 mm

Over 150 mm 2.5 meter 12.5 mm

d. Vertical pipes passing through floors shall be plumb and parallel to wall. Pipes shall be supported on alternate floor. MS cleats shall be welded on pipes and rest on MS channel placed on the floor with 15 mm thick resistoflex pads between the cleat and channel. U clamps with resistoflex sheet shall be provided to keep the pipe in position.

e. Bull heading in water/refrigerant piping shall be avoided.

f. Pipe sleeves atleast 3 mm thick, 50 mm / 100 mm larger in diameter than condenser /

chilled water pipes respectively shall be provided wherever pipes pass through retaining wall and slab. Annular space shall be filled with fibreglass and finished with retainer rings welded on the ends of the sleeve.

g. Wherever pipes pass through the brick or masonry / slab openings, the gaps shall be

sealed with fire sealant such as fire barrier caulks.

h. Insulated piping shall be supported in such a manner as not to put undue pressure on the insulation. 20 gage metal sheet shall be provided between the insulation and the clamp, saddle or roller, extending atleast 15 cm on both sides of the clamp, saddles or roller.

j. All piping work shall be carried out in a workmen like manner, causing minimum

disturbance to the existing services, buildings and structure. The entire piping work shall be organized, in consultation with other agencies work, so that laying of pipes, supports, and pressure testing for each area shall be carried out in one stretch.




k. Cut-outs in the floor slabs for installing the various pipes are indicated in the Drawings.

Contractor shall carefully examine the cut-outs provided and clearly point out where the cut-outs shown in the Drawings do not meet with the requirements.

l. The Contractor shall make sure that the clamps, brackets, clamp saddles and hangers

provided for pipe supports are adequate. Piping layout shall take due care for expansion and contraction in pipes and include expansion joints where required.

m. All pipes shall be accurately cut to the required size in accordance with relevant BIS

Codes, edges bevelled and burrs removed before laying. Open ends of the piping shall be closed as the pipe is installed to avoid entrance of foreign matter. Where reducers are to be made in horizontal runs, eccentric reducers shall be used for the piping to drain freely. In other locations, concentric reducers may be used.

n. Flanged inspection pieces 1.5 meters long, with bolted flanges on both ends, shall be

provided no more than 30 meters centres, or where-ever shown in Approved-for-Construction shop drawings, to facilitate future cleaning of all welded pipes.

o. All buried pipes shall be cleaned and coated with zinc chromate primer and bitumen

paint, and placed on concrete blocks with PUF saddles dipped in bitumen at every 2 meters and wrapped with three layers of fibre glass tissue, each layer laid in bitumen.

p. Insulated buried pipes shall be cleaned, derusted, then coated with Zinc chromate

primer and placed on concrete blocks with PUF saddles dipped in bitumen at every 2 meters. Insulation shall be applied as per the section “Insulation”, wrapped with GI wire and covered with polyethylene sheet. Two coats (each 6 mm thick) of cement plaster shall be applied over chicken wire mesh lath. Where indicated in Schedule of Quantities, buried insulated pipes shall be water-proofed using coat of Shalibond, or approved adhesive, over the plastered surface; wrapping one layer of fibre glass RP tissue and one layer of roofing tarfelt with sufficient overlaps, set and sealed with the adhesive, held in position by 16 gage G.I wire tied at 15 cm intervals.

q. Auto purge valves shall be provided at all highest points in the piping system for venting

air. Air valves shall be 15 mm pipe size with screwed joints.

Discharge from the air valves shall be piped through an equal sized mild steel or

galvanized steel pipe to the nearest drain or sump. These pipes shall be pitched

towards drain points.

11.9 PRESSURE GAGES AND THERMOMETERS

a. Pressure gages as specified under section “Automatic Controls and Instruments” shall be provided at suction and at discharge of each pump, at chilled water supply and return at each air handling unit, at each chillers and condenser, and as shown on




the Drawings and included in Schedule of Quantities. Care shall be taken to protect pressure gages during testing. Pressure gage sockets on insulated pipes and accessories shall be extended up to insulation to avoid damage of insulation for replacement of gauges. Isolation valve shall be provided for all pressure gauges.

b. Thermometers as specified under section “Automatic Controls and Instruments” shall

be provided at chilled water supply and return at each air handling unit, at each chiller and condenser, and as shown on Drawings and included in Schedule of Quantities.

c. Thermometers on CHW lines shall be with long stem. Thermometer socket shall be

extended upto insulation thickness so that the thermometer shall be removable without damaging the insulation. All temperature sensors shall be provided with thermowells.

11.10 TESTING

a. During construction , the contractor shall properly cap all lines, so as to prevent the entrance of sand, dirt, etc. Each system of piping shall be flushed thoroughly after completion (for the purpose of removing dirt, grit, sand etc. from the piping and fittings) for as long a time as is required to thoroughly clean the system.

b. All piping shall be tested to hydrostatic test pressure of atleast two times the

maximum operating pressure, but not less than 10 kg per sq. cm gage for a period of not less than 24 hours. All leaks and defects in joints revealed during the testing shall be rectified, retested and gotten approved

c. Piping repaired subsequent to the above pressure test shall be re-tested in the same

manner. d. Piping may be tested in sections and such sections shall be securely capped, then re-

tested for the entire system. e. The Contractor shall give sufficient notice to all other agencies at site, of his intention to

test a section or sections of piping and all testing shall be witnessed and recorded by Owner‟s site representative.

f. The contractors shall provide temporary pipe connections to initially by-pass

condenser/chiller and circulate water through condenser/chilled water pipe lines for minimum 8 hours. Water should be drained out from the lowest point. The temporary lines shall be removed and blanked with dead flanges. Pot strainers and Y strainers shall be cleaned and fresh water filled in the circuits.

g. The Contractor shall make sure that proper noiseless circulation of fluid is achieved

through all coils and other heat exchange equipment in the system concerned. If proper circulation is not achieved due to air bound connection, the Contractor shall rectify




the defective connections. He shall bear all expenses for carrying out the above rectifications including the tearing up and re-finishing of floors and walls if required.

h. After the piping has been installed, tested and run for atleast three days of eight hours

each, all insulated exposed piping in plant room shall be given two finish coats, 3 mils each of approved colour, conforming to relevant BIS Codes. The direction of flow of fluid in the pipes shall be visibly marked with identifying arrows. For painting of insulated and clad pipes refer to Insulation section.

j. After testing, all systems shall be chemically cleaned. Chemical cleaning shall be carried

out in 3 stages. In first stage biological cleaning shall be done to remove algae, bacteria, SRB etc which produces slimes. Second stage is pre-cleaning in which loose rust, oil, and debris are removed. Chemical addition and hold up time shall be as per chemical supply agencies recommendations. Third stage is passivation, in which chemicals will be added and passivation film will be formed over inside surfaces of piping system. Type of chemical used and quantity of the same along with detailed method statement shall be submitted by contractor before starting this activity.

Before handover Owner‟s site representative shall be provided with certificate of cleaning

of pipe systems, signed by the contractor. k. The Contractor shall provide all materials, tools, equipment, instruments, services

and labour required to perform the test and to remove water resulting from cleaning and after testing.

11.11 BALANCING

a. After completion of the installation, all water system shall be adjusted and balanced to deliver the water quantities as specified, quoted, or as directed.

b. All balancing valves, Automatic control valves and two-way diverting valves shall be set

for full flow condition during balancing procedure. Each water circuit shall be adjusted thru balancing valves provided for this purpose; these shall be permanently marked after balancing is completed, so that they can be restored to their correct positions, if disturbed.

c. Complete certified balancing report shall be submitted for evaluation and approval by

Owner‟s site representative. Upon approval, four copies of the balancing report shall be submitted with the as-installed drawings and completion documents.

11.12 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

Provide 30 mm dia brass valve tag, with embossed letters and number for each valve and attach the tag to valve handle by “S” hook or by suitable means. Contractor shall provide valve tag




schedule and valve chart for each piping system, consisting of schematic drawing of piping layout, along with a valve list, showing and identifying each valve by number, service and location and describing its function.

The contractor shall frame under glass in the air-conditioning plant room or as directed by Owner‟s site representative two copies of valve chart. Two additional unmounted copies shall be supplied to the Owner‟s site representative.

Tags shall correspond with the valve schedule and record drawings. In back of house areas, where ceilings are installed and the valve or valve tag is not visible, a self adhering tag with the valve number shall be installed on the wall or directly under the ceiling. For public area ceiling valves, these tags are to be installed in the service corridor, leading to the public areas.

11.13 MEASUREMENT FOR PIPING Unless specified otherwise, measurement for piping for the project shall be on the basis of

centre line measurements described herewith. Piping shall be measured in units of length along the centre line of installed pipes including all

pipe fittings, flanges (with gaskets, nuts, and bolts for jointing), unions, bends, elbows, tees, concentric and / or eccentric reducers, inspection pieces, expansion loops etc. The above accessories shall be measured as part of piping length along the centre line of installed pipes, and no special multiples of pipe lengths for accessories shall be permitted.

The quoted rates for centre line linear measurements of piping shall include all wastage

allowances, pipe supports including hangers, MS channel, PUF supports, nuts, check nuts,

vibration isolator suspension where specified or required, and any other item required to

complete the piping installation as per the Specifications. None of these items will be separately

measured nor paid for.

However, all valves (gate / globe / check / balancing / purge / butterfly / drain etc), strainers,

thermometers, pressure gages shall be separately counted and paid as per their individual

unit rates, which shall also include their insulation as per Specifications. Piping

measurements shall be taken before application of the insulation.

Contractor shall get pressure testing of pipes/measurements etc verified by the Owners

representative at site.

12. AIR DISTRIBUTION

12.1 SCOPE

The scope of this section comprises supply fabrication, installation and testing of all sheet metal /




aluminum ducts, supply, installation, testing and balancing of all grilles, registers and diffusers. All to be in accordance with these specifications and the general arrangement shown on the Drawings. All ducting shall be factory fabricated from coil stock and the vendor shall establish a workshop at site where L shaped duct sections will be closed pneumatically / electrically before they are taken up for installation.

12.2 DUCT MATERIALS 12.2.1 RAW MATERIALS Galvanizing shall be Class VII – light coating of zinc, nominal 180gm/sq.m surface area and Lock

Forming Quality prime material along with mill test certificates. In addition, if deemed necessary, samples of raw material, selected at random by owner‟s site representative shall be subject to approval and tested for thickness and zinc coating at contractor's expense.

12.2.2. GAUGES, BRACING BY SIZE OF DUCTS

All ducts shall be factory fabricated from galvanized steel / aluminum of the following thickness, as

indicated as below :

12.2.2.1 For Ducts with external SP upto 250 Pa ( ESP upto 25mmWg)

Rectangular Ducts G. S.

Pressure 250 Pa

Duct Section Length 1.2 m (4 ft)

Maximum Duct Size

Gauge Joint Type Bracing Spacing

1–500 mm 26 C&S Connector Nil

501 – 750 mm 26 C&S Connector Nil

751 – 900 mm 26 TDF Flange Nil

901 – 1200 mm

24 TDF Flange Nil

1201 – 1500 mm 22 TDF Flange Nil

1501 – 1800 mm 22 TDF Flange JTR or ZEE BAR

1801 – 2100 mm 20 TDF Flange JTR or ZEE BAR

2101 – above 18 TDF Flange JTR or ZEE BAR




12.2.3 For Round Ducts

Duct diameter mm

Upto 50 mm Wg static pressure (+ve)

51 – 250 mm Wg static pressure (+ve)

Upto 50 mm Wg static pressure (-ve)

Spiral seam gauge

Longitudinal seam gauge

Spiral seam gauge


Spiral seam gauge


Upto 650 26 24 24 22 24 22

651-900 24 22 22 20 22 20

901 – 1250 22 20 20 20 20 18

1251 – 1500 20 18 18 18 18 16

1501 – 2100 18 16 18 16 16 14

12.3 FABRICATION STANDARDS & EQUIPMENT

All duct construction and installation shall be in accordance with SMACNA standards. In addition

ducts shall be factory fabricated utilizing the following machines to provide the requisite quality of

ducts.

1. Coil (Sheet metal in Roll Form) lines to facilitate location of longitudinal seams at corners/folded edges only, for required duct rigidity and leakage free characteristics. No longitudinal seams permitted along any face side of the duct.

2. All ducts, transformation pieces and fittings to be made on CNC profile cutter for requisite

accuracy of dimensions, location and dimensions of notches at the folding lines.

3. All edges to be machine treated using lockformers, flangers and rollers for turning up edges.

4. Kitchen exhaust ducting shall be with 16 G MS welded construction. Suitable access doors shall

be provided at every 3m. Provision shall be made for fire fighting agency to install duct mounted

sprinklers at every 3m. Generally exhaust ducts shall have slope towards kitchen hood.




12.4 DUCT CONSTRUCTION 12.4.1 All ducts shall be fabricated and installed in workmanlike manner, conforming to relevant

SMACNA codes.

a) Ducts so identified on the Drawings shall be acoustically lined and insulated from outside as described in the section “Insulation” and as indicated in schedule of Quantities. Duct dimensions shown on drawings, are overall sheet metal dimensions inclusive of the acoustic lining where required and indicated in Schedule of quantities. The fabricated duct dimensions should be as per approved drawings and care should be taken to ensure that all connecting sections are dimensionally matched to avoid any gaps.

b) Ducts shall be straight and smooth on the inside with longitudinal seams shall be airtight

and at corners only which shall be either Pittsburgh or snap button as per SMACNA practice, to ensure air tightness.

c) All ducts up to 75cms width within conditioned spaces shall have C&S connector. The

internal ends of slip joints shall be in the direction of airflow. Care should be taken to ensure that Cleats are mounted on the longer side of the duct and Cleats on the shorter side. Ducts and accessories within ceiling spaces, visible from air-conditioned areas shall be provided with two coats of mat black finish paint.

d) Changes in dimensions and shape of ducts shall be gradual (between 1:4 and 1:7). Air-

turns (vanes) shall be installed in all bends and duct collars designed to permit the air to make the turn without appreciable turbulence.

e) Ducts shall be fabricated as per details shown on Drawings. All ducts shall be rigid and

shall be adequately supported and braced where required with standing seams, tees, or angles, of ample size to keep the ducts true to shape and to prevent buckling, vibration or breathing.

f) All sheet metal connection, partitions and plenums, required to confine the flow of air to

and through the filters and fans, shall be constructed of 18 gauge GSS / 16gauge aluminum, thoroughly stiffened with 25mm x 25mm x 3mm galvanized steel angle braces and fitted with all necessary inspection doors as required, to give access to all parts of the apparatus. Access doors shall be not less than 45cm x 45cm in size.

g) Plenums shall be shop/factory fabricated panel type and assembled at site. Fixing of

galvanized angle flanges on duct pieces shall be with rivets heads inside i.e. towards GS sheet and riveting shall be done from outside.

h) Self adhesive Neoprene rubber / UV resistant PVC foam lining 5mm nominal thickness

instead of felt, shall be used between duct flanges and between duct supports in all ducting installation.




12.5. INSTALLATION PRACTICE

All ducts shall be installed generally as per tender drawings, and in strict accordance with

approved shop drawings to be prepared by the Contractor:

a) The Contractor shall provide and neatly erect all sheet metal work as may be required to carry out the intent of these Specifications and Drawings. The work shall meet with the approval of Owner‟s site representative in all its parts and details

b) All necessary allowances and provisions shall be made by the Contractor for beams,

pipes, or other obstructions in the building, whether or not the same are shown on the drawings. Where necessary to avoid beams or other structural work, plumbing or other pipes, and conduits, the ducts shall be transformed, divided or curved to one side (the required area being maintained) all as per the site requirements.

c) If a duct cannot be run as shown on the drawings, the contractor shall install the duct

between the required points by any path available in accordance with other services and as per approval of owner‟s site representative.

d) All ductwork shall be independently supported from building construction. All horizontal

ducts shall be rigidly and securely supported, in an approved manner, with hangers formed of galvanized steel wire ropes (as per clause 12.12) and galvanized steel angle/channel or a pair of brackets, connected by galvanized steel wire hangers under ducts, rigid supports may be provided at certain interval if need be. The spacing between supports should be not greater than 2.4 meter. All vertical ductwork shall be supported by structural members on each floor slab. Duct supports may be through galvanized steel insert plates or Toggle end wire fixing left in slab at the time of slab casting. Galvanized steel cleat with a hole for passing the wire rope hanger shall be welded to the plates. Trapeze hanger formed of galvanized steel wire rope using Gripple shall be hung through these cleats. Wherever use of metal insert plates is not feasible, duct support shall be through dash/anchor fastener driven into the concrete slab by electrically operated gun. Wire rope supports shall hang through the cleats or wire rope threaded studs can be screwed into the anchor fasteners.

e) Alternatively, if mentioned in the BOQ, all ductwork shall be independently supported from

building construction. All horizontal ducts shall be rigidly and securely supported, in an approved manner, with trapeze hangers formed of galvanized steel rods and galvanized steel angle/channel or a pair of brackets, connected by galvanized steel rod under ducts. The spacing between supports should be not greater than 2.0 meter. All vertical ductwork shall be supported by structural members on each floor slab. Duct supports may be through galvanized steel insert plates left in slab at the time of slab casting. Galvanized steel cleat with a hole for passing the hanger rods shall be welded to the plates. Trapeze hanger formed of galvanized steel rods shall be hung through these cleats. Wherever use of metal insert plates is not feasible, duct support shall be through dash/anchor fastener driven into the concrete slab by electrically operated gun. Hanger rods shall then




hang through the cleats or fully threaded galvanized rods can be screwed into the anchor fasteners.

f) Ducting over furred ceiling shall be supported from the slab above, or from beams after

obtaining approval of Owner‟s site representative. In no case shall any duct be supported from false ceiling hangers or be permitted to rest on false ceiling. All metal work in dead or furred down spaces shall be erected in time to occasion no delay to other contractor‟s work in the building.

g) Where ducts pass through brick or masonry openings, it shall be provided with 25mm

thick TF quality expanded polystyrene around the duct and totally covered with fire barrier mortar for complete sealing.

h) All ducts shall be totally free from vibration under all conditions of operation. Whenever

ductwork is connected to fans, air handling units or blower coil units that may cause vibration in the ducts, ducts shall be provided with a flexible connection, located at the unit discharge. Flexible connections shall be constructed of fire retarding flexible heavy canvas sleeve at least 10cm long securely bonded and bolted on both sides. Sleeve shall be made smooth and the connecting ductwork rigidly held by independent supports on both sides of the flexible connection. The flexible connection shall be suitable for pressure at the point of installation.

i) Duct shall not rest on false ceiling and shall be in level from bottom. Taper pieces shall

taper from top. 12.6 DAMPERS

a. Dampers : All duct dampers shall be opposed blade louver dampers of robust 16 G GSS construction and tight fitting. The design, method of handling and control shall be suitable for the location and service required.

b. Dampers shall be provided with suitable links levers and quadrants as required for their

proper operation. Control or setting device shall be made robust, easily operable and accessible through suitable access door in the duct. Every damper shall have an indicating device clearly showing the damper position at all times.

c. Dampers shall be placed in ducts at every branch supply or return air duct connection,

whether or not indicated on the Drawings, for the proper volume control and balancing of the air distribution system.

e. Pressure relief dampers: Pressure relief dampers shall be constructed with 18G

Aluminum construction with parallel blade construction. Leafs shall be 100% air tight upon closure. Leafs shall be loaded with spring pressure of stiffness (k value) corresponding to set point pressure.




f. Non return damper (Back draft damper) : Non return damper shall be constructed out of 16G GSS. Blades shall ensure 100% air leak proof performance on closure. Design shall ensure that no rattling noise is produced at design duty.

12.7 FIRE & SMOKE DAMPERS

a. All supply and return air ducts at AHU room crossings and at all floor crossings or as

indicated in the drawings shall be provided with Motor operated Fire & smoke damper of at least 90 minutes rating. These shall be of multi-leaf type and provided with Spring Return electrical actuator having its own thermal trip for ambient air temperature outside the duct and air temperature inside the duct. Actuator shall have Form fit type of mounting, metal enclosure and guaranteed long life span. The dampers shall meet the requirements of NFPA90A, 92A and 92B. Dampers shall have a fire rating of 1.5 Hrs. in accordance with latest edition of UL555 and shall be classified as Leakage Class 2 smoke damper in accordance with latest version of UL555S. Each fire/smoke damper shall be AMCA licensed and bear the AMCA seal for air Performance. Pressure drop shall not exceed 7.5Pa when tested at 300m/min face velocity on 600x600mm size damper. Actuator shall be UL listed.

b. Each damper shall be supplied with factory mounted sleeve of galvanized steel of

thickness as per SMACNA and of minimum 500mm long or as specified in schedule of quantities depending up on the wall thickness. The damper shall be fitted in to sleeve either using welding or self tapping screws. All welded joints shall be finished using heat resistance steel paint . UL listed and approved Silicon sealant shall be applied at all corners as well as at joints between damper frame and sleeve. Damper Frame shall be a roll formed structural hat channel , reinforced at corners, formed from a single piece of 1.6mm galvanized steel . Damper blades shall be airfoil shaped (equivalent to 2.3mm thickness strength) roll formed using 0.8mm thick single piece of galvanized sheet. Bearings shall be of stainless steel fitted in an extruded hole in the damper frame. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rubber and galvanized steel mechanically locked in to the blade edge (adhesive type seals are not acceptable). Side Jam seals of stainless steel and Top and bottom seals of galvanized steel shall be provided. All galvanized steel used shall be with minimum 180GSM Zinc coating Bigger size Dampers shall be supplied in Multiple modules of sizes not exceeding in dimensions of certified module, jack shafted together. Multiple actuators shall be provided for large dampers with higher torque requirements as prescribed in UL.

c. The electric actuator shall be energized either upon receiving a signal from smoke

detector installed in AHU room supply air duct / return air duct. Electric Actuator of suitable Torque and as approved by UL shall be factory mounted and tested. The actuator shall be suitable for 24V AC supply.In addition actuator shall have elevated temperature rating of 250 deg.F. Electric Actuator shall have been energized hold open tested for a period of at least one year with no spring return failure. Each fire/smoke damper shall be equipped with a heat actuated release device which shall allow controlled closure of damper rather than instantaneous to prevent accident.( Electrical fusible link).The EFL




shall allow the damper to reopen automatically after a test, smoke detection or power failure condition. The damper shall be equipped with a device to indicate OPEN and CLOSE position of Damper blades through a link mounted on the damper blade.

d. Each damper shall be provided with its own control panel, mounted on the wall and

suitable for 240 VAC supply. This control panel shall be suitable for spring return actuator and shall have atleast the following features:

Potential free contacts for AHU fan ON/ Off and remote alarm indication.

Accept signal from external smoke / fire detection system for tripping the electrical actuator.

Test and reset facility.

Indicating lights / contacts to indicate the following status:

Power Supply On

Alarm

Damper open and close position. e. Actuators shall be mounted on the sleeve by the damper supplier in his shop and shall

furnish test certificate for satisfactory operation of each Motor Operated Damper in conjunction with its control panel. Control panel shall be wall mounted type.

f. It shall be HVAC Contractor‟s responsibility to co-ordinate with the Fire Alarm System

Contractor for correctly hooking up the Motor Operated Damper to Fire Detection / Fire Management System. All necessary materials for hooking up shall be supplied and installed by HVAC Contractor under close co-ordination with the fire protection system contractor.

g. HVAC Contractor shall demonstrate the testing of all Dampers and its control panel after necessary hook up with the fire protection / fire management system is carried out by energising all the smoke detectors with the help of smoke.

h. HVAC Contractor shall provide Fire retardant cables wherever required for satisfactory

operation and control of the Damper. j. HVAC Contractor shall strictly follow the instructions of the Damper Supplier or avail his

services at site before carrying out testing and installation at site. k. Fire/smoke damper shall be provided with factory fitted sleeves; however, access doors

shall be provided in the ducts within AHU room in accordance with the manufacturer‟s recommendations.




l. The Contractor shall also furnish to the Owner, the necessary additional spare

actuators and temperature sensor (a minimum of 5% of the total number installed) at the time of commissioning of the installation.

12.8 FIRE DAMPERS

a. Whenever a supply/return duct crosses from one fire zone to another, it shall be provided with approved fire damper of at least 1½ hour fire rating as per UL555/1995 tested by CBRI. This shall be curtain type fire damper.

b. Fire damper blades shall be one piece folded high strength 16 gage galvanised steel

construction. In normal position, these blades shall be gathered and stacked at the frame head providing maximum air passage and preventing passing air currents from creating noise or chatter. The blades shall be held in position through fusible link of temp 70o C. The HVAC contractor shall supply UL classified Fire Dampers meeting or exceeding the specifications. Fire Dampers shall be furnished and installed at locations shown in Drawings and as described in Schedule of quantities. Fire Dampers shall have a fire rating of 1.5/3 Hrs.as specified in BOQ, in accordance with latest edition of UL555. Each Fire damper shall be AMCA licenced and shall bear the AMCA seal for air performance.

Damper shall be equipped with UL labelled Fusible Link with Temperature setting 165 or 212deg. F or as specified in Bill of quantities. Fire dampers shall have been tested to close under dynamic air flow conditions with pressure up to 1000 pa and velocities up to 10.2 m /sec. Fire damper shall be approved for Horizontal or vertical installation as may be required by the location shown in the drawings.

Damper Frame shall be a roll formed structural hat channel , reinforced at corners, formed from a single piece of 1.6mm galvanized steel . Damper blades shall be roll formed 3-v groove (1.6mmthick) or airfoil shaped in case of 3 Hrs. fire rating (equivalent to 2.3mm thickness strength) roll formed using 0.8mm thick single piece of galvanized sheet. Bearings shall be of stainless steel fitted in an extruded hole in the damper frame. All galvanized steel used shall be with minimum 180GSM Zinc coating Bigger size Dampers shall be supplied in Multiple modules of sizes not exceeding in dimensions of certified module jack shafted together. Fire damper shall be equipped with a electric limit switch to indicate open and close position of the damper blades. Fire Damper shall be installed in wall or floor opening using galvanized steel sleeve of minimum 435mm length of sheet thickness as per SMACNA and as per Installation instruction of Manufacturer.

c. In case of fire, the intrinsic energy of the folded blades shall be utilized to close the

opening. The thrust of the suddenly released tension shall instantly drive the blades down




and keep it down without the use of springs, weights or other devices subject to failure. d. Fire damper sleeves and access doors shall be provided within the duct in accordance

with the manufacturer‟s recommendation. e. The contractor shall also furnish to the Owner, the necessary additional fusible links

(spares), as recommended by the manufacturer, at the time of commissioning of the installation.

12.9 SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR REGISTERS Supply & return air registers shall be of either steel or aluminium sections as specified in

schedule of quantities. Steel construction registers shall have primer Coat finish whereas

extruded aluminium registers shall be either Anodised or Powder Coated as specified in

Schedule of Quantities. These registers shall have individually adjustable louvers both

horizontal and vertical. Supply air registers shall be provided with key operated opposed blade

extruded aluminium volume control damper anodised in matt black shade.

The registers shall be suitable for fixing arrangement having concealed screws as approved by

Architect. Linear continuous supply cum return air register shall be extruded aluminium

construction with fixed horizontal bars at 15 Deg. inclination & flange on both sides only (none on

top & bottom). The thickness of the fixed bar louvers shall be minimum 5.5 mm in front and 3.8

mm in rear with rounded edges. Flanges on the two sides shall be 20 mm/30 mm wide as

approved by Architect. The grilles shall be suitable for concealed fixing. Volume control

dampers of extruded aluminium anodised in black color shall be provided in supply air

duct collars. For fan coil units horizontal fixed bar grilles as described above shall be provided with

flanges on four sides, and the core shall be & suitable for clip fixing, permitting its removal without

disturbing the flanges.

a. All registers shall be selected in consultation with the Architect. Different spaces shall require horizontal or vertical face bars, and different width of margin frames. These shall be procured only after obtaining written approval from Architect for each type of register.

b. All registers shall have a soft continuous rubber/foam gasket between the periphery of

the register and the surface on which it has to be mounted. The effective area of the registers for air flow shall not be less than 66 percent of gross face area.

c. Registers specified with individually adjustable bars shall have adjustable pattern as each

grille bar shall be pivotable to provide pattern with 0 to +45 degree horizontal arc and upto 30 degree deflection downwards. Bars shall hold deflection settings under all conditions of velocity and pressure.

d. Bar longer than 45 cm shall be reinforced by set-back vertical members of approved

thickness.




e. All volume control dampers shall be anodised aluminium in mat black shade. 12.10 SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DIFFUSERS Supply and return air diffusers shall be as shown on the Drawings and indicated in Schedule of

Quantities. Mild steel diffusers/dampers shall be factory coated with rust-resistant primer.

Aluminium diffusers shall be powder coated & made from extruded aluminium section as

specified in schedule of quantities.

a. Rectangular Diffusers shall be steel / extruded aluminium construction, square & rectangular diffusers with flush fixed pattern for different spaces as per schedule of quantities These shall be selected in consultation with the Architect. These shall be procured only after obtaining written approval from Architect for each type of diffuser.

b. Supply air diffusers shall be equipped with fixed air distribution grids, removable key-

operated volume control dampers, and anti-smudge rings as required in specific applications, and as per requirements of schedule of quantities. All extruded aluminium diffusers shall be provided with removable central core and concealed key operation for volume control damper.

c. Linear Diffuser shall be extruded aluminium construction with removable core,

one or two way blow type. Supply air diffusers shall be provided with volume control/ balancing dampers within the supply air collar. Diffusers for different spaces shall be selected in consultation with the Architect, and provided as per requirements of schedule of quantities. All diffusers shall have volume control dampers of extruded aluminium construction anodised in mat black shade.

d. Slot Diffuser shall be extruded aluminium construction multislot type with air pattern

controller provided in each slot. Supply air diffusers shall be provided with Hit & Miss volume control dampers in each slot of the supply air diffusers. Diffusers for different spaces shall be selected in consultation with the Architect and provided as per requirement of Schedule of Quantities.

e. Data centers shall be provided with floor grilles. Grilles shall be of nominal size of 600mm

x 600mm and shall be fitted in floor tile of false floor. Grille shall be with dampers for flow control. Grill shall be heavy duty 16G Aluminium and shall take care of human traffic load. Damper shall be operable in situ without requirement of removal of grille.

12.11 FIRE RATED DUCTWORK

Ducting for kitchen exhaust & fire evacuation shall be fire rated as per following specifications.




a. All fire rated ductwork constructed for mechanical or dual ventilation/pressurization/basement car park/smoke extract systems and kitchen exhaust shall be fabricated from Lock Forming Quality grade prime Galvanized Steel Sheet, constructed to enhanced SMACNA American/DW144 European standard to either low, medium or high velocity/ pressure.

b. Test requirement of fire rated ductwork should be tested to BS476: Part 24 [1987] and

ISO 6944 providing required fire rating for Stability and Integrity. c. Stability: the ability of a duct, ductwork & the support system to remain intact & fulfill their

intended function for a specified period of time, when tested to the requirements of BS476: Part 24 and ISO 6944.

d. Integrity: the ability of a duct or ductwork to remain free of cracks, holes or openings out

side the compartment in which the fire is present for a specified period of time, when tested to the requirements of BS476 Part 24 ISO 6944.

e. Insulation: the ability of a duct or ductwork to maintain its separating function without

developing temperatures on its external surface outside the compartment in which the fire is present, which exceeds, (i) 140OC as an average value above ambient & or, (ii) 180OC as maximum value above ambient at any point, when tested for a specified period of time to the requirements of BS476: Part 24 ISO 6944.

f. Its important that the fire rated ductwork has a smooth internal surface in order to

minimize the pressure loss within the fire rated ductwork system thereby reduce the power requirements.

g. All fire rated ducts for Smoke Extract Duct shall have Stability / Integrity and Insulation for

smoke temperatures up to 300OC upto 1.5 hrs, restriction of the duct due to twisting or buckling after the fire test shall not cause 25% or more reduction in cross sectional area proven by certification from an independent test house.

h. Each duct shall have fire rated coating. Fire rated coating compound used for

construction of fire rated ductwork shall be protected with minimum 0.7mm to 1mm nominal thickness tested to properties as per the requirements of BS 476: 6 & 7, including non-combustibility Class O and fire propagation - Class 1 surface spread of flame & materials in accordance with Building Regulations.

i. Fire duct to be tested / assessed to BS476: Part 24 for all sizes up to 25 meters x 3

meters cross-sectional area and fully certified to vertical and horizontal plane. j. Fire rated duct fabricated to Method 3 of BS 5588: Part 9, factory produced. The coating

compound shall be applied either offsite or onsite on the ground, dried and cured. k. Fire duct expansion under fire conditions shall not exceed following,




- at 430OC an expansion of 0.006106mm per mm

- at 600OC an expansion of 0.00852mm per mm

- at 1100OC an expansion of 0.01562mm per mm.

12.12 BRAIDED ( WIRE) ROPE SUPPORT

Braided (Wire) Hangers shall be used to suspend all static mechanical, electrical and HVAC

services.

Braided (Wire) Rope Hangers shall consist of a pre-formed wire rope sling with either a ferruled loop, permanently fixed threaded M8 stud, or permanently fixed nipple end with toggle, at one end or hook or eyelet or any other end fixture type or size as per manufacturers recommendation. The end fixings and the wire must be of the same manufacturer. The system is secured and tensioned with a wire rope Hanger self-locking grip at the other end. Only wire and/or supports supplied and/or approved, shall be used with the system.

a. Braided (Wire) Rope Hangers have been independently tested by Lloyds Register. APAVE, TUV, UL, CSA and SMACNA, approved by ULC and CSA and comply with the requirements of DW/144 and BSRIA – wire Rope Suspension systems. Wire rope is manufactured to BSEN 12385: 2002.

b. The contractor shall select the correct specification of wire Hanger to use for supporting

each particular service from table 1 below. Each size is designated with a maximum safe working load limit.

The correct specification of Braided (Wire) Rope Hanger required is determined using the following formula.

Weight per meter of object suspended (kg) X distance between suspension points (m) = weight loading per Braided (Wire) RopeHanger suspension point (kg). The contractor shall select the correct length of Braided (Wire) Rope required to support the service. Lengths from 1-10m lengths. No in–line joints should be made in the rope.

Table. 1




size

minimum breaking load

of Braided (Wire) Rope

Braided (Wire)

Rope

construction

tensile

strength(Nmm2)

working load limit

(kg/lbs)

No. 1 80kg/176 lbs 7 x 7 (6/1) 1770 0-10 kg / 0-22 lbs

No. 2 260kg/572 lbs 7 x 7 (6/1) 1770 10-45 kg / 23-100 lbs

No. 3 580kg/1276 lbs 7 x 7 (6/1) 1770 45-90 kg / 101-200 lbs

No. 4 1500kg/3300 lbs 7 x 19 (12/6/1) 1770 90-225 kg / 210-495 lbs

No. 5 2160kg/4752 lbs 7 x 19 (12/6/1) 1770 225-325 kg / 496-715 lbs The standard range of Braided (Wire) Rope Hanger Kits shall be used which contains galvanized high tensile steel wire rope, the minimum specification is as above and shall be manufactured to BS 302 (1987), BSEN12385.

Ducting Supports: All duct work shall be independently supported from building construction. All horizontal ducts shall be adequately secured and supported. In an approved manner, with trapeze Hangers formed of galvanized steel wire rope in a cradle support method under ducts at no greater than 2 meter centre. All vertical duct work shall be supported by structural members on each floor slab. Duct support shall be through dash / anchor fastener driven into the concrete slab by electrically operated gun. Hanger wire shall then hang around the ducting. Rigid supports shall be used in conjunction with wire rope hangers to assist with alignment of services. Rigid support must also be used in conjunction with wire rope hangers with duct work at each change of direction or connection. Support ducting in accordance with Schedule I.

Ducting over furred ceiling shall be supported from the slab above or from beams after obtaining approval of Construction manager/consultant. In no case shall any duct be supported from false ceiling Hangers or be permitted to rest on false ceiling. All metal work in dead or furred down spaces shall be erected in time to occasion no delay to other Contractor‟s work in the building.

Piping Supports: Rigid supports shall be used in conjunction with wire rope hangers to assist with alignment of services. Rigid support must also be used in conjunction with wire rope hangers with pipe work at each change of direction or connection. For insulated pipe, provide protective sleeve to protect the entire circumference of the pipe insulation. All supports of pipe shall be taken from structural slab/wall by means of fastener. Support piping in accordance with Schedule II at the end of this Section.

Electrical Cable Tray/Raceway Supports: Y-Fit solution shall be used to a maximum width of 500mm tray. For Tray over 500mm cradle support method or independent Gripple supports must be taken as appropriate based on load. Rigid supports shall be used in conjunction with wire rope hangers to assist with alignment of services. Any other Gripple solution can be used based on manufacturer‟s recommendation on site conditions after prior approval.

Refer to manufacturers catalogue and installation guide for further technical information. Comply with manufacturer's load ratings and recommended installation procedures.




Schedule I: Duct Hanger Schedule

Maximum Duct

Size (mm)

Gauge Gripple Hanger

No.

Maximum Duct Size

(mm)

Gauge Gripple

Hanger No.

1 - 751 26 2 1–600 mm 26 2

751-1000 26 2 601-750 mm 26 2

1001-1200 24 3 751-1000 mm 24 3

1201 - 1500 24 3 1001-1200 mm 22 4

1501 - 1800 22 4 1201-1300 mm 20 4

1801-2100 20 4 1301-1500 mm 18 4

2101-2700 18 4 1501-1800 mm 18 4

1801-2100 mm 18 4

2101-2250 mm 18 4

For ducts with external SP upto 250 Pa For ducts with external SP upto 500 Pa

All supports shall be at 2400 mm interval. Schedule II: Pipe Hanger Schedule

Pipe Size

Weight of

pipe + fluid

Weight of

pipe + fluid

per Rmt

Spacings

(pipe +

fluid+insula

tion)

Spacings

(pipe +

fluid+plast

er)

Total

Weight of

pipe + fluid

Total

Weight of

pipe + fluid

Gripple

Hanger No.

Gripple

Hanger No.

(mm)

with

insulation

(kgs/rmts)

with sand

cement

plaster

(kgs/rmts)

between

supports

(mts)

between

supports

(mts)

with

insulation

(kgs/rmts)

with sand

cement

plaster

(kgs/rmts)

with

insulation

(kgs/rmts)

with sand

cement

plaster

(kgs/rmts)

12-35 11.73 14 1.5 1.5 18 21 2 2

40-65 11.73 14 2 2 23 28 2 2

80-125 34.73 41.67 2 2 69 83.34 3 3

150-250 112 134 2 1.5 224 201 4 4

300 - 350 180 215 1.5 1.5 270 322.5 5 5

400-500 320 383 1.5 - 480 - 6 -

12.14 DOCUMENTATION & MEASUREMENTS FOR DUCTING

All ducts fabricated and installed should be accompanied and supported by proper documentation viz:

a) Bill of material/Packing list for every duct section supplied.

Measurement sheet covering each fabricated duct piece showing dimensions and external surface area along with summary of external surface area of duct gauge-wise.




Each and every duct piece to have a tag number, which should correspond to the serial number, assigned to it in the measurement sheet. The above system will ensure speedy and proper site measurement and verification.

Unless otherwise specified, measurements for ducting for the project shall be on the basis of centerline measurements described herewith

Ductwork shall be measured on the basis of external surface area of ducts. Duct

measurements shall be taken before application of the insulation. The external surface area shall be

calculated by measuring the perimeter comprising overall width and depth, including the corner joints,

in the center of each duct section, multiplying with the overall length from flange face to flange face of

each duct section and adding up areas of all duct sections. Plenums shall also be measured in a

similar manner.

For tapered rectangular ducts, the average width and depth shall be considered for

perimeter, whereas for tapered circular ducts, the diameter of the section midway

between large and small diameter shall be adopted, the length of tapered duct section

shall be the centerline distance between the flanges of the duct section.

For special pieces like bends, tees, reducers, branches and collars, mode of

measurement shall be identical to that described above using the length along the centerline.

The quoted unit rate for external surface of ducts shall include all wastage allowances, flanges and gaskets for joints, nuts and bolts, hangers and angles with double nuts for supports, rubber strip 5mm thick between duct and support, vibration isolator suspension where specified or required, inspection chamber/access panel, splitter damper with quadrant and lever for position indication, turning vanes, straightening vanes, and all other accessories required to complete the duct installation as per the specifications. These accessories shall NOT be separately measured nor paid for.

b. Special Items for Air Distribution shall be measured by the cross-section area

perpendicular to air flow, as identified herewith :

i. Grilles and registers - width multiplied by height, excluding flanges. Volume control dampers shall form part of the unit rate for registers and shall not be separately accounted.




ii. Diffusers - cross section area for air flow at discharge area, excluding flanges. Volume control dampers shall form part of unit rate for supply air diffusers and shall not be separately accounted.

iii. Linear diffusers - shall be measured by cross-sectional areas and shall exclude

flanges for mounting of linear diffusers. The supply air plenum for linear diffusers shall be measured with ducting as described earlier.

iv. Fire dampers - shall be measured by their cross sectional area perpendicular

to the direction of air flow. Quoted rates shall include the necessary collars and flanges for mounting, inspection pieces with access door, electrical actuators and panel. No special allowance shall be payable for extension of cross section outside the air stream.

v. Flexible connection - shall be measured by their cross sectional area

perpendicular to the direction of air flow. Quoted rates shall include the necessary mounting arrangement, flanges, nuts and bolts and treated-for-fire requisite length of canvas cloth.

vi. Kitchen Hoods - shall be measured by their cross sectional area at the

capture point of fumes, parallel to the surface of kitchen equipment. Quoted rates shall include the grease filters, provision for hood light, suspension arrangement for the hood, profile to direct the air to ventilation ducts and provision for removable drip tray.

12.15 UNDERFLOOR AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

a. Round Floor Turbulent Flow Diffuser

Each diffuser shall produce a high induction turbulent vertical flow resulting in rapid temperature equalization within the occupied zone.

The discharge airflow shall be adjustable from the face of the diffuser. Minimum flow limit shall

be adjustable from 0% to 50% of maximum flow using mechanical stop. The adjustable diffuser face shall have a positive interlock with the mounting hardware to reduce the chance of accidental adjustment due to foot traffic. The diffuser core shall consist of multiple radial slots with an incline angle of 30 degrees. The 8” core shall be constructed of UL2043 Fire Rated Polyamide with permeating color able to withstand maximum mechanical loading of 1300 lbs. Round floor diffusers shall be installed with Ring Nut / fastening and shall include tamper protection to prevent unauthorized removal of the diffuser. Assembly shallinclude black polycarbo




nate distributor Basket with Damper device.

b. Round Floor Displacement Diffuser

Each diffuser shall produce a low induction horizontal flowresulting in a stratified zone temperature distribution within the occupied zone. The discharge airflow shall be adjustable from the face of the diffuser. Minimum flow limit shall be adjustable from 0% to 50% of maximum flow using a mechanical stop. The adjustable diffuser face shall have a positive interlock with the mounting hardwareto reduce the chance of accidental adjustment due to foot traffic. The 8” core shall be constructed of UL2043 Fire Rated Polyamide with permeating color able to withstand maximum mechanical loading of 1300 lbs. Round floor diffusers shall be installed with Ring Nut fastening and shall include tamper protection to prevent unauthorized removal of the diffuser. Assembly shall include black polycarbonate distributor Basket with Damper device.

c. Round Floor Inclined Diffuser

Each diffuser shall produce a high induction turbulent flow by utilizing radial and circular discharge slots to create a discharge of 30 degrees to vertical resulting inrapid temperature equalization within the occupied zone. The diffuser core shall consist of multiple radial slots and circular slots with an incline angle of 30 degrees. The 8” core shall be constructed of aluminum able to withstand maximum mechanical loading of 2600 lbs. Round floor diffusers shall be installed withRing Press Fit / Ring Claw fasteners and shall include tamper protection to prevent unauthorized removal of the round diffuser. Assembly shall include black polyamide distributor Basket with Damper device / ShortBasket / Extra Short Basket with Damper Device. Round Floor diffusers shall be supplied with an RFB / RFBV boot mounted to the underside of the floor tile constructed ofgalvanized steel.

12.16 FLEXIBLE DUCT:

Insulated flexible duct should be UL 181 CLASS I AIR DUCT LISTED AND LABELLED WITH NFPA 90A & 90B ANDSEAL OF AIR DIFFUSION COUNCIL with double lamination of tough polyester which encapsulates steel helix wire forms the air tight inner core , double layer core wrapped in a multiple thickness of fiberglass wool with R Value 4.2 , Green guard certification of fiberglass wool must. , Reinforced and sheathed in a rugged and durable tridirectionally reinforced matlized polyester jacket.




Flexible duct connections should be made as per UL181 listing procedure with proper flexible right forming brace connection allowing right connections for flexible duct into energy efficient . and Strapping the flexible duct connections with flexible duct strap ties.

12.17 TESTING AND BALANCING After the installation of the entire air distribution system is completed in all respects, all ducts

shall be tested for air leaks by visual inspection.

The entire air distribution system shall be balanced using an anemometer. Measured air

quantities at fan discharge and at various outlets shall be identical to or less/excess than 5

percent in excess of those specified and quoted. Branch duct adjustments shall be

permanently marked after air balancing is completed so that these can be restored to their

correct position if disturbed at any time. Complete air balance report shall be submitted for

scrutiny and approval, and four copies of the approved balance report shall be provided with

completion documents.

13. INSULATION

13.1 SCOPE The scope of this section comprises the supply and application of insulation conforming to

these specifications.

13.2 MATERIAL Thermal insulation material for Duct insulation shall be closed cell Elastomeric Nitrile Rubber of

Thermal conductivity of the insulation material shall not exceed 0.038 W/moK or 0.212 BTU / (Hr-ft2-oF/inch) at an average temperature of 30oC. Density of the nitrile rubber shall be 40-60 Kg/m3. The product shall have temperature range of –40 oC to 105oC. The insulation material shall be fire rated for Class 0 as per BS 476 Part 6 : 1989 for fire propagation test and for Class 1 as per BS 476 Part 7, 1987 for surface spread of flame test. Water vapour permeability shall be not less than 0.024 perinch (2.48 x 10-14 Kg/m.s.Pa i.e. µ>7000: Water vapour diffusion resistance).

Chilled water piping within AHU rooms / plant room / vertical risers / shafts shall be insulated with Aluminium foil faced nitrile rubber insulation. Insulation material shall be elastomeric nitrile rubber. Thermal conductivity of the insulation material shall not exceed 0.038 W/moK at an average temperature of 300C. Density of the nitrile rubber shall be 40-60 Kg/m3. The product shall have temperature range of –400C to 1050C. The insulation material shall be fire rated for Class 0 as per BS 476 Part 6: 1989 for fire propagation test and for Class 1 as per BS 476 Part 7, 1987 for surface spread of flame test. Water vapour permeability shall be not less than 0.024 per m inch




(2.48 x 10-14 Kg/m.s.Pa i.e. µ>7000: Water vapour diffusion resistance).

Pipe nominal bore Insulation Thickness

15mm – 25mm 25mm

32mm – 80mm 32mm

100mm – 400mm 38mm

Above 400mm 45mm

In addition to above properties, insulation shall be anti-microbial with EPA approval.

Microbiological growth on insulation surface shall be in accordance with UL 181 and bacterial resistance to ASTM G22.

Thickness of the insulation shall be as specified for the individual application. Each lot of

insulation material delivered at site shall be accompanied with manufacturer‟s test certificate for thermal conductivity values, density, water vapour permeability and fire properties. Samples of insulation material from each lot delivered at site may be selected by Owner‟s site representative and gotten tested for thermal conductivity and density at Contractor‟s cost.Adhesive used for sealing the insulation shall be non-flammable, vapour proof adhensive strictly as per manufacturer‟s recommendations.

Ducting insulation thickness shall be as per table below.

Ducting position Thk. for non-coastal places Thk. for coastal places

SA duct in RA path 13mm 19mm

Ducted return air system SA duct: 19mm RA duct: 13mm

SA duct: 25mm RA duct: 19mm

Both SA& RA exposed Both 25mm Both 25mm

13.3 DUCT INSULATION External thermal insulation shall be provided as follows :

The thickness of nitrile rubber shall be as shown on drawing or identified in the schedule of quantity. Following procedure shall be adhered to: Duct surfaces shall be cleaned to remove all grease, oil, dirt, etc. prior to carrying out insulation work. Measurement of surface dimensions shall be taken properly to cut closed cell elastomeric rubber sheets to size with sufficient allowance in dimension. Cutting of nitrile rubber sheets shall be done with adjustable blade to make 900 cut in thickness of nitrile rubber sheet. Hacksaw or blades are not acceptable tools for cutting the insulation. Material shall be fitted under compression and no stretching of material shall be permitted. A film of adhesive shall be applied on the back of the insulating material sheet and then on to the metal surface. When adhesive is tack dry, insulating material sheet shall be placed in position and




pressed firmly to achieve a good bond. All longitudinal and transverse joints shall be sealed by providing 6 mm thick 50 mm wide nitrile rubber tape. The adhesive shall be strictly as recommended by the manufacturer.

13.4 PIPING TREATMENT All chilled water, refrigerant, and condensate drain piping shall be insulated in the manner

specified herein. Before applying insulation, all pipe shall be brushed and cleaned. All MS pipes shall be provided with a coat of zinc chromate primer.

13.5 PROTECTIVE COATING OVER INSULATION To provide mechanical strength and protection from damage all duct insulated with nitrile rubber

shall be covered with thermal insulation protecting coating with alkali resistance glass fibre fabric of weight 200 GSM and 7 mil minimum thickness reinforcement. The coating non-volatile content shall be as per guideline of ASTM 1644-01 and Water permanence (perms) as per guideline ASTM E-96. The coating flammability, surface burning characteristics shall be as per ASTM E-84 and UL 723. Insulated pipes & ducts exposed to UV rays shall be covered with fibreglass fabric. Over fabric one coat of fire proof epoxy or acrylic compound shall be applied. The coat shall be allowed to cure to non stick state. Subsequently second coat of compound shall be applied to give a tough and smooth finish to the insulated surface.

13.6 PUMP INSULATION Chilled water pump shall be insulated to the same thickness as the pipe to which they are

connected and application shall be same as above. Care shall be taken to apply insulation in a manner as to allow the dismantling of pumps without damaging the insulation.

13.7 SHELL INSULATION The chiller shells shall be factory insulated in accordance with the manufacturer‟s standards. 13.8 CHILLED WATER EXPANSION TANK INSULATION Cold water tank, and chilled water expansion tank shall be insulated as per manufacturer‟s

standard. 13.9 ACOUSTIC LINING OF MECHANICAL ROOMS

Two walls and ceiling of air conditioning plant room and air handling unit rooms may be provided with acoustic lining. Material shall be processed from Nitrile rubber foam.




The material should be fibre free. The density of the same shall be 140-180 Kg/m3. The material should have thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.05 W/Mk. The maximum surface temperature of material shall withstand is 1050C. and minimum temp shall be -200C. Thickness shall be as specified. The material should confirm to class 1 rating for surface spread of flame as per BS 476 Part 7. Thickness, if not specified, shall be considered as 20mm. Surface shall be cleaned and adhesive recommended by the manufacturer should be applied on the walls. The foam sheets should be cut to required size and a layer of adhesive should also be applied to it. When it is tack dry it is stuck to the walls / ceiling. Acoustic lining of walls shall be terminated approximately 15 cm above the finished floor to prevent damage to insulation due to accidental water-logging in plant/AHU rooms.

13.10 DUCT ACOUSTIC LINING

Insulation material for Duct Acoustic Lining shall be resin bonded fibre glass. The thermal conductivity of the fibre glass for air-conditioning application shall not exceed 0.034 K Cal/(hr-sq.m-deg C/meter) or 0.23 BTU/(hr.sq.ft.-deg F)/inch) at 32 deg C (90 deg F) mean temperature and density shall be not less than 48 kg/ m3. Thickness of the material shall be as specified for individual application as per schedule of quantity.

Ducts so identified and marked on drawings and included in Schedule of Quantities shall be

provided with acoustic lining of thermal insulation material for a distance of minimum 5 meters as

follows:

The inside surface for the ducts shall be covered with adhesive, and provided with 22 gauge GI

Channels 25 x 25 mm screwed back to back and fixed on the inside of duct, spaced not more than

60 cm center to form a frame work of 60 x 60 cms square. Cut panels 60 x 60 cms of resin

bonded fiber glass 25 mm thick shall be fitted in the squares.

These insulation panels shall be fixed to the sheet metal with cold setting adhesive compound. The inner most surface shall be covered with fiberglass tissue and 28 gage peforated aluminium sheet having atleast 15 percent perforations. The aluminium sheet shall be screwed to GI channels using cup washer and neatly finished to give true inside surface.

13.11 SOUND ATTENUATORS Attenuators shall be installed in ducts in accordance with requirements of drawings and as

included in Schedule of Quantities. Noise levels within conditioned spaces shall be not greater than those set out in schedule below :




a. Noise Level Design Criteria -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

S.No. Area Acceptable Noise Levels (NC) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

i. Meeting Rooms 25-30 ii. Staff Dining 40-45

iii. Public Circulation. 40-45

iv. Back-of-the-house areas 40-45 v. Offices 30-35 vi. Office Corridor 35-40 b. Attenuators shall be of steel construction with casings out of minimum 22 G galvanized

steel. Acoustic fill shall be inert, non-hygroscopic, vermin proof, fibre glass of required density adequately protected against corrosion and covered with 26 gage perforated aluminium sheet. Attenuators shall be supplied complete with flanges.

c. Acoustic performance of the attenuators (net insertion loss) shall meet or exceed the

values listed below :

OCTAVE BAND CENTRE FREQUENCY HZ 63 125 250 500 1K 2K 4K 8K Insertion loss dB 900 mm long attenuators 2 7 12 19 23 23 18 11 Insertion loss dB 1500 mm long attenuators 6 10 18 30 42 34 23 14

d. The pressure drop values of the silencers shall be indicated for each duty. e. Manufacturers shall submit a test certificate for acoustic and aerodynamic

performance of the attenuators. Attenuators shall be tested in accordance with ACMA test methods/BS 4718 and insertion loss and self generated noise for each octave




band and pressure drop shall be stated in the schedule.

13.13 MEASUREMENT OF INSULATION

Unless otherwise specified measurement for duct and pipe insulation for the project shall be on the basis of centre line measurements described herewith

a. Pipe Insulation shall be measured in units of length along the centre line of the installed

pipe, strictly on the same basis as the piping measurements described earlier. The linear measurements shall be taken before the application of the insulation. It may be noted that for piping measurement, all valves, orifice plates and strainers are not separately measurable by their number and size. It is to be clearly understood that for the insulation measurements, all these accessories including cladding, valves, orifice plates and strainers shall be considered strictly by linear measurements along the centre line of pipes and no special rate shall be applicable for insulation of any accessories, fixtures or fittings whatsoever.

b. Duct Insulation and Acoustic Lining shall be measured on the basis of surface area

along the centre line of insulation thickness. Thus the surface area of externally thermally insulated or acoustically lined be based on the perimeter comprising centre line (of thickness of insulation) width and depth of the cross section of insulated or lined duct, multiplied by the centre-line length including tapered pieces, bends, tees, branches, etc. as measured for bare ducting.

14. THERMAL HEAT RECOVERY WHEEL

14.1 SCOPE The scope of this section, comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of

Thermal Heat Recovery Wheel, conforming to these Specifications and in accordance with requirements of drawings and of the Schedule of Quantities.

14.2 TYPE The Thermal Heat Recovery Wheel shall be cabinet type construction, comprising of various

sections such as supply air, exhaust air and fresh air connections as shown on drawings and included in schedule of quantities.

14.3 CAPACITY The Heat Recovery capacities, maximum motor horse power shall be as shown on Drawings and

in Schedule of Quantities. 14.4 ACCESSORIES




a. Wheel : The wheel shall be made of alternate layer of corrugated and intervening flat

composite material of aluminium foil of uniform width to ensure smooth surface. The wheel medium should be bonded together to form rigid transfer medium forming a multitude of narrow channels ensuring laminar flow. The wheels shall be of proven design.

The wheel can be fully wound or on larger units, sectorised, i.e. assembled in segments. In

latter case the segments are assembled between rigid spokes thus ensuring structural longevity and allowing replacement of one or specific segments only.

The wheel shall be cleanable by spraying its face surface with compressed air, low

temperature steam or hot water or by vacuum cleaning without affecting its latent properties. The face velocity across the wheel should not exceed 700 fpm (3.5 m/s). The wheels shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE S4-78 method of testing air to air

heat exchangers. Development an manufacturers shall meet all quality assurance criteria specified in BSEN ISO 9001.

The minimum sensible and latent efficiencies should be 75%. A computerized selection

should be enclosed along with offer. b. Casing : The casing shall be constructed as a single skin, self-supporting, galvanized sheet

steel structure and include rotary wheel support beams and purging sector. The casing shall be supplied with access panels to facilitate inspection and service. Size 2150 mm and larger shall be in two sections to facilitate shipping and handling.

c. Seals : The casing shall be equipped with adjustable brush seals, which minimize the

carryover to max 0.05 – 0.2%. d. Hub and Spokes : Hub and Spokes on one piece rotor shall be Aluminium and on

sectorrized rotor Hub shall be made of steel, painted with ani corosion paint and galvanized sheet steel spokes.

e. Drive : The wheel shall be belt driven along its perimeter. A constant speed fractional

horsepower motor shall be used. The motor shall be mounted on a self-adjusting base to provide correct belt tension.

14.5 TESTING

The Thermal Wheel shall be tested in accordance with the parameters fixed as below.

i. Supply Air Capacity - DBT/WBT.

ii. Exhaust Air Capacity - DBT/WBT. iii. Fresh Air Capacity - DBT/WBT.




15. ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

15.1 SCOPE The scope of this section comprises of fabrication, supply, erection, testing and commissioning of

Motor Control Centre (MCC), wiring and earthing of all air-conditioning equipment, components and accessories.

15.2 GENERAL All motor control centres shall be suitable for operation on 3 Phase/single phase, 415/240

volts, 50 cycles, 4 wire system with neutral grounded at transformer. All MCCs shall be CPRI tested design and manufactured by a approved manufacturer. CPRI certificate shall be made available.

MCCs shall comply with the latest Relevant Indian Standards and Electricity Rules and Regulations and shall be as per IS-13947-1993. MCCs / starter panels for outdoor equipment shall be suitable for outdoor duty application.

15.3 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES

The Motor Control Centre (MCC) shall be of 2 mm thick sheet steel cabinet and suitable for indoor installation, dead front, floor mounting/wall mounting type and shall be form 3b construction. The Distribution panels shall be totally enclosed, completely dust and vermin proof and shall be with hinged doors and folded covers, Neoprene gasket, padlocking arrangement and bolted back. All removable/ hinged doors and covers shall be grounded by flexible standard connectors. MCC shall be suitable for the climatic conditions as specified in Special Conditions. Steel sheets used in the construction of panels shall be 2 mm thick and shall be folded and braced as necessary to provide a rigid support for all components. Joints of any kind in sheet metal shall be seam welded, all welding, slag shall be rounded off and welding pits wiped smooth with plumber metal. The general construction shall confirm to IS-8623-1977 (Part-1) for factory built assembled switchgear & control gear for voltage upto and including 1100 V AC. All MCCs/panels and covers shall be properly fitted and square with the frame, and holes in the panel correctly positioned. Fixing screws shall enter into holes tapped into an adequate thickness of metal or provided with wing nuts. Self threading screws shall not be used in the construction of Distribution panels. A base channel of 75 mm x 40 mm x 5 mm thick shall be provided at the bottom for floor mounted panels. Minimum operating clearance of 275 mm shall be provided between the floor of panels and the lowest operating height.

The MCC shall be of adequate size with a provision of spare feeders as per single line diagram. Feeders shall be arranged in multi-tier. Knockout holes of appropriate size and number shall be provided in the Motor Control Centre in conformity with the location of cable/conduit connections. Removable sheet steel plates shall be provided at the top to make holes for additional cable entry at site if required.




Every cabinet shall be provided with Trifoliate or engraved metal name plates. All panels shall be provided with circuit diagram mounted on inside of door shutter protected with Hylam sheet. All live accessible connections shall be shrouded and minimum clearance between phase and earth shall be 20 mm and phase to phase shall be 25 mm.

15.4 WIRING SYSTEM All L T power cabling between MCC and motors shall be carried out with 1100 volts grade XLPE

insulated, overall PVC sheathed aluminium conductor armoured cables above 16 sq.mm size,

where as all cables 16 sq.mm and below shall be of copper conductor. All copper cables shall be

with PVC insulated PVC outer sheathed armoured cable. Cables shall be sized by applying

proper derating factor. All control wiring shall be carried out by using PVC insulated copper

conductor wires in conduits. Minimum size of control wiring shall be 1.5 sq mm. Minimum

size of conductor for power wiring shall be 4 sq. mm 1100 volts grade PVC insulated copper

conductor wires in conduit.

15.5 CIRCUIT COMPARTMENT All components for each feeder shall be housed in a separate compartment and shall have steel

sheets on top and bottom of compartment. Sheet steel hinged lockable door shall be duly

interlocked with the breaker in the “ON” position. Safety interlocks shall be provided to prevent

the breaker from being drawn-out when the breaker is in „ON‟ position. The door shall not form an

integral part of the draw-out portion of the panel. Sheet steel barriers shall be provided

between the tiers in a vertical section.

All MCCs shall be provided with feeders of appropriate capacity as per Single Line Diagram. All MCCs shall be completely factory wired, ready for connection. All the terminals shall be of proper current rating and sized to suit individual feeder requirements. Each circuit shall be clearly numbered from left to right to correspond with wiring diagram. All the switches and circuits shall be distinctly marked with a small description of the service installed.

Continuous earth bus sized for prospective fault current shall be provided with arrangement for connecting to station earth at two points. Hinged doors/ frames shall be connected to earth through adequately sized flexible braids.

15.6 INSTRUMENT ACCOMMODATION Adequate space shall be provided for accommodating instruments, indicating lamps,

control contactors and control MCBs. These shall be accessible for testing and

maintenance without any danger of accidental contact with live parts of the circuit breaker and

bus bar ÒN‟ lamps shall be provided on all outgoing feeders.




15.7 BUS BAR CONNECTIONS

Bus bar and interconnections shall be of high conductivity electrolytic grade aluminium / copper as indicated in the bill of quantities complying with requirement of IS : 5082 – 1981 and of rectangular cross section suitable for carrying the rated full load current and short circuit current and shall be extendable on either side. Tinned Copper conductor shall be used for busbar of rating 1000A and above. Bus bars and interconnections shall be insulated with heat shrinkable sleeve of 1.1 KV grade and shall be colour coded. Bus bars shall be supported on glass fiber reinforced thermosetting plastic insulated supports at regular intervals to withstand the force arising from in case of short circuit in the system. All bus bars shall be provided in a separate chamber and all connections shall be done by bolting. Additional cross sectional area to be added to the bus bar to compensate for the holes. All connections between bus bars and breakers shall be through solid copper / aluminium strips of proper size to carry full rated current and insulated with insulating sleeves. Maximum current density for the busbars shall be 0.8 A/sq.mm for aluminium and 1.4 A/sq.mm for copper busbars. Maximum allowable temperature for the Bus bar to be restricted to 85 deg C

15.8 TEMPERATURE - RISE LIMIT

Unless otherwise specified, in the case of external surface of enclosures of bus bar compartment which shall be accessible but do not need to be touched during normal operation, an increase in the temperature rise limits of 25° C above ambient temperature shall be permissible for metal surface and of 15° C above ambient temperature for insulating surfaces as per IS 8623(Part-2) 1993.

15.9 CABLE COMPARTMENTS

Cable compartment of adequate size shall be provided in the panel for easy clamping of all incoming and outgoing cables entering from the top/bottom. Adequate supports shall be provided in cable compartment to support cables as per approved for construction shop drawing.

15.10 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS (ACB) The ACB shall conform to the requirements of IEC 60947-2 / IS 13947-2 and shall be type tested

& certified for compliance to standards from–CPRI, ERDA/ any accredited international lab. The circuit breaker shall be suitable for 415 V + 10%, 50 Hz supply system. Air Circuit Breakers shall be with moulded housing flush front, draw out type and shall be provided with a trip free manual operating mechanism or as indicated in drawings and bill of quantities with mechanical "ON" "OFF" “TRIP” indications.

The ACB shall be 3/ 4 pole with modular construction, draw out, manually or electrically operated version as specified. The circuit breakers shall be for continuous rating and service short Circuit Breaking capacity (Ics) shall be as specified on the single line diagram and should be equal to the




Ultimate breaking capacity(Icu) and short circuit withstand values(Icw) for 1 sec.

Circuit breakers shall be designed to „close' and `trip' without opening the circuit breaker compartment door. The operating handle and the mechanical trip push button shall be at the front of the breakers panel. Inspection of main contacts should be possible without using any tools. The ACB shall be provided with a door interlock. i.e. door should not be open when circuit breaker is closed and breaker should not be closed when door is open. All current carrying parts shall be silver plated and suitable arcing contacts with proper arc chutes shall be provided to protect the main contacts. The ACB shall have double insulation (Class-II) with moving and fixed contacts totally enclosed for enhanced safety and in accessibility to live parts. All electrical closing breaker shall be with electrical motor wound stored energy spring closing mechanism with mechanical indicator to provide ON/OFF status of the ACB. The auxiliary contacts blocks shall be so located as to be accessible from the front. The auxiliary contacts in the trip circuits shall close before the main contacts have closed. All other contacts shall close simultaneously with the main contacts. The auxiliary contacts in the trip circuits shall open after the main contacts open. Minimum 4 NO and 4 NC auxiliary contacts shall be provided on each breaker. Rated insulation voltage shall be 1000 volts AC.

15.10.1 CRADLE

The cradle shall be so designed and constructed as to permit smooth withdrawal and insertion of the breaker into it. The movements shall be free from jerks, easy to operate and shall be on steel balls/rollers and not on flat surfaces.

There shall be 4 distinct and separate position of the circuit breaker on the cradle.

Racking Interlock in Connected/Test/Disconnected Position.

Service Position : Main Isolating contacts and control contacts of the breaker are engaged.

Test Position : Main Isolating contacts are isolated but control contacts are still engaged.

Isolated Position : Both main isolating and control contacts are isolated. There shall be provision for locking the breaker in any or all of the first three positions.

The following safety features shall be incorporated :

f. Withdrawal or engagement of Circuit breaker shall not be possible unless it is in open

condition.




g. Operation of Circuit breaker shall not be possible unless it is fully in service, test or drawn

out position.

h. All modules shall be provided with safety shutters operated automatically by movement of the carriage to cover exposed live parts when the module is withdrawn.

i. All Switchgear module front covers shall have provision for locking.

j. Switchgear operating handles shall be provided with arrangement for locking in „OFF‟

position. 15.10.2 PROTECTIONS

The breaker should be equipped with micro-controller based , communicable type release with RS 485 port for communication to offer accurate and versatile protection with complete flexibility and shall offer complete over current protection to the electrical system in the following four zones :

Long time protection.

Short time protection with intentional delay.

Instantaneous protection.

Ground fault protection. The protection release shall generally have following features and settings however for exact requirement of protection releases, reference shall be made to SOQ:

a. True RMS Sensing

The release shall sample the current at the rate of 16 times per cycle to monitor the actual load current waveform flowing in the system and shall monitor the true RMS value of the load current. It shall take into account the effect of harmonics also.

b. Thermal Memory

When the breaker shall reclose after tripping on overload, then the thermal stresses caused by the overload if not dissipated completely, shall get stored in the memory of the release and this thermal memory shall ensure reduced tripping time in case of subsequent overloads. Realistic Hot/Cold curves shall take into account the integrated heating effects to offer closer protection to the system.

c. Defined time-current characteristics :

A variety of pick-up and time delay settings shall be available to define the current thresholds and the delays to be set independently for different protection zones thereby achieving a close-to-ideal protection curve.




d. Trip Indication

Individual fault indication for each type of fault should be provided by LEDs for faster fault diagnosis.

e. Self powered

The release shall draw its power from the main breaker CTs and shall require no external power supply for its operation.

f. Zone Selective Interlocking

The release shall be suitable for communication between breakers to enable zone selective interlocking. This feature shall be provided for both short circuit and ground fault protection zones to offer intelligent discrimination between breakers. This feature enables faster clearance of fault conditions, thereby reducing the thermal and dynamic stresses produced during fault conditions and thus minimises the damage to the system.To implement ZSI manufacturer should supply all related equipment like power supply, wiring etc.

On-Line change of settings should be possible. It should be possible to carry out testing of release without tripping the breaker.

g. The release shall meet the EMI / EMC requirements.

h. The setting range of release shall be generally as follows :

SETTING RANGE OF RELEASE

Type of Protection PICK-UP CURRENT

TIME DELAY

Long Time 0.4 to 1.0 times In (Ir) Steps : 0.4, 0.5, 0.55, 0.60, 0.65, 0.70, 0.75, 0.80, 0.85, 0.90, 0.95, 1.00. Operating Limit : 1.05 to 1.2 times Ir

0.5 to 30 sec at 6 Ir Steps 0.5,1, 2,4, 6, 8,12,18,24 and 30 secs Tolerance : Corresponding to ±10% of current.

Short Time 2 to 10 times Ir Steps : 2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 & 10 Tolerance : ±10%

20 ms to 600 ms Steps 20,60,100,160,200,260,300 400,500 and 600 ms




Tolerance : ±10% or 20ms whichever is higher

Instantaneous 2 to 12 times In Steps : 2,3,4,6,8,10,12 Tolerance : ±10%

Ground Fault 0.2 to 0.6 time In Steps : 0.2,0.3,0.4,0.5,0.6 Tolerance : ±10%

100 ms to 400 ms Steps : 100,200,300,400ms Tolerance : +10% or 20 ms whichever is higher.

All incomer ACBs shall have following additional protections other than mentioned above.

Under and over voltage

Under and over frequency

Load shedding and reconnection thru programmable contacts.

Release should display the Contact wear indication.

The release should provide local indication of actual %age loading at any instant. The release should be able to communicate on MODBUS RTU protocol using inbuilt RS485/232/Ethernet port and shall be integral part of supply with trip unit. Parameters of the Protection Release should be changeable from Release as well as thru communication network. Release should have graphical LCD for display of power parameters. The release of incoming breakers should provide comprehensive metering with the following parameters

Phase currents (running, avg & max) – All parameters in single window.

Release should be able to capture short circuit current on which ACB has tripped. The last ten trips and alarms shall be stored in memory with the date & time stamping along with type of fault and alarm. The sensing CT Should be Rogowsky type with measurement precision of 1%.

Release should be self powered .

Release should have facility to select different type of IDMTL protection(DT,SIT,VIT,EIT,HVF) for better co-ordination with HT Breaker/Fuse.

Phase voltages (running, avg & max)

Energy & power parameters (active, reactive and apparent)

PF

Frequency




Maximum Demand ( KVA & KW)

Total Harmonics distortion

All O/G ACBs shall have following functions.

Protection

The ACB control unit shall offer the following protection functions as standard: Long-time (LT) protection with an adjustable current setting and time delay;

Short-time (ST) protection with an adjustable pick-up and time delay; instantaneous (INST) protection with an adjustable pick-up and an OFF Position. Current and time delay setting shall be indicated in amperes and seconds respectively

On a digital display. Earth-fault protection with an adjustable pick-up and time delay shall be provided if indicated

on the appended single-line diagram. Measurements

An ammeter with a digital display shall indicate the true rms values of the currents for each

phase.Release shall acknowledge the current & time delay settings done by user on the LCD display.

A LED bargraph shall simultaneously display the load level on the three phases. A maximeter shall store in memory and display the maximum current value observed since

the last reset. The data shall continue to be stored and displayed even after opening of the circuit breaker.

15.10.3 SAFETY FEATURES

I. The safety shutter shall prevent inadvertent contact with isolating contacts when breaker is withdrawn from the Cradle.

II. It shall not be possible to interchange two circuit breakers of two different thermal ratings. For Draw-out breakers, an arrangement shall be provided to prevent rating mismatch between breaker and cradle.

III. There shall be provision of positive earth connection between fixed and moving portion of

the ACB either thru connector plug or sliding solid earth mechanism. Earthing bolts shall be provided on the cradle or body of fixed ACB.

IV. The incoming panel accommodating ACB shall be provided with indicating lamps for ON-OFF positions, digital voltmeter and ammeter of size not less than 96 mm x 96 mm, selector switches, MCB for protection circuit and measuring instrument circuits.

VI. It shall be possible to bolt the draw out frame not only in connected position but also in

TEST and DISCONNECTED position to prevent dislocation due to vibration and shocks.




X. Draw out breakers should not close unless in distinct Service/Test/Isolated positions.

XI. The insulation material used shall conform to Glow wire test as per IEC60695. XII. The ACB shall provide in built electrical and mechanical anti-pumping.

XIII. All EDO ACB`s Shall have Ready to Close Contact to ensure that the ACB gets a command only when it is ready to close for applications of Remote Control, AMF, Synchronization and Auto Source Change Over Systems.

15.11 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB)

The MCCB should be current limiting type with trip time of less than 10 msec under short circuit conditions. The MCCB should be either 3 or 4 poles as specified in BOQ. MCCB shall comply with the requirements of the relevant standards IS13947 – Part 2/IEC 60947-2 and should have test certificates for Breaking capacities from independent test authorities CPRI / ERDA or any accredited international lab.

MCCB shall comprise of Quick Make -break switching mechanism, arc extinguishing device and the tripping unit shall be contained in a compact, high strength, heat resistant, flame retardant, insulating moulded case with high withstand capability against thermal and mechanical stresses

The breaking capacity of MCCB shall be as specified in the schedule of quantities. The rated service breaking capacity (Ics) should be equal to rated ultimate breaking capacities (Icu).MCCBs for motor application should be selected in line with Type-2 Co-ordination as per IEC-60947-2, 1989/IS 13947-2.

15.11.1 CURRENT LIMITING & COORDINATION

The MCCB shall employ maintenance free minimum let-through energies and capable of achieving discrimination up to the full short circuit capacity of the downstream MCCB. The manufacturer shall provide both the discrimination tables and let-through energy curves for all.

Protection Functions

MCCBs with ratings up to 100 A shall be equipped with Thermal-magnetic (adjustable thermal for overload and fixed magnetic for short-circuit protection) trip units

Microprocessor MCCBs with ratings 100A and above shall be equipped with microprocessor based trip units.

Microprocessor and thermal-magnetic trip units shall be adjustable and it shall be possible to fit lead seals to prevent unauthorized access to the settings




Microprocessor trip units shall comply with appendix F of IEC 60947-2 standard (measurement of RMS current values, electromagnetic compatibility, etc.)

Protection settings shall apply to all poles of circuit breaker.

All Microprocessor components shall withstand temperatures up to 125 °C

15.11.2 TESTING a) Original test certificate of the MCCB as per IEC 60947-1 &2 or IS13947 shall be

furnished. c) Pre-commissioning tests on the switch board panel incorporating the MCCB shall

be done as per standard specifications. 15.11.3 INTERLOCKING Moulded, case circuit breakers shall be provided with the following interlocking devices for

interlocking the door of a switch board.

a) Handle interlock to prevent unnecessary manipulations of the breaker. b) Door interlock to prevent the door being opened when the breaker is in ON

position.

c) Defeat-interlocking device to open the door even if the breaker is in ON position.

The MCCB shall be current limiting type and comprise of quick make – Break switching mechanism. MCCBs shall be capable of defined variable overload adjustment. All MCCBs rated 100 Amps and above shall have adjustable over load & short circuit pick-up both in Thermal magnetic and Microprocessor Trip Units.

All MCCB with microprocessor based release unit, the protection shall be adjustable Overload, Short circuit and earth fault protection with time delay.

The trip command shall override all other commands.

15.12 MOTOR PROTECTION CIRCUIT BREAKER (MPCB)

Motor circuit breakers shall conform to the general recommendations of standard IEC 947 -1,2 and 4 (VDE 660, 0113 NF EN 60 947-1-2-4, BS 4752) and to standards UL 508 and CSA C22-2 N°14. The devices shall be in utilization category A, conforming to IEC 947-2 and AC3 conforming to IEC 947-4.MPCB shall have a rated operational and insulation voltage of 690V AC (50 Hz) and MPCB shall be suitable for isolation conforming to satandrd IEC 60947-2 and shall have a rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) of 6 kV. The motor circuit breakers shall be designed to be




mounted vertically or horizontally without derating. Power supply shall be from the top or from the bottom. In order to ensure maximum safety, the contacts shall be isolated from other functions such as the operating mechanism, casing, releases, auxiliaries, etc, by high performance thermoplastic chambers. The operating mechanism of the motor circuit breakers must have snap action opening and closing with free tripping of the control devices. All the poles shall close, open, and trip simultaneously. The motor circuit breakers shall accept a padlocking device in the “isolated” position. The motor circuit breakers shall be equipped with a “PUSH TO TRIP” device on the front enabling the correct operation of the mechanism and poles opening to be checked. The auxiliary contacts shall be front or side mounting, and both arrangements shall be possible. The front-mounting attachments shall not change the breaker surface area. Depending on its mounting direction the single pole contact block could be NO or NC. All the electrical auxiliaries and accessories shall be equipped with terminal blocks and shall be plug-in type. The motor circuit breakers shall have a combination with the downstream contactor enabling the provision of a perfectly co-ordinated motor-starter. This combination shall enable type 2 co-ordination of the protective devices conforming to IEC 60947-4-1.Type 2 co-ordination shall be guaranteed by tables tested and certified by an official laboratory: LOVAG (or other official laboratory).The motor circuit breakers, depending on the type, could be equipped with a door-mounted operator which shall allow the device setting. The motor circuit breakers shall be equipped with releases comprising a thermal element assuring overload protection and a magnetic element for short-circuit protection. In order to ensure safety and avoid unwanted tripping, the magnetic trip threshold (fixed) shall be factory set to an average value of 12 Ir. All the elements of the motor circuit breakers shall be designated to enable operation at an ambient temperature of 60°C without derating. The thermal trips shall be adjustable on the front by a rotary selector. The adjustment of the protection shall be simultaneous for all poles. Phase unbalance and phase loss detection shall be available. Temperature compensation (-20°C to +60°C)

15.13 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCB)

Miniature Circuit Breaker shall comply with IS-8828-1996/IEC898-1995. Miniature circuit breakers shall be quick make and break type for 240/415 VAC 50 Hz application with magnetic thermal release for over current and short circuit protection. The breaking capacity shall not be less than 10 KA at 415 VAC. MCBs shall be DIN mounted. The MCB shall be Current Limiting type (Class-3). MCBs shall be classified (B,C,D ref IS standard) as per their Tripping Characteristic curves defined by the manufacturer. The MCB shall have the minimum power loss (Watts) per pole defined as per the IS/IEC and the manufacturer shall publish the values.MCB shall ensure complete electrical isolation & downstream circuit or equipment when the MCB is switched OFF. The housing shall be heat resistant and having a high impact strength. The terminals shall be protected against finger contact to IP20 Degree of protection. All DP, TP, TPN and 4 Pole miniature circuit breakers shall have a common trip bar independent to the external operating handle.




15.14 PAINTING

All sheet steel work shall undergo a process of degreasing, pickling in acid, cold rinsing, phosphating, passivaiting (seven tank processing) and then painted with electrostatic paint (Powder coating). The shade of colour of panel inside/outside shall be as per relevant BIS code.

15.15 LABELS

Engraved PVC labels shall be provided on all incoming and outgoing feeder. Circuit diagram showing the arrangements of the circuit inside the control panel shall be pasted on inside of the panel door and covered with transparent plastic sheet.

15.16 METERS

i. All voltmeters and indicating lamps shall be through MCB‟s. ii. Meters and indicating instruments shall be plug type. iii. All CT‟s connection for meters shall be through Test Terminal Block (TTB). iv. CT ratio and burdens shall be as specified on the Single line diagram.

15.17 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Current transformers shall be provided for Control panels carrying current in excess of 60 amps. All phase shall be provided with current transformers of suitable VA burden with 5 amps secondaries for operation of associated metering. The CTs shall confirm to relevant Indian Standards. The design and construction shall be dry type, epoxy resin cast/ Flame Retardent resin filled Nylon type robust to withstand thermal and dynamic stresses during short circuits. Metering CTs, shall have inbuilt busbar mounting arrangement. Secondary terminals of CTs shall be brought out suitable to a terminal block which shall be easily accessible for testing and terminal connections. The secondary terminal should be covered with insulation cap/cover so that there should not be any possibility of touching the live terminal. The protection CTs shall be of accuracy class 5P10 and measurement CTs shall be of accuracy class I.

15.18 SELECTOR SWITCH Where called for, selector switches of rated capacity shall be provided in

control panels, to give the choice of operating equipment in selective mode. 15.19 STARTERS Each motor shall be provided with a starter of suitable rating. Starters shall be in accordance

with relevant IS Codes. All Star Delta Starters shall be fully automatic. Motors up to 10HP shall be provided by Direct On Line (DOL) starter, motors above 10 HP and up to 45 HP shall be




provided by star/delta starter and motors above 45 HP shall be provided by soft starter. All starters shall be with Type II coordination for breaker, contactor and over load relay.

15.20 CONTACTOR

Contactor shall be built into a high strength thermoplastic body and shall be provided with an arc shield for quick arc extinguishing. Silver alloy tips shall be provided to ensure a high degree of reliability and endurance under continuous operation. The magnet system shall consist of laminated yoke and armature to ensure clean operation without hum or chatter.

Starters contactors shall have 3 main and 2 Nos. NO / NC auxiliary contacts and shall be air

break type suitable for making and breaking contact at minimum power factor of 0.35. For design

consideration of contactors the starting current of connected motor shall be assumed to be 6

times the full load current of the motor in case of direct-on-line starters and 3 times the full load

current of the motor in case of Star Delta and Reduced Voltage Starters. The insulation for

contactor coils shall be of Class “E”.

Coil shall be tape wound vacuum impregnated and shall be housed in a thermostatic bobbin,

suitable for tropical conditions and shall withstand voltage fluctuations. Coil shall be suitable for

220/415±10% volts AC, 50 cycles AC supply.

15.21 THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY

Thermal over load relay shall have built in phase failure sensitive tripping mechanism to prevent against single phasing as well as on overloading. The relay shall operate on the differential system of protection to safeguard against three phase overload, single phasing and unbalanced voltage conditions.

Auto-manual conversion facility shall be provided to convert from auto-reset mode to manual-reset mode and vice-versa at site. Ambient temperature compensation shall be provided for variation in ambient temperature from -5° C to +55°C.

All overload relays shall be of three element, positive acting ambient temperature compensated time lagged thermal over load relays with adjustable setting. Relays shall be directly connected for motors upto 35 HP capacity. C.T. operated relays shall be provided for motors above 35 HP capacity. Heater circuit contactors may not be provided with overload relays.

15.22 TIME DELAY RELAYS Time delay relays shall be adjustable type with time delay adjustment from 0-180 seconds and

shall have one set of auxiliary contacts for indicating lamp connection.




15.23 INDICATING LAMP AND METERING All meters and indicating lamps shall be in accordance with relevant IS standard specification.

The meters shall be flush mounted type. The indicating lamp shall be of LED type . Each MCC and control panel shall be provided with voltmeter 0-500 volts with three way and off selector switch, CT operated ammeter of suitable range with three nos. CTS of suitable ratio with three way and off selector switch, phase indicating lamps, and other indicating lamps as called for. Each phase indicating lamp shall be backed up with 5 amps fuse. Other indicating lamps shall be backed up with fuses as called for in Schedule of Quantities.

15.24 TOGGLE SWITCH Toggle switches, where called for in Schedule of Quantities, shall be in conformity with relevant

IS Codes and shall be of 5 amps rating. 15.25 PUSH BUTTON STATIONS

Push button stations shall be provided for manual starting and stopping of motors / equipment Green and Red colour push buttons shall be provided for „Starting‟ and „Stopping‟ operations. „Start‟ or „Stop‟ indicating flaps shall be provided for push buttons. Push Buttons shall be suitable for panel mounting and accessible from front without opening door, Lock lever shall be provided for „Stop‟ push buttons. The push button contacts shall be suitable for 6 amps current capacity. Local push buttons shall be provided for remote equipments as mentioned in the SOQ.

15.26 CONDUITS

Conduits and Accessories shall conform to latest edition of Indian Standards IS-9537 part 1 & 2. 16/14 (16 gauge upto 32mm diameter & 14 gauge above 32 mm diameter) gauge screwed GI or MS conduits as specified on schedule of quantities shall be used. Joints between conduits and accessories shall be securely made by standard accessories, as per IS-2667, IS-3837 and IS-5133 to ensure earth continuity. All conduit accessories shall be threaded type only. Only approved make of conduits and accessories shall be used. Conduits shall be delivered to the site of construction in original bundles and each length of conduit shall bear the label of the manufacturer. Note. : Whatever materials required to be billed by the Contractor should come on site with proper Challan Numbers and quantity mentioned in each such Challan.. Maximum permissible number of 1100 volt grade PVC insulated wires that may be drawn into metallic Conduits are given below :







1.5 5 10 14 -- -- 2.5 5 8 12 -- -- 4 3 7 10 -- -- 6 2 5 8 -- --

10 -- 3 5 6 -- 16 -- 2 3 6 6 25 -- -- 2 4 6 35 -- -- -- 3 5

Maximum permissible number of 1100 volt grade PVC insulated wires that may be drawn into rigid non metallic or PVC Conduits are given below :




1.5 7 12 16 -- -- 2.5 5 10 14 -- -- 4 4 8 12 -- -- 6 3 6 8 -- --

10 -- 4 5 6 -- 16 -- 3 3 6 6 25 -- -- 2 4 6 35 -- -- -- 3 5

15.27 LOW VOLTAGE 1.1 KV GRADE XLPE / PVC CABLES 15.27.1 General

The LV cables shall be supplied, inspected, laid, tested and commissioned in accordance with drawings, Specifications, relevant Standard Specifications and cable manufacturer's instruction. 15.27.1.1 Material

The LV cables 25 sq. mm & above shall be cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated PVC inner sheathed and FRLS PVC outer sheath of 1100 volts grade. Cables below 25 sq.mm shall be with copper conductor , Copper conductor cables shall be with HR PVC core insulation.

15.27.1.2 Specifications of HR PVC insulated copper cable shall be as follows:

a Conductor




Stranded compacted circular conductor shall be of electrical grade high

conductivity copper below 25 sq.mm as per IS 8130 / 84 b. Insulation The insulation shall be HR PVC, application shall be by extrusion process

insulation confirming to IS 5831-1984. The thickness of insulation will be as per the relevant codes.

c. Laying-up Insulated conductors of multi core cables shall be with thermoplastic fillers in the

interstices. The phase identification of cores shall be by coloured strips. d. Inner Sheath Cores shall be surrounded either by a wrapped or an extruded PVC sheath. The thickness of the inner – sheath shall be as per relevant codes.

e. Armouring The armouring shall be provided over the inner sheath. Single core cable shall have dia -magnetic armouring. Multi core cables shall

have either galvanized round steel wires or flat steel strip armouring. Steel wires and strips for armouring confirm to IS:3975. The direction of lay of armouring shall be opposite to that of cores.

f. Outer Sheath Single and multi core cables are provided with an extruded FRLS grade PVC

outer-sheath. The thickness of the sheath shall be as per IS:1554-1988. The PVC compound for the outer-sheath shall confirm to Type ST1 of IS 5831. The colour of the outer sheath shall be black with marking at every meter.




15.27.1.3 Specifications for XLPE aluminium / copper cable shall be as follows:

a Conductor Stranded compacted circular conductor shall be of electrical grade high

conductivity aluminium up to 25 sq.mm and below 25 sq.mm shall be copper conductor per IS 8130/84

b. Insulation The insulation shall be of natural unfilled chemically cross linked polyethylene

conforming to IS 7098. The thickness of insulation shall be as per the relevant codes.

c. Laying-up Insulated conductors of multi core cables shall be with plastic fibre in the

interstices. The phase identification of cores shall be by coloured strips. d. Inner Sheath The cores shall be surrounded by either a wrapped or by an extruded PVC

sheath. The thickness of the inner sheath shall be as indicated in the relevant codes. e. Armouring The armouring shall be provided over the inner sheath. Single core cable shall have non-magnetic armouring. Multi core cables shall

have either galvanized round steel wires or flat steel strip. Steel wires and strips for armouring confirm to IS:3975. The direction of lay of armouring shall be opposite to that of cores.

f. Outer Sheath Single and multi core cables are provided with an extruded FRLS grade PVC

outer-sheath. The thickness of the sheath shall be as per IS:1554-1988. The PVC compound for the outer-sheath shall confirm to Type ST2 of IS 5831. The colour of the outer sheath shall be black with marking at every meter.

15.27.1.4 Current ratings of the cables shall be as per IS : 3961. The Conductor shall be

stranded Aluminum/Copper circular/ sector shaped and compacted. In multi




core cables the core shall be identified by red, yellow, blue and black coloring of insulation .

Repaired cables shall not be used. 15.27.1.5 The cables shall be suitable for laying in racks, ducts, trenches, conduits and

underground buried installation with uncontrolled back fill and chances of flooding by water.

15.27.1.6 Progressive automatic in line sequential marking of the length of cables in

meters at every one meter shall be provided on the outer sheath of all cables. 15.27.1.7 Cables shall be supplied in non returnable wooden drums as per IS : 10415. Both ends of the cables shall be properly sealed with PVC/Rubber caps so

as to eliminate ingress of water during transportation, storage and erection. 15.27.1.8 The product should be coded as per IS :- 7098 Part-I as follows :- Aluminum Conductor A XLPE Insulation 2X Steel round wire armour W Steel strip armour F Steel Double round wire armour WW Steel Double strip armour FF Non-magnetic (Al.) round wire armour Wa Non-magnetic (Al.) strip armour Fa PVC insulation Y 15.27.1.9 Inspection

All cables shall be inspected by the contractor upon receipt at site and checked for any damage during transit.

15.27.1.10 Cable End Terminations

Cable end termination shall be done in cable terminal box using crimping sockets and proper size of glands of double compression type.

15.28 CABLE LAYING

Cables shall be laid by skilled and experienced workmen using adequate rollers to minimize stretching of the cable. The cable drums shall be placed on jacks before unwinding the cable. Great care shall be exercised in laying cables to avoid forming kinks.




15.28.1 LAYING OF CABLES ON CABLE TRAYS

The relative position of the cables, laid on the cable tray shall be preserved and the cables shall not cross each other. At all changes in direction in horizontal and vertical planes, the cable shall be bent smooth with a radius as recommended by the manufacturer‟s. All cables shall be laid with minimum one diameter gap and shall be clamped at every metre to the cable tray. Cables shall be tagged for identification with aluminum tag and clamped properly at every 20M. Tags shall be provided at both ends and all changes in directions both sides of wall and floor crossings. All cable shall be identified by embossing on the tag the size of the cable, place of origin and termination.

All cables passing through holes in floor or walls shall be sealed with fire retardant Sealant and shall be painted with fire retardant paint upto one meter on all joints, terminations and both sides of the wall crossings by “VIPER CABLE RETARD”.

15.28.2 LAYING OF CABLES IN GROUND

The width of trench for laying single cable shall be minimum 350 mm. Where more than one cable is to be laid in horizontal formation, the width of the trench shall be workout by providing “Diameter” gap between the cables, except where otherwise specified. There shall be clearance of 150 mm between the end cable and the side wall of the trench. The minimum depth of the cable trench shall not be less than 750 mm for single layer of cables. When the cables are laid in more than one tier the depth of the trench shall be increased by 300 mm for each additional tier.

Excavation of trenches : The trenches shall be excavated in reasonably straight lines. Wherever there is a change in direction, suitable curvature shall be provided. Where gradients and changes in depth are unavoidable, these shall be gradual. The excavated soil shall be stacked firmly by the side of the trench such that it may not fall back into the trench. The bottom of the trench shall be levelled and shall be made free from stone, brick bats etc. The trench shall then be provided with a layer of clean, dry sand cushion of not less than 100 mm in depth. Prior to laying of cables, the cores shall be tested for continuity and insulation resistance. The cable drum shall be properly mounted on jacks, at a suitable location, making sure that the spindle, jack etc. are strong enough to carry the weight of the drum and the spindle is horizontal. Cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench steadily and uniformly without jerks and strains. The entire drum length shall be laid in one stretch. However, where this is not possible the remainder of the cable shall be removed by `Flaking‟ i.e. by making one long loop in the reverse direction. After the cable has been uncoiled and laid into the trench over the rollers, the cable shall be lifted off the rollers beginning from one end by helpers standing about 10 meters apart and laid in a reasonably straight line. Cable laid in trenches in a single tier formation shall have a cover of clean, dry sand of not less than 150 mm. above the base cushion of sand




before the protective cover is laid. In the case of vertical multi-tier formation after the first cable has been laid, a sand cushion of 300 mm shall be provided over the initial bed before the second tier is laid. Finally the cables shall be protected by second class bricks before back filling the trench. The buried depth of uppermost layer of cable shall not be less than 750mm.

Back Filling : The trenches shall be back filled with excavated earth free from stones or other sharp edged debris and shall be rammed and watered, if necessary, in successive layers not exceeding 300 mm. Unless otherwise specified, a crown of earth not less than 50 mm in the centre and tapering towards the sides of the trench shall be left to allow for subsidence.

15.29 WIRE AND WIRE SIZES

1100 volts grade PVC insulted copper conductor wires in conduit shall be used. For all single phase/ 3 phase wiring, 1100 volts grade PVC insulated copper conductor ZHFR

wires shall be used. The equipment inside plant room and AHU room shall be connected to the control panel by means of insulated copper conductor wires of adequate size in exposed conduits. Final connections to the equipment shall be through wiring enclosed in galvanized flexible conduits rigidly clamped at both ends and at regular intervals. An isolator shall be provided near each motor/equipment wherever the motor/equipment is separated from the supply panel through a partition barrier or through ceiling construction. PVC insulated copper conductor wires shall be used inside the control panel for connecting different components and all the wires inside the control panel shall be neatly dressed and plastic beads shall be provided at both the ends for easy identification of control wiring.

The minimum size of control wiring shall be 1.5 sq. mm PVC insulated stranded soft drawn

copper conductor wires drawn through conduit to be provided for connecting equipment and control panels.

Power wiring, cabling shall be of the following sizes:

i. Upto 5 HP motors/ 5 KW heaters 3 x 4 sq. mm copper conductor wires.

ii. From 6 HP to 10 HP motors 6 KW to 7.5 KW heaters

3 x 6 sq. mm copper conductor wires.

iii. From 12.5 HP to 15 HP motors 2 Nos. 3 x 6 sq. mm copper conductor wires

iv.

From 20 HP to 25 HP motors 2 Nos. 3 x 10 sq. mm copper conductor wires




v. From 30 HP to 35 HP motors 2 nos. 3 x 16 sq. mm aluminium conductor armoured cable.

vi From 40 HP to 50 HP motors 2 Nos. 3 x 25 sq. mm. aluminium conductor armoured cable.

vii From 60 HP to 75 HP motors 1 No. 3 x 70 sq. mm aluminium conductor armoured cable.

viii 100 HP motors 1 No. 3 x 150 sq. mm aluminium conductor armoured cable.

ix. 150 HP motors 1 No. 3 x 240 sq. mm aluminium conductor armoured cable.

x. 250 HP motors 2 Nos. 3 x 240 sq. mm aluminium conductor armoured cable.

xi. 400 HP motors 3 Nos. 3 x 240 sq. mm aluminium conductor armoured cable.

xii. 600 HP motors 3 Nos. 3 x 400 sq. mm aluminium conductor armoured cable.

All the switches, contactors, push button stations, indicating lamps shall be distinctly marked

with a small description of the service installed. The following capacity contactors and

overload relays shall be provided for different capacity motors or as per manufacturer‟s

recommendation.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TYPE OF CONTACTOR OVERLOAD STARTER CURRENT RELAY CAPACITY RANGE ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5 HP Motors D O L 16 amps 6-10 amps 7.5 HP motors D O L 16 amps 9-15 amps 10 HP Motors D O L 25 amps 9-15 amps 12.5 HP Motors Automatic Star Delta 16 amps 9-15 amps 15 HP Motors Automatic Star Delta 25 amps 9-15 amps 20 HP Motors Automatic Star Delta 32 amps 14-23 amps 25 HP Motors Automatic Star Delta 32 amps 14-23 amps 30 HP Motors Automatic Star Delta 40 amps 20-33 amps 35 HP Motors Automatic Star Delta 40 amps 20-33 amps 40 HP Motors Automatic Star Delta 40 amps 30-50 amps 50 HP Motors VFD 70 amps 30-50 amps




60 HP Motors VFD 110 amps 30-50 amps 75 HP Motors VFD 110 amps 90-150 amps 100 HP Motors VFD 200 amps CT operated relay 125 HP Motors VFD 200 amps CT operated relay 150 HP Motors VFD 200 amps CT operated relay 150 HP Motors VFD 300 amps CT operated Relay. 200 HP Motors VFD 300 amps CT operated Relay. 250 HP Motors VFD 400 amps CT operated Relay. 300 HP Motors VFD 400 amps CT operated Relay. 400 HP Motors VFD 600 amps CT operated Relay. 600 HP Motors VFD 900 amps CT operated Relay. Two speed motors when specified, shall be provided with DOL starter irrespective of it rating. 15.30 CABLE TRAYS

Ladder and perforated type Cable Trays shall be of Hot dip Galvanized type and factory fabricated

out of CRCA sheet with standard accessories like tee, bends, couplers etc. for different loads and

number and size of cables as given below :

Cable trays shall be galvanized as per Specifications..

a. 1500 mm wide

Runners 25 x 100 x 25 x 3 mm Rungs 2# 20 x 40 x 20 x 3 mm 250 mm C/C Suspenders 2 Nos. 40 x 40 x 5 mm GI angle 1500 mm C/C with base support of 40x 40 x

5mm GI angle. b. 1200 mm wide Runners 25 x 100 x 25 x 3 mm Rungs 2# 20 x 40 x 20 x 3 mm 250 mm C/C Suspenders 2 Nos. 40 x 40 x 5 mm GI angle 1500 mm C/C with base support of 40x 40 x

5mm GI angle.

c. 1000 mm wide Runners 25 x 100 x 25 x 3 mm Rungs 2# 20 x 40 x 20 x 3 mm 250 mm C/C Suspenders 2 Nos. 40 x 40 x 5 mm GI angle 1500 mm C/C with base support of 40x 40 x 5mm GI angle.

d. 750 mm wide





Rungs 20 x 30 x 20 x 2.5 mm 250 mm C/C Suspenders 2 Nos. 32 x 32 x 5 mm GI angle 1800 mm C/C with base support of 40x 40 x 5mm GI angle.

e. 600 mm wide

Runners 20 x 75 x 20 x 2.5 mm Rungs 20 x 30 x 20 x 2.5 mm 250 mm C/C Suspenders 2 Nos. 32 x 32 x 5 mm GI angle 1800 mm C/C with base support of 40x 40 x

5mm GI angle.

f. 450 mm wide Runners 20 x 75 x 20 x 2.5 mm

Rungs 20 x 30 x 20 x 2.5 mm 250 mm C/C Suspenders 2 Nos. 25 x 25 x 4 mm GI angle 1800 mm C/C with base support of 40x 40 x 5mm GI angle.

g. Supply and fixing of perforated type cable trays of the following sizes of pre-galvanized iron.

i. 600 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick i. 450 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick i. 300 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick ii. 150 x 40 x 40 x 2 mm thick

Note : Suitable length of 10 mm dia GI rod suspenders at 1800 mm interval shall be included in the item for perforated type cable tray.

15.31 SPECIFICATION FOR HOT DIP GALVANIZING PROCESS

(for Mild Steel Used For Earthing, Cable Trays Or Junction Boxes For Electrical Installation.)

General Requirements I. Quality of Zinc

Zinc to be used shall conform to minimum Zn 98 grade as per requirement of IS:209-

1992. II. Coating Requirement Minimum weight of zinc coating for mild steel flats with thickness upto 6 mm in

accordance with IS:6745-1972 shall be 400 g/sqm. The weight of coating expressed in grams per square metre shall be calculated by




dividing the total weight of Zinc by total area (both sides) of the coated surface. The Zinc coating shall be uniform, smooth and free from imperfections as flux, ash and

dross inclusions, bare patches black spots, pimples, lumpiness, runs, rust stains bulky white deposits, blisters.

Mild steel flats / wires shall undergo a process of degreasing pickling in acid, cold rinsing

and then galvanizing. 15.32 FIRE RETARDANT CABLE PAINT & FIRE BARRIER The fire retardant paint / barrier shall be listed by independent test agencies such as UL, FM or

OPL and be tested to, and pass the criteria of ASTM E 814 ( UL1479) standard test method for fire test through- penetration fire stops and ASTM E 1996 ( UL 2079) standard test method for fire resistive joint system/

15.32.1 Fire Barrier Sheet For Floor And Wall Sealing The framing & fixing part of fire barrier sheet shall be very simple & directly fixed around walls &

floors by help of anchored bolts & washer. For 2 hour fire rating the fire barrier sheet shall be minimum 7.62 mm thick and shall be cut as per the profile of penetration and opening. The small gap left around the penetration shall be closed with fire rated soft & mouldable putty. Fire barrier must be design on the intumescent technology to seal larger penetration through the fire rated walls & floors.Fire barrier must be a composite construction with the quality incorporated with organic/ inorganic fire resistive elastomeric sheet with specific gravity of 1.6 gm/ cubic centimeter.

15.33 TESTING OF CABLES

Cables shall be tested at works for all routine tests as per IS including the following tests before being dispatched to site by the project team.

e) Insulation Resistance Test. f) Continuity resistance test. g) Sheathing continuity test. h) Earth test.(in armoured cables) i) Hi Pot Test.

Test shall also be conducted at site for insulation between phases and between phase and earth for each length of cable, before and after jointing. On completion of cable laying work, the following tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Owner‟s site representative.

d) Insulation Resistance Test( Sectional and overall) b) Continuity resistance test. c) Sheathing continuity test.




d) Earth test.

All tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant Standard Code of Practice and Electricity Rules. The Contractor shall provide necessary instruments, equipment and labour for conducting the above tests and shall bear all expenses in connection with such tests. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Owner‟s site representative, results will be noted and signed by all present and record be maintained.

15.34 EARTHING Earthing shall be provided in accordance with IS : 3043 – 1987 and shall be copper strips

/wires .The main panel shall be connected to main earthing system of the power supply. All single phase metal clad switches and control panels be earthed with minimum 3 mm diameter copper conductor wire. All 3 phase motors and equipment shall be earthed with 2 numbers distinct and independent copper wires / tapes as follows:

i. Motor upto and including 2 Nos. 3 mm dia copper 10 HP rating. wires. ii. Motor 12.5 HP to 40 HP 2 Nos. 4 mm dia copper capacity. wires. iii. Motor 50 to 75 HP capacity. 2 Nos. 6 mm dia copper iv. Motor above 75 HP. 2 Nos. 25 mm x 3 mm

copper tapes.

All switches shall be earthed with two numbers distinct and independent copper wires‟ tapes as

follows:

i. 3 phase switches 2 Nos. 3 mm dia copper wires and control panels upto 60 amps rating. ii. 3 phase switches, and 2 Nos.25mm x 6 mm GI control panels 63 amps to 100 amps rating. iii. 3 phase switches and control 2 Nos. 40mm X 6 mm dia GI. panels 125 amps to 200 amps rating. iv. 3 phase switches, control 2 Nos. 50 mm x 6 mm GI panels, bus ducts, above 200 amps rating.




The earthing connections shall be tapped off from the main earthing of electrical installation. The

overlapping in earthing strips at joints where required shall be minimum 75 mm. These straight

joints shall be riveted with brass rivets & brazed in approved manner. Sweated lugs of

adequate capacity and size shall be used for all termination of wires. Lugs shall be bolted to the

equipment body to be earthed after the metal body is cleaned of paint and other oily substance,

and properly tinned.

15.35 DRAWINGS Shop drawings for control panels and for wiring of equipment showing the route of conduit

& cable shall be submitted by the contractor for approval of Architect/Consultant before starting the fabrication of panel and starting the work. On completion, four sets of complete “As-installed” drawings incorporating all details like, conduits routes, number of wires in conduit, location of panels, switches, junction/pull boxes and cables route etc. shall be furnished by the Contractor.

15.36 TESTING Before commissioning of the equipment, the entire electrical installation shall be tested in

accordance with relevant BIS codes and test report furnished by a qualified and authorised person. The entire electrical installation shall be gotten approved by Electrical Inspector and a certificate from Electrical Inspector shall be submitted. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of Owner‟s site representative. Testing of the panels shall be as per relevant BIS Codes

15.37 PAINTING All sheet steel work shall undergo a process of degreasing, thorough cleaning, and painting

with a high corrosion resistant primer. All panels shall then be baked in an oven. The finishing treatment shall be by application of powder coating of approved shade.

15.38 MEASUREMENT OF ELECTRICAL CONTROL PANELS Panels shall be counted as number of units. Quoted rates shall include as lumpsum (NOT

measurable lengths) for all internal wiring, power wiring and earthing connections from the control panel to the starter and to the motor, control wiring for interlocking, power and control wiring for automatic and safety controls, and control wiring for remote start/stop as well as indication as per the specifications. The quoted rate of panel shall also include all accessories, switchgear, contactors, indicating meters and lights as per the Specifications and Schedule of Quantities.

15.39 RUBBER MAT Rubber mat shall be provided in front to cover the full length of all panels. Where back space is

provided for working from the rear of the panel, rubber mat shall also be provided at the back of the panel also to cover the full length of panel. Rubber mats provided shall be as per IS 15052




15.40 MODE OF MEASUREMENT

Unless otherwise specified measurement for cable, cable tray and support shall be on the basis of centralized measurement described herewith. Cable and cable tray shall be measured in units of length along the centre line of the installed tray/cable including all fittings, support etc whichever required for completion of installation.

16. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES FOR HVAC SYSTEMS

16.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 This specification covers complete variable frequency drives (VFDs) designated on the

drawing schedules to be variable speed. All standard and optional features shall be included within the VFD.

1.2 The frequency converter shall not be a general purpose product, but a dedicated HVAC

engineered product.

1.3 The VFD and its options shall be factory mounted and tested as a single unit under full load before dispatch.

1.4 The VFD shall be tested to UL 508C. The appropriate UL label shall be applied.

1.5 The VFD shall be CE marked and conform to the European Union Electro Magnetic

Compatibility directive.

1.6 The VFD shall be UL listed for a short circuit current rating of 100 kA and labeled with this rating.

16.2 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1 The VFD shall convert incoming fixed frequency three-phase AC power into an adjustable

frequency and voltage for controlling the speed of three-phase AC motors. The motor current shall closely approximate a sine wave. Motor voltage shall be varied with frequency to maintain desired motor magnetization current suitable for the driven load and to eliminate the need for motor derating.

When properly sized, the VFD shall allow the motor to produce full rated power at rated motor voltage, current, and speed without using the motor's service factor. VFDs utilizing sine weighted/coded modulation (with or without 3rd harmonic injection) must provide data verifying that the motors will not draw more than full load current during full load and full speed operation.




2.2 VFD shall be installed within panel, suitable for operating conditions.

2.3 The VFD shall include an input full-wave bridge rectifier and maintain a fundamental (displacement) power factor near unity regardless of speed or load.

2.4 The VFD shall have a dual 5% impedance DC link reactor (harmonic filters) on the

positive and negative rails of the DC bus to minimize power line harmonics &protect the VFD from power line transients, alongwith advance harmonics filters at integral component of VFD to maintain TH id < 5% at drive terminals to meet IEEE 519, 1992 guidelines.

2.5 VFDs with saturating (non-linear) DC link reactors shall require an additional 3% AC line

reactor to provide acceptable harmonic performance at full load, where harmonic performance is most critical.

IEEE519, 1992 recommendations shall be used for the basis of calculation of total harmonic distortion (THD) at the point of common coupling (PCC). On request VFD manufacturer shall provide THD figures for the total connected load. The contractor shall provide details of supply transformer rating, impedance, short circuit current, short circuit impedance etc to allow this calculation to be made.

2.6 All VFDs shall contain integral EMC Filters to attenuate Radio Frequency Interference

conducted to the AC power line. The VFDs shall comply with the emission and immunity requirements of IEC 61800-3 : 2004, Category C1 with 50m motor cable (unrestricted distribution). The suppliers of VFDs shall include additional EMC filters if required to meet compliance to this requirement.

2.7 The VFD‟s full load output current rating shall meet or exceed the normal rated currents of

standard IEC induction motors. The VFD shall be able to provide full rated output current continuously, 110% of rated current for 60 seconds and 120% of rated torque for up to 0.5 second while starting.

2.8 The VFD shall provide full motor torque at any selected frequency from 20 Hz to base

speed while providing a variable torque V/Hz output at reduced speed. This is to allow driving direct drive fans without high speed derating or low speed excessive magnetization, as would occur if a constant torque V/Hz curve was used at reduced speeds. Breakaway current of 160% shall be available.

2.9 A programmable automatic energy optimization selection feature shall be provided as

standard in the VFD. This feature shall automatically and continuously monitor the motor‟s speed and load to adjust the applied voltage to maximize energy savings.

2.10 The VFD must be able to produce full torque at low speed to operate direct driven fans.

2.11 Output power circuit switching shall be able to be accomplished without interlocks or




damage to the VFD.

2.12 An Automatic Motor Adaptation algorithm shall measure motor stator resistance and reactance to optimize performance and efficiency. It shall not be necessary to run the motor or de-couple the motor from the load to perform the test.

2.13 Galvanic isolation shall be provided between the VFD‟s power circuitry and control circuitry to ensure operator safety and to protect connected electronic control equipment from damage caused by voltage spikes, current surges, and ground loop currents. VFDs not including either galvanic or optical isolation on both analog I/O and discrete digital I/O shall include additional isolation modules.

2.14 VFD shall minimize the audible motor noise through the used of an adjustable carrier frequency. The carrier frequency shall be automatically adjusted to optimize motor and VFD operation while reducing motor noise. VFDs with fixed carrier frequency are not acceptable.

2.15 The VFD shall allow up to at least 100 meters of SWA (Single Wire Armour) cable to be used between the FC and the motor and allow the use of MICS (Mineral Insulated Copper Sheath) cable in the motor circuit for fire locations.

16.3 PROTECTIVE FEATURES

3.1 A minimum of Class 20 I2t electronic motor overload protection for single motor

applications shall be provided. Overload protection shall automatically compensate for changes in motor speed.

3.2 Protection against input transients, loss of AC line phase, output short circuit, output

ground fault, over voltage, under voltage, VFD over temperature and motor over temperature. The VFD shall display all faults in plain language. Codes are not acceptable.

3.3 Protect VFD from input phase loss. The VFD should be able to protect itself from damage

and indicate the phase loss condition. During an input phase loss condition, the VFD shall be able to be programmed to either trip off while displaying an alarm, issue a warning while running at reduced output capacity, or issue a warning while running at full commanded speed. This function is independent of which input power phase is lost.

3.4 Protect from under voltage. The VFD shall provide full rated output with an input voltage

as low as 90% of the nominal. The VFD will continue to operate with reduced output, without faulting, with an input voltage as low as 70% of the nominal voltage.

3.5 VFD shall include current sensors on all three output phases to accurately measure motor

current, protect the VFD from output short circuits, output ground faults, and act as a




motor overload. If an output phase loss is detected, the VFD will trip off and identify which of the output phases is low or lost.

3.6 If the temperature of the VFD‟s heat sink rises to 80C, the VFD shall automatically reduce its carrier frequency to reduce the heat sink temperature. It shall also be possible to program the VFD so that it reduces its output current limit value if the VFD‟s temperature becomes too high.

3.7 In order to ensure operation during periods of overload, it must be possible to program

the VFD to automatically reduce its output current to a programmed value during periods of excessive load. This allows the VFD to continue to run the load without tripping.

3.8 The VFD shall have temperature controlled cooling fan(s) for quiet operation, minimized

losses, and increased fan life. At low loads or low ambient temperatures, the fan(s) may be off even when the VFD is running.

3.9 Protect from output switching : The VFD shall be fully protected from switching a

contactor / isolator at the output with out causing tripping e.g.: for switching on/off the isolators of the AHU / ventilation fans / pumps near the motor with VFD in ON mode.

3.10 The VFD shall store in memory the last 10 alarms. A description of the alarm, and the

date and time of the alarm shall be recorded. 3.11 When used with a pumping system, the VFD shall be able to detect no-flow situations, dry

pump conditions, and operation off the end of the pump curve. It shall be programmable to take appropriate protective action when one of the above situations is detected.

16.4 INTERFACE FEATURES

4.1 Hand, Off and Auto keys shall be provided on the control panel to start and stop the VFD

and determine the source of the speed reference. It shall be possible to either disable these keys or password protect them from undesired operation.

4.2 There shall be an “Info” key on the keypad. The Info key shall include “on-line” context

sensitive assistance for programming and troubleshooting. 4.3 The VFD shall be programmable to provide a digital output signal to indicate whether the

VFD is in Hand or Auto mode. This is to alert the BUILDING MANAGEMENT System whether the VFD is being controlled locally or by the BUILDING MANAGEMENT System.

4.4 Password protected keypad with alphanumeric, graphical, backlit display can be remotely

mounted. Two levels of password protection shall be provided to guard against unauthorized parameter changes.

4.5 All VFDs shall have the same customer interface. The keypad and display shall be




identical and interchangeable for all sizes of VFDs. 4.6 To set up multiple VFDs, it shall be possible to upload all setup parameters to the VFD‟s

keypad, place that keypad on all other VFDs in turn and download the setup parameters to each VFD. To facilitate setting up VFDs of various sizes, it shall be possible to download from the keypad only size independent parameters. Keypad shall provide visual indication of copy status.

4.7 Display shall be programmable to communicate in multiple languages including English,

Chinese, Korean, Japanese, Thai and Indonesian. 4.8 A red FAULT light, a yellow WARNING light and a green POWER-ON light shall be

provided. These indications shall be visible both on the keypad and on the VFD when the keypad is removed.

4.9 A quick setup menu with factory preset typical HVAC parameters shall be provided on the

VFD. The VFD shall also have individual Fan, Pump, and Compressor menus specifically designed to facilitate start-up of these applications.

4.10 A three-feedback PID controller to control the speed of the VFD shall be standard. 4.11 This controller shall accept up to three feedback signals. It shall be programmable to

compare the feedback signals to a common setpoint or to individual setpoints and to automatically select either the maximum or minimum deviating signal as the controlling signal. It shall also be possible to calculate the controlling feedback signal as the average of all feedback signals or the difference between a pair of feedback signals.

4.12 The VFD shall be able to apply individual scaling to each feedback signal. 4.13 For fan flow tracking applications, the VFD shall be able to calculate the square root of

any or all individual feedback signals so that a pressure sensor can be used to measure air flow.

4.14 The VFD‟s PID controller shall be able to actively adjust its setpoint based on flow. This

allows the VFD to compensate for a pressure feedback sensor which is located near the output of the pump rather than out in the controlled system.

4.15 The VFD shall have three additional PID controllers which can be used to control damper

and valve positioners in the system and to provide setpoint reset. 4.16 Floating point control interface shall be provided to increase/decrease speed in response

to contact closures. 4.17 Five simultaneous meter displays shall be available. They shall be selectable from (at a

minimum), frequency, motor current, motor voltage, VFD output power, VFD output




energy, VFD temperature in degrees, feedback signals in their own units, among others. 4.18 Programmable Sleep Mode shall be able to stop the VFD. When its output frequency

drops below set “sleep” level for a specified time, when an external contact commands that the VFD go into Sleep Mode, or when the VFD detects a no-flow situation, the VFD may be programmed to stop. When the VFD‟s speed is being controlled by its PID controller, it shall be possible to program a “wake-up” feedback value that will cause the VFD to start. To avoid excessive starting and stopping of the driven equipment, it shall be possible to program a minimum run time before sleep mode can be initiated and a minimum sleep time for the VFD.

4.19 A run permissive circuit shall be provided to accept a “system ready” signal to ensure that

the VFD does not start until dampers or other auxiliary equipment are in the proper state for VFD operation. The run permissive circuit shall also be capable of initiating an output “run request” signal to indicate to the external equipment that the VFD has received a request to run.

4.20 VFD shall be programmable to display feedback signals in appropriate units, such as

inches of water column (in-wg), pressure per square inch (psi) or temperature (°F). Examples can be room temperature in 0C , return air temperature in 0C , supply air temperature in 0C, CO2 concentration in ppm, pressure in bar, differential pressure in PSI etc.

4.21 VFD shall be programmable to sense the loss of load. The VFD shall be programmable to

signal this condition via a keypad warning, relay output and/or over the serial communications bus. To ensure against nuisance indications, this feature must be based on motor torque, not current, and must include a proof timer to keep brief periods of no load from falsely triggering this indication.

4.22 Standard Control and Monitoring Inputs and Outputs

4.22.1 Four dedicated, programmable digital inputs shall be provided for interfacing with

the systems control and safety interlock circuitry. 4.22.2 Two terminals shall be programmable to act as either as digital outputs or

additional digital inputs. 4.22.3 Two programmable relay outputs, Form C 240 V AC, 2 A, shall be provided for

remote indication of VFD status. 4.22.4 Each relay shall have an adjustable on delay / off delay time. 4.22.5 Two programmable analog inputs shall be provided that can be either direct-or-

reverse acting.




4.22.6 Each shall be independently selectable to be used with either an analog voltage or current signal.

4.22.7 The maximum and minimum range of each shall be able to be independently

scalable from 0 to 10 V dc and 0 to 20 mA. 4.22.8 A programmable low-pass filter for either or both of the analog inputs must be

included to compensate for noise. 4.22.9 The VFD shall provide front panel meter displays programmable to show the

value of each analog input signal for system set-up and troubleshooting, 4.22.10 One programmable analog current output (0/4 to 20 mA) shall be provided for

indication of VFD status. This output shall be programmable to show the reference or feedback signal supplied to the VFD and for VFD output frequency, current and power. It shall be possible to scale the minimum and maximum values of this output.

4.22.11 It shall be possible to read the status of all analog and digital inputs of the VFD

through serial bus communications. 4.22.12 It shall be possible to command all digital and analog output through the serial

communication bus.

4.23 Optional Control and Monitoring Inputs and Outputs

4.23.1 It shall be possible to add optional modules to the VFD in the field to expand its analog and digital inputs and outputs.

4.23.2 These modules shall use rigid connectors to plug into the VFD‟s control card.

4.23.3 The VFD shall automatically recognize the option module after it is powered up. There shall be no need to manually configure the module.

4.23.4 Modules may include such items as:

4.23.5 Additional digital outputs, including relay outputs

4.23.6 Additional digital inputs

4.23.7 Additional analog outputs

4.23.8 Additional analog inputs, including Ni or Pt temperature sensor inputs

4.23.9 It shall be possible through serial bus communications to control the status of all optional analog and digital outputs of the VFD.




4.24 Standard programmable firefighter‟s override mode allows a digital input to control the VFD and override all other local or remote commands. It shall be possible to program the VFD so that it will ignore most normal VFD safety circuits including motor overload. The VFD shall display FIREMODE whenever in firefighter‟s override mode. Firemode shall allow selection of forward or reverse operation and the selection of a speed source or preset speed, as required to accommodate local fire codes, standards and conditions.

4.25 A real-time clock shall be an integral part of the VFD.

4.25.1 It shall be possible to use this to display the current date and time on the VFD‟s display.

4.25.2 Ten programmable time periods, with individually selectable ON and OFF functions shall be available. The clock shall also be programmable to control start/stop functions, constant speeds, PID parameter setpoints and output relays. Is shall be possible to program unique events that occur only during normal work days, others that occur only on non-work days, and others that occur on specific days or dates. The manufacturer shall provide free PC-based software to set up the calendar for this schedule.

4.25.3 All VFD faults shall be time stamped to aid troubleshooting.

4.25.4 It shall be possible to program maintenance reminders based on date and time, VFD running hours, or VFD operating hours.

4.25.5 The real-time clock shall be able to time and date stamp all faults recorded in the VFD fault log.

4.25.6 The VFD shall be able to store load profile data to assist in analyzing the system

demand and energy consumption over time.

4.25.6.1 The VFD shall include a sequential logic controller to provide advanced control interface capabilities. This shall include:

4.25.6.2 Comparators for comparing VFD analog values to programmed trigger

values

4.25.6.3 Logic operators to combine up to three logic expressions using Boolean algebra

4.25.6.4 Delay timers

4.25.6.5 A 20-step programmable structure

4.26 The VFD shall include a Cascade Controller which allows the VFD to operate in closed




loop set point (PID) control mode one motor at a controlled speed and control the operation of 3 additional constant speed motor starters.

16.5 SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS

16.5.1 The VFD shall include a standard EIA-485/232/Ethernet communications port and

capabilities to be connected to the following serial communication protocols at no additional cost and without a need to install any additional hardware or software in the VFD:

Bacnet Modbus RTU

16.5.2 VFD shall have standard USB port for direct connection of Personal Computer (PC) to the

VFD. The manufacturer shall provide no-charge PC software to allow complete setup and access of the VFD and logs of VFD operation through the USB port. It shall be possible to communicate to the VFD through this USB port without interrupting VFD communications to the building management system.

16.5.3 The VFD shall have provisions for an optional 24 V DC back-up power interface to power

the VFD‟s control card. This is to allow the VFD to continue to communicate to the BUILDING MANAGEMENT system even if power to the VFD is lost.

16.6 ADJUSTMENTS

16.6.1 The VFD shall have a manually adjustable carrier frequency that can be adjusted in 0.5

kHz increments to allow the user to select the desired operating characteristics. The VFD shall also be programmable to automatically reduce its carrier frequency to avoid tripping due to thermal loading.

16.6.2 Four independent setups shall be provided. 16.6.3 Four preset speeds per setup shall be provided for a total of 16. 16.6.4 Each setup shall have two programmable ramp up and ramp down times. Acceleration

and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable over the range from 1 to 3,600 seconds. Each setup shall be programmable for a unique current limit value. If the output current

from the VFD reaches this value, any further attempt to increase the current produced by the VFD will cause the VFD to reduce its output frequency to reduce the load on the VFD. If desired, it shall be possible to program a timer which will cause the VFD to trip off after a programmed time period.

If the VFD trips on one of the following conditions, the VFD shall be programmable for automatic or manual reset: external interlock, under-voltage, over-voltage, current limit,




over temperature, and VFD overload. The number of restart attempts shall be selectable from 0 through 20 or infinitely and the

time between attempts shall be adjustable from 0 through 600 seconds.

An automatic “start delay” may be selected from 0 to 120 seconds. During this delay time, the VFD shall be programmable to either apply no voltage to the motor or apply a DC braking current if desired.

Four programmable critical frequency lockout ranges to prevent the VFD from operating the load at a speed that causes vibration in the driven equipment shall be provided. Semi-automatic setting of lockout ranges shall simplify the set-up.

16.7 OPTIONAL FEATURES

16.7.1 All optional features shall be built and mounted by VFD manufacturer as an inbuilt factory

solution. All optional features shall be UL listed by the VFD manufacturer as a complete assembly and carry a UL label.

17. QUALITY ASSURANCE,INSPECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING

17.1 SCOPE The following quality assurance, inspection, testing and commissioning procedures shall be

required to be carried out upon award of work.

I. Provide quality assurance program (QAP), works quality assurance program (WQAP), field quality assurance program (FQAP) and quality plan.

II. Tests at manufacturer‟s works. III. Perform site tests and commissioning.

17.2 SUBMITTALS

I. After award of work following information shall be submitted. a. Quality Assurance Program (QAP) b. Works Quality Assurance programme (WQAP) c. Field Quality Assurance Programme (FQAP) II. For inspection and testing, submit inspection and testing procedures, programme, record

sheets applicable at each hold point.




III. After completion of testing, submit test records, packaging, transportation and storage instructions and methods.

IV. For site installation and commissioning, submit installation methods or procedures,

notification and procedures for precommission and commissioning. V. After commissioning, submit site test records, as-built drawings, manufacturer‟s operation

maintenance manuals and list of recommended spares and tools.

17.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE CONCEPT AND CONTROL

I. Minimum requirements for establishing and implementing a quality assurance programme shall be applied to all aspects of the work necessary for carrying out the contract. Quality assurance shall extend to material parts, components, systems and services as a means of obtaining and sustaining the reliability of critical items, operating performance, maintenance and safety.

II. Acceptance of the Contractor‟s quality assurance programme does not relieve the

Contractor‟s obligation to comply with the requirement of the contract document. If the programme is found to be ineffective, then the Owner‟s site representative reserves the right to request for necessary revisions of the programme.

III. The Contractor is required to produce readily identifiable documentary evidence covering

the extent and details of both his own and his sub contractor‟s quality assurances system as follows :

a. Quality Assurance Program (QAP) b. Works Quality Assurance programme (WQAP) c. Field Quality Assurance Programme (FQAP) d. Quality Plan. IV. These documents shall be prepared separately and submitted to the Owner‟s site

representative at the time of starting the work. V. Quality Plan and Manual shall be prepared by the Contractor for all items and services to

be supplied, after the contract has been placed, but before commencement of fabrication, and shall be subject to evaluation and acceptance by the Owner‟s site representative before start of work.

17.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE MANUAL (QAM)

I. The QAM shall be a general comprehensive document outlining the Contractor‟s basic organization, policies and procedures. The information to be given in the QAM shall include but not limited to :

a. Quality Policy.




b. Quality Assurance Programme c. Organisation Structure showing inter relationships. d. Functional responsibilities and levels of authority. e. Lines of communication. f. Customer relations. g. Laboratory Facilities.

17.5 WORKS QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME (WQAP)

I. The WQAP shall identify the Contractor‟s Quality Assurance Programme at works applicable throughout all phases of Contract performance, including design, procurement, manufacture, inspection and testing. It shall identify each of the programme elements to be designed, developed, executed and maintained by the Contractor for the purpose of ensuring that all supplies and services comply with this specifications.

II. The information to be given under this programme shall include but not limited to : a. Organisation and Responsibility. b. Contract Review. c. Design and Document Control. d. Procurement Control.

e. Production Control.

f. Control on Sub-contractors. g. In-process Quality Control and Traceability. h. Inspection and Testing. j. Control of Non-conformances. k. Corrective Action. l. Control of Inspection, Measuring and Test Equipment.




m. Handling, Storage, Packaging and Delivery. n. Records. o. Quality Audits. p. After - Sales Servicing.

17.6 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME (FQAP)

I. This programme shall identify the Contractor‟s Quality Assurance Programme at site applicable throughout site construction, erection and commissioning. It is the underlying philosophy that the quality built into the product at works shall be maintained throughout the construction and commissioning stages.

II. While, in principle, the FQAP shall include the items discussed in WQAP, it shall,

however, be approached differently to take into account site conditions. III. The FQAP shall include, but not limited to the following information : a. Organisation and responsibility. b. Control of Drawings and Documentation. c. Product Checklist. d. Control and Traceability of Purchased materials and services. e. Receipt Inspection of materials at site. f. Material Storage Control. g. Inspection and Examination Procedures. h. Control of Painting and Insulation Works. j. Pre-commissioning. k. Commissioning. l. Control of Non-conformances. m. Corrective Action. n. Control of Inspection, Measuring and Test Equipment.




p. Records. q. Completion Documents. r. List of recommended spares and tools. s. Personal Training. t. Servicing during Defects Liability Period.

17.7 QUALITY PLAN

I. The contractor shall be required to prepare manufacturing and construction/erection quality plans for all equipment items and services. The quality plan shall also define the involvement of Owner‟s site representative in the inspection and test programmes.

II. The Quality Plan shall incorporate as appropriate :

a. Charts indicating flow of materials, parts and components through manufacturing quality control inspection and test to delivery and erection.

b. The charts shall indicate the location of hold points for quality control, inspection

and test beyond which manufacture shall not continue until the action required by the hold point is met, and the documentation required is generated.

c. The control documents associated with each hold point, i.e. drawings, material,

specification, Works Process Schedule (WPS), Process Quality Records (PQR), quality control methods and procedures and acceptance standards.

17.8 SITE QUALITY CONTROL SECTION

I. The Contractor‟s Quality Control (Q.C.) section shall be headed by an experienced Quality Control Engineer. He shall be assisted by other supervisors. The section shall be an independent one, reporting to the contractor‟s Site Manager only on administrative matters, but otherwise under full control by the Contractor‟s Corporate Quality System Management.

II. The Contractor‟s Q.C. Section shall liasise closely with the Owner‟s site representative in

charge of Quality Assurance/Quality Control, and to whom it shall give fullest cooperation. It is the underlying principle of this contract document that while the Contractor‟s Q.C. Engineer implements the Contractor‟s Quality Programme, the adequacy and effectiveness of that implementation shall be audited by the Owner‟s site representative whose recommendations on improving or maintaining quality shall be acted upon




promptly by the Contractor‟s Q.C. Section. 17.9 INSPECTION AND TESTING

I. All equipment and components supplied may be subjected to inspection and tests by the Consultant/ Owner‟s site representative during manufacture, erection/installation and after completion. The inspection and tests shall include but not be limited by the requirements of this contract document. Prior to inspection and testing, the equipment shall undergo pre-service cleaning and protection.

II. Tenderers shall state and guarantee the technical particulars listed in the Schedule of

Technical Data. These guarantees and particulars shall be binding and shall not be varied without the written permission of the Owner‟s site representative.

III. No tolerances shall be allowed other than the tolerances specified or permitted in the

relevant approved Standards, unless otherwise stated.

IV. If the guaranteed performance of any item of equipment is not met and / or if any item fails to comply with the specification requirement in any respect whatsoever at any stage of manufacture, test or erection, the Owner‟s site representative may reject the item, or defective component thereof, whichever he considers necessary; and after adjustment or modification as directed by the Owner‟s site representative, the contractor shall submit the item for further inspection and /or test.

V. The approval of the Owner‟s site representative of inspection and/or test results shall not

prejudice the right of the Owner‟s site representative to reject an item of equipment if it does not comply with the contract document when erected, does not or prove completely satisfactory in service.

VI. The Contractor shall be responsible for the timely transmission of the relevant and

appropriate sections of the contract document to manufacturers and sub-contractors for the proper execution of all tests at their works as per contract specifictions.

17.10 TESTS AT MANUFACTURER‟S WORKS

I. All tests to be performed during manufacture, fabrication and inspection shall be agreed with the Consultant/ Owner‟s site representative prior to commencement of the work. The Contractor shall prepare the details of the schedule and submit these to the Consultant/ Owner‟s site representative for approval. It must be ensured that adequate relevant information on the design code/standard employed, the manufacture /fabrication/assembly procedure and the attendant quality control steps proposed are made available to the Consultant/Owner‟s site representative who will mark in the appropriate spaces his intention to attend or waive the invited tests, or inspections. Contractor shall arrange inspection and factory witness test for centrifugal, screw chiller




and vapour absorption chiller. II. A minimum of twenty-one days‟ notice of the readiness of equipment for test or inspection

shall be provided to the Owner‟s site representative by the Contractor (whether the tests be held at the Contractor‟s of Sub-contractor‟s works). The subject items should remain available for Owner‟s site representative inspection and test up to a minimum 10 days beyond the agreed date of witnessing the test. Every facility in respect of access, drawings, instruments and manpower shall be provided by the Contractor and sub-contractor to enable the Owner‟s site representative to carry out the necessary inspection and testing of the Plant.

III. No plant shall be packed, prepared for shipment, or dismantled for the purpose of packing

for shipment, unless it has been satisfactorily inspected, all tests called for have been successfully carried out in the presence of the Owner‟s site representative or approved for shipment, or alternatively inspection has been waived.

IV. Functional electrical, mechanical and hydraulic tests shall be carried out on completed

assemblies in the works. The extent of these tests and method of recording the results shall be submitted to, and agreed by, the Owner‟s site representative in sufficient time to enable the tests to be satisfactorily witnesses, or if necessary for any changes required to the proposed programme of tests to be agreed.

V. The Consultant/Owner‟s site representative reserves the right to visit the Manufacturer‟s

works at any reasonable time during fabrication of equipment and to familiarize himself with the progress made and the quantity of the work to date.

VI. Within 30 days of completion of any tests, triplicate sets of all principal test records, test

certificates and correction and performance curves shall be supplied to the Owner‟s site representative.

VII. These test records, certificates and performance curves shall be supplied for all tests,

whether or not they have been witnessed by the Owner‟s site representative or not. The information given on such test certificates and curves shall be sufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the certificate refers and should also bear the Contract reference title.

VIII. When all equipment has been tested, the test certificates from all works and site tests

shall be compiled by the Contractor into volumes and bound in an approved from complete with index and four copies of each volume shall be supplied to Consultant/ Owner‟s site representative.

IX. Stage wise inspection of equipment in factory in waived.




17.11 PERFORMANCE TESTS AT MANUFACTURER‟S WOKS

I. All equipment may be subjected to routine performance tests at the Manufacturer‟s Works in accordance with the relevant ANSI, ASME, ASTM, BIS standard including operating tests of complete assemblies to ensure correct operation of apparatus and components.

II. Pumps, fans, compressor, and other rotating equipment shall be given full load tests, and

run to 15% overspeed for 5 minutes to check vibration. Main and auxiliary gear boxes shall be subjected to shock load tests and a six-hour endurance run at rated speed and maximum torque.

III. The Contractor shall submit single line diagrams including the layout of the Plant together

with the location of test instrumentation and the principal dimensions of the layout. All calculations to derive performance data shall be made strictly in accordance with format given in the approved standards. Any alterations or deviations from the approved standard test layout or formulae shall be subjected to the prior approval of the Owner‟s Site Representative.

IV. The performance test shall be conducted over the full operating range of the pump to a

closed valve condition and a minimum of five measurement points covering the full range shall be taken. Curves indicating Quality vs. Head, Quantity vs. Power absorbed, and Quantity vs. Pump efficiency shall be provided. In addition a curve of the NPSH required vs. Quantity shall be provided except when the suction conditions do not require this test. Any proposal for the omission of this test shall be to the approval of the Consultant/ Owner‟s site representative.

V. On completion of the tests the Contractor shall submit a report showing the test results

obtained together with the curves corrected to the site operating conditions.

18. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

18.1 SCOPE

a. Testing, adjusting and balancing of heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems at site.

b. Testing, adjusting and balancing of HVAC Hydronic system at site. c. Testing, adjusting and balancing of exhaust system at site.

Comply with current editions of all applicable practices, codes, methods of standards prepared by technical societies and associations including :




ASHRAE : 2007 HVAC Application.

SMACNA : Manual for the Balancing and Adjustment of air distribution system.

18.2 PERFORMANCE

a. Verify design conformity. b. Establish fluid flow rates, volumes and operating pressures. c. Take electrical power readings for each motor. d. Establish operating sound and vibration levels. e. Adjust and balance to design parameters. f. Record and report results as per the formats specified.

18.3 DEFINITIONS

a. Test : To determine quantitative performance of equipment.

b. Adjust : To regulate for specified fluid flow rates and air patterns at terminal equipment (e.g. reduce fan speed, throttling etc.)

c. Balance : To proportion within distribution system (submains,

branches and terminals) in accordance with design quantities.

18.4 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) PROCEDURES The following procedures shall be directly followed in TAB of the total system. Before commencement of each one of the TAB procedure explained hereunder, the contractor

shall intimate the PMC about his readiness to conduct the TAB procedures in the format given in these specifications.

18.5 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM AND REQUIREMENTS Adjust and balance the following system to provide most energy efficient operation compatible

with selected operating conditions.

a. All supply, return and outside air systems. b. All exhaust air systems.




c. All chilled water systems. d. All cooling tower (condenser) water systems. e. Emergency purge systems.

18.6 AIR SYSTEMS

I. Air Handlers Performance

The TAB procedure shall establish the right selection and performance of the AHUs with the following results : a. Air-IN DB and WB temperature. b. Air-OUT DB and WB temperature. c. Dew point air leaving. d. Sensible heat flow. e. Latent heat flow. f. Sensible heat factor. g. Fan air volume. h. Fan air outlet velocity. i. Fan static pressure. j. Fan power consumption. k. Fan speed.

II. Air distribution Both supply and return air distribution for each AHU and for areas served by the AHU

shall be determined and adjusted as necessary to provide design air quantities. It shall cover balancing of air through main and branch ducts utilising telescoping probes of Electronic Rotating Vane Anemometers and Accubalance for grilles and diffusers.

III. The Preparatory Work To conduct the above test, following preparatory works are required to be carried out

including the availability of approved for construction shop drawings and submittals :

a. All outside air intake, return air and exhaust air dampers are in proper position.

b. All system volume dampers and fire dampers are in full open position. c. All access doors are installed & are air tight. d. Grilles are installed & dampers are fully open.




e. Provision and accessibility of usage of TAB instruments for traverse measurements are available.

f. All windows, doors are in position. g. Duct system are of proper construction and are equipped with turning vanes and

joints are sealed. h. Test holes and plugs for ducting. 18.7 HYDRONIC SYSTEM BALANCING

I. The Hydronic system shall involve the checking and balancing of all water pumps, piping network (main & branches), the heat exchange equipment like cooling and heating coils, condensers and chillers and cooling towers in order to provide design water flows.

II. The essential preparation work, must be done by the HVAC contractor prior to actual testing,

adjusting and balancing of HVAC system and ensure following :

Availability of co-ordinated drawings and approved submittals and system sketch with design water flows specified thereon.

Hydronic system is free of leaks, is hydrostatically tested and is thoroughly cleaned, flushed and refilled.

Hydronic system is vented.

III. The contractor shall confirm completion of the basic procedures and prepare check lists for readiness of system balance. a. Check pumps operation for proper rotation and motor current drawn etc.

b. Confirm that provisions for TAB measurements (Temperature, pressure and flow

measurements) have been made.

c. Open all shut-off valves and automatic control valves to provide full flow through coils. Set all balancing valves in the preset position, if these values are known. If not, shut all riser balancing valves except the one intended to be balanced first.

Balancing work for both Chilled Water System and Condenser Water System shall be carried out in a professional manner and test reports in the specified format shall be prepared and presented to the PMC/Consultants for approval.




18.8 READINESS FOR COMMENCEMENT OF TAB Before starting of any of the tests, the readiness to do so should be recorded as per the

prescribed check list. 18.9 TAB INSTRUMENTS I. Air Measuring Instruments

a. For measuring DB and WB temperature, RH and dew point, microprocessor based TSI USA make VelociCalc Plus Meter, Model 8386, or equivalent shall be used. This instrument shall be capable of calculating the sensible, latent total heat flows, sensible heat factor and give printouts at site and have data logging/downloading facility.

b. For measuring Air velocity, DB temperature and Air volume, TSI USA make

VelociCalc meter model 8386/ 8345 or equivalent shall be used. It shall be able to provide instant print out of recorded Air volume readings.

c. Pitot tube. d. Electronic Rotary Vane Anemometer TSI make or equivalent. e. Accubalance Flow Measuring Hood TSI make or equivalent. [All above instruments shall have a valid certification from a reputed testing institution.

II. Hydronic Measuring Instruments

a. For measurement of water flow across balancing valves, instruments as provided by the manufacturer of the valves specific to the type of valves shall be need. This shall include but not be limited to differential pressure manometers. Temperature shall be measured using electric thermometers from thermowells provided at strategic location by the HVAC contractor.

The water balancing shall be carried out being computer simulation program provided / certified by the balancing valve manufacturer.

III. Rotation Measuring Instrument

a. Electronic Digital Tachometer. IV. Temperature & RH Measuring Instrument

a. TSI VelociCalc model 8386 / VelociCalc model 8345 or equivalent.




V. Electrical Measuring Devices

a. Clamp on Volt ammeter. b. Continuity Meter.

VI. Vibration and Noise Levels

Vibration and alignment field measurements shall be taken for each circulating water pump, water chilling unit, air handling unit and fan driven by a motor over 10 HP. Readings shall include shaft alignment, equipment vibration, bearing housing vibration, and other test as directed by the PMC. Sound level readings shall be taken at ten (10) locations in the building as selected by the PMC. The readings shall be taken on an Octave Band nalyzer in a manner acceptable to him. The contractor shall submit test equipment data and reporting forms for review. In order to reduce the ambient noise level the readings shall be taken at night. All test shall be performed in the presence of PMC/Consultant.

SYSTEM READY TO BALANCE CHECK LIST

Ready Date Ready Date 1. HVAC Units (AHU) Yes No. Correcte

d Yes No. Correcte

d a) General e) Vibriation isolation Louvers installed Springs and

compression

Manual dampers open & locked

Base level and free

Automatic dampers set properly

Housing Construction-leakage

2. Duct systems

Access doors-leakage a) General

Condensate drain piping and pan

Manual dampers open & locked

Free from dirt and debris Access doors closed and tight

Nameplate data Fire dampers open and accessible

b) Filters Terminal units open and set

Type and size Registers and diffusers open and set

Number Turning vanes in square




elbows

Clean Provisions made for TAB measurements.

Frame-Leakage Systems installed as per plans.

c) Coils (Hydronic) Ductwork sealed as required

Size and rows b) Architectural

Fin spacing and condition Windows installed and closed.

Obstructions and / or debris Doors closed as required.

Airflow and direction Ceiling plenums installed and sealed.

Piping leakage Access doors closed and tight

Correct piping Connections and flow

Air shafts and openings as required

Valves open or set

Airvents or steam traps 3. Pumps.

Provisions made for TAB measurements

a) Motors.

d) Fans. Rotation

Rotation. Lubrication

Wheel clearance and balance

Alignment

Bearing and motor lubrication Set screws tight

Drive alignment Guards in place

Belt t tension. Tank level and controls.

Drive set screws tight Starters and disconnect switches

Belt guard in place Electrical service & connections.

Flexible duct connector alignment

Nameplate data.

Starters and disconnect switches

Electrical service & connections.

Nameplate data




b) Piping 5. Refrigeration Equipment

Correct flow Crankcase heaters energized

Correct connections Operating controls and devices.

Leakage Safety controls and devices.

Valves open or set Valves open

Strainer clean Piping connections and flow

Air vented Flexible connectors

Flexible connectors Oil level and lubrication


Alignment and drives.

c) Bases Guards in place.

Vibration isolation. Vibration isolation.

Grouting Starters, contactors and disconnect switches.

Leveling. Electrical connectors.

Nameplate data.

4. Hydronic equipment.

a) Heat Exchangers/HW coil 6. Hydronic Piping systems.

Correct flow and connections Leak tested.

Valves open or set Fluid levels and make-up

Airvents or steam traps Relief or safety valves.

Leakage Compression tanks and air vents.


Steam traps and connections.

Nameplate data. Strainers clean

b) Cooling towers valves open or set

Correct flow and connections. Provisions made for TAB measurements.

Valves open or set Systems installed as per plans.

Leakage


7. Controls System

Sump water level. Data centers.

Spray nozzles. Outdoor return air reset

Fan/pump rotation. Economizer

Motor/fan lubrication. Static pressure

Drives and alignment Room controls.

Guards in place. 8. Other Checks.

a) Other trades or personnel notified of TAB work




requirements.

b) Preliminary data complete

c) Test report forms prepared.




INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION REPORT PROJECT _____________________________________________________________________ INSTRUMENT / SERIAL NO.

APPLICATION DATES OF USE CALIBRATION TEST DATE.

REMARKS. TEST DATE ___________________________ READINGS BY _______________________________




PUMP TEST REPORT PROJECT _______________________________________________ DATA

PUMP NO.

PUMP NO.

PUMP NO.

PUMP NO.

PUMP NO.

Location

Service

Manufacturer

Model Number

Serial Number

GPM/Head

Req. NPSH

Pump RPM

Impeller Diam.

Motor Mfr. / Frame

Motor HP/RPM

Volts/Phase/Hertz

F.L Amps

Seal Type

Pump Off-Press.

Valve Shut Diff.

Act.Impeller Diam.

Valve Open diff.

Valve Open GPM

Final Dischg. Press.

Final Suction Press.

Final Ap

Final GPM

Voltage T1 T

2 T

2 T

3

T3

T1

Amperage T1 T2 T3

REMARKS TEST DATE _____________________ READINGS BY __________________________




COOLING TOWER TEST REPORT PROJECT_________________________________ SYSTEM__________________________________ LOCATION__________________________________________________________________________________ MANUF.__________________ MODEL______________________ SERIAL NO._________________ NOM. CAPACITY_______________________________________ WATER TREAT._____________________ COOLING TOWER / MOTOR / WATER DATA

AIR DATA

DESIGN

ACTUAL

Make / Model Fan CFM Type Outlet S.P. Tons Avg. Ent. W.B. No. of Fan Motors Avg. Lvg. W.B. Motor HP / RPM Ambient W.B. Motor / Drive Fan RPM Motor Speed Voltage I1 Ie I2 I3 I3 I1 Motor Rated Current Amps T1 Te T21 Motor FL Current O/L Release Setting CT Range CT Approach COOLING TOWER FAN / AIR DATA

DESIGN ACTUAL WATER DATA DESIGN ACTUAL

No. of Fans Ent//Lvg./Water Pressure Type/ Drive of Fan Ent//Lvg./Water Temperature Fan Dia Water Temperature – T Fan Speed GPM Air Inlet Temperature Bleed GPM Air Outlet Temperature Voltage I1 Ie I2 I3 I3 I1 Fan Air Quantity Amps T1 Te T21 Water Bleed GPM REMARKS TEST DATE ____________________ READINGS BY________________________




AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT TEST REPORT PROJECT_________________________________ SYSTEM / UNIT________________________ LOCATION________________________________________________________________________________

UNIT DATA MOTOR DATA

Make/Model No. Make / Frame

Type/Size H.P / RPM

Serial Number Volts/Phase/cycles

Arr./Class F.L amps.

Discharge Pully Diam/Bore

Pully diam/Bore Pully /Distance.

No. Belts/make/size

No.Filters/type.size (Pre.)

No.Filters/type/size (secondary)

TEST DATA

DESIGN ACTUAL TEST DATA DESIGN ACTUAL

Total Cfm Discharge S.P

Total S.P

Fan RPM Cooling Coil S.P

Motor Volts. T1 T

2 T

2 T

3

T3

T1

Filters S.P

Outside air Cfm

Return air Cfm

REMARKS. TEST DATE______________________________________ READINGS BY _________________________




COOLING / HEATING TEST REPORT (AHU) PROJECT _________________________________________________________________________________ COIL DATA COIL NO. COIL NO. COIL NO. COIL NO.

System Number

Location

Coil Type

No. Rows Fins/In

Manufacturer

Model Number

Face Area, Sq.Ft.

TEST DATA

DESIGN ACTUAL DESIGN

ACTUAL

DESIGN ACTUAL

DESIGN ACTUAL

Air Qty. CFM

Air Vel.FPM

Press.Drop In.

Out.Air DB/WB

Ret. Air DB/WB

Ent.Air DB/WB

Lvg.Air DB/WB

Air AT

Waer flow. GPM

Press.Drop.PSI

Ent.Water Temp

Lvg .Water Temp

Water AT

Exp.Valve/Refrig

Refrig.Suction Pr.

Refrig.Suct.Temp

Inlet Steam press.

REMARKS. TEST DATE ________________________________ READINGS BY _________________________




FAN COIL TEST REPORT

PROJECT______________________________________________________ DATE__________________ LOCATION__________________________________________________________________________________ MANUFACTURER_____________________________________________________________________________ AREA SERVED

FCU MAKE

CAPACITY TR

TEMPERATURE DEG. F

GRILLE ROOM

REMARKS. TEST DATE ____________________________ READINGS BY ___________________________




FAN TEST REPORT PROJECT________________________________________________________________________________

FAN DATA FAN NO. FAN NO. FAN NO.

Location

Service

Manufacturer

Model No.

Serial No.

Type / Class

Motor Make / Style

Motor H.P/RPM/ Frame

Volts/Phase/Cycles

F.L Amps.

Motor pully Diam./Bore

Fan pully Diam./Bore

No. Belts/ Make/Size

Pully Distance.

TEST DATA DESIGN ACTUA

L DESIGN ACTUA

L DESIGN ACTUA

L CFM

FAN RPM

S.P IN/OUT

TOTAL S.P

Voltage T1 T

2 T

2 T

3

T3

T1

Amperage T1 T2 T3

REMARKS: TEST DATE:____________________________ READINGS BY _____________________




RECTANGULAR DUCT TRAVERSE REPORT

PROJECT_____________________________SYSTEM_____________________________________ LOCATION / ZONE_____________________ACTUAL AIR TEMP. ________________DUCT S.P_________

DUCT SIZE_______SQ.FT.______________

REQUIRED FPM___________CFM____________

ACTUAL FPM__________CFM____________

POSITION

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

VEL1OCITY SUBTOTALS

REMARKS. TEST DATE_________________________________ READINGS BY _________________________________




GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS TEST REPORT.

PROJECT_____________________________________ SYSTEM __________________________________ OUTLET MANUFACTURER____________________________TEST APPARATUS___________________ AREA

OUT LET

DESIGN

PRLIMINARY

FINAL

SERVED NO. TYPE SIZE

CFM

VEL

VELOR CFM

VEL.OR CFM

VEL

CFM

REMARKS. TEST DATE______________________ READINGS BY _________________________




19. PAINTING AND FINISHES 19.1 SCOPE

The scope of this section comprises of colour scheme required for each piece of equipment

19.2 COLOUR SCHEME.

Description Standard Colour &

Reference Lettering Colouring

Exposed Duct Work (other than plant room) instruction

To Architect‟s

Air Conditioning Duct Work (Plant Rooms)

BSS 111 Pale Blue Black

Ventilation Duct Duct Work (Plant Rooms)


Conditioner Casings, Air Handling Units, Filter Plenums


Electrical (Conduit Ducts and Motors )

BSS 557 Light Orange Black

Chilled Water Pipe

Jade Green Black

Drains

Black White

Vents

White Black

Fans


Valves and Pipe Line Fittings

White with black handles Black

Beltquards Black and yellow diagonal stripes (45 25 mm wide)

Switchboards - exterior - interior

BS 366 Light Beige White




Machine Bases, Inertia Bases and Plinths

Charcoal Grey

20. IDENTIFICATION OF SERVICES

20.1 SCOPE

The scope of this section comprises of identification of services for each piece of equipment 20.2 VALVE LABELS AND CHARTS

Each valve shall be provided with a label indicating the service being controlled, together with a reference number corresponding with that shown on the Valve Charts and “ as fitted” drawings. The labels shall be made from 3 ply ( black / white/ black) Traffolyte material showing white letters and figures on a black background. Labels to be tied to each valve with chromium plated linked chain.

A wall mounted, glass covered plan to the approval of the Architect / Engineer shall be provided and desplayed in each plant room showing the plant layout with pipe work, valve diagram and valve schedule indicating size, service, duty, etc.

20.3 IDENTIFICATION OF SERVICES.

Pipe work and duct work shall be identified by colour bands 150 mm. wide or colour triangles of at

least 150 mm. / side. The bands of triangles shall be applied at termination points, junctions, entries and exits of plant rooms, walls and ducts, and control points to readily identify the service, but spacing shall not exceed 4.0 metres.

21.3.1. Pipe work Services :-

For pipe work services and its insulation the colours of the bands shall comply with BS.

1710: 1971. Basic colours for pipe line identification :

Pipe Line Contents

BS. 4800 Colour Reference Colour.

Water 12 D 45 Green Steam 10 A 03 Grey Oils 06 C 39 Brown Gas 08 C 35 Yellow / Brown




Air 20 E 51 Blue Drainage 00 E 53 Black Electrical 06 E 51 Orange

Colour code indicator bands shall be applied as colour bands over the basic identification

colour in the various combinations as listed below :-

Pipe Line Contents Colour Bands to BS. 4800

Water Services : Cooling 00 E 55 Fresh / drinking 18 E 53 Boiler feed 04 D 45/00 E 55 / 04 D 45 Condensate 04 D 45/14 E 53 / 04 D 45 Chilled 00 D 55/14 E 53 / 00 D 45

Central Heating Services : Below 100o C 18 E 55/04 D 45/18 E 53 Above 100o C 04 D 45/18 E 53 /04 D 45

Cold Water Storage Tanks :

00 E 55/18 E 53/00 E 55

Hot Water Supply 00 E 55/04 D 45/00 E 55 Hydraulic Power 04 C 33 Sea / River Untreated Basic Colour only Fire Extinguishing 04 E 53 Steam Services : Basic Colour only

Air : Compressed Vacuum

Basic Colour only White.

Town Gas : Manufactured Natural

14 E 53 10 E 53

Oils : Diesel 00 E 55 Lubricating 14 E 53 Hydraulic Power 04 C 53 Transformer 04 D 45

Drainage and other fluids : Basic Colour only Electrical Services : Basic Colour only

In addition to the colour bands specified above all pipe work shall be legibly marked with black or

white letters to indicate the type of service and the direction of flow, identified as follows :-




High Temperature Hot Water HTHW Medium Temperature Hot Water MTHW Low Temperature Hot Water LTHW Chilled Water CHW Condenser Water CONDW Steam ST Condensate CN

Pipe shall have the letters F and R added to indicate flow and return respectively as well

as directional arrows. 20.3.2 Duct Work Services :

For Duct work services and its insulation the colours of the triangles shall comply with BS.1710 :

1971. The size of the symbol will depend on the size of the duct and the viewing distance but the

minimum size should not be less than 150 mm. length per side. One apex of the triangle shall point in

the direction of airflow.

Services Colour BS.4800 Colour

Reference

Conditioned Air Red and Blue 04 E 53 / 18 E 53 Ward Air Yellow 10 E 53 Fresh Air Green 14 E 53

Exhaust / Extract / Recirculated Air

Grey

AA 0 09

Foul Air Brown 06 C 39 Dual Duct System Hot Supply Air

Red 04 E 53

Cold Supply Air Blue 18 E 53




In addition to the colour triangles specified above all duct work shall be legibly marked with black or white letters to indicate the type of service, identified as follows :-

Supply Air S Return Air R Fresh Air F Exhaust Air E

The colour banding and triangles shall be manufactured from self adhesive cellulose tape,

laminated with a layer of transparent ethyl cellulose tape.

21. NOISE CONTROL

21.1 SCOPE The scope of this section comprises of the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of noise

and vibration control equipment and accessories. 21.2 STANDARDS The testing of all noise control equipment and the methods used in measuring the noise rating of

air conditioning plant and equipment shall be in accordance with the relevant sections of the following British Standards, unless otherwise stated :

BS 4718 : 1971 Methods of Test of Silencers for Air Distribution Systems.

BS 2750 : Parts 1-9:1980

Laboratory and Field Measurement of Airborne Sound Insulation of Various Building Elements. Recommendations for Field Laboratory Measurement of Airborne and Impact Sound Transmission in Buildings.

BS 3638 : 1987 Methods of Measurement of Sound Adsorption in a Reverberation Room.

BS 4773 : Part 2: 1976

Acoustic Testing.

BS 4856 : Part 2: 1976

Acoustic performance without additional ducting of forced fan convection equipment.




Part 5: 1976 Acoustic performance with additional ducting of forced fan convection equipment.

BS 4857 : Par 2:1978 (1983)

Acoustic Testing and Rating of High Pressure Terminal Reheat Units.

BS 4954 : Par 2:1978 (1987)

Acoustic Testing and Rating of Induction Units.

BS 5643 : 1984 Glossary of Refrigeration, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Terms.

21.3 GENERAL Mechanical services shall generally be designed and installed with provisions to contain noise and

the transmission of vibration, generated by moving plant and equipment at source where illustrated on the tender drawings and plant and equipment schedules to achieve acceptable noise rating specified for occupied areas.

In addition to the provisions specified in the Specification, particular attention must be given to the

following details at time of ordering plant and equipment and their installation :-

a. All moving plant , machinery and apparatus shall be statically and dynamically balanced at manufacturers works and certificates issued.

b. The isolation of moving plant, machinery and apparatus including lines equipment from

the building structure. c. Where duct work and pipe work services pass through walls, floors and ceilings, or where

supported shall be surrounded with a resilient acoustic absorbing material to prevent contact with the structure and minimise the outbreak of noise from plant rooms.

d. The reduction of noise breakout from plant rooms and the selection of externally mounted

equipment and plant to meet ambient noise level requirements of the Specifications. e. Electrical conduits and connections to all moving plant and equipment shall be carried out

in flexible conduit and cables to prevent the transmission of vibration to the structure and nullify the provisions of anti-vibration mountings.

f. All duct connections to fans shall incorporate flexible connections, except in cases where

these are fitted integral within air handling units. Duct work connections to the fan inlets / outlets shall be concentricity aligned so that the

flexible connections are not subjected to any strain and not used as a means of correcting bas misalignment.




g. All resilient acoustic absorbing materials shall be non flammable, vermin and rot proof and shall not tend to break up or compress sufficiently to transmit vibration or noise from the equipment to the structure.

h. Where practicable, silencers shall be built into walls and floors to prevent the flanking of

noise the duct work systems and their penetrations sealed in the manner previously described.

Where this is not feasible, the exposed surface of the duct work between the silencer and

the wall subjected to noise infiltration shall be acoustically clad as specified. i. Contractor to demonstrate design NC levels in the areas with FFT (Fast Fourier

Transform) analyzer.

21.4 SILENCERS At tender stage all silencers as scheduled in the specification or on tender drawings will be

selected based on preliminary sound power levels obtained from fan/air handling unit manufacturers or fan duties to achieve a noise rating in the occupied space as specified in “ Basis of Design”

All plant attenuators shall be selected to maintain noise criteria given in this Specification. Attenuators shall be constructed from high quality pre-galvanised steel sheet casings with lock

formed joints along the casing length. Angle iron cross jointing flanges shall be fitted to silencer casings, drilled as required and finished with zinc cromet primer paint.

Acoustic splitters shall be formed by chancel section pre-galvanised sheet steel framework

retaining acoustic fill of a density to attain the required performance. Splitters shall have round nose ends to give smooth entry and exit conditions to minimise air pressure drops.

The acoustic fill shall be protected from the air flow by 22 swg minimum perforated galvanised

sheet steel. All silencers shall be selected against a maximum allowable air pressure drop of 75 a. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor at the time of placing orders for fan equipment to

obtain from the manufacturers, certified sound power levels to enable the selected duct silencers to be checked against the original design information, prior to orders being placed.

21.5 ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTINGS. All items of rotating and reciprocating plant and equipment shall be isolated from the structure by

the use of anti-vibration materials, mountings or spring loaded supports fixed to either concrete bases, inertia blocks or support steels as indicated.




Centrifugal fans and motors within air handling units shall be isolated from the frame of the air handling unit by suitable anti-vibration mountings. Fan discharge air connections shall be fitted with approved flexible connections internally isolating the fan scroll from the air handling unit casing.

Axial flow fans shall be mounted on steel legs as diaphragm plates supported on neoprene in

shear anti-vibration mountings, or suspended using spring loaded hangers to suite the application. Centrifugal pumps shall be mounted on inertia bases consisting of reinforced concrete sub-base,

anti-vibration mountings and concrete filled steel upper plinth. The Contractor shall be responsible for issuing the steel upper plinth and mountings to the Contractor for building-in.

Pipe work connections to circulating pumps, chillers, cooler coils and other equipment shall be

made with flexible connections as per Specifications. The construction of the anti-vibration mountings shall generally comply with the following : - Enclosed Spring Mounting ( Caged or Restrained Springs) Each mounting shall consist of cast or fabricated telescopic top and bottom housing enclosing one

or more helical steel springs as the principle isolation elements, and shall incorporate a built- in levelling device.

The springs shall have an outside diameter of not less than 75% of the operating height, and be

selected to have at least 50% overload capacity before becoming coil bound. The bottom plate of each mounting shall have bonded to it a neoprene pad designed to attenuate

any high frequency energy transmitted by the springs. Mountings incorporating snubbers of restraining devices shall be designed so that the snubbing

damping or restraining mechanism, is capable f being adjusted to have no significant effect during the normal running of the isolated machine.

Restrained isolator shall be provided on chillers subject to approval by the manufacturers. 21.6 OPEN SPRING MOUNTINGS. Each mounting shall consist of one or more helical steel springs as the principal isolation

elements, and shall incorporate a built-in leveling device. The spring shall be fixed or otherwise securely located to cast or fabricated top and bottom plates, and shall have an outside diameter of not less than 75% of the operating height, and shall be selected to have at least 50% overload capacity before becoming coil-bound.

The bottom plate shall have bonded to it a neoprene pad designed to attenuate any high

frequency energy transmitted by the springs.




21.7 NEOPRENE-IN-SHEAR MOUNTINGS. Each mounting shall consist of a steel top plate and base plate completely embedded in oil

resistant neoprene. Each mounting shall be capable of being fitted with a levelling device, and bolt holes in the base plate and tapped holes in the top plate so that they may be bolted to the floor and equipment where required.

21.8 INERTIA BASES FOR PUMPS. The inertia base shall be an all welded mild steel channel frame the minimum depth of which shall

be 1/12 of the longest span between isolator but not less than 150 mm. filled with concrete the density of which shall be 2300 kg/m3.

The inertia base shall be sufficiently large to provide support for all parts of the equipment,

including any component which overhang the equipment base, such as suction and discharge elbows on centrifugal pumps.

The frame shall include pre-located equipment anchor bolts fixed into position and housed in a

steel sleeve allowing minor bolt location adjustment. Isolator support brackets shall be welded into the corners of the base and suitably re-enforced for

the load of the equipment and base. Additional reinforcing roads shall be provided at 200 mm. centres to ensure the concrete and

frame is adequately stiffened against distortion. 21.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS Flexible connections shall be provided on all duct work connections to fans, rotating plant and

equipment isolated from structure and anti-vibration materials or mountings. Pipe work and duct work crossing building movement or construction joints shall be installed with flexible connections.

Flexible connections on duct work to fans etc., shall be a minimum / maximum free length of 100

mm. / 200 mm. respectively to minimise noise transmission and noise breakout. They shall be completely free from stress and shall not be required to accept any weight.

Thickness and strength of flexible connection materials shall be suitable to withstand the positive

and negative fan pressures to which they will be subjected to and shall not allow perceptible leakage. The materials shall be durable, non flammable having food acoustical quality.

Flexible connections shall be fitted to all pump suction and discharge connections, chillers and

other vibrating equipment and where anti-vibration mounts and inertia basis are fitted.




Flexible connections shall be fitted to all cooler coil chilled water pipe work connections. Flexible connections shall allow freedom of movement of plant in all plans. Making flanges to pipe work flexible connections shall be of the smooth faced weld-nick type. Rubber Bellows shall be fitted as close to the source of vibration at practicable. The pipe at the

other end of the bellows shall be a fixed point. Rubber bellows shall be single convolution of multiply reinforced EPDM rubber with wire

reinforced cuffs. Flanges shall be able to swivel and be removable. The date of manufacture shall be moulded on the bellows. For traceability membranes shall have an indelible identification showing manufacturer, country of origin, the type and a batch number.

Tie bars with rubber top hat washers shall be used on bellows. For working temperatures up to 70o C the rubber bellows shall be high tensile synthetic fibre

reinforced. For working temperature between 70oC and 100oC the bellows carcase shall be steel wire mesh

reinforced throughout. Steel reinforced bellows shall be manufactured and approved to the Standards.

For temperatures above 100oC bellow shall be multiply stainless steel with Van Stone ends swivel

flanges. The overall length shall not exceed 130 mm. Flexible connections with screwed connections shall be reinforced EPDM rubber hoses and shall

have at least one full union to avoid torturing on installation. Flexible pipe connections on chilled water systems shall be suitable for a working pressure of 10

bar and test pressure of 17 bar.




APPENDIX “A”

LIST OF APPROVED MAKE / MODEL PREAMBLE:

1) All materials shall conform to relevant technical specifications of Volume – 2 of the Tender document. The materials shall be further subjected to tests in the recognized laboratories at the sole discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge and shall be at contractor‟s cost.

2) Materials bearing appropriate IS marking and having valid licence for last 3 years shall be given preference while selecting for the work.

3) In case of materials which are not widely available with IS marking in the market but conform to the technical specifications mentioned in the Tender Documents, the same shall be procured from any of the manufacturer listed below after prior written approval of the EIC.

4) Reinforcement steel shall be procured from any vendors who have the license for at least last 5 years for manufacture of BIS or Tor allies, subject to prior written approval of the EIC. Steel samples of all the lots procured shall be subject to testing through recognized laboratories and shall be at contractor‟s cost.

5) Cement for work shall have relevant IS marking and every lot shall be subject to tests in the recognized laboratories and shall be at contractor‟s cost.

6) EIC can approve any other brand subject to verification of the adherence to the relevant technical specifications.

A. Electrical Work

Sr. No. Details of Materials / Equipment Manufacturer‟s Name

1 LT Panel and Motor Control Centre. Sterling & Wilson / Arrow Engineers / Prabhat Power tech / Abak / M/S Vidyut Controls & Automation, Pune

2 Sandwiched Construction Busduct and Rising Mains

Control & Switchgear / Intraco BKS (Marketed by Larsen & Toubro) / Schneider Electric / Legrand

3 Final Distribution Board Hager / Legrand

4 Motor Starter L & T / Schneider / Siemens

5 Air Circuit Breaker (3/4 Pole)

Larsen & Toubro (U-Power) / Schneider Electric (Master Pact NW) / Siemens (3WL) / Legrand (DMX3)

6 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

Schneider Electric / Larsen & Toubro / Siemens / Legrand / Hager





7 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB) Hager / Legrand

8 Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB)

Hager / Legrand

9 Change Over Switch Havells / HPL – Socomec / Larsen & Toubro / Cummins

10 Current Transformer (Epoxy Cast Resin)

Automatic Electric / Indcoil / Pragati

11 Control Transformer/Potential Transformers

Automatic Electric / Indcoil / Pragati

12 Protection Relay

a. Numeric Type

Larsen & Toubro / Siemens

b. Electromagnetic Type Larsen & Toubro

13 Indicating Lamps LED type and Push Button

Larsen & Toubro (ESBEE) / Schneider Electric / Teknik

14 Overload relays with built in Single Phase preventer

Larsen & Toubro / Schneider Electric / Siemens

15 a. Electronic Digital Meters (A/V/PF/Hz/KW/KWH) with LED/ Display

L & T / Schneider Electric (Conzerve) / Secure

16 PVC insulated XLPE aluminium / copper conductor armoured MV Cables upto 1100 V grade

Finolex / KEI / Havells / CCI

17 LT Jointing Kit / Termination 3M / Raychem / REPL

18 Cable Gland (Double Compression type)

Comet / Cosmos

19 Bimettalic Cable Lug Comet / Cosmos / Dowell‟s (Biller India)

20 PVC insulated copper conductor stranded flexible wires (FRLS) -

Finolex / R R Kabel / Havells

21 Conduit

a. Mettalic / GI Conduit (ISI

approved)

AKG / BEC / Vimco

b. PVC Conduit & Accessories

(ISI approved)

Precision / Modi





c. Flexible GI Conduit Flexicon / PLICA India Pvt. Ltd.

22 Switch & Socket Legrand ARTEOR / MK – Wrap around plus / Crabtree

Verona

23 Terminal Blocks Connect Well / Elmex

24 Industrial Socket Legrand / Hager

a. Splash Proof MDS Legrand / Schneider Electric

b. Metal Clad HANSEL / MDS

25 Ceiling Fan Crompton Greaves High Speed / Havells Pacer

26 Lighting Fxiture

a. Halogen / PL / Metal Halide /

Fluorescent

Philips / Wipro

b. External Lighting Fixture Philips / Wipro

c. Aviation obstruction Lights

(LED Types)

Actos / Bajaj / Binay

d. Electronic Ballast (To be

selected as per fixture

manufacturer)

Philips / Wipro

e. Occupancy Sensors Philips / Wipro

27 Timer Hot-dip Galvanized

Larsen & Toubro / Schneider Electric

28 Cable Trays (Factory Fabricated) / Raceways / GI Trunking

MK (raceway) / Asian Ancillary Corporation / Profab Engineer / OBO Bettermann

29 UPVC Wall trunking MK / Legrand / OBO Bettermann

30 Lighting Poles (Polygonal GI poles) Bajaj Electricals

31 Fire Sealant & Fire Retardant Paint 3 M India Ltd. / HILTI

32 Standalone emergency light fixture Legrand / PHILIPS





33 Power/Aux. Contactor Larsen & Toubro / Schneider Electric / Siemens

34 Motor Protection Circuit Breaker(MPCB)

Larsen & Toubro / Schneider Electric / Siemens

35 Selector Switches Kaycee / Salzer (Larsen & Toubro)

36 Lighting Poles Bombay Tubes and Poles / Bajaj Electricals / HOMDEC Lighting / Keselec / K-Lite

37 Fire Sealant & Fire Retardant Paint 3 M India Ltd. / HILTI / OBO Bettermann / Promat

38 Lightning Protection System

ABB – Pulsar / Indelec/ Nimbus

39 Lighting & Surge Voltage Protection ASCO / Hager (Marketed by L&T) / Indelec / OBO Bettermann / Schneider Electric

40 HDPE underground cable duct

Rex Polyextrusion / Tirupati Plasomatics / Duraline

41 RCC Hume Pipes – NP2 Class Dhere / K K / INDIAN HUME PIPE / Pranali

42 Welding Rod Advani / Esab

43 Alarm Annunciator Advani Oralikon / Larsen & Toubro / Minilec

44 G. I. & M.S. Pipe upto 200 MM Dia. Jindal / Tata Steel

45 G. I. & MS PIPES above 200 mm dia factory rolled

Jindal / SAIL

46 GI Pipe Fittings

Unik / Zoloto M

47 HRC Fuse & Fuse fittings L & T / Siemens

48 Insulating Rubber Mats Commercial Enterprises / DL Miller & Co. Ltd. / Premier Polyfilm Ltd. / RMG Polyvinyl India Ltd.

STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM (VOICE / DATA)

1 Cat-6 Cable, Wires & Fiber Optic Cable

Molex / Legrand / Systemax

2 Patch Cords, patch panels, cross connect, data outlet, LIUs, Pigtails, Splice Holders

Molex / Legrand / Systemax





3 Main Distribution Frame for voice, Telephone Tag blocks

Krone / ITL

4 Telephone Armoured Cables Finolex / ITL / Polycab

5 Data Switches, receiver , media converter

3-Com / CISCO / HP

6 Racks for Data Switches / Patch Panels

HCL / Rittal / Valrack / Legrand

SOLAR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEM

1 Power Conditioning Unit (PCU) (NEC,UL, CE, certified/specification)

SMA (America) / Satcon power system Canada / Advance energy industry / GE energy / Optimal power solutions, Australia

2 Accessories/Connecters MC / TycoSolarlok

3 Data logar/System performance

ABB Electro industries Energy Recommerce Energy Tracking IIc / SMA America / Schlumberger

4 Solar Photo Voltaic Modules

Sun power / Surmount Energy solution /Moser Bear /Tata BP Solar / GE Solar / Sanyo / Vikram-Solar

5 Solar Photo Voltaic System Integrator

Surmount Energy solution / Tata BP Solar / Square Engineering (Sun Cube) / Mahindra EPC

ELEVATOR SYSTEM

1 Elevators Schindler / Otis / Kone / Johnson

Note :

In case of LAN & Telephone works, all the passive components shall be of one make or else

100% compatibility shall be ensured. Required certification for compatibility from

component manufacturer to be furnished on demand of Engineer-in-Charge




B. Public Health Work


1 Vitreous chinaware water closet, Flush Tank, Wash Basin, Soap dish, Urinals, Toilet paper roll holder, Sink etc.

Parryware, Hindware, Cera, Neyser or approved eq.

2 CP brass fittings & fixtures such as Bib tap, Stop cock, Pillar tap, waste coupling, Bottle Trap etc.

Kingston, Jaquar, GEM, L&K, MARC, Parko Ess-Ess or approved eq.

3 Seat & cover for EWC Commander, Hindustan, Capri, Supreme or approved eq.

4 Jet Spray Jaquar

5 WC Connectors Prince / Supreme

6 Toilet Paper Holder Jaquar

7 Glass, Mirror Modi Guard, Saint Gobin, Float glass or appr. eq.

8 Stainless steel Sink Nirali, Neelkanth, AMC, Jayna or approved eq.

9 Urinal Sensors Jaquar

10 Floor Drain Fixture, Rain Water Outlets

ACO / GMGR / Geberit / Viega

11 G.I / M.S Pipes ITC, TATA, Zenith, Ambika, Surya, Khandelwal, Jindal, Hissar / AST Pipes / Hitech / Swastik or approved eq.

12 G.I Malleable fittings PEC, MJM, Unik, Zoloto, „R‟/ Jain Sons / Kirti or approved eq.

13 C.P. Grating for Floor Trap Chilly / GMGR / Neer

14 GM or copper alloy Gate / Peet / Globe / Check valve

Neta, Sant, Kingston, NEW, Leader, Zoloto, GG

15 Ball Valve MBM, Sant, Techno, A.I ( JS ), Zoloto or approved eq.

16 GM / Forged Brass Ball Valves CIM / Danfoss / Jayhiwa / Kitz / RB / Sant / Tiemme / TSB

17 Air Valve / Kinetic Air Valve Durga, BSJShau, VKE, Sant, Hawa, IVC, Mayur, BJC

18 Water meter Capston, Keycee, Paramount or approved eq.

19 Sluice valve / Foot valve ( swing & lift type )

BSJ-Shau, Mayur, Upadhyay, Minoti, Effco, Kartar, KPM, IVC, Leader, Durga, Kirloskar.





20 C.I Water quality pipes Electrosteel, KDUL, Kesoram or approved eq.

21 C.I Soil quality pipes A-1, Neco, Rifco, SRIF or approved eq.

22 C.I Frame & Cover A-1, Neco, Rifco, SRIF, Kajeco or approved eq.

23 S.W Pipe & Gully Trap Kashmira, Rajura, Girco, Perfect, C.I.or approved eq.

24 RCC Hume pipe IHP, Pranali, Premier, Shreeji, Pragati, Usha, JSP or app. eq

25 SFRC frame & cover / gratings Bharat, Shreeji, SS, KK or approved eq.

26 HDPE Pipe Prince, Goutam, Duraline , Kimplas,/ Reliance or approved eq.

27 SS Pipes Remi / Viega

28 SWR-PVC pipe & fittings Prince, Premium, Supreme, Finolex, Kissan, Perfect Potteries, JABALPUR or approved eq.

29 Water supply – PVC pipes & fittings Prince, Premium or approved eq.

30 Pig Lead Hindustan Zinc

31 PVC flushing Cistern Commander, Hindustan, Duralite or approved eq.

32 Pressure Gauge Pie-big, Guru or approved eq.

33 Foot Valve ( Ball type ) Normex

34 SBR / EPDM Gaskets Prabhat, Orient, Paul, Durable or approved eq.

35 C.I fittings / Specials Kejriwal, Upadhyay, Orient, Durga or approved eq.

36 Flush Valves Jaguar, Parko,Orient or approved eq.

37 Electronic flush Valve for Urinal Cera, Parryware, Jaguar, Utech, Robo, Angus, Askon Engineers / Euronics / Toshi / UTEC System or approved eq.

38 Check Valve – WaferType

Advance / Danfoss / Kirloskar / Jayhiwa

39 Check Valve – Dual Plate Advance / SKS

40 Check Valve Forged Screwed CIM / Leader / RB / Sant / TBS / Zoloto

41 Check Valves ( slim type ) Zoloto, Intervalve or approved eq.

42 Butterfly Valve Audco, C&R, Intervalve, Keystone, IVC, Durga, Danfoss / Honeywell / Jayhiwa or approved eq.

43 Ball Valve ( 15 to 40 mm ) CIM, Sant or approved eq.





44 Pressure Reducing Valve Fouress / Honeywell / RB / SKS / OR / Zoloto

45 Cockroach trap Chilly

46 CI double flanged non-return valve Kirloskar, IVC, Leader, or approved eq.

47 Cast Iron Pipes & Fittings Manhole covers and frames

As per IS:3989 (Pipes & Fittings) Kapilash

As per IS:1729 (Manhole covers and frames)

Raj Iron Foundry Agra

As per IS:1536 (CIClass LA Pipes) IISCO / NECO

48 D.I. Manhole Covers & Frames Kartar valves & fittings

49 CILA fittings Kartar valves & fittings

50 Suspended Manhole and Gully Trap Patel Pattern

51 Drip Seal ACQUA Bond / Vinod Cement Co. Chandigarh

52 GI pipe sealent Henkel - LOCTITE 55

53 Pipe clamp & supports Chilly / Euroclamp / Easyflex / Gripple

54 D. I. Pipes Electro Steel / Jindal / Lanco Kalahasthi

55 Copper Pipes & Fitting Flowflex – Rajco / Viega – Max flow

56 UPVC Pipe Astral / Finolex / Supreme

57 CPVC pipes Ajay / Ashirwad / Astral

58 PB Pipe Flexalen – Thermaflex / George Fisher

59 Solenoid Valve Avcon / Danfoss

60 Thermostatic valve Oventrop

61 Air Release Valve Arco / CIM / Fouress OR / SKS

62 Ball Float Valve Esseti / HBD / Zoloto

63 NRV – Ball type – Sewage application

Danfoss / Silverspark

64 Y Strainer CI Emerald / Sant / SKS / Zoloto

65 Self-Priming Pumps Johnson / Kirloskar

66 Drinking Water Cooler Blue Star / Usha / Voltas





67 Anti-Vibration Mounting & Flexible Connections

Cori / Dunlop / Flexionics / Kanwal Industrial Corporation / Resistoflex / VIMPA

68 Pressure Gauge Emerald / Fiebig / H Guru / Wika

69 Water Meter (Mechanical Type) Actaris / Kranti / Kent

70 Electronic Flow Meter Krohne (Forbes Marshall) / Rockwin

71 Level Controller & Indicator (Water) Auto Pump / Cirrus Engineering / Elegent Controls / Technika / Techtrol

72 Paints Asian Paints / Berger / ICI / Shalimar Paints

73 MH / Water Tank Plastic Steps KGM / Patel / Pranali Industries

74 Fastner Fisher / Hilti

75 Fire Sealant Birla 3 M / Hilti / Promat / STI (USA)/ Fire master

76 Manhole (Prefabricated) OK Play / Supreme

77 Temperature Sensor/ Gauge Forbes Marshall / Danfoss / Wika

78 Kitchen Hot Zone Suppression System

Ansul (Tyco) / Amerex India




C. Fire Fighting Work

S. No. Description Approved Makes

1 Fire hydrant valves New Age, Arihant, Bhogilal, Hiren Ind. Corpn. or approved eq.

2 Stand post hydrant Kejariwal, Orient, Durga, Kamla, Janta or app eq.

3 Sprinkler head Grinnel, Spray safe, Central, H.D or approved eq.

4 Pumps & Pump sets Kirloskar, Mather & Platt, Becon, Crompton Greaves, Jyoti, Calama, shehara or approved eq.

5 Pipe coat material ( pipe protection ) PYPECOAT

6 Fire Extinguishers New Age, Arihant, Hiren, Safex, Firestone Ind. or approved eq.

7 Ductile iron pipes Electro steel, Lanco, SAW or approved eq.

8 Ductile iron specials / fittings Electro steel, Kejariwal, Kiswock, Truforms or approved eq.

9 Fire hose, First aid hose reel, Branch pipe, Siamese connections, Hose coupling, Nozzle, Sprinklers, Fire Brigade connection etc.

Firex, Minimax, Safex, New Age, Arihant, Bhogilal, Hiren or approved eq.

10 Fire / Sprinkler Main Pump / Jockey Aurora / Armstrong / Grundfos / ITT (A-C Pumps)

11 Diesel Engine Cummins / Greaves / KOEL

12 Motor Bharat Bijlee / Crompton Greaves

13 GI / M.S Pipes (IS : 1239 and IS : 3589)

APL-Apollo / Jindal / Tata Steel / Surya / AST Pipes / Hitech / Swastik

14 Standard M.S. Fittings Seamless Fittings / Pipeline Products

15 DI / CI / Forged Steel Fittings Jainsons Industries / VS

16 DI Grooved Fitting & Coupling Tyco / Victaulic / Viking

17 C.I. Class LA Pipes Electro Steel Calcutta / IISCO / NECO / Kesoram Calcutta

18 RCC Pipe K K / Local & Approved Pranali

19 D.I. Manhole Covers & Frames Kartar valves & fittings / NECO / Raj Iron Foundry Agra

20 Paints Asian Paints / Berger / ICI / Shalimar Paints

21 Double / Single Headed Landing Valve

New Age / Safeguard / Shah Bhogilal





22 Fire Hose CRC / Jayashree / Padmini / Safeguard / Safefire

23 First Aid Hose Reel (LPCB Approved)

Monsher / Padmini / Safeguard / Safefire

24 Gun Metal Brach Pipe New Age / Safeguard

25 Fireman Axe New Age / Safeguard

26 Installation Control Valve HD / Newage / Tyco / Viking

27 Sprinkler Heads Tyco / Viking / Newage

28 Flexible Drop Connection (UL Listed)

Flexhead / Newage / Tyco

29 AFF Solutiona & Cscillating Nozzle Ansul / Newage

30 Electrical panel Detection & Supperssion System

Avec India / Fire Trace

31 Fire Extinguishers Alert – Tyco / Minimax / Safefire / Safeguard

32 Water Flow Switch

Honeywell Potter Rapid Control System Sensor Spray Safe

33 Pipe Protection Wrapping Rustech – Coatek

34 Pipe clamp & supports Chilly / Euroclamp / Easyflex / Gripple




D. HVAC WORKS


1. Scroll Chillers

Bluestar Carrier Trane JCI (York) Voltas

2. Primary CHW/HW pump with Variable Speed Pumping System including following : Adjustable Frequency Drive Automatic AFD Bypass Pump Controller / Tertiary loop controller Differential Pressure Sensor /Transmitter

Armstrong (USA) Grundfoss (Europe) ITT Bell & Gosette (USA) Wilo

3. Pressurized Expansion Tank and Air Separator

Anergy Instruments Emerald KD agency

4. Air Handling Unit/TFA‟s Edgetech Zeco Caryaire Saveair Clivet (Bangalore) Note: Fans should be of Kruger / Nicotra / Comefri

5 Air Handling Unit accessories such as Corners, Profiles, Hinges, Handles etc. Cooling Coil for AHU

Hira Arosio To be manufactured by individual supplier as indicated above

6. Heat pumps Bluebox McQuay (Daikin) Trane York (JCI) STG Heating Pvt Ltd.





7. Heat Exchanger GEA ITT Parkaire STG Tranter India Alfa laval

8. Anticorrosion Painting on Cooling Coils, Condenser Coils and Copper tubing

Weatherproof coil shield (For Corrosion prevention of Aluminium Fins) AC Guard CP (For protecting all joints, U bends and copper tubing exposed to aggressive ambient)

9. Split Unit (5 Star as per BEE) / Package Unit (with Refrigerant R 410A / R 134A) / Self-contained Roof Top Unit

Blue Star Carrier Voltas Toshiba Daikin

10. Fan Coil Unit Blue Star Carrier Voltas Toshiba

11. Cooling Tower Advance Mihir Paharpur

12. Online Cooling Water Treatment Plant

GE Water Ion Exchange Thermax

13. Centrifugal Fan (AMCA Certified)

Saveair Voltas Caryaire

14 Axial Flow Fan (AMCA Certified)

Comefri Kruger Nicotra Greenheck Systemair

15

Inline / Roof extractor Fan

Comefri Kruger Nicotra Greenheck Systemair





16. Propeller Fan GE Almonard Crompton

17. Heat Recovery Units (HRU‟s) Bry air (Arctic India) Ostberg Flaktwoods Greenheck

18. PIPES & FITTINGS

MS PIPES

GI Pipes

Tata (up to 300mm dia) Jindal (Hissar) / Sail (for sizes above 300mm dia) Tata (up to 300mm dia) Jindal / Sail (for sizes above 300mm dia)

Motors ABB / Siemens

U-PVC Pipe for AHU / FCU

drainage

HDPE Pipes

Finolex Kissan Finolex Kissan

Butterfly Valve (32 mm and

upwards)

Audco

Pump suction Guide Armstrong ITT Emerald

Butterfly Valve with Actuator Belimo Honeywell Invensys Johnson Control Siemens

Balancing Valve Automatic Danfoss Flowcon TA Auto Flow

Balancing Valve cum flow control

(Pressure independent dynamic)

valve with modulating actuator

Danfoss Flowcon TA Auto Flow

Ball valve Audco





Gate valves

Leader Zoloto Audco Kirloskar

Solenoid Valve Avcon Danfoss

Check valve – Wafer Type

Check valve – Dual Plate

Advance Danfoss Kirloskar Advance

Pot Strainer (with back wash) /

Y Strainer

DS Engg Sant Emerald

Dial type Pressure Gauge

(SS 304)

H Guru General Instruments

Dial type Thermometer

(SS 304)

Combined pressure / temperature

gauge with digital display and BAS

compatibility

H Guru General Instruments Grundfoss

Ball valve with Y strainer for FCUs

Bugatti (Italy) Emerald Rapid Control

Welding Electrodes (Gr 6013) Advani Essab

Ball valve with Y-Strainer

(Fan Coil Unit)

Bugatti (Italy) Emerald Rapid Control

Auto Air Vent Valve

Flamco Amtrol

RPUF Insulation for Pipes Lloyds Voltas

Closed Loop Expansion Tank Anergy

19.

GI Sheet

Jindal TATA Nippon Sail





20. Expansion plenums Rolastar Air master Caryaire Voltas

21. Factory Made Rectangular Duct Prime Engineering Voltas Rolastar

22. Filters (MERV-8, 13 & 17) Dyna Filters Airtech Purolator John Fowler

23. Factory Made Spiral Duct Prime Engineering Voltas Rolastar

24. Insulated flexible ducts Atco Seven Star Western Air Duct

25. Pre-insulated Pipe Perma Seven Star SPPI

26.

Grille/diffuser

Ravistar Air master Caryaire-Titus Trox

27. Volume (Butterfly) Dampers Ravistar Air master Caryaire Trox

28.

Smoke & Fire Damper

Green heck Ruskin Ravistar with latest UL listing

29. Fire Damper Actuator & control

panel

Belimo Juvinta Barcol

30. Anchor Fastener Fischer Hilti

31. Insulation

Closed Cell Elastomeric nitrile

rubber along with adhesive

Duct Insulation / Acoustic lining /

Under deck insulation

Armaflex K-Flex





Fiberglass (Al. Foil Faced) Lloyd Insulation Twiga Owens Corning

32. Acoustic insulation

a. Nitrile rubber

b. AHU room panel type acoustic lining using fiber glass insulation

Armaflex Eurobatex K-Flex Thermoflex KC industries Prime engineering Eqvt

33. Expanded Polystyrene (TF Quality) Beardsell Coolite DEBS Products Styrene Packaging

34. Premoulded PUF section / Nitrile

Rubber for pipe support

Beardsell Lloyds Bakelite Hylam Armacell K Flex Thermobreak

35. Protective Coating over Closed Cell

Elastomeric – Fiberglass Woven

Cloth

Armacell Armachek Paramount Polytreat Twiga

36. UV Protective coating Armacell Armachek Amicol Paramount Polytreat Polybond

37. Fire Sealant & Paint

Birla 3 M Hilti

38. Controls

Two way Modulating & On/Off valves

Honeywell Johnson Control Siemens (Landis & Staefa) For bigger size valves 450mm & above size – Audco valve with Limtrok/Rotrok/Marsh actuator can be used

2-Way modulating valves with electrical actuators

Honeywell Johnson Control Siemens





39. Proportionate Room Thermostat with Digital Temperature Indication for FCU

Danfoss Honeywell Johnson Control Sauter Schneider Siemens

40. Safety thermostat for heater Honeywell Siemens

41. Dial Thermometer Capillary Type. Penn Tadington

42. Flow Switch

Danfoss Rapid Control

43.

Miscellaneous

BTU meters Krone Marshall Kemstrup Siemens Onicon Yokogawa

Sound Attenuator Greenheck Ruskin Seven star Carryaire Clivet

Vibration Isolator Cori Dunlop Easyflex Flexionics Resistoflex

Flexible Pipe Connection Cori Easyflex Flexionics Resistoflex Softt Bellows Industries Vimpa

Flexible duct connector Mapro Easyflex Resistoflex

44. Heavy duty, pipe, duct and electrical support

Gripple Diamond Hi-Tech

45. Grooved Pipe Connector

Grinnell Victaulic





46. ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

1.

Power Distribution Panel and Motor Control Centre (<1000 Amps Bus bar ratings.)

Lotus Zennith Elins Larsen & Toubro Sterling & Wilson Electro Allied Products Pvt. Ltd.

2. Starter ABB Allen Bradley (Rockwell Automation) Kirloskar L & T Schneider Siemens

3. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) ABB Danfoss

4. Air Circuit Breaker ( 3/4 Pole )

ABB Areva GE (Imported) Siemens L & T / Legrand

5. Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

ABB Areva GE (Imported) Siemens L & T / Legrand / Hager

6. Motor Protection Circuit Breaker(MPCB)

ABB Legrand GE (Imported) Schneider L & T / Hager

7. Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) ASCO (USA) GE (Chicago)

8. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB) & MCB DBs

Hager Legrand Schneider Siemens

9. Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB)

Hager Legrand Schneider Siemens





10. Power/Aux. Contactor / Capacitor Duty Contactor

ABB GE (Imported) Schneider L & T Siemens

11. Change Over Switch C & S Havells Elcon HPL – Socomec Larsen & Toubro

12. Control Transformer/Potential Transformers

Automatic Electric Kappa Intrans Pragati

13. Current Transformer (Epoxy Cast Resin)

Automatic Electric Kappa Intrans Pragati

14. Protection Relay Numeric Type

ABB Areva Schneider Electric Siemens

15. Indicating Lamps LED type and Push Button

Larsen & Toubro Schneider Electric Siemens Teknik Vaishno Electricals

16. Overload relays with built in Single Phase preventer

ABB Areva Schneider Electric Siemens

17. a.Electronic Digital Meters (A/V/PF/Hz/KW/KWH) with LED Display

Automatic Electric Rishabh L & T Schneider Electric Secure





18. PVC insulated XLPE aluminium/copper conductor armoured LT Cables upto 1100 V grade

CCI Finolex Polycab RPG - KEI Havells

19. Cable Glands Double Compression with earthing links

Comet Dowells Jainson SMI

20. Bimettalic Cable Lug Comet Dowells Jainson SMI

21. PVC insulated copper conductor stranded flexible wires (LSZH) -

Finolex Polycab Powerflex Rajanigandha R R Cable

22. Conduit Wiring

a) Steel (ISI embossed)

AKG Bharat BEC GB Supreme

b) GI (ISI embossed)

AKG Bharat BEC GB Supreme

c) FRLS PVC Conduit (ISI embossed)

Avon Precision VIP

d) LSZH wires Finolex Powerflex Polycab Rajnigandha RR cables; Havells

e) Modular switches & sockets

Legrand - Arteor Crabtree - Verona MK – Wrap around plus





f) Industrial plugs and sockets Neptune Gewiss Scame-CGI Schneider Legrand, Hager

23. Industrial Socket

Splash Proof Gewiss Legrand MDS Legrand Neptune Balls Scame-CGL Schneider Electric, Hager

24. Industrial Socket Metal Clad Gewiss Legrand MDS Legrand Neptune Balls Scame-CGL Schneider Electric, Hager

25. Selector Switch, Toggle switch Jay

26. Timer AE EAPL

27. Cable Trays (Factory Fabricated) / Raceways

Indiana Profab OBO Technofab

28. Fire Sealant & Fire Retardant Paint Birla 3 M HILTI

29. Control Cables Finolex Polycab RPG Teracom Universal

30. LT Cables CCI RPG Finolex, Havells

31. Termination Blocks Connectwell Elmex Wago

Note : Preference will be given to use maximum number of available components from any one of the selected manufacturer for the project.




E. IBMS WORKS


1. Software Automated Logic Controls Honeywell Honeywell - Webs Honeywell - Tridium Honeywell - Trend Johnson Controls Siemens Schneider - t.a.c Trane L&T Atmos

2. DDC Controllers Automated Logic Controls Honeywell Honeywell - Webs Honeywell - Tridium Honeywell - Trend Johnson Controls Siemens Schneider - t.a.c Trane L&T Atmos

3. System Integration Units Automated Logic Controls Honeywell Honeywell - Webs Honeywell - Tridium Honeywell - Trend Johnson Controls Siemens Schneider - t.a.c Trane L&T Atmos

4. Immersion Temperature Sensor Delta Control Greystone Honeywell Johnson PTL Siemens Sontay t.a.c Trane





5. Duct Temperature Sensor Delta Control Greystone Honeywell Johnson PTL Siemens Sontay t.a.c Trane

6. Outside temperature Sensor Delta Control Greystone Honeywell Johnson PTL Siemens Sontay t.a.c Trane

7. BTU Meter Belimo KAMSTRUP Siemens Landis &Gyer

8. Duct Humidity Sensor Delta Control Greystone Honeywell Johnson PTL Siemens Sontay t.a.c Trane

9. Room Humidity Sensor Bapi Delta Control Greystone Honeywell Johnson PTL Siemens Sontay t.a.c Trane TREND





10. Pressure Transmitters Delta Control Greystone Honeywell Johnson PTL Siemens Sontay t.a.c Trane L&T ATMOS KELE

11. Flow Meter (Ultrasonic) Forbes Marshal Honeywell KAMSTRUP Siemens Landis & Gyer

12. Differential Pressure Switches Beck Gmbh Delta Control Greystone Honeywell Johnson PTL Siemens Sontay t.a.c Trane L&T ATMOS

13. Water Flow Switches Beck Gmbh Honeywell Johnson Schnider Siemens Sontay Yamatake Controls

14. Level Switches Filpro Kele Sontay Greystone

15 Level Transmitters Filpro Kele Sontay Greystone





16. DDC Controller Enclosure

Antia Electricals Shrinath Enterprises Arrow Engineers New Electricals Popular Switchgear Power control Engineering. Rittal Scoot Engineering Sterling &WIlson Square “D” Automation Zenith Engineering

17. Water Hardness Analyser HACH Honeywell Lumex Polymetron Thermo Triton

18. P.H./ Chlorine Analyser HACH Honeywell KELE Polymetron Siemens Sontay Thermo Triton

19. TDS Meter HACH Honeywell KELE Polymetron Siemens Sontay Thermo Triton

20. CO Sensor/CO2 sensor Honeywell Johnson KELE L&T ATMOS PTL Siemens Sontay TREND





21. Conductivity Meter HACH Honeywell KELE Polymetron Siemens Sontay Thermo Triton

22. Communication Cables / Signal Cable/ Control/power Cable (indigenous)

Caliplast Finolex Lappkabel Neolex Polycab RR Kabel Technoflex

23. Communication Cables / Signal Cable/ Control Cable (imported)

AT & T Beldon Comscope Fusion Polymers Nordex Southwest Wire & Cable

24. Metallic Conduits AKG BEC NIC Vimco

25. PVC Conduits AKG BEC Precision

Central Control Station

1. Personal Computer DELL Hewlett Packard IBM Wipro

2. Colour Monitor L.G. Philips Samtron Samsung

3. Printer Hewlett Packard Cannon





4. Mouse Dell Logitech Microtek

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

1. Fire Sensors & module Bosch Cooper GE Edwards Honeywell (XLS 3000) Johnson Notifier Siemens (Fire Finder Series) Secutron Securiton – Switzerland L&T - SCHRACK

2. Main Control Panel ( Including the emergency voice evacuation, Repeater panel Graphic Display software)

Bosch Cooper GE Edwards Honeywell (XLS 3000) Johnson Notifier Siemens (Fire Finder Series) Secutron Securiton – Switzerland L&T - SCHRACK

3. Manual call stations/ Hooters/ Strobes Multi tap speaker

Bosch Cooper GE Edwards Honeywell (XLS 3000) Johnson Notifier Siemens (Fire Finder Series) Secutron Securiton – Switzerland L&T - SCHRACK

4. Public Address System and All Accessories

Ateis - Switzerland Bosch Cooper GE

5. Sealed maintenance free batteries Exide GS Batteries (Japan Storage Co Ltd.) Hitachi





6. Communication Cable - Indigenous

Caliplast Finolex Lappkabel Neolex Polycab RR Kabel Technoflex

7 Communication Cable - Imported Belden Comscope- USA Southwest wire & Cable Volex

8. Personal Computer Dell Hewlet Packard IBM Wipro

9. Color Monitor LG Philips Samtron Samsung

10. Printer

Hewlet Packard Cannon


CCTV SYSTEM- ANALOG

1. DVR, DVM,& Accessories American Dynamics Axis Bosch GE Honeywell Pelco Siemens Verint L&T – Perito





2. CCTV- Cameras American Dynamics Axis Bosch GE Honeywell Pelco Siemens Verint L&T - Perito

3. Monitor Bosch GE Honeywell Pelco Siemens

4. Lenses American Dynamics Bosch GE Honeywell Panasonic Pelco Siemens Vicon Axis Sony Vivotek

5. Weatherproof Housing American Dynamics Axis Bosch GE Honeywell Pelco Siemens

6. RG6-Signal Cables /Control / power Cables- Indegenous

Caliplast Finolex Lappkabel Neolex Polycab Rolex RR Kabel Technoflex





7. Communication Cable/ Signal Cables /Control / power Cables- Imported

Belden Comscope- USA Southwest wire & Cable Volex

8. Metallic Conduits (MS/GI) AKG BEC NIC Wimco


10. Color Monitor LG Philips Samtron Samsung

11. Printer Hewlet Packard Cannon






APPENDIX “B”

CEMENT CONSUMPTION COEFFICIENTS (Derived on the basis of CPWD AOR)

Sr. No Brief Description of Item Unit Cement

kg Bags

Part-I-SANITARY INSTALLATIONS

1

Fixing I.W.C. or European or pedestal type w.c.with flushing

cistern and brackets, slush pipe with fittings and clamp

including making good the walls and floors.

Each 5.0 0.10

2 Fixing 32 mm φ flush pipe Each 1.0 0.02

3 Fixing w.c. pan only + a pair of foot rests. Each 2.5+0.5 0.06

4 Fixing flat back or wall type, lipped front, urinal basin :

a) One urinal with 5 litre cistern Each 2.5 0.05

b) Two urinal with 10 litre cistern Each 4.0 0.08

c) Three urinal with 10 litre cistern Each 6.7 0.13

d) Four urinal with 15 litre cistern Each 9.5 0.19

e) Urinal basin only Each 1.0 0.02

5 Fixing stall urinals

a) Single stall urinal with 5 litre cistern Each 5.1 0.10

b) Two stall urinal with 10 litre cistern Each 10.2 0.20

c) Three stall urinal with 10 ltr. Cistern Each 15.3 0.31

d) Four stall urinal with 15 ltr. cistern Each 20.3 0.41

e) Stall urinal only Each 2.0 0.04

6 Fixing lavatory basin/ sink with brackets & making good the

walls Each 2.5 0.05

7 Fixing wash basin/ kitchen sink Each 1.5 0.03

8 Fixing T.W.draining board with brackets and making good the

walls Each 1.4 0.03

9 Fixing M.S. holder bat clamp in C.C. 1:2:4 block/ M.S. stay and

clamp for C.I. pipe Each 0.5 0.01

10 Fixing S.C.I trap with grating including making good the walls

and floors Each 2.5 0.05




11 Cutting chase in B.W. for fixing S.C.I. pipe & making good the

B.W. in In C.M. 1:3

a) 100 mm dia Each 5.0 0.10

b) 50 mm dia Each 3.33 0.07

12 Fixing square mouth S.W. gully trap with C.I. grating and B.M.

Chamber Each 23.0 0.46

13 Providing and fixing M.S. foot rests with 200 x 200 x 100 mm

C.C. 1:3:6 block Each 0.88 0.018

14 Fixing C.I. Steps (Rungs) Each 1.0 0.02





kg Bags

1

a

b

c

d

e

f

Part-II-WATER SUPPLY SYSTEM

Constn.of BM valve chambers 1.0 M depth ,230 mm thick b.m.

in cm 1:4 over 150 mm thick CC 1:2:4 bed also for capping and

bearing Course on the top of masonry wall, 150 mm offset cp in

cm1:3 mixed With w.p.comp.@ 2% by wt. Of cement , 20 mm

thick both on int.& ext.surfaces, int. surfaces finished smooth

with a floating coat of neat cement and ext.surfaces finished

rough with wooden float , providing 100 mm thick RCC slab

casted in G. M.S.angle box frame.

Chamber 1 M. x 1 M. clear int.dim. without s.b.

Chamber 1 M. x 1 M. clear int.dim. with s.b.

Extra depth for V.C.over item No: (a&b).

Chamber 1.2 M. x 1.2 M. clear int.dim. without s.b.

Chamber 1.2 M. x 1.2 M. clear int.dim. with s.b.

Extra depth for V.C.over item No: (d&e).

Each

Each

RM

Each

Each

RM

493.00

493.00

236.50

592.00

592.00

274.00

9.86

9.86

4.73

11.84

11.84

5.48

2

A

a

b

B

a

b

c

C

a

b

c

Prov.Valve chamber(suitable for C.I. Frame & cover) of

following int.dim.,230 mm b.m.in CM 1:4, over a 150 mm th.

CC1:4:8 bed with 150 mm offset from all finished faces also for

capping and bearing course on the top of masonry wall, 15 mm

thick c.p.in cm1:3 with w.p.comp.@ 2% by wt.of cement on

int.& ext.surfaces, all int.surfaces finished smooth with a

floating coat of neat cement and ext.surfaces finished rough

with wooden float.

Valve chamber of internal dimension 300x300 mm upto

following depth.

Valve chamber of 300mm depth.



following depth.





following depth.




Each

Each

Each

Each

Each

Each

Each

Each

76.00

90.00

98.50

116.00

133.50

121.50

143.00

164.50

1.52

1.80

1.97

2.32

2.67

2.43

2.86

3.29





kg Bags

3

A

a b

B

a b c

C

a b c

Prov. Valve chamber (suitable for SFRC cover) of following

int.dim.,230 mm b.m. in CM 1:4, over a 150 mm th. CC1:4:8

bed with 150 mm offset from all finished faces also for capping

and bearing course on the top of masonry wall, 15 mm thick

c.p.in cm1:3 with w.p.comp.@ 2% by wt.of cement on int.& ext.

surfaces, all int.surfaces finished smooth with a floating coat of

neat cement and ext.surfaces finished rough with wooden float,

supplying & placing SFRC cover.


following depth.




following depth.





following depth.




Each

Each

Each

Each

Each

Each

Each

Each

76.00

90.00

98.50

116.00

133.50

121.50

143.00

164.50

1.52

1.80

1.97

2.32

2.67

2.43

2.86

3.29

4 Fixing G.I. pipe on wall including making good the walls

(Note: 1 HaM = 100 M)

a) 15 mm φ HaM 5.0 0.10

b) 20 mm φ HaM 6.0 0.12

c) 25 mm φ HaM 7.0 0.14

d) 32 mm φ HaM 7.5 0.15

e) 40 mm φ HaM 8.0 0.16

f) 50 mm φ HaM 8.0 0.16

g) 80 mm φ HaM 9.0 0.18

h) 100 mm φ HaM 10.0 0.20

i) 150 mm φ HaM 12.50 0.25





kg Bags

Part-III-SEWERAGE SYSTEM

1a

Const.of rect.inspect.chambers of int.size 900 mm x 600 mm

at bottom and int.size 900x450mm at top for depth upto

600mm & brick masonry in cm 1:2, 230 mm th.wall incl.making

brick tapering for log.walls for 450mm depth meas.from top of

frame & cover, over 150mm thick CC1:2:4 with 150mm offset

from all outer fini.wall surfaces,also for benching ,20mm

th.c.p.in cm 1:1 with w.p.comp. @2% by wt.of cem.on int.&

ext. surfaces, int.surfaces and channel finished smooth with

floating coat of neat cement and ext.surfaces finished rough

with wooden float.

Each 312.50 6.25

1b

Extra over item 4(a) for depth beyond 600 mm initial depth

upto a depth of 1500 mm. all as per specification and as

directed.

RM 357.50 7.15

2a

Const.of circular manhole of 1200 mm int.dia.at bottom and

540/600 mm at top for 1500 mm ini.depth & b.m.in cm 1:2,

230 mm th.wall for 1400 mm depth meas.from top of frame &

cover of M.H.in conical shape and remaining ht. Const.345mm

th.in cyl.shape over a 300 mm th.CC 1:2:4 bed with 300mm

offset from outer finished wall surface,also for bench., 20mm

th.plaster in cm1:1 with w.p.comp.@2% by wt.of cem.on

int.&ext.surfaces,int.surfaces and channel finished smooth

with floating coat of neat cement and ext.surfaces finished

rough with wooden float.

(i) Top internal dia 540mm to suit MD & HD frame & cover. Each 1063.50 21.27

(ii) Top internal dia 600mm to suit EHD frame & cover. Each 1074.00 21.48

2b Extra over item 5(a) for a depth beyond 1500 mm initial depth

& upto a depth of 2300 mm.

RM 534.00 10.68





kg Bags

3a

Const.of circular manhole of 1500 mm int.dia.at bottom and

540/600 mm at top for 2300 mm ini.depth & b.m.in cm 1:2,

230 mm th.wall for 2000 mm depth meas.from top of frame &

cover of M.H.in conical shape and remaining ht. Const.345mm

th.in cyl.shape over a 300 mm th.CC 1:2:4 bed with 300mm

offset from outer finished wall surface,also for bench., 20mm

th.plaster in cm1:1 with w.p.comp.@2% by wt.of cem.on

int.&ext.surfaces,int.surfaces and channel finished smooth

with floating coat of neat cement and ext.surfaces finished

rough with wooden float.

(i) Top internal dia 540mm to suit MD & HD frame & cover. Each 1685.50 33.71

(ii) Top internal dia 600mm to suit EHD frame & cover. Each 1702.00 34.04

3b Extra over item 6(a) for a depth beyond 2300 mm initial depth. RM 635.00 12.70

4

Constn.of b.m.drop pipe cleaning chamber of intl.size 300x300

mm for depth of 300 mm from top of cover & frame above

S.W. drop pipe in b.m., in c.m.1:2 and 230mm thk.wall over

150mm offset from all outer finished wall surfaces of the

chamber, p.& f. suitable MD precast SFRC cover 100 mm

thk.CC 1:2:4 coping at top of b.m., 20mm cem.plastering in

cm1:1, mixed with w.p.comp.@ 2% by wt.of cem.intl.&

extl.surfaces of the chamber, all inside surfaces finishing

smooth with floating coat of neat cement and extl. Surfaces

finishing rough with wooden float.

Each 138.50 2.77

5

P.& f.drop connect.for ini.depth of 600mm including p.&l. followiing dia. S.W. pipe & specials including p.& f.bends, tees, crosses (double tees) plugs, caps etc., including jointing the joints with hemp yarn and C.M. 1:1,including encasing the pipes with CC 1:2:4 such that shape of the cross sect.through encased pipe shall be square of side length equal to o.d.of pipe plus 300mm.

a) 150mm nom. dia. Each 76.00 1.52

b) Extra depth over item 8(a) beyond 0.60 M initial depth RM 69.50 1.39

c) 230mm nom.dia. Each 88.50 1.77




d) extra depth over item 8© beyond 0.60 M initial depth RM 91.50 1.83

e) 300mm nom.dia. Each 95.00 1.90

f) extra depth over item 8(e) beyond 0.60 M initial depth RM 112.50 2.25

6

P.& f.precast (SFRC) MH frame & covers conf.to IS 12592 of following sizes approved by BMC/CIDCO/E-I-C, tested as per IS 1726 (Part-I)1974 incl.cost of necessary steel reinf.,CC1:2:4 for fixing frame, for bed block ( bearing course ) and capping including necessary form work and cm1:2 for fixing the frame & for plast.expsosed surf.of CC surf.of bed block ( b.c.) & capping fini. Smooth with floating coat of neat cement.

a) SFRC rect.frame for IC of size o/s 1130mm x 680mm, i/s

clear opening 900mmx 450mm and RCC cover for IC of size

1000 mm x 550 mm

i) Medium Duty ( Grade MD-10 ) frame sect.size 110mm wide

x105 mm deep and cover thick. 50mm Each 80.40 1.608

ii)Heavy Duty ( Grade HD-20) frame sect.size 115mm wide

x150 mm deep and cover thick. 95mm Each 72.00 1.44

b) SFRC circular frame& cover

i) Medium Duty ( Grade MD-10) SFRC frame of out. Dia.

840mm, clear intl.dia. 530mm, frame sect.size 155mm wide

x115mm deep, SFRC manhole cover of 630mm dia. And 65

mm thick.

Each 47.80 0.956

ii) Heavy duty ( Grade HD-20)SFRC frame of out.dia. 940mm,

clear intl.dia. 540mm deep, frame sect.size 200 mm wide

x150mm deep, SFRC manhole cover of 630mm dia. And 95

mm thickn.

Each 32.70 0.654

iii) Extra Heavy duty ( Grade EHD-35) SFRC frame of out.dia.

940mm, clear intl.dia. 540mm deep, frame sect.size 200 mm

wide x175 mm deep, SFRC manhole cover of 780mm dia. And

120 mm thick.

Each 30.00 0.60





kg Bags

7

P.&F.air tight C.I. frame & cover of size and number as

specified in schedule, for M.H. & I.C. each weighing ranging

from 100 to 300 Kgs. Including cost of CC 1:2:4 for bed block

(bearing course) and capping, fixing frame including

necessary form work, 1:2 cement mortar for fixing frame and

smooth cement finished plaster over exposed concrete

surfaces of bed block (bearing course ) and capping.

a) C.I. rect. frame & cover for IC of int.size 900 x450mm

i) Medium Duty ( Grade MD-10 ) Each 89.35 1.787

ii)Heavy Duty ( Grade HD-20) Each 87.10 1.742

b) SFRC circular frame& cover of in t. 560mm dia.

i) Medium Duty ( Grade MD-10 ) Each 48.75 0.975

ii)Heavy Duty ( Grade HD-20) Each 44.85 0.897

8

P & F approved quality S.W. sewer trap of following sizes

including placing the trap in position inside the manhole,

embedding in C.C. 1:2:4, finishing the joints and rectifiying the

leakages.

a) 100mm dia Each 6.50 0.13

b) 150mm dia Each 11.00 0.22

c) 200mm dia Each 16.50 0.33

d) 230mm dia Each 19.50 0.39

e) 250mm dia Each 24.00 0.48

f) 300mm dia Each 31.00 0.62





kg Bags

9

Making connections with the existing chamber or manhole

including breaking the brick masonry wall re-doing the same to

the original condition after the connection by adding approved

w.p.comp. to the mortar.

a) 100mm dia Each 3.70 0.074

b) 150mm dia Each 5.30 0.106

c) 200mm dia Each 7.00 0.14

d) 230mm dia Each 8.00 0.16

e) 250mm dia Each 11.50 0.23

f) 300mm dia Each 14.50 0.29

g) 350mm dia Each 17.50 0.35

h) 400mm dia Each 20.50 0.41

i) 450mm dia Each 23.50 0.47

NOTE FOR S.W. PIPES: -

1. To arrive the cement consumption of different proportion of

cement mortar, consider 2/3 rd consumption for cm1:2 & 1/2

consumption for cm1:3 of the given consumption of cm 1:1

10

P & L following dia.best quality s.g.S.W.pipe conf. IS 651-1980

with ISI mark and approved make, lowering and laying the pipe

line in trenches for all depth including aligning & jointing with

hemp yarn and finishing with cm 1:1 mixed with w.p. comp,

curing, testing the line.

a) 100mm dia. ----------- 0.6m length RM 2.00 0.040

b) 150mm dia. ----------- 0.6m length RM 3.00 0.060

c) 200mm dia. ----------- 0.6m length RM 4.35 0.087

d) 230mm dia. ----------- 0.6m length RM 4.85 0.097

e) 250mm dia. ----------- 0.6m length RM 5.50 0.110





kg Bags

f) 300mm dia. ----------- 0.6m length RM 6.50 0.130

g) 350mm dia. ----------- 0.6m length RM 7.80 0.156

h) 400mm dia. ----------- 0.6m length RM 9.15 0.183

i) 450mm dia. ----------- 0.6m length RM 9.75 0.195

j) 500mm dia. ----------- 0.6m length RM 13.50 0.270

k) 600mm dia. ----------- 0.6m length RM 16.80 0.336

NOTE FOR RCC / CC SPUN PIPES: -

1. To arrive the cement consumption of different proportion of

cement mortar, consider 2/3 rd consumption for cm1:2 & 1/2

consumption for cm1:3 of the given consumption of cm 1:1

2. Pipes of 300mm dia.and above 3.0m,3.5m4.0m in length

may also be available except "NP1" class pipes.

3. The cement consumption for "P1" class pipe (which is

available in the range of 80mm to 1200mm dia.) can be taken

similar to "NP2" class pipe

11

Supplying, lowering, laying, CC class "NP1" spun pipes of

following class conforming to IS-458 with necessary collars or

spigot socket, laid to correct grade and levels at all depth,

including cutting to lengths, jointing with rubber ring or with

hemp yarn and cement mortar 1:1, caulking the joints, and

finishing, curing, testing etc. complete as per specifications.

a) 80mm dia. ---------- 1.0m length RM 0.62 0.012

b) 100mm dia. ---------- 1.0m length RM 0.71 0.014

c) 150mm dia. ---------- 1.0m length RM 0.86 0.017

d) 200mm dia. ---------- 1.0m length RM 1.06 0.021

e) 225mm dia. ---------- 1.0m length RM 1.17 0.023

f) 250mm dia. ---------- 1.0m length RM 1.26 0.025





kg Bags

g) 300mm dia. ---------- 1.0m length RM 1.96 0.039

h) 350mm dia. ---------- 1.0m length RM 2.65 0.053

i) 400mm dia. ---------- 1.0m length RM 3.34 0.067

j) 450mm dia. ---------- 1.0m length RM 4.03 0.081

12

Supplying, lowering, laying, RCC spun pipes of following class

conforming to IS-458 with necessary collars or spigot socket,

laid to correct grade and levels at all depth, including cutting to

lengths, jointing with rubber ring or with hemp yarn and cement

mortar 1:1, caulking the joints, and finishing, curing, testing etc.

complete as per specifications.

A class - NP2 RCC

a) 80mm dia. ----------- 2.0m length RM 0.55 0.011

b) 100mm dia. ----------- 2.0m length RM 0.75 0.015

c) 150mm dia. ----------- 2.0m length RM 0.90 0.018

d) 200mm dia. ----------- 2.0m length RM 1.15 0.023

e) 225mm dia. ----------- 2.0m length RM 1.18 0.024

f) 250mm dia. ----------- 2.0m length RM 1.35 0.027

g) 300mm dia. ----------- 2.5m length RM 1.50 0.030

h) 350mm dia. ----------- 2.5m length RM 2.20 0.044

i) 400mm dia. ----------- 2.5m length RM 2.80 0.056

j) 450mm dia. ----------- 2.5m length RM 3.60 0.072

k) 500mm dia. ----------- 2.5m length RM 3.90 0.078

l) 600mm dia. ----------- 2.5m length RM 4.80 0.096





kg Bags

m) 700 mm dia.------------- 2.5m length RM 5.55 0.111

n) 800 mm dia.-------------- 2.5m length RM 6.30 0.126

o) 900 mm dia.-------------- 2.5m length RM 7.35 0.147

p) 1000 mm dia.------------ 2.5m length RM 8.25 0.165

q) 1100 mm dia.------------ 2.5m length RM 9.15 0.183

r) 1200 mm dia.------------ 2.5m length RM 10.20 0.204

s) 1400 mm dia.------------ 2.5m length RM 11.30 0.226

t) 1600 mm dia.------------ 2.5m length RM 12.80 0.256

u) 1800 mm dia.------------ 2.5m length RM 14.40 0.288

v) 2000 mm dia.------------- 2.5m length RM 16.00 0.320

w) 2200 mm dia.------------- 2.5m length RM 17.60 0.352

B class-NP3 RCC

a) 80 mm dia. ----------------- 2.0 m Length RM 0.55 0.011

b) 100 mm dia.--------------- 2.0 m Length RM 0.70 0.014

c) 150 mm dia.-------------- 2.0 m Length RM 0.85 0.017

d) 200 mm dia.-------------- 2.0 m Length RM 1.15 0.023

e) 225 mm dia.------------- 2.0 m Length RM 1.20 0.024

f) 250 mm dia.-------------- 2.0 m Length RM 1.74 0.0347

g) 300 mm dia.------------------ 2.5 m length RM 1.74 0.0348

h) 350 mm dia.-------------- 2.5 m length RM 2.85 0.057

i) 400 mm dia.--------------- 2.5 m length RM 3.80 0.076





kg Bags

j) 450 mm dia.---------------- 2.5 m length RM 4.15 0.083

k) 500 mm dia.--------------- 2.5 m length RM 4.45 0.089

l) 600 mm dia.--------------- 2.5 m length RM 5.26 0.105

m) 700 mm dia.------------- 2.5 m length RM 5.95 0.119

n) 800 mm dia.-------------- 2.5 m length RM 6.75 0.135

o) 900 mm dia.-------------- 2.5 m length RM 7.45 0.149

p) 1000 mm dia.------------ 2.5 m length RM 8.65 0.173

q) 1100 mm dia.------------ 2.5 m length RM 9.35 0.187

r) 1200 mm dia.------------ 2.5 m length RM 10.10 0.202

s) 1400 mm dia.------------ 2.5 m length RM 11.70 0.234

t) 1600 mm dia.------------ 2.5 m length RM 13.20 0.264

u) 1800 mm dia.------------ 2.5 m length RM 14.70 0.294

v) 2000 mm dia.------------- 2.5 m length RM 16.35 0.327

w) 2200 mm dia.------------- 2.5 m length RM 17.95 0.359

x) 2400 mm dia.------------- 2.5 m length RM 19.55 0.391

y) 2600 mm dia.------------- 2.5 m length RM 21.15 0.423

C class-P2 RCC


b) 100 mm dia. ----------------- 2.0 m Length RM 0.75 0.0150

c) 150 mm dia. ----------------- 2.0 m Length RM 0.90 0.0180

d) 200 mm dia. ----------------- 2.0 m Length RM 1.15 0.0230

e) 225 mm dia. ----------------- 2.0 m Length RM 1.20 0.0240





kg Bags

f) 250 mm dia. ----------------- 2.0 m Length RM 1.74 0.0347

g) 300 mm dia.------------------ 2.5 m length RM 1.74 0.0348

h) 350 mm dia.- .------------------ 2.5 m length RM 2.44 0.0488

i) 400 mm dia. .------------------ 2.5 m length RM 3.15 0.0630

j) 450 mm dia. .------------------ 2.5 m length RM 3.85 0.0770

k) 500 mm dia. .------------------ 2.5 m length RM 4.37 0.0873

l) 600 mm dia.------------------ 2.5 m length RM 5.39 0.1077

m) 700 mm dia.------------------ 2.5 m length RM 5.95 0.1190

n) 800 mm dia.------------------ 2.5 m length RM 6.78 0.1355

o) 900 mm dia.------------------ 2.5 m length RM 7.63 0.1526

p) 1000 mm dia.------------------ 2.5 m length RM 8.45 0.1689

D class-P3 RCC


b) 100 mm dia.--------------- 2.0 m Length RM 0.75 0.0150

c) 150 mm dia.-------------- 2.0 m Length RM 0.90 0.0180

d) 200 mm dia.-------------- 2.0 m Length RM 1.21 0.0242

e) 225 mm dia.------------- 2.0 m Length RM 1.32 0.0263

f) 250 mm dia.-------------- 2.0 m Length RM 1.43 0.0286

g) 300 mm dia.------------------ 2.0 m Length RM 1.83 0.0365

h) 350 mm dia.-------------- 2.0 m Length RM 2.50 0.0500

i) 400 mm dia.--------------- 2.0 m Length RM 3.18 0.0636

j) 450 mm dia.---------------- 2.0 m Length RM 4.20 0.0840





kg Bags

k) 500 mm dia.--------------- 2.0 m Length RM 4.65 0.0930

l) 600 mm dia.--------------- 2.0 m Length RM 5.55 0.1110

m) 700 mm dia.------------- 2.0 m Length RM 6.45 0.1289

n) 800 mm dia.-------------- 2.0 m Length RM 7.35 0.1469

Part-IV – STORM WATER DRAINS & CHAMBERS

1a.

Construction of storm water chambers of internal sizes 600 mm

x 600mm x x 600mm initial depth, 450 thk. Wall in R.R.masonry

in CM 1:6, 150mm thick bedding in CC1:4:8,50mm thk

benching, 80mm high haunching in CC1:2:4, also for100mm

thick capping & bearing course plastering in cm 1:4,20mm thick

on sides of drain, 12mmthick ontop & base in cm1:4,finished

smooth with neat cement ,supplying & placing medium duty

(MD) RCC precast perforated cover 750mm x 600mm x75mm

.etc complete and as directed by engineer in charge.

Each 269.00 5.38

b Extra over item (a) over 0.6 m initial depth. RM 181 3.62

2a.

Constn.of storm water chambers of internal sizes 600mm

x1050mm x 900mm initial depth, 450 thk. Wall up to 700mm

depth from top of chamber & remaining hight 600mm thk.in

R.R.masonry in CM 1:6, 150mm thick bedding in

CC1:4:8,50mm thk. Benching, 80mm high haunching,100mm

thick capping & bearing course in CC1:2:4, plastering in cm

1:4,20mm thick on sides of drain, 12mmthick on top & base in

cm1:4,finished smooth with neat cement ,supplying and placing

medium duty (MD) RCC precast perforated cover 750mm x

600mm x75mm .etc complete and as directed by engineer in

charge.

Each 432.65 8.65

b. Extra over item (a) over 0.9 m initial depth. RM 316.80 6.34




SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA

1. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM 1.1 FIRE PUMPS & MOTOR 1.1.1 Electrical Driven Main Fire & Sprinkler Pumps

Make / Manufacturer : Quantity : Liquid Handed : Liquid Temp deg.C : Special Gravity of Liquid : Suction : Rated Discharge at Low Zone Head : Rated Discharge at High Zone Head : Actual Discharge at Low Zone Head : Actual Discharge at High Zone Head : Model : Horizontal / Design : Speed / No. of Stages : Impeller Dia (Maximum) : Suction / Delivery Size : Efficiency at Rated Capacity & Head : KW required at rated capacity & head : Shut Off Head : Material of Construction




Pump Casing : Impeller : Pump Shaft : Shaft Sleeve : Casing Wearing Ring : Base Plate : Mechanical Seal : Make of Mechanical Seal : Wheather pumps is capable of discharging 150%

of rated capacity at a head not less than 65% of rated head.

:

Whether automatic priming arrangement

included :

Description of Motors Make : Model No. : Type : Frame size : Speed (RPM) : Rated Capacity (Power) : Full load current : Enclosure : Coupling / Pulley : Class of Insulation Size of Foundation




For complete coupled set mounted over MS base frame

:

1.1.2 Diesel Engine Driven Pump Make / Manufacturer : Quantity : Liquid Handed : Liquid Temp deg.C : Special Gravity of Liquid : Suction : Rated Discharge at Low Zone Head : Rated Discharge at High Zone Head : Actual Discharge at Low Zone Head : Actual Discharge at High Zone Head : Model : Horizontal / Design : Speed / No. of Stages : Impeller Dia (Maximum) : Suction / Delivery Size : Efficiency at Rated Capacity & Head : KW required at rated capacity & head : Shut Off Head : Material of Construction Pump Casing : Impeller : Pump Shaft :




Shaft Sleeve : Casing Wearing Ring : Base Plate : Mechanical Seal : Make of Mechanical Seal : Wheather pumps is capable of discharging 150%

of rated capacity at a head not less than 65% of rated head.

:

Whether automatic priming arrangement

included :

Description of Engine Make : Model No. : Type : Frame size : Speed (RPM) : Rated Capacity (Power) : Full load current : Enclosure : Coupling / Pulley : No of Cylinder : Fuel Pump & Water pump detail : Engine Cooling & Oil System : Diesel Oil tank capacity : Fuel Oil storage shall ensure working of pump :




for number of hours Size of Foundation For complete coupled set mounted over MS

base frame :

1.1.3 Jockey Pump

(Please submit separate data sheet for each type of pump)

Liquid Handed : Liquid Temp deg.C : Special Gravity of Liquid : Suction : Rated Discharge at Low Zone Head : Rated Discharge at High Zone Head : Actual Discharge at Low Zone Head : Actual Discharge at High Zone Head : Model : Horizontal / Design : Speed / No. of Stages : Impeller Dia (Maximum) : Suction / Delivery Size : Efficiency at Rated Capacity & Head : KW required at rated capacity & head : Shut Off Head : Material of Construction Pump Casing : Impeller :




Pump Shaft : Shaft Sleeve : Casing Wearing Ring : Base Plate : Mechanical Seal : Make of Mechanical Seal : Description of Motor Make : Model No. : Type : Frame size : Speed (RPM) : Rated Capacity (Power) : Full load current : Enclosure : Coupling / Pulley : Size of Foundation For complete coupled set mounted over MS

base frame :

1.2. PIPING 15 NB TO 50 NB : 15 TO 50 NB Fittings : 65 NB TO 150 NB Pipes 65 NB TO 150 NB Fittings 200 NB ONWARDS Pipes




200 NB ONWARDS Fittings Flanges Gaskets 1.3. HYDRANT VALVES 1.3.1 Technical Specifications : Item : Working Pressure : Code for Design Mft. : 1.3.2 Construction Features Type of Stem Type of Inlet Type of Outlet Flange Drilling 1.3.3 Material of Construction Body and Bonnet : Stop Valve, Valve Seat : Check nut & gland nut : 1.4. PRESSURE GAUGE

1.4.1 Technical Specifications : Working Pressure : Code for Design Mft. : : Scale range 1.4.2 Construction Features Case :




Pointer : Dial Size : Dial Lettering : Process Connection : 1.4.3 Material of Construction Case : Movement : Block : 1.5. PRESSURE SWITCHES

1.5.1 Technical Specifications : Item : Working Pressure : Scale range : 1.5.2 Construction Features Protection : Cable Entry : Process Connection : Repeatability : Switch Type : No. of contacts : Contact Rating : 1.5.3 Material of Construction Enclosure :




Pressure element : Wetted Parts : 2. ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES 2.1 Make of the following : a. Motor Control Centre (Electrical Panel) b. Vacuum circuit breaker c. Air circuit breaker d. MCCB e. MCB f. Rotary switch g. Soft Starter h. Auto-transformer Starter j. Automatic Star Delta Starter k. Direct on line Starter l. Contactor m. Current Transformer (cast resin type) n. Single phase preventor

o. Push Button

p. Change over switch

q. Ammeter & Voltmeter KWH meter r. Relay s. Indication lamp t. Cables




u. Wires v. Variable Frequancy Drive.




2.2. ELECTRICAL TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS

For MCC +PDBs+MLDBs/SLDBs/DBs ( To be filled by the bidders) S.No. Description Recommended Specification

Confirmation by the Bidders

1 Type of Panel a. MCC non drawout type compartmentalized.

b. Panels non drawout type, non compartmentalized

2 Type of Mounting Free standing Floor Mounted 3 Fault kA 50kA -1 Sec for MCC 4 a b c d

Thickness of CRCA sheets Structural members Covers and doors Base channel Gland plate

3mm 2mm MCC - ISMC 100 3mm

5a. Painting/ Process Synthetic Enamel Paint As per seven tank process Oven baked.

b Paint shade; a. Inside b. Outside

RAL – 7032 RAL - 7032

6 Details of busbars Electrolytic grade Copper of specified

rating for details see constructional

features mentioned in specifications

7 Cable Entry For MCC & other Panels Top or Bottom depending upon

location of Panel.

8 Enclosure Protection/ Ventilation

For MCC – IP -52 with louvers for Ventilation.

9 Control Wiring/ Power Wiring

Insulated 660Volts Cu wire.

a. Voltage Circuit 1.5 sq mm b. Current Circuit 2.5 sq mm c. Minimum size of Power wiring CKt 16 sq mm 10 Maximum Operating Height 2100 11 Mounting height of Relays/Meters

Control Switches Range 350mm to 1900mm




LIST OF MAIN DOCUMENTS AND SUBMITTALS PLUMBING & FIREFIGHTING WORKS

Sr.no. Items Clause No. Remarks 1. 4-Copies of Proforma Invoice 4- sets of

Technical Literature Packing Specifications

2. Performance Guarantee 3. All Permits / Licenses 4. Technical Data 5. Manufacturer‟s Drawings, Catalogues &

Pamphlets & Other Documents

6. Variation in Quantity Statement. 7. Electrical Installation Certificate. 8. Operating Instructions & Maintenance

Manual

9. Soft water & Power Requirement 10. Appendix - IV 11. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

Note : The above list is only for guide line of the contractor. The contractor shall thoroughly check all

document and submittals required as per the tender document and submit them in time as per the requirement.